i^ortíjtoegtern ÍKníbersíítp Híbrarp Cbanáton, Süínotó THE GIFT OF "âk- SUTvWnJú. 2r... A GERMAN COURSE; ADAPTED TO USE IN COLLEGES, HIGH-SCHOOLS, AND ACADEMIES. BY GEORGE F. COMFORT, A.M., PSOFE&SOJ2 OF MODEEN LANGUAGES AND ..GSTHETICSy SYEAOUSE UNIVEESIYY, NEW TOKK, JV£:i¥ YORK: HARPER & BROTHERS, PUBLISHERS, FRANKLIN SQUARE. I 8 86. Comfoet's G-ermak Series. A GERMAN PRIMER. Introductory to the German Series, lamo, Half Leather, 44 cents. A FIRST BOOK IN GERMAN. To Precede the German Course. lamo. Half Leather, 60 cents. A FIRST GERMAN READER. To Succeed the First Book in German. i2mo, Cloth, 50 cents. A GERMAN COURSE. Adapted for Use in Colleges, Academies, and High- Schools. i2mo, Half Leather, $t 00. A TEACHERIS AUCA'" to the German Course. lamo, Qoth, 50cts. A GERMAN READER. With Notes and Vocabulary. lamo, Half Leath¬ er, $1 00. A MANUAL OF GERMAN CONVERSATION. lamo. Half Leather, 84 cents. HABPER & BROTHERS, PUBLISHERS, NEW YORK. Entered, according to Act of Congress, in the year 1869, by HARPER & BROTHERS, In the Clerlds Office of the District Court of the United States for the Southern District of New York. CONTENTS OF THE GERMAN COURSE. Pape INTRODUCTION iii PART FIRST. PRACTICAL LESSONS. LessoD I. Pronunciation 11 II. Pronunciation (coKíiHweíO 11 III. Present and Imperfect Tenses of the Verb fctlt^ to he 17 IV. Present and Imperfect Tenses of Regular Verbs. The Definite Article. The Accusative Case 19 V. Present and Imperfeet Tenses of !()ÛÎ)Ctt; to have. Accusative Case of Personal Pi'onouns 21 VI. Perfect and Pluperfect Tenses of Regular Verbs 24 VII. Prepositions with the Accusative Case. Gender of Nouns 26 VIII. The Genitive Case 28 IX. The Dative Case 31 X. Prepositions with the Accusative and Dative Cases 34 XI. Personal Pronouns. Forms of Address. Contractions of Prep¬ ositions with the Definite Article 1 30 XII. The Irregular Verb to become. Future Tenses 39 XIII. German Current Hand 42 XIV. Conjugation of Irregular Verbs 4.5 XV. Plural of Nouns and of the Definite Article 48 XVI. The Indefinite Article 51 XVII. Cardinal Numbers 54 XVIII. Adjectives used predicatively and attributiveh'. Old Declen¬ sion of Adjectives 57 XIX. Possessive Pronouns 60 XX. New Declension of Adjectives 03 XXI. Mixed Declension of Adjectives 06 XXII. Comparison of Adjectives 09 XXIII. Ordinal Numbers 73 XXIV. IiTegular Verbs of the First Class 77 XXV. Irregular Verbs of the Second, Tliird, and Fourth Classes 80 XXVI. Irregular Verbs of the Fifth and Sixth Classes 83 XXVII. Irregular Verbs of the Seventh Class. Recapitulation of Irreg¬ ular Verbs 80 iv CONTENTS OP Lcssoq PAge XXVIII. Verbs with fcitt, to he, as Auxiliary 8S XXIX. The Infinitive Mood XXX. Participles 9G XXXI. The Potential Verbs fiiuneu and miiîîcn XXXII. The Potential Verbs tDOttCtt and ntÖßCU 102 XXXIII. The Potential Verbs fottCtl and biirfCH 105 XXXIV. Separable Compound \'erbs 108 XXXV. Inseparable Compound Verbs Ill XXXVI, Compound Nouns ; 115 XXXVII. Derivative Nouns 120 XXXVIII. Derivative and Compound Adjectives 128 XXXIX. Cases governed by Adjectives 135 XL. Use of the Article 139 XLI. Personal and Possessive Pronouns 141 XLII. Indefinite and InteiTogative Pronouns 147 XLIIl. Demonstrative and Relative Pronouns 147 XLIV. Keflexis e Verbs 150 XLV. Agreement of Verbs with Nominative. Verbs governing the Accusative Case. Apposition 154 XLVI. Verbs governing the Genitive Case 158 XLVII. Verbs governing the Dative Case 161 XLVIII. The Passive Voice 163 XLIX. Construction of Prepositions 166 L. Adverbs. Conjunctions. Order of Words 168 LI. Imperative, Subjunctive, and Conditional Moods 170 PART SECOND. I. Conversatioiis. No. • Page 1. Salutation, a visit 175 2. At Breakfirst in a Hotel 176 3. Dinner 177 4. In a Confectionery Shop 178 5. The Hotel 178 C. The Railroad 179 7. The Steamer 180 8. The Custom-house 182 No. PAge 9. The Post-office 182 10. At a Banker's 183 11. Ina Bookstore 183 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. At a Tailor's 184 In a Dry Goods Store 185 At a Shoemaker's 186 With a physician 187 At a Watchmaker's 188 IL German and English Idioms. 1. Idioms with l^ûÎICIt and to have 189 2. Idioms with fdll and to be 190 3. Idioms with mcrbCIt and to become 191 4. The Potential Mood and Puture Indicative of the English Verb.... 192 THE GERMAN COURSE. V No. Pttga 5. Idioms with the verb to leave, to let 193 G. Idioms with the Vei'b to get 193 7. Idioms with Prepositions 194-197 III. Examples of Synonyms. 1. Sicfer, gelb, Sanb 198 2. SlrferSmann, Sanbtcirtb/ 93auer 198 3. 2tuijie{;en, eïftei)en, auferfte^ien 198 4. Stirsfiibren, boÉhrincjen, boUtiiítren, bchjieí)en, boííftrerfen 199 5. ÎOÎeer, 0ee 199 6. SiafetceiS, neugierig, bortni^ig 200 7. iDiogen, iboUen 200 IV. Letters and Forms of Business. 1. ©in ïïîeffe raeíbet jeinent Oníeí ben Sobeê^att feiner 0(í;tbefter 201 2. ©Íücítbunfí^ jum ©eburtêtag eine« S5ater6 201 3. ©eremonieííe gorm ber ©inlabnng 202 4. 5lnttbort auf biefeíbe 202 5. SSertrauíic^e gorm ber ©iníabung 202 6. Sínttbort auf biefeíbe 202 7. §Dfli(í^e ber ©iuíabung 203 8. Slntiüort auf biefeíbe 203 9. 2Becf>feíbrief 203 10. Slntneifung 203 11. Ouittung 203 V. Heading Lessons. S)ie bentfd;e 204 ®er 0traßenjnngc 205 2)e8 S)eutfd;en ¿^ateríanb 205 Ser junge 2Jiufitcr 206 Ser 5ßcttier nnb ber .taifer griebrid; 207 ©in Slbenteuer 207 Sie ^nnnen 208 ©intritt in bie bcntfd;e ©d^tbeij 209 3of)ann aüoífgang bon @oti;e 209 Ses Königs @rab 211 Slufruf bes ^önig« bon ^renjfeu 211 Surjtbeilige gragen 212 SJÎeereêftiile 21S Ser ©irfni^cr ©ce 213 Ser borfid)tige Sränmcr 214 Sßaö ber SÓíonb erjä(;it 214 vi CONTENTS OP PAKT THIRD. COMPEND OF GERMAN GRAMMAR. I. Introduction. No. 1. History of the German Language 217 2. Characteristics of the Gennan Language 228 3. Extent of Use of the German Language 230 4. German Dialects 231 5. Comparison of Words in the Indo-European Languages 231 6. Comparison of Words in the Teutonic Languages 23G 7. Illustration of the Historical Development of Words in the German Language 238 II. German Grammar. I. Oethogeaphv 210 1. Vowels and Diphthongs 241 2. Consonants 213 3. Division of Syllables 245 4. Accent 24G 5. Capital Letters 247 6. Comparison of German and English Words 248 IL Etymology and Syntax 252 1. The Article 253 Syntax of the Article 254 2. The Noun 255 1. Accidents of the Noun 257 2. Gender of the Noun 258 3. Declension of the Noun 261 4. Syntax of the Noun 266 3. The Adjective 269 1. Declension of the Adjective 270 2. Comparison of the Adjective 272 3. Syntax of the Adjective 275 4. Numerals 276 1. Cardinal Numbers 277 2. Ordinal Numbers 278 3. Numeral Nouns 280 4. Numeral Adverbs 281 5. The Pronoun 281 1. Personal Pronouns 282 2. Possessive Pronouns 283 3. Demonstrative Pronouns 284 4. Indefinite Pronouns 286 THE GERMAN COURSE. VÜ No. P»«' 5. Interrogative Pronouns G. Relative Pronouns 290 7. Syntax of the Pronoun 291 6. The Verb 292 1. Conjugation 293 1. Moods 293 J. The Indicative Mood 293 2. The Subjunctive Mood 294 3. The Conditional Mood 294- 4. The Imperative Mood 295 5. The Infinitive Mood 295 2. Participles 296 1. The Present Participle 297 2. The Perfect Participle 297 3. Tenses 298 4. The Passive Voice 299 2. Auxiliary Verbs 300 1. Conjugation of to Aaiie 301 2. Conjugation of fCtn, fo be 303 3. Conjugation of tttClbCtt/to ¿ecowze 305 3. Regular Verbs 307 Conjugation of the Regular Verb ItCbCR/ to love 307 t. Irregular Verbs 310 1. Classified List of Irregular Verbs 311 2. Alphabetical List of Irregular Verbs 314 3. Conjugation of the Irregular Verb to strfie 322 4. Conjugation of the Irregular Verb fonttttCtt/ to come 324 5. Compound Verbs 326 1. Separable Compound Verbs 326 Conjugation of the Separable Compound Verb anOCÍjntClt^ to accept 328 2. Inseparable Compound Verbs 329 Conjugation of the Inseparable Compound Verb bCCftCÍíCn^ to understand, 332 3. Doubly-compounded Verbs 334 6. Reflexive Verbs (Conjugation of) 335 7. Impersonal Verbs 337 8. The Passive Voice 338 9. The Potential Verbs 340 1. The Verb foUCU 340 2. The Verb tUOUCtt 343 3. The Verb fÖnnCO 345 4. The Verb mögen 347 5. The Verb biirfCU 349 6. The Verb milfien 3.52 viii CONTENTS OF THE GERMAN COURSE. No. Pa«* 10. The S3mtax of the Verb 354 1. Verbs governing the Accusathe Case 354 2. Verbs governing the Genitive Case 350 3. Verbs governing the Dative Case 358 7. The Adverb 360 1. Classification of Adverbs 360 2. Comparison of Adverbs 368 3. Syntax of Adverbs £69 8. Prepositions 372 1. Construction of Frepositions 373 2. Prepositions governing the Genitive Case 375 3. Prepositions governing the Dative Case 380 4. Prepositions governing the Accusative Case 385 5. Prepositions governing the Dative and Accrrsative Cases 388 6. Remarks upon Prepositions 392 9. Conjunctions 394 1. List of Conjunctions.. 395 2. Co-ordinative Conjunctions 396 3. Subordinative Conjunctions 397 4. Remarks upon Conjunctions 393 10. The Interjection 404 11. Arrangement of Words 405 PART FOURTH. VOCABULAEIES. I. Personal Proper Names 415 II. Geographical Proper Names » 417 III, Abbreviations 420 IV. German Moneys, Weights, and Measures 422 V. Classified List of Words. 423 VI. Ger-man-English Vocabulary 436 VII. English-German Vocabulary 477 VIU. General Index 495 A GERMAN COURSE. A INTKODUCïION TO THE GERMAN COURSE. In preparing this German Course, it has been the aim of the author to incorporate the most advanced views and principles of linguistic instruction, as held by the best uni- ters upon philology, and the best practical educators in Europe and America. Especial preference has been given to those features of approved worlds for the study of mod¬ ern languages which, in Europe more especially, have stood the test of practical use. A few other features have also been introduced, which have been adopted with eminent success by tlie most able professors of modern language in their personal instruction, but which have not heretofore found their way into text-books. Care has been taken to give due relative prominence to each of these tried and approved principles, and to mould them into a homogeneous system adapted to the wants of classes in the Colleges, Academies, and other high-schools of learning in America. Farther than this, but little claim is laid to originality, and none is laid to novelty of method. The German Course consists oi four parts : Part First; containing practical lessons for learning to read, write, and speak the German Language. Part Second; containing familiar convereations in Ger¬ man and English, models of letters, and forms of business, and selections from German literature. Part Third ; containing a compend of German Grammar, 4 lntkodcction. with an introduction upon the histoiy, characteristics, and dialects of the language. Part Fourth; containing tables of German moneys, weights, and measures, abbreviations, personal and geo¬ graphical proper names, and German-English and English- German Yocabularies. In Pakt First, the Lessons are arranged with reference to the rapid and natural learning of the German Language, both for the pm-pose of understanding and of using the lan¬ guage. A person thrown suddenly into a foreign country, the language of which he wishes to learn, finds himself embar¬ rassed at the outset by five chief wants. He needs equally and immediately a vocabulary of words^ a knowledge of grammatical forms ^ of syntactical laws^ and of idiomatic construction^ and of the laws of joronunciation. It is the aim, in the Lessons, to meet these wants, in such consecutiveness of order as to make the knowledge of the language a natural and symmetrical growth. The points of contact and resemblance of the German with the English language are presented first, more recon¬ dite, complicated, and divergent principles being reserved till later in the lessons. As far as possible, every word and grammatical princi¬ ple is presented in a living, natural sentence, before it is defined or explained. The concrete thus precedes the ab¬ stract. The practice precedes the theory. The principles of the language are presented to the mind of the learner as the result of his deductions from the examples, ^vhich are given before the rules. Many expert students will indeed detect the meaning of the new words and the new gram¬ matical laws without referring to the vocabulary or to the grammatical part of the lesson. The habits of scrutiny, of investigation, of independent analysis and classification, which are so strongly developed in translating works of the classic authors, and which are justly esteemed to be among INTKODÜCTION. the most important results of linguistic study, are by this means called into exercise at the very outset in the study of the language. Experience shows, also, that this method, while of great value to the earnest student, at the same time a wakens interest and even enthusiasm in the compar¬ atively listless scholar. The Lessons are usually composed oi five parts. In the first part a few sentences o.re given, with English transla¬ tion, and containing the new grammatical principles of the lesson ingrafted upon words already known. The atten¬ tion is thus drawn at first solelj^ to the new principle. Secondly, the same principles are apphed to sentences, without translation, and containing new words. From similarity to corresponding English words, or from the connection of the sentence, the meaning of these new words will often he surmised. the Yocabulary contains the new words used in the lesson. These are not arranged alphabetically, but tliey are grouped according to their logical or grammatical similarity or contrast in meaning and use. Fourthly is given an explanation, with appropriate illus¬ tration, of the new grammatical principles involved in the preceding exercises. Advantage is taken, both in the para¬ digms in the lessons and in the formal grammar of Part Second, of heavier type and of spaced letters, to attract the eye to the variable part of the infiected word. Fifthly, the lesson closes with an exercise of English sentences containing the new words and principles, to be translated into German. The exercises in pronunciation contain short and simple sentences with many proper names. They contain no words the meaning of which is not readily discerned, nor do thcv involve more difficulties of pronunciation than occur in ordinary discourse. In the exercises of the subsequent lessons two things arc avoided: on the one hand, platitudes aud unmeaning or introduction. Tiniiatnral sentences; on tlie otiier liand, proverbs and sen tences of recondite meaning. As far as possible, tlie sen¬ tences arc sncli as would be used in ordinary conversation. Facts in German history, geography, biography, literature, and daily life are frequently introduced, thus assisting the student to feel that he is learning the German language. That the student may not unconsciously acquire the habit of translating every thing from English into German liter¬ ally, a few simple idiomatic expressions are introduced early into the lessons. But, in order not to bewilder the student, idioms are not given extensively until after the development of the laws of etymology and syntax. As it is desirable to introduce the difficulties to the lan¬ guage gradually, the use of the German Current Hand is re¬ served until the eye of the student shall have become famil¬ iar with the printed German type. The formation of deriv¬ ative and compound verbs, nouns, and adjectives is illustra' ted with much fullness. In the latter part of the Lessons, after the student has gathered gradually and progressively a partial knowledge of the grammatical principles of the language and has applied these principles to groups of words, he is referred to appropriate portions of the Com- pend of German Grammar in Part Third for the further elucidation of grammatical principles, and to the vocabula¬ ries in Part Fourth for new words that may occur in the Exercises. In order to familiarize the eye with diiferent kinds of type, various sizes and styles of letters are intro¬ duced in the exercises of the last few lessons. That the student may also be finally thrown entirely upon his own resources, the English exercises, to be translated into Ger¬ man, are omitted from several of the last lessons. Part Second can be used by travelers and others, to whom a facility in conversing and in using forms of busi¬ ness is an immediate necessity. The references to the les¬ sons and the Grammar will assist in understanding the construction of the sentences. The conversations will also introduction. 7 serve to initiate tlie student, who has passed through the lessons of Part First, more fully into the idiomatic spirit of the German language. The reading lessons will suffice to preparo the way for the German Header. Part Third contains a Compend of German Grammar, which is sufficiently comprehensive to meet all ordinary wants, even in reading classic authors. The Grammar is preceded by an Introduction, which will serve to show the ])osition the German language occupies among its cognate languages, the chief epochs of its history, its most promi¬ nent characteristics, and, above all, to show that the Ger¬ man, like all other living languages, has been, and is yet subject to growth, development, and change. In the body of the Grammar itself are also introduced frequent notes upon the history and develoj^m.ent of grammatical forms. To the earnest student, this philosophical and historical method of studying the German language will serve as a stepping-stone to higher studies in the broader fields of philology. Part Fourth contains, in addition to the usual vocabu¬ laries and index, a list of the most important abbreviations, and tables of the moneys, weights, and measures of the lead¬ ing states of Germany. In conclusion, the author commits the German Course to the American public, with the hope that it may contrib¬ ute something to the promotion of the study of this noble language, with its rich treasures in every branch of litera¬ ture, science, history, and criticism, and to the introduction of a more practical, and, at the same time, of a more truly philosophic method of studying the living languages into our Colleges and other schools of learning. îport iTirsl; CONTAINING PRACTICAL LESSONS FOR LEARNING TO READ, "WRITE, AND SPEAK THE GERMAN LANGUAGE. A 2 LESSON 1. PRONUNCIATION. Exercise 1. German Roman Enr/Ush Eu'jlish Letters. Letters. Pronunciation. Translatioii. Karl, Karl, Charles. Sinter, Yater, Fah'-ter, Father. Paar, Pakr, Pair. i^ctcr, Peter, Pay'-ter, Peter. èc^cit, Gehen, Gay'-en. Go. Scffcr, Besser, Bes'-ser. Better. eiifa, Elisa, Ätj-lee -zah. Elisa. Scritn, Berlin, B er-leen', Berlin, 3ÍÍ, Ist, 1st, Is. 0tniJ, Sind, Zint, Are. 5}tonc, Marie, Mah-ree', Maiy. Gotlia, Go'-tah, Gotha. ^oicn, Polen, Po'-len, Poland. èo^n, Sohn, Zone, Son. ^Jîorgctt, Morgen, Mor'-gen. Morning. Sîuknê, Rubens, Poo'-ljens, Rubens. S3rnbcr, Bruder, B roo'-der, Brother. 9Jîuticr, Mutter, Moot'-ter. Mother. 25ramt, Braun, Brown, Brown. 9îkin, Rhein, Rhine, Rhine. 9Jhi, Mai, My, May. (vurok/ Europa, Oy-ro'-pah, Europe. SSícii, Wien, Veen, Vienna. Soknn, Johann, Yo-liann', John. 3níi, Juli, Yoo'-lee, July. iíCÍtiOH, Lektion, Lelc-tsee-on!, Lesson. Kato, Cato, Call'-to, Cato. Sitcro, Cicero, Tsee'-tsay-ro. Cicero. Ouoíicnt, Quotient, Quo-tsee-ent', Quotient 12 PEOlSirNCIATION. Grammatical. 1. The German Alphabet has twenty-six lettere: German Roman Names of German Roman Names of Letters. Letters. Letters. Letters. Letters. Letters. ^,a, A, a, Ah. m, n, A, n, Enn. S,b, B, b, Bay. 0, O, 0, Oh. c. C, c, Tsay. P, P, Pay. b. D, d, Day. £X, (|r Q, (h Koo. C, E, e. Ay. Sî,r, R, r, Err. f. r, f, W- e. î, («), S, s, Ess. (^;9; Gay. T, t, Tay. II, h, Hah. U, u, U, u, Go. % h I, i, Ee. 25,1), V,v, Fow. ^,h J, h ^ Y ote. S, lb, W, w, Vay. ^t, Î, K, k, Kah. p. X, X, Iks. L, 1,- Ell. f). l); Y, y, Ip -see-Ion m, AI, m, Emm. Bt h Z, z, Tset. Rem. The short form § is used at the end of syllables: ham, S3rcê'=ÎaM, ^ccl'=bcn. 2. The Vowels a, t, i, 0, U are pronounced thus : 1. Si, a, like a m father : SSa^?ier,Œû'?io,Âar{,®o'ii|>a. 2. C, " a îiiate: (3t'^í)ín, 3. i, " eemeet : èdhifa, ^etilittT 4. " o " mote: ©o'^tba, ^o'-den, Sefithond 5. U, U, " 00 " moot : Oîudknê, WAvAsx, ^Sru'^bcr, 3. The Diphthongs au, ci, CU are pronounced thus: 1. %Vi,i[Vif\\keou\nmound: 53raun, Síu^ígujl, ^au^. 2. ct " i " might: 5î()eiih ^tehíCtímarf. (.(Si),Cl)), " " " " / SlîepdcrdKÎm, Spe^^'^er. (Wi, ai), " " " " .* 5)îai, SJîainv ^.ik>-ern. 8. Su, eu, " oi " moist: ©Uíro'ípa,9îca cnc^'ilanb. Rem. The form Ct) is used only in a few proper names ; the form ai is used in but a few words. PEON UNCI ATK N. 13 4. The Vowel is lang: 1.AVheii doubled in the same syllable: ^aar, 0pree. 2. With silent Í) " " " " : 0oi)n, 9îot(y 3. When it closes a syllable (especially when it is ac¬ cented): SSa^iter, (Sdibfa, ta, fo. Bern. 1. followed by silent C,is long : SöiCtl (veen), SKit^tiC'-. Rem. 2. Dipbtliongs are always long: lilu'igufi, ^Bai'^Cnt, Glt^ro'spa. Rem. 3. Great care is necessary not to gi\ e a short sound to long vowels. 5. The Vowel is short when followed by: 1. Double consonants: Slíut'ííer, kpífer, 2. Tw^o consonants (as a rule) : íefíthonb 3. A single consonant (in a few monosyllables) ; as : in, mit, ta0, e^3, man, ma^, bin, ^at, etc. Rem. In most unaccented syllables, the C is almost suppressed: ^C'»iev, flCb'^en, ^ü'den, S3a'4er, Söru'^ber, 9)íuí'4cr. 6. The Consonants are pronounced thus: !♦ S3, b, f, Î, If tn, n, 1^, 0, r, t are pronounced like -Z?5 d.,f, A, A, Z, ???, n, q, r, t in English. Exc. 1. 58, at the end of a syllable, like p in deep: SiCÛ, thief. Exc. 2. 2), " " " " t " boat; 5Bß&, bath. Exc. 3. 3Î, not beginning a syllable, is trilled : SBfU'^bCr, 58a'dCt* Exc. 4. in final =ítí)n (not preceded by §), like tö ; SchtííOtt'* 2. before it, 0, or u (or before a conso¬ nant) is pronounced like k in king : (Ia'tc,(Ior^ftca. (Î, before other vowels " ts " mils: (Ii''cero,(ïeh'C^. 3. @, " g " go : @o''ti}a,gc{)'en, " at the end of a syllable (see Less, ii., 2). 4. like g " goke : 3obann'' 3ndi. 5. 0, before a vowel " z " zone: 0PÍ)n, SU'fa. " before or t, and at the beginning of a radical syllable, like sh " ship : 0prcc, 0tcin. " otherwise " 5 " less : Síiu'bcuí, tai?. 6,58 (in native words), " f " ßne ; SSadcv, ^Ç>a'i5el. T.S®, " -y " vine: Söicn, 8. " íc " loaoa: Slîar, 3»-''¡v. 9.3/ Is ^^mits: ^íaínp 3i3ut. 14 PRONUNCIATION (CONTINUED^. ^arl 53raun ijl in ©(í'ífa 5ßraun íft in SD'íaívie' Síít'íter ift ín 23ten, 20íK?l;e{m tt)ar in ^a^íten, Sr ift je^t in granf ífuvt, 20ír wa'íren in 9}íann'4}eím, 9)? ein 35 a';; ter unb mein 33 ru'^ ter ftnt in ^OiVAt, 2í4e?ran'':^ter ï>on ^um^'iboÎti, 355iríí)eím öon ^um'j^boítt, ^e^ííer ^aití 9îu'ibenê, 3a'4ob unt ©íÍ'^^Íííí ®rimm, ^err 2Í. 3). íbeímcinn, gran i>on 30oPí^fen?fteín, 5)íaín5, ^o'íbícns, ^rc'^men^ 3ííme'íviífa, (Suívo'ípa, 3í'íft?en, ^Í'ífriífa, Sn^íbi^en, 34a'4iíen, (SpiVínt?cn, 4por?lanb, Uu'ígarn, ^o'4en, ise 2. Charles Brown is in Berlin Eliza Brown is in Gotha. Mary Ritter is in Vienna. William was in Baden. He is now in Frankfort. We were in Mannheim. My father and my brother are in Halle. Alexander von Humboldt- William von Humboldt. Peter Paul Rubens. Jacob and William Grimm Mr. A. D. Lindemann. Mrs. von Wolfenstein. Mayence,Coblentz,Bremen. America, Europe. Asia, Africa, India. Italy, Spain. Holland, Hungary, Poland. LESSON II. PEONTJNCIATION (CONTINUED). 1, The Um'-lants ii, Ö, Ü, iiu are pronounced thus : 1. 3ÍC, ä; called ah'-umlaut, like C (see Less. I., 2, 2). 2. Dc, Ö, called oli -umlaxot, has no equivalent in English. It is like the French eu. Its pro¬ nunciation may be approximated by producing a sound between that of oo in hoon, and that of %ir in hurn: 33örfe, Exchange, fc^ön, beautiful. 3. Uc, Ü, called oo'-umlaut^ has no equivalent in English. It is like the French u. The pronun¬ ciation of 0üb {south) may be approximated by PRONUNCIATION (CONTINUEDj. 15 placing the lips as if to whistle, and then trying to pronounce the word seed: üDüfífcíífcorf. 4. ?tcu, ûU, has the same sound as CU (Less. I., 3, 3) i. e., that of oi in moist: mice. 2. There are two Guttural Sounds in the German that do not exist in the English language: (and when ending a syllable) after a, 0, U, or ttll, have a rough aspirate sound, formed deeper in the throat and much stronger than that of A in hope: ()OCi) (AnAA) high; {toohh)^ cloth; Xag {tahh).^ day ; machen {ma'-hhen), to make. 2. After other letters (and in the diminutive sylla¬ ble ^cn), they have a softer sound, made higher in the palate, and inclining to that of sh ïwshall: \6^{iM^),I; {reh^H), right ; ^\\\V{kind'- A®^ea), a child ; 9)íün''í£^cn {mün'-h^^^en), Munich. Rem. 1. In words of Greek origin, dj sounds like k ; (S()OV, choir. Rem. 2. Also before § in the same radical syllable, like k : ^ad;§, wax 3. The Consonantal^Combinations L (3(1), like sh in shall : sound; fish. 2. 1^, " t " tone : %\)m,clay Thomas. 3. ng, '* ng'-'- sing : \\\\:^^.iW.dosing ;'^\\\<;l^.iXrfinger. 4. The Compound Consonants, or those joined togethei in printing, are d) (cA), ú (ck), ft {st), j) (ss), ^ (tz). 1. (f is pronounced like k in hake : ber haker. 2. " " " s " less : , a vessel. 3. ^ " " ts " mits : useful. 5. Doubled Letters are named separately in spelling : aa, aa . . . ah-ah. ff, fí" . . . . cff-eff. CC, ee . . . ay-a^j. ff, ss . . . . ess-ess. 00, oo . . . oh-oh. j tt, tt . . , , tay-tay. Rem. The vowels i and It are never doubled. 10 PKONUNCIATIüN (CONTINUED), 6. There are no silent letters in German, except: 1. Í), when used to indicate the long sound of a vowel ; o I« 'i ( ' i í í'. ! . i'. i i i i { * 3. after o (occuring in a few proper names). 7. The Accent may be understood to be on the ßrst syllable, when not otherwise marked in the vocabularies. 8. Capital Letters are used as initials to all nouns, and to the pronouns ©ic iyoiC) and {your), 2)riitc WufgaBc» ^err SBe'^ber tji in 53eríííu^, Mr. Weber is in Berlin. 2Ö0 ift .perr 2)lel/íerí^eim? Where is Mr. Meyerheim? ©r tfi je^t tu SDeutfc^^ílanb, He is now in Germany. 2Bihíí)eím itnb ^arlSíít'ííer [tub William and Charles Ritter uíd)í in ií)íag^íbeíbuvg, are not in Magdeburg. ©ÍC jtnb jet^t in ©rcb^iben, They are now in Dresden. 53erííin^ ift in ^reu''i^en, Berlin is in Prussia. SÖien ift in Oe^ífteríveii^, Vienna is in Austria. T)reb^ibcn ift in ©ad)^^fen/ , Dresden is in Saxony, ^eip'^^ig ift in ©ac^^^^fen, Leipsic is in Saxony. Sßav^if^üU ift in ^O^ilcn, Warsaw is in Poland. ^)rag ift in Prague is in Bohemia. SSicrtc ^ufgak. (Sr^ífte4n?ekíte,brit^íte,bier^4e, First, second, third, fourth, fünfite, fefí)b^í:te Sefítbou'', fifth, sixth lesson. T)rit^ite, oier^^ste 5íuf''ígaíbe, Third, fourth exercise. 2)íün'?c^cn, ^^Íugé^íburg unb Munich, Augsburg, and Nu- 97ürn''?berg jtnb in 33akiern, remberg are in Bavaria. ^rag,®ien,Xriíejl^unb3nné''í Prague, Trieste, and Inns- brucf ftnb in De^íftcríveid), pruck are in Austria. |>ek?beííberg ijl in ^Viben, Heidelberg is in Baden. 2)üf?feIíborf ift in ^rcu''?fen, Dusseldorf is in Prussia. 3)eutfd)^4nnb, 3==tVííiíeu unb Germany, Italy and Russia Sîup'dnnb ftnb in are in Europe. PRESENT AND IMPERFECT TENSES OF fCÎlî, TO BE. 17 LESSON III. PRESENT AND IMPERFECT TENSES OF THE VERB fCîlt, TO BE. 3ÎÎ •Ç'fvr S)7cn^í5cl tu ^er4íu^? Is Mr. Menzel in Berlin? S7em, er ift in Äöin, 2ßo ira'iveu ©ie ge'^ileru ? Söir iiHi'iVeu in |)a('i(e, 2)aö 53uc^ mx ntci)t tt)eu'?cr, ift Í^eu'íte feí)r unirm, ift e$ fci}r a\irm, No, he is in Cologne. Where were you yesterda y 'i We were in Halle, The book was not dear. It is very warm to-day. fünfte 5íufgak* l.iffio ftnb |)err 97e{nCkrbt unb |)erv SDíeuCjel? 2. ^err 3íeínCkrbí ift in ^erdinC unb |)err SlîenCgel ift in ^ot^Cbam. 3. SaCren err SR., Mr. N. Set, T. SSann? Avhen? §rau 9^., Mrs. N. (gr, he. 3ett, now. Çvâu'dctn 3t., ^liss N. 0te, she. §eu'=tc, to-day. 2)a6 93uci), the hook. (g§, it. @e'=ftern, yesterday. „ Xud), the cloth. 2ßtr, we. 23or'=gCiftcnt, day before „ 2Sct'4cr, the weather. 0ic, you. yesterday. 5Bi('=iig, cheap. 0ie, they. Stod;, still, j-et. 3::()CU'=er, dear. Set, yes. 0ctr, very. 2l5arm, warm. 9îcin, BO. 200? where? §iei|3, hot. 9îid;t, not. §ier, here. .^alt, cold. Unb, and. 2)a, there. lîotê'ibaill (.see page 419). 9iud;, .al.«o. 3n, in. 18 PRESENT AND IMPERFECT TENSES OP fcitt, TO BE. Grammatical. 1. The Present and Imperfect Tenses of the Irregulai- Verb fein, to he, are conjugated thus: Present Tense. íltlt, I am. ©te finb, you are. er ifh he is. loir ftltb, we are. ©ie finb, you are. fie finb, they are. Imperfect Tense. id? tear, I was. •0ie roar'iCU, you were, er toar, he was. irir irar^eit^ we wera 0te irar'^cn, you were, fie lt> a r they were. Rem. A single consonant between two vowels is pronounced with the last vowel. The vowels are divided in the paradigms so as to show the termina¬ tions, not as the words are pronounced. 2. Adverbs of time usually precede those oí jplace: (Sr toar gcfietn bier, He was here yesterday. ®r ift jc^t in iBeriin, He is now in Berlin. 3. Wlien the adverb, adverbial expressions, or adjectit'e 'precedes the verb, the nominativethe verb: §ier i ft e 8 , Here it is. §eute i ft e 8 fefir íaít, It is very cold to-day. Äalt i ft e 8 beute, It is cold to-day. 3n iBerlin tu a r er ni^bh He was not in Berlin. Rem. This inversion is much more common in German than in English. It is especially appropriate where emphasis is placed on the adverb or adjective. Exercise 6. 1. "Where is Mr. Hoffmann to-day ? 2. He is in Magde¬ burg to-day. 3. When was he in Berlin? 4. He was in Berlin day before yesterday. 5. Mrs. Weber and Miss We¬ ber are now in FranlHort. 6. Yesterday they were in Cologne. 7. The weather is cold to-day. 8. Yesterday it was very warm. 9. Wliere is the cloth? 10. There it is. 11. Is the cloth cheap ? 12. Yes, it is very cheap. 13. Is Mr. Meyerheim yet in Cologne? 14. Yes, he is there yet. 15. Is Breslau in Prussia? 16. Yes, Breslau, and also Magdeburg, Berlin, and Güttingen, are now in Prussia. 17. Mr. Dietz is now in Halle. 18. Mr.Weber is in Frank¬ fort. 19. Yesterday I was in Leipsic and in Halle. PEESENT AND EVLPEKFECT OF EEGULAE VEKBS. ID LESSOX IV. PKESEN'T AND IMPEUFECT TENSES OF REGULAR A'ERKS. THE DEFINITE ARTICLE. THE ACCUSATIVE CASE. ©ai? faufcu 0ie ? 3ii) faufe ^Papier^, '5)cr 0d)ncitcr lauft ©0 iüoí^nen 0íe jeët ? ©ir moquen jel^í in 53er{ín^ ^5ren 0ie iya^3 er fagt? 3á) pre luaö er fagt, ©aö lauften 0íe ? 3c^ luufte PapièE, ßr luopte in 3)îagteburg, // n n ff ff ff ff ff Wliat are yon buying ? I am buying papei'. Tlie tailor is buying cloth. Where do you reside now ? We reside now in Berlin. Do you hear what he is saying ? I hear what he is saviim. t? O What were you buying? c/ o I was buying papei'. He resided in Magdeburg. He was residing in Magdeburg. o o o Ile did reside in Magdebin\g. 8tebcuic Wufgak, 1. ©0 luo^nt ^err 0cí)umaun? 2. ©r a^obut jep in Srauf= furt. 3. Sr aopte fritpr in |)eitelberg, 4. ©oipien 0ie in í^aúc; 5. 91ein, air aobnen nidbt in ApaUe, air aebncn in ^eip^ig. 6. kauften 0ie ba^ ilui^? 7. 91ein, id) laufte eê ni^t; eè aar feí)r tpuer unb nid)í feí)r gut. 8. .Ç)ërt ber 0d)üí 1er, aa^ ber ?eí)rer fagt ? 9. 3u, ber 0^üíer prt aaê ber Çeper fagt. 10. 0er Kaufmann börte aa^ ber 0d)neiber fagte. 11. |)ijrten 0ie aaö ^einrid) uitb ©iíbelm fagten? 12. 3a, id) í)0rte aaê fie fagten. 13. 0er 23ater unb bie 2}lutter lieben baê ^inb. 14. $ab Äinb liebt ben 2>ater unb bie SJiutter. 15. ©0 lauften 0ie ba^ 53u^? 16. 3d) laufte e^3 gcrgeftern in Çeipjig. 17. 3)er 0d)ü(er laufte ba3 S3ud) unb ba3 Papier. 18. ©ann aaren 0ic in 5iug3burg? 19. 3d) aar largeftern in ^llugbburg. 20. .Ç)err Slîeperbeim, ^crr ^efent()aí unb .Ç)err ^bríid) aobnen in ^öin, ^err 0d){eiermad)er unb .facrr iHuerbadi aobnen in Slîagbeburg, grau görfter unb gräiilein (Sggeib aoh neu in ©otba, unb ^err Sinbemann aobnt in Pîûiîd)en. Jiem. These sentences can of course be multiplied indeiinitely. 20 PRESENT AND IMPERFECT OF REGULAR VERBS. SJÎann, the man. V SBater, the father. „ Kaufmann, the merchant, r/ i'ebrer, the teacher. „ 0d;ueiDer, the tailor. V @d;iiier, the scholar. Sic Stan, the woman. f, yjiiltter, the mother, XûS Stub, the child. ^a))ter', the paper. §etnrid;, Henry. äöili;eiui, William. Vocabulary. to liear. Saufsen, to buy. StebiCn, to love. Soû^en, to praise, ©ag^en, to say. 2öoi;n»en, to reside. SSer ? who ? 2Ba§ ? what ? 2iber, but. @ut, good. formerly. Sîeulid;, lately. Grammatical. 1. The regular Yerb heben, to love, is conjugated thus: INDICATIVE MOOD. Present Tense. id) iiei)'=C, I love, ©te Í t e b '»en, you love, ev Í i e b '«t, he loves, tntr Í t e b '»cit, we love, ©te íteb'íCU, 3'ou love, fie n e b '«en, they love. Imperfect Tense. id) ticb'^iC, I loved, ©ie lieb'«ten, you loved, er Heb '«íc, he loved, tnir Heb'«ten, we loved, ©ie Heb'«ten, j'ou loved, fie Í i eb '«ten, they loved. 2. That part of the simple verb which precedes the ter¬ mination of the infinitive (Ctt) is called the stem,tdâ\ ItebíCn, fcntfícn, fagíen, wobnícn, Pem. In regular verbs the stem remains unchanged in conjugation. 3. For the three forms lish, the German has hut ^d) iditfe, 2öir f auf ten, Saufen ©ie ? of conjugating the verb in Eng¬ ome—the simfle form : Sanften ©ie ? 3d) iaufte nid)t, I buy, "We bought, Buj' you? Bought you? I bought not. I am buying. We were buying. Are j'ou buying ? Were j'Ou buving? I was not buying. or I do buJ^ " We did buy. " Do you buy ? ' ' Did you buv ? " I did not buv. 4. The German language has four Cases: the Nomina^ tive, the Genitive, the Dative, and the Accusative. PRESENT AND mPIAiFECT OF REGULAR VERES. 21 1. The Nominative corresponds to our Nominative. 2. The Accusative is rendered by our Objective. 5. The form of the Definite Article varies according to the gender of the noun which it limits. The form of the accusative of the masculine only of the article differs from tliat of the nominative : Nominative: 2)cr 9)iaiut, ïstc grau unb ïîttg Äinb fínb ^kr. • ' The man, the woman, and the child are here Accusative; feijc Jjcn SJÎann, bic gvait itnb baê Äinb. Objective ; I see the man, the woman, and the child. Exercise 8. 1. The teacher praises the scholar. 2. The father praised the child. 3. Did you hear what Henry was saying? 4. No, I did not hear what he said. 5. We heard what he said. 6. Did he not hear what the teacher said? 7. Yes, lie heard what the teacher was saying. 8. The merchant was buying the cloth. 9. The woman did praise the child. 10. The child loves the woman. 11. Where did you buy the book? 12. I bought it in Berlin. 13. When did you buy it ? 14.1 bought it day before yesterday. 15. Do you hear what Miss Steifens is saying? 16. I hear what she is saying. 17. Where does Miss Steffens reside ? 18. She is now residing here in Berlin. 19. Formerly she resided in Hamburg. LESSON Y. PRESENT AND IMPERFECT TENSES OP l^aîteit, TO HAVE. ACCUSATIVE OF PERSONAL PRONOUNS. -Ç)ciben ®tc baê SSud) ? Have you the book ? Cê, Yes, I have it. ^etnrid) ^at baô 9)îefi'er, Henry has the knife, îôil^elm í>atte bas5 53ud), William had the book 53efud)ten ©ie ■f)cvrn ^raft, aí0 Did you visit Mr. Kraft when ©ie in S3críín waren ? you were in Berlin ? Sa, wir bcfu(^ten ií)n fe^r oft, Yes,we visited him very often. 22 PKESENÏ AND niPEEFECT OF RÉGÜLAE VEEBS. 9îcuntc îlufgabc* 1. 3Ber ^at ba^ 53u^? 2. 3^ md)t ; 3o^ann ^attc al^ er í;íev n?ar. 3* 9Ba0 ^aben a^ Simmer ift oíeí gu îtein. 13. 0er Biiîiiît^vmann oerfaufte baê |)auí^. 14. 0er ^auf^ manu faufte ba^ ^auö. 15. 2Bo ftubirte |)eínríc^ ^íeumann, ûfê er in 0eutfc^íanb toar? 16. (ir fíubírte tn íeipgig unb ^erUu. 17. SBo^nt ^err 9ííebner ín @oíba? 18. ^eín, er iooí)nt ín 2)reêben; aber er too^níe früt;er in ®oí^a. Vocabulary. !îer ©ädcv, the balier. „ ^od;, the cook. ,f ßimmcrmann, the carpenter, S)a§ Srob, the brea-d. ,f gicifd;, the meat. „ SKehl, the flour. SDÍeffer, the knife, rr Dhft, the fruit. «r 3iîuraer, the room. SBefad^'icn, to visit. ©ud/icn, to seek, look for. 'Stubir'^en, to study. S-^eiiauf^en, to sell. ©I'oji, large, great. ^icin, small, little. 0(^011, beautiful, fine, ©^lec^t, bad. industrious, diligent. ÇaiIÎ, indolent, lazj'. (conj.), when, as. SBtel (adv.), much, ßlt (adv.), too. Oft (adv.), often, frequently. (adv.), yet, still. 0elten (adv.), seldom. 3urod'4etl((ic?u.), sometimes. Grammatical. 1. The Irregular Verb ijabctt, to have., is conjugated thus : INDICATIVE MOOD. Present Tense. ©it ^ab'sCttf er fjüt, tüir Íjab'ícn, ©ic î)ab'=cn, fie çab'^cn. I have. You have. He has. We have. You have. They have. Imperject Tense. ^nV'tC, I had. 0ic b it t 'i tcu, You had. er ^at'ítc, He had. toir b t ten, We had. 0ie ^at'*tcii, You had. flC b Û t ' • ten, They had- PRESENT AND IMPERFECT OF ^ObClt, TO HAVE. 23 2. Nominative and Accusative cases of the Personal Pronouns : SINGULAR, Nom. Nom. Acc. Ohj. id), I. mtdl, me. Sic, you. ©ic, you. cr, lie. tl))t, him. ftc, she. fie, her. C§, it. C^, it. PLURAL, Norn. Nom. Acc. Ohj, loir, we. un§, us. ©iC, you. ©ic, you. fic, they, fic, them. „ they. „ them. „ they. „ them. 3, The word ^crt takes -U in all cases of the singular except the Nominative: §ert iîraft hefuci^te §err^n Mein, Mr. Kraft visited Mr. Klein. 4, The conjunction ûi§, w/ie7i (called in English Gram¬ mar a conjunctive adverb), refers only to past time. It requires the* verb following it to be placed at the end of the (subordinate) sentence : §etnrtc^ fünfte ba§ S3nd;, til's ev in Henry bought the br.ok when he was §cibelherg toar, in Heidelberg. 5, The adverb îîttfjt (not) is generally placed after the object of the verb : (Sr bcfud^te nn§ nic^t, He did not visit us. Exercise 10. 1. Did the merchant sell the cloth? 2, Yes, and the tailor bought it, 3, The baker buys flour and sells bread, 4, Where did William Diez study when he ^ras in Ger¬ many ? 5, He studied in Heidelberg and Berlin, 6, Did you call upon (visit) Mrs, Hoffmann when you were in Magdeburg? Y, Yes, we called upon her, 8, What are Henry and William looking for ? 9. They arc looking for the book, 10, There it is, 11, The scholar is very indus¬ trious to-day. Sometimes he is not very industrious, and he does not study very much, 12, Is the weather very hot in Germany? 13, No, the weather is rarely very hot in Germany, but in Italy it is often very hot, 14, Berlin is very large and beautiful. 15, Who has tlio book and the paper ? 16. The scholar has them. 2é PEEFECT AND PLUPEKFECT OF KEGULAE VEEBS. LESSON YI. PIRFECT AND PLUPERFECT TENSES OF REGULAR VERBS. ®cv i)at baê 33uc^ gefauff ? Who has bought the book? 3(1) geiauff, I have bought it. ^aben 0ic ge^brf, .^err Have you heard what Mr.We- ©eber gefagt' l^at ? her said ? (£r l^at gefagt", ba^ ^f)err 2)îei)er He said that Mr. Meyer has baö gefauft^ ^at, bought the house. ©r i)atte ben 0cbü(er gelobb, He had praised the scholar, ^atte lange gereghiet, It had been raining long. ©Ifte Wufgabc. 1. ^err Slntnenbac^ l^attcba^ fc^on gefanft. 2. ilarl fagt, ba§ er baê 53uc^ in íeip^íg gefanft ^at. 3. |)eute l)at eê fel)r ftarf gebon'nert itnb gereg'net. 4. |at geftern fel)r ftarf gereg'net, al^ núr in ^otbbam toaren. 5. ^err Reefer l^atte baê C^emähbe f(í^on oorgeftern oollen'oet. 6. dx malte eo, aB roir il)n befnc^den. 7. 2Ba0 mac^t baê Äinb? 8. fpielt. 9. 0d)nehet e^ je^t ? 10.91e{n, eê ^at l)eute oiel gefc^nehet, aber je$t fcl)neiet eê níc^t mel)r. 11. .Çtaben 0te baê Slîufe'um oft befuc^t', alci 0ie in Berlin toaren? 12. 3a, toir befugten eê febr oft. 13. d^ ift nnrfltcb febr gro§ unb febr fcbon. 14. 2)aê 3)îufeum in Dreêben ift and) febr fcbön. 15. S^er ßimmermann batte ba^ ^au^ fi^on gebaute 16. 2)a^ ^au0 ift toirfli^ febr grof, aber febr fcbön ift eê nid)t. 93au'=en, to build. 2)îad)'ien, to make, to do. SDîaÎ'^en, to paint. ©piei'^en, to play. 3?oílcnb'íen,to complete. 33ii^'='en, to lighten. 2)on'ncr=it, to thunder. Ça'gebn, to hail. ^Cv3'»tten, to rain. S(bttci'=cn, to snow. Vocabulary. Stud) (adiy.), also, too. 3)a{3 (c.onj.\ that. Sau'^ge(«c?r,), for a long times, SDÍetjT (adv.), more. @c^on (adv.), already. ®tarî (adv.), hard, severely. Söirl'did) (adv.), really. ®cr 9)ïa'4cr, the painter. @entäl''=be, the picture, r, 2)îufc'»UlU, the museum. PEKFECT AOT) PLÜPEEFECT OF EEGÜLAE VEEBS. 25 Grammatical. 1. The Perfect Participle of Regular Verbs is formed by prefixing gc=, and adding =1 to the stem : Xub'to love ; gc4ieb4', ¿»wec?. hm'^txi, to build : gc»bau4', 2. Verbs with inseparable prefidnes (as ttc, eut, tV, gc, ijer, jtr), and those ending in ^ireu, do not take gc- : b c » f u d) en, to -v-isit. b C =f U ^ = t', visited. P a * b i r en, to study. ft u => b t r « t', studied. 3. The Verb has three principal parts, as in English ; Present Infinitive. Imperfiect Indicative. Perfect Participle. licb'=en, tolove. iieb'^tc, loved. gc = Íiebt, loved. ^ a 'g e IÍ tt, to hail. ^ a 'g e I ® ie, hailed. gc * Í) a 'g e I = t, hailed, b e = ) a ^ ca, to visit, b c = f a d; '# te, visited, b c = | a t, visited, toer»Íaaf Í en, to sell, tocr^iaaf'sic,sold. to er^Îanf^t, sold, ft a Í b i t'i cn, to study. fía = btr'ítc, studied. ft U « b i rt, studied. 4. The Perfect and Pluperfect Tenses of Transitive and Impersonal Verbs are formed by the use of the auxiliary to have y and the perfect participle. INDICATIVE MOOD. Perfect Tense. i(^ \íúií geíicW, I have loved, ©ie ])áb''tU u you have loved, cr 5 at f; he has loved, trie bab'iCn n we have loved, ©ie f ob'^ea „ you have loved, fie l^ab'iCn « they have loved. Pluperfect Tense. Çttt'itC gríiebf, I had loved, ©ie „ you had loved, er ^at%te n he had loved, ttoir ^at'4cn n we had loved, ©ie b®t'4cn If you had loved, fie ^at'4eit II they had loved. 5. The Participle is placed at the end of main sentences: bttbe ba^ gefduft, I have bought the book. In subordinate sentences, the auxiliary of compound tenses is placed after the participle: (Sr fagtc, bag cr bas Sßud; fd;on gelauft ijat. He said that he has already bought the book. 6. The Perfect Tense is often employed where in English the Imperfect Tense would be used : (St '^at bas gcftcm gefauft, He bouglit the book yestei-day. 7. When the stem ends in -ú or =cr, usually only =n (in¬ stead of :CU) is added for the termination of the Infinitive : ^'gei=ib to haiL 2)tou'ncxvn, to thunder. SSetbeffer»^», to improve. B 26 PREPOSITIONS WITH THE ACCUSATIVE CASE. Exercise 12. 1. It rained very hard when we were in Düsseldorf. 2. Mr. Ruprecht says that it snowed yesterday in Bran¬ denburg. 3. It has not snowed here yet. 4. The cook has already bought the bread, the flour, and the meat. 5. The merchant has not sold the cloth yet. 6. The painter had not flnished the painting when we were in Magdeburg. 7. Yesterday John had not yet bought the book. 8. It has already been raining a very long time. 9. What is William doing? 10. He is not here. 11. Wliere is he? 12. He is visiting Mr. Lindemann. 13. The child has already been playing too long. 14. WTen did you buy the painting? 15. We bought it when we were in Berlin. 16. It is really very beautiful. 17. Have you heard what Mr. Hiedner said ? 18. Ro, I have not heard what he said. LESSOH YII. PREPOSITIONS WITH THE ACCUSATIVE CASE. GENDER OF NOITNS. 3ft baê S3uc^ für ben S^Zaier ? 5Zein, eg ift für ben Kaufmann, Dtx 2öaib ift fel^r grof, Der 3nôer führte ben Sanier burc^ ben Salb, Der 53erg ift fel^r dx ift aucb febr fleil, Die @tabt ift fe^r grof, 0ie ift au^ febr fcbön. Is the book for the painter I Ho, it is for the merchant. The forest is very large. Tlie hunter conducted the painter through the forest. The mountain is very high. It is also very steep. The city is very large. It is also very beautiñd. Drclscbtttc ^lufgoüc» 1. ^at 5librecbt ben ^ut gefauft ? 2. 9Zein, cr ift für ibn gn grof. 8» ^aben 0ie bag 53anb? 4. 9Zein, eg ifl urn ben 5. èaben ¿ic ben 53leijlift ? 6. 3cb b^be ibn gebobt, aber ic^ babe ibn je^t nicbt. 7* 2l(b (oh), ba ift er ! 8. Die 57a^t ifl febr warm unb f^ön, aber au^ febr bunfel. 9. Die ^ircbe ifl febx rEEPOSITIONS WITH THE ACCUSATIVE CASE. 27 grof, boc^ fc^r fc^ön ifl fte m^t. 10. ^at ber bie 53uttcr fci)on geholt ? 11, 3a, er ^at fte gcftern fc^on geí)oU. 12. |)at ber 0c^üíer baê unb baê papier? 13. 3a, er í)at fe. 14. ^at Slíarte ben ^ut gefauft? 15. 3a, fte fat iftt geíauft. 16. gür wen faben 0íe baê ^ucf gefauft? 17. 3^ fabe eé für ba^ ^inb gefauft. 18. ©eftern war e^ biê gegen Síbenb fefr warm, ober bie 91a^t war jíemlícf fait. 19. ^eute 3i)íorgen (this morning) fot |)err 91eumann un^ burcf boê SJîufeum ge^ füfrt. 20. 0er diod ift ntcft für mícf. Dfne Sweífeí íft er für .^errn 33e(íer. Vocabulary. ®Cr Stfcenb, the evening. „ 2Jîorgen, the morning, f, S3erg, the mountain. „ §ügeí, the hill. tt Söalb, forest, woods. „ -Säger, the hunter. ,t S3ietftift, the lead-pencil. t, §Ut, the hat, bonnet. „ 9ío(í, the coat. „ Stoeifel, the doubt. 2)tC ©tabt, the city. „ ^r(^e, the church. „ 9îad)t, the night. ft S3utter, the butter. S3anb, the band, ribbon. Slibrec^t, Albert. Äatf^ari'na, Catharine. S)uníeí, dark. §odb high. ©teil, steep. Siemltc^, quite, somewhat. Çû^ren, to conduct, to guide. §DÍen, to procure, go and get. S3i§, until, till. S)urd^, through. ^Ür, for. Oegen, towards. D^ne, without. Um, around. Söiber, against. Grammatical. 1. The seven prepositions bi^, burcf, für, gegen, ofne, um, and wíber govern the Accusative Case. 2. Many nouns, which in English would be in the neuter gender, in German are in the masculine or in Úiq feminine gender. ®ic ©tabt, the city, f, Sltrt^C, the church. ,, Siad;!, the night. Rem. The gender of nouns is one of the most difficult features in the study of the German language. At the same time it is one of the most important, since the form of the article is determined by the gender of the noun. î)er §Uí, the hat. r, SÎDd, the coat. „ ÍÍifd;, the table. 33u¿^, the book. „ the cloth. ,r Sßrob, the bread. 28 THE GENITIVE CASE. 3. Personal Prononns must have the grammatical gemder of the nouns for which they stand : ^aben @te belt S3Ieifttft ? Have you the lead-pencil ? ?îetn, tc^ l^abe i^n nidjt, No, I have not it {hiniy. 4. The Accusative of the Interrogative Pronoun tDCr is tiJCn. The Accusative of Uiaê is like the Nominative : Çiir tWClt ifi bet Sîoci ? Nor whom is the coat? äöltS í;ahett 0te ba ? What have you there ? Exercise 14. 1. For whom is the coat % 2. It is for me. 3. Is it not too large for you % 4. It is rather large. 5. When did Catharine buy the book? 6. She bought it when she was in Dresden. 7. Without doubt Mr. Ehrlich has already bought the painting. 8. Yes, Albert says, that he bought it yesterday. 9. Has the cook been to get (§oíen) the butter and the fruit? 10. Yes, he got them this morning. 11. The hunter conducted us through the forest. 12. Have you the lead-pencil? 13. Yes, I have it. 14. The hill is very steep, but it is not very high. 15. Did Mary buy the bonnet? 16. Yes, she bought it. It was very beautiful, and not very dear. 17. Miss Neuman saj^s that it was very warm in Potsdam towards evening, but she says that it did not rain. LESSON YIII. THE GENITIVE CASE. Sïnjlatt teê l^at ber Instead of the book, the schol- 0^Üíer ba^ ^J)apicr gcfauft, ar has bought the paper. i)au0 be^ àaufmanne^ ijl The house of the merchant is fefir gro§ unb impofant^ very large and imposing, ^{er ift bcê ©c^üíer^ 53U(Í^, Here is the scholar's book. Œr tjl bc^ 0c^nja^en0 mübe, He is tired of the chattering, ^ier til ^ctnric^ê 53U(|, Here is Henry's book. ¿00 ijl ba$ be^ ^ernt Wherein the house of Profesa, ^rofeffor pon SBoIfenfletn ? or von Wolfenstein ? THE GENITIVE CASE. 29 g-iinfjc^utc Wufgttfic 1. 2Ö0 waren ©íe wä^renb beê Âriegeê tu 2)cutfc^Îanb ? 2. 2Btr waren in Seipjig. 3. SBä^renb beê ©turmeê waren ^err 2öeber unb .^err Äraft in ^ot^bam. 4. SBarum ^at ^err ©c^ui^ baê |)au0 nii^t gefauft ? 5. SÖegen beê ^reifeê. 6. 2)aö ¿auê ift fei)r fc^on unb fe^r bequem, aber ber ^reiê ift biei ju Î)oc^. 7. 3)aê ^au^ beê ^errn ^rofepr 3)Îeperbeim> ift auferbaib ber ©tabt. 8. 2)aê ¿er^ ber SKutter ift üolí Síngft, weil baê '£inb fo franf ift. 9. 2)qi3 ®ad^ be^ ^aufeê ift fc^r ftejl. 10. Die ©efc^i^te ber ©tabt ift fe^r intereffant'. 11. Der D^urm beê Dome^ in 9)Zaöbeburg ift febr unb fe^r im^ pofant. 12. Der D^urm beê Domeê in Sien ift aud^ fe^r unb febr fcbon. 13. Sejfen Sud) b<ïi ®eorg? 14. èr b^tt ^einrid^ê Sucb. 15. Katharina bat 9)îarien^ Sucb. 16. Der Sebrer bût bee ©cbüiere Su(^ (or bae Sucb bee ©^üíere). Grammatical. 1. The Genitive Case is used vátli the prepositions nnjlati, auferbalb, innerbalb, wabreub, wegen, etc. 2. The Genitive Case is used without a joreposition : 1. Instead of the English Possessive ; Vocabulary. ®Cr Soîtor, —s, the Doctor. „ ^rofefi'"'', —Professor. tt ®otn, —c§, the cathedral, r, ^neg, —eS, the war. „ ^rei^, —e§, the price. „ ©turm, —eê, the storm. „ S^nrm, —e§, the tower, spire. ®ic Singfi, —, the anxiety. „ greube, —, the joy. „ ©efa^ir', —, the danger. „ ©efd^id/te, —, the history. „ ©pi^e , —, the point, ®ttö ®ac^, —eê, the roof. tt —(enS), the heart. Sinftatt, instead of. Síu^er^aíb, outside of, without, .^nnerhaih, inside of, within. Söäbienb, during. Sßegen, on account of. ©crca^r', aware. SSoil, full. 93cgueni', convenient. •Sm^Jofant', imposing. 3intereffant', interesting, íírattf, sick. SBarum'? why? Sßeii, because. 2)oc^, still, however. Stnftatt be« Äaiifmannc«, Instead of the merchant. ®a« Sßud; bc8 Sebrerä. The book of the teacher. 30 THE GENITIVE CASE. MASCULINE. Nom. Gen. S)cr 9)îann,2)Cê 9)îanniCê. „ Srteg, „ iîneg-cê. ,t SJÎaler, „ SJialetig. „ ^err, „ §err^n» NEUTER. Nam. Gen. Saô 33u(^, 2)eô „ §au§, „ Çauf^Cê. S)ad;, „ Sad;=cê. Äinb, „ Sinb^eà. 2. After some adjectives, as : getua^r, toll, tttiibc, etc. : ift bcö ©c^lDa^eng tniibe, He is tired of the chattering. 3. In most cases where the relation is expressed in English by the prep< osition of, the Genitive is used in German without a preposition, especially where limitation is indicated : 2)ie ©efc^ic^te beê iîriegeê, The histoiy of the war. 3. As to the form of the Genitive Case : 1. Withyeminiwe nmms it is the same as that of the nominative. 2. With masculine or neuter nouns, usually ti, Ö, Clt, or n is added tc the nominative. 3. Tlx Genitive of the definite article (bcr, bte, baê) is bcl, bCf, bC§« FEMININE. Nom. Gen. Sie Çvau, 2)ci: grau. „ 0tabt, f, 0tabt. „ Singft, „ Stugft. „ Äirc()e, „ ^r^e. Rem. The Genitive of nouns is given hereafter in the Vocabularies. 4. As in English, the noun possessed may be placed without its article after the name of the possessor : 2)er S3ruber be§ Servers, or bed Se^rerd iBruber. The brother of the teacher, or the teacher's brother. 6. The Genitive of Proper ISTames of Persons is usual¬ ly formed by adding Ö, But masculine names in 3, and feminine names in C, have the genitive in :CnÖ : Nom. §etnrtc^, 2BtI^eím, §err Síeumanu, granj, SJîarie', Gen. §einrtc^d. SSií^eímd. Çerrn 9îeumannd. granjend. SJÎarbetlê. 6. To titles of office or dignity, the word ^crt or ^rdU is usually prefixed (especially in direct address) : §evr ^^rofeffor SSeder, (Mr.) Professor Becker. §err ©raf ton S3idmar(í, (Mr.) Count von Bismarck, grau ©räftu bou S3idmartí, (Mrs.) Countess von Bismarck. Rem. Especially in the oblique cases, the definite article also may be pre¬ fixed (the ê being in this case omitted in the Genitive) : SDad §aud bed §errn 2)oitor 9feumanu, or ^erru Soitor Sieumaund §aud. 7. Most Geographical Proper Names form the Genitive by adding ê : 2)ie @eíd;i¿^te 23eritnê, The history of Berlin. 8. The Genitive of UJCr {who) is ttieffcn {whose). THE DATIVE CASE- 31 Exercise 16. 1. Doctor Friedrich resides outside of the city {as of the city walls). 2. Professor Lindeiier's house is outside of the city. S.^ÄTiose book have I? 4. You have Henry's book. 5. Tlie history of the war in Germany is very interesting. 6. The tower of the Cathedral in Freiburg is very imposing. 7. The price of the book is too high. I did not buy it 8. Were you in Germany during the war? 9. Yes, we were in Prussia. 10. The roof of the church is too steep. 11. The spire of the church is very beautiful. 12. Why did you not buy the coat? 13. On account of the price; it was much too dear. 14. It rained quite hard during the night. 15. The father is full of anxiety, because the child is very sick. 16. Where is Mary's pencil? 17. Catharine has it. 18. Mary has Catharine's book. LESSON IX. THE DATIVE CASE. .^err ifficíter ift ntc^t ju ■^aufe, Mr. Weber is not at home. ¿)ic ^íac^ríc^tcn sou beut Kriege The news from the war is ftub ^eutc fe^r iutereffaut^ very interesting to-day. T)er «^uub folgt beut Sügcruac^ The dog follows the hunter beut 3BûÎbe, to the forest. 2)íc9fía(^ric^tíft bem ^aufmauu The news is very-disagreeable fe^r uuaugeue^ttt, to the merchant. ©icknjcl^tttc ^íufgaíc» 1. 2Bem geprt ber S3íetfttft? 2. (Sr ge|btt beut Slîaier. 3. 9iuprec^t kt t'en Äod) uad) ber 0tabi gefc^idt. 4. T)er Slater beut itiubc gef(^euft. 5. ¿err S3ergmauu kt beut 3)îaier baê ©emaíbe gezeigt. 6. ^err ¿eru^tt» woí)ut úuferkíí> ticr ®tabt. 7. T)íe 33tbííotbef ífl gegeuüber beut fcum (or bemSlîufeum gegeuüber). 8,3)aí5 ^auê beê ^erru ^ro: THE DATIVE CASE. fejyor (gber^arb ift bcm |)aufe beê ^crm Scutncr fe|r a|)nU^. 9. SBem gehört He B^iiung ? 10. ©ie gehört ¿^emt Älcin. 11. 3ßo ift ^dnxid) ? 12. Qx ift ju ^aufe. 13. 2öir í)ahm M nad) ^aufc gefd)idt. 14. 3)aê ^uc| roar i^m fe^r mt^Ud). 15. ^err SSíebaí^n ift auè 3)re^ben. 16. ©)aê Äinb fpíelt mit bem ^unbe. 17. ©eorg führte unê »on bem SJiufeum md) ber 33íMiot^eí. îî>cr §unb, —eg, the dog. ff ^nabe, —n, the boy. ft 0oibat', —en, the soldier. 2!íeS3;bItot^eí',—, the library. ,f 9îac^ric^t, —, the news. „ 32ííung, —, the newspaper. Síehníiá;, similar, like. Unäf^nitci^, dissimilar, unlike. 3lngene^m, agreeable. Unangenebnt, disagreeable. 9Zü^íid;, useful. 0c^äbii(i;, injurious. Vocabulary. 3^oigen, to follow. ©e^ö'ren, to belong. 0c^enien, to present, to give, feigen, to show. 2ing, out of, frèm. Sinket, outside of, besides, ©egenit'ber, opposite. 3Kit, with. towards, to. 3?on, from, of. 3u, to, at. @era'be(acfi;.), directly, just, Grammatical. 1. Tlie Dative Case is governed : 1. By Bome Pr^ositiom, as : au0, auf er, gegenüber, mit, na^, öon, ju, etc. 2. By some Adjectives^ as : ofníic^, angenehm, etc. 3. By many Yerbs^ as ; folgen, gehören, fd^iden, etc. Tiem. The Dative Case frequently corresponds with the English objective, proceded by io, either expressed or imderstood, especially when it is the indi- rect object of a verb. (Sr jdjitfte bcm 0c^üíer bag S3uc^, He sent (to) the scholar the book. 2. Examples of the declension of the definite article and cf nouns in the singular number : Masculine. NomAtt 2Jtann. Gen. beg 9)tann«Cg. Dat. bem SOiann==c. Atic. ben SOÎann. Feminine. bte grou. ber grati. ber gran, bic grau. Neuter. bag Îîtnb. beg iîtnb » CS. bem ttub»e. beg Sünb. THE DATIVE CASE. 33 Rem. 1. Some masculine and neuter nouns are declined as follows : Nom. bcr SSater, §cvr, ©olbat'. bcö e11er. Gen. bcè ^err^Jt, ©olbat'sen. beö 2ßetter=<Ö. Dat. î)C3a23ater, $err = n, @oíbat'=cn. bem 233e11er. Acc. bcii 23ater, ^errsn, on. Urn. lieber. 3« (and some others). SBiber. Unter. Sor. 3miíd;en. Exercise 20. 1. Mr. Bauer has not yet sent the book to the teacher. 2. We hung the painting on (an) the wall yesterday evening. 3. The candle is on (anf) the table. 4. William placed the chair between the table and the wall. 5. The Cathedral is between the Museum and, the Library. 6. The book is on (auf) the floor. 7. The painter put the painting on the table. 8. Wliere is the letter ? 9. It is in the book ; I laid it in the book. 10. The boy took (führte) us from the Cathe¬ dral to the Museum. 11. The garden is behind the house. 12. The bridge is between the village and the mountain. 13. The book, the pencil, and the paper are on the table. LESSON XL PERSONAL PRONOUNS. FORMS OF ADDRESS. CONTRACTIONS OP PREPOSITIONS WITH THE DEFINITE ARTICLE. t)er 33rtcf ifl ntc^i »on i)crr tonjler l^attc 3^ncn bic 3eitung fc^on gefdiícfí, C)eínrid^ loar níd)t mit i^nen, C>ûft bu bic Bfiíwns Qc^iabí ? aBílficím íjl im SUnfeum, granífurt am SDÍaín, Tlie letter is not from him. Mr. Kmnzler had already sent you the ne^vspaper. Henry was not ^\dth them. Have you had the newspaper? William is in the Museum. Frankfort-on-tlie-Maina PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 37 (ginuttbjttjonsigfíc 5íufgoBc. 1. |)ag bu ten 55íe{ftíft? 2. 9]ein; id) i^n uí^t. 3, .^aft bu bie 5íufgabe fc^ou üoUenbet? 4. 3U/ icB ^ube fie »oüá enbet. 5. ^einvid), í)aft bu gehört, bev Seíjrer gefagt But? 6 3a, id) í)abe cö ôci)ôri. 7. ^abt ibr gei)ört ber ?el)rer fagte? 8. 3a, wir i)abeu cê gebort. 9. ^aft bu baö 53ucb auf ben 0tuí)í gelegt ? 10. 5ííein, icb b^Be eè auf ben Z\\ä) gelegt. 11, Söobnt ^err 2Öeber weit (far) öou .Ç>erru ^raft? 12. 97ein, er wobut ibnt gerabe gegenüber. 13. !Der 3)îaler jeigte mir baO ©eimiibe 14. ©emälbe gebort ^errn 91îet)er; ber Slía^ 1er bat eö ibm brute 50îorgen »erlauft. 15. 2)ie 53ibIiotbel ift n{d)t weit oom SOîujeum. 16. ^r legte ben 53rief inô S3ud). 17. ^err (2(bwbwad)er b^t brute burcbê SDîufrum geführt 18. èï'au Síuerbad) unb gräulein 5luerbadb waren geflern unb »orgeftern in ^ranîfurt am 2)7ain. 19. ^einrieb 91iemenbofer wobnte früher in gennffurt an ber Dber. Grammatical. 1. The Personal Pronouns are declined thus: 1 FIRST PERSON. SECOND PERSON. Singular. Nom. L Gen. ntCiltCr/ of me, etc.* Dat. Jltir, to me, etc.* Acc. nti^, me. Plural. Nam. totr^ we. Gen. Unfcr; of us, etc.* Dat. to us, etc. Acc. Iin3, us. Singular. btt, thon." (®iî, you.) beiner, of thee, etc. (Sbrer, of you, etc.') bir, to thee, etc. (3btten, to you, etc.) bitbf thee. (®ie, you.) Plural. ibr, you. (Sie, you.) Cner, of you, etc. Obttt, of you, etc.) end), to you, etc. (Abiten, to you, etc.) entb, you. (®ie, you.) THIRD PERSON. | Singular. Nom. er, he. fic, she. CÖ, it. feiner, of him.* ibrer, ofher. feiner, of it. Dat. ibnt, to him. ifjr, to her. ibltt, to it. Acc. ibn, him. fie, her. eè, it. Plural. fie, they, ibrer, of them, ibnen, to them, fie, them. • For the use of the cases, see Lessons VII., VIII,, and IX. 38 PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 2. The forms of address in German differ from those in the English : 1. In ordinary discourse the form of the third jper- son jplural is used instead of the regular forms of the second person of both numbers. When thus used the pronoun begins with a capital letter. 2. Besides using bit in addressing Deity, the regu¬ lar forms bu and il^r are employed in speaking to near relatives or very dear friends, and also in speaking to servants and often to children. ILem. This use of the form of the third person plural for the second person of both numbers has been constantly increasing since its first introduction at the beginning of the eighteenth century. 3. In the Pres. and Imperf. Tenses of Regular Verbs : 1. The second pers. sing, adds to the stem=ft or scft* 2. The " " plur. " " " " =t or sCt* Sing, bu Í t e b '»ft, thou lovest ; bu Í t e b '»tcft, thou didst love. PZwr. t^r lieb'»t, you love; i§r 11Cb'»tCt, you did love. Rem. 1. When the stem ends in Í), t (or ijn), sCft and =tt must be added: Sing, bu to a r t » eft, thou waitest ; bu lb a r t » CtCft, thou didst wait. P/wr. i()r lb a r t » Ct, you wait; t()r lb at t» CtCt, you did wait. Rem. 2. The present indicative of feilt has îllt íift, and t^r feib* The present indicative of bûbett has bit l^uft, and ií)r I)(lbt* 4. The following contractions of prepositions with the definite article are allowable and are sometimes necessary : 'i. With Dat. beittî 2. With Dat.Sing. ont for au bem. Feminine bet Î beint " bet bem. 3ur for JU ber. ijinternt " ^tuter bent, int "tu bent, unternt " unter bem. bont " bon bem. jltm " ju bem. f^ranifurt otn 9Watn (an bem SDÎatn), Frankfort-on-the-Maine. @r ift int ^aufe (in bem §aufe), He is in the house. (Sr iommt botn SJlufeum (bon bem SDiuf.), He comes from the Museum. 2)a8 Sucb tjl filr§ ¿inb (für bas Äinb), The book is for the child. Sr gcl;t inS ^au? (in ba6 $au8). He goes into the house. 3. With. Acc. Neut. btt» i onë for an bas. auf^ auf bas. bnrib^ burd^ bas, fürg it für bas. inê ti tu bas. umS tt um bas. THE IKEEGULAR VERB tOetbett, TO BECOME. 39 Exercise 22. 1. Charles, hast thou not had the lead-pencil? 2.1 put it into the book. 3. What art thou looking for ? 4.1 am look¬ ing for the pencil. 5. What are you looking for? 6. We are looking for the book. 7. Hast thou been to get (^oíen) the bread? 8.1 got it this morning. 9. Where wast thou? 10.1 was in the garden. 11. Did you (0te) buy the paint¬ ing? 12. Ho, I did not buy it. 13. Wlien did you ((Sic) send the letter to Professor Hoffmann ? 14.1 sent the let¬ ter to him yesterday. 15. The letter is in the book. 16. The church is not far (ttjcit) from the Museum. LESSON XII. THE IRREGULAR VERB tOCttlClt/ TO BECOME. FUTURE TENSES. !Da$ S3citer trirb fait, The weather becomes cold, ©ic trerfcen reíd), They are becoming rich, würbe feí)r í)eip, It became very hot. wirb balb regnen, It will soon rain. ©ie werben in 55erlin'' wol^nen. They will reside in Berlin. T)er 2JîaIer wirb bab ©emäbbe The painter will probably wa^rfc^einiic^ übermorgen have finished the paint- uoiien^bet |)aben, ing day after to-morrow. ^rcwnbsinansigftc ?tufgabc. 1. .^eute wirb eb gewip' fc^r fseif fein. 2. 2)a^ S3u(^ wirb iangweilig. 3. ®egen Sibenb würbe baê Sßetter fait, na§ unb fei^r unangenei;m. 4. 2)er Kaufmann würbe feí)r reic^. 5. wirb fd)wüí. 6. wirb wa^rfí^einlic^ oor 5íbenb regnen. 7. 91îorgen wirb ber Slîaler baê ©emälbe ganj gewi§ ooUenbet ^a^ ben. 8. T)er Xifc^Ier wirb bic ^ommo'be morgen repararen. 9. T)er S3öuer wirb ba^ Äorn »erfan'fen. 10. 3)er SSater wirb bab Äinb íoben, weil eb fleißig ifl unb weil eê bic ^lufgabc fo fc^netl ooUenbet l)at. 11. .Ç)eute Slbcnb (this evening) wirb 9öil^elm ©c^röbcr ben 3)ireftor beb Slîufeumb befuc^en. 12. JSforgen 5lbenb (to-morrow evening) werben wir ben -^crrn 40 THE IRREGULAR VERB UlCrbCtt, TO BECOME. 0{eBerí auê SBicn befuc^en. 13. 2Boi)rent) fcer S^îac^l njurbe cê jíemlíc^ fait, aber je^t ift baê SBetter warm unb ange^ ne^m. 14. 2)er Änabe wirö bte ¿efííon' baíb gelernt l;aben. 15. 2ßir werben baê |)auö níd)í faufen. 16. í)at gebor/nert; eé wirb balb regnen. Vocabulary. 2)ct Sirjt, —e6, the physician. „ S3aucr, —8, the peasant. ,, S3ihíict()etar',—8, the librarian. tp £)treí'tor, —8, the Director. pp 2ifc^ier, —8, the cabinet-maker. pp Sßetjen, —8, the wheat. pp 9ioggetl, —8, the rye. ÍDÍC Sommo'be, —, the bureau. Soâ ^orn, —e8, the grain. 33e6aii'en, to cultivate, to till. Sernen, to learn. SJÎietben, to rent, to hire, îïabein, to blame. Sfe^jan'reit, to mend. Sirm, poor. 9îeid;, rich. Çreunbitd;, kind, fiiendly. ^oftbar, costly. Sangtneilig, tedious. 9ta|3, wet. ©cbWÜÍ, sultry. Salb, soon. ©oe'Oen, just now. SDiorgen, to-mon-ow. Uebermorgen, day after to-moiTow. @tí)neíí, fast, quick. ®etni§', certainly. 2Baí)ríd)ein'ltd?, probably. Grammatical. 1. The Irregular Verb iccrbctl, to hecome, is conjugated thus : INDICATIVE MOOD. Present Tense. tocrb'^ c, I become. S)U wirft, thou becomest. Wirb, he becomes. SBir W c r b en, we become. 3f)r W C r b et, you become. @tC Vd e r b '« en, they become. Imperfect Tense. Sd; WUrb'^C, I became. Su W U r b eft, thou becamest. 6r W u r b C, he became. S33tr tt> u r b '* cn, we became, ^br in u r b et, you became. 0tC inurb'=cn, they became. 2. The Present Tense of tDCrbClt, to become, is used in forming the Future Tenses of all verbs : First Future : Sê tDÍrb regnen. It will rain. Second Future : Sê Wirb geregnet ^aben. It will have rained. Rem. The Future Tenses in German express simple futuriti/, and not in* [dination or desire, as is often the case in English. FUTURE TENSES, 41 3. The Indicative Mood of Pre.zetit Tense. ÍÍCb'= C, I love, bu Í i e i>ft, thou lovest. cr H eh if, he loves. 6?ir 11 e h ' Í cn, we love, i^r Í t e h you love, fte Í ich'' en, they love. Perfect Tense. I have loved, etc. td; íjab'í c gcítcíjí'* bu tiaît geíicht'. br ]^at geíieht'. toit ^ah'íCn gelte ht'. ^ a h 'î t g e 1 i e h t fie ^ah'íCn gelieht'. First Future Tense. I shaü love, etc. ttí) lucio'=e liehen, bu tuirft liehen, er luirb liehen, lüir merb'^en liehen, ihr n>erb'=^eí liehen, fie tuerb'^en liehen. íickn, to love. Imperfect Tense. id; lieh'» te, I loved, bu 1 i e h 'i teft, thou lovedst. er 1 i e h 'í te, he loved, mir 1 i e h 'í ten, we loved. ii)r 1 i e h tet, you loved, fie 1 i e h ten, they loved. Pluperfect Tense. I had loved, etc. ic^ iiaf' te ßelieht'. bu h, 44 GERMAN CURRENT HAND. ©ctij^uîîbîtucnîioftc ^iíufgabc. CONJUGATION OP IRREGULAR VERBS. 45 LESSON XIV. CONJUGATION OF IRREGULAR VERBS. ©preisen ©ie 3)eutfc^ ? Do you speak German ? S^iein, id) fpred)e nur (Snglíf^, No, I speak only English, ^err SDîeper [priest !Dcutfd), Mr. Meyer speaks German, ^err ^lein fprai^ mit un^, Mr. Klein spoke to us. (Sr l^at mit unê gefprocj^^en, He has spoken to us. 2)îarie jtngt fe^r fc^ön, Mary sings very finely. ©icbcnunbjtoansioftc ^iufgaBc* 1. ©presen ©íe 2)eutfd)? 2. SBír fpred)cn nur ©nglifcb« 3. grau 3)íeíri{^ [prient 2)cntfi^ nub grnnjö'ftf^. 4. gräuicin ^f)afencíei?er [prient granjoftfi^, StaUä'nifc^ nub ©panífc^. 5. 2)er ®ud)í)inber ^at baê ¿uc^ ganj gut gebunb'en. 6. SBo ^aben ©íe ben ^rtef gefunb^en? 7.3^ fnnb iínt im ®ud)e. 8. gran? (ein ^ilbebranb ^at baê ?ieb fe^r fc^ön gefung'en. 9. ^a, jtc fang e^ mirflic^ fe^r fc^ön. 10. 2)er Í)ieb l^at baö ©elb geftob'í (en. 11.2)a^áinb^atmitbem©todegefpieIt. 12. Sct^unbe^ bat ibn audb gebrocb^en. 13. 3cb b^ibe beute 2)lorgen mit ^errn 53raun gefprocb'en. 14. 3^ b^be baê 53u(b lange gefucbt, aber icb babe e$ nod) nid)t gefunben. 15. 3obann bat eê. Vocabulary. IStr Sud^btnbcr,—8, the bookbinder. „ ®ie¿,—e6, the thief. „ ©tod, —c8, the cane. 3ïflê ®eíb, —c8, the money. t, Stcb, —C8, the song. 9ÎUr (arfy.), only, but. SBenig {adv.), a little. ®anj (adv.), entirely, very. ®eiltf(b, Gennan. Çotlânbifc^, Dutch, èngiifd^, English, granjo'fiiah French. 3taÎt*â'înifcÎ;, Italian, ©panifct, Spanish. Satei'niid;, Latin. @rtC(biî(bf Greek. Present Infinitive. Imperfect Indicative. Perfect Participle. Íliltb'í CU, to bind, bltnb, bound, gesÎuntÔ'îen, bound. f t n b's cii, to find, t a n b, found, gc^ 1 u n b '« c It, found, j i n g '« cn, to sing, Í a g. sung, ge» f u n g c n, svjng. fprctb''' en, to speak, iprttdh spoke, ge^lprotb'ien, spoken, br ccben, to break, brad;, broke, gc»br od;'5cji, broken, ft c Í ' * en, to steal, ft a b Í r stole, go* ft o b IL e n. stolen. 46 CONJUGATION OP IRREGULAR VERBS. Grammatical. 1. Irregular Verbs have the following peculiarities: 1. They have the ending sCIt instead of ;t in the Perfect Participle. 2. The radical vowel of most Irregular Verbs is changed in forming the Imperfect Indicative and the Perfect Participle. 3. The Imperfect Indicative is usually a monosyllable (having the and third persons singular alike, and rarely take the ending sit), 4. Most verbs with C in the radical syllable change it to t or ic in the second and third person of Ûîq present singular. 2. The Indicative Mood Present Tense. ic^ I speak, bu thou speakest. er speaks, tnir j ^ r c d; cil, we speak. i()r j^jrec^'^h yo'i speak, fie f r e d; tn^ they speak. Perfect Tense. I have spoken, etc. té i^oíi'^e gcfíjro^'cn. bu íaft geffjrod)'cu. er í)aí geff)rod;'en. tnir ^ab^tn gef^^r oé' en» il)r í;aí>''=t geffjroé'en. fie Í;ab'íen gcffjroé'en» First Future Tense. I shall speak, etc. id) bjcrîj'i c hirc^'eit. bu öJirft f^reé'cn» er tttrî) f r e é ' e «• ipir U) e r b en f b ï e à) ' « «• ér in e r b et f r e é ' e "• fie tn e r b en f Í) r e é ' e n- of f^rcd^Clt, to speak: Imperfect Tense. té jíJroér I spoke, bu i f3 r a é =íh spokest. cr ÍÍJeaéf he spoke, inir f f) r a é cn, we spoke, t^r f r a d) 'í you spoke, fie f fi r a d; 's en, they spoke. Pluperfect Tense. I had spoken, etc. té íaí'ííc geffjroé'en. bu ^ a t tcft g e f b r o d; ' e n. er ^atte geffirod;'cu. inir ^ a t ^ ten g e f b r o é ' e tt, ér ]^at'=tet g ef fpr o é'ctt. fie ^ a t ten g e í fi r o é ' e n. Second Future Tense. I shall have spoken, etc. té n>erb'=e gefftroé'cn boten, bu ttirft gefbrod/en babe it, er toirb gefbroé'cn baten, irir hierbeen gefbrod/cu baben. ibr tt>erbtet gefbroé'cn baten, fie v»erb'=en gefbroé'en baten, 3. The Indicative Mood of fíc^len, to steal : Present Tense. fíeílfí e, I steal. íttel)í=fh thou stealest. ftiebi=t, he steals, mir ft C b Í '' en, we steal, ibr^ftebi'^t; you steal, fte ft e b Í cn, they steal. té bu er Imperfect Tense, id; ftobi, I stole, bu ft a b I = ft/ thou stolest. er ítoílt, he stole, mir ft a b i en, we stole, tbr ft a b I ' t, you stole, fte ft a b 1 '* en, they stole. CONJUGATION OF IRREGULAR VERBS. 47 Perfect Tense. tci> l^aiic gcfto^l'en, etc., I have stolen, etc. First Future Tense. \á) îocrbc ftc^l'cn,. etc., I shall steal, etc. 4. The Indicative Mood Present Tense. tint's e, I bind, bu tint's tft, thou bindest, er tint's eh he binds, teir b i n b's en, we bind, itr b i n b's et, you bind, fie b i n b's en, they bind. Perfect Tense. id) tttte getnnt'en, etc., I have bound, etc. First Ftiture Tense. i^ teerte tint'en, etc., I shall bind, etc. Pluperfect Tense. ict tatte geftotl'cn, etc., I had stolen, etc. Second Future Tense. ict teerte gefíotl'cn taten, etc., I shall have stolen, etc. of tinbcn, to hind : Imperfect Tense. ict tant, I bound, bu b a n b's eft, thou boundest, er tant, he bound, tntr b a n b en, we bound, itr banb'set, you bound, fie banb'^en, they bound. Pluperfect Tense. ict tatte getnnt'en, etc., I had bound, etc. Second Future Tense. ict teerte getnnt'en taten, etc., I shall have bound, etc. 5. Adjectives are used as adverbs without change of form. dv fbridtt gut, @ie fingt f^ön, He speaks well. She sings beautifully. Exercise 28. 1. Do you speak French? 2. No, I do not speak French. 3. Mr. Kreutzner speaks German, Dutch, Italian, and Spanish. 4. Prof. Schmidt speaks Latin and Greek. 5. You have broken the cane. 6. The thief has stolen the hat and the coat. 7. Where did you find the pencil ? 8. I found it under the book. 9. George had tied (tin^ ten) the band on (urn) the hat, 10. Mary sung the song srery well, 11. Mr. Neidner is speaking; do you hear what he is saying? ,12. I was looking for the news¬ paper. 13. Henry will sing the song. 14. The child had broken the cane. 15. John will find the book. 16. Mr. Krause will buy the house. 48 PLURAL OF NOUNS. LESSON XV. PLURAL, OF NOUNS AND OF THE DEFINITE ARTICLE. 2)ie Serrer loben bíe 0c^üler, The teachers praise scholars. 1){e ©arten ftnb fe^r grof, The gardens are very large» 3DÍC 53erge ftnb ftetl, The mountains are steep. '2)ie ^unbe folgen ben 3nô^i'n, The dogs follow the hunt- 2)ie ilîâç^te ftnb fait, The nights are cold. [ers. 3llbrec^t bnt bie 53ü^er, Albert has the books. £)ic Ätrc^en ftnb f^ön, The churches are beautiful. 2Ber l)at bie ß^itnngen ? Who has the newspapers ? Sîcununbstoansigftc 5tufgak. 1. T)tc ©Cottier bie 5iufgaben oollenbet. 2. 3)ic gel ftnb nic^t fek 3. T)ie 3i»îmer ftnb ju flein. 4. 2)ie ©emalbe ftnb fd)ön, aber febr tbeuer. 5. 3obann bat bie S3leb ftifte auf ben iif^ gçkgt. 6. 2)ie 33leiftifte ftnb neben ben S3üdbern. 7. 2)ie iifcbe ftnb in ben Biwmern. 8. 3)ie 2)iebc baben bab ©elb geftoblen. 9. T)ie ©âc^er ber Käufer in ben !3)örfern ftnb febr fteil. 10. S)ie Xbürine ber ^irdjen in ben 0täbten ftnb bocb unb impofant. 11. T)ie 9)îaler bnben bie ©e^ malbe an bie SBänbc ber 3iwmer gebangt. 12. 3Der 2)Zaler bat baê ©emälbe an bie 2Banb beê 3iwt«fi^ Ö^bängt. 13. ^err 3)ietri^ bat bie SSriefe über 93remen nad) Simerifa gefcbidt. 14. |)err 53lumenbacb unb |>err Dunder baben bie lieber ganj fcbön gefungen. Grammatical 1. The Definite Article is declined as follows : Masculine. (The man.) A^om. ber SOÎanit. Gen. bti SJÎanit'Cg. Bat. bent 9Jîattn'=e. ,dcr. ben 2Kann. SINGULAR. Feminine. (The woman.) bie fÇrau. ber grau, ber grau, bit grau. Neuter. (The child.; baë íítnb. bcS jîtnb«eSL bent Äinbac. baô Äiub. PLURAL OF NOUNS. 49 Masculine, (The men.) Nom. ÎJic 2JÎ ä n n == e r. bcr 2)îânu®cr. Dat. ben 3)iänn^ern Ácc. bic 2)î ä n n => e r. Neuter. (The children.) bic Sinb=^er. bcr Stnbier. ben t i n b = e r :t. bic Ätub = er. PLURAL. Feminine. (The women.) bit grausen, bcr grausen. bctt grausen, bic grau=^en. Rem. The Definite Article has the same form in the plural for all genders. 2. The Plurals of Nouns are formed in several ways; 1. With some nouns the nom. plural is like the nom. singular. 2. Some nouns take merely an umlaut on the radical vowel, when the vowel is capable cf it- 3. Some nouns merely add íC to the singular. 4:. Some nouns add and also take the umlaut. 5. Some nouns add ^tï (with, the undaut, when the vowel is capable of it). 6. Some nouns merely add =11 to the singular. 7. Some nouns merely add =Ctt to the singular. 3. Nouns that add =n or sCtt in the plural (and also in the gen., dat., and acc. sing., if the nouns are masculine) are said to be of the New Declension. Those that take or =cn in the plural, and =ê or =c8 \n the gen. sing., are said to be of the Mixed Declension. All other nouns are said to be of the Old Declension. Rem. 1. The Old Declension includes by far the greater portion of nouns. Rem. 2. No neuter nouns belong to the New Declension. Rem. 3. No feminine nouns belong to the Mixed Declension. 4. Tabular view of the singular and plural of nouns : (^Singular.) ÇPlural.) íDíaíer, Serrer, ©d^üícv, S3âcfcr, Säger, SKeffer, 3immcr, SDÎorgen, ^ügcí, SDÎaler. íebrcr. ©tí^üíer. iBäder. däger. aJîeffer. ginnner. borgen. í>ügel. {Singular.) {Plural.) 2. 2?ater, SSSter. ©arten, ©Srten. Ofen, Defen. SDiutter, SDÍüíter. 3. Slhenb, Stbenbe. 53erg, S3erge. SBieiftitt, S3ieiftifte. 33rtet, SSriefe. C {Singidar.) {Plural.) 2:iîc^, Sifd^c. 4. SSd^c. Sirjt, ^ut, 9îo(f, @tu^í, 9îac^t, ©tabt, Sïïanb, Sterjtc. ^üte. ^öifc. ©tü()íe. 9îâci)te. ©täbtc. SCßänbe. 50 DECLENSION OF NOUNS. (Singular.) (Plural.) 5. 9Dîanu, SJÎânuer. SBaíb, SSäiber. S3ucb, Süc^er. ©orf, S)örfer. ©eib, ©eiber. §auS, ©äufer. Sach, 2)äc^er. ^iub, Einher. Sic^t, Siebter. (^Singular.) ÇPlural.) 6. S3auer,* S3auern.* ,tnaBe, Äuaben. Slufgabe, Slufgaben. SSrücíe, iBrücfen. greube, greuben. ©eid^ic^'te, ©ejc^i^t'en. ^rc^e, Sirenen. Äommob'c, ^ommo'ben. (^Singular.) (^Plural.) 7. ®oitor,* 2)DÍtor'en.* §err, Herren, ^rofeffor,* ^rofeffor'en.* ©oibat', ©oibat'cn. ©iret'tor ,♦ S)trcîtor'en. Sibíiotíict' Stbítoíbefctu grau, grauen. @efa^r', ©efa^r'eu. Seîtiou', Seition'eu» 5. Examples of the Declension of Nouns: 1. Old Declension. SINGÜLAU. 1. Painter. N. bcc üJialer, G. beä 3)ialer=ê, D. beut ÜJÍaler, A. ben äJiaier. 2. Father. bcr a.iatcr, beS SSater^ê, bem 33ater, Den ^ater. 3. Mountain. ber S3erg, beS Serg^eê, bem Serg^e, ben S3erg. 4. City. bie ©tabt, ber ©tabt, ber ©tabt, Die ©tabt. 5. Man. ber SJÎann, bes 9Jîann^e5, Dem SDÍamt'C, Den 2Jîann. PLUKAL. iV. bic SJîalcr, G. ber iOîaler, D. ben SJÎaier^it. A. bte 2JíaIer. bic Setter, ber ÜSäter, ben SBäter^n, bte SSäter. bie SergiC, ber SBerg^e, ben iBerg^en, bie ißerg»e. bie ©íübí=e, ber ©tabt^e, ben ©tdbt^en, bie ©täbt^e. bie 3ïlânn=er, ber 31îânn»cr, ben SJÎânn^em, bie 3)îânn=cr. 2. New Declension. 3. Mixed Declension. SINGULAR. SINGULAR. 6. Boy. N. btr ®nabc, G. bes Änabe^n, D. bem ^nabe^n, A. ben Änabe^n, 7. Woman. bte grau, ber gran, ber gran, bte gran. 8. Peasant. ber Saner, beS SBaner^g, bem SSaner, ben Saner. 9. Doctor. ber 2)oîtor. bes S)oîtDr=§, bem ®oîtor, ben 2)oîtor. PLURAL. PLURAL. iV. bic tnabc=n, • G. ber Snabe^n, , D. ben íínabe^n, j A. bie Änabe^it. bie grau=en, ber gramen, ben gramen, bte grausen. bie ©aner=n, ber Saueren, ben S3aner=n, bie Saueren. bie 3)oIíor'=en, ber ©oftor'scn, ben S)oîtor'«= en, bie 3)oîtor'» en. Rem. 1. The genitive and accusative of the plural number have the same form as the nominative plural. Rem. 2. An =11 is always added in the dative plural if the nominativa plural does not already end in that letter. * In the Mixed Declension. THE INDEFINITE ARTICLE. 51 Exercise 30. 1. The scholars have bought the books. 2. The books of the painters are on the tables. 3. The cabinet-makers have mended the tables. 4. The stoves, the chairs, and the tables are in the rooms. 5. Miss Neumann sang the songs very beautifully. 6. The nights are now very cold. 7. The towers of the churches in the city are very high. 8. The news (^Z.) in the newspaper is to-day very interesting. 9. The gardens are not very large. 10. The soldiers are in the city. 11. Where did you find the pencils? 12. The pencils were under the books. 13. The tailors have mended the coats. 14. The children are playing with the dogs. 15. We sent the letters by way of Hamburg. LESSON XVI. THE INDEFINITE ARTICLE. ^at ein |)ûu^ gefaufb 3c^ fui^e einen ©feiftift, ^aben 0ie eine B^ilung ? (£r fünfte ein ^funb Xí^ee, '©r fanfte ein ^aar ©tiefel, îoftet einen Xi^aíer bie m, Xn(^ ift eine (Slle breit, He has bought a house. I am looking for a pencil. Have you a newspaper ? He bought a pound of tea. He bought a pair of boots. The cloth cost a dollar a yard. The cloth is a yard wide. (Sinunbbrcitioftc ?tu[gabc. 1. ^err 5iuerba(^ fi" ©emalbe gefanft. 2. |)eini ridi bût beute einen 9îod, einen ^ut, ein ^aar 0tiefel unb ein ^aar 0(^ube gefauft. 3. T)er ¿ocb b^t ein ^funb Buder, ein ^funb Ä'affee unb ein ^funb Xbee gebolt. 4. 9Bünfd)en 0ic eine îaffe Kaffee ober eine ilaffe 5. 3^ toünfcbe nur ein Söaffer. 6. 2)nê Äinb lüünfcbt ein 2Jíil¿b unb ein 0tücf 53utterbrob (bread and butter). 7:» 2)ic ¿uffcn 52 THE INDEFINITE ARTICLE. jtnb fe^r f^ön. 8. Söertcn 0íe ein S5uc^ Rapier ober ein 3iic^ Rapier laufen? 9.3^ werbe ein 9Ííe0 Ropier laufen. 10. iaê îiu^ íji eine ©lie breit. 11. loftet einen X^aíer bic ßüe. 12. 2)er X^ee loftet einen Xbaler ba^ ^funb. 13. 2)ie Œier loften je^n (ten) ©rofcben baê 2)u^enb. 14. ^einric^ bût einen î^bûler unb jebn ©rof^en für bab ¿ucb bejaplt. 15. î)a^ S3anb ift einen ßoU breit; eê loftet jwei (two) ©rofcben unb fecb^ (six) Pfennige bie Œlie. 16. 23or einem Sabfe (a year ago) waren wir in 2)eutf(blanb. 17. 3^ wünfcbe ein Quart ein ^funb S^bee unb ein Qu^enb ßier. Vocabulary. S)cr î^^ater,—§,pl.—, dollar. ©rofctien, —§,pl. —, groschen. Pfennig, —^,pl. —e, pfennig. —t^fpl. güße, foot. ßoU, —t?>,pl. —e, inch. Sogen, —^,pl. —, sheet. @chut, —i^,pl. —e, shoe, ^anbyt^ui), —eê, pl. —c, glove. @ttefel, —ê, pl. —, boot, ^antoffeí,—?>,pl. —n, slipper, áaffee,—?>,pl. —, coffee. pi- —, tea. 3u(ier, —S, sugar. 9îciê, —eê, rice. Ober, or. Seja()ren, to pay. Söünfc^en, to wish, desire, ©roß, large, tall. U it V if It ft ft ft ft ft ft ft ft 2)te Gffe, —, pi. —n, yard, ell. „ Saffe, —, pi. —n, cup, cup and saucer. u SJÍií^, —, milk. S)a§ —t^,pl. —e, year. „ 2)u^enb, —ti,pl. —e, dozen. „ (St,—eg, p/.—er, egg. ft ^aat,—ti,pl.—e, pair. tt 9îieg, —eg, ream. Slid;, —eg, quire. Sfunb, —t^,pl. —e, pound. ©tü(í, —cg,pZ. —e, piece, ©fag, —eg,pZ. ©fäfer, glass. tt SBaff er, —g, pl. —, water. tt Ouart, —eg, pi. —e, quart. Sreit, broad, wide. Sang, long. £icf, deep. Grammatical. 1. The Indefinite Article CÎn,iï or an, is declined thnsi MASCULINE. FEMININE. (A man.) (A woman.) Norn, ein SDÍann. ein'^C i^rau. ctn'iCr é^au. ein'íCr Srau. etn'^c gran. Rem. The Indefinite Article takes the gender and cose of the noun with which it is employed. Gen. einSeê iDîanneg. Dat. etn'=cm SDtanne. ÁCC. etn'íCn SJÎann. NEUTER. (A child.) ein Sinb. ctn'^cS ^nbeg. ctn'^cm tinbe. ein ^nb. THE INDEFIÎÎITF 4RTICEE 53 2. The following Idioms are used with nouns oi weighty measure^ q^iiantity, and price : 1. Nouns of iveight, measure, and quantity are in apposition with tha nouns they limit. Those in the feminine gender alone take the pi. form, the masculine and neuter nouns retaining the singular form in the plural. @r iauftc etn ^funb unb Jtcei He bought a pound of sugar and ^funb 2d)ee, two pounds of tea. ©ie iaufte nut eitte (Slïe Ultb She bought only one yard of cloth, mci;t Jtnct (Sííflt and not two yards of cloth, 2. Verbs and adjectives indicating weight, measure, quantity, and price require the noun expressing the weight, etc., to be in the accusative case: (SS tniegt ein ijifunb, It weighs a pound, ioftet einen Stealer, It costs a dollar. S)a§ SBaffer i[t einen ÇuÇ tief, The water is a foot deep, 3. Nouns expressing the quantity, following nouns expressing price, are preceded by the definite article : (gg ioftet einen 3:{)aíer baë i)3funb, It costs a dollar a pound, (gg ioftet einen Síjaíer bic Site, It costs a dollar a yard, 3, Prussian Money is the standard in North and Central Germany. 1 2;i^aler = 30 ®rofc^en = 360 ^fennige=T3 cents in gold. 1 @rofci)en= 12 Pfennige = cents in gold. 1 pfennig = \ of a cent. Rem. Foreign Exchange to all Germany is usually made in Prussian thlrs. Exercise 32. 1, Have you a pencil? 2, There is a pencil on the table, 3, William bought a pair of shoes and a pair of slippers, 4, The cook will go and get (^olen) a dozen eggs, a pound of sugar, and a quart of milk, and a pound of rice, 5, The book will cost a dollar and twenty (jwanjig) groschens, 6, William wishes a glass of wa¬ ter, 7, Do you wish a cup of tea or a cup of coffee? 8,1 wish a cup of coffee, 9, The cloth is a yard wide. 10, It costs a dollar a yard, 11,1 paid a dollar and ten (jc^n) groschens for the book, 12, The ribbon is a yard long and an inch wide, 13, It cost ten groschens a yard. 14, The tea cost a dollar a pound. 15. Have you a sheet of paper? 16. He has a ream of paper. 54 CARDINAL NUMBERS. LESSON XVII. CARDINAL NUMBERS. T)k ^irc^e ^at Xí)ürme, The church has two towers 3)er Soger l^at oier ^unte, The hunter has four dogs. T)er ^oct) ^ot fec^ê ^fimb ^îeiô The cook got six pounds ot unb a(i^t ^funb Bucfer ge^ rice and eight pounds of ^olt, sugar, ^arl ift öierjei^n So^re ali, Charles is fourteen years old. ■C)evr T)íetríc^ ífí l)euíe merunb? Mr. Dietrich is to-day sixty- fed)jig 3oi;re alt, four years old. 3nt 3o^re ad)t5e^n^imbert öicr^ In the year eighteen hun- unbfec^jig war .Ç)err ^rofeffor dred and sixty-four Pro- 53el^r in Deutfc^lanb, fessor Behr was in Ger¬ many. iSrciunbbrcijjigftc ?íufgaíic» l.-^err Slíe^er í^at bret .Ç)âufer in @oti)a gelauft. 2. Da§ 2:ud) ift eine (£lle breit nnb neun ©líen lang. 3. Der ^at jwei Du^enb ©ier, fünf pfunb ßudev unb fteben ^funb 3îei^ ge^ ^olt. 4. Dab 33ud) foftet ac^t Dealer unb fünfunbjwanjig ©rofc^en. 5. 3«^ ^obe für bab Sanb fünfunb^wanjig @rofd)en unb fec^b Pfennige beja^lt. 6. .^einric^ ift yier gu^ unb elf Boll grop. 7. Die 53rüde ifi öierunbac^tjig ^up lang. 8. Der Dpurm beb Domeb ju (at) 3?îagbeburg ift breipunbert unb breipig gup pocp. 9. Der Spurm beb Domeb ju Söien ifl bierpunbert fedpbunbbreipig gup poc^. 10. Die 33ibliotpef ju 33erlin pat fecpbpunbert unb fünfzig taufenb 53ücper. 11.53eríin pat über fteí benpunbert taufenb ©inwopner (inhabitants). 12. Drebben pat punbert unb bierjig taufenb ©inwopner. 18. iOîagbeburg pat neuuí pigtailfenb ©inwopner. 14. 3nt Bapre acptjepnpunbert (or im 3apre eintaufenb acptpunbert) breiunbfed)5ig wcpnten ^err ^rieb^ lanb unb -^err 2Bolf in |)eibelberg. 15. .^err ^raun war gejlern o^tunbfünfjig 3apre alt (old). CARDINAL NUMBERS. 55 Grammatical. 1. The Cardinal Numbers are formed as follows : 1. (gin6. 40. Siierjig. 2. 3h'£i- 50. gängig. 3. S)rei. 60. ©ecpjig. 4. 3?ier. 70. 0iehenäig or 0ieb3igc 5. ^iinl. 80. Sí^tjig. 6. ®ed^§. 90. 9îennjig. 7. Sieben. 100. Rimbert. 8. Üícpt. 101. Çnnbert unb eins. 9. iRenn, 110. Çunbert unb jebn. 10. 120. Çnnbert nnb jtoanjig. 11. (gif. 121. §unbert einnnbjtranjig. 12. 3ibclf. 125. §unbert fünfunbjmanjig. 13. 2)rcije^n. 136. §unbert fed^Snnbbreibig. 14. üíierjehn. 150. Çunbert nnb fünfjig. 15. ^ün^ebn. 200. 3it>2ibanberí. 16. 0c(bíjebn. 225. 3»eibunbert fiiniuubjibanjlg 17. Siebenjepn or 0iebjebn< 500. günfbunbert. 18. üícbtjebn. 1,000. (gintaufenb. 19. 9îcunjcbn. 1,005. (gintan)enb unb fünf. 20. 3wandg. 1,025. (gintanfenb fünfunbjtnanjig. 21. (ginunbjtranjig. 1,500. (gtntaufenb fiinfbnnbert. 22. 3it?ciunbjlban3ig, etc. 2,000. 3i®dtauienb. 30. dreißig. 20,000. 3h)anjigtanfenb. 31. SinunbbreiÇig, etc. 200,000. 3h'eibunbert tanfenb. 1869. ÏCc^tge^n^unbcrt unb neununbfec^jig, (or) (gintaujenb a^tl;unbcri iieununbfeci>jtg. 2. When used with a noun, and not preceded by a definite article, Silt, one is declined like the indefinite article (see Less. XVI.). Rem. 1. The numeral Citl takes a stronger emphasis than is given to the in¬ definite article. Rem. 2. The indefinite article is in fact only a modification in signification and use of the numeral CtH. Rem- 3. The form CtilÖ is used in counting and in multiplying % Gtnë, brei, bier, etc., One, two, three, four, etc. (Stninal ift (Sins, Once one is one. 3. The Cardinal Numbers are usually undeclined. Rem. This is especially the case when they are joined to nouns and are preceded by prepositions. (5r ^at jc^n Sogen Papier, He has ten sheets of paper. 31îit jepn Sogen papier. With ten sheets of paper. 56 CARDINAL NUMBERS» 4. Single words are usually formed of units and tens, of multijples of a hundred, and of multiples of a thousand up to a hundred thousand. 33ierunbjtransig, Twenty-four. Slc^t^unbert, Eight hundred, 2ld)tje^n^unbert, Eighteen hundred. St^tjigtaufenb, Eighty thousand. ^unberttaujenb, A hundred thousand. 5Btert;unbert taufenb, Four hundred thousand. Rem, 1. Some writers put no divisions between numbers : ©intaitfenbac^ttjunbertunbieci^Sunbjinangig (1826). Rem. 2. ©tit/one(a) is not used before í)Utt&Crt and taufCUb» 2)a8 SSud} ^at (tunbert @eiten, The hook has a hundred pages. 5. 3nt is inserted before the number of the year. (itn ,Sa^re 1868 icar er in Soin, In 1868 he was in Cologne. 6. The ic is short in tierje^n and t)Ícr5Íg» Exercise 34. 1. The cook has bought two pounds of sugar and six pounds of rice. 2. Mr. Friedland paid fifteen dollars for the books. S.William is five feet and seven inches high. 4. The tower of the Cathedral at Strasburg is four hundred and thirty-six feet high. 5. The two tow¬ ers of the Cathedral at Munich are three hundred and thirty-six feet high. 6. The bridge on the Elbe, in Dres¬ den, is one thousand six hundred and fifty feet long and fifty feet wide. 7. The castle (0^ío§) in Berlin is six hundred and twenty-six feet long, three hundred and seventy-three feet wide, and a hundred and one feet high. 8. It has six hundred rooms. 9. Bremen has sev¬ enty-eight thousand inhabitants ((SmttJol^ner). 10. Ham¬ burg has a hundred and ninety-six thousand inhabit¬ ants. 11. The Library at Munich is two hundred and fifty feet long and eighty-five feet high. 12. It has eight hundred and fifteen thousand books. 13. In 1865 (im etc.) Mr. Kohner was in Germany. OLD DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES. 57 LESSON XVIII. ADJECTIVES USED PREDICATI%T:LY AND ATTRIBDTIVELT. OLD DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES. î)ciê 2:uc^ ift fei)r fein, The cloth is very fine. SÖünfc^eu Sie feinet ? Do you wish fine cloth ? \)ahc jinei neue ^üc^er, I have two new books. 2)er Xifc^ler i^at ben Xif(| mit The cabinet-maker has cov- griinem ?eber bebeit, ered the table with green leather. ^ûben 0{e beutfc^e ißüc^er ? Have you (any) German books ? 3^/ ()aben beutfc^e, englif^e, Yes, we have German, Em fran50rtfd)e, italianifc^e, lateb glish,French,Italian,Lab nifd)e unb gnec^ifd)e ^üc^er, in, and Greek books. g-iinfunbbrci§tgfic 5tufgabc» 1. 2)ad 3Baffer tfi fait. 2. Sßünfc^en 0{e faltet 2ÖafferV 3. 3^ n)unf(|e warmer Suffer. 4. 3)er i;at einen árug boíl Reifen Safferê (gen.). 5. 2)er ^uc^binber ^at baê mit Tot()em ?eber gebunben. 6. 2)er ©c^neiber l^at ben Síod mit [(^marjem Xu^e gefuttert. 7. Äat^arina i)at im ©arten jmei meife unb brei rot^e ffiofen gepflüdt. 8. graulein ^ilbebranbt l^at geftern 5ibenb ^mei f^öne beutfc^e lieber gefangen. 9.33eri lin unb Sien ftnb grofe unb fc^önc ©täbte. 10. |)err^rofefi for Sberf)arb l)at ^eute gmei italienifd)e unb bier fpanifd)e 53üd)er gefauft. 11. Sünfc^en 0ic grauet ober grünet Xud)? 12. 3c^ münfc^e braune^. 13. Seí)rrei^e 33üc^er ftnb jumeilen fei)r langtbeilig. 14. 3)er Dom ju S07ünd)en ^at jwei bo^e Dbürme. 15.53erlin bat breite ©trafen. 16. IBraunfcbmeig (Brunswick) bat enge, írumme ©trafen. 17. Die Käufer in í8raunfd)tbeig baben fleile Dä^er. 18. Daê ^au^ ift grof unb bequem, aber eê ifl ju tbcuer. 19, Der ©attler b^t fcbmarje^, gelbem unb braune^ ?cbcr gefauft. c 2 58 OLD DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES. Vocabulary. ®CUtfc^ (»er,- »e, *eê), German, ^gítfc^ (^er, »e, ^eô), English, granjö'fifd; (»er, îC?), French, §oEänbiid; (=er, ^e, »e«), Dutch, Stalidnijd; (icr, ^e, =e#), Italian, ©banifd; (^er, »c--, <9>), Spanish, Sebrretd; (=er, <ê), instructive, gíei^tg (=er, ^e, »eS), industrious. SSequem' (=et:, »e, «eê), convenient, ^ofthar (=er, ^e, ^e«), costly, ®ut (»er, »e, »eê), good. ®raü (»er, »e, »ed), gray, (»er, »C,»e«), high (§ 89, Rem. 9). Sng (»er, »e, »e§), narrow, Krumm (»er, »e, »eä), crooked, gein (»er, »e, »e§), fine, @roh (»er, »e, »el), coarse. I SSeiß (»er, »e, eê), whit«, @dimar3 (»er, »e, »eê), black. 3îoti) (»er, »e, »eS), red, 33iau (»er, »e, »eb), blue, @eíb (»er, »e, »eê), yellow, @rün (»er, »e, »e§), green, ©raun (ser, »e, »e?), brown, 2)cr Krug,—Krüge, the pitcher „ ©attíer, ——, the saddler, 2)ÍC Sîofe, —,pï. —u, the rose, „ (Strate, —,pl. —u, the street, SaÖ gutter, —^,pl. —, the lining. „ Seber, —§, pi. —, the leather, „ Staffer, —ë,pl. —, the water. Scbed'eu, to cover, Çutteru, to line, 'ípfíüdeu, to pluck, pick. Grammatical. 1, Adjectives, when used to complete the statement or predication of feilt, tuevbcn, and some other intransi¬ tive verbs, are said to be usedpredicativel^ : 2)a8 SBetter ift í)CÍf, The weather is hot, S)a§ iSSettcr töirb í)CÍfj, The weather is becoming hot. Rem. 1. When thus used, they are frequently termed predicative adjectives. Rem. 2. Adjectives used predicatively are indeclinable. 2, Adjectives, when used before nouns to directly modify them, are said to be used attributively. Rem. When thus used, they are frequently termed attributive adjectives. 3, Adjectives used attributively, and not preceded by other qualifying words, are declined as follows : Masculine. (Good man.) AW gutiCr Ülíanu. Gen. gut»cn älianue«. Dat gut»em SJiauuc. Acc. 9Ut»cit aiiauu. SINGULAR, Feminine. (Good woman,) gut = C gi^au. gut»cr grau, gut»er grau, g u t • c grau. Neuter. (Good child.) gut Í CÖ Kiub. gut »eil KtubeS g u t » cm Ktnbc. gut»cS Kiub. OLD DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES. 59 PLURAL. Novi. g II t » c SJÎânner. g u t ^ c grauen. g u t = c Ätnber. Gen. g u t = cc SJÎâuner. g u t « ct grauen. g u t ^ et ^nber. Dal. g u t = cn 2}îânnern. g u t « en grauen. g u t » cit Siubern. Acc. g u t ; c SJÎânner. g u t « t grauen. g u t = c iîinber. Rem. The plural of the adjective is the same for all genders. 4. Adjectives declined as above are said to be of the) Old Declension. 5. The same termination is given to the adjective when the noun is understood as when it is expressed : (Sr ^at IblûUtë gabier nub He has blue paper and i(b ^abc (gabier), I have white (paper). 6. In German, proper adjectives formed from names of countries do not begin with capital letters : .Çaben 0ie beutjcbe 53il(^er ? Have you German books? Rem. 1. Titular epithets, however, usually begin with capitals: 2)er S'îorbbeutid^e SSunb, The North German Confederation. Rem. 2. Proper adjectives formed from names of cities or of persons begin with capital letters : ®te ÍÍDÍnift^e Rettung, The Cologne Gazette. 2)ie Santfibe # Kant's Philosophy. Exercise 36. 1. Professor Lindemann has two Italian and three French newspapers. 2. Have you (any) Dutch books ? 3. No, but we have German, French, and Spanish books. 4. Mr. Meyerheim has laid two beautiful and expensive books on the table. 5. The saddler has been buying yellow and black leather. 6. The bookbinder has not bound the books with green leather. 7. He has bound the books with red leather. 8. The tailor will line the coat with brown cloth. 9. The child has picked three white roses. 10. Costly books are sometimes not very instructive. 11. The Cathedral at Cologne will have two very high towers. 12. They will be four hun¬ dred and seventy-six feet high. 13. Mr. Rieger bought two large and beautiful paintings. 14. He paid for the paintings eight hundred and ninety dollars. 60 POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. LESSON XIX. POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. üJíeín 35rubcr l^at mein S3u(^, 2Öer l^at meinen SSIeífiíft ? Sodann í)at 3^ten 55íetftíft, '9i)íeitt 53ruber ^at feine ©ü^er, 200 ftnb beine 33ü(í)er ? 200 ftnb eure 53üc^er ? 2Ö0 ftnb 23ü¿^er ? ©ie l^aben i^re 33ü(^er, ©ie ^ût i^re 53Ü!^er, Œr í)at feine S3üc^er, 2Bir ^aben unfere 53üc^er, My brother has my book. Who has my pencil ? John has your pencil. My brother has his books Where are your books ? n n n " ?? 5> jj They have their books. She has her books. He has his books. We have our books. ©icBcnunbbrci^igfte 2íufgak* 1. 20aê fmí^en ©ie? 2. 3^ fu^e meine Sücber. 3. SDîrin 2>aíer ift nic^t ju ^oufe. 4. iWein ©ro^oater bat meinem 55ru^ ber ein 23u^_ gefcbenft. 5. ^err 2)ie5, feine grau unb feine 2:od)ier Katharina gnb beute in ^ot^bam. 6. 9)îein -^Setter bot oorgefteru feine Sltern in 3ena befucbt. 7. Äarl, buft bu beb nen S3íeigift gefunben ? 8. Einher, bubt ibr eure Slufgaben oolli mbet ? 9, 2)ie ©á)üíer buben ibre ?efiionen febr gut gelernt. 10. SDîarie but gefagt,ba^ ge ibre Xante beute mabrfd^einlid) be^ fucben mirb. 11. .^aben ©ie meinen S3ruber beute gefeben? 12. 3U/ icb fub 3bt^en 33ruber beute 2)7orgen im éíufeum. 13. ©eben ©ie nid)t ben Xburm beê Xomeê ? 14. Sieb ja, id) febc ibn! 15.-^aben ©ie bie 97acbricbten beute Slîorgen gelefen? 16. 3U/i^tu^ge in3bi^er3eitung. 17. 2ßa^ lefen ©ie ? 18. 3cb tefe bie ©efdbicbte ¿eutfcblanb^. 19. Slîein ¿beint but meb ner ©cbtuefter baê 53ud) gegeben. 20. .^err Sliemeper but mir geftern Slbenb gefügt, bap er oorgeftern meinen ©ropoater unb meine ©ropmutter in Slîugbeburg gefepen but. 21. SWcinc Qcb tcrn gnb beute in SDîagbeburg. POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 61 Vocabulary. Í5cr2)íctnn,—e8,p/.2)îâtmcr,theman, íSiC Srail, —, pl. —en, the woman, w II II n II r tf II the husband. 25ater, —S,pl. 2?äter, the father. @D^n, —c^fpl. 0ë^ne, the son. S3ruber, —S,/?/. Sriibcc, brother. Dl^eini, —8,pl- —c, the uncle. Setter, —§,;agcr, —§, pi. ©c^^träger, brother-in-law. ©tieibater, stepfather. ©tieffotin, stepson. It tt wife. 3)hitter,—2Jíütter, mother. Seester,—,pl. îôc^ter, daughter, ©c^tbefter, —,pl. —n, the sister. Sante, —, pi. —n, the aunt. Soiifi'ne, —,pl. —n, the cousin. 9iic^te, —,pl. —n, the niece, ©ro^mutter, the grandmother. Urgroßmutter, the gi-eat-grand- mother. (Snicltu —,pl. —uen, the grand¬ daughter. ©c()tbiegermutter, mother-in-law. ©d^ibiegertoc^ter, daughter-in-law ©c()ibägertn, —, pl. —neu, sister- in-law. ©tieimutter, stepmother, ©tieitoc^ter, stepdaughter. Present Infinitive. geb' Í en, to give, I e f en, to read, Í e ^ en, to see, Imperfect Indicative. gag, gave, Í a €, read, fag, saw, Perfect Participle. Í en, given, ge^iefien, read, ge Í f e g en, seen. Grammatical. 1. The following are the Possessive Pronouns : Neut. itnfer, euer, igr, (ygr, Masc. Fem. Neut. Masc. Fern. mein, betn, fein, meinte, mein, my. imfer. unfer=e. betune, bein, fein. thy. ener. eur^e. feinde, his. igr. igr=e. igr, tgr=e, igr, her. (3gr, Sgr-e, fein, feinde, fein. its. 2. The Possessive Pronoun mctU, my, is our. your, their, your. J follows : Masculine. (My brother.) Horn, mein Sruber. Gen. tncttt'CS Sruber?. P>at. mein^cm Sruber. Acc. tnein-Cit Sruber. SINGULAR. Feminine. (My sister.) ntCtitiC ©d^mefîer. ntCWiCr 0cgtbe[ter. meinscr ©d;mefter. ntein-C ©tgrnefler. Neuter. (My book.) mein Sud;. ntCiiliCÖ SucgeS. mcin=cm Sutge. mein Sudg. 62 POSSESSIVE PEONOUNS, Nojn. mciUiC Srüber. ^Jen. mciiîîCC 33rüber. l>at. mein=en SSrübern. ÄCC. niCiltíC 53rübev. inctn=e Silver. inciníer S3üd;er. íttcinícn iöüdjcrn. mcin-C Süd^er. PLUEAL. jltcittiC 0c^ti3eftcrit. mcillíer @d;ireftern. OTCiníCn ©(^tueftcra. wciiiíe 0d^tr>eftern. Rem. The plural is the same for all genders. 3. Possessive Pronouns are declined like ntciît» Rem. 1. In declining unfcr, t is sometimes dropped from the terminations '-m, =cn. Rem. 2. In declining CUCt, the C after CU is usually dropped. PLUEAL,, ; eure. SINGULAE. euer, eure, euer eures, eurer, eures ; eurer, eurem, eurer, eurem; euren SINGULAE. PLUEAL. Nom. unfer, uniere, unjer ; uufere. Gen. unjerS, unferen, unferS ; unferer. Dat. unferm, unferer, unjerm ; uniern. Acc. uniern, uniere, unjier ; uniere. Rem. The same laws that govern the use of bU and tilt (see Lesson XI.^ govern the use of their derivatives bCtll and CUet* 4. The Indicative Mode of gcicn, to give : euren, eure, euer : eure. Present Tense. id) gCb'= tf I give, bu gibft/ thou givest. er gtíih he gives, tnir g e £> '= eit, we give. ti)r g e b '« t, yon give, fie g e b '= en, they give. Perfect Tense. gcgcb'en, etc., I have given, etc. First Future Tense. ic^ öjcrbc gcb'en, etc., I shall give, etc. imperfect Tense. I gave, thou gavest. he gave, we gave, you gave, they gave. gab, bu gabft, er gab,, mir g a b 'í en, ii)r gab'it, fie g aben. Pluperfect Tense. ttf) l^attc gcgeb'en, etc., I had given, etc. Second Future Tense. i(b toerbe gcgeb'en baben,etc., I shall have given, etc. 5. The Present Tenses of (cfcn, to read, and of to see : id; lefiC, I read, bu iiefeft, thou readest. er lieft, he reads, .■»ir Í c t '= en, we read, i^r Ícf'ít, you read, fie Í e i'== en, they read. i(f) fci)'=e, I see. bu fiebft, thou seest. er îicbtf he sees, mir i e b '= cn, we see. ibr f e b '= t, you see. fie i C b en, they see. Rem. The compound tenses of fefcn and fefjCn are formed in the same manner as those of geben* 3d; babe geíefcn, etc. Wbc gefebcn, etc. NEW DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES. 63 Exercise 38. 1. Have you seen my gloves? 2. Yes, your gloves are on the table. 3. The child sees its father and its mother. 4. Have you read the letter from your uncle in Bonn? 5. I have not read it yet. 6. Our teacher says that we have learned our lessons very well. 7. John, hast thou finished thy exercise? 8. Children, have you found your books ? 9. The news (j9^.) from America in your newspaper is very interesting. 10. William Meyer says that his parents are now in Dres¬ den. 11. Henry Rauh says that his aunt is very sick. 12. John Meyer says that his uncle has sold his house and his garden. 13. My sister has not yet read the book. 14. My father gave me {dat.) the book. 15. The tailor has mended my coat. 16. William is visiting his great-grandfather. 17. Miss Weigand is my cousin. 18. Mr. Richter is my brother-in-law. LESSON XX. NEW DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES. î)er grc^e ift in fcem gro?: The large table is in tlie 3iniiner, large room. T)ie teutfd)e 0pra^c ift wírlíííí^ The Gî-erman language is [e^r fc^roierig, really very difficult. 3ci) legte baê gro^e 53uc^ auf I laid the large book on ben grofen Xifc^, the large table. 0)ie beutfd)en 53ü^er ftnb ouf The German books are on ben grc»§en Xifd)en, the large tables. Sîcununbbrci^igftc îiufgabc» Iv Die 5iuêrpra(|e ber beutfd)en 0prad)c ift fet)r fraft^oU, ober fte ift uic^t febr iveid). 2. 2ßem gepren biefe neuen 53üí djcr? 3.0ie gei>ören jenem reid)cn Äoufmanne. 4. 9?id)t alle 64 NEW DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES. íeí;rretc^en 33üc^er ftiib iutercffont. 5. ^Jííc^í jebe^ 53uc^ {ft le^r# reic^. '6*. ^err 0^auer wo^nt in jenem grofen |)aufe gegen^ über bem Svenen Sííufeum. 7. SSov einigen Xagen (some days ago) ^abe iá) einige beutfc^e unb fronjöftf^e S3üc|er in Çeip^ig getauft» 8. ^evr ^rofejfor ©c^auer i)at öieie italienifc^e 53üc^er in feiner S3ibIiotbef» 9» 3ener fd)tt)arjc Ueberrocî ift p groji für mic|» 10. 0iefe ameritanifc^en @ummifci)u^e fofteten brei Xi)aler. 11. 2)ie g'arben ber preufifc^en ga^ne ftnb fci)n)ar3 unb meif. 12. 2)ie gorben ber amerifanifc^en ga^ne ftnb rotb, meif unb blau. 13. 2)ie 5irmee beê 91orbbeutfc^en ^unbeê t)at je|t ad)t()unbert taufenb 0olbaten. 14. 3n welken 0täbten 2)eutfc^Ianbb waren ©ie? 15. SBir waren in mehreren grofen ©täcten, befonberê in 33erUn, ©rebben, Sßien, SJtünc^en, ©tutt? gart unb iîbin. 16. Äöln ift auf ber Unten ©eite unb ©)üffe(¿ borf ift auf ber ret^ten ©eite beê 9î^einê. 17. ^err ?übcmann woi;nt auf ber redeten ©eite ber ©träfe, ber neuen Äirt^e gegen? über. 18. ©a^fen gei)ört je^t ^um 57orbbeutf(^en ^unb. 19. 3)iefer Ueberrocf gehört ^errn Dr. SDlefferfc^mibt. Silier, —e, —e€, all. Slnberer, —e, —es, other. 2)tefer, —e, —eS, this. Einiger, —e, —eS, some, any. @tíict)er, -^e, —es, some, any. [ed. (Srwä^lt'ter, —e, —eS, before mention- goigenber, —e, —eS, following. ^eber, —e, —es, each, every. ¿ener, —e, —es, that. Slíainfier, —e, —eS, many (a). SJÎe^rere (only in pl.}, several. Solcher, —e, —cS, such. SJerjd^ie'bener, —e, —es, various. 3)ieíer, —e, —es, much, many. fSBeíüíer, —e, —es, which ? what ? SBenigev, —e, —eS, little, few. 9íorbbeutíá;, North-German. ?ßreuf tfd;, Prussian. S3atri[c^, Bavarian. @â(bîiî(b/ Saxon. Vocabulary. S)Cr 53unb,—eS, Confederation. „ Ueberrod, —eS, pi. Ueberrode^ overcoat. „ @unimtid}ub, —tê,pl. —e. India- rubber over-shoe. 2)ie Slrmee', —Slrme'en, army. „ ga^ne,n,flag. „ garbc, —,pL —n, color. „ @eite, —,pl. —n, side, page. „ ©praise,—,pl.—n, language. t, SlllSfpracpe, pronunciation. 2«t, old. 91eu, new. ÄraftboU, full of power, energetic. SBetd;, weak, soft. 9ted;t, right (right hand, adj.). Siuf, ieft (left hand, adj.). befon'berS, especially, îtmerifa'nifd;, American. ©nglifcp, English. NEW DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES. 65 Grammatical. 1. Adjectives are declined in the New Declension as follows : Masculine. (The good man.) Noin. bcr gut ^ c 3Jîamt. Sen. be3 gut «en SJîanneê. Dat. bem gut«en SJÎaune. Acc beu gut«en 2)îann. iVbm. bte g u t « en SJÎanner. Gen. bergut«en 2}îânner. Dat. beu g u t « en 3)îâunern. Acc. bie gut;en 3)îânner. SINGULAR. Feminine. (The good womau.) bte gnt Í C grau, ber gut«en grau, ber gut«en grau, bte g u t « c grau. PLURAL. bie gut«en grauen, ber g u t « en grauen, ben gu t« en grauen, bie gut «en grauen. Neuter. (The good child.) ba§ gnt í C ííinb. bcâ g u t « en Sinbe§. bent gut «en iîinbe. ba0 g u t « e iîinb. bie gut. ber gut. beu g u t. en linbcro en Sinber. en átinbcru. bie gut«en Siiiber. 2. Adjectives are declined according to the New De* dension when preceded by : 1. The definite article ber, btc, baê. 2. Any adjective pronoun that is declined accord¬ ing to the Old Declension, as biefer, jcber, jener, manlier, foic^ev, welcher (including all except pos; sessive pronouns) ; see § 89, Dem. 1, Obs. Rem. After thQplurals alte, aubere, einige, etíid^e, îeine, mantee, foí^e, weíd^e, me()rere, hiele, tuenige, the adjective usually drops sn in the nom. and acc. PLURAL. Nom. alte gut«c Süc^er. Gen. cïïer gut«en Sücjjer. Dat. allen gut«cn S3ü¿^ern. Acc. alle gutiC 33üc^er. eiitige gut«c 93ü^er. einiger gut«cn S3ücj)er. einigen gut«cn 53ü^ern. einige gutsc SSüijier. hiele gut«c Silber, hieler gut«cn S3ücj)er. hielen gut«cn S3ü(^ern. hiele gut«c Süd^er. 3. If several adjectives succeed the words aller, ber, biefer, etc., they all follow the New Declension : Ör ^at biefe neu«cn beutfd;;Clt He has bought these new German boois. ißüdjer geîauft, 4. The preposition JU is used after gci^örcn when this t'erb signifies to belong to, in the sense of to be apart of ; @ad?ien geliBrt Jltnt 5îorbbeut« Saxony belongs to (is a part of) the fd)en S3unb, North German Confederation, (but) 2)a8 S3ud; gehört bcm Serrer, The book belongs to the teacher. 66 MIXED DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES. Exercise 40. 1. The pronunciation of the Italian language is soft, but still (bod^) energetic. 2, To whom does this new hat belong ? 3. It belongs to Mr. Behr. 4. Frankfort belongs now to Prussia. 5. The Few Museum in Berlin is very large and imposing. 6. It is 340 feet long. 7. The Old Museum is not so large. 8. It is 276 feet long, 170 feet deep, and 83 feet high. 9. The New Museum is behind the Old Museum. 10. The colors of the Austrian flag are black and yellow. 11. The col¬ ors of the Italian flag are red, white, and green. 12. On which side of the street do you live (reside) ? 13. We live on the right side of the street, just opposite the neAv house of (the) Mr. Kranzler. 14. What does this cloth cost a yard? 15. The blue cloth costs five dollars a yard. 16. The black cloth costs four dollars and twenty groschens a yard. 17. The Austrian army has eight hundred thousand soldiers. 18. The tower of the new church is a hundred and forty feet high. 19. thought a few (einige) German books this morning. 20. I have not many (sieíe) German books. 21.1 have read many (manche or yiele) German books. 22. I have only a few (nur wenige) German books. LESSON XXI. MIXED DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES. !9?eitt neuer 9îocï íft ju gro§, My new coat is too large. 5lari (lût meinen neuen Oîocf, Charles has my new coat. 2)a^ ^inb l^at ein neucê ^uc^, The child has a new book. Berlin ift cine groÇe unb eine Berlin is a large and ver^ fei)r ft^öne 0iabi, beautiful city. Ç)ûben ©ie unfer neue^ ^au^ Have you seen our new gefe()en ? house ? 3B(? ifl 3^r neuer 53leijlift ? Where is your new pencil ? MIXED DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES. 67 (SinunbDicr^igftc ?íufgok» 1. 0ie meine beutfc^e ©ramma^tif I;eute gefei)en? 2, 3{)v beuif(^e^3 Çefebud) ifi auf meinem 2;if^e, neben meiner fraiií jöfif^en ©rammatif, aber beutfd)e ©rammatif (;abe id) feilte ni^t gefeben. 3. SJîarie ^at i^re italienifc^e ©rammatif míegí; í)aben Sie jte ge[eí)en? 4. 3d) í)abe fie í)eiite nid)t gefe^en. 5. Sie 5íermel 3í)veé neuen gradeé {tnb ju lang. 6. 9îein, ber S^neiber l^at ií)n gan^ (exactly) nad^ ber neuen SDîobe gemacht. 7. ^einri^ Sietric^ ()at einen f^marjen Ueber? rod beftellí. 8. Ser togen meiner meipen 2Befíe ift ju breit. 9. Síber bic íffiefte papt 3í)nen ganj gut. 10. Ser S3ater í)at bem ílinbe ein fd)ôneê neueê ^ud) oerfproc^en, meil eê feine ceutfcben 5dufgaben fo gut unb f^neïï gelernt l)at. 11. |)err Seperlein behauptet, bap ^err ©eííert für feine neuen ©emätbe jmeitaufenb ad)t^unbert unb oierjig Staler beja^ít í)at. 12. Sin Sieb í)at mir I)eute baê Safc^entud) auö ber îiaf^e geftoí)len. 13. 2Öilf)elm í)at ben neuen ^rug jerbroc^en. 14. Sab SDîufter 3í)reb neuen ^leibeb ift fei)r fc^ön. 15. 5inna í)at í)eute ein fc^marjeb ^ieib, einen 9îegenfd)irm, einen Sonnenf^irm unb ei? nen blauen ©d)íeter gefauft. 16. Sab gormat^ biefer franjöjti f^en ©rammatif ift ¿u grop. Vocabulary. Ser Stcrmcl, —6, pl. —, sleeve. „ Äragcn, —pl. —, collar. „ ^rad, —c8, pi. gräcfc, dress coat. „ (2cí)íetcr, —8, pl. —, veil. „ 9îcgcnfd;trm, —c8, pl. —e, um¬ brella. n the pattern. (/ Meib,—c8,7>/.—er, dress. (pl. Kleiber, dresses, clothes.) tt Sefcbud), reading-book, reader. tt Said;entud;,pocket handkerchief 9îad;, according to, after. 33ei)aup'teu assert. Semev'ien, observe, notice. SSeftel'len, order, engage. SBerle'gen, to misplace. Raffen (with dat.), to fit, become. 3erbre'd)en (irreg.), to break in (ot into) pieces 68 MIXED DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES. Grammatical. 1. Adjectives are declined according to the MAxeU Declension when preceded hj Si possessive jpronoun, hy ein {áne^M^ an)^ or by ÍCÍn {no, not any) ; SENGULAK. Feminine, (My new vest.) meine neu^c SSefte. meiner neu^eit SSefte. meiner nenien äBefte. meine nea^c Söefte. PLURAL, meine nenien SBeften. meiner nennen Söeften. meinen nennen Söeften. meine nennen SSeften. 2. Table of the terminations of the three Declensions of adjectives : 1. The Old Declension : Adjective alone before the substantive. 2. The New Declension : Adjecth'e preceded by bcf, ticfcr, etc. 3. The Mixed Declension ; Adjective preceded by Cin^ IttCilt, etc. Masculine. (My new coat.) Nom. mein nen^^cr 9îoci. Gen. meineê nennen 9îccieê. Dat. meinem nen^eu 9îocie, Äcc. meinen nen-cn Sîotf. Nom. meine nen==ert 9îô{fe. Gen. meiner nenien 9îë(Îe. Dat. meinen nennen ilíoden. Acc. meine nemen Síode. Neuter. (The new book.) mein ncn^cö i8n(t. meines neUíClt Snt^eS. meinem neníCti Snd^e, mein nen^cá i8u¿^. meine nen^cit Süd^er. meiner nennen SSüc^er. meinen nemcit Süi)ern. meine nen^cu Sücter. 1. Old Declen- 2. New Declen¬ 3. Mixed Declen- sien. sion. sion. Masc. Fem. Neut. Mase. Fem. Neut. Masc. Fem. Neut. ,• «er, «es. «e, «e, «e. «er. «es. s «en, «er. «en. «en, «en, «en. «en. «en. «en. s «em. «er. «em. «en, «en, «en. «en. «en. «en. «en, «es. «en, «e, «e. «en. ^e, íes. «c. «en (e), «en (e), «en (e). «en. «en. «en. c «er. «er. «er. «en, «en, «en. «en. «en. «en. «en. «en. «en. «en, «en, «en. «en. «en. «en. 's «e. «en (e), «en (e), «en (e). «en, «en, «en. Rem. 1. In the seventy-two endings of these three declensions, «CU occurs forty-four times, fifteen, »Cf seven«, CÖ four times, and «cnt twice. Rem. 2. The mixed declension is like the old in the nominative and accusa¬ tive singular ; in the other cases it is like the new declension. Rem. 3. The similarity between the new declension of nouns and the new declension of adjectives is very striking. Rem. 4. The dative plural of all articles, nouns, adjectives, and pronouns fexcept itnÖ and CUdj)» ends in *IU COMPARISON OP ADJECTIVES. 69 Exercise 42. 1. I have mislaid my German Eeader; I have been looking for it a long time, but I have not found it yet. 2. There it is on the table under my German Grammar. 3. Have you read your German newspaper? 4. No, I have not yet read it ; do you wish it? 5. Have you noticed the new cap of the child? 6. Yes, it fits him very well. 7. Have you found your umbrella ? 8. Have you seen my German Reader? 9. Have you ordered a pair of boots ? 10. No, I ordered a pair of shoes. 11. The collar of his overcoat is too wide. 12. The child has broken the cup and the saucer. 13. Charles bought this morning a dozen pocket-handkerchiefs, a new vest, an umbrella, and a pair of India-rubber over-shoes. 14. Breslau has a hundred and fifty thousand inhabitants. 15. The Cathedral at Freiburg is three hundred and twenty feet long and a hundred feet wide. 16. The tower is three hundred and ninety-six feet high. COMPARISON < 5)iefe Ätrc^c ífl fc^ön, jene íft fd)öner, itnb jene bort ift bie fc^önfte bon allen, gräulein 53raun fingt fc^ön, gräulein Stein fingt f^oner, ober grönlein Sange fingt am [c^önften, ji^eute werben wir beffereê 2Betí ter l^aben, Sr wünfc^t baê bcjle Xud), XXII. r ADJECTIVES. This church is beautiful, that (one) is more beauti¬ ful, and that (one) yon¬ der is the most beauti¬ ful of all. Miss Brown sings beauti¬ fully, Miss Stein sings more beautifully, but Miss Lange sings most beautifully. We shall have better weath¬ er to-day. He wishes the best cloth. 70 COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. 2)retunböicr5tgftc 5lufgaBc. 1. ©iefe^ ©emalbc ift mel fc^öner ol^ jene^. 2. ^eutc ifl bc0 SBetter milber afê eê geftern war. 3. .Ç)aben 0ic bte neuci fteu 97a(^ricí)ícn gehört ? 4. ^aben 0íe bie legten 97ac|ríc|ten geíefen? 5. 3)er ^í)urm beê 3)Dme^ ju S5íen ift ber ^öi^fte in ber Söelt. 6. 0)ie 0c^neefoppe, ber í)0(^fte S3erg tn 9íorbí unb 2)íítteííDeutfd)lanb, ift 4960 gup l^o^. 7. 2)íe 3)onau ift bet längjie gíuf in 2)eutfc^lanb. 8. ®er fürjefte 3Beg »on Berlin naci) ^ariê ift über 3[)îagbeburg unb Äöln. 9. ^eute ift ber fürjefte 3^ag beê 3cií)re^» 10. 53aron »on 91ot^fd)iib war ber reid^fte 9?îann in ber SBelt. 11. 5ilbre(|t 2)ürer war ber berübm? tefte beutfc^e SJíaíer beê 31îittelalterê. 12. 3u Slürnberg befon^ berö §at er »ieíe fdjone ©emälbe gemalt. 13. 2)er fleine gri^ (Freddy) ift ein allerliebfteê Äb. 14. ^einric^ ift nic^t fo alt wie 3o^ann, aber er ift ^wei 3ci^re ölter afô 2Öill)elm. 15. I^err (General »on granfenftein war in ber 0d)la(i^t me§r tapfer al^ »orjtc^tig. 16. 2)te ©efc^ic^te beê brei^igjä^rigen ílriege^ il ^öc^ft intereffant. 17. Slîein jüngfter ©ruber ift fedi$ 3ai)re alt. 18.2líünd)en ift bie größte 0tabt in ©aient. 19. 0ie ifl »iel großer al^ 91ürnberg ober Slugêburg. 20. ©aben ift ein we^ nig gröfer ûlê 0ac^fen. 21. ©aiern ift »iel gröper alé ©aben. Vocabulary. 2)cr Saron', ——e, baron. , ©encrai', —8, pl. ©enerale, gen¬ eral. „ Dberft, —en,;>/. —en, colonel. „ gíu|3, —eg, pl. gíüífe, river. „ SCBeg, —eê, pl. —e, way, road. ®te @á;íad;t, —, pl. —en, battle. „ SBeít, —,pl. —en, world. 'J)aô Sllter, —^,pl. —, age. „ ÏÏJÎittelaÎter, Middle Ages. ?[Rittci>®eutid;Ianb, Central Gennany. 233cnig(a4/' adv.^, little, îllg, as, than. 2ÜÍC, as, than. 3Sietleid)t', perhaps. 53erü^ntt', famous, renowned. Sieb, dear, cherished. ®ret§igjät)ng, thirty years' (war), ©iebenjai^rig, seven years' (war). 9)íiíb, mild. ©tilrmifd.;, stormy, tempestuous. ÍÍapter, valiant, brave. ^orfid^tig, prudent. Sung, young. ÍÍurj, short. Sren, true, faithful. ©anj {adj.), entire, whola Sept, last, latest. SSovtg, last, preceding. ®ort, there, yonder. COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. 71 Grammatical. 1. Adjectives are compared by adding to the positive degree =cr for the comparative degree, and^ft or iCft for the superlative degree. Rtm. When the positive ends in «í, «g, A), A, 07 sU, the .superlative is formed by adding ^Cft. Positive. Comparative. Superlative. fttll. fine. feinter. finer. feiUift, finest. reid;. rich. reid;=cr. richer. reicb=ft, richest. i(bön. beautiful. f^bn^er. more beautiful. fcbbUift, most beautiful. milb. mild. miib^cr. milder. miib^Cft, mildest. laut. loud. Iaut=cr, louder. iaut'Cft, loudest. íieig, hot. bdg'Cr, hotter. l^eig'Cft, hottest. mr false. faii(b-cr. falser. falfc^'Cft, falsest. frob. happy. Irob'Cr, happier. fro^^Cft, happiest. frei. free. irct^cr. freer. fret=cft, freest. treu. true. trcu^cr. truer. trcu^cft, truest. 2. When the positive is a monosyllable, the radical vowel, if Û, 0, or u, usually takes the umlaut in the com¬ parative and superlative degrees : ait, old, warm, warm, tang, long, groh, coarse, iurj, short, jung, young, ält'Cr, older, WärmiCr, warmer, iang^er, longer, gröb^cr, coarser, ÍÜrgc 5ínjeígcn ftnb auf bcr ftcbcntcn unb a^tcn 0eíte bcr tung. 4. T)íc íclegtab^ífd)c 2)epe'fd)c non ^mcrífa ífl ungcfci(;r in bcr 2?íittc bcr niertcn 0paltc auf bcr brítícn 0ctíc bcr bíeíígwt D 74 ORDINAL NUMBERS. I^eutigen bie i^epefc^e {|î »on fe^r gropem Bntercffe. 5. 2)en Urfprung bcê SBorteê „3)íe[fer" loerbcn 0íe im jioeíí ten 53ûnbe ber bríííen Síufíage beê beutfc^en SSorterbuc^eê »on „0c|miit^enner", auf ber í)unbert oc^tunboierjígften 0e{te, in ber ncununbjman^igften unten, finben. 6. d^riftop^ doiumbuê |)at Slmerifa am Ilten Oftober 1492 entbeit. 7. gviebric^ ber B^^cíte, gen)ö^n1ic| ber ®rope genannt, ftarb am 17ten Síuguft 1786. 8. dr mar ber brüte Äönig »on^reufen. 9. griebrid) Sßil^elm ber SSierte, ber fec^fte Äöntg »on ^reufen, ftarb am 2ien Banuar 1861. 10. ©ötbe ftarb in Sßeimar am 22ften ^Dfärj 1832. 11. ©exilier ftarb in SÖeimar am 9ten 3)7at 1805. 12. Sitbre^t 2)ürer mar ber gröfte beutfc^e 2fîaler beê loten unb 17ten Bu^r^unbert^. 13. SJîontag mar ber erftc Banuar. 14. Oienfiag mar ein \t\)x Reifer 2:ag. Vocabulary. 3)er S3anb, —e§, pl. S3änbe, volume. „ töuig, —S,pl. —e, king. „ Äaifev,—§,/>/.—emperor, „ Îîreiî3jug, —es,/)/, ^reujjügc, cru¬ sade. ©tod, —es, stoiy (of a house). ^f;iÍDtopt)', —en,/)/. —en, philos¬ opher. „ llrfprnng, —S, origin. •Die 51 njetge, —,/)/. —n, advertisement „ Huflage, —, pl. —n, edition. „ ©epe'fd^e, —,pl. —n, dispatch. „ Siteratnr',—,/>/. —en,literature „ SRitte, —,/)/. —n, middle, ©palte, —, pl. —n, column. 3eiíc —,/)/.—n, line. ff 'f V V 2)aS @nbe, —s,/)/. —n, end. „ 3ntereffe, —S, interest. „ SBort, —eS, pl. Söörter, word. „ Söörterhnd;, dictionary. Sorgen, to borrow. ®auern, to last, endure. (Sntbed'en, to discover. ©terben (irreg.^^ to die. Oenannt', named, called. @emöpn'It(p, usual. Ungefähr (adv.), about, nearly. Son oben, from above, from the top. Son unten, fi-om below, fi-om the Iwt- tom. heutig (adj.), of to-day, to-day's. §iefig (adj.), of this place. Grammatical. 1, The Ordinal Numbers are formed from the Cardinal Numhers : 1. By suffixing from jtoci to ncunjcl^n. 2. " " iftc, " stnanjig upward. Ran. Tn compound numbers onhj the last one takes the euflSx. ORDINAL NUMBERS. 75 Ist Scr crftc. 40th Ser bicrgtgdie. 2d tf suicide. 50th tt funigigdtc. 3d tf britde. 60th tf icc^gigdte. 4th tt bicr^tc. 70th ff ftcbcngig^te, or ftcb^ 5th tt íünfde. sisTic. 6th tt jcd^sde. 80th tf aá?tsigdtC. 7th tt íiebcn=íe. 90th It ncungigdíe. 8th tt ad;t=e. 100th tt ímnbcrt'fíe. 9th tt ncuHite. 101st tf ^unbert unb erftC. 10 th ft SeiindC. 125th tf ^unbcrtiitnfunbgibau* 11th tf elide. siadic. 12th tf glbüíídC. 200th tt gibci^unbcrLfte. 13th tf breigcíinde. 500th tt iilní()unbertdíe. 14th tt bicrgcimde. 1,000th It taufcnbdíe. 15th tt Íiinígcí;nrie. 1,001st tt taufenb unb erfte. 16 th tt jcdigc^nde. 1,026th tf taujenb ícci)8unbgiban» 17 th ft jlcbcngc^nde, or fiebge^ndC. SiS'îiC. 18th tt ac^tgc^ttdC. 1,626th ft taufenb ic(^8^unbcrt 19th tt ncungcfptííe. unb icc^8unbgtban<^ 20ih ft Sttansigdíc. sig-'itc. 21st tf cinunbgibangig=fte. 2,000th tt gibcitaufenbifte. 25th n iünfunbgtbangigdíC. 20,000th ft gtbaitgtgtaufcnbdte. 30th tf brcibigdte. 100,000th tt ^unbcrttaufcnbifte. 35th tt füniunbbrcitigíftc. 500,000th tt fünf^unberttaufcnbíftc. liem. 1. The forms brtí^íC and üá^Ut are euphonie variations from the rule for forming ordinal numbers. Hem. 2. Ordinal numbers are subject to all the laws of declension cf adjec¬ tives {see Lessons XX., XXI., and XXII.). 2, Names of the seasons, of months, and of the days of the weeh, are masculine : 1. The Seasons (btc ^ûl^rcê^citcn) Ser 3®inter, —§, -pl. —, winter. „ grüíjíing, —6, pl. —e, spring. {Exc. Sag grü^ja^r, —e8,p7. Scr ©ointncr,—%,pl. —, summer, ^erbfl, —t^,pl. —e, autumn. -e, spring.) 2. The Months (bic 5!)îonfltc) : Scr Sa'nuar, —8, January, ge'bruar, —8, February. SDÍürj, —e8, March. 3!Il>rii', —e8, April. 3Jîat, —C8, May. 3iuni,'-'8, June. If tf tt tf Scr 3uii, —'8, July. 3iußuft', —c8, August. 0eiJtcm'bcr, —8, September. Otto'bcr, —8, October. Üíobcm'bcr, —8, November. Scjcm'bcr, —8, December. 76 ORDINAL NUMBERS. 3. The Days of the Week (bic iJdQC bcr • 25er 0oniitag, —6, pi —e, Sun¬ day. It SJÎontag, —8, pL —e, Mon¬ day. ti 2)ten|lag,—8,/7Z.—e, Tues¬ day. Ser SKitttroc^, —,pl. —e, Wednesday „ Sonnerftag, —§, pi —e, Thurs¬ day. „ ^rettag,—8, pi —e, Friday. „ ©atnfiag, —8, pi —c, Saturday. („ ©onnaheni),—8,i)Z.—e, " .) 3. Present and imperfect tenses of fictbcit, to die : Present Tense. ic^ ftcrb'^C, I die. bu ftirtft, thou diest. er ftírtí, he dies. h)tr ft e r h '= cit, we die. i^r jierh'^t^ you die. fie ft C r b Cn, they die. Imperfect Tense. ftaril, I died, bu ftartft, thou diedst. er ftart, he died, iuir ft ar b Clt, we died, i^r ft a r b t, you died, fie ft a r b Ctt, they died. 4. In German the verb is often removed to the end of very long sentences {see sentence 5 in Exercise 45). 5. When the adverbial expression of time is very long, it mdij follow that of place {see Less. ///., 2). ©í^iííer ftarb in SSeimar am 9ten SJÎai Schiller died in Weimar on the ninth 1805. of May, 1805. Exercise 46. 1. I am now reading the third volume of the history of Germany by K. A. Menzel, 2. On what page are you reading? 3. I am reading on the hundred and fifty-third page, seventeen lines (m the seventeenth line) from the top (bOtt oben). 4. The advertisement of the sale of the house is in the third column of the fourth page of to-day's paper. 5. Francis the Second, em¬ peror of (son) Austria, and the last emperor of Ger¬ many, died in Vienna on the second of March, 1835. 6. Charlemagne (^arl bcr @ro§e), the first emperor of Ger¬ many, died in Aix-la-Chapelle January 28th, 814. 7. The Crusades lasted from the end of the eleventh till towards the end of the thirteenth century. 8. Friday will be the first of January. 9. Saturday was the cold¬ est day of this month. 10. Wednesday* will be the IRREGULÄR VERBS OF THE FIRST CLASS. 77 shortest day of the year. 11. Immanuel Kant, the greatest philosopher of the eighteenth century, died in Königsberg on the twelfth of February, 1804. 12. He was eighty years old when (alé) he died. LESSON XXIV. lEBEGULAR VERBS OF THE FIRST CLASS. ©ickuunbuicrsigftc 1. ®cr 0plt)at bintet fein Íafcí)entu(^ um feinen Sïrm. 2. S5erlin unb |)amburg finb bürc^ eine ©ifenbak berbunben. 3. 2)er Söunbaqt kl bie Söunben beé 0olbaten berbunben (dressed). 4. 2)er 53uc^binber kt baé S3uc^ berbunben. 5, 3d) kbe bie borle^te, aber nit^t bie le^te 5iuflage beb SBörter^ bm^eb in ber ^ud)knbíung bon ^errn Slíeper gefunben. 6. ßkh'tbk ©ottlieb èc^rôter, (an) Drganift in 9îorbkufen, ki im 3ake 1717 bab Älaöier erfunben. 7. Xrinfen 0ie lieber (do you prefer) ilk^ bber ^ajfee? 8. 3i^ trinfe lieber X^ee. 9. 2)ie 0c^üler kkn ik^ beutfc^en 5lufgaben fc^on begonnen. 10. ^err 0íra(í kl bab «^aub im borigen 3ake für 8500 gefauft ; er kl bb oorgeftern für 9100 2;i;lr. oerfauft. 11. (Sr kl babei' 600 0kb» gewonnen. 12. ¿ie Bäuerin kl bab @arn ganj gut gefponnen. 13. 0)er SSerbre^er kl bie @efege beb Sanbeb gebro^en. 14. lieber griebrit^I 2)u kfl biefe fd^önc neue 23afe gang gerbrod)en. 15. ^txx 97iebner fprid)t gu 3kft^« 16' 3)ie 5iubgaben ber 9îegierung waren biel gu gro§ ; jte entfprac^en gar nid)i ber 5lrmuti) beb ^anbeb. 17. 0er S3auer brifc^t ben 2Beigen. 18. 0ab ^inb kl bab beutfd)e Söörterbuk bon bem 0ifc^c genommen. 19. 2Bir kkn ^errn Äird)kff k^lf Slîorgen auf ber 0ira§e getroffen. 20. 2öir «treffen ik fek bft im iDîufeum. 21. 0er 3äger kl ben -^afen nik getroffen. 22.0ab Äinb kl ben ^aU über bab |)aub ge^ werfen. 23. 0er 33aumeifter k^l Kk frönen ^lan für bab neue 37atk)aub entworfen. 24.0o? ^aben 0ie iki gcfe^ kn ? 25. SleÜL aber ^err SSop kl ö^köl/ bflp er fek fc^ön ijl. 78 IRREGULAR VERBS OP THE FIRST CLASS. Vocabulary. 2)er Stnn, —zi,pL —e, arm. M, «Batte, baU. SSautneifter, —^,pL —, arcbitect Organift', —en, pi. —en, organ¬ ist. ^ian, —e§,/)/. ^läne, plan. ¿eíegra))^', —tT¡\,pí. —eu, tele¬ graph. 7 93erbre'd;er,—pl.—, criminal. tf SBetjeit, —0, wheat. n SBunbarjt, —c8, surgeon. 2)te 3irmut^, —, poverty. I, Sluggabe, —,pl. —n, expense, i; iBäuertn, —, pl. —neu, peasant II II II II y woman, peasant's wife. 3îegte'rung, —, pl. —en, govern¬ ment. 2)ie ©ifenbal^n, —,pl. —en, railroad. " iBafe, —,pl. —n, vase. ,t Söunbe, —, pl. —n, wound. 2)a§ ©tnfommen, —8, income. @arn, —i?>,pl. —e, yam. ©efeíj', —e8,p?. —e, law. Äorn, —e8,p/. Börner, grain. Sanb, —e8,i3/. Sänber, land, coun- tiy. „ 9îat()^anê, —e8, pl. 3îat^^âufcr, city hall. S) ab et', thereby; ®ar {adv.), at all. @íei(^, immediately. Sieber, rather. ©iet'trifi^, electric. iBorleljt, next to the last. Rem. It will have been noticed that most masculine and neuter nouns be¬ long to the Old Declension, and that most feminine nouns belong to the New Declension. Grammatical. 1. Irregular verbs are divided into seven classes, ac¬ cording to the changes which the radical vowel under¬ goes in forming the {principal jparts : 2. In the irregular verbs of the first class each princi¬ pal part has a different rad¬ ical vowel. Thus : 3. Irregular verbs of the first class : „ ^ . Present Indicative, Present Injinitive, Stnb^en, to bind. berbinb'iCn, to unite, to tie up, finb^en, to find, [to bind wrong. erftnb'#en, to invent, fing^en, to sing, trinhen, to drink, bcginu'^cn, to begin, gehjinn'^en, to gain. il?mn=cn, to spin. Pres. Inf. Imp. Ind. Perf. Part. h n» h ß. 0. {or) tf Û. 0. 2c? and 3c? Persons. (formed regularly. ) (< (i (formed regularly.) Imperf. Indicat. tanb, bcvbaitb, fanb, crfanb, tranf, begann, gcivann, ipann. Perfect Participle, gciinn&cn. herbunbcn. gcfunbcn. criunbcn. gefungen. gctrunîcn. begonnen» gctnonncn. ge[í)onncn. IRREGULAR VERBS OP THE FIRST CLASS. 79 6rcd)'Cn, to break. jcrfcrcd/icn, to break to pieces. iprcd;=cn, to speak. £^tf^^rcd/^cn, to correspond to, or with (^governs the dative^. berf^rec^'iCit, to promise. • brefd^ien, to thresh, ncijltt^eit, to take, fîcrbicn, to die. trcff=en, to meet, hit, shoot. Jnerf»cn, to throw, enttperf ^en, to project. bu iricOft, er íiriít, „ gerbricbft, „ibrid)t, „ entí)3rtd;[t,„4í)ri(^t, „ bcríijrid^fí, „4bnc^t, „ brifc^ft, „ brijc^t, „ ítimmft „ ttimml „ ftirbft, „ ftirbt, „ triffft, „ trifft, tptrffî, „ iPÍrft, brad), jerbrad;, ífjrad), entff^rad), berfbracf), brafá), na^m, fíarb, traf, iparf, enttbarf. gcSro^cn» jerbrocbert. ßefbrod^en. cntff3rod,)cit, berfbrod^cn gebrofd^cn. genommen. geftorben. getroffen. gemorfen. entmorfen. „ entmirffl, ffitnirft, Hern. 1. The first class contains forty-five yerhs. Rem. 2. The inseparable prefixes ÍC, (jC^ Cltt^ UCb, etc., give modifica¬ tions to the significations of verbs analogous to those given in English by the syllables be and for ; To have, hold, spealc, come, five, get. To behave, behold, bespeah, become, forgive, forget. Exercise 48. 1. The child is tying the ribbon on (um) his hat. . 2. The surgeon has been dressing the wounds of the sol¬ diers. 3. The bookbinder has bound this German Dic¬ tionary wrong. 4. Professor Morse invented the Elec¬ tric Telegraph in 1888. 5. Do you prefer tea or coffee ? 6.1 prefer (íríufe líefcer) coffee. 7. The peasant's wife is spinning the yarn. 8. That old criminal has often broken the laws of his land. 9. His expenses did not at all correspond to his income. 10. The peasant is threshing the grain. 11. Have you taken my umbrel¬ la? 12. William says that Henry took it. 18. I met your uncle, Mr. Kahn, yesterday in Leipsic. 14. The hunter has shot the hare. 15. The child has thrown his ball into the water. 16. The architect has designed (entwerfen) a very fine plan for the new church. 17. Karl Friedrich Schinkel, the most distinguished architect of the nineteenth century, drew (entwerfen) the plan for the Old Museum in Berlin. 18. Potsdam and Berlin are connected by (yerbunben burc^) a railroad. 80 IRREGULAR VERBS (CONTINUED). LESSON XXV. IKKGtlLAli VERBS OP THE SECOKD, THIRD, AND FOURTH CLASSES. 1. 0ic bic í)cuítge Bettung gcíefen? 2. 57etn, ic| ^be ftc nod) ni^t gefe()en. 3. 3)er ilaufmonn baê gemefi fen. 4. 2)er ^Keffer mift ba^ gelb. 5. (Sffen 0ie gern (do you like) Dbfl ? 6. 0^, tc^ effe feijr gern. 7. 2)a0 Äinb tfd einen 5lpfeí. 8. íjat ba^ ^utterbrob gegeffen unb bie élílc^ geíninfen. 9. ^ferb frifí baê .f)eu. 10. Äarl l^at fein bergeffen. 11. grí^, bu trütfí auf bie fi^bnen ^^íelíen unb Xuípen. 12. ©ruf oon 53ern0borf í)at ben Äönig üon ^reufen ím Suropciifc^en ^ongrep^ ju ^ari^^ oertreten. 13. 2)er ®auer gräbt einen neuen Brunnen. 14. 2)er 3äger f^tägt feinen |)unb, weit er ben 3Jîonn gebiffen (bitten) (jat. 15. 2)lein 3)iener wirb bie 5íepfeí unb bie kirnen na^ |)aufe tra? gen. 16. gräutein gran^ gejlern Slbenb ein fd)Worgeê feibe.^ m0 ^leib getragen. 17. Sine ^onb wäf^t bie anbere (one good turn deserves another). 18. feilte SD'îorgen ^oben wir breijeíjn gorelíen gefangen. 19. ^err ©teinbacçer ^at un0 fei^r freunbíí^ empfangen. 20. l^aíte í^n für (I consider him) einen el^ríi^en Slîann. 21. 3)er ^ommiö' ^at fein ©e^ í)alf erl^oíten. 22. íiDie ^ibliot^eî gu 3)reêben eníí)aít 300,000 ¿onbe unb 2800 ^anbfc^ríften. 23. 20o ifí ^einric| ? 24. Sr fi^íaft nod). 25. Sr ^at fc^on gu tange gefd)íafen. 26. 2Bo i|l SBíí()elm? 27. Sr ifl ím ©arten; id) werbe ít)n rufen. Vocabulary. 3)er Sípfeí,—^,p^- Stepfel, apple. „ Sriinnen, —S, pl. —, well. „ S)iener, —8,pl. —, servant. „ ííommis', —, pl. —, clerk. „ fiongrcü', —e6, Congress. „ 9Jîeffer, —8, pl. —, surveyor. ®te SBirnc, —, pi. —n, pear. „ goreí'íe, —,pl. —n, trout. „ 9îclîe, —,pl. —n, pink. „ Siuipe,—,]il.—n, tulip. u $anb,—,pl. ^änbe, hand. Sie 0c^riit, —,pl. —en, writing. „ §anbicl)rift, manuscript. 2)a8 i^elb, —t8,pl. —er, field. tt ©était', —e8, pi. —c, salary. f, §CU, —e8, hay. ff ^ferb, —c8, pi. —e, horse, ©ern (adv.), gladly, ivillingly. Slnber (adj.), other. ©tditb (ß^-)» honest, honorable, ©eiben, silken, silk. ©uropä'ifd;, European. IRREGULAR VERBS (CONTINUED). 81 Grammatical. 1. In irregular verbs of the second, third, anà. fourth classes, the radical vowel of the imperfect only varies from that of the present : Pres. Inf. Imp. Ind. PerfPart. No. of Verbs. Second Class, Third Class, Fourth Class, t, c (U, 0), a, ic (0, t, a (n, 0), U. 10. 14. 2. Irregular verbs of the second class : Present Infinitive. Present Indicative, 2d and 3d Persons. Imperfect Indicat. Perfect Participle, geb^en, to give. bu gibft, er gibt. gab. gegeben. bergeh'-en, to forgive. „ toergibft, tf .gibt, hergab. hergeben. feb«en, to see. fP fiebt, fab, gefeben. Icf'Cn, to read. V Uefeft, If lieft, Ia§, gclefen. meffien, to measm-e. a mifíeít, II mißt, mag. gemeffen. eff^eii, to eat. [?rtn/s). iífeft, 11 ißt. aß, gegeffen. freff^en, to eat (said of ani- frifíefl, ft frißt, fraß. gefreffen. hergeff'icn, to forget. „ hcrgiffeft, It "flißt, toergag. hergcffeu. tret^en, to tread, step. „ trittft, II tritt. trat. getreten. hertret'=eu, to represent. „ hertrittft. 11 .tritt. hertrat, gertrat. hertreten. jertret'=en, to tread. „ gertrittft. 11 .tritt. gertreten. 3. Nearly all irregular verbs with fl, 0, or flU, as the radical vowel, take the umlaut in the second and third persons singular of the present indicative. Present Tense. I strike, bu f(^ÍÜg=ft^ thon strikest. er 'hö strikes, lüir j í a ß 'í en, we strike, iíjr i í a g % et, you strike, lie i Í a g 'í en, they strike. Imperfect Tense. td^ idling, I struck, bit thou struckest. cr idling, he struck, irtr i III g 'i en, we struck, t^r f ci^ III g 'i et, you struck, fie f df) Í It g en, they struck. 4. Irregular verbs of the third class : Present Indicative, 2d and 5d Persons. Present Infinitive. gratîCii, to dig. f(^Iag=eii, to strike. trag»cii, to carrj', wear. tOafc^*íflí:=en, to sleep, ruben, to call, fto^ien, to hit, bump. 6. Many foreign words retain their original pronunci¬ ation. Thus the final 0 is silent in ^ommí0^ Exercise 50. 1. Have you read the history of the German litera¬ ture by Heinrich Kurz ? 2. I bought it a few months ago (üor einigen Slíonaíen), but I have not yet read it. 3. Have you measured the cloth? 4. Yes, it is thirty yards long. 5. What are the boys eating? 6. John is eating an apple, and William is eating a pear. 7. The horse has eaten the hay. 8. The scholars have forgot¬ ten their lessons. 9. You have stepped on the tulip. 10. The peasant has dug a deep well. 11. The boy has struck the dog. 12. The servant has carried the apples and the pears home. 13. William wore yesterday even¬ ing a black coat and a white vest. 14. I caught five trout yesterday. 15. Professor Bauer received (enipfanj: gen) them very kindly. 16. The library at Vienna con¬ tains over 300,000 volumes and 16,000 manuscripts. 17. Have you received (eri^altcn) your to-day's paper? 18. Mr. Kraus received a letter this morning from his brother-in-law, Mr. Blumenthal. 19. Mr. Friedländer says that he will sell his new house. 20. Why will he not keep the new house? 21. The old house is more convenient, and warmer than the new house. 22. Is tlie child sick? 23. Yes, but the doctor says that it has slept long enough. IRREGULAR VERBS (CONTINUED), 83 LESSON XXVI. IRREGULAR VERBS OF THE FIFTH AND SIXTH CLASSES. (Sinunbfiinfsigftc ^iufgobe, 1. 2)e0 3äger0 ^unb í)at bie beê 33aucr¿ geBiffen. 2. (Sine Älapperfd)langc Bní Ben 0o()n beê 33ouerö yorgeftern ge^ Biffcn, al^ er auf bem ®erge ^eibelBeeren pflüd^. 3. Daê Äinb greift na^ feinem ^ilbe im 0piegei 4. 2)er ^cíijei'bicí ner ^at ben Xafc^enbieB ergriffen, glei^ naci^bem er baö @eíb ge^ ftoBIen ^atte. 5. 3d) Begreife ni^t, warum griebrid) no^ nid)t an un0 gefc^rieBen 6. 2öer ^at gepfiffen? 7. Söer ^at in baö ®uc^ gefc^nitten? 8. 3)er 0(|neiber fc^neibet baö îu^. 9. ^err Äarfunfel f)at bem Kaufmann 800 gelicí;en. 10. ^err Oîaumer í)at in feinem Briefe feine 9îeife na^ bem Oîicfenri geBirge ganj leBBaft Befd)rieBen. 11. 2)er S3auer íreiBí baö SSieB auf (to) bie 3Öeibe. 12. 0ie giefen Del inê ^euer (" you add fuel to the flame"). 13. 2)er Äellner ben 3Sein in bie ©lafer gegoffen. 14. 0ie BnBen baê Biel ni^t 0ic BaBen p t)oá) gefcBoffen. 15. ^eute ift ba6 SDîufeum gefcBlof^ fen. 16. ^err 33urdBarbt B^t geflern fein Portemonnaie oerlo^ ren. 17. 3Sier Pferbe jieBen ben SBagen. 18. ^err 53raun Bnt Beute einen SBe^fel oon 600 XBív- DietricB gebogen. 19. Die Söolfen jieBen (move) nacB 0üben. 20. Die 0olba:i ten BûBen feBr tapfer gefönten. 21. Der ^orBma^er flicBt eh nen ^orB. 22. 2}îarie Bat einen feBr fcBonen Äran^ gefIod)ten. 23. dx BoB ben ÄorB auf feine 0cBulter. 24. Œr erBoB bie 0timme unb fdBrie um (for) ^ülfe. 25. Der DieB Bat gelogen unb ben Kaufmann Betrogen. Vocabulary. S5er Sort, —£?,/>/• Sorte, basket. „ Sortma^cr,—§, basket-maker. „ Sranj, —pi. Sränje, crown, garland, wreath. „ ^olijei'ttener, —á, pl. —, police¬ man. H ©pie^cí, —9,pl. —, mirror. ®cr Xafd)cnbiet,—e8, pickpocke-. „ ©üben, —8, south. „ Sterben, —8, north. „ SBagen, —8, pl. —, wagon. „ SSed)jcí, —8, pl. —, bill of ex« change, draft. „ SBein, —8, pi. —e, wine. 84 IRREGULAR VERBS (CONTINUED). S)tê —ti, berry. " ^eibeíbeere, —, whortleberry. „ 0(^lange, —^pL —ii, snake. ^la^)^erf(^Iaitge, rattlesnake. Sub, —, pi. Siibe, cow. 9íetíe, —,pl. —en, journey, trip. 0cbuiter, —,pl. —n, shoulder, ©timine, —,pl. —u, voice, [ure. SBeibe,—,pL —n, meadow, past- SBoííe, —,pl. —u, cloud. ff W t9 tr w V ®a§ 53iib, —t§,pl. —er, image. „ geuer,—§,p/. —, fire. „ Dei, —es, pi. —e, oil. „ ^ortemotinaie', —ê,pl. —^(pro. nounced p5rt-mo-nay'), purse, pocket-book. „ SBieb, —eS,p/. —c, cattle. „ 3iei, —e8, pi. —e, mark. Sebbttft und adv.'), lively, spirited. Síac^bem (conj.), after. Grammatical. 1. Irregular verbs of the ßfth and sixth classes have the same vowel in the imperfect tense as in the jpeic- feet jparticijple. 2. The radical vowel in verbs of the fifth class is al¬ ways ci \ in those of the sixth class it is usually tc or C. 3. The following table showâ the vowel changes : Present Infinitive. Imperfeet Indicative. Perfect Participle. No. of Verbs. Fifth Class. Ú, t\, h ic, b ic. 40. Sixth Class. It, c, ii, etc. h 0/ Or Or Or 0, 52. 4. Irregular Verbs in fifth class . Present Indicative, 2d and Sd Persons. (formed regularly.) Present Inßnitive. ÊCi^'CU, to bite, greifíen, to grasp, seize (after) begreif sen, to comprehend, ergreifen, to seize, lay hold of. bfeifien, to whistle, fcbnetbien, to cut. fbieiß=»en, to split. Ííiíjíen, to lend, loan, fcbreib^en, to write, befcbreib'ien, to describe. i^rei«=en, to cry (out), treibten, to drive. it n ii ii (formed regularly.) (( u a ii a ii ii ii Imperf. Indicat. gnff, begriff, ergriff, m, fcbnitt, ItcÍL fcbrieb, bef¿brieb, fcbrie, trieb. Perfect Participle, Oetiffcn. gegriffen. begriffen. ergriffen. gepfiffen. gefd^nitteu. gefbíiffen. gcficijcn. gcférieben. befrbrieben, gcfcí)riccn. getrieben. IRREGULAR VERBS (CONTINUEDj. 85 5. Irregular verbs of the sixth class : Present Infinitive. Present Indicative, Imperfect Perfect 2d and Zd Persons. Indicat. Participle, gie^îCn, to pour. (formed regularly. ) gofh Ocgoñ'cti. fd^ieü^en, to shoot. U u gefcbofien. jd)licj3=en, to close, shut. ii (; ícbioñ, geíd^offen. tjcrlicrhen, to lose. U tí berlor, bertoren. gictjiCU, to draw. it u m, gejogen. |Cpt=cn, to fight. bu er fodjb ßcfoiötcö. fied)t=cn, to braid. „ „ flid;t, fÍDd;t, geftod^teii. tebiCn, to lift, raise. (formed regularly.) tob, gehoben. lilO'Cn, to lie. it it íog, gelogen. bctvügíen, to deceive. it it betrog, betrogen. 6. The definite article is omitted before names of the 'points of the Gomjpass {see § 55,2,2) : Sie SSolfen jiefjen gegen 9îorben, The clouds are moving towards the north. 7. Some foreign words retain much or all of their original declension : Singular. Sa6 'iportemonnaie. Se§ 'iportemonnaie'g* Sem ^Portemonnaie. Sag Portemonnaie. Plural. Sie ^ortemonnaie^ê. Ser Portemonnaie^^» Sen Portemonnaie^^» Sie Portemonnaie^^» Exercise 52. 1. The dog has bitten the child. 2. A rattlesnake bit the peasant-woman this morning. 3. The policeman seized (ergreifen) the pickpocket immediately after lie had stolen the pocket-book from Mr.Wieland. 4. There goes the whistle ! (e$ pfeift !) 5. The cook is cutting the bread. 6. Professor Hausser, in his History of Germany, has described the battle of Leipsic in a very spirited manner (ícPíiaft). 7. The peasant has driven the cattle to the pasture. 8." He has only added fuel to the flame." 9. The hunter has shot four hares this morning. 10. The Library and the Museum are closed to-day. 11. John lost his German Grammar yesterday. 12. Yes, but he found it this morning on his brother's table. 13. 86 IRREGULAR VERBS (CONTINUED). Only one horse is drawing the wagon. 14. I shall make a draft (einen Sßec^fel jíeí)en) on Mr. Niedner to-day for five hundred and seventy-five dollars. 15. The bas¬ ket-maker has made (flechten) two baskets this morning. 16. Mary has made (flehten) a beautiful garland. 17. They are crying for help ! 18. The pickpocket has sto¬ len three thousand and five hundred dollars from the merchant. 19. The German soldiers have fought very bravely in the battle. LESSON XXVII. TRREGULAK VERBS OF SEVENTH CLASS. RECAPITULATION OF IRREG. VERBS. i^rciunbfünfjigftc Aufgabe. 1. SBiffen 0te, wo ^err Srinfen^ofer wo'^nt? 2. 51ein, ic^ wei§ nic^b wo er wo^nt 3. ni^t, |)err Sc^önci berg in Berlin ift. 4. kennen 0ie ^errn ^rofeffor 2;rautmann ? 5. ja, wir fannten ií)n fd)on, aí^ wir in îDeutf^lanb waren. 6. 3öie nennen 0ie biefe Blumen ? 7. 2)icfe ift eine ^pacir.tí^e,* unb jene ift ein 33ergipmeinni^i.* 8. 2Ba^ brennt? 9. 2)aö |)anê gegenüber unê brennt (is on fire). 10. :î)er Äoc^ l^at ben ¿affce gebrannt (roasted). 11. ^err SBei^manbel l)at 3i)nen einen ^rief oon ^errn Äramer in Sien gebrad)t. 12. .Ç)err ^eibel braute 91a(í^rid)t non unferm £)()eim in Slîagbeburg. 13. .^arl, wei§t bn, wo mein ^leiftift ifl ? 14. 91ein, id) ^abe ii)n ^eute nid)t gefeben. 15. .Ç)abeu 0ie bie 97ad)rid)t bon 5imeriîa in ber beutigen bicftgcn B^itung gelefen? 16. 9îein, icb b^be bic beutige Beitung no^ nidbt gefeben. Grammatical. 1. Irregular verbs of the seventh class follow, in con¬ jugation, partly the laws of regular, and partly those of irregular verbs. 2. Present and imperfect tenses of UJlffcn, hnow : * See page 43G. IRREGULAR VERBS (CONTINUED), 87 Present Tense. id^ töCijj, I know, bll thou knowest. ÊV ÖJCifL he knows, luir tu i i 1 = en, we know, t^r tu i Í j ^ ct, you know, fie lU i Î j ' en, they know. JrnperJ'eci Tense. t^ lDU^=iC, I knew, bu tu u fi = tcft, thou knewest cr tUU^^iC, he knew, tuir tu u ß = ten, we knew. ii)r tu U jj Í tct, you knew, fie tu U ß » ten, they knew. 3 Irregular verbs of the seventh class : Present Indicative, 2d and Sd Persons. (formed regularly. ) u < ( ( ( ÍÍ u li iC Present Infinitive. iring^en, to bring. benUen, to think. breniDcn, to burn, tenn^en, to know, nenn^eit, to name. tuiff»en, to know. bu tucifit, er tuciji. 4. To Jctiow, meaning to he acquainted with, is rendered by îcnncn» 5. General view of the changes the irregular verbs in all seven classes undergo in forming the principal parts : Imperfiect Perfiect Indicative. Participle, brctbdc, gt'braibd« bad?4e, ge^bad^d. branndc, gcíbranuít. ïanitde, gedannd. naun^te, ge^naiiUit. tuu^ite, geiiuujid. Class. Present. Imperfi. Partie. Examples. No. 1st i (or C), 0, U (or O). binb^eu, banb, ge^bunb^en. 45. 2d c, Ö, e. geb^en, gab, gcigeb^en. 14. 3d a, 1!, a. fc^Iag^en, fc^lug, ge^cblag-eu. 10. 4th a, it (or i), a. bait^en, bhtt, ge4aít=en. 14. 5th ci, t (or iC), t or (tc). bctjiîen, bifi, geíbifí=en. 40. 6th ie(c,etc.),o, 0. gieß-en, .goß, gc^goíf.en. 52. 7th anomalous. bring^en, brad^de, ge^brad^T. 16. Total number of irregular verbs 191. 6. Examples of the seven classes of irregular verbs : 1. First Class. binb^en, banb, ge^bunb=eii. ftnb«en, fanb, gc»iunb»cii. jinglen, jang, ge^iing^cn. be=gtnn»cn, bc^gonn, be^gonn^en. ge*tuinn*eii, ge=tuann, ge»iuonn®en. U!inn*en, tl^ann, gediJonu'cn. brcdi'en, ibred^'cn, breíc(iícn, iicbnuen, flerb=cn, trcff^en, tuercen, bra^, fbrad), brafd), nai;m, ftarb, traf, tuarf, gc=:brocb'cn. gCifbtr^'Cii. gc'brofc^ien. ge<=ncnini=cn. ge=flurb'cn. gc'trofficn. ge»tuorf-en. Rem. 3. In the sixteenth century the participle of cffCtt was formed regu¬ larly gccffcn» This was then contracted into geffcn. In the seventeenth cen¬ tury another gCs was added, by false analogy, and hence the double prefix in gcgcffcn» Exercise 54. 1. Are you acquainted with General von Lichten- 'stein ? 2. No, I do not know him. 3. What do you call (iric nennen ©íe) this fish? 4. That fish is a trout. 5. The fire does not burn. 6. The cook has not yet roasted (brennen) the coffee. 7. The house of Mr. Kraft VERBS WITH fein, TO BE, AS AUXILIARY. 89 is on fire (brennen). 8. Do you know where Mr. Kuprecht is? 9. He is now in Munich. 10. Charles, dost thou know when Alexander von Humboldt died ? 11. Alex¬ ander von Humboldt died in Berlin on the sixth of May, 1859. 12. Children, do you know how old Scliil- ler was when he died ? 13. He was forty-five years and six months old. 14. When did you meet Mr. Rosen¬ berg? 15. We met him this morning in (anf) the street, 16. Where didst thou find the German gi-ammar? 17. I found it on my brother's table. LESSON XXVIII. VERBS "WITH fein, TO BE, AS AUXILIARY. ©r ift fe^r reíd) gewefen, He has been very rich. (£r ifl irm gcivorben, He has become poor. Qv ift Ttac^ «Ç)aufe gegangen, He has gone home. Cr ïnar nad) ^aufe gegangen. He had gone home. Cr mrb ma^rfc^einlid) nai^ ber He will probably have gone ©labt gegangen [ein, to the city. günfunbfünfjigftc lufgabc* 1. Cr tfl su ^aufe. 2. Cr war gu |)aufe. 3. Cr iff ju ^aufe gewefen. 4. Cr war ju ^aufe gewefen. 5. Cr wirb ju ¿aufe gewefen fein, 6, 2)a$ SÖetter íjl je^t feí)r í)ú^ geworben. 7, ^err ^aítfd)mibt ijl Kaufmann geworben. 8. 2)a^ SBetí ter war f^on fe^r ^ei§ geworben, aiê wir nad) Stalien gingen. 9. ffîic ftnb ©ie bon ber ©tabt gefommen? 10. ®5ir ftnb ge= fahren. 11. ^riebri^ ift ju (on foot) nad) ber ©tabt ger gangen, aber 2ßil()elm til geritten. 12. ®a^ ^ferb ift über ben feraben (ditch) gefprungen. 13. 2)er S3íeiftift lag auf bcm Xifc^. 14. Dk 53üd)er liegen auf ben Xifd^en. 15. iDaê ílínb war fd)on geflorben, aid ber Slater na^ ^aufe îam. 16. 2)em 3äger ij! fein ^unb na^ beut SÖalbe gefolgt. 17. 3d) werbe nac^ bem 9}îufeum ge^en, aber .Ç)err tonjler wirb wal)rfc^eini li^ fc^on nacb ^aufe gegangen fein. 90 VEKBS WITH fein, TO BE. Grammatical. 1. Most mtransitive veî'hs take fciu, to he, instead of l^nlbcu^ to have, as their auxiliary. Rem. 1. The greater part of intransitive verbs are primitive or derivative irregular verbs. Rem. 2. Nearly all regular verbs and many iiTegular verbs are transitive, and, as such, take tatCU for their auxiliary. Rem. 3. All impersonal verbs take tabctt as their auxiliary. Rem. 4. It will be indicated in the vocabularies hereafter whan the verbs f ke fcia as their auxiliary. 2. Indicative mood of fciit, to he : Present Tense. id; till, I am. bu ti[i, thou art. er ifí, be i.s. iüir fint, ^ve are. i^jr feit, you are. fie finb, they are. Perfect Tense. I have been, etc. t(t tin Qcmefcn. bu tift g e in e f e u. er ift g e U) e f e u. loir fiub g e in e f e u. i^r feit g e in e f e lt. fie fint g ein ef eu. First Future Tense. I shall be, etc. id; merte fein, bu mirfí fein, er mirt fein, mir m erb «.en fein, ifir m erb «et fein, fte in erb «en fein. Imperfect Tense. ic^ töOr, I was. bu tDíir=fí, thou wast, er mar, he was. mir m a r « en, vve were. if;r m a r « t, you were, fte mar* en, they were. Pluperfect Tense. I bad been, etc. id^ mar octiefen. bu marft g e m e f e n. er mar gemefen. mir m a r « en gemefen. i^r in a r » t gemefen. fte mar «en gemefen. Second Future Tense. I shall have been, etc. ict mertc gemefen fein, bu mirfí gemefen fein, er mirt gemefen fein, mir m e r b « en gemefen fein, itr m e r b « et gemefen fein, fte merb«en gemefen fein. 3. Indicative mood of ÜJCrbcn, ¡ío hecome : Present Tense. mert=e, I become, bu mirfí, tbou becomest. er mirt, be becomes, mir m e r b * en, we become, ifir m e r b « et, you become, ñe m e r b * en, tbey become. Imperfect Tense. idt> murt^e, I became, bit m U r b « eft, tbou becamest. er inurb*e, be became, mir m n r b * en, we became, i^r murb«ct, you became, fte murb*cn, they became. VERBS WITH fein, TO BE, AS AUXILIARY. 91 Perfect Tense. I have become, etc. bin gethotbcn. bu tiift geiuorbcn. er i ft g e hj 0 r b e n. tt>ir fiitb g e ir 0 V b e n. iíjr fcib geir orbcii. ftc finb g e to 0 r b e n. First Future Tense. I shall become, etc. it^ toerbiC tocrbcn. bu toirft to e r b c n. er toiïb to c r b e u. toir to e r b Í en tocrbcu. ii)r to e r b Í ci to erbe n. fte to c r b en to e r b e n. i. The indicative mood Present Tense. tc^ ÎCmm=C, I come, bu î o m m í ft, thou comest. er î o ut m « t, he comes, toir íor.tra='Cn, we come, tito î 0 m m í t, you come, fte í ü m tu í en, they come. Perfect Tense. I have come, etc. id; bin gefamnien. bit bift g et out Uten, er ifí g et out tu eu. toir finb g e tout ut eu. tito fcib g e t o ut ut e u. fte finb g e 10 ut ut c n. First Future Tense. I shall come, etc. tcb toerb^c ïommen. bu totrfi 10 ut ut e u. er totrb t o m ut e u. toir to e t b Í en tomme u. tbr to e r b Í et t o m ut c u. fte to e r b * en î 0 ut ut e tt. Pluperfect Tense. I had become, etc. id; tone fiemorben. bu toarft getoorbeit. er toar getoorbeu. totr toar^en getoorbeu. ibrtoar^et getoorbeit. fie to a r Í en getoorbeu. Second Future Tense. I shall have become, etc. id; toerb=c geujorben fetn, bu toirft getoorbeu fein, er toirb getoorbeu fein, toir toerb = en getoorbeu fein, i^r to e r b Í et getoorbeu fein, fie to e r b Í en getoorbeu fein. fontniCll, to come : Imperfect Tense. id; ïnm, I came, bu t a m = ft, thou camest. er Ííint, he came, toir t a ut = en, V, e came, ibr t a m Í t, yon came, fie t a m Í en, they came. Pluperfect Tense. I had come, etc. icb toor geiomnten. bu toar = fi getommcu, er toar ö e t o ut ut e u, toir toar Í en get o mm eu. ibr toar it getommen. fie toar i en g et o ut ut eu. Second Future Tense. I shall have come, etc. ieb toerbîC geîommen fein, bu toirft getommeu fein, er toivb g et out tu eu fein, toir to erbten getommcu h'in, tbr to erbtet getommeu fein, fie to erbäten getommeu fein. 92 VERBS WITH fein, TO BE, AS AUXILIARY. 5. Some intransitive verbs (having fctn as auxiliary) : Class. Present Infinitive. Lnperf. Indie. Perfi. Part. 2. jein, to be. Wax, getreten. 1. bíevbíen, to become. tturbe, getrorben. 4. faiteen, to fall. fiel, gefallen. 3. (atvicn, to ride. fuf)r, gefahren. 4. ge^^en, to go. fling, gegangen. 1. ioram^en, to come. iatn, geîomnten. 2. Iteg^^en, to lie. iifl, gelegen. 1. jí)ringíen, to leap, spring. f^jrang, geffsrnngcn. 1. fterb^en, to die. ftarb, geftorben. Reg. iolg^en, to follow. iolgte, flefcígt. Rem. 1. and take the umlaut in the 2d and 3d persons of tha present singular. Rem. 2. ^ûÎJtCtt means to ride in a carriage or other means of conveyance. dlCiten means to ride on a horse. Exercise 56. 1. Has Mr. Franz been here ? 2. No, he has not been here. 3. The weather has become very cold. 4. Where is Mr. Stromberg? 5. He has gone to Magdeburg to¬ day. 6. Did Mr. Meyerheim go to Potsdam in his car¬ riage (fö^reit) ? 7. No, he went on horseback (reiten). 8. We went to Charlottenburg on foot this morning. 9. Mr. Wiedner has not come home yet. 10. Cologne lies on the left bank of the Khine. 11. Your German newspaper is lying on the table. 12. The daughter of Mr. Friedländer had already died before (ei)e) he came home. 13. Whom do you wish? 14.1 am looking foi Mr. Wiegand. 15. He has gone to Dresden to-day ; he will be here to-morrow. LESSON XXIX. THE INFINITIVE MOOD. î)er 5)r{ef ijl fc^wer ju lefen, Œr wünfc^t baê ju fe^en, {ft ju ti)un? 2)aê .^auê íjl ju öerfaufen, The letter is hard to read He wishes to see the book What is to be done? The house is for sale. THE INFINITIVE MOOD. 3^ Î;ërte fie fingen, 0ic machen mid) la^en, 2Bir geben fpajie'ren, Gr i[t fpajieren gefahren, I heard them sing. You make me laugh. We are going to take a walk. He has gone to take a ride. ©icknmtbfünfjígítc 5íiifgok. 1. 0er 0d)neiper í)al yerfprod)en, mir ben Síocf í)eute SDÍorí gen 511 fd)icfen. 2. ift meine 2lbftd)t, übermorgen nad) Grí langen gu ge^n. 3. 3^ n)ünfd)e mit ^errn 0^norr ju fpre^ d)en. é. Gr ift augenblidlidb 5^ -paufe. 5. Ge mirfc fpät ; eö ift tie l)D(í)fi^ 3eit (high time), nac^ paufe ju gef)cn. 6. X)iefe^ ift fogleid^ p oerfoufen. 7. pier finb oicr mo- blirtc Bínimer ju oermiet^n. 8. Gine í)en'fc^afílid)e 2ßo[)nung nebft @a^ unb SSafferleitung ift in ber Çeipjiger Strafe ju oer? mieten. 9. 2ßir í)akn feine ßeit gu verlieren. 10. 5ínftatt bai3 pau0 ju bebden, ()at perr Sigel e^ oerfauft. 11. ^rieb? ric^ Äraft ift nac^ 2Bien gegangen, um feinen ©rofoater ju be? fud)en. 12. ©uftaö S9íül)lt)eíwc'^ ift «^d) ^Berlin gegangen, um auf (at) ber bortigen Unioerfität ju ftubircn. 13. 2>a0 Oîau^ ^en ift eine fc^lec^te ©emckkit. 14. 2Öaö ift ju il)un? 2)îeine beutfc^e ©rammatif ift nid)t ju ftnben. 15. 2)îarie unb 5iatf)ariue lernen fe^t ba^ Planier fpielen. 16. Sinb Sie kidc 2)iorgen fpajieren gegangen? 17. 9ícin, i^ bin geritten. 18. pente merben mir fpajieren fak(?n. 19. SBarum blcibfl bu fl^en ? 20. Gr lobt ba^ î^ud), ol)ne eö gelefen ju l)aben. Vocabulary. ®ie Sttficbt, —, p^- —cn, intention. „ Seire'ßunij, —,pl. —cn, motion, exercise. „ ©eföobii'bcit, —, pl. —en, habit. „ Unitcvfitat', —,/>/. —cn, univer¬ sity. [ter-works. ,/ SSafícrícitnng, —, pl. —en, wa- „ SÖD^nung,—, pl.—cn, residence, suite of rooms, apartments. . „ 3cit,——en, time. S)a8 ©a«, —C^, pl. —C, gas. ííngcnhítdlid;, for the moment. 3)ovtig,(^of that place. [noblemen). .^CVVÍCÍ;aftíid;, fine and spacious (fit for SlîôMivt', furnished. 0clig, blessed. ©d;lcd;t, bad. ©ogtcid; (adv.), immediately, [witii. 9îcbft (prep, with dat.). with, together 9îand)cn (raj.), to smoke. ©pajic'ren (see C>, 2, j). Ülkvmic'tí>cn (rep.), to rent, let. THE INFINITIVE MOOD. 2. C. SBIciben (ietrt aux.), to remain. 0i^en (fein aux.), to sit. 2;t;un, to do. blieb, faß, t^at, geblieben. gefeffen. getban. Grammatical. 1. In German, as in English, the Infinitive Mood has two tenses, the Present and the Perfect : Present Tense. iicbiCU, to love, bauten, to build, finb^en, to find, geb^en, to go. tnerb^en, to become, fein, to be. Perfect Tense. gclieti IbíIílClh to have loved, gebaut baben, to have built, geiunben b^ben, to have found, gegangen fein, to have gone, getnorben fein, to have become, gemefen fein, to have been. 2. The Infnitim is usually preceded by p, to : 3cb tDünfd;e mit tbm ju fbrecben, I wish to speak with him. S)er Srief ift fcijmer ju lefen, 2Sir batten genug ju tbun. The letter is hard to read. We had enough to do. 3. While in English both the present participle and the infinitive mood are used as verbal nouns, in German only the Irfinitive is thus used : 9ÍCÍÍCn ift cine angenehme Riding is an agreeable exercise. S3emegnng, Geben ift feliger aí6 neunten, it is more blessed to give than to re¬ ceive. Rem. The Infinitive, used as a noun, takes the neuter gender : Ssß'3 SîeiÎCn. 4. The Infinitive (with JU) may be preceded by the prepositions anfíatt, o^itc, uni: 2inftatt JU geben, bleibt er. Instead of going, he remains. Gr lobt bas 23ud;, ebne cS geíefen He praises the book, without having JU baben, read it. Rem. The preposition nilt is used before the Infinitive ; (1), to express pur¡)ose or desire ; (2), after adjectives which are preceded by JU {too), or which are followed by geUUIJ {enough): Gr ijt nad) ber @tabt gegangen. He has gone to the city to buy a nut ein S3nd; ju îaitfen, book. 2)aS Îîinb ift JU jung, nut allein in The child is too young to go into the ben SSalb jn geben, Avoods alone. Gr ift nid;t alt ßCUUO, Hltt allein He is not old enough to go into the in ben 2Balb jn geben, woods alone. THE INFINITIVE MOOD. 95 5. The Infinitive is sometimes used in ^])assive sense'. SSaS tfl ju t(;un? What is to he done? Sas 33ucí^ ift ni^t JU ^ahen, The hook is not to he had. 0. 3u is omitted when the Infinitive is preceded: 1. By the verbs mo^CH, ^clfcn, prCH, jüíjícn, fc^CU, ^ctjjcn, nennen, ierren, lernen : ®i? mid; íad;en, You make me laugh. 2Sir porten i^n heard him sing. Sr ie[;vte mid; baS ÍÍÍatoier í)JÍeíen, He taught me to play the piano. 0ie lernen baô Älatticr fpielen, They are learning to play the piano. 2. By the verbs Metkn, Qcijcn, fielen, liegen, reiten, fní)ren, íjokn, fein, in certain idiomatic expres¬ sions : (St hieiht p^cn. He keeps his seat. Gr gebt itjajicrctt/ He is taking a walk. Gr tährt îb^iihren, He is taking a ride (in a carriage). Gr reitet fb^jhren, He is taking a ride (on horseback). Jiem. 1. 3u is also omitted after other verbs, as will be hereafter explained. jR€?n. 2. ©^asieren (used with geí)cn, reiten, faíiren) means to go {to walk or ride) for pleasure. Exercise 58. 1. The merchant promised to send us the cloth yes¬ terday. 2. It is his intention to go to Augsburg to¬ morrow. 3. I wish to buy a German Dictionary. 4. The large house opposite us is for sale. 5. Here is a large and elegant suite of rooms (eine ()crrfd)aftlíd)e nung) to let. 6. The large house in Wilhelms Street, with gas and water (nebft unb Sßafferleitung), is for sale immediately. 7. Instead of coming by way of Co¬ logne, he came by way of Frankfort. 8.1 have no time to lose ; I am going to Leipsic this evening. 9. " It is more blessed to give than to receive." 10. Why does Charles keep his seat? (6,2, above.) 11. AVliat is to be done ? 12. It is high time to go, and the tailor has not yet sent me my overcoat. 13. Mr. Dietrich has gone to take a walk. 14. I am going to take a ride (on horse^ back). 15. They have gone to ride (in a carriage). Ü6 PARTICIPLES. LESSON XXX. PARTICIPLES. íDer folgende Xag war fe^r ^eip The following day was yery unb fc^WÜÍ, hot and sultry. 2)ab 53iib ift rei^cnb, The picture is charming. 3)cr son alien feinen ^I'^unben Professor Behr, who was fei;r geliebte unb geebrte ^err greatly beloved and re- ^rofeffor ^e^r ift geftern spectedby all his friends, Slbenb an ber 0^winbfucbt died suddenly yesterday plbbii;^ geftorben, evening of consumption. 2)ie bereinigten ©taaten, The United States. ^Zeununbfünfjigfte Wufgobc» 1. 5im folgenben î^age gingen wir nacb 2öien. 2. bon un^ ferm ^aufe baben wir eine gañj reijenbe 5íubftd)t. 3. SBien ifl bie größte unb bie bebeutenbftc Stabt in Defterrei^. 4. Síürn^ berg bat im bíittelalter eine glänjenbe @efd)i^te gehabt. 5. 3n inbuftrieüen bejiebungen ift Dürnberg je^t bie bebeutenbfte 0tabt in baiern. 6. T)ie breijebnte, öermebrte, unb iwüig neu bear? beitete 5iubgabe ber ©efcbicbte bcr beutf^en Literatur ifl je^t in allen bucbbanblungen ju b^ben. 7. bene unb gebrauchte bü^ d)er in alten unb mobernen ©pracbcn ftnb in ber bucbtwnblung yon ítreifd)ner unb 9îobenberg bíUigft ju yerfaufen. 8. ®er bertrag jwifd)en ben bereinigten ©taatcn unb bem borbbeut? fcben bunbe ift fe^t abgef^loffen (concluded). 9. T)ie im 3abre 1809 geftiftete Umyerfität in berlin ift jebt bie bef^? tefte unb bie befte in ©eutfchlanb. 10. 2)ie B^bí ber "^^rofcfi foren ifl bunbert unb yierunbncunjig ; bie B^bl ber ©tubircn? ben ifl über 3000. 11. 2)ie im 3abre 1818 gefliftete Uniocrí: fïtcit ju bonn ift bie jüngfle in 2)cutfd)lanb. 12. ©ie 3íibt ber ©tubirenben ifl über 1000 ; bie ß^bi bcr ^rofefforcn ifl bunbcrt unb fed)b. 13. ^err ^rofeffor ©cbmibt ifl ^Jirofcffor bcr mober:? neu ©brad)en an ber biefigen Uuiycrfttät. 14. 3Ubred)t 2)ttrcr war bcr berübmtefte bcutf^c 2)îalcr bcö SDîittclaltcr^. PARTICIPLES. 97 Vocabulary. 3)ct Jrcuub,——e, fnend. t, ©taat,—e§,;;/.—en, state. „ 3?crtraß',—3?erträge, treaty 2)ie 5lu§[td;t, —,pl. —cn, prospect. „ S3e3icí)'unií,—,pl. —en, relation. 53itd;(;anblung, —, pi. —en, book¬ store. „ ©dpninbfud;t, —, consumption. II —ipl-—en, number. 2)aS ^tlb, —t^fpl. —er, picture. S3ear'beiten, to revise, work over. 9îeijen, to charm. S3eben'ten, to signify. ©längen, to shine. Srauc^en, to use. Slit, old, ancient. Slíobern', modern. 3nbu[triçÎl', industrial. ^löljUd;, sudden. 33ötlig, full, complete. SSerÜ^mt', famous, distinguished, ©i^ren, to honor, respect, ©tituben, to found. @ti|ten, to endow, found. iBeretn'igen, to unite. 23ermeVren, to increase, enlarge. Süeijenb {adj.), charming. SSebeu'tenb {adj.), important, ©länjenb {adj.), brilliant. ©ebraud;t' {adj.), second-hand. Grammatical. 1. In German, as in English, the verb has two Parti¬ ciples: the Present and the Perfect. 1. The Present Participle is formed by adding =cnb to the stem of the verb. 2. The Perfect Participle is formed by (1) adding to the stem of regular.^ and =Cll to the stem of irreg- xdar verbs ; and (2) prefixing sgc to the stem of all verbs, except those having an inseparable prefix {ht-, tnUf cm^=, and those with sircn (deren) in the infinitive. Rem. The radical vowel of many irregular verbs is changed. Present Infinitive. fieii iCn, to love. llflU«cn, to build. finb=cn, to find. crftnb'iCn, to invent. Present Participle. liCbÍ cub, loving, b a n = cnb, building. 1 i n b Í cnb, finding, e r Í i n b'^» cnb, inventing. Perfect Participle. jJC » Í i C b = t, loved, gc ® b a n « t, built. gC' f u nbs cn, found, c r f n n b ' = CU, invented. 2. Participles are often used adjectively. They are then subject to all the laws of declension and compar¬ ison that apply to adjectives: 5Im iolgcnbcn ¿age, f)n the following day. S)ic 2>ercinigten 0taatcn, The United States. E 98 PARTICIPLES. Re.m. The participle often takes a purely adjective signification : S)a8 reijenbe S3iíb, The charming picture. ©ebrau^te S3iic^er, Second-hand hooks. 2)er berü^mtefte 2JíaIer, The most famous painter. 3. The participle is used much less in German than in English. It is rarely used after [eilt, to he, ex¬ cept when it has an adjective signification. 2)a§ Stib tfl reijenb, The picture is charming. 4. The perfect participle, on the other hand, is used much more than in English. 5. Participles are frequently translated into English by the verb, with a relative pronoun for its subject: 2)ie int 3abve 1809 gegviinbete The University of Berlin, which was Uniberfttäi JU SStrltn, founded in 1809. Exercise 60. 1. On the following day they went by way of Frank¬ fort to Cologne. 2. (The in 1520 completed cathedral in Magdeburg is among the most beautiful churches in Germany.) 3. From the tower of the cathedral we have a most (gcinj) charming prospect. 4. Breslau, the largest and the most important city in Silesia (Sdjlc^ [ten), has 160,000 inhabitants. 5. The university in Prague, founded in 1348, was the first university in Ger¬ many. 6. The university in Leipsic, which was (en¬ dowed) in 1409, was the second university in Germany. 7. (The twenty-second enlarged and fully revised edi¬ tion of the German Grammar of Mr. Dr. Heyse is now to have.) 8. Second-hand books in all languages are for sale here cheap. 9. (The on the twenty-fourth March on the consumption suddenly died Mr. Prof. Behr was the oldest professor on the here [í^íeftí^c] univer¬ sity.) 10. The treaty between the United States and Austria is not yet concluded. 11. Peter von Cornelius, who died in the year 1867, was the most distinguished painter of the nineteenth century. THE POTENTIAE VERBS fÖnttCIt AND tttÜffCn 99 fann eê níc^t ícfcn, Äannfl bu cö lefen ? Œr fann eê lefen, 5Bir fönnen eö níd)t lefen, 0ie fönnen eê lefen, 0ie Îonnten e^ lefen, l)at eê lefen ionnen, Gr wirb e^ lefen Îônnen, Gr ^at e^ ni(^t gefonnt, I can not read it. Canst thou read it ? He can read it. We can not read it. They can read it. They could read it. He has been able to read it. He will be able to read it. He has not been able to -^err ®raun fann 3)euifcl), do it. Mr. Braun knows German. Ginunbfcíííílgfíc Wufgak, 1. 3^ fann feinen 53ríef gar ni^t lefen. 2. Äarl fagt,baf cr feine bentfc^c ©rammatif nic^t ftnben fann. 3. können 0ic mit nnê fpajieren ge^n? 4. 9îein, fönnen wir nic^t fpa? jieren ge^n. 5. |)crr Äramer fagt, bap er ben Srtcf nic^t lefen fonntc (or bap er ben 53rief nic^t kt fönnen). 6. ^crr ^arl Hartmann fann 2)enifi^ nnb 0panifd). 7. SSarum kt 2)îarie ba^ bentfc^e ?ieb ni^t gefnngen? 8. 0ie gefonnt (or ftc §al fingen fönnen). 9. Gr wirb ben 53rief nid)t lefen fönnen. 10. 3^ wnp o« ^errn 2)îapmann fc^reiöen. 11. .^err ¿ietrid) kt tap er pente na^ Hamburg gepcn mnp, um einige grennbe airô Slmerifa jn treffen. 12. SBir fonnten nid)t länger bleiben; wir mnptcn nacp ^anfe gepen. 13. ^entc 2)îorgen pabc fa lúcle Briefe f^reiben müffen, bap i^ nidpt na^ bcm 2)înfcnm pabe gc# pen fönnen. 14.5Í)Íorgcn werben wir nacp ®reêben unb über? morgen na^ ï>rag gepen. 15. |)err0cpnorr wünfcpt einen íep? rer für feine jwci Äinbcr ; ber Çeprcr mnp Gnglif^, 2)entfd) unb granjöftfcp gelän'pg (fluently) fpredpen fönnen. 16. 3d) pabc bie brittc 5lubgabe ber ©efdpicpte öon î)eutfdplanb in ber ganjcn 0iûbt ni^t pnbcn fönnen. 100 THE POTENTIAL VERBS fÖtinClt AND ntÜffttt. Grammatical. 1. The German verb has tíojpotential mood. The po¬ tential mood of the English verb is in most cases trans¬ lated into German by the use of the verbs îonUCIî, can ; VXViWtMf must ; etc. 2. The Potential Verbs (îôttttcn, Ittüfícn, etc.) have a com¬ plete conjugation. They take |ûbcn as their auxiliary. They belong to the seventh class of irregular verbs : Present Infinitive. ÎÔnU=^Cll, to be able, ntiifî ' en, to be obliged. Perfect Participle. ïonn^t. Imperfect Indicative. Rem, The use of the Potential Verbs is much more extensive than that of the auxiliaries of the potential mood in English Çmay, can, must, etc.). They are often translated by circumlocutory phrases, a^ fÖnttCtt/ to be able; miifs îcn, to be compelled, to be obliged (to have to). -3. The Potential Verbs (called in German the aux¬ iliaries of mode) are never used as independent verbs. They are only used to limit or qualify the infinitives of other verbs (though the limited verb is frequently understood) : 3d? !ann es ttid?t, I can not (do) it. 3d? ifobt eê nic^it gcfonnb I "ot able (to do) it. gr geraupt, He was compelled (to do) it. 4. können {to he ahle, can) indicates : 1. Moral or physicial possibility : Sr fann iekn iinb fc^rciben, He can read and write. 2. A possibility or contingency ; @ie föntttn nti(h ermatten, You may expect me. 3. können is frequently used with the verbs kfcn, fttgClt, llCtfte^Cn (.to understand), and t^Utî (to do), understood: §err ftmn 2)eutic^, Mr. Eoth knows German. 6. Indicative mood of fonitCtt, to he ahlcy can: Present Tense. ici? îann, I can. bu fann=fb t^ou canst, er ïaim, he can. mir Î Ö n n Í CU, we can. itr fbnn='b yo" can. flc Ï B n n • CII/ they can. Imperfect Tense. ic^ ionndc, I could, bu Î 0 n n = thou couldst. er îonn:«tC, he could, mir Î 0 u n =• ten, we could, itr lounstet, you could. Tie ! 0 n u >= tea, they could. THE POTENTIAL VERBS fÖimCtt AND mÜ))Cn. 101 Perfect Tense. I have been able, etc. ic^ l^ûb^e ßclonnt. bu ínfí geîonnt. er j^at geîonnt. toir babeen geîonnt. i^r b a b = í geîonnt. babeen geîonnt. First Future Tense. I shall be able, etc. tocrbiC iönnc«. ttirft Î Ö n n e n. mirb Î Ö n n e n. toir to er bi CO îônnen. ibr U)erbtet îônnen. fie to erbten îônnen. Rem. ^ÖunCtt/ to be able, is tan is from the same root. ft« i(b bu er Pluperfect Tense. I had been able, etc. icb battle ncfonot» bu bat'tcft geîonnt. er b a t » íc geîonnt. toir batí ten geîonnt. ibr batí ici geîonnt. fie batíicil geîonnt. Second Future Tense. I shall have been able, etc. icb iDcrbiC gcîonni bßbco» bu toirfi geîonnt bobctt. er toirb geîonnt bûbctt. toir to er bí en geîonnt bnbcn. ibr to er bi ci geîonnt babcn. fie to er bi en geîonnt bûben. derived from fenncn^ to knoic. The English 6. 5í)íüfícn {must) is frequently rendered into English by such expressions as to he ohliged, to he comjielled. 7. Indicative mood of ntiiffctt; to he obliged.^ must : Present Tense. id; nmb, bu niabh er inn§, toir ntüff ibr mitff fie müff I must, thou must, he must, we must, you must, they must. en, tr en, Perfect Tense. ici; bûbe ocniufibeíc., I have been obliged, etc. First Future Tense. W; tterbe milffen, etc., I shall be obliged, etc. Imperfect Tense. id; mnbde, i was obliged, bu nt U b ' iefi, thou wast obliged, er in n ß Í ie, he was obliged, toir nt U (3 Í ien, we were obliged, ibr tn U ji Í iei, you were obliged, fie in n b Í ten, they were obliged. Pluperfect Tense. id; batte ocntnbt, etc., I had been obliged, etc. Second Future Tense. i^ toerbe nemujjt baben, etc., I shall have been obliged, etc. 8. The participial form is only used when theprinciftal verh is understood. The infinitive form is used for the participle when the principal verb is expressed: 3(i; babe nid;t bôren Iônnen, I could not hear. 3tb batt« g«b«n ntiiffen, I bad been obliged to go. tbnt) 3tb babe eS nid)t geîonnt, I could not (do) it. @r bat e9 gemußt, He has been compelled (to do) it, 102 THE POTENTIAL VERBS tiJOlíCÍl AND HlOgCa. 9. The Potential Verbs follow the same lavjs of posi¬ tion in the present and imperfect tenses as the auxilia¬ ries l^oicn, fein, and tucrbcn. In the compound tenses the infinitive form of the potential verb is placed after the infinitive of the modified verb : (5r luirb e§ iefen länneU/ He will be able to read it. . St i)ttt eâ iefen fönitcu^ He has been able to read it. Exercise 62. 1. I can not find my pencil. 2. Freddy, canst thou bring me my German Dictionary? 3. The teacher can not hear what we are saying. 4. We could not hear what he said. 5. They will not be able to read this letter. 6. (Charles, thy father says that thou imme¬ diately [gleid)] home go must.) 7. We must send this letter to America by way of Liverpool. 8. I could not go to walk with them ; I had to remain at home and write my German exercise. 9. Mr. Kraft will have (müffen) to sell his new house. 10. We will not be able to go to Augsburg to-morrow ; we will go to Nuremberg to-morrow, and day after to-morrow we must Fut.) go to Augsburg. 11. Mr. Krahn wishes a clerk; he must be able to write and speak German with fluency (geläufig). 12. Why did you not read the letter? 13. We could not (it). LESSON XXXII. THE POTENTIAL VERBS tOOttCtt AND lUOgCtt. 3cf> gleic^ gc^fU, I will go immediately. 3d) werbe gíeíd) getjeU; I shall go immediately. Söoilen 0ie mit uuê ge^eu? Do you wish to go with us? 23ir wollten baê 33uc^ faufen, We wished to buy the book. 20irÎ)akttbaê^u^faufenwolIcn, " " " " 3)u magft mit unê geilen, Thou mayst go with us. 3c^ mag biefe^ níc^t, I do not like this cloth. iSr mag fagen waê er will, He may say what he will. THE POTENTIAL VERBS ttJOHCll AND tttOgett. 103 2)rctunbfc(^5tgftc 5iufgök» 1. SSolIen 0ie mit un^ nac^ ber 0tabt fahren ? 2. ^eute SDîorgen babe icb feine Beit, nad) ber 0tabt ju fahren, id) mu§ einen ^rief an (to) meine (Sltern fcbreiben. 3. 3d) mill bier in ÇeipBs "id)t länger bleiben, baê Setter ift je^t fo fait, nap unb unangenehm ; ii^ merbe übermorgen nad) ^eibelberg geben. 4. Sir moUten geftern nacb ^otèbam geben, um bie grope ^ara'be 5u feben, aber e^ b^it bfn ganjen Sag geregnet, unb mir jtnb ben ganjen Sag ju ^aufe geblieben. 5. Sarum baben 0ic geftern XUbenb baê íieb nicbt fingen moUen ? 6. 3cb bííí'^ gemollt, aber id) babe eê nicbt gefonnt ; icb b^í^^ baê ^ieb no^ nid)t ge^ lernt. 7. .Çierr Äraft mirb ba^ |)au^ gemip nicbt faufen mollen. 8. 2)îutter, id) mö^te febr gern (would like very much) mit ^einrid) 5tur5 nacb bem SJÎufeum geben. 9. £) ja, bu magjí mit ibm geben, menn (if) bu millft, aber bu mupt nicbt ju lange bleh ben ; bu baft beine beutfcbe 5lufgabe beute nod) nid)t gefcbrieben. 10. Siefen Sucb ift oiel gu tbeuer; mir merbcn eê nicbt faufen. 11. ©r mag fpajieren geben, menn (if) er mid, aber mir merben gu ^aufe bleiben. 12. Sünfcben 0ie bietet ®ud)? 13. 91ein, id) mid jene^ nehmen. 14. 3cb werbe ee 3bnen f^iden, menn 0ie moden. 15. So mobnen 0ie? 16. Sir mobnen in ber Bimmer^0trape, gegenüber bem neuen |)aufe be^ ^errn 9íiefí ftabl. 17. 0ie fönnen tbun ma^ 0ie moden (you may do what you like). Grammatical. 1. The Potential Verb UJOfícu usually indicates willing¬ ness^ inclination^ desire^ intention^ or détermination : 3d? tiJÍd flícid) ßcben, I will go immediately. Sollen ©ie bcnSrief ícfcn ? Do you wish to read the letter? 2. The indicative mood of ïDOÎlcn, to he willing, to wish: Present Tense. ieb millf 1 am willing, bu toilldt^ thou art willing, er mill, he is willing, mir m 0 Í Í Í on, we are willing, ibr moU't^ you arc willing, gc moll* cn, they are willing. Imperfect Tense. id; looíídC, I Avas Avilling. bit moll« tcft, thou wast ■willing, cr m 0 Í Í Í tC, he Avas Avilling. mir molí» ten, we were Aviiling. ibr molí» tct, you AA^ere willing, fie moll* ten, they Avere willing. 104 THE POTENTIAL VERBS tBOttCtt AND IllÖgCn. Perfect Tense. tá> l)ût)C flCtiJOlít, etc., I have been willing, etc. Pirst Future Tense. t(i> toerbc motten, etc., I shall be wilhng, etc. Pluperfect Tense. ic^ iiottc gcmottt, etc., I had been willing, etc. Second Future Tense. id; mcrbc gemottt iiokit, etc.. I shall have been willing, etc. 3. The Potential verb Ittögctl {may) indicates permis¬ sion., concession, and sometimes desire or liking : (Sr ntag ge^en, He may go. [soldier. Sr mag ein taíjferer @oíbat fein, (I concede that) he may be a brave •3d; mag biefeö îud; uic^t, I do not like this cloth. 4. Indicative mood of ttlÖgCtt, may, to he permitted : Present Tense. id; mag, I may. bu mag^'ft, thou mayst. er mag, he may. mtr mog^cn, we may. t^r m Ü g « t; you may. fie nt Ö g Î en, they may. Perfect Tense. id; l^abe gemoibb I have been permitted, etc. First Future Tense. id; metbe mögen, etc.. Imperfect Tense. ii^ moí^ííe, I might, bu tnDd;itcft, thoumightst. er nt 0 d; Í te, he might, mir moc^-ten, we might, i^r m 0 = tet, you might, fie m 0 d; Í ten, they might. Pluperfect Tense. id; :^atie gemocht, etc., I had been permitted, etc. Second Future Tense. i(^ merbe gemoi^t ijalien, etc., I shall have been permitted, et:. I shall be permitted, etc. 5. Time how long is put in the accusative case : Sr blieb ben ganjen Xag, He remained the whole day. Exercise 64. 1. Shall you go to Potsdam to-day? 2. Do you wish to go to Potsdam to-day? 3. Would you like (moUeu 0te) to read this letter? 4. From whom is it? 5. It is from our friend Mr. Diez ; he is now in Rome. 6. Why will (wollen) you not go with us to the Museum? 7. I must stay at home and write a letter to my brother. 8. Can you not write it this evening? 9. No, this evening I must call upon (bcfitd)cn) Mr. Behr. 10. Did you go to the Museum this morning ? 11. Yes. THE POTENTIAL VERBS foUCII AND bÜrfClI» 105 but we could not see the paintings (because [ireil] the museum closed was). 12. What paintings did you wish (wollen) to see? 13. I wished to see the famous paint¬ ing by (»on) Holbein. 14.1 have often wished to see it, but I have never been able to see it yet. 15. Charles, thou mayst go with us to walk, if thou wishest. 16. I do not like this book ; it is not at all interesting. 17. Mr. Beyerlein says that from his house he can see the spire of the Cathedral of Freiburg. LESSON XXXIIL THE POTENTIAL VERB fOllCtt AND bÜtfCtt. 2ßcr foil gc^en? Who shall go (is to go)? 2)u follft @ott, beincn ^crrn Thou shalt love the Lord lieben »on gnnjem -^erjen, thy God with all thy heart. SBir foUten nac(> ^aufe geilen, We ought to go home. Sr foil feb» Irani fein, They say he is very sick. .Ç)err Äubn foil im 1842 Mr. Kuhn is supposed to nad) Slmerifa gegangen fein, have gone to America in 1842. gunfunbfc^jigftc 5iufgak. 1. 2Baê folien wir í^un? 2. 2Ber foil na(^ ber ©tabt geben, nm ba^ jn bolen, ^einrieb ober i^? 3. .^einrid) foil ge# ben, bu bûfl beine beutfdbc Slufgabe no(^ nidbt gefcbrieben. 4. 3cb f»llte einen 53rief an ^errn ^utfammer fdbon geflern ge^ fcbrieben buben. 5. ^err Síabn ifl ím 3nbee 1845 na^ 3lme<í rifa gegangen ; er foil bort »or ungefähr »ier 3nb''cn geftorben. fein. 6. ¿err ^renjler foil febr reich fein. 7. 3ßie i)l 3be ge^ ebrter 37ame (name) wenn fragen (ask) barf? 8. 3i)îcin S7amc ifl ©ufta» S3enbler. 9. 9)Zeine -Herren (gentlemen), bier bürfen 0ie nitbt raud)en. 10. Sr barf nid)t fommen obne bic (Srlaubnip (permission) feinet SSaterê. 11. Çiebc SOîutter, barf mit 3Bilbelm Siefermann unb ^einrieb ílübner fpajiercn E2 106 THE POTENTIAL VERBS foUCH AND bÜrfetl, ge^eu? 12. ^afl bu ûUc beíne 5íufgakn gef^rteben? 13. 2}îeine beutf^e 5íufgabe l)abc id) gefc^rteben, aber bie franjöfifc^c Siufgabe ^abe nod) nid)í ganj oolíenbeí ; iá) fann fie boc^ f)eute Slbenb oollenben. 14. 3a, bù magft ge^en, aber bu mu§t jeitig (early) nac^ ^aufe fommen. 15. 2)aê Sßetter n)ar in 5íleranbríen fo ijeif geworben, ba^ wir bort ni^t länger bleiben bnrften. 16. 33on 5ííeranbrien gingen wir bireft' (directly) na^ ©nn)rna. Grammatical. 1. The Potential Verb folien indicates : 1. Moral obligation ox duty: (Sv fonte QC /Cn, He should (ought to) go. 2. Obligation or duty dependent upon the will of another: SSer fon gelten ? Who shall go? — is to go ? S)u fottft @ott, beincn §ernt, Thou shalt love the Lord thy God liehen bon ganjem §erjen, with all thy heart. 3. A report, rumor, or general impression : ßr fon fe^r iraní fein, They say he is very sick. §err ^u^n fon nad; Stmerifa Mr, Kuhn is supposed to have gone gegangen fein. to America. 2. Indicative mood offoKcn^ sTially should^ ought : Imperfect Tense. i(^ fonitC, I should, fcu f 0 n = teft, thou shouldest. er folíate, he should, inir foil« ten, we should. if)r folí^tcí, you should, fie f 0 n = ten, they should. Pluperfect Tense. id> batte gefönt, etc., I had been obligad, etc. Second Future Tense. ici) werbe gefönt baten, etc. I shaU have been obliged, etc. Present Tense. icb fon, I ought. bn fon=fir thou oughtest. er fon, he ought, wir f 011 s en, ive ought, ihr follet, you ought, fte f 011Í en, they ought. Perfect Tense. babe gcfont, etc., I have been obliged, etc. First Future Tense. id; werbe fonen, etc., i shaU be obliged, etc. 3. The Potential Verb biitftlt indicates : 1. Permission (by law, or by the will of another) : 3ebi biirft ihr ffíieícn, You may play now. THE POTENTIAL VERBS foflCtt AND burfCtl. 107 2. With a negative, bitrfCIt is usually translated by " must not" §ter biirfcu Sie nid^t raud;en, You must not smoke here. 3. It sometimes has the signification of '• io dare" Êr barf nidjt fommen, ol^ac fcie He dares not come without his fa- Gtiaubnib feined ÜSaterd, ther's permission. 4. Indicative mood of biirjcit, to he permitted : Present Tense. îdj barf, I am permitted, bu bar fifí, thou art permitted, cr barf, he is permitted, mir b Ü r f Í en, we are permitted, ibr b Ü t f Í t, you are permitted, fie b Ü r f Í Clt, they are permitted. Perfect Tense. bûbc ßcburft, etc., I have been permitted, etc. First Future Tense. id} tocrbt bilrfcn, etc., I shall be permitted, etc. Imperfect Tense. i¿b burf^tC, I was permitted, bu b U r f » tcft, thou wast permitted, er bur fite, he Avas permitted, tnir b U r f ten, we were permitted, ibr b U r f Í tet, you were permitted, fie b u r f « ten, they were permitted. Pluperfect Teme. id} batte OböubfO I had been permitted, etc. Second Future Tense. id} »erbe gcbnrft íjaben, etc., I shall have been permitted, etc. 5. Principal parts of all the Potential Verbs; Present Imperfect Perfect Infinitive. Indicative. Participle, foulen (ought). fottde, gedoli't. »oilmen (will). ge>ttioíí4. îônn^eu (can). ïonn4e, ge4onn>t. möo^en (may). nto^^e, ge=nto(b=t. biirf'Cn Idare), bnrf-te, ge»bnrf4. wiifi'en (must). mnb'te, gc^mnb^t. 6. The explanation of the many uses of the potential verbs in the subjunctwe and conditional moods must be reserved until these moods are given. Exercise 6ô. 1. What shall (foUcn) I say to him ? 2.1 shall (iDCrtc) say that I can not go to-day. 3.1 ought (folltc) to write a letter to my brother this evening. 4. Mr. Kelle is said (foil) to be the richest man in the city. 5. Mr. Berghaus went to Texas in 1858 ; he is supposed to have died during the war. 6. May (bürfcn) I ask what 108 SEPARABLE COMPOUND VERBS, this book cost? 7. The price of this book was seven thalers and twenty groschens. 8. He may (mögen) say what he likes (moUen), I shall not buy the painting ; I do not like (mögen) it at all. 9. What is your (honored) name, if I may take the liberty to ask? 10. Children, you must (türfen) not play here ; you may (fönnen) go into the garden, and there play as much as you like. 11. He can not have the book to-day; it is not yet bound. 12. Will (moUen) you go with us to Potsdam to¬ day? 13. The doctor says that I must stay in the house (ju ^aufe) to-day. LESSON XXXIV. SEPARABLE COSIPOUND VERBS. ©V mirb e^ nic^t annehmen, Sr nimmt eô an, Sr nai)m eö an, (¿r eê angenommen, ©r ^atte e^ angenommen, dx mirb e^ angenommen I)aöen, He will not accept it. He accepts it. He accepted it. He has accepted it. He had accepted it. He will have accepted it. @icbcnutibíe(^3igítc 5iufgak» 1. 3^ tnuf' ben ®rief abf^reiben. 2. Äarl kl kne beutfi^e Siufgabe abgefc^rteben. 3. S)u mu^t beine 5iufgabe abfc^reiben, ek bu aui^gekft. 4. fc^rieb feine 5íufgabe ab, eí)e er auê? ging. 5. èr fagt, ba^ er feine ?íufgabe ni^t abgef^rieben kt. 6. 3^ klk feine 3cit, ben 33rief geflem abjufc^reiben. 7. fe^ 3öort ijl fek fá)n?er au^^ufpred^en. 8. ^err íltein kl feine SDieinung (opinion) ganj beutlic^ (plainly) aii^gefprod)en. 9. T)er Sllaler kl feine ©emälbe auêgefteUt ; er mill fie ocrfaufen. ÍO. 2öer kl nieine ©rammatif meggenommen? 11. íí?ir ge^- kn jek nac^ bem SWufeum; mollen 0ic mitgeben (or mollcn 0ie mit)? 12. Söollen 0ie baô 33ud) mitncbmen? 13. Der berühmte 58aumei|ler unb SJZaler, 0^infel, bat bie großen ®c> SEPARABLE COMPOUND VERBS. 109 malte in ter 95or^ol(e (vestibule) te¿ 9}?ufeum^ in 55erlin enb mcrfen, aber fein 0d)ü(er, dorneliu^, í)at fie aue^gcfiibrt. 14. dö fing an jn regnen. 15. dö i)atte angefangen regnen, ei^e mir ausgingen. 16. 0ie gingen au^, et)e ju regnen an^ gefangen í)aíte. 17. 3c^ mu^ie nic^t, ta§ er ten Srief abfc^reb ben moUte. 18. Sann ift ^err 53raun angefommen? 19. dt fam geftern 5lbent an. 20. Sann fommen 0ie mieter? 21. Sir merten übermorgen mieterfommen. 22. 3)ie Sal;l (elec¬ tion) ^at geftern ftattgefunten. 23. 0ie ()aben ii)n freigefpro^ ¿^en. Grammatical. 1. Separable Compound Verbs are formed by prefixing cer¬ tain prej)ositionS) adverhs^ nouns, or adjectives to simple verbs : Sr mirb ben 33nei abfcbretben, 0ie iuerben morgen mieberíornmen, Sie 23aí)I trirb ftattfinben, 0ie merben tijn freifprecpcn, He will copy the letter. They will return to-morrow. The election will take place. They will acquit him. Rem. By far the greater number of prefixes of compound verbs are prep¬ ositions. '2i.Princij)alparts of some separable compound verbs : Present Infinitive. 0110'^ führen, auö'^ ftefien, ab'^ fcbreiben, on''tangen, an''nehmen, mif ' nefjmen, iDcg'' nehmen, auö'' geben, mit''geben, ttcg'' geben, an''fommen, to execute, to exhibit, to copy, to commence, to accept, to take with, to take away, to go out. to accompany to go away, to arrive. ttic'bcrdommen, to return, auö'' fprcd;en, to pronounce, fiûtf Í finben, to take place, frei'' tpïcdben, to acquit. (With JU). anâ'jufûbren, anë'gnftelien, ab'juftbreiben, an'gufangen, an'jnnebmen, mit'gunebmen, meg'gunebmen. auîi'gugeben, mit'jugeben, meg'gugeben, an'gntcmmen, mic'berguîcmmen, au^'giifpretben, ftatt'giifinben. Imp, Ind. anë'führte, auê'[teilte, ab'íd)rieb, an'fing, an'flabm, mit'nahm, meg'nahm, aus'gmg, mit'ging, meg'ging, an'iam, mie'berîam ane'íprad;, [tatt'fanb, , frei'[pr ach. Perf. Participle. auS'gefübrt. aué'ge[tetít. ab'gefd^rieben. angefangen. an'genommcn. mit'gencmmcH. meg'genommen, an^'gegangen. mit'gegangen. meg'gegangen. an'gctcmmen. miebergefommen auö'gefprDdKm. [tatt'gefnnben. frei'gefprocben. frci'guipred;cn. Rem. It will be noticed that the preßx of separable compound verbs takes the primary accent. 110 COMPOUND VERBS. Rem. 2. When JU Is used with the infinitive mood, it adheres to the simple verb: ûuê'sui^jtedicn,U)cg'5uge{)cu. Rem. 3. In the perfect participle the syllable gc= is retained, and is placed betiveen the preß x and the verb: QUÔ'gC{l)rOCt)Cil, tDCggcgdngCtl. Rem. 4. It will be noticed that many verbs, which are compound in German, are translated into English hy simple verbs: to copy. 3. Indicative Mood of ûnncl^men, to accej¡)t : Imperfect Tense. id) naiim—an/ I accepted, bu nal;m[t—an^ thou acceptedst. er nantit—an^ he accepted, tüir natmeu—an, we accepted. ti;r natntt—cn^ you accepted, fie nahmen—au, they accepted. Pluperfect Tense. I had accepted, etc. icb l^attc an genommen. bu batteft an'g e n o m m e n. er blatte an' g e n o m m e it. mir batten an'g e n o m m e n. ibr battct an'g e n o m m e n. fte batten an'g e n o m m e n. Second Future Tense. I shall have accepted, etc. id; merbe an'genommen bificn. bn mirft an'genommen haben, er mirb on'genommen baben. mir merben an'g e n o m m e n baben. ihr mcrbet an'g e n o m m e n haben, fie merben on'g e n o m m e n haben. Rem. The prefix adheres to the verb except in the simple tenses when tised in direct or leading sentences. In such cases it is separated from the verb and placed after it (and also after the object of the verb, if the verb is transi¬ tive) : 9îabm er e6 an ? Did he accept it ? 3a, er nahm c8 an, Yes, he accepted it. (bat) 3Ber fagt, bajj er e6 annahm ? Who says that he accepted it ? 4. The indirect object may be omitted after initgcl^en^ ntitnc!^mcn : SBottcn 0ic mitgehen ? Will you go with (us)? SSoïïcn ©ie mitnehmen ? Will you take it with (j-ou)? Present Tense. t¿b nehme—an,' i accept, bn nimmft—an, thou acceptest. er nimmt—an, he accepts, mir nehmen—on, we accept, ihr nehmt—an, you accept, fie nehmen—an, they accept. Perfect Tense. I have accepted, etc. i(b babe an'genommen. bn haft on'genommen. er bat on'g e n o m m e n. mir haben on'g e n o m m e n. ihr habt on'genommen. fie haben on'g e n o m m e n. First Future Tense. I shall accept, etc. merbe on'nebmen. bn mirft on'nebmen. er mirb on'n e h m e n. mir merben on'n e h m e n. ihr merbet on'n e h m e n. fie merben on'n e h m e n. INSEPARABLE COMPOUND VERBS. Ill Exercise 68. 1. Have you copied your exercise ? 2. (No, I have it yet not copied, but I shall it this evening copy.) 3. These words are hard to pronounce. 4. When will you return? 5. We will return to-morrow or day after to¬ morrow. 6. We can not go out. It is beginning to rain. 7. Mr. Kranzler says that the architect will ex¬ hibit the plan of the new city hall. 8. We are going to Potsdam to-day; can you go with us ? 9. I can not go to-day ; the physician says that I must not go out to-day. 10. When will the election (tie 2ßa^l) take place ? 11. It will take place day after to-morrow. 12. Who has taken my German Dictionary away ? 13. He was not willing to accept the book. 14. If you go to walk now, you will have (müffen) to copy your exercise this evening. 15.1 have already copied it. LESSON XXXV. INSEPARABLE COMPOUND VERBS. 3c^ öcrfte()'c eê ní(|t, 3d) terftant' eê 3ci^ l)ûbe eí5 níc^t terftanb'cn, 3c| í)atte eê nid)t terftanb'en, 3d) ïtertc eê terfte^'en, 3^ ircrbe terfianb'en l^aben, Œê tfl fc^wer ju terftel^'en, SBir ^aben ten 33erg umgangTn, 2öir werben ben33erg umge^'en, 2Bir umgín^gen ben 33erg, Sr í)oIíe baé 53ud) wíeber, er wieberl^okte ^euíe, Wûê er öorgeflern fogtc, I do not understand it. I did not understand it. I have not understood it. I had not understood it. I shall understand it. I shall have understood it. It is hard to understand. We have avoided the moun¬ tain. We shall avoid the moun¬ tain. We avoided the mountain, He got the book again. He repeated to-day what he said day before yesten day. 112 INSEPARABLE COMPOUND VERBS, Sîcununbfedjjigftc ^tufgak» 1, 2öir kkn gar md)t öcrfte^'en fönnen, a^aê er fagíe. 2. 3cí) í;abe fca^ S3uc| níc^t gelefen, tc^ kk eê nur fek flüchtig bur^'gefe^en. 3. 3Í)ret ©oíbaten jtnb jum ^etnbe übergegangen. 4. Dk Sonne lotrb balb untergeben ; wir müf fen gleich .Ç)anfe (geben). 5. Sie ift fcbon untergegangen. 6. Sie baben bie S^îechnungen beê Äaufmanneö ganj genau nnterfu^t', aber jTe baben gar feinen gefunben. 7. 2)er Söunbarjt bat bie Sunbe beö Solbaien unterfucbt' (probed). 8. ^err bat feinen ©arten mit einem febr fcbönen Banne umgebtn. 9. ^err ©eneral oon S3ernftein bnt ben 55efebí wiberru'fen. 10. (ix bat alle feine Siufgaben burebgefeben. 11. Sie wollen mor^ gen wie^berfommen. 12. ©r wieberbolt' waö er unê geftcrn ge^ fagt bnt. 13. Sinb Sie über ^anno'oer unb Sraunfcbweig gefomtnen ? 14. ^a, aber i^ bin nur bireft' burd)'gereift, weil i(b meinen 33ater morgen in ^eibelberg treffen mu^. 15. 2Bir baben Seutfcblanb bur^reiftt 16. 2)er gifcber bat unê ü'berge? fegit. 17. |)err 3)ietri¿ but bie ©efcbicbte oon 3)eittf(blanb über^ fe^t.^ 18. .^err ^rofeffor !Siefenbacb but unê ben ganjen Slbenb mit einer bb^ft intereffanien ®efcbreibung feiner legten Oîeife in Spanien unterbalten. 19. 3d) mu^ baê Sud) wie'berbolen. 20. 2öie gefällt^ 3btift^ bie neue àircbe? 21. Sie bat mir ganj gut gefalten. 22. Sie ftnb febr um^gegangen. 28. 5Bir woll^ ten ben Serg umgeb'en. 24. 3err SîotÎ) |)at eine 3)ampfí Mr. Roth has a steam-mill. ^ "öb ift ein Safít^íer, The horse is a beast of bur- 3¿) |äbe ba^ gal^rgelb bejafjlt, I have paid the toll. [den. (SiuunbiieBjigftc Síufpbc» 1. ^ûBen 0ie ba^ neue gefe^en ? 2. 2Baf)renb ber legten ^wanjig i)ût baê ?anb auferorbeníííc^e (extraordi¬ nary) ^ortfc^ritte gemacf)t. 8. ■Ç)ier iff ber Siu^gang (way out). 4.3c^ fcinn feinen 5Íugenbíícf langer bleiben ; id) mu§ gleich nac^ |)aufe. 5. 2)er üierte ®anb ber ©efc^id^te ber 33aufnnil bon 2)r. gtonj Engter ift [e^t in allen S3ud)í)anbíungen ju ba^ bcn. C. .^aben 0ie bie berühmte SBinbmü^le in ^otèbam ge^ [eben? 7. Filarie, l)ail bu meinen gingerbut gcfeben ? 8. ^len !Dr. 0d)mibt ift ^rofeffor ber beutf^en 0pracbe an (in) einer 2:öcbterfcbuie in ^ittêbnrg. 9. 2)aö 2)ampffd)iff „©ermania'' ift geflern Slbenb angefommen, 10. ©aö ^ameel ifl ein Çafti tbicr, unb ber Xiger ijl ein 9îaubtbier. IL 2)aö SBort „©ranv IIG COMPOUND NOUNS. matif" ift ein ^rembinort. 12.3ft ba^ grübfíücí fertíc; (ready)? 13. 3a, ba0 grü^ftüd ift fc^on fertig. 14. X)ie golcaie jeit wirb^^eute éîorgen ftattfinben. 15. 2)er 0d)neli^ug son Seipjig ift foeben angeîommen. 16. können Sie mir eine ©tednabel geben? 17. ^eute SOîorgen ^aben mir einen fepr fc^önen Spajier'gang gemai^t. 18. Der Säulengang beè 3)îufci umê in 53erlin ift ein .Ç)aupimerf ber mobernen 33aufunft. 19. Die ^auptfeber meiner Dafc^enu^r ift gebrochen. 20. 53eríin ift bie ^auptftabt son ï»reu§en. 21. 2)îein ©ro^sater mobnte früher in 2)?agbeburg ; er mobnt je^t in Äöln. 22. 3d) gebermejjer geftern SJiorgen serloren. 23. ^ft 3ai)lmort. Grammatical. 1. While compound verbs are mostly formed by pre¬ fixing prepositions to simple verbs, Compound Nouns are mostly formed by prefixing to nouns othe?' nouns. Rem. 1. The prefix noun has an adjective signification, as it modifies or limits the signification of the noun to which it is prefixed. Rem. 2, Adjectives, numerals, pronouns, verbs, adverbs, prepositions, and conjunctions (including thus all parts of speech except the article and inter¬ jection) may also serve as prefixes of compound nouns. S)aê school-house (bk ©cbuíc, school ; ba§ §au§, house). i^rcmb'^tnort, foreign word (frcmb, foreign ; ba§ ©ort, word), ©er ¿iDCi'^íampf, duel (5h)et, two ; ber Äampf, battle), ©er ©tíbif^ntorb, suicide (kibft, self; ber 9Jîorb,murder). ©aS ^aíir'^geíb, toll (fahren, to ride ; ba§ @eíb, money), ©e-; ^Orf progress (fort, forward ; ber Schritt, step), ©er ?tuë'=gahg, exit (auê, out ; ber @ang, passage), ©er 21'ÎJCr^gïaube, superstition (aber, but ; ber Oianbe, belief^. 2. Ich-Q^primary accent falls upon the prefix. 3. With but very few exceptions. Compound Nounss take the gender of the last noun (§ 67). ©Cr 2íu'genbíi(í, moment (baô 2Iuge, eye ; bet 33ftcî, glance). „ iBau'mctfter, architect (ber Sau, building ; bct 2iîeifter, master). r, SIu'meníoí)í, cauliflower (bk silime, flower ; bcr ííobí, cabbage). „ Sür'gerírieg, civil war (bie Siirger,citizens; bcr .^ieg, war). «, ©inipf'kffc^ boiler (bet ©ampf, steam ; bCt Äcffel, kettle). COMPOUND NOUNS. 117 Ser Sis'6är, polar bear „ gin'cjer^ut, thimble ,t §anb'icbub, glove „ Sie'gcníAirtn, umbrella u 0cn'ncaí(^irm, parasol „ Sa'fd^enbicb, pickpocket Sic 93au'fünft, architecture „ Síatim'wcüe, cotton „ iSerg'fette, mountain range „ Santpf mü^íe, steam mill „ Si'fenha^n, railroad (baS Sis, ice; (ber finger ; (bie §anb, hand ; (ber Siegen, rain ; (bie 0onne, sun ; (bie Safd^e, pocket ; (ber 33au, building ; (ber SSaum, tree ; (ber S3erg, mountain ; (ber Samfif, steam ; (baS Sifen, iron ; (ber f^íügeí, wing ; „ gíü'gelthür, folding door „ 2;ëd/terid;uie, girls' school (bie Söd^ter, daugh- „ 2?clf S'fd^uie, common school (baS iBoIf,people; [ters „ îa'fd^enubr, watch (bie i£afd;e, pocket ; „ 2öanb'ni)r, clock (bie SBanb, wall ; „ SSinb'müfiíe, windmill (ber âiîinb, wind ,■ Sllá 23ntterbrDb,bread and butter (bie Sutter, bnttei ; Samf'f'boot, steam-boat Sampffc^iff, steamer f^e'bermeffer, penknife Çam'meificifc^, mutton ^aib'fieifc^, veal Siinb'fieifd^, beef @d^tDei'nefieifd), pork Saft't^ier, beast of burden Siaub't^ier, beast of prey 3ug'tf)ier, draught animal 0(i^ur^auS, school-house SSör'terbuc^, dictionary 3ater, father), bie iDZutter, mother) ber 3)îutb, mood), bie 3fiif time), ber 3ug, train), ber üJíonb, moon). 118 COMPOUND NOUNS. 5. Examples of Compound Nouns with 33rcnn'f)DÍj, firewood (brennen, to burn; S)a3 gabr'getb, toll (fíiíiren, to ride ; 3)a3 gel)l'ja^r,year with bad crops (fehlen, to mistake; 2)a8 Se'febnd;, reader (hjen, to read ; 2)a3 2e'íe3Ímmer, reading-room ( " " 2)ie Sifil/maid^tne, sewing-ma- (näben, to sew ; chine 3)te 9íaí;'nabeí, needle (nä^en, to sew ; 2)ie 0tetf'nabei, pin ([tecfen, to stick ; S)ie ©tvid'nabei, knitting-needle ([triden, to knit ; 2)a3 0d;reib'3)a3^ier, writing paper (fc^reiben, to write ; 2)er ßd'gefinger, index finger (jeigen, to point ; verbal praxes ; bag §0Í3, wood), bag (Selb, money), bag 3ii^r, year J, bag i8u^, book), bag Bttnmer, room), bte 2)îaf(tme, ma¬ chine), bie 9îabei, pin). ÍÍ ^ bag ^O^hr, paper), ber finger). 6. Examples of Compound Nouns prépositions as prefixes : 2)ie Slb'retfe, departure 2;er Sinf'gang, rising, ascent 2)ie Slng'gabe, edition 2)er Surd/l'e^nitt, average Sag ^ür'inort, pronoun Sag (Se'gengift, antidote Ser Sn'fjalt, contents Ser 9)íit'bürger, fellow-citizen Sie 3)îit'gift, dowiy Sie iliac^'frage, demand Ser lie'bcrrocE, overcoat Ser Ue'berbau, superstructure Sie iBor'ftabt, sitburb Ser ßu'fcifi, accident Ser «"onnection (3ufammen,together; ber Çang,hanging). Ser 3hñ'ícf)enraum, interstice (3Vt»ifd?eit, between ; ber 9îaum, space). 7. Compound Nouns are formed much more exten¬ sively in German than in English, as is shown by the following examples : 1. Compound Nouns formed by adding prefixes to bcr ©ûltg, a noun derived from gc|cn {to go), and meaning a going, a passage. Sib'gang, departure (ab, away). Sluf'gang, rising (auf, up). Slug'gang, exit (aug, out). SBaum'gang, shady avenue (^aum, tree). (ab, away ; bie fReife, journey). (auf, up; ber ®aug, passage). (aug,out ; bie @abe, gift). (burc^, through ; ber 0(^uitt, cutting). (für, for ; bag Söort, word). (gegen, against ; bag @ift, poison). (in, in; ber §ait, holding). (mit, with ; ber Bürger, citizen). ^ Ci cc bie @ift, gift). ( uac^, after ; bie forage, question). (über, over ; ber 9îc(i,coat). ^ CC CC ber 53au, building). (toor, before ; bie 0tabt, city). (3U, to ; ber f^aïï, falling). COMPOUND NOUNS. 119 SBo'gcnganfl, arcade 2)urc^'gang, thoroughfare (Singang, entrance ßrj'gang, vein of ore gort'gang, progression Çer'gang, event §ingaiig, death ïlitfi'gang, failure SDÎor'geugang, morning walk 9íilá'gang, retreat ©äu'icngang, colonnade gang, walk for pleasure ©c^at'tengang, shady walk Ue't^ergang, transition llm'gang, intercourse lln'tergang, destruction 35or'gang, precedence Compound Nouns with nrefix : A. 2)er §au^t'altar, high altar ®cr §aul)t'anfcr, sheet anchor S)ie ^aulJt'armce, main army 2)er ^aupfartitel, leading editorial 3)er §auí)t'balíen, architrave S)er §aupt'&aß, thorough-base 2)cr Çau^jf begriff, leading idea 2)ie §aufJt'febcr, main-spring 2)er §anf)t'fcf)ier, chief fault 2)te §auf)t'frage, main question $te §anf3t'iird;c, cathedral 2)«r §aul5t'manu, captain 2)er §auf}t'maft, mainmast 2)ie §anfít'rotíc, principal part 3)te §auf>t'faci;e, principal thing 2)te §auf)t'fangcriii, jmma donna 2)aô §auf5t'fegeí, mainsail 2)ie §anf)t'ftabt, capital ®ic ^ailpt ftraf^e, main street 2)er §aitpt'ton, key note 2)ie §aupt'tugcnb, cardinal virtue 2)a8 Ajaiif-H'trcrf, masterpiece ®a8 §ailbt'nun"t, uouu $ic §aupt'jeile, liead-linc (of a page) 2)er Ip.iiipt'jeitge, priiicijial witness (23ogen, arch). (Durd;, through). (ein, in). (Srj, ore). (fort, forth). (tjer, hither). (i;in, thither). (tniffen, to miss). (morgen, morning). (rücf, back). (Säule, column). (fpajie'ren, to walk for pleasure). (@d;atten, shadow). (über, over). (urn, around). (unter, under). (Por, before). ba§ the head, a£ (ber Slltar', altar), (bcr Slnfer, anchor), (bie Strmee', army), (ber Slrti'lel, article), (ber S3alien, beam), (ber Safi, base), (ber Sîegriff, idea), (bie lieber, feather), (ber geiler, fault), (bie 5^age, question), (bie Äird^e, church), (ber 2)îauu, man), (ber 9Jiaft, mast), (bie 9îoUe, part), (bie 0ad;e, thing), (bie Sängerin, singer) (ba§ Segel, sail), (bie Stabt, city;, (bie Strafje, street), (ber Son, tone), (bie Sngenb, virtue). (baS iltcrt, work), (baö Ültcrt, word), (bie 3dtc, line), (bcr B^hge, witness). 120 COMPOUND NOUNS. Exercise 72. 1. Have you ever (je) seen a polar bear? 2, The pickpocket has stolen my gloves. 3. Mr. Grein is teacher in the common school in Elberfeld. 4. I can not find my penknife. 5. The school-house is opposite the church. 6. Mr. Kirchhoff has bought a clock and a sewing machine. 7. Can you give me a needle? 8. Here is the entrance, and there is the exit (way out). 9. The contents of the book are (ift) very interesting and instructive. 10. The word „^aVL^" is a noun, and „unr" is a pronoun. 11. Charlottenburg is a suburb of Berlin. 12. The main army arrived in Leipzig yester¬ day evening ; it will arrive in Berlin to-morrow. 13. The express train from Hamburg has not yet arrived. 14. Mr. Aiterbach is in the reading-room. He is read¬ ing the newspapers. 15. I wish a quire of writing-pa¬ per. 16. Did you read the leading editorial in to-day's paper? 17. Vienna is the capital of Austria. LESSON XXXYII. DERIVATIVE NOUNS. 1. 0inb 0ie auê 2. 97e{n, td) Mn ein Berliner (or id) bin ûuê Berlin). 3. 3ft -^err T)ietric^ anö granffurt (or ift |)err Xiietri^ ein granffurter) ? 4. 91ein, cr tft ein .^anií burger, aber ^err 3)iefenbac^ i|l ein granffurter, ^err .^raufe ift ein Slîedienburgev* unb ^err 0^norr ift ein Dítcnburger. 5. ©eftern 5lbenb í)abe ic^ einen ©nglänber, einen ^ollänber unb einen ©c^incijer bei (at the house of) ^errn 0tein getroffen. 6. Unfere ?ei)rerin in ber beutfd)en Sprache ift eine iKedlenburj: gerin, auö 0c^n)eriff. 7. grau 33ern()off ift auö Berlin (or ifl eine 33erlinerin), gräulein 0c^mibt ift eine |)amburgerin, unb grau oan 3)orn ift eine |)oiIänberin. 8. 3)aö 3)täbd)en bat ein "■ For words not found explained in the lessons hereafter, see the Diction ary in Part Fourth. DERIVATIVE NOUNS, 12Î fe^r fc^ôneê tcutfc^cê Çietc^cn gefungeu. 9.3c^ ^abc cm fc^ôneô iölümdbeii im ©arten gepftürft. 10. X)ie ©üte eineê ©ePid^teö bängt nid)t blo0 ion bcr 9îeinl)eii ter 9îeime ab (abbangen). IL Die 0onne erreid)t ibte gröjjte ■^bb^ unb tie Sage erreid)en ibrc gröpte ?änge am 22. 3imi- 12. Der glnp í>ii ston 60 wnb eine breite tion 800 13. Der ©ute liebt bab ©ute, ber Seife fucbt baig Sabre, ber Äünftler fucbt baö 0^öne, unb ber ivabre ^b^i'^f'^pb fwibl ©ute, bab Sabre unb bad 0cböne. 14. Säbrenb feiner langen ^ranfb^d b^ti Silbelm gar ni^t auê bem ^aufe geben iönnen. 15. Die (£d)önbeit ber Çanbfcbaft in ber 91äbe bon Drebbcn b^t unê fo febr entjitdt, baf' mir ben ganjen 0ommer in Drcbben geblieben jtub. 16. Der ©eneral bût bie Sapferfeit ber 0olbaten gelobt. Grammatical. 1. Derivative Nouns are formed by adding prefixes or suffixes to verbs, adjectives, or other nouns. Rem. In somo cases the umlaut is also added to the radical vowel. 2. Some suffixes form concrete nouns, as ittl (or =inn), =á)bít (or =lcííi). 1. The suffix usually denotes male persons., as : Ser S3auer, peasant {from hauen, to cultivate). „ Liener, seiwant ( " btenen, to serve). „ Säger, hunter ( " jagen, to hunt). „ Seigrer, teacher ( " ierren, to teach). „ SJÍaíer, painter ( " ntalcn, to paint). „ @d;netDer, tailor ( " jc^neiben, to cut). „ gieifd^er, butcher ( " baS gleijd;, meat). „ ©drtner, gardener ( " ber ©arten, garden). „ 0attier, saddler ( " ber ©attel, saddle). Rem. 1. Nouns in stV are formed from both nouns and verbs. Rem. 2. The suffix îCr (or ;ltcr) is added to the names of many countries and cities in forming masculine national and civic nouns ; with some nouns »he umlaut is added, ivith others it is omitted ; as : S3erii'ner, citizen of Berlin {from Sertin, Berlin). „ hamburger, citizen of Hamburg ( " Hamburg, Hamburg). „ iKmerifa'ner, the American ( " Slinerifa, America), f, ©nglänber, the Englishman ( " ©nglanb, England). n §oüänber, the Dutchman ( " ^cllanb, Holland). n 0d;toeljer, the Swiss ( " bie ©d^metj, Switzerland). 122 DERIVATIVE NOUNS, 2. The suffix =in feminine from many mascu¬ line personal nouns, as : 3)ie SSäuerin, peasantess, peasant's wife i (from ber ißauer, peasant). U 2)tenertn, female servant ( ber Siencr, servant). w greunbin, female friend ( ber greunb, friend). u ííaiferin, empress ( " ber Äatier, emperor). u fcnigin, queen ( " ter iîônig, king). ^öc^in, female cook ( " ber Sodi, cook). u Se^venn, female teacher ( " ber Serrer, teacher). ff @d)iííerin, female scholar ( ber 0d;üíer, scholar). ff iBerli'nerin, the Berlin lady ( ^ ' ber iBerltner, Berlin), tf §amburgerin, the Hamburg lady ( " ber hamburger, Hamburg), ff Slfitîa'nenn, the Africaness ( " ber Slfritaner, African). ff Símertía'nerill, the American ladv ( ber ?Imerttaner, American). ff (Sitglänbcnn, the English lady ( ber (Snglänber, Englishman). tf Çottânberin, the Dutch lady ( ber §oEänber, Dutchman). ff ®d;teetjerin, the Swiss lady ( " ber 0d)tDeijer, the Swiss). Rem. ]. Formerly the termination ïtlltt was much used ; the plural ending of nouns in sin is stlUtCn, as : S)ie Königin (Sönigimt), queen ; pl. bie Äönigttincn, queens. Rem. 2. With some nouns the umlaut is added ; b e r ^ 0 d;, bit ^Í)lÍ)tn« 3. Diminutive nouns are formed by adding the suf¬ fix or =icin to many nouns ; the umlaut is added when the radical vowel is capable of it : Sttê SSäumc^en, the small tree Äuäbietn, the small boy S3íüm(^en, the little flower @täbt(^en, the small city SKäbc^eit, the girl grüuíein, the young miss S3rDb(^en, the small loaf of bread §äuSc^en, the small house Sicbd^en, the sonnet If II II If II II n II II from bcr SSaum, tree). „ íínabe, boy), bit 53iume, flower). „ ®tabt, city). „ 2)iagb, maid). ft Çvait, woman). bûÔ 33vpb, bread). §auÖ, house). „ Sieb, song). „ ititcvb, horse). iPferbc^ert the little horse Rem. 2. These diminutive nouns all take the neuter gender, whatever may be the gender of the nouns from which they are derived. Rem. 2. These diminutive terminations often express affectionate feeling or regard : 3Säterd;en, "father dear" (from bcr 3>atcr, father). u 2Jiiltterd>eiD "mother dear" ( " bic ÎDÎuttcr, mother). DERIVATIVE NOUNS. 123 4. The suffixes =0, =|cit (or 4Út)f sni|, sÎ^UIït, sUng form mostly abstract nouns. 1. The suffix iC (with umlaut to the radical vowel) forms nouns from adjectives: 2iiC @üte, goodness (from gut, good). „ §ö^c, height ( " I^DC^, high). „ Sänge, length ( " lang, long). „ Siefe, depth ( " tiei, deep). „ 93rette, breadth ( " breit, broad). Rem. Nouns thus formed are not to be confounded with adjectives used substantively, and referring to pereons, as : 2)Cr Onte, the good man; bie ®ute, the good woman. „ 2i>eiie, the wise man ; „ ÜBeife, the wise woman. „ ©entire, the German (man); „ 2)eutid;e, the German (woman). Nor with the neuter of adjectives when used to indicate the quality of the adjective regarded as a concrete thing, as : ©Ute, the good (from gut, good). „ 3Babre, the true ( " tt)a(ir, true). „ ©c^onc, the beautiful ( " fc^Sn, beautiful). „ ©ri)a'bene, the sublime ( " erbci'bcn, sublime). 2. The suffix or (=fcit) forms both abstract and concrete nouns from adjectives : iStC Ärant()eit, sickness (from îranî, sick). „ ©c^önbeit, beauty ( " f^öu, beautiful). „ SBabrbeit, truth ( " tcabr, true). ,t Sieinbeit, purity ( " rein, pure). „ Suntelbeit, darkness ( " builfel, dark). „ Slebnlid^ieit, similarity ( " äbnlid;, similar), „ Çi^eitnbiicbfeit, friendliness ( " freunbUd;, friendly). „ S3tt(igieit, cheapness ( " billig, cheap). „ Äoftbarfeit, dearness ( " îoftbar, dear). „ gurcbtfamieit, fearfulness ( " furcbtfaiu, fearful). „ jTobíeríeit, bravery ( " tarier, brave). „ ©itelîeit, vanity ( " eitel, vain). Rem. 1. The suffix sftit is added to adjectives ending in AQf 41$/ «fOttt/ ttt, and stL Rem. 2. The suffix is also added to some personal nouns, as : iSiC Äiubbeit, childhood (from baS Stub, child). n SWeufcbbdt, humanity ( " ber 2)íení(¡b, human being). tt SbriPcnbdt, Christendom ( " ber Christian). 124 DERIVATIVE NOUNS. 3. Derivatives ending in =111^ are usually formed from verbs, but they are sometimes from nouns and adjectives, as : 3)iC ßenntni^, knowledge (from iennen, to know). §tnteermß, impediment ( " l^inbertt, to hinder). iSllê SBerftänb'iti§, understanding ( " ber SSerftanb', reason). 2)ic ginfterni^, darkness ( " finfter, dark). 4. Derivatives ending in =fí^Cltí are formed from nouns and adjectives, as: 5reunbfd;aft, friendship ,r Sanbfc^aft, landscape „ S3auerni^aft, peasantry „ Drtft^aft, neighborhood „ 33ereit'fc^aft, readiness from ber ^reunb, friend). " baê Sanb, land), bie iBauern (/jI.), peasants). place), ready). formed from " ber Drt, * ' bereit, 5. Derivatives ending in =t!^uni are nouns, adjectives, and verbs, as: 2)aê §eiítgt^um, sanctuary (from l^eiíig, holy). „ áaifertbum, empire ( " ber ííaifer, emperor). „ ^rieftert^um,priesthood ( " bie ißriefter priests). 2)er éîeidjt^um, richness ( " reid;, rich). 6. Nouns formed from verbs, by adding the suffix '-m, usually denote a condition, what produces a condition,or a thing put into a certain condition: respect formation, culture ( 3)ie 3I^tung, „ S3ilbung, „ SSebing'ung, „ gntiaftung, „ (grfa^'ruttg, „ (Sro'berung, „ gorfc^ung, „ §anbiitng, „ Sanbung, „ Siîeinung, „ iprüiung, „ 5ttic^tung, „ ©ammlung, „ 0il3ung, „ SSeríamm'íung, assembly „ 23ert^ei'bigung, defense „ SBarnung, warning „ 3dctnung, drawing It destruction (from acf)teu, condition unfolding experience conquest investigation trading-house landing opinion examination direction collection session bilben, bebin'gen, cntfal'ten, erfa^'ren, cro'bern, forfc^cn, bctnbein, ianben, meinen, :briilen, richten, fammeín, ft^en. to respect), to form), to stipulate), to unfold), to experience), to conquer), to investigate), to handle), to land), to think), to examine), to direct), to collect), to sit). toer jam'mein, to collect), berthei'bigen, to defend), ttjarnen, to warn). 3eid)nen, to draw), jerjlö'ren, to destroy). DERIVATIVE NOUNS. 125 Rem. 1. Nouns ending in may be formed from nearly all verbs, both Bimple and compound. Rern. 2. A few collective nouns in =Mng are formed from nouns ; 2)ic §oIjuiU3, forest (from baii §oIj, wood). „ Äieibung, clothing ( " baô íííeib, garment). „ StaUuug, stabling ( " ber ©tail, stable). ,t Söalbung, woodland ( " bet SKatb, forest). 5. (1), Personal nouns ending in =tï are masculine. (2), Nouns ending in =ilt, =ci (=rci), =l^cit (=ÎCit), =íí|Cft, =ung are feminine. (3), Nouns ending in (ícill), =t^uni are neuter. Exc. The nouns bet ^rrt^um (error) and b C t 9i C1 t f; U nt (richness, riches) are masculine. Rem. Some of the nouns ending in iltifj are feminine and some are neutei. 6. The most iva^oviant ^^reßxes in forming derivative nouns are gc=, mi^, un=, ur^ 1. The prefix gc=, to nouns formed from verbs or from other nouns, denotes collectiveness, union, completion, or repetition: iScr ©efä^r'te, „ ©etüí'fc, companion (from bie %ríic^íeit, dishonesty „ Unenb'Iic^îeit, infinity „ Unfä^igfeit, incapacity ¡, lingebuíb, „ Uuorbnuug, „ Unruhe, „ Untreue, 2)aéUngtü(í, „ Untraut, (fromber 2)anî, ( ( ( ( C ( ( ( ( ( ( thankfulness), ber Çaïï, chance, fall), ber ©el^orfam, obedience), ber 2)2enf(^, human being), ber ©inn, sense), bie ®^ríid}íeit, honesty), bie ©nbíic^íeit, finiteness). bie ^ät)igteit, capacity). impatience disorder disquietude faithlessness misfortune, calamity ( noxious weeds ( Hem. The prefix lUt= can be used especially to the nouns in 4)Cit and 4. The prefix ur= denotes source, origin or cause, or a thing in its original condition : ^Cb UrbetDO^ner,aboriginalinhabitant(from ber iSeibO^'ner, inhabitant). bie Oebnib', bie Orbnnng, bie 9în^e, bie Srene, ba§ @iüd, ba6 Srant, patience). order). rest). faithfulness). fortune). herb). „ Urqueïï, primary source ( " ber Ouell, source). „ Urfljrung, origin, source ( " ber ©bruug, spring). „ Urwalb, primeval forest ( " ber SSalb, forest). 2)ic Urtunbe, document, record ( " bie iîuube, knowledge). „ Urfac^e, origin, cause ( " bie ©ac^e, thing). „ Urfl^radie, primitive language ( " bie language). S)ûë Urbiíb, prototype ( " ba§ iBiib, form). „ Urtioít, aboriginal people ( " ba3 2?oU, people). 5. The prefix denotes the first or greatest : S>Cb erjbifc^oi, archbishop (from ber S3ifd;cf, bishop). „ erjbieb, arrant thief ( " ber 2)ieb, thief). „ drjiuarfc^atl, lord high-marshal ( Srjtugenb, cardinal virtue ( ber SDÎarfdhtïï', marshal), bie Sugenb, virtue). DERIVATIVE NOUNS. 127 6. Many -words in the German, as in the English lan¬ guage, have undergone great changes in form during the known history of the language. Some derivatives have also been formed from words that are no longer used. Thus: the word ® cb UÎÏ) (from an old word die. patience) has un¬ dergone the following changes of form : kidult, ¡jidult, gedult, @ e b U ( b. The word @ e i a {; r is from an old word die /aAr:=fear. Exercise 74. 1. The first session of the Assembly will take place to-morrow, at ten o'clock. 2. Have you seen the new drawings of the artist? 3. The collection of antiquities from Egypt in the Museum of Berlin is very large. 4. Mr. Breitkopf has just bought the first five volumes of the German dictionary of the brothers Grimm. 5. How many brothers and sisters have you? 6. I have two brothers (53viiter), and one sister. 7. It is very sultry, we will probably have a thunder-storm before night. 8. This book contains the best poems of Goethe, Schiller, and Heine. 9. Did you notice the disproportion between the height and the breadth of the building? 10.1 have never heard such nonsense. 11. The papers on this table are lying in the greatest disorder. 12. His dishonesty was a much greater misfortune than his incapacity for the work. 13. The aborigines of America were the In¬ dians. 14. Have you ever seen a primeval forest? 15. Do you know the origin of the word „Uncntííd)feit" ? 16. Do you know the cause of his disquietude? 17. The arch¬ bishop of Mayence has gone to Cologne to-day. 18. The beauty of these drawings is very extraordinary. 19. Miss Kreutzer is from Germany, but MissRobelli is an Italian. 20.Mr. EUinder is a Swiss, but his Avife is a German. 21. The teacher (/< w.) has in her school twenty-two scholars (fern.). 22. Maria Theresa, Empress of Austria, died on the thirteenth of April, 1807. 23. Louise Auguste, Queen of Prussia, died on the nineteenth of July, 1810. 128 FORMATION OF ADJECTIVES, LESSON XXXVIII. DERIVATIVE ND COMPOUND ADJECTIVES. ^iiujunbiicfisigfic 5íufgaíie* 1. 3n btefer ift er gegen feine Vorgänger níc^t banL bar. 2. 2)er ®oben um Berlin ift fanbig nnb nicfet fe^r fruc^ti bar. 3. 3d) tt?eif nic^t ob bie 35rüde fd)on gangbar ift. 4. Der ^lan ijl ganj unausführbar. 5. 2Öir haben ben ganjen Dag fein trinfbareS 3Baffer gefunben. 6. |)err Dorn leitet an einer unheilbaren tonfheit. 7. ^err Äiefenietter hat feine neue gol? bene Uhr h^iíl^ 9)îorgen oerloren. 8. „5Iitr in bem geenlanbc ber lieber lebt nod) beine fabelhafte 0pur." 9. Der 3)îaler hat eine auferorbentlid) lebhafte (ginbilbungSfraft. 10. Diefe felftge @egenb ift ooll oon Älapperfd)langen. 11. ^ente h^ben n?ir fehr f^öneS, fonnigeS Sßetter. 12. ®arum ftnb 0ie fo traurig? 13. |)aben 0ie bie malerifd)e ?anbfd)aft in ber fäd}f.fd)en 0d)níei5, jtt)ifd)en DreSben unb ^rag gefehen? 14. Die ftäbtifd)en S3ehörben halben befd)loffen; eine neue 5lnleihe oon 500,000 Dhlr. ju machen, um eine neue 0irafe oom griebrid)Si ^(a^ bis gum 0abowaí^la0 burchguführen. 15. Son bem èrimm'f^fit SBörterbud) fïnb bis jel^t erft fed)S Sänbe crfcbte^ nen. 10. Die „5iugSburger 5illgemeine ift bie größte unb befte politifd)e S^^itung in 0übbeutfd}lanb. Grammatical. 1. De7'ivative Adjectives are formed from nouns, adjec¬ tives, numerals, pronouns, verbs, adverbs, and preposi¬ tions, by adding the suffixes ibar, ^Cr (=cru), -hfift/ =îSf 'À\ù) (=cr),4id) f and :faut, according to the following rules : 1. The suffix ibar, added to a noun or to a verbal stem, indicates ability or possibility of a quality or of an action : 3)anitciV, thankful (from bCT 2)aut, thank), bienfthar, serviceable ( " bcr S)icnft, service). h"uc(;tbai', fruitful ( " bic Sonett, fruit). FORMATION OF ADJECTIVES. 129 furditbar, fearful (from bic (^nrd;t. fear). gancjbav, passable ( " ber @ang. passage). îcftbar, costly ( " bic Soften (p/.), expenses). fdjeinbar, apparent ( " ber Schein, appearance). ftrcitbar, contestable ( " ber Streit, contest). ïrunberbar, wonderful ( " bas 2¿unber, miracle). brennbar, combustible ( " brennen, to burn). benîbar, conceivable (" bcníen. to think). e^bar, edible, fit to eat C " effen. to eat). ausführbar, practicable ( " ausführen. to execute). haltbar. tenable ( " halten. to hold). heilbar. curable ( " heilen. to heal). hörbar, audible ( " hören. to hear). crKär'bar, explainable ( " erlla ren. to explain). lesbar, legible ( " Icfen, to read). toermcib'bar, avoidable ( " beriuei ben. to avoid). nennbar, that may be named ( " nennen, to name). genieß'bar. enjoyable ( " genießen. to enjoy). erreich'bar. attainable ( " erreichen. to attain). trennbar. divisible ( " trennen, to divide). trintbar. fit to drink ( " trinien, to drink). 2. The suffix -tU (=crn) is added only to nouns d6> noting material : (Selben, golden, gold (from baS @olb. gold). ftlbern. of silver ( " baS Silber, silver). iuhfern, of copper ( " bas Änhfer, copper). bleiern. leaden ( " bas SSlei, lead). lebern. of leather ( " bas Seber, leather)- höhern. wooden ( " baS^olî, wood). gläfern. of glass ( " bas ®laS, glass). Rem, When the noun (as Ä n h f C Ï) ends in only :it is added. 3. The suffix 4)0ft denotes possession of or inclina¬ tion toward the quality of the noun to Avhich it is suffixed: ©anerhaft. durable (from bie ®aner. duration). ernfthaft. earnest ( " ber ®rnft. earnestness). fabelhaft. fabulous ( " bie f^abel. fable). fehlerhaft, faulty ( " ber gehler. fault). lebhaft. lively ( " baSl'ebcn, life). mangelhaft, defective ( " ber SDÎangel, lack). riefenhaft, gigantic ( " ber 9iicfe, giant). jmeifelhaft. dubious ( " ber doubt). lc^meic^eíí)aft, flattering ( " bic ©d;meid^elci', flattery). F2 130 FORMATION OF ADJECTIVES. 4. The suiSx =ig denotes the possession of the quah ity or relation that is expressed by the noun, adjective, numeral pronoun, verb, preposition, or adverb, to which it is suffixed : Slrtig, polite, well-behaved from bic Slrt, way). bärtig, bearded ; " ber S3art, beard). bergig, mountainous " ber S3erg, mountain). blutig. bloody " baS S3Iut, blood). eifrig. zealous " ber Stfer, zeal). hfig, icy " ba§ ($i8. ice). feífig, rocky " ber gelê. rock). ffeißig, industrious ■ " ber gleiß. industry). fíücttig. fleeting " bie glucbt. flight). seifttg) referring to the spirit " ber ©eift. spirit). ava.icious " ber @ei3. avarice). giftig, poisonous " ba6 ©ift. poison). günftig, favorable " bie ©iinft. favor). tohig, woody " bag ^oÍ3, wood). iräftig, powerful " bie áraft. power). maá)tig, mighty " bie iOîab^t, might). mäßig, moderate, temperate " bag 3)iaß, measure). UDtbig, necessary " bie ilÎDtb, want). rui)ig, quiet ; " bie Sîube, rest). riefig, gigantic " ber Sîiefe, giant). Í«í3ig, salty " bag @al3. salt). fanbig, sandy " ber 0anb, sand). fttuibig. guilty " bie 0c^uib, guilt). fonnig. sunny " bie 0onne, sun). traurig, sad, sorrowful " bie Sraner, sorrow). berbäd;tig. suspicious " ber ÜSerbac^t' suspicion). trürbig. worthy " bie Söürbe, worth). bumbßg, damp " buntfjf. damp). leben'big, lively, active " lebenb. living). gütig. good " g«t. good). toöaig. fully " boll. fuU). einig, einzig. sole, single " ein, " beißen. one). beißig, biting to bite). ergiebig. productive " erge'ben. to yield). bortig. of that place " bort. there). Siffig, of this place " ßicr. here). ßeutig. of to-day " beute. to-day)L niebrig. low " nieber. down). »orig, former " bor. before). übrig. remaining " über^ over). FORMATJON OF ADJECTIVES, 131 5. The suffix attached to personal common nouns (and to a few verbs), denotes similarity or inclination to a quality ; and often conveys also the idea of contempt or unworthiness : äurifd;, referring to the peasantry (from bet SBauer, peasant). bid)teriid;, poetical ( " ber 2)td)tcr, poet). biebifd?, thievish ( " ber jDieb, thief). btnimlifc^, heavenly ( " ber §tmniei, heaven> trbifd;, earthly ( " bte (Srbe, earth). iaujmännifdb mercantile ( " ber Äaufmaitn, merchant). ïinbifd?, childish ( " bad Äinb, child). inaíerijd), picturesque ( " ber íDíaler, painter). ftübtijd^ civil ( " bie @tabt, city). neibijd;, suspicious ( " neiben, to envy). Rem. 1. The umlaut is usually added when the vowel is capable of it. Rem. 2. In many adjectives derived from the Latin and Greek languages, the ending :ifd) in German corresponds to the English ending-ic or -ical. ^^iício'pt)ií(í), philosophic (al). brama'tijd;, dramatic (al). ttjecío'giíd?, theological. (al). :bfi)C^cío'gtíd;, psychological. Ibvifd;, lyric (al). gcclo'gifd;, geologic (al). :|)oe'tiid), poetic (al). physical. ïvitifd;, critical. d;emiid), chemical. ^ifto'rifd;, historic (al). Rem. 3. The suffix sifdl (=^idl) is added to personal proper names : 2)ie Siltbe'ril'd^e .^rdje, The Lutheran church. 2)ie S'îetnto'nildi^e S^eorte, The Newtonian theory. 3)ad Orimm'jdie SBörterhu^, Grimm's dictionary. ®te Äant'fc^e ^(jiíojo^JÍjie, Kant's philosophy. Rem. 4. National and civic adjectives usually take the ending ; 5ínieriía'niíd;, American. iBerlt'nijd;, of Berlin, afrifa'nifd;, African. §amburgtfd;, of Hamburg, italiä'mfd;, Italian. l^öinifd;, of Cologne. :|)ortugie'[iid>, Portuguese. SDÎagbcburgijd;, of Magdeburg, ruifijc^, Ilussian. ^aliifd), of Halle, hairifd;, Bavarian. 0d;íefiíc(>, Silesian. Ob.eid}e 0e^ufud)t id) empfanb, nur eineê Slîcnfc^en anitc^ttg ju tnerben (0d).). 2. @raf Œulcnfelê mar rcid) an ©uf toc^ arm an ieben^freuben. 3. 0{c ftnb aile {^rei3 33erfpre^enê cingebenî gemefen (X.). 4. ©r ift jeber Siuf^ Opferung fä^ig (or er ift ju jeber 5ínfopferung fäbig). 5. ©r ífí fcbon beb 0iegeb gemíp. 6. 0ie gnb aUer 0orgen freí (or fie jtnb freí oon alien 0orgen). 7. ^err í;í)ompfon ift nic^t ber beutfd)en 0prac^e funbig. 8. £)l)ne ^erj ift bíe ÍBelt ber grcuí ben leer. 9. 0íe ^äume ftnb je^t oon g-rü^ten leer. 10. ®ab ©ebíc^t ift ooU í)oc|trabenber ^í)rafen, aber leer an tiefen ©cbanfen. 11. 0)iefeb 2Birtí)b^aub ift nie leer oon ©aflen. 12. .^err SfBilliamb l)at ben 33rief ganj geläufig gclefen ; cr ift ber beutfc^cn 0prad)e ooUfommen mäd)tig. 13. 3d) bin beb 0d)mal3enb mübe. 14. 3d) bin mübe non fo oiclcn ycrgcblid)cn Slnflrcngungen. 15. ©r ift fatt ber 2Öclt unb iljreb oergänglid)en 9îuÎ)meb. 16. ©r ift feineb Sibeb quitt. 17. 5iud) bu l)ältft mid) ber fd)meren 0ünbe fc^ulbig (0d).)? 18. 2)ort ftnb fte i()reb Çebcnb nid)t ftd)er. 19. 3)ie ©rbe ift ooll ber ©üte beb -Ç)errn (ï>falm 33, 5). 20. 0)ab 33itd)lcin ift ooU allcrlicbftci ^emeriungen (©.). 21. 3)a ift ein Äovb ooU reifer ^^Icpfcl. 136 CASES GOVERNED BY ADJECTIVES. Grammatical. 1.Many adjectives govern substantives in the oblique cases {i. (?., the genitive, dative, and accusative cases) without the use of a preposition between the adjective and the substantive. 2. The following adjectives govern the genitive case-. (werben), to get a view (of), arm (antiquated with gen.'), poor, bar, bare, destitute (of), bebiirf tig, destitute, in need (of), begie'rig, desirous, anxious (for), beiiö'tbigt, in need (of), bewußt', conscious (of), bloß, free (from), cin'gebenî, mindful (of), einig, agreed (concerning), eins, " " erii'brigt, dispensing (with), erfa^'ren, experienced (in), fäbig, capable (of), fret, free (from), fret), happy (about), gebent', conscious (of). geftäll'Dig, confessing (to). geWaf)r', conscious (of), gewär'tig, awaiting. geWiji', certain (of). gewohnt', accustomed (to), babbaft, in possession (of). innb (or funbig), acquainted (with), lebtg, free (from), leer, empty (of). Îoê, free (from), mächtig, in command (of), miibe, tired (of), mii^ig, free (from), quitt, free (from), fatt, satiated (with), fcbni'big, guilty (of), fidber, sure (of). tbeilbaft' (or 4g), participating (in), iiberbriif'fig, weary (of), toerbäd/tig, suspected (oQ. toerin'ftig, deprived (of), boïï, full (of). Werth, worth, würbig, worthy (of), jnfrie'ben, contented (with). Rem. 1. Some of these adjectives can take the negative prefix =1111, as : Unbegte'rig, undesirous (of), unbewußt, unconscious (of), unerfahren, inexperienced (in). unfchulbtg, innocent (of). unft(i)er, not sure (of). unWÜrbtg, unworthy (of). Rem. 2. Of the above adjectives, the following are frequently employed, in ordinary discourse, wdth the accusative case, viz : ?Inf{d;tig, beWußt, fähig, ge ftänbig, gewahr, gewohnt, habhaft, loS, mübe, fatt, fchulbig, übcrbrüffig, Werth, jufitebcn : bin ihnt einen 'iShûIce fchulbig, I owe him a thaler. (53 ift feinen ^fenniß Werth, It Is not worth a penny. Rem. 3. Many of these adjectives may be followed by certain prepositions, which prepositions govern their own cases (§ 81, § 82, § 83), as : (1) iöegierig, by nod) or onf. (2) bereit, fähig, by jn. (3) arm, gewohnt, leer, by on. ("4) froh, gewiß, einig, by über. (r>) frei, lebig, ío8, leer, boll, etc., by bon. (G) einig, erfahren, froh, by in. (7) jufrieben, by mit,orbOH,or übei. CASES GOVERNED BY ADJECTIVES. 137 Obs. Only a few (as b e n Ö t f) 131, g e It) ä r t i g, t ^ e t Í Í; a f t, ü 6 c r b r ii f Í fig, c VI It ft t g) must be used as governing the genitive case. 3. Many of the adjectives that govern the genitive case frequently can not be translated into English by adjectives, but must be rendered in the English idiom by verbs or nouns, as : Sitter ©vtd^e anfidjtig ju tnevben, Sitter Sadte ciiigcbent jii feitt, Sr ift ber beutfd^en Sf?rad;e ntctc^^ tig. Sitter ®ad)c geftättbig ju fein, Sr ift be§ 3BegeS hiitbig, Sr ift feined Sibe§ gttitt, SiMr tt?arcn biefeS 9tti§gattge3 ber ®ad;e ttid;t gettiärtig, ijr ift alter 3?orthciIc aitg biefem S3cfd;äfte bcríttftig, To get a view of a thing. To bear a thing in mind. He is master of the German lan¬ guage. To confess to a thing. He knows the road. He is free from the obligation im¬ posed by his oath. We did not anticipate this termina¬ tion to the affair. He lost all the profits that came from this business. 4. A larsre number of ease, as ; Stbtriinntg, faithless (to), äifnlid;, similar (to), angebureit, hereditary (to), angetegcn, adjacent (to), angenehm, agreeable (to), anftöbig, offensive (to), bctannt, known (to), bange, apprehensive (of), begnem, convenient (to), betnnjjt, known (to), bantbar, thankful (to), btcniid;, serviceable (to), bienftbar, " " eigen, peculiar (to), eigenthüm'íid), peculiar (to), etge'bcn, addicted (to), fetnb, hostile (to), fern , distant (from), gemein', common (to), gemcin'fam, mutual (with), geneigt', favorable (to), getreu',faithful (to), gemo'gcn, well disposed (toward). adjectives govern the dative gleich, similar (to), gncibig, gracious, merciful (to), gram, averse (to), gut, good, kindly (to), nahe, near, close (to), ueu, new (to), uöthig, necessary (to), offen, open (to), offenbar, plain, open (to), haffeub, fitting (for), heiulid;, painful (to). rcd)t, right (to), fd^äblid;, injurious (to), fd^meid^ethaft, flattering (to), fdjmerjtid), painful (to), fdailbig, in debt (to), fd^mcr, difficult (for), füjj, sweet (for), thcuer, dear (to), treu, true (to), übet, offensive (to), ilbcrte'geu, superior (to), uuterthau, subject (to). 138 CASES GOVERNED BY ADJECTIVES. toevber'&'iid;, destructive (to), toerfôaiibt', related (to), toort^eii^aft, advantageous (to), iuel), painful (to), tnerit), worth (to). toid^tig, important (to), iütberli^, offensive (to). tniUfom'nien, welcome (to), tno^i, fortunate (to). doubtful (to.) 5. The idiomatic spirit of the English language often requires that a verb or a noun shall take the place of an adjective which in German governs the dative case : (Stner ^'artei' abtrünnig tcerben, To desert a party. (Sr ift feinem iBater fei)r äbntid), He resembles his father very much. Îîann id; 8(;nen beí}üífíid; fein? Can I be of any service to your (Sá ift mir nid;t erinnerlid;, It has escaped my memory. 23Sie biet bi[t Su ifjm fd;nlbig ? How much do you owe him ? 6. Adjectives expressive of value, weight, measure, or age govern the accusative case : (5§ mar îcincn fpfcnntg m e r t It was not worth a penny. (S3 ift nnr einctl ¿Ofí breit, It is only an inch wide. (S3 ift ein fßfnnb fcf>mer, It weighs a pound. Sr ift jefin ^aiire ait, He is ten years old. Achtundsiebzigste Aufgabe. 1. Herr Eitelberg ist seiner ParteT abtrünnig gewor¬ den. 2. Diese Kinder sind ihren Eltern sehr ähnlich. 3. Es ist mir unbegreiflich, wie er solchen Unsinn ver¬ tragen kann. 4. Kann ich Ihnen auf irgend eine Weise behülflich sein? 5. Der Zustand des Kranken ist dem Arzte heute sehr bedenklich. 6. Die Umstände des Verlustes des Dampfers sind uns bis jetzt noch nicht bekannt. 7. An welchem Tage die Schlacht bei Jena stattgefunden hat, ist mir augenblicklich nicht erinner¬ lich. 8. Unter solchen Umständen war seine Gegen¬ wart natürlich der Gesellschaft sehr unwillkommen, 9. Der Kaufmann ist dem Banquier 800 Tlilr. schuldig. 10. Seine Mitwirkung war ihnen mehr hinderlich als förderlich. 11. Er ist seinem Eide treu geblieben. 12. Die deutsche Sprache richtig auszusprechen ist den Amerikanern im Anfang sehr schwer. 13. Wir fahren sehr langsam, weil der Wind und die Fluth uns widrig USE OF THE ARTICLE. 139 sind. 14. Dieser Rock ist mir zu gross. 15. Mir ist es sehr kalt hier. 16. Das Tuch ist eine Elle breit und dreissig Ellen lang. 17. Diese Kugel ist nur 68 Pfund schwer, aber jene Kugeln sind 120 Pfund schwer. 18. Er ist fast einen Kopf grösser als ich. 19. Wilhelm ist zwölf Jahre, einen Monat und einen Tag alt. LESSON XL. USE OP THE ARTICLE. ^Zcunimbfteíjígftc 5íufgak. 1. !Der SOîenfd) íft fterbííc^. 2. Seben ifí furj. 3. ®oíb ijl baö foftbarfte 3[)letúlí. 4. 3)a$ geuer unb S3a[fer finb gute T)iener, aber bofe 2Jíeífter. 5. ^evr 33raumüUer í)at ten jweiten ®anb oon Äugler'ö ©efc^íc^te ter SDlalerei, unt ten oiertcn ^ant oon ©under'ö ©efc^ic^te te^ 5nterí{)um0 l}eute ge? íaufí. 6. T)er ©ebrauc^ íft ter ©efeggeber ter Sprachen. 7. gvíetríc^ Oîa^n ftutirí ^^ííologte, unt 2Bín;eím Seítmann ftiií tirt 3)7etíctn. 8. ^rofeiJor gríetríd)^ íft ^rofeffor ter hafft:- f.'en ?ir:i)äoiog{e an ter Umoerfttät ju Berlin. 9. |)err ^raun roirt Î)eute 5ibent eine SSorlefnng über ten Urfprnng ter goti)b fc^en ¿anfnnft l^aiten. 10. 3)er griete ter 0eeie gi(t me^r alê 9îeic^t^nm. 11. T)aô grü^ftüd íft nod) md)t fertig. 12. 9îac| tern Síbenteffen inerten wir ín^ Œoneert geíjen. 13. ©aê feftc SDîagtebnrg ^at Xilíp am lOten 9)íat 1631 mit ©tnrm genom^ men ; anper gn^ei Äir^en nnt 130 |)änfern í)at er tie ganjc ©tatt nietergebrannt nnt 30,000 pon ten (Sinmo^nern ermor^i tet ; tiefe ©ränel ^at er tie „Sliagtebnrger |)od)jeit" genannt. 14. !2)er porige Slprií mar fe^r fait nnt nnangenel)m. 15. ^err ©ie^Ier nnt feine gamilie jtnt je^t in ter ©c^mei^ ; mir mcrten auc^ in ad)t Xagen nad) ter ©d)mei3 ge^en. 16. ^onflantb nopel ijl tie «Çianptftatt ter ííürfei. 17. T)iefeö îind) foftet jmei îfjaier tie G lie. 18. ©r ftant mit tem luit anf tem Äopf. 19. (Sr mar te^ @efnf)lö nid)t mäd)tig. 20. T)ie 9îeid)^perfammi Uing jn ^rag crmä^lte grietricb ten günften jnm ílbnige. 21. 140 USE OF THE ARTICLE. 2ßir fcgeltcn gegen 0üben, unb bann gegen 2ßeften. 22. ^err 2)Îûurer í)at einen 3írtifel über bíe Sîec^tc ber grauen gii'c^ríeben. 23« 3)er SSater unb bíe 0ö^ne ftnb fpajieren gegangen. Grammatical. 1. One of the most marked differences between the English and the German languages is in the use of the Article. This difierence arises in many cases from the fact that the German idiom often requires the noun to be conceived as concrete, where the English idiom re¬ quires it to be conceived in a general or abstract sense. Thus, in the sentence Ser SPenfd; ift ftevtli^ (Man is mortal), if we translate ber Slîenfi^ by ^Hhe human heing^'' we will have the spirit of the German idiom. 2. The most important points in which the German varies from the English in the use of the Article are given on page 254. Rem. The variations to the rules there given (especially those to the first rule, § 55, 1, 1), must be learned by practice. Their exposition here would only cause confusion. Exercise 80. 1. Platinum is the heaviest metal, and lead is the softest metal, 2. William Pressnitz is studying philos¬ ophy, and John Pressnitz is studying astronomy. 3. What are you reading ? 4.1 am reading Jahn's History of Astronomy. 5. Mr. Preu is studying theology at (an) the University of Halle. 6. Prof. Hoffmann is professor of chemistry in the University of Berlin. 7. The good fear not (the) death. 8. (The) virtue leads to (the) hap¬ piness. 9. (The) pride is contemptible. 10. (The) last summer was very hot. 11. (In the) next winter we Avill probably go to Italy. 12. After breakfast we will go to (auf) the market. 13. Dinner is not yet ready. 14. The ruins of old Greece are among the most interesting in the world. 15. Switzerland lies between Germany and Italy. PERSONAL AND POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 141 IG.Smyrna is the largest city in Turkey in Asia (in the Asiatic Turkey). 17. Bucharest is the capital of Wal- lachia. 18. We take lessons (^aben 0tuutcu) in music four times a week (§ 105). 19. He stands there with his hat in his hand. 20. They elected him president unan¬ imously. 21. The defendant admits that he was an ac¬ complice in the crime. 22. The ship will sail toward the North, and then it will sail toward the East. LESSON XLI. PERSONAL AND POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. ©iuunbot^tjigftc Wufgak* 1. Sr i)at eê meinettjalben getí)an. 2. (Sö tvarcii iinfev ¿ig in fcer ©efellfc^aft ; iner son unö [tub urn ¿cí)n Ubr nac^ ^aufe gegangen; bie übrigen blieben biê SOíiííerna^t. 3. (¿é n?ar einmal eine grope ^ungerbnot^ im ?anbe. 4. íKer ift ba ? 5.3c^ bin ba. 6. 2öer mar mit 3^nen? 7. mar mein S3ruber unb meine @d)mejler. 8.3d) lobe mid) (or ic^ lobe mid) felbft). 9. SÖarum lobft bu bic^ fclbft? 10. ^aben mir nnê gelobt? 11. 3fl/i^v ^abt end) gelobt. 12. Œr lobt ftd) felbft. 13. ®ie lobt jtd) ni^t. 14. 0ie loben 15. felbfl ^at eê get^an. 16. 3c| felber fann e^ tl)un. 17. 0clbil feine geinbe ad)ten i^n. 18. Sßir oerfte^en einanber (or itnö cinanber) gan¿ gnt. 19. (£r l)at ba^ .^auö für 2,000 2l)aler »erfauft ; er l)atte bafür' 1,500 X(>aler gegeben. 20. Œb maren 125 (Stimmen bafür^ nnb 87 Stimmen bage'gen. 21. T)iefc nene geber ^abe id) ^ente gefauft ; ic^ l)abe ben ®rref bamit^ gefc^rieben. 22. 3c^ l)abc ben ¿ifd) inê 3íitinier gebrad)t unb bic ¿üc^er baranf gelegt. 23. iDaê Xuc^ l)at i^m fel)r gefallen ; er i)at baooif einen 9îod unb eine Sßefte mad)en laffen. 24. ©e^en ©ie morgen mit unö nac^ ©reiben? 25. 3d) merbe mit 3l)nen ^eute 5lbenb barü'ber fpre^en. 26. 3^r trüber ifl mit bem Slîeinigen fpajieren gegangen. 27. (Sr l)at feine ^üd)er ein^ gepadt unb na¿^ 5lmerifa gcfd)icft, id) merbe bic 3)?einigen auc^ 142 PERSONAL AND POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. nac^ 5imerifa fc^irfcn ; waê werben ®te mit ben S^tig^n maiden? 28. 3c^ werbe bie SD^eintgen í)íer in 53erlin laffen, biê íc^ son 3tal{en juruifomme. 29. X>n ^aft baê 2)eínige get^an ; bie Sinbern muffen je^t baê 3^nge t^un. Grammatical. 1. The most important rules with reference to the use of Personal Pronouns are given on pages 282 and Rem. 1. The reflexive use of the personal pronoun is illustrated in the fol¬ lowing paradigm : Rein. 2. The reciprocal use of the personal pronoun is necessarily confined to the plural number : 2. The dative and accusative cases of personal pro¬ nouns, when not referring to persons, are rarely used with prepositions. In their stead are usually employed compound adverbs, formed by uniting the adverb bd (there) with the preposition, as : ®abci' (for Bei t^m, iBr, tBm ; iBnen), by or through it or them. baburcB' ( " burcB iBlt, ftc, CS î fie), by or with it or them, bafür' ( " für iBn, fte, e8 ; fie), for it or them, bage'gen ( " gegen i^n, fte, e8 ; fte), against it or them, bamit' ("nut i^ni, i^r, ibnt ; i^nen), with it or thom. Rem. 1. When the preposition begins with a vowel, the original t of bd (formerly written bflb) is retained, as : baran', barauf, barin', barÜ'Bct, etc. 283. (icB lobe micB/ bu lobft er lobt fufl, fie tobt ft^, e8 tobt fi(!b, mir toben uñé, ibr tobet eu(í, fie toben fti^, (@ie toben ft(^, I praise myself, thou praisest thyself, he praises himself, she praises herself, it praises itself, we praise ourselves, you praise yourselves, they praise themselves, you praise yourselves.) SSir toben un§, ibr tobt cu^, fie toben fttb, (0ie toben ft^l, We praise each other, you praise each other, they praise each other, you praise each other.) PERSONAL AND POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 143 Rem. 2. Similar compound adverbs formed with !^tCf {here) and a preposi¬ tion are sometimes employed; §icrbei' (for bei t^r, ti^nt ; ifjnen), with it or them. (lierniit' ( " mit il;m, i^r, i^m ; i^ncn), with it or them. Rem. 3. These compound adverbs are frequently used instead of the de¬ monstrative pronouns also (see § 188, Rem. 1 and Rem. 2). 3. When the absolute possessive pronoun is used pred- icatively (not being the emphatic word in the sen¬ tence), like other predicate adjectives, it is undeclined: S)ei' §ut i[t mein, The hat is mine. 2)eun Sein ift bie S()re, For Thine is the Glorj\ Rem. 1. When the stress of voice falls upon the absolute possessive pro¬ noun, it takes the termination, as shown in the first column in § 110: Siefer §ut ift meiner, nic()t feiner. This hat is mine, not his. Rem. 2. Frequently the definite article precedes the posessive pronoun; Siefer §nt ift ber SQÎeine, iener This hat is mine, that one is his. ift ber ©eine. Rem. 3. More usually, in modern German, the form ending in stQ is em¬ ployed : Siefer §ut ift ber âJîeinige, jener This hat is mine, that one is his. ift ber ©einige. Rem. 4. The form ber ÜJÍeinige {mine) is deelined thus : SINGULAR. PLURAL. Masculine. Ser 9)îeinige, be8 Slîeinigen, bem 9)leinigen, ben Slîeinigen. Feminine. Sie Slîeinige, ber SDÎeinigen, ber Slîeinigen, bie Slîeinige. Neuter. Sa§ Slîeinige, beS Slîeinigen, bem Slîeinigen, bas Slîeinige. All Genders. Sie Slîeinigen, ber Slîeinigen, ben Slîeinigen, bie Slîeinigen. Rem. B. The neuter singular of the absolute possessive pronoun is frequently employed as meaning the property of, the duty of, ete. : ®r Ijat ba8 ©einige beríoren, He has lost his property. (Sr tjat baS ©einige get^an. He has done his duty. Rem. G. The plural frequently refers to the family, friends, followers, dependents, etc. : Sie SDÍeinigen miffen nic^t, mann My relatives do not know when 1 ¡^nrücítommen merbe, will return. Ser ©enerol gog mit ben ©einigen The general retreated with his forces, gurücf, 144 INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. Exercise 82. 1.1 did it on his account. 2. They did it on our account. 3. There were ten of them ; four of them came with us; the rest remained at Leipzic. 4. There was once a very rich man—. 5. Who was in the room? 6. It was I. 7. There are many large trees in this forest. 8. I understand myself. 9. He injures him¬ self. 10. We understand ourselves. 11. They under¬ stand themselves. 12. They understand each other. 13. Even his enemies acknowledge his worth. 14. Mr. Dietrich has sold his horse for 360 Thlr. ; he paid 400 Thlr. for it last year. 15. The Government will im¬ mediately make a new loan of 150,000,000 Thlr. ; there were 250 votes in favor of (for) it in Congress, and only 36 votes against it. 16. Will Mr. Eitelberg go with us to Gotha? 17. He will come here and speak with you about it this evening. 18. Why did you not tell William that he must not go out in (bei) this bad weather? 19. I did tell him so twice. LESSON XLII. INDEFINITE AND INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS. ^rciunbai^taigîtc ^lufgabc* 1. (Sinige »on ben 53ü(í^ern Inb gut gebunben, aber btc meiften (most of them) ftnb fe^r fc^íe^t gebunben. 2. 3)er (Sine i)at feine 5lufgabe ganj o^ne gebler gefcbrieben, ber Sinbere bût ïiele gebier barin gemacht. 3. ßinige menige ©ebii^te ber Sammlung finb gut, man^e ftnb fd)le^t, öielc ober bic meijlen finb mittelmäßig. 4. SSon Slolanb fang er unb man^em fromi men ^elb (S«^.). 5. ifl bon mand)em bb^en ®aum bie Sßurjel faul. 6. ^err 2)iefenbacb b^it ntebrere 3abre (§ 83,4) in 3)eutfd)lanb gebebt. 7. Sr bat mir íein ®ud) gef^idt. 8. Sein ^b^seij fennt feine ©renken. 9.5!)îir gefällt feine^^ bon allen biefen èûd)ern. 10. fann feiner barübcr cutfduebcn INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS. 145 urteilen. 11. mx oíd ?ärm um ; oid ©cft^ret unt» menig 3BoUe. 12. Sr ^at eê nur turd) oici (or oide) 3írbeít getrau. 13. 3^ babe mit oíd (or oídem) íBergnügen gett}an. 14. 2î)îau faun bei oídem ©eíbe unglücflí^, unb o()ue oíet ®elb febr glüdlíd} fein. 15.2)u baft oíd geíefen, aber meníg gelernt. 16. (2r bat oíel gereift mit? SSieleê gefeben. 17. 23íde Äöcbe oerfaljen ben 53reí. 18. 0tubíren je$t oíel (or oíde) Símerífa^ ncr ín Berlín? 19. 91ur loeníg 2)7enfcben finb fo ungemein glüdlíd). 20. 3^ muü ein loeníg 9íube fucben. 21. 3(^ babe baíj 53ucb für nur loeníge ©rofcben gefauft. 22. Œê ftnb loeni? ger SluiJnabmen ató bu benfft. 23. SBeníge baben e^ oerfud)t, unb nod) ©enígern íft e^ gelungen. 24. 2)íít 23íelcm bait man ^aubí, mit SÖenigem îommt man au^. 25. (Sr bat toeniger {comparative) SSorfícbt ató îapferfeit. 26. 2)a0 ©ebeimnif' ift im íBeitóe nur toeniger {gen.pl.) '»perfonen. 27. ßr bat ba0 toenigfte @elb unb bie loenigften 0orgen. 28.57ur bei ben me^ nigften fí»bet man folcbe ©eioobnbeiten. 29. SDîit a^í Sllen toerben fte Xu(^ genug für einen 9îod unb eine SBefte ba^ ben. 30. 3cb babe genug oon feiner Xapferfeit gebort. 31. "33omit baben 0ie ben 53rief gef^rieben? 32. 3^ babe ibn mit einem 33leiftift gefcbrieben, meil icb feine ^cber bei mir batte. 33. Söorüber bat at lüeniger SJorfic^tigfeit alâ He has less prudence than valor. Sapferieit, TLem. 3. The indefinite pronoun ntdtt (§ 112, 6) is used in most gpneral ex¬ pressions ; it is translated by one, peoj>te, etc. : Sitan fagt, one says, they say, people say, it is said, iüíau glaubt, one believes, they believe, people believe, it is believed. Ohs. SÛÎûn is indeclinable. When oblique cases are required, they are formed from CinCl*. When a possessive pronoun referring to lllttU is required, [eiu is employed (see Sentences 5 and Ü in Exercise 81). Rem. 4. ©itDûê (§ 112, 8) and (§112, 9) are frequently used in ap¬ position with the neuter of adjectives used substantively (Sent. 19 and 20). Obs. The first syllable (CÍ=) of CÍlDílá is frequently dropped in common conversation. Rem. 2. In asking questions, the indefinite pronoun soine or an?/ is in many cases not translated : §aben ©ie SSutter geiauft ? Did you buy any butter ? §aben ©te siejjfeí getauft ? Did you buy any apples ? Obs. In some cases sone is translated by CttOttÖ (see § 112, 8, Re?n. 1). 2. For the chief rules with reference to the use of Relative Pronouns, see page 289. Reni. For the compound adverbs tUOtttth motOlt,etc., see § 188, Re?n. 3. Vierundachtzigste Aufgabe. 1. Man reist von Berlin nach Köln mit der Eiseiibahn in einem Tage. 2. Bei ttns sjpricht man auch von Ge- sjpenstern / eiber in der Regel haben nur "• die Leute''' und das selber unsichtbare und sjpuhhafte " maii'' sie gesehen. 3. Was sagt man in der Stadt über die neue Anleihe ? 4. Man ist darüber sehr unzufrieden. 5. Man lacht ge- wbhnlich.¡ wenn einein etwas Lächerliches begegnet. 6. Alan ist froh, wenn man eine Arbeit geendet hat. 7. Jemand Idojpft. 8. Es ist ILerr Wedel. 9. Eennen Sie Jemand {or Jemanden) aus der Gesellschaft f 10. Lch kenne Niemand {or Niemanden) ausser LLerrn Ruprecht und seiner Frau. 11. ILat Jemand es Lhnen gesagt f 12. Nein, Niemand hat es mir gesagt, ich habe es selbst heute Morgen in der Zeitung gelesen. 13. Seine LLand wird DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 147 Vjider Jederman, und Jedermanns Hand wird wider ihn sein (1.3Í0S. 12,16). 14. Man soll sein Herz nicht Jeder¬ mann offenharen. 15. Hohen Sie etwas von dem neuen Unfall in den Bergwerken gehört? 10. Nein, ich habe Nichts davon gehört. 17. Wünschen Sie noch etwas ? 18. Ich werde noch etwas Butter nehmen. 19. Dieses Tuch ist etwas ganz Neues. 20. Er hat etwas ganz Anderes ge¬ meint. (21. Hier ist ganz was Neues). 22. Hohen Sie noch Gold? 23. Ja, ich habe noch welches. 24. Haben Sie heute Morgen Aepfel auf (m) dem Markt gesehen? 25. Ja, ich habe welche gesehen, aber sie waren schlecht und sehr theuer. 20. Ich toeiss nicht, loovon Sie sprechen. 27. Können Sie mir sa/yn, worüber Professor Schmidt heute Abend sprechen ivird ? 28. Er wird üher die Geschichte der Stadt Berlin vor dem vierzehnten Jahrhundert sprechen. LESSON XLIII. DEMONSTKATIVE AN» KELATIVE PRONOUNS. g-üníunbní^í3igííc Aufgabe. 1. 2i)îorgeu tiefe jtpei S3üd}cv gefauft ; tiefet lear fe()r Mllig, jene^ mx fei)r tbeuer. 2. (jene^) babe ici) fd)ou geíefen. 3. !2)iefeu |)errn íenne id) feí)r gut, aber jenen ^eirn bort l)abe id) nie nerber gefeben. 4. 3)ie 9îniucn yon ''Pompeji ftnb gvöper nnb inteveffanter alb bie yon percutai neinn. 5. 3Der ift ein feí)r gelel)rter 3)îann! 0. ilöann mirb ^err Sfioti) mieberfommen ? 7. 3)aÍC0), ^ÍÍCé, etc., is used in an indefinite way, without distinction of gen der or number, like the neuter of the third person of the personal pronoun C§; thus used, these pronouns do not control number and person of the verb: 3)flë fínb 3IÍÍCé neue Käufer, Those are all new houses. S){Cê finb reife ßrbheeren, Those are ripe strawberries. 5. Instead of relative pronouns (not referring to per¬ sons) preceded by prepositions, compound adverbs are usually employed (see also § 188, 3) : §iev ift bag i8u(^ iDObOn (or toon Here is the book of which I spoke. ttieid)em) t(t) gefbro^en f;abe, §ier ift ber iBIeiftift (or bie gcbcr) Here is the pencil {or the pen) with motnit idl ben 93nef gefd^riebeu which I wrote the letter. Exercise 86. 1. This cloth which you bought to-day was much too dear. 2. The cloth, from which the tailor made these coats, was very good, but it was very dear. 3. Here is the book of which I spoke. 4. There are the books of which I spoke. 5. The Cathedral of Cologne is much larger than the one (fcic) at Ulm. 6. These books are new. but those (jene) books are not new. 7. These are all new books. 8. How much did this house cost? 9. (That) I do not know. 10. (That) I can not say. 11. There is the same carriage that we saAV this morning. 12. Did you find any thing that you do not understand? 150 REFLEXIVE VERBS. 13. No, I have so far (íné jc^t) found nothing that is not very easy to understand. 14. What he said about the battle is indeed (wo^l) possible, but it is not probable. 15. I can not ^yrite with such a pen as (iiue) this. 16. There is the man in whose (teiTen) house we reside. 17. There is the physician with whom I made the trip through the Kiesengebirge (mit irel^em or mit bem ic^ eine Dîeife burcí) baê 9íiefenge(nrge gcmnd)t ^abe). 18. That man is the one whom we saw at the (im) concert yesterday evening. LESSON XLIV. KEFLEXIVK VERBS. ©iciicnunbrtt^tjigfte Wiifgíik» 1.3Bie lange ^aben 0ie jtd) in SDíünc^cn aufgeí;aíten? 2. 3m vorigen 3aí)re í;aben mir nnê nur brei 2ßod)cn in Slíünden aufgeí}alten ; ober öor sier 3aí)reu finb mir über rüer SOíonott in ?líüud}en geblieben. 3. SSie befinbcn 0ie jtd) (how do you do)? 4, 3c^ bejtnbe mic^ gonj mob(, id) bonfe. 5. ^err 3)iei fenbo^ unb feine gonje gomilie i)aben jtd) nac^ |)e(gcíanb bege^ belt, um bort 0eebäber p neí)men. 6. îBarum belümmcrn 0ic ftd) fo jei)r um feine 5íngeíegení)eiten ? 7. .3d) í)abe mid) enbli^ entfc^íoffen, nod) 3talien p ge^en. 8. $(uê bem 0amen entí unrfelt jt^ bie ^fíonje. V>. 35on bcr ^át on entmidelte ftd) bi¿ (Smpörung febr rafd>. 10. 5lm 1. 9looember 1755 ereignete jîd) ba^3 (Srbbeben in Idffabon. 11. Sr í)at ftd) über feine Guíí bcdung feí)r gefreut. 12. 9îad) einer langen 53clagcrung bat bic ^•cftung ftcb auf (^nabe unb Ungnabe ergeben müjfcn. 13. (ir bat ftd) burcb 0tunbengcben crnabren müjfen. 14. 3i)îau cfí funbigte fid) unter ber ^anb fel)r fd)atf, mo jte jîd) mäi)renb bcr 2)îorbtl)at befanben. 15. 3d) fürd)te micb oor feiner 9iadic nid)t (or id) fürd)te feine 9îad)e nicfu). 16. Go ift fcbr fdnrer. ftd) an eine gan,t neue Sebenbart ju gemöbncn. 17. 3vren 0ie ficb nid)t, mein ¿crr, baben 0ic nid)t meinen Vat genommen^ REFLEXIVE VERBS. 151 Grammatical. 1. For the chief rules that govern the use oí Reflexive and for the paradigm of these verbs, see § 158, and § 159. 2. 5[ost reflexive verbs are intransitive. Those that, have the reflexive pronoun in the dative case govern an object in the accusative case. Some govern an in¬ direct object in the dative case. Some are followed by a substantive in the genitive case. Some are fol¬ lowed by a preposition. 3. The following are among the most commonly em¬ ployed of the refle.xive verbs. Rem. 1. See also those verbs below which requii'e the reflexive pronoun to be in the dative case. Sidt ardent (über), to be offended (at). ficb aufcbidcu (ju), to prepare (for). fic^ anfßaltcn, to remain, stay. fid) auïid)îrtngeii, to mount, to soar. fid) äußern, to express one's self. fic^ befcaufen (für), to give thanks (for). fid) bcfinben, to find one's self (to be, to do). fid) bebenîeit (ve«-), to deliberate about, to devise. fid) befleißen ") , . fid) befieißiacn) '''PPh ones self (to), fid) becseben, to resort to, to repair to, to betake one's self to. fid) bebelfen (mit), to resort to, to b.elp one's self by means of. fidb bcllaejen (über), to complain (of). fid) befiimmeru (urn), to trouble one's self (about) ; (über), to grieve for fid) bemäd)tiaeu) ^ . fid) bemeiftern ) possession (of), to seize. fid) befinneu (gen., or nuf or über), to recollect, to try to remember. fid) entäußern (gen.), to dispose of, to part with. fid) eutbalteu (gen.), to restrain one's self (from). fid) eutid)ließeu, to resolve, to determine, to decide, fid) eutfiiiueu (gen.), to recollect. fid) eutañcfelu, to expand, develop. fid) erbarmen (gen., an or über), to have mercy (upon). fub ereignen, to happen, to take place. fi(^ erfreuen (gen. or über), to rejoice, to be glad (at). fitib ergeben (dat.), to surrender, to addict one's self (to). 152 REFLEXIVE VERBS. fid) ernäi;ren, to gain one's livelihood, fid; cvimiern or an), to remember, ji^ Cïîâltcn, to take a cold. fic^ cviunbigen {gen., nac^ or an or über), to make inquiries, to inform fic^ freuen (über), to rejoice (at). [one's self. fid; furd;ten (hor), to be in dread (of). fid; getröften {gen.), to hope (for). fid; geiuöbnen (an), to accustom one's self (to). fid; grämen (über or nm), to grieve (over or at). ficb irren, to make a mistake. fid; näi;ern {dat.), to approach. fid; rü[;men {gen.), to boast (of). ficb fd;ämen {gen., über or megcn), to be ashamed (of). ficb in fcie Uniftänbe fd;icíen, to aclapt one's self to circumstances. fid; fd;enen (bor), to stand in fear (of). ficb febnen (nacb), to long for. fid; feben, to take a seat. fid; tröften {gen. o? mit), to console one's self with, ficb nnterbalten, to converse, to amuse one's self, ficb hergeben, to go astray, to lose one's way. fid; herirren, " " " " fid; herlaffen (anf), to rely (upon), ficb herfbrecben, to misspeak. ficb herfeben {gen.), to expect; (an), to be frightened at. fid) herficbern {gen. or hor), to make sure (of), ficb herfbäten, to come too late, ficb herftellen, to disguise one's self, ficb horbereiten (auf or jn), to prepare one's self, fid; iheigern, to object, to refuse, fid; miberfeben {dat.), to oppose, to withstand, fid; mnnbern (über), to wonder (at). Rem. 2. Many other transitive verbs besides those that are included in the above list are often used refle.xively, as : 3d; herftcbe ba8 nid;t, I do not understand that. 3d; herftcbe mid;, I understand myself. 2)a8 herftebt fid;, That is a matter of course. Rem. 3. Reflexive verbs take babCtt for the auxiliary. 4. The following reflexive verbs require the reflexive pronoun to be in the dative case : 0id; anmafjcn, to presume, to an-ogate to one's self. fid; au§bcfctngen, to reserve to one's self. ftd; anSbittcn, to ask for. ficb beuten, to imagine. fid; einbilben, to imagine, to fancy. REFLEXIVE VERBS. 153 getrauen, to dare, to venture, fid} erlauben, to indulge one's self (in), fid) fd}meid)cln, to flatter one's self, fid} terfi^affen, to provide, ficb toernel}men, to propose to one's self, fid} Ucrftellen, to imagine, to place before one's self. Kan. 1. These verbs govern an object in the accusative case: 2)a3 baft bu btf eiufjebilbet, Thou hast imagined that. Rem. 2. Reflexive verbs that have the reflexive pronoun in the dative ca,sc are conjugated thus : Infinitive ; CtttflUbeit/ to imagine. Present Indicative. id} bitbe es mir ein, I imagine it. bu biibeft eS bir ein, thou imaginest it. CV biibet e8 fi^ ein, he imagines it. mir hüben e§ uilê ein, we imagine it. i^r hübet eS citfb ein, you imagine it. fie hüben eê fi(b ein, they imagine it. (0ie hüben eS ft^ ein, you imagine it). Imperfect Indie. ; ich hübetC ed mtr ein, etc., I imagined it, etc. Perfect Indie. ; ich h^he eS mtf eingehübet, etc., I have imagined it, etc. Pluperfect Indie. : ich h^lüe eä míí eingehübet etc., I had imagined it, etc. First Fut. Indie. : i^) mei'be e3 mir einhüben, etc., I shall imagine it, etc. Sec. Fut. Indie. : ich Werbe eê mir eingehübet haben, I shall have imagined it. 5. For the use of reflexive verbs governing the geni¬ tive and dative cases, see Lessons XLVI., and XLVII Exercise 88. 1. How long shall you remain in Berlin ? 2. We will probably remain there two months. 3. Good morning 1 How do you do? 4. I am very well, I thank (you). 5. During the hot weather we usually betake ourselves to Stettin or Danzig, for the purpose of taking sea-baths, and of escaping the bad air of this large city. 6. We have concluded to return to Berlin in October. 7. The conspiracy developed itself with astonishing rapidity. 8. A great freshet (overflowing) of the Rhine took place last spring. 9. He rejoiced over the arrival of his broth¬ er. 10. The entire army was forced to surrender at discretion. 11. He had to earn his livelihood by work G2 154 AGREEMENT OF VERB. ing with his hands (|)anb,irbeíí) until he could get a better situation. 12. It is not easy to accustom one's self to the usages and customs of other lands. 13. We are mistaken {or we have made a mistake) ; that is Mr. Rahn's house. 14. We can not rely upon his help. 15.1 long to see my native land (33aierlant>) once more. 18. May I rely upon your standing by me in this affair? 17. Of course you can. 18. It is often necessary for us to adapt ourselves to circumstances. LESSON XLV. AGREEMENT OF VEER WITH NOMINATIVE. VERBS GOVERNING THE ACCU¬ SATIVE CASE. APPOSITION. 5Zeununbo^í5ig[te Wufgak. ^tatt. 2. 23tlí)eím ßekn nac^ ber ©tabt. 3. (£è ftnb itele f^öne ©tablftidjc in biefem ^uc^. 4. 3Bir waren nící)t, bíe auf bíe Blumen treten kkn. 5. ftiib ?llleö neue 53ücber auf biefem îifcbe, aber baê ftnb 5ïUei5 53üd)er auè ber ^weiten «Ç)anb. 6. ©eine Slîafeftât Ïï3iif)eim ber Stierte, Äöniß rum ^J>reu§en, l)aben ailer^ gnäbigft geruí)t, ju befeblen, baf, etc. 7. ©ie, 3br ®rub:r, mein SSater unb id) fbnnen (b. l). wir fbnnen) in bicfcm Œoup(5 fakcn. 8. ©u, ©ein ^rubcr unb ©cine ©d)wcftcr werbet (b. I). ik werbet) ^Ma^ in bem näcbften ©agen finben. 9. ©u unb ©ein trüber finb bon .Ç^errn 5lbbel eingeiaben, mit ilrm unb fei-- ner grau nac^ ©egel ju fai)rcn, um baé ©rab ber ©ebrüí ber ¿pumbolbt unb bie Äunfifd)ät3e im ^>aíafí ju fcben. 10. ©aio faite ©etter, wcld)e^ wir je^ baben, l)at fd)pn länger als? einen ïOîcnat gebauert. 11. ©ie niel wiegen ©ic (or waêi ifl 3i)r ©ewid)t)? 12. 3d) wiege l)unbert unb breifig ''Pfunb; mein ©ruber 3bbann wiegt l)unbert bierunbbier,yg '■J.^'unb. 13. ©iefcô ©ud) Îoftet einen unb einen balbeu ©baler (or anbertbalb ©baler) bie (£Ue. 14. .f^amburg liegt unaefäl)r breifig beutfdte (b. b. bunbert unb swanjig englifcbc) 2}ieileu norbweftlid) lum AGREEMENT OF VERB. 15ö S3frl{n. 15. ^err Dîot^ wirb mit feiner Familie wuí^rfcíjeinlicí) tiefen 5ibenb (or ()eute Slbent) stcn ®üjfclborf anfommen. 16. I^crr 3)ietrid) fam früi)er nm 10 Ui)r Sormittagê, um unê beutí fcí)en Unterrid)t ju ert^eilen ; je^t fommt er um brei U()r mittagy. 17. 2Bir finb nur gegen 5ibenb ten SSefuö I)inauf ge^ gangen, weil wir ten ^errlic^en 0onnenuntergang ton ter 0pi^e beb 93ulfaw? fe^en woUten. 18. ®alb nad)bem tie 0onne untere ging, fam ter SßoUmonb i)erauf : aber ber Rimmel í)at jtd) gleich barauf mit SBoIfen bebedt, fo tap eê feíjr bunîel war, alb wir ben Sßerg berunterfamen. 19. ginben 0ie eb fait l)ier? 20. 3«/ mid) friert eb. 21. (Sb freut mid), ju i)ören, ba§ 3{)ve ©efunb^ Ijeit wieberl)ergefteUt ift. 22. Sb gel)t il)n gar ni^tb an, ob wir tab -^aub faufen ober nid)t. 23. iSb giebt oiele ungebilbete ?eute in Deuti"d)lanb, befonberb auf bem ?anbe, tie an 0pufen unb ©efpenftcr glauben. 24. £)l)ne SBeitereb ju fagen, ging er feinen SBeg. 25. ^Ç)err S3ernftein lel)rt mi(| tie 9}iufif unb tab 3eid)nen. 26. ©iffen 0ie wann ^err 53e^r oon SBeimar wie? berfommen wirb? 27. 97ein, id) ^abe i^n jwar barna^ gffb<ïô6 aber er fonnte eb mir nic^t genau fagen. 28. (Sr nennt il)n feinen greunb, unb bot^ bat er ibn in tiefer unfreunbli^en 2öeife bebanbelt. 29. 3}ie (SinwobnerjabI beb ^önigreicbeb ^reufen be? läuft auf etwa 24,000,000. 30. ilîacb Wr SSerbannung beb Äaiferb 57apoleon b^t ^reufen einen tnebr alb fünfjig 3nbre bauernben ^rieben genoffen. 31. 2)urcb ten griebenboertrag jn ^arib, im 3nbre 1815, bcit ï'reufen tie 9îbein?^rooinjen befom- men. 32. 23om Einfang beb 2)îonatb Síuguft bib ;^um 0nbe beb SDionatb 0eptember (or non 5ínfang Síuguft bib Sube 0cptem< ber) b^tben wir febr trodeneb 2ßetter gehabt. 33. ®er 0d)ub macbergefell ift mit jwei ^aar 0cbubcn unb brei ^aar 0tiefeln nad) ber 0tabt gegangen. 34. 2)îit bem beften ©illen fonnten tic 0d)üler fo lange íeftionen nid)t lernen. 35. 3)er 9íame ber 0tabt ^otbbam iff flaoif^en llrfprungb unb bebeutet „unter ben @iáen." 36. T)k ÎQerra unb gulba crbalten nacb ibvcr 33ereiuií gung ten 9íamen ®e[er. 156 AGREEMENT OF VERB. Grammatical. 1. For the chief rules with reference to the agree¬ ment of the subject with the verb in number and per¬ son, see § 115 and § 175. Rem. ]. The use of a plural verb with courtly titles in the singular number is customary in official documents and in direct address ; but in speaking of the persons having these titles, it is common to put the verb in the singular number : Sft ©eine Syceïïenj ju ^aufe ? Is his Excellency at home ? 2. The third person singular of the verb geben {to give) is frequently employed impersonally in the signification of there is^ there was, etc. : gicBt Sente, bie an ©efbenfter There are people that believe in glauben, ghosts. 3. For the use of Dimidiative Numeráis, see § 103, 2. 4. For the chief rules of AvposiUon, see § 85. Rem. 1. If one of two nouns in apposition is a proper name, the proper name is not inflected : £)ie ©rengen beä ^önigreid;« Tlie boundaries of the kingdom of ^.|Jreu^en, Prussia. T>ie Verbannung bc8 ÄaiferS Sía^ The banishment of the Emperor Na¬ poléon, poleon. (but)9îa(i) bcm Sobe 5îarl§ beö ©ro^en, After the death of Charlemagne. " iJîad; SBilpelm bem Vierten, After William the Fourth. Rem. 2. The name of the month is not inflected when the word S^OlIÛt (inonth) precedes the name of the month : Sim Slnfang bc§ ÎOÎonatô Slpril At the beginning of the month of (or am Slnfang Slprilê), April (or at the beginning ofApril). Rem. 3. The non-inflection of nouns indicating weight, measure, and num¬ ber (see Lesson X VI., 2), when they are of the masculine or neuter gender is explained by some German grammarians by considering them as cardinal numbers ; the case is sometimes indicated by the limited noun : 2)iit (gmct ®n^cnb) Sicrn, With two dozen eggs. Sliit (Orci ^Hinr) 0d;nben, With three pairs of shoes. Obs. The limited noun is itself, however, also more usually not inflected ; 3Jîtt gmei "5)it^enb Œicr, With two dozen eggs. SDÎit gmct ©tieicl. With two pairs of boots. Slnfjcr einem Ärug VSaffcr inünfi^t Ile wishes nothing except a pitcher er ntd)t8, of water. AGREEMENT OF VERB. 157 5. The article is usually used before names of mouu tains (see § 61, 7) : 35er §arj ; ber SJefuto ; ber Çecia, The Hartz ; Vesuvius ; Hecla. 6. The following nouns formerly ended in ;CIl : the n of the nominative is now usually dropped : ^riebe, peace. ber §aufe, heap, ber @anie, seed. „ guntc, spark. „ ^at^íe, carp. „ 0d}abe, damage. f, ©ebanie, thought. „ Siame, name. „ 3BiUe, will. „ ©laitbe, belief, faith. Sßä^venb be« griebend, During the peace. Exercise 90. 1. "William and his father will soon go' to Stuttgart. 2. There are in this album many beautiful photographs of the most important cathedrals and other public buildings in Germany. 3. Those are all photographs of paintings in the museums (§ 77) of Berlin and Dresden 4. My brother and I went to Potsdam yesterday. 5. You and your brother are invited by (yon) Mr. Niemeyer to go with him to-morrow to (um—ju) see the collection of Geimian and Scandinavian antiquities which Count von Eitelberg has just brought from Pomerania to Ber¬ lin. 6. The hot weather which we had last year lasted almost a month. 7. Weber's History of the World (2Beíígefd)í^te) costs two thalers and a half a volume, unbound ; such binding as this will cost a thaler and a half a volume ; that binding is very strong and good ; it costs only half a thaler a volume. 8. The express- train from Frankfort-on-the-Oder arrives at eicrlit O o'clock in the morning ; the freight-train leaves at four in the afternoon. 9. The concert will take place at eight o'clock this evening (§ 2S4:, BemA). lO.AVe wmnt up the mountain very slowly, but we came down the mountain very fast. 11. We are very glad (§ 177, 8) to hear that his health has almost entirely been restored (that his health itself almost entirely restored has). 12. It surprises me to hear that he has not yet arrived 158 VERBS GOVERNING THE GENITIVE CASE. 13. There are many beautiful houses in the neighbor¬ hood of the Thiergarten. 14. It is none of his business (it does not concern him at all) whether we sell the house or not. 15. Mr. Kuhn taught my sister music, when we were in Berlin. 16. Soon after the death of Alexander the Great, the Greek empire fell into pieces (JU ©runbe ge^eu). 17. We will remain in Munich from the beginning of the month of November till toward the end of the month of March {or from the beginning of November till toward the end of March). 18. The name of the city of Colog-ie is of Latin origin ; it sig¬ nified originally " Colony.'^ 19. Do you know the name of that river (iDÎffeiî 0ic ben 57amen jeneê or wilK" ©ie line jener ? 20. That is the Havel. LESSON XLVI. VERBS GOVERNING THE GENITIVE CASE. ©inunbncunpgfic Í. SBeib tebarf in iînegeênot^en beg 33eíct;ü^evg C-Sd}.). 2. Gr Be» burfte jeÇt tnc^r alê jematg beë guten SSitteng ber 0taaten (0di.). 3. Gin G^ariatan Bebarf nur SîuBm ju I^aBen. 4. 2Ber ber ©efatr f))otiet, gebeult i^rer ; ber iua^re §eíb aber bénît gar ni^t an bie @efat)r. 5. ®tenfte ïann i^ entratiien (0d;.). 6. SÎudj ba§ gtücííicí^fte Salent îann ber Ginirir» îung einer guten ©c^ule nic^t entratBeu (©.). 7. 211g Uñr auf bag ©c^iff lamen, fanben mir, baji bie @d;iffgíeute aud^ ber nöttigften Sebeugmittel ermau» gelten. 8. 3d; fpotte feiner S)roi;ung ; fie fc^redt mid; gar nid;t, meií i^ mid^ im fJîottfatt gn nert^eibigen treiß. 9. ©ie ffjotten meiner, ijUrinj (©c^.). 10. Gg finb nid;t atte frei, bie i^rer Letten ff^ctten. 11. Gin fd;manîenbeg ©ebäubc brand;t beg Grbbebeng nid;t, um über ben Raufen gu fatten (©c^.). 12. ©it îôunen bag Sud; mitnet;men ; id; branche eg je^t nid;t. 13. 2)er §abfnc()tige ûd;tei jebeg 25Drtt;eiig (b. b., ber §abfüd;tige fjat 2ld;t auf jeben SScrtbeiÎ). 14. Ginen Sügner îann man nid;t ad;ten (b. b-, nid;t ebren). 15. §err ©d;uorr ift fo groffmüting, baji er biefer 23eieibignng toergcffen mirb (b. b., baff er biefe Se» Îeibignng mit 2tbfid;t ang bem Gebäd;tnif3 entfernen mirb). 16. 3d; bíiBe bie 3abreggabí gang nergcffcn (b. b-, nbim 2tbfid;t aug bem ®ebíid;tniji ncrícren}. 17. 2lííe íad;en über feine Sborbeit. 18. 2)eg ©uten, mag man b^it, fotite man geniefjen ; iinb man felíte beffen entbebrcu lernen, meffen man nidbt bebarf VERBS GOVERNING THE GENITIVE CASE. 159 (more usually with accusative cases, thus: 2)a§ (Sute, tuaS man ^at, füllte man genießen ; boc^ man füllte ba6 entbehren lernen, mas man ntd;t bebarf). ID. 3cb bin ber 2)îeinung, baß mir üor je^n U(;r beS Slbenbs nici)t anlümmen rcerben (or meiner 9)îcinnng nac^ merben mir üür jcfjn Uf)r beS SIbcnbS nicíjt anlümmen). 20. SSei alten biefen Unfällen ift er ganj gnteS SRnt^eS (or guten 23íntí(eS, see § 89, Rem. 1). 21. Od; mar Sillens (or i^ t)atte eben bie 21bfi{i)t) einen tßrief an iljn gn fc^reibcn, als er ganj nnermartet in mein ßimmer fierein-^ lam. 22. 0elig, bie reines §erjenS (§ 78, Rem. 1) finb, beim fie merben (Sütt fd^auen (Matt. 5, 8). 23. Siebemann ift eines :|3lü^lid;en 2:übeS geftoV' ben. 24. 3it fic eines natürli^en SübeS geftürben ? 25. Sfein, fie ift am ge^ brüdienen ^crjen geftorben, mcil ii;re 3mei 0übne eine iKorbt()at berübt (laben unb bafür 3nm Sobe bernrt()eilt finb. 26. 'S)cx arme S3ettler ift beS §nngerS (or bor §unger [§ 252, Rem. 2], or am §nnger) geftorben. 27. j£)er §üd;' altar ftanb an ber ©teile, mo Stlbert bon Oeftreid; bcS SobeS berblid;. 28. SaS für Sanbslente finb bie Äanflente ? 29. (Siner ift ein 2)entfc^er, ber Slnbere ift ein .ÇoUânber. Grammatical. 1. For the chief rules relating to the government of the Genitive Case of substantives by verbs, see § 178. Rem. 1. Some of the reflexive verbs given in § 178, 3, may also have the reflexive pronoun in the dative case, and be followed by the complementary object in the accusative instead of in the genitive case : (idj maße miíí bcffcil nii^t an, ) ^ (or) id, maSe mit kä nldjt «n, { ^ <''' """ 'o """• Rem. 2. The preposition that is to follow the verb (see § 178, 3, Rem.) will often depend upon the shade of meaning given to the verb : 3d) frene mic^ auf feinen Scfnd), I am glad of his visit. (Sr freut fid; über ben 0d)aben He rejoices over the misfortune of Slnberer, others. 2. Many compound nouns, having imaitu for the last component, have two forms in the plural (imälUier and ¿leute) : S)er iianfmann, merchant ; pi. bie Äanfmänner, or bie Äanflente. 9îeid)e Äanf^ nnb §anbelsmänner Eich merchants and traders, (see § 50, 2). 3mci 9hlrnberger ííanfíente. Two Nuremberg merchants. Rem. 1. Sometimes the plural ending dCUtC refers to a class of persons, the prefix having an adjective signification (see Lesson XXX F/., 1, Rem. 1)- 2)cr ßb^mann, husband, married man ; pi. bie (Seemänner, married men. ®ie married woman; pi. bie (Sbeftaucn, married women Sie Sacíente {pi), married people. 160 VERBS GOVERNING THE GENITIVE CASE. Rem. 2. With some nouns the ending sntonttCt is rarely or never used, but the ending ;ÍCUÍC is the usual plural termination, as : Sec S'toclutann, nobleman ; pi. î)ic ©beííeute, the nobility, Çau^tmann, captain ; " bie ^au^tieute, captains, „ Saufmann, merchant ; " bie áaufícute, merchants. V Sanbmaitn, countryman, farmer ; " bie Sanbíeute, country people, „ Sanbêmann, (fellow) countryman ; " bie 2anbêÎeute,(fellow)countrymen „ ßilhhiii-'ihann, carpenter ; " bie carpenters. Zweiundneunzigste Aufgabe. 1. Man hat den General von Fischel des HochveiTaths angeklagt. 2. In der letzten Nacht ist ein Dieb durch das Fenster in Hemi Roths Zimmer ge¬ drungen und hat ihn seiner goldenen Uhr und seines Portemonnaies (mit 460 Thalern und werthvollen Papieren darin) beraubt. 3. Herr Klein hat seinen Kutscher des Diebstahls beschuldigt, 4. Man hat den Polizeidiener wegen oft wiederholter Betrunkenheit seines Amtes entlassen. 5, Nichts kann ihn seines Eides entbinden (or nichts kann ihn von seinem Eide ent¬ binden). 6. Ich versichere Sie meiner Hochachtung und Freundschaft (or ich versichere Ihnen meine Hochachtung und Freundschaft). 7. Ich bin sei¬ ner Unschuld überzeugt {jnore usual at present—ich bin von seiner Unschuld überzeugt). 8. Man hat den Angeklagten der Theilnahme am Morde frei¬ gesprochen (or von der Theilnahme, etc.). 9. Welcher Sünde zeiht dich dein Gewissen? (Sch.) 10. Die Richter haben den Verbrecher des Landes ver¬ wiesen. 11. Der Bischof hat den Priester seines Amtes entsetzt. 12. Der Gerechte erbarmt sich seines Viehes. 13. Wir konnten uns kaum des La¬ chens enthalten. 14. Was ist der Mensch, dass Du sein gedenkest und das Menschenkind, dass Du Dich sein (§ 107, Rem. 1) so annimmst (Psalm viii, 4). 15. Ich bediente mich der Gelegenheit, die zwei neuen Gemälde von Kaulbach zu sehen. 16. Deiner heiligen Zeichen, o Wahrheit, hat der Betrug sich an- gemasst (Sch.). 17. Während der letzten zwei Jahre hat AVilhelm Zahn sich der Rechtswissenschaft beflissen (d. h. das Recht studirt). 18. Ich bin nicht der Archäologie beflissen (d. h. ich studire sie nicht). 19. Die Armee hat sich nach einem langen blutigen Kampfe der Festung bemächtigt. 20. Ein tiefer Schmerz bemächtigte sich meines Herzens. 2!. Ich kann mich seines Namens nicht entsinnen (or ich kann mich nicht auf seinen Namen besinnen). 22. Ihre Majestät besinnen sich vielleicht noch des Vorfalls (Sch.). 23. Ich hoffe mich lange seiner Bekanntschaft zu erfreuen. 24. Wir erinnern uns seiner recht gut (or wir erinnern uns an ihn recht gut). 25. Jetzt erinnere ich micli ganz genau der Umstände. 26. Ich erinnere mich, dass ich ihn dort ge.5ehen habe (or ihn dort gesehen zu haben). 27. Du darfst dich deiner Wahl (or über deine Wahl) nicht schämen, 28. Er tröstet sich des Verlustes VERBS GOVERNING THE DATIVE CASE. lül seiner ^Mutter (or über den Verlust seiner Mutter). 29. Wie kann ein Mensch sich einer solchen Schandthat rühmen (or über eine solche Schandthat rüh¬ men) ? 30. Ich rühme mich, ihn meinen Freund nennen zu dürfen. 31. Ich freue mich auf seinen Besuch. 32. Man soll sich nicht über den Schaden Anderer freuen. 33. Ich schäme mich wegen meiner Nachlässigkeit (or dass ich so nachlässig gewesen bin, or so nachlässig gewesen zu sein). LESSON XLVII. VERÜS GOVERNING THE DATIVE CASE. Dreiundneunzig'ste Aufgaba. 1. Ich danke Ihnen herzlichst für das Buch, welches Sie mir vorgestern geschickt haben. 2. i\Ian kann nicht zweien (§ 101, Rem. 1) Herren dienen. 3. Ich habe der hispanischen Monarchie gedient, und der Republik Venedig, und dem Königreich Napoli (Sch.). 4. Diese Zeitwörter folgen in ihrer An¬ wendung dem Paradigma. 5. Diese Medizin hat ihm in seiner Krankheit nicht viel geholfen. G. Der Knabe hat mir über den Strom geholfen. 7. Es mangelte ihm nicht an Ausdauer, sondern es mangelte ihm an Gesundheit und Kraft. 8. Als wir der Stadt naheten (or als wir uns der Stadt näherten), fing es plötzlich an zu regnen. 9. Dieser Kock passt Ihnen sehr gut. 10. Wie schmeckt Ihnen dieser Schweizer Käse ? 11. Die Suppe schmeckt nach Rauch. 12. Seine Art und Weise den Gegenstand zu behandeln scheint mir ganz meisterhaft. 13. Man kann ihm trauen ; er ist treuherzig. 14. Man sucht vergebens diesem iTebelstande abzuhelfen, so lange die Quelle des Uebels nicht verstopft ist. lö. Seme Aehnlichkeit mit seinem Bruder fiel mir sehr auf. 16. Das ist ein sehr auffallendes Gleichniss. 17. Ich bin Ihrem Bruder heute Morgen auf der Strasse begegnet. 18. Wir stimmten ihnen bei. 19. Der Dieb ist dem Polizeidiener entflohen, ehe man ihn ins Gefängniss brin¬ gen konnte. 20. Dem Tode kann man nicht entgehen. 21. Diese Insekten sind so klein, dass sie dem blossen Auge entgehen. 22. Die Unsrigen gingen dem Feinde muthig entgegen. 23. Oesterreich schien seinem Zerfall entge¬ genzugehen. 24. Er wird Ihnen auf dem halben Wege entgegenkommen, 25. Falsch ist der Inhalt, wenn er der Wirklichkeit widerspricht; wahr, wenn er ihr entspricht. 2G. Das erste Haus hat uns sehr gefallen, aber das zweite Haus gefällt uns gar nicht. 27. Man soll Gott mehr als dem Men¬ schen gehorchen. 28. Es ist ihm endlich gelungen, seinen vortrefflichen Plan durchzuführen. 29. Es gelang ihnen nur einen kleinen Theil der Häuser in dieser Strasse vor den Flammen zu retten. 30. Der Affe ahmt dem Men¬ schen nach. 31. Der Landschaftsmaler ahmt die Natur nach. 32. Dieser I^Ialer eifert vergebens den grossen Künstlern des Mittelalters nach; aber er steht wirklich auch den Künstlern zweiten Ranges unseres Zeitalters bei weitem nach. 33. Dieses Wort kommt schon in der gothischen Sprache vor 34. Das ist dir gewiss im Traume vorgekommen. 35. Das kommt mir sein komisch vor (d. h. das scheint mir sehr komisch). 162 VERBS GOVERNING THE DATIVE CASE. Grammatical. 1.For the chief rules with reference to the govern¬ ment of the Dative Case bv verbs, see § 179. •/ ; cí Hem. In some cases, verbs that are transitive in English are rendered into German by intransitive verbs ; by reason of this, the direct object of some En¬ glish verbs is made the indirect object of corresponding German verbs, as ; bani'e 3tinen, I thank you (or I am thankful to you). Äaim id; 3i)nen bteneu? Can I serve you (or be serviceable to you) ? (är folgt feinem 23ruber, He follows (or is a follower to) his brother. (Sr balf mir, He helped me (or was of help to me). ßö fd;abet ilpn, It injures him (or is injurious to him). 2. Some personal verbs in English are rendered into German by impersonal verbs : Sê mirb iftm nii^t gelingen, He avíII not succeed in it. (gd mangelt iltm an 9bd;t§, He lacks for nothing. ©dtmedt e§ 3bn^n? you like (the taste of J il? 3. Upon a more intimate knowledge of the German language, it will be found that some verbs are used in several constructions, according to the different shades of meaning that may be given to the same verb. Hem. 1. Various constructions with the same verb from the different dia¬ lects of Germany (§ 23) have from time to time risen up into the language of literature (§ 8G). Many constructions, that ivere formerly in common use, have now become antiquated (§11 and § 14). Hem. 2. The various constructions of some verbs may be illustrated by the examples of the use of the verb lofinClt; lo reicard, that are given in senten¬ ces 7, 8, 9, and 10, in Exercise 94, 4. There are several examples in the German lan¬ guage of two nouns of analogous significations being followed by a verb in the singular number, as : .^(IIIÍICÍ Itnb 93crïctir jmifd)ett The tratfic between Berlin and Ham- S3erUn uub §amburg ift fe^r burg is very active. Icbbaft, 0eine Sírtltnb SlBeifC ben ®egen= His manner of treating the subject ftanb gu l)el)anbcin, ift gu loben, la to be praised. (3Í) babe eê an Orí linb StettC I have seen it in the place itself.) gefebcn, VERBS GOVERNING TUE DATIVE CASE. 163 Vienindneunzigste Aufgabe. 1. Wilkehn hat mir den Brief gebracht. 2. Frau Reichenhach hat ihrer Nichte Schillers Gedichte als Weihnachts-Geschenk gegeben. 3. Unser lan¬ ger Aufenthalt in der Schweiz hat uns keine Zeit gelassen, um nach Italien zu gehen. 4. I)ie Handwerker liefern selten die Arbeit nur versprochenen Zeit. ñ. Die russische Armee hat dem Feinde eine Schlacht geliefert. 6. Das Werk erscheint in monatlichen Lieferungen von je zehn Bogen. 1. Der Acker lohnt dem Landmann seinen Fleiss mit reichem Segen. 8. In Amerika lohnt (bezahlt) man die Arbeit besser als in Deutsehland. 9. Das lohnt sich nicht für meine Mühe. 10. Es lohnt sich der Mühe nicht, dass man davon redet. 11. Mein Freund meldet mir in seinem Brief die Ankunft meines Bruders in Wien. 12. Dieser Unfall hat ihm alle Hoffnung genommen. 13. Der Ta¬ schendieb hat mir das Portemonnaie genommen. 14. Der Arzt nahm ihm die Binde von den Augen. 15. Der Hausknecht hat Herrn Lippard eine goldene Uhr und 300 Thaler gestohlen. IG. Herr Siegel hat sein letztes Werk über die Geschichte der Insel Beroland seinem Grossvater gewidmet. 17. Der Briefträger hat mir den Brief um 10 Uhr abgegeben. 18. Die Schrift lehrt uns, dem, der tins auf die rechte Wange einen Streich giebt, auch die andere darzidñeten ; während ivir gewöhnlich ihm Gegenschläge anbieten, und, wenn wir stark genug dazu sind, auch verabreichen. 19. Man hat ihm den Dolch entrissen. 20. Ich fühle mich sehr krank; mir schwindelt. 21. Es ahnt mir, dass wir tins nie ivieder sehen werden. 22. Es ist mir heute nicht icohl; ich habe ein heftiges Kopfweh. 23. Wie geht es Ihnen hier in Berlin ? 24. II iC sitzt mir dieser Rock f 25. Es thut mir sehr leid, dass sie nicht länger in Ferlm bleiben können. 2G. Herr Prell hat seinen Bruder in der Germania Lebens-Versicherungs-Gesellschaft hi). Rem.'S) versichert. 27. Ich ver¬ sichere Ihnen meine Hochachtung. LESSON XLVIII. THE PASSIVE VOICE. ^ünfunbneimjíoftc ^tuîgnbe» 1. Söettcr aúrb fefir 2. 3Bctter aitrbc fc^r 3. 2)ab $}ettcr ift fc(ir ^cifi gciuorben. 4. Sôettcr aúrt» (}ciji aerbcn. 5. X)ci^ ^auö nnrb jc^t cicbnut. 6. 3)ic 53üc^ev weiten gebrucît. 7. 2)ie 33itcí)er iinubeu i^ebnicft, vilb wir in ber 0ncí)bvucfcret wnren. 8. 3cl3t jinb bie 5?üd)er villc gebrncíí. 9. .Ç)ier wirb bentfc^ 19. Sine prací)tí nolle nene ílird)e wirb jeí^t in ¿(nierbborf ^ebant. 11. í)ad 9íeue 3)íureum in Berlin würbe im ^nbre 1853 noüenbct, 12. 164 THE PASSIVE VOICE. 2)ic Itnberfität in S3crlin würbe im 3ûÎ)re 1809 gcgrünbet. 13» 2)ie 33ud)brucferfunft würbe im 14teu 3û^rf)unbert erfunben. 14. Sille faiferltc^en ©olbaten, welcfce bem pommerfc^en ^anböolf in bie ^änbe fielen, würben oi)ne 33arm^erjigfeit ermorbet» 15. Unter biefem SSorwanb witrbe ^(Ue^ ier^eert nnb geplünbert. 16.2)ie gcftung ift mit @turm genommen woroen. 17. Der @ei nerat oon OUeget ift beê ^o^oerrat^ê angeílagt, ober er ift yon ber 5inf(age freigefproc^en worben. 18. Die 97ac^ric^t yon bem Dobe beê |)errn 53inbemann ift feiner grau nod) nic^t mitge? ti)ei(t worben. 19. Sßonn wirb bo^ 5Eerf yoUenbet werben"^ 20. Doê 5Bei1 wirb erft nod) brei 3n^ren yoüenbet werben. 21. 3oi)ann SBolfgong yon ®öti)e würbe om 28. Sluguft 1749 geboi ren. 22.3oi). (IÍ)riftopí) grieb. y. 0c^iüer würbe am 10. 9íoyemí ber 1759 geboren. 23. éè wirb je^t fe^r yiel gerebet yon einem neuen |)anoefêyertragc gwifc^en bem 9iorbbeutfd)en 53unb unb ben 5Sereinigten Staaten. 24. ^ier wirb nii^t geraud)t. 25. Dab 9îaud)en ift bier nidtt geftattet. 26. Sb wirb je^t im ©aale gei fungen. 27. (Sb wirb fcbon gegeffen. 28. Œb würbe ibm yom 5lr5te nicbt erlaubt, inb Sit^tnter, wo fein 5Sater am Dppbub bar? nieberlag, hinein gu geben. 29. ïïflan erlaubte ibm nidbt, inb 3immer binein ju geben. 80. Diefcb 9îâtbfel löft ftd) febr leid)t (er ift febr leicbt ju löfen). 31. Dab yerftcbt 32. 2öab ift ju tbun? 33. Dab ift nicbt leii^t ju fagen. 84. |)err "J!>reji 1er fagt, ba^ biefeb ©pital im yorigen 3nbi"bi6ibert gegrünbet würbe. 35. Dab ^aub war ganj unb gar abgebrannt. 1. For the chief rules concerning the use of the Pas¬ sive Voice, see § 134 ; for the paradigm of the Passive Voice, see § 161. Re7n. As is indicated by the auxiliary tOCrbcn (to become), the action is considered as becoming accomplished, that is, as taking place at the time al¬ luded to : Grammatical. (I §au§ totrb gebaut, | 2)aS ^au§ tinirbc gebaut, (The house is becoming built, i. e. is being built, ((or) The house becomes built (or) is built. ^The house was becoming built, i.e. wasbeingbuilt. "((or) The house became built (or) was built. TBE PASSIVE VOICE, 165 2. The passive voice is much less employed in Ger¬ man than it is in English : Rem. 1. When the active agent is indefinitely alluded to, the active voice of the verb (with ttKUt as the nominative) is frequently employed : âJîan iac(t ; man glaubt, It is said ; it is believed. Rem. 2. When the active agent is not specified, the reflexive form of the verb is frequently employed instead of the passive voice : S)a8 erfldrt fx^ leidet, That is very easily explained. S)a§ tocrfte^t fid;, That is a matter of course. Rem. 3. The infinitive of the passive voice in English is often translated into German by the infinitive of the active voice (§ 128, 3, Rem. 2); 25a§ ijt t(imt ? What is to be done ? SaS ift Ietd;t ju berftei;en. That is easy to be understood. 3. The verbs that govern the dative case (§ 179, 1), though intransitive in their nature, may still be used impersonally in the passive voice : ©§ muvfce i^m erlaubt. He was pennitted (it was permitted tctrb i^m ui^t geglaubt, He is not believed. [to him). Exercise 96. 1. The book is now being printed. 2. The houses of which he spoke are not yet finished ; they are now being built. 3. The books which I bought are not bound ; they are now being bound. 4. The University of Prague was founded in 1348. 5. The corner stone of the Cathedral of Cologne was laid in the year 1248. 6. These poems have never been translated into (in^) English. 7. French and German are spoken here. 8. The fortification will probably be taken by storm. 9. America was discovered by Columbus in the year 1492. 10. Mr. Eberhard's design of the new bridge will prob¬ ably be accepted by the city authorities. 11. There i» no smoking here {or smoking is not allowed here). 12. They are singing in the church. 13. We will not be permitted to see the engravings without permission from the Director of the Museum. 14. This question is very easy to solve. 15. The key has been found (rc^c,»*.). i66 CONSTRUCTION OP PREPOSITIONS. LESSON XLIX. CONSTRUCTION OF PREPOSITIONS. 0tckuunbncuu3ígfíc 5íufgabc. 1. 2)üf[elt)orf liegt bieêfett imb Äöln jenfetí teê 2, ^err 0toUberg ift ©efunb^it^ í)aíkr nac^ ©aftein gegangen. 3. 9]ürnberg l;aí ínner^a(í) unb aupev()alb ber SOíauern mete ftatíí Itá)e ©ebäube. 4. SÁíovin^ ííegt ober()a(b unb fingen (legt unteií í)alb ber ^unbe^feftung 2)?ainj. 5. ?angé be6 Sí)ítttelr()etn¿ fte^n mete atte 53urgen. 6. ïôir kttc" ben ganjen ïag gejagt enttang beê Sßatbgcbirge^ 7. ?aut früt^erer 23erträge mad)te gríebríc^ ber @ro§e j^eíne 5ínfprücí}e auf ec^teften gettenb. 8. 3)ampffd)iffe werben jek mittete (or sermittetft) einer 0d)raube bewegt. 9.5inftatt ber ©änfefiete bebienen wir uní? gegenwärtig meift ber 0taf)ífebern. 10. íírot^ beê feinbtid)en ©ef^ü^c^ wuften ftc^ bie ^roiííantfd)iffe 53aí;n ju ber 0tabt ju mad)en. 11. Um beè grieben^ Sitten ^at er e^ nid)t get^an. 12. 0aê 0ternbitt) ber Seier fte^t unfern (or unweit) ber 2)îitéftrape. 13. 3íltc Äörper ftreben sermöge ik^r 0c|were nad) bem 3)íittetí punft ber (£rbe. 14.2)urci) baê 0c^erbengerid)t fonntc 3emanb auê 5ít()en verbannt werben, unbefcbabet feinet 23ermögen^ unb feiner @^re. 15. Sä^renb meiner tonU^eit (nit l^err ilitnç mid) öftere befud)t. 16. X)ie gepanzerten 0d)iffe jinb, ibrer 0(^were wegen, nic^t rec^t feetüc^tig. 17. gewagter 0pefulationen ift fd)on 31îanc|er an ben 53ettetftab gefemmen. 18. 0en neueften 9îad)rid)ten jufotgc ift ber Kämpfer nod) nidbt angefommen. 19. Singeficbt^ ber @efaí)r wolttc ber Kapitän bei bem kftigcu 0turm nic^t abfegein. 20. 0a^ weip id) felbft auê @rfaí)rung. 21. (Sr war aufer ftd) oor greube (he was besides himself for joy). 22. S3innen jwei 3abren wirb baö neue 9ïatl)Î)auê ootlenbet werben. 23. 2ßir fuhren fek langfam, weit ber 2öinb unê entgegen war. 24. ilöir ftanben mit îage^i anbru^ öuf. 25. ge^t nicbt immer nacb unfereu Sßünfe^en. 26. 3)er Kronprinz ritt bem Äönige zunäd)fi. 27. 2)ie 0tabi fat) ben ^Ç)unger nebjl feinem ganzen ©efotgc ftd) nä^vn (0(i^.)* CONSTRUCTION OP PREPOSITIONS. 167 28. ©á)iff fammí feiner ganjen 2)îannfd)aft unb Labung iTurbe ein ^aub ber üBellen. 29. 2öie lange ftnb (§ 132, 2} 0ie in 3)eutfd)Uinb ? 30. SBir ftnb feit bem erften Síprií in 2)eutfd)lanb. 31. Söii^eim 9íoít; ift fiein öon ©eftalt. 32. |)eute l;abe id) baö 9}îufemn jum erften 2)îal befud)t. 33. Söab er fagt ift ber gefunben SSernunft junjiber. Grammatical. 1. The chief rules governing the use of Prepositions are given in § 197-§ 258. ?l(^tunbneun3tgfie Aufgabe. 1. Von Ostern bis Pfingsten sind sieben Wochen. 2. Wir werden heute bis Prag reisen. 3. Ich halte Herrn Roth für einen Mann von Ehre. 4. Es waren gegen fünfhundert Personen in der Versammlung. 5. Es wa¬ ren sechszig Personen an Bord, ohne die Kinder. 6. Die Sonne geht jetzt um sechs Uhr auf. 7. Hier ist ein Gedicht an den Mond. 8. Herr Geliert arbeitet jetzt an einer Geschichte seiner Vaterstadt. 9. Es waren an fünfhundert Menschen versammelt. 10. Ich erkannte ihn an der Stimme. 11. Ist Herr Cohn zu Hause? 12, Nein, er ist heute auf die Jagd gegangen. 13. Marie sitzt neben ihrer Schwester. 14. Hedwig hatte sich neben ihre Cousine gesetzt. 15. Heute über vierzehn Tage werden wir nach Dresden abreisen. 16. Der Brief ist über Triest und Wien gekommen. 17. Unter solchen Bedingungen kann ich natürlich das Amt nicht annehmen. 18. Sie weinte vor Freude. 19. Das Dampf¬ schiff wird wahrscheinlich heute Abend zwischen acht und neun Uhr ankommen. (Here may be translated the verses of poetry found under § 197, Hem. 2 ; § 199, Hem.; § 200,Hem.; § 235, Ohs.; § 243, Obs.; and § 253, Obs.) 168 ADVERBS.—CONJUNCTIONS. LESSON L. ADVERBS.—CON'JÜXCTIONS.—ORDER OF "WORDS. DZcuuunbncunjigííe ^lufgalic* 1. 2>ie 2erci)e fingt fd;ön (§ I8l, l). 2. 2)er a^erfaffer jene« Sßerie« ben ©egenftanb ící)r n)!ffenfcf)úfííi(í) be^anbelt. 3. $er Äanarienbogel fingt bid fd^onev (§ 190) atö bie Serd;e. 4. 3n biefem SBörterbuc^ ift bie Gt^moíogie ttiiffenfd;afttid;er befjanbelt ala in fenem. 5. Unter (§ 257, Retn. 3) alien 0ing< bögein fingt bie 3íad;tigalí am fdpnften. 6. „SJiit §o^ad;tung bin id; erge» benft (or ge[;ovfamft) bet übrige.... $Biíí)eIm 9iot^." 7. S)iefeg SBörterbud; ift bom Sierfaffer bötlig unb auf« getbiffenf)aftefte umgearbeitet. 8. treiß uid;t, ob mir í;eute inä SJiufeum gef)en tonnen, aber mir merben menigften« ben a>erfud; mad;en. 9. 2)ie 0tabt i;at fe^t minbeften« 60,000 Ginmobner. 10. aöann ift §err Sinbemann ju ffsrecben? 11. ©eine @f3red;ftunbe ift bon neun bis jebn Ubr bes 2)îorgenS. 12. 2öir mottteu beute SSormittag (§177, Rem. 2) abreifen, aber uuglüdlicbermeife giebt es teinen ©cbnelljug nacb Stuttgart bor bret Ubv bes ?îad;mittags. 13. 93or jmolf f^abreu maren mir in SSerlin ; ba» mais mar bie 9îingmauer um bie ©tabt uocb uicbt uiebergeriffeu. 14. ©ie mürbe erft im 3abre 1867 uiebergeriffeu. 15. Sie ißalmen geringelte, bismeilen (or jumeilen) fta^elid;te ©cbäfte (§ 188, 5). 16. 2Bir merben bei» fpielsmeife (or jum Seifpiel) ben Urff>rung beS 3fit^orteS „fein" nadtfeben (§ 137). 17. GS fängt bereits (or fd;on) au ju regneu. 18. 3ft §err Sieht gurücfgetommen ? 19. 3a, er ift fd;on borgeftern gurüdget'ommen (§ 155,5). 20. So ift Silbelm? 21. Gr ift oben (§ 187, l) iu feinem ßimmer. 22. Gr ftür5te bäufJtliugS bie 2;ref)be binunter (§ 188,8). 23. 3d* glaube fcbmerlid), bajj mir bie 3ch baju Ijcibeu merben. 24. 2)er iöoben erbebt ftd; bicv ftnfen» meife (§ 188), bis baß er eine §öbe bon 2500 guß über ber 2)ieeresßäd;e er« reid;t. 25. S)ieS finb größtentbeils beutfcbe a3ücber. 26. .^err 3. ©d;mibt, bierfelbft mobnbaft, bon ebangelifcber (or íatbolifcber, or jübifd;er) Sonfefficn, ift megen eines am 20. 3itíi berübten 2)iebßabls fterfbrieflid; berfolgt morben. 27. Gr ift burd;aus (§ 188,9) bafür (§ 189,3, Rem. 1), baß mir bor SageSan» brud) abreifen foEen. 28. 3nSíünftige (or inS Sünftige, or bon nun an) merben bie SDÎufeen bier Xagc ber Sod;e unentgcitlidb geößnet fein. 29. a?on ba an ging bie 9îefuiblii a>enebig uaeb unb nacb bem a3erfaE entgegen. 30. Sormärts (§ 189,2) mußt bu (geben), beim rüdtmärts tauuß bu uid;t (©d;.). 31. Ser bat 3bnen baß eS borgeftern in íeibjig fo ftart geregnet bat? (§ 154,2). 32. 2)aS Sambffdnff bon Hamburg ift erft beute SJÎorgen (§ 195,2) angcfom» men. 33. ©ie Iberben ja mit uns ins Goucert geben. 34. ©ei er uocb fo 9^' k'brt, bod; meiß er nid;t 9IüeS. 35. ©ie baben mcbl bie Sebcfcbeu bon Slmcrifa iu ber beutigeii Behling gelefen ? ORDER OF WORDS. 169 Grammatical. 1. For the chief rules with reference to the use of Adverbs, see § 181-195. For the rules governing the use of Conjunctions, see § 259-274. For the order of words in sentences, see § 276-284. Hundertste Aufgabe. 1. Da (§ 260) er gestern nicht zu Hause war, habe ich es ihm erst heute Morgen sagen können. 2. Während Sie den Brief schreiben, werde ich ein¬ packen (or die Sachen in die Reisekoffer einpacken). 3. Da noch alles lag in weiter Ferne, Da hattest Du Entschluss und Muth ; Und jetzt, da der Erfolg gesichert ist. Da (§ 195,1, Rem.) fängst Du an zu zagen (Seh.). i. Wie kann Herr Flint nach Italien gehen, ohne seine Frau mitzunehmen í (§ 261, Revi.) 5. Der Strauss hat Flügel, er kann aber nicht fliegen (§ 263, 1, Ran.). 6. Von zwei bis sieben Uhr wurde der Sturm immer heftiger (§ 263, Rem.). 7. Wir hofften, dass mit Sonnenuntergang die See ruhiger werden würde (§ 263, 2), allein wir fanden uns getäuscht (§ 263, 2). 8. Da¬ gegen um 10 Uhr wurde die Gefahr so gross, dass der Hauptmann die Ret¬ tungsboote mit Nahrungsmitteln versehen Hess. 9. Er ist zu klug, als dass er an Gespenster glauben sollte (§ 266). 10. Wer sonst ist Schuld, als Ihr in Wien? (Sch.) 11. Sei klug wie die Sehlangen und ohne Falsch wie die Tauben. 12. Wir fahren zu Borg, Wir kommen wieder. Wenn der Kukuk ruft. Wenn erwachen die Lieder (Seh.). 13. Du sollst deinen Vater und deine Mutter ehren, auf dass du lange auf Erden lebest. 14. Er ist zu edelmäthig, um sich zu rächen. 15. Obgleich der Lehrer mit den Aufgaben der Schüler im Ganzen sehr zufrieden war, so war doch in einigen Aufgaben Manches zu tadeln. 16. Wenn Herr Stolberg auch sehr alt ist, so hat sein Geist dennoch die Frische der Jugend. 17. Der Schnee auf dem Gebirge fängt an zu schmelzen, daher werden die Flüsse im Thale wahrscheinlich bald anschwellen, 18. Es gefiel ihm nicht mehr unter den Menschen, daher (or deshalb, or deswegen) hat er sich in die Ein¬ samkeit zurückgezogen. 19. Er hat es selbst gethan, daher kann er Nie¬ mand als sich selbst tadeln. 20. Wilhelm ist wirklich für sein Alter sehr klug, übrigens ist er älter als man glauben sollte. 21. Ich besuche ihn jetzt mehr als Freund, denn als Arzt. H 170 IMPERATIVE AND SUBJUNCTIVE MOODS. LESSON LI. IMPEEATIVE, SUBJUNCTIVE, AND CONDITIONAL MOODS. §unbcriunbcriic ííufgabc. 1. Mner, bringen 0ic mir, íc^ bitte, noc^ eine î^affe Äaffec. 2. 3emanb fíopft. 3. (kommen 0ie) herein! 4. (3c^) bitte, nehmen 0ie ^loö! 5. 0U(^en ©ie ein auê, tag 3bnen gefäUt. 6. ©(^meige (bu) ftiíí! 7. (®ieb) ®^re,bem S^re ge^ bü^rt. 8. 33ater Unfer! ber bu bift im Rimmel! 9. ©eíjeiíiget merbe ©ein 9îame! 10. ©ein Oîei^ fommel 11. Unfer tägi, li(^e0 55rob gieb unê !^eute! 12. Unb füfyre un^ nic^t in SSer^ fu^ung! 13. ©onbern erlöfe unê bon bem Uebel! 14. Äari, bleibe bu ^ier, biê ic^ mieberíomme. 15. greue ©ic^ nic^t über Sinberer ©c^aben. 16. 3)7a(|e bie ©^üre auf. 17. áinber, fc^meigt (ibr) ftill. 18. 3e^t gebe 3eber feto SÖege^ (©^.)! 19. bleiben mir i)kx, biê ^einrieb bie 33iUet0 bolt. 20. ©u übernimmft bie fponifcben Oîegimenter, macbft immer 5infta{t unb bift niemals fertig, unb treiben jte bi(^, gegen micb ju jiebn, fo fagft bu 3flA unb bleibft gefeffeit ftebn (©(!.}♦ 21. ©ie ©rommel gerübrt ! 22. ©ieb inö 55udb hinein ; nur ni(^t lefen, immer fingen (®.). 23. ■f)err Sübemann fagt, bo^ bie 5irmec fcbon in 53emegung fei. 24. 3^ f^i^gte ^errn (Sberíein, mann er na¿b 3)Íüncben abreifen merbe ; er fagte mir, baf er 2)îorgen früb abreifen mirb. 25. 3tí) be^meifelte, ba^ jte fcbon in SBien angefommen fei. 26. ©u foüft ©einen 35ater unb ©eine 2)îuti ter ebren, auf ba^ (§ 267, Bern. 4) bu lange lebefi auf ©rben. 27. 3^ tatbe bir, bap bu fleipiger merbejl. 28. Siel)! more mein S3ruber bod) mieber gefunb! 29. Sííocbíe er balb genefenl 30. 2ßa^ bie beulenbe ©iefe ba unten oerbeble, baß erjöblt feine lebenbe, menfcblidbe ©eele (©(^.). 31. ©er ¿íenfcb erfährt, er fei auch, mer er mag, ein le^teê ©lüd unb einen le^te» ©ag (®.)» Grammatical. 1. For the general rules governing the use of the r?nj)erative, the Conditional, and the SubjuTictive Moods, see pages 294 and 295. CONDITIONAL MOODS. 171 2. One of the greatest difficulties which the English- speaking student encounters in learning the German lauffuasfe is in the use of the Moods of the verb. O O Rem. 1. The chief difficulty is in the use of the Subjunctive Mood. To the general principles laid down in § 124 there are many modifications and ex¬ ceptions that can not be introduced into an elementary grammar, as they would require too much space, and they would also only cause confusion in the mind of the student. Rem. 2. It will be noticed that the SubjunctiveMood is often used when the Indicative Mood would be employed in English. Rem. 3. It will be seen that the Potential Mood of the English verb is ren¬ dered into German partly by the Potential Verbs (§ 162), partly by the Con¬ ditional Mood (§ 125), and in some cases by the Subjunctive Mood (§ 124, 3, and Rein.). 3. The chief rules governing the position of words in sentences are given in § 276-284, § 194, and § 255. Rem. 1. In poetry and other dignified styles of composition, some varia¬ tions from these rules are allowable. Rem. 2. As the syntax of the High-German Language (§ G) has only been established during the last one or two centuries, many variations from the laws at present prevailing in the aiTangement of words are to be met with in Lu¬ ther's translation of the Bible and other works that date from the earlier pe¬ riods of the language. Hundertzweite Aufgabe. 1. Melde ihm die Nachricht, ehe er sie durch Andere erfahre. 2. Thut, als wenn Ihr zu Hause wäret. 3. Darum eben leiht er keinem, damit (§ 267) er stets zu geben habe (Less.). 4. Ziele gut, dass du den Apfel treffest (Sch.). 5. Bleibt nicht in England, dass der Britte nicht sein stolzes Herz an Eurem Unglück weide (Sch.). '6. Nimm dich in Acht, dass dich die Hache nicht verderbe (Sch.). 7. Willst du, dass alle Chefs zugegen seien ? (Sch.) 8. So willst du, dass es gleich vollzogen werde? (Sch.) 9. Ich gebe nicht mein Ja dass es geschehe (G.). 10. Befiehl, dass man von Neuem untersuche. 11. Es war nicht zu erwarten, dass er so bald nach Hause kommen werde. 12, Darauf schrie er in die Gassen hinab, er sei der Bösewicht, der Maria fälsch¬ lich angeklagt habe, er .sei ein falscher Zeuge ("^ch.). 13. Auf die Versiche¬ rung der Regentin, dass die Provinzen einer vollkommenen Ruhe genössen, und von keiner Seite Widersetzung zu fürchten sei, Hess der Herzog einige deutsche Regimenter auseinander gehen (.Sch.). 14. Der Prinz von Oranien hatte die Vorsicht gebraucht, die Brücse abbrechen zu lassen, damit, wie er 172 CONDITIONAL MOODS. vorgab, (lie Calvinisten der Stadt nicht versucht werden möchten, sich zu dem Heere des Toulouse zu schlagen ; wahrscheinlich aber, damit die Kathohken den Niederländern nicht in den Kücken fielen, oder auch Lannoy, wenn er siegen würde, nicht in die Stadt eindränge (Sch.). 15. Herr Weber sieht aus, als ob er gar nicht wohl sei (§271, Rem. 5). 16. Ich kann dir den Apfel nicht geben, indem ich ihn deinem Bruder versprochen habe (§ 274, Rem. 8). 17. Alle Nachrichten von der Sprache der Chinesen sagen, dass sie zur Ge¬ staltung dieses Volkes viel beigetragen habe. 18. Der Habsüchtige wird nie sagen, er habe genug. 19. Zu spät wird er einsehen, er habe Unrecht gethan. 20. Manche Menschen handeln so, als ob sie nie sterben müssten. 21. Bei solchen Umständen würde ich es nicht thun (or thäte ich es nicht). 22. Das würde ich nicht gethan haben (or das hätte ich nicht gethan). 23. Wenn du fleissig wärest, würdest du Etwas lernen (or lerntest du Etwas). 24. Wenn du fleissiger gewesen wärest, würdest du mehr gelernt haben (or hättest du mehr gelernt). 25. Wenn mancher Mann wüsste, wer mancher Mann wär', thät' mancher Mann manchem Mann manchmal mehr Ehr' ! 26. Hättest du von Menschen stets besser gedacht, du hättest auch besser gehandelt (or wenn du stets besser von Menschen gedacht hättest, so würdest du auch besser ge¬ handelt haben). 27. In seiner Lage hätte ich das Haus nicht gekauft. 28. Wenn mein Grossvater noch am Leben wäre, so würde er jetzt 90 Jahre alt sein. 29. Ich habe Herrn Gerold um Rath gefragt (§ 279, Rem. ] ). 30. Ich irug'^Herrn Gerold um Rath. 31. Man hat den Kaufmann des Diebstahls angeklagt (§ 279, Re?ft. 2). 32. Um zehn Uhr des Abends kommt der Schnellzug von München (§ 280, 3). 33. Ich war zu sehr gewohnt, mich mit mir selbst zu beschäftigen, als dass ich mit Aufmerksamkeit hätte ein Kunst¬ werk betrachten können (282, Rem. I). * Antiquated and provincial for fragte. ÎPart 0econî>; CONTAINING FAinLIAR CONVERSATIONS IN GERMAN AND ENGLISH; IDIOMS AND SYNONYMS; LETTERS AND FORMS OF BUSINESS; AND SELECTIONS FROM GERMAN LITERATURE. I. CONVERSATIONS. (©cfijrät^c.) Rem. These Conversations are arranged for the purpose of presenting the most familiar expressions and idioms of ordinary discourse. This neces¬ sitates, of course, frequent and abrupt interruptions in the connection of the sentences with each other. 1. Salutation, a visit. Oirúfcn, ein Sefu^.) ©Uten ÏÏJÎorqen, §err 9Î. I Och tnüníche 3t)nen' einen^guten^ gen, ííag, Slbenb, eine gute S'îad^t, 2ßte befinben 0te jic^ ?'' Od; befinbe mid; feí;r mo^í, id; banïe^ ■3^ncn, SEñe ftef)t® e§ mtt'3í>vet @cíitnbf;eit? @e^r gut ; fo jiemíic^ ; nid;t fe^r gut, @ie febeu au§,® 2ßie ge^t e3 ¿^rer grau ©ema^íin ? ©eit' einigen ¿agen ift fie nii^t red^t mobí, 2)a§ t^ut mir® fe£;r leib, SSaä fe^It i[;r ? ©ie bat fi(^^ ftarf eríüítet, Scb boffs, fie balb mieber betge= fteüt fein mirb,® Scb gb"2" fibr, SBie befinbet ficb 3i;re grau 9)îutter ? SOBie gemöbniid; ; fie muß'® immer baS âimmer büten, ©3 (or man") tíingeít, ííobft, ©cbe unb fiel;, mer c§ ift, Oeffncn ©ic bie Slbür, ©Uten SDiorgcn, §err, grau, grSuteiu SSiantenbcff, kommen® ©ie bercin (treten ©ie nüber), Sitte, nebmcn ©ic 'f3iaf5, ©etjeu ©ic fid;'' gefüUigft auf baS ©obbii; ©ie iaffen fub feítcu febcn," gcb bin fange toerreift gemefen. Good morning, Mr. N. ! I wish you a good morning, day, evening, a good night. How do you do ? I am veiy well, I thank you. How is your health ? Very well ; pretty well ; not very well. You are looking well. How is your wife ? For some days she has not been very well. I am very sorry to hear that. What is the matter with her? She has taken a heavy cold. I hope that she will soon recover. I thank you very much. How is your mother? As usual ; she is still confined to her room. Somebody is ringing, knocking. Go and see who it is. Open the door. Good morning, Mr., Mrs., Miss Blankenhoft". Come in. Take a seat. Please take a seat on the sofa. You are quite a stranger. I have been away a long time. > Lesson XI., {lOT. » L. XVI., § 63. 'L. XXIL, 5 «8. 3. ♦ L. S 108. 5 L. IX., §82, 3, 2. 6 §144, 6. ' L. IX., § 82. 8 L. XXXIV. » L. XII. '»L. XXXI. " §112,6. WL. XXIX. 176 CONVERSATIONS. Sá? íñn geflern ^ter gettjefen,' um nen einen SBefud; abjuftotten,® or (um meine Sluímartung ju mac((en), 3ci, eStíjuí mir íeib, ba§ id; eben auê= gegangen mar,' iîônnen 0ie* nic^t ^eittc bei un§ ju SJÎittag j^eifen? ,3 d; baníe 3í;uen ^erjíid^), i[t mir' ^eute unmöglid;, SJÎeine Xante au« SSreêÎau ift je^t bei unê jumSefuc^, iîommen 0ie baïb mieber, Sibieu ! Seben 0ie mo^í l iîommen 0ie gíüdlid; ua^ §aufe,® 2iuj SSieberje^en l I was here yesterday to call upon you. Yes, I am sorry that I had just gone out. Can you not stay and dine with us to-day ? I thank you veiy much. It is impossible for me to do so to-day. My aunt from Breslau is visiting us now. Come again soon. Good-by! {May you live well! May you get home safely. Au revoir.') 2. At Breakfast in a Hotel. (Scim ^rü^ilüd in einem ©afl^of.) ©Uten ajîorgen, §err ^anjíer I §aben 0ie j^ou gefrü^ftüdt?' 9tod; nid;t ;® ic^ iomme, um mit 3^nen ju früf)ftüáen, §aben 0ie gut gefc^lafen? ©anj gut, id^ banîe, ®er iîettner íommt gíei^, ©r bolt mir eine Xaffe Kaffee, iSoIíen0ie^affee,X^ceobcr©()ocoIabe, 23itte, bringen 0ie mir Kaffee, aSag münfcben 0ie uocb P ^Bringen 0ie mir jmei meidb^' geîod^itc ©ier unb ein ííaíbgíSoteíette, Sßie fd;me(it 3imen ber Kaffee ? ©r" i[t bortreffüd), àîeïïner, bringen 0ie mir einen ©ier^ iudben, ^ier ift bie Síiíd; (ber '¿udtx, bie 0em= mei, ber ßmiebad, bad SCBeiprob, bie 53utter unb ber Ääfe), 2Sünfd;en 0ie nocb etmag? [Kaffee, ©ringen 0ie mir uocb eine Xaffe^' Good morning, Mr. Kranzler! Have you had breakfast ? Not yet; I am coming to breakfast with you. Did you sleep well last night ? Veiy well, I thank you. The waiter will come soon. He has gone to bring me a cup of coffee. Do you wish coffee, tea, or chocolate. Bring me some coffee, if you please. What do you wish besides ? You maybringmetwo soft-boiled eggs and a veal cutlet. How do you find the coffee? It is excellent. Waiter, bring me an omelet. Here is the milk, sugar, rolls, biscuit, wheat bread, butter, and cheese. Do you wish any thing else ? Bring me another cup of coffee. 1L. III., 5137. 2 5160,3. ^L. VI., 5, Rem. «L. XXXI. 5L.IX.,1. 'L.IX..4,4. ' 5157, 2, Rem. 3. • § 194, 2, Rem. » 5 195, 4. »0 Í 1S4,1. 5>L. vni.,3. >3 § 60.1. CONVERSATIONS. 177 3. Dinner. (2)«^ SWittageffen.) Sie ttjerben' hoffentlich îitit un8 ju 2)iittag fpeifeu? Urn ttJie oiel Uhr fReifen Sie? 3n einer îieinen halben Stunbe, Sag îDîittagcffen ift fertig, Ser Sifch ift gebecít, Sag @ffen ift aufgetragen, ©ehen wir in" ben Sbeife»Saaí, Se^en Sie fich gefättigft bahin, Oft Ohnen" etwag 9îeigfuhhe gefaïïig, ober jiehen Sie iHubelfuhhe »or? (Sin wenig iííubeífufjf^e, wenn i^ bitten barf,* Sarf ich Ohtten ein StüdE loon biefem fßinbfieifdh anbieten ? Och fürchte, baj3 eg Oh^en nicht gar genug ift, 0^ ntag^ eg nicht ju ftarí getocht, SSringen Sie mir ein SDieffer, bag gut fchueibet, ©ieb® bem §crm etwag S3rob, SSechfeie bie Setter, 9îimm' bich in Sicht, bu haft Sauce auf bag Sifchtuch gegoffen,® SSringe mir eine Seroiette, 3Sag für ©emüfe ift Ohtten gefällig? Sßefehien Sie Kartoffeln (Srbfen, S3oh=' nen, 3tr>iebeín, 9íüben,KohI, éîettig, Shtnat) ? Sarf ich um ben Senf (Pfeffer, SOteer® rettig, (äffig, bag Saíj, Del) bitten? Sie haben noch îeinen gifch geíoftet, 2Bag jiehen Sie Oor,'" Sadh® ober §echt ? Siehmen'' Sie etwag Sîehbraten (^am» mclfieifch," Sd^infen, Kaibgbraten, ißinberbraten, Siebhühner »ifJaftete, ^ühner^ißaflete) ? Will you not stay and dine with us? At what hour do you dine ? In a little less than half an hour. Dinner is ready. The table is set. The dinner is on the table. We win go into the dining-room. Take a seat there if you please. Will you take some rice soup, or would you prefer some vermicelli soup? A little vermicelli soup, if you please. May I oifer vou a piece of this roast beef? I fear that it is not done enough to suit you. I do not like it overdone. Bring me a knife that wUl cut. Give (Mr. N.) some bread. Change the plates. Take care ; you have spilt some gravy on the table-cloth. Bring me a napkin. [you? What kind of vegetables shall I give Shall I give you some potatoes (peas, beans, onions, turnips, beets, rad¬ ishes, spinage)? I would thank you for the mustard (pepper, horseradish, vinegar, salt, oil). You have not tried any fish yet. Which do you prefer, some salmon or some trout? Will you have some venison (mutton, ham, roast veal, roast beef, par¬ tridge pie, chicken pie) ? JL.XII. 4L. XXXIII. '5145. i" L.XXXIV. a L. VIL, 5 83. s L. XXXIL «5144, " H. 5Í96. 1. *5145. »L.VI. '»L.XXXVL 178 CONVERSATIONS. Sarf id; 3^nen cthjaS 9tet8=ißubbing (S(;arÎotte'9îuife, iîu^en) anbieten? Söotten ©ie biefe Síei^feí (33irnen) toerfuc^cn? SSitte, behielten @ie SBoIIen ©ie noc^ etinaê 93rob ? 5fc^ banfe/ May I offer you some rice pudding, Charlotte russe, cake ? Will you try some of these apples, pears ? Help yourself, if you please. WiU you take some more bread? No, I thank you. 4. In a Confectionery Shop. (3n einer Äonbttorei.) SSaS iff 3t;nen gefällig, meine §errenWhat will you have, gentlemen f §aben ©ie frif^e ©rbbeeren ? ^a, fie ftnb t;eute Slîorgen erft gef^fíüdt morben,^ ©ringen @ie un6 brei Portionen® ©rb« beeren mit ©a^ne unb brei iportio« nen ©efrorneê, Kellner, bringen ©ie unf anftatt brei ^Portionen @efrorne§, ein ©efromeê, ein @Ia§^ Simonabe nnb eine Slaffe* Mehner, '^aben ©ie beutfctje ßeitungen ? 3a, tr»ir f)aben bie 9'îationaÎ='3ehung, bie tölnifdie 3"lung unb bie SlugS^ burger Stilgemeine ßeitunSi §aben ©ie bie Oüte, mein §err, mir bie® Bähung ju geben, nad;bem ©ie fie gelefen f)aben (merben). Have you fresh strawberries? Yes, they were only picked this morn¬ ing. Bring us strawberries and cream for three, and ice-cream for three. Waiter, instead of three dishes of ice¬ cream, bring us one ice-cream, one glass of lemonade, and one cup of tea. Waiter, have j'ou any German papers? Yes, we have the National Zeitung, the Cologne Gazette, and the All¬ gemeine Zeitung of Augsburg. Please be so kind, sir, as to give me the paper, rvhen you have finished reading it. 5. The Hotel. (Der ® a fil) of.) können ©ie un§® einen guten ©aftfjof Can you recommend to us a good ho- in SBien empfei^len? tel in Vienna? S)a8 „§otei jum ©c^mavjen Stblcr" The hotel of the Black Eagle and nnb ber „©airifc^e §of" finb beibe the Bairischer Hof are both very febr gut unb nid;t febv tfieuer, good, and are not very dear. ©ie finb nur fünf Sîîinuten toom^ They are only five minutes from the ©a^nljof, railroad station. S)ic „©olbene droite" ift etmas® inciter The Golden Crown is somewhat far- cntfernt, ther off. SSieniel îoftet es täglich in ber ®oíbe= How much does it cost a day in the nen Ärone ? Golden Crown ? »L. XLVII.,1. SL.XLVIU.,5161. » L. IX., 1,3, Î 82, 3. ' L.XVII. » 5 75,4, ÍÍ6WI. L ♦L. XVI.. 2,1,5 80b « L. IX., 1,2,/tern. 8 {il2,8, iî«n. 9. CONVERSATIONS. 179 flngefäbr brci Skater, Üßaö \üx^ ßimmcr tüünjc^eit ©ic ? Söir tDÜnfcben einen ©aal mit jmet anftoßenben ©cbíafjimmern unb jmei ©tl)íaíjimmet o^ne' ©aaí, SSir baben je^t nur jtuei ©äle frei, je» bcn mit jmei Kabinetten, 3n meicbem ©tocí? (Siner ift eine unb ber anbere' ijl jmei Grebben bocb, ßeUner, bringen ©ie unfere SRe^nung, i)ier ijt fie :* Çotei jur „©olbenen Krone", SB i en, bcn 14. ©cbtember 1869. About three dollars. What kind of rooms do you wish ? We wish a parlor with two bedrooms opening into it, and two bedrooms without any parlor. We have now unoccupied only two parlors, each with two small sleep¬ ing-rooms. In. which story ? One is in the second, the other is in the third story. Waiter, bring our account. Here it is : Tiilr. Gr. 8 — 7 20 22 15 6 — 3 10 4 — 9 — 8 — Summa Thlr. 63 15 S3ejablung ban!enb embtangen. % ©(bneiber. Sîedbuuug für §errn (Srlanger. 3»ei 3iinmer nebft Kabinetten, 4 iîagc grübftücf für 5 iperfonen „ „ Table d'hôte für 5 'ißerfonen.. 3 „ Slbenbeffen für 5 ißerfonen 4 „ Siebt „ „ SSebienung „ „ ©quibage (9 ©tunben, 1 Sbaler pro ©tunbe) giafer (üom S3abnbof unb natb bcm S3abnbof) 6. The Railroad. (2)ie Œifcnbabn.) §aben ©ie einen ©ifenbabnfabrblanHave you a railroad time-table? 9îein, aber bicï ift §enbfcbett'6 SourS« bucb, morauS ©ie® Slüeä erfeben tonnen, SBiffen' ©ie, um mie biel Ubr ber erflc 3ug abgebt? 2)eT erfte 3"3 um breiîe fiiib : gür bie er[te ííajüte. . . S^ír. 150 gür bie jweite Kajüte. . £i)Ir. 90 3tt>iic^enbe(i XÍ;ír. 40 2Sie biei ©eiJäcf îaim man frei mit== nehmen?' 2)rei iîoffer, 2)ie S3etö[tigung ift inbegriffen,' §aben @ie ^010== i}3affagiere? éin 2:f)eií ber grac^t ift noc^ nii^t gelaben, Söann fahren 0ic ab ? 2)îit ber nächfi^i^^ giutf»» Um mie biel U^r tritt bie gíuth ein ?' 3Jîit Sageöanbrut^. 2)ie ®bbe ift ftarî, Sïïir fahren fd^nett, SBir merben* nid)t fo fd^neïï fahren, trenn trir auf hoh^i^ finb, 2)aê SJÎeer ift fehr ruhig, ®ag SDîeer ift ftürmifd;, ©chen mir auf ba6 SBerbecf, 3ch merbe bie ©eetrani'heit befommen, menu id) langer^ in ber Kajüte bleibe, 2Saê mich betrifft, ich bin nie feeîranî, @ie finb fehr gíücííich, 2öie haben 0ie bie Siacht jugebradht ? ©(hied)t genug, ®ie 9Jíaíd)ine hat mich gar nicht f^ía^» fen íaffen,® 2Bie toieíe Änoten fegeín mir in einer 0tunbe? gragen mir ben SJiann am iRuber, SDian barf mit ihm nicht fhrechen, 3ch glaube bie ^üfte gu fehen, ©ie haben 9îecht, (g8 finb bie @ciEh^3nfcín, 2Bir merben heute Slbenb® ben Seucht^ thurm bon Sanbëenb fehen, fKorgen ïtbenb îommen mir in ©outh' ampton an, How long does the passage last? Usually sixteen days. The prices are : In the first cabin .... Thlr. 150 In the second cabin . . Thlr. 90 For deck-passage. . . . Thlr. 40 How much baggage can one take free of charge ? Three trunks. You do not pay extra for your meals. Have you many passengers ? The freight is not yet all on board. When do you start ? At the next high tide. At what time is high tide ? At daybreak. The tide is going out very strong. We are going very fast. We will not go so fast when we are on the open ocean. The ocean is very quiet. The ocean is stormy. Let us go upon deck. I shall be seasick if I stay any longer in the cabin. As for me, I am never seasick. You are very fortunate. How did you pass the night ? Badly enough. I could not sleep at all on account of the engine. How many knots do we make an hour ? Let us ask the man at the helm. It is not permitted to speak with him. I think I see the coast. You are right. It is the Scilly Islands. We shall see Land's End light-house this evening. To-morrow evening we shall arrive at Southampton. > L.XXIV.,4. 3 }92. s 591. iL.XXXIH. *5112,4. «LVII. «Page m «L.VIL 182 CONVERSATIONS. 8. The Custom-house. Sollamt.) §abeit 0ie ©teuer^jfiic^tige^ Have you any thing that is liable to duty ? tnerbc bie Coffer aufmachen, I will open the trunks, bitte, toevfen ©ie mir nit^t SlííeS' Pray, do not tum every thing upside unter einanber, down. ©iefe i8ü(^er finb ganj neu,* nic^t These books are new, are they not? ma^r?^ .Sd; ^abe fie für meinen ©obn getauft, I bought them for my son. 2)a8 ift eiueriei,® bag (Sefeij ift be® That makes no différence ; the law is ftimmt, explicit. Siefen ¿abaí merbe icb in S3ef^íag I shall have to seize (attach) this to- uebmen müffen, bacco. S3itte, Obre iî3âffe, meine §erren, Your passports, if you please, gentle¬ men. §ier finb (Embfangêfdjeine bafür,'' Here are receipts for them. Ser ^oíijeibiener mirb fie Obnen bal® The policeman will deliver them to bigft nacb Obi-^iu Oaftbof bringen, you very soon at your hoteL 9. The Post-office. (Sag 3)0flamt.) Oft bag ißcftamt meit bon bier ? @g ift gang in ber® fJîâbe, ©inb 33riefc für micb angefommen ? ÜSie ift Obr wertber fJîamc 0(b ermarte" einige iBriefe" poste restante,* Od) münftbe einige SSriefmarîen, äöann gebt bie ißoft nacb SSreglau ab ? Ser iBrief ift nodb nicbt gefiegelt, SSo ift ber ©iegettaci? ^ier ift bag ipetfcbaft, Otb b'ií'í Síbreffe gefcbrieben,'" Ser S3rief muß franîirt merben, Sie ißoft ift angefommen, aber bie S3riefe finb nocb nid)t bertbeilt, Is the Post-oíBce far from here ? It is right near by. Have any letters come for me V What name, if you please. I am expecting some letters "poste restante. " I wish some postage-stamps. When does the mail leave for Bres¬ lau ? The letter is not sealed yet. Where is the sealing-wax? Here is the seal. I have addressed the letter. The letter must be prepaid. The mail has arrived, but the letters are not yet distributed. * Letters addressed "posie restante" are to remain in the post-oflSce till called for. 1 § 112, Rem. 1. 2 § 89, Rem. 10. 3 { 111. ♦ L. XVIII., 1. s Lit., not true? « § ICS, 3. "> 5188,10, Rem, 1. « L. X., 1. » Í 49, a " § 165, 3. »" 5 74,3,4. »3 L. XX. CONVERSATIONS. 183 10. At a (Set einem S>cbnt i)ier $err 9îeumann, ter Sau« quier ? Sie »erben i()n im' (Sombtoir finben, 2)art icb fragen, mit icem" idj bie (S^ïe babe jn fprecben?' ÜJiein Díame ift §ilbebranbt, 3cb bin* au3 SSien, 3d? i?abe einen Êmbfeblungêbrief an Sie ton §errn^ ^-anjler, 3tb freue mid? fetjr, 3bre S3eîanntfd?aft 5U mateen, ^»err ítranjíer bat mir einen SSecbfel auf 3br §aug gegeben.® ©er !í5ed?íel ift jablbar nad? Sid?t,' 3cb »erbe ibn 3buen fofort in Sanî^ noten auêjobicn, »enn eâ 3bnen® re(bt ift, Sonnten Sie mir einen ©beií baton® in @oíb geben ? • Sie iönnten baê SIgio biêiontiren, ©a§ ijî mir einerlei, 3ft ba§ 3nboffement barauf ? 3a, er ift auf meine Orbre inboffirt, Scbön, bier finb j»ei Saninoten, jebe" ton fünfbunbert" ©b^^ern, breu^u f¿beS (Souraut, eine ton taufenb," cinbnnbert" griebridbsb'or, unb ber Dîeft in Silber unb áubfer. Banker's. S an qui er.) Does Mr. Neumann, the banker, r». side here ? [room. You will find him in the counting- May I ask with whom I have the hon¬ or to speak ? My name is Ilildebrandt. I am from Vienna. I have a letter of introduction to you from Mr. Kranzler. I am very glad to make your ac¬ quaintance. Mr. Kranzler gave me a letter of credit on your house. The bill is payable at sight. I Avill pay it to you immediately in paper money, if you desire it. Could yon give me a part of it in gold ? You could discount the premium (on the gold). It is all the same to me. Is it indorsed ? Yes, it is indorsed to my order. Very well ; here are two bank-notes, each of five hundred Prussian tha- lers, one of a thousand, a hundred Friedrichs d'ors, and the odd mon¬ ey in silver and copper. 11. In a Bookstore. (3n einer Suibb^ublung.) ^abcn 0ie ein 3Serjeid?uiÍ3 hon 3blíU Have you a catalogue of your books ? 33il(bcrn ? §ier ift eins, »cíd?e8 erft hör einigen Here is one that was published only ©agen erfcbienen ift, a few days ago. Sie »erben barin meine 33eríag«»eríe You will find in it the books I pub- unb eine Sín6»abl in^^ unb auêlan« lish, and a selection of German and bifdbcr SBerîe finben, foreign books. >L.XI.,4. M137. 'SC^a. 10 §103,3. a § 113,1. » § 75, Rem. 1. « § 107. > i § 111. »5180. 6 L. XXV., 2. » 5 18S, 10, Rm. 1. i» 5 99. 184 CONVERSATIONS, SBotíen @tc mir gcfäüi^sft bie ncueften beutfc^en SSertejeigcn ? ipie» ift SDÎommfen'ê Siomifc^e ©c^ jd^ic^te, bie jmeite' Síufíage ber ^unftgef^ic^te'' bon 0d;naaíe, bie íe^te Sluêgabe® ber ©^iEer'fdjen* ©ebicbte, §aben0ie feine tJ^iíoíob^ifcíien SBerfe? ©ie fielen am ©nbe bed Äataiogd/ 3ící) Wbe ^ier auf biejem Sif^e einige ief;r feítene ^Büd^er and jmeiter §anb (or gebraucíite 33üd;er), SBad foftet biefed S3u^? S)ad ift fei;r t(;euer, S>ie Siuflage ift längft bergrtffen, §aben ©ie ein Síntiquar^ @yemf)iar bed ©rimm'fd^en* 2Börterbud;ed?^ Eicin, aber ic^ babe ©anber'd beutfcbed 2B0rterbu¿b, Sucad'* beutfcb=engíií fc^ed nnb engfiftb-beutfcbed SSörter^ buct) in bier Sänben, 8vo, nnb 2íío» gin'd beutfd^ifranjöfifd^ed SBörter# bud», aucb in bier 33änben,® §aben ©ie eine (Sifenhabn^ííarte bon ßnroba? ^ier ift §enbf(^eli'd ©ourd^SSudt) ; cd entrait eine Steifefarte bon ©urofja, nnb fßotijen über' aüe ©ifenbabn^ nnb 2)am!pifcbiîf'Sinien, Çaben ©ie Síeifebanbbücber ? 2Bir bßbcn SSäbefer'd gü^rer bur(^ Seutfcblanb, f^wnfreid», Italien nnb ©ngianb ; fie finb tbo{;í bie beften,® Will you please show me the latest German books ? Here is Mommsen's Roman Histoiy, the second edition of Schnaase'a History of Art, the last edition of Schiller's poems. Have you no philosophical works ? They are at the end of the catalogue. I have here on this table some very rare second-hand books. What is the price of this book ? That is very dear. It has been out of print a long time. Have you a second-hand copy of Grimm's Dictionary ? No, but I have Sanders's German Dic¬ tionary, Lucas's German-English and English-German Dictionary, in fom- volumes 8vo, and Mozin's German-French Dictionary, also in four volumes. Have you a railroad map of Europe ? Here is HendschelTs Railroad Guide -, it contains a traveling Map of Eu¬ rope, and information about all the lines of railroads and steam-boats. Have you guide-books ? We have Badeker's Guide for Ger¬ many, France, Italy, and England ; they are the best. 12. At a Tailor's. (Set einem ©^neibcr.) ÍQJdd'tfl flfiällig, mein §err? What can I serve you with, sir? ibünfcbe einen'" 9Íocí, einen %xact, I wish a coat, a dress-coat, one silk eine" feibene Söefte, jmei" ifjaar vest, two pair of pantaloons, and a Seinfieiber, nnb einen ©ommer® summer overcoat. Uebcrroti, > L. XVIII. 4 L. XXXVIL, 5. • 5 S3,1. " Î {54. a L. XXXVI. S}74,3,3, 8 } 92. " 5 98. ' L. XXXVI. 6 § 69, § 80,2. » § 113. » « loi. CONVERSATIONS. 185 ©olíen' @tc einen toonpnbtgcitSlnjiig ton" biefem S^ug? 2)ieíeá íc^warje jEuc^ fc^cint íurj ge» fcboren unb fein ju fein, 60 ift an^ fe^r bauerbaft," ■Jíebmcn 2ic mir baô SDiaß ju 9Íd(í, ^ofe, SSefïe nnb Ueberrod, SSünfcbcn @ic* fie nac^ ber neueflen 2)ícbe? 3)ían® macbt bie íSaitle jiemíid; íang, bie 0d>öße reid)en faft bi0 an bie ^niee, bie Síermet ftnb giemíid» meit, 0ammet=.Sragen finb je^t gan3 aub® ber 3Jíobe, ißrobiren 0ie ben 9îocî an, àr ifl JU eng unter'' ben Slrmeu, 2)a0 läßt® fid; ieid;t äubern, 3^ mcrbe beu Uebcrrocí auc^ angiefjen, Sann er gugetnöbft merben? Rieben 0ie façonirte ober glatte 3Jîuftcr für bie SBefte bor ? Sîie feibene SBefte fotC façonirt, bie 0immet=2öefte folt' einfai^ fein, SSevbieicbt biefe Çarbe nic^t fe^r fd)neíl? 3í(b îann fie ücbt garantireu, SBrin m-""fcben 0ie bie Síeiber? fPíittmodf ^ íOíorgen um jcbu U^r, benn icb reife um jmölf Uf)r" nad^ SGBicn ab, ©ie îënnen fic^ barauf teríaffen, baji Mes fertig fein'® ttirb. Do you wish a complete suit from this piece of cloth ? This black cloth seems to be fine and of a short nap. It is very durable also. Take my measure for a coat, panta¬ loons, vest, and overcoat. Do you wish them in the latest fash¬ ion? The waist is made rather long, the skirts reach almost to the knees, the sleeves are made rather wide. Velvet collars are now all out of fashion. Try the coat on. It is too tight under the arms. That can be easily changed. I Avill try on the overcoat also. Can it be buttoned? Do 3'ou prefer figured or plain pat¬ terns for the vest ? The silk vest may be figured, the velvet vest may be plain. Does not this color fade veiy easilj'? I can warrant it not to fade. When do j"on wish the clothes? Wednesday forenoon at ten o'clock, for I leave for Vienna at noon. You may rely upon their all being ready. 13. In a Dry Goods Store. (3u einem îucblaben.) SßaS für ©eibenjcuge babeu ©ie? What kind of silks have j-ou? Sffiir fjabeu ©eibe in alien ©c^attiruui We have silks of all colors, gen, S3taud;eu ©ie ©eibe ju einem bleibe Do you ivish silk for a dress or for a ober JU einem 2)îantcl ? cloak ? '2)ieíe garben finb je^t SDÎobe, These colors are now in fashion. 2)aS 2Jîufter gefällt mir nid;t, es ifl ju I do not like that pattern ; it is too bnnt, gaudy. " Í L. XXXII. ♦ § 107, item. 5. 5 82, 1. 10 L. XXIII., 3- ® L. IX., 1. '5 112,6. 8144,4. '* Twelve o'clock. » 5 86. 2.3. • 5 82, 2. » L. XXXIII. i' L. XXVIII. 186 CONVERSATIONS. 2Bie finben' @ie btefe ^sunítirte 0eibe? 3c^ btefe geftreifte toor, 2Bie breit ift biefer SÎtlaê ? (Sr ift eine Sïïe breit, 0ie tnerben mit acfitje^n SHeit aus* reichen, §aben 0ie au(f) gutterfeibe ? SBoHen 0ie einen feibenen^§nt ober einen 0trDf)i)ut ? 2)iefe6 ift bie neuefte 2Jiobe, $cr Soben biefeS §uteS ift gu Kein, 2)ie Oarnirung gefällt mir ni^t, 0ott ic^ oieííeid;t anbereS Sanb barauf* feljen ^aben 0ie 0bi^enf(bíeier? ¿d; babe meítbe Oon Srnffeler 0bif5eH, bie anSgcjeicbnet finb, Ç)ier fiub and; 0d}leier toon gefticEtem DKnffelin, ttoünfcbe ein ifJaar ©íacébanb* fc^ube toon ber beften Cualität, ein Srief® Dîâbnabein, ein Srief 0te(í* nabeln, ein Sui^enb® Saftbentücber, eineÄratoatte, fed;S i^aar® 0trümbfe, 0eife, eine 3abnbürfte, einen 3îegen* fd;irm, ßeng gu Setttücbern, Äat* tun, einen ©baml. How do you like this spotted silk ? I prefer this striped piece. How wide is this satin ? It is an ell wide. Eighteen ells wUl be aU you will need. Have you also silk for lining ? Do you wish a silk hat, or a straw hat? This is the latest fashion. The crown of this bonnet is too small. I do not like this trimming. Shall I put another kind of ribbon on it? Have you lace veils ? I have some of Brussels Lace that are extremely fine. Here are also veils of embroidered muslin. I wish also a pair of kid gloves of the best quality, a paper of needles, a paper of pins, a dozen pocket- handkerchiefs, a cravat, six pairs of stockings, soap, a tooth-brush, an umbrella, cloth for sheets, cahco, a shawl. 14. At a Shoemaker's. (23 e i einem ©d)ub m ad) er.) ^aben 0ie fertige 0ttefeí? ^ter ift ein ißaar baS tcobl fjaffen mirb,' Çier ift ber 0tiefennc(bt, 9îebmen 0ie lieber bad 3)îa^ für ein neued ipaar, 0ie bürfen nicbt gu eng fein unb bie 2Ibfälje nid)t gn bo^h® 2Sünfcbcn 0ie birfe 0obíen? Have you ready-made boots ? Here is a pair that I think will fit you. Here is the boot-jack. I would rather have you take my measure for a new pair. Do not make them too tight, nor the heels too high. Do you wish the soles thick ? 3a, unb bad Obcrlcber giemlicb ftarî. Yes, and the upper-leather rather hea^T". ' L. XXIV. 2 L. XXVII. 2 § 86, 2, 2. ♦ 51S8,10, Rem. 1. »§163. • L. XVI., 2. ' L. XII. 8 § 92. CONVERSATIONS. 187 55i3' roann iönnen 0tc mir ein ipaar 0¿^u^e machen? 0ie tonnen bie bis SJÎorgen Stbenb b^ben, 2)ie 0cbube brücfen mir® bie 2)îad)en 3ie mir ein ^aar Pantoffeln bon 3affian, When can you make me a pair of shoes ? You can have the shoes by to-morrow evening. These shoes pinch my toes. Make me also a pair of morocco slip¬ pers. 15. With a (Sei cine Çaben 3ie ben 2ír3t rufen íaffen? @r mirb fogleltb íommen, ÏSoraii® íeiben 3ie? Scb b^be heftiges iîcpfmeb, 21îir ift ganj fcbminblid;, 3^ îann mi(b taum auf* ben güßen halten, gübleu 3ie 0¿hi"erjen im' Díücfen? íaffen 3ie mid} bie fehen—fie ift etwas belegt, Saffen 3ie inid; ben puls fühlen, ®r tft jiemlid} fiart unb gefchibinb— geht fehr unruhig—0ie halben gie^ ber, galten 3ic meine Ärantheit für ge^ fährlich ? 9tein, aber nehmen @ie ftch in Sicht, ba§ fie es nicht werbe,* 3d; werbe 3hnen Slrjnei berfchreiben, Sleiben 3ie ruhig im Sett bis id; Wieberíomme,' SBie hciben 3ie bie 9îad;t jugebratht? 3d; hiibe etwas gefd;iafen—(ich h®be teilt Sluge gefd;loffen),® Çaben 3ie einen bitteren (Sef^madt im ïlînnbe? 3d; habe fletS einen bitteren @efd;mací im 3Jîunbe, wenn id; aufwadic, ®aS gieber bat ftart nad;gciaffen -h'^t fafl anfgehbrt, 3dh h^ibe mich ftar! ertältet. Physician. m Slvjte.) Have you sent for the doctor? He will come immediately. What is the matter with you ? I have a great headache. I am very dizzy. I can hardly stand up. Do you feel pain in your back ? Let me see your tongue—it is some¬ what coated. Let me feel jour pulse—it is quite strong and rapid—is very flurried —^jou have a fever. Do you consider my sickness danger¬ ous ? No ; but be very careful, lest it become so. I will wiite out a prescription for yon. Keep quietly in bed till I come again. How have you passed the night? I have slept some—(I did not close my eyes). Have you a bitter taste inj'our mouth ? My mouth is always bitter when 1 wake up. The fever has subsided a good deal-^ has almost ceased. I have taken a bad cold. • 5 237. » 5 55,1. Jïem. 1. » 5188,10, Bern.». «5 246. « L. XL, 4. « 5 LIS. 1 L. XXXIV., 8. « L. XX\T. 188 CONVERSATIONS. f;al>e ^abe ídí;mcrjen—tc^ babe Siugenleiben, roäre gut ein gußbab ju nel;men,' dx ieibet^ an Sîb^iiîntiiSmnS—an ber ©idtjt, §erv ïïî. ift an ber @dbit>tnbfudbt ge® ftorben/—am SbbbuS geftorben, Çcrr 3JÎ. ift bom Sd^Iag gerührt mor« ben, I have a cold—I have a sore throat —my eyes paiu me. It would do you good to take a foot¬ bath. He has the rheumatism—the gout. Mr. N. died of consumption—of ty¬ phus-fever. Mr. M. has had a stroke of apo¬ plexy. 16. At a Wi (Sei einem f)ier ift be§ UbrmadberS Saben—geben mir binent,^ S'd? möd;te° eine gute Ubr îanfen, S3clíen Sie eine Sbinbeínbr—eine üíníernbr—eine (Ebíinbernbr, mit combenftrter Semegnng ? Sdb irünftbe eine Sicfietirubr, §icr ift eine anS einer ber beften ©enfer Gabrilen, Sie ift gn® ííein, ©ntfd^níbigen Sie, eS ift je^t SRobe, febr îieine Ubren gn tragen, S)ad ift mir gíeicbgüítig, id; tüünfd;e eine größere,' 3d; inerbe biefe nehmen, unter ber Sebingnng, ba§ Sie für gmei 3ab^£ garantiren,® 2Reine Ubr gebt nitbt ridbtig—gebt jeben Sag eine b^íbe Stnnbe bor®— eine Siertelftnnbe nad;, 3db merbe nad;feben,—e§ ift etma« geiv brodben—idb glaube bie ßette ift ger» fprengt—bie f^eber ift gebro^en, Sie muß rebarirt (or au'ggebeffert) merben—gereinigt merbeu, 93t8 mann îônnen Sie bie Ubr fertig baben? SSi« morgen um neun Ubr SSormit« tags, itchmaker'à. Ubrmaeber.) Here is the watchmaker's shop—let us go in. I wish to buy a good watch. Do you wish a lever watch, an an¬ chor watch, a cylinder watch, with a compensation balance ? I wish a repeating Avatch. Here is one from one of the best Ge neva manufactories. It is too small. Excuse me, it is now the fashion to Avear very small watches. I do not care for that ; I Avish a larger one. I Avill take this one under the con¬ dition that you Avill warrant it for two years. My watch does not go right—gains half an horn* cA ery day—loses half an hour. I Avill look at it—something is broken —the chain is broken—the main¬ spring is broken. It must be repaired—be cleaned. When can you have the watch ready ? By nine o'clock to-morroAv forenoon. 1 L. XXIV. 3 L. XXVI. 3 L. XXXII. t 5 92. *144,5. *5157.1. «Adverb. »-{139,8. II. GERMAN AND ENGLISH IDIOMS. Rem. For the purpose of showing the difference between the idiomatic structure of the German and English languages more at length than was pos¬ sible in thelessonsof Fart First, there are given below a few classified lists of such idioms as are in most common use in both languages. To correctly apprehend the idiomatic spiiit of a language, it is necessary, in the first place, to have an accurate idea of the primary and fundamental signification of the words of the language ; secondly, to know the modifications of meaning to which the words have been subjected, and the figurative signi¬ fications in which they are employed ; and, thirdly, to know how far expres¬ sions, phrases, and sentences (especially set phrases and proverbs) are ellip¬ tical. 1. Idioms with l^oöcn and to have. ^abe bte Slbfic^t, morgen nac^ I intend to start for Munich to-mor- SDÍüncben abjureifen,' §aben Sic ! or babe (bu) Slcbt I S)a« b^ït unfern 33eifatí, Söir baben 9Ít¿btS' bagegen,® (gê biït große ®iíe, Sâ bat îetne* @iíe, SBir baben tbu febr gern, @ie baben gut lachen, 3er Sanm ift ju Stein gettoorben, 25ag foil ®ir jur Strafe toerben, 2)er áraníe toirb itoieber gefuub, 2ßag fott bamit ttoerben? Sßir merben morgen abreifen, 2)er ©runbftein ber Äird;c ttoirb über* morgen gelegt ttoerben,® ©ine neue SBrücEe ttoirb jefet gebaut. William Kuhn bas become a pbysi- She suddenly turned very pale. [ciau. We shall soon have peace. The crowd (press) became too great. By experiencing evil one becomes wise. The days are becoming longer. Time bangs heavy on my bands. God said, Let there be light, and tberfl was light. She blushed. The raven lives to a great age. And man became a living sotil (Gen. XL, 7). I am getting dizzy (I am dizzy). I am tired of bis chattering. That has become a proverb with us. The tree has become petrified. That shall be your punishment. The patient is recovering. What shall be done with it ? We shall leave to-morrow. The corner-stone of the church will be laid day after to-morrow. A new bridge is now being built. 1 U36, 2. ' § IßO, 2. » § 156. T { 66,3. * 1125,2, Äem. 2. « 5134, Äew. 1. «5150,2. «5184. 192 IDIOMS. 4. The Potential Mood and Future Indicative of the English verb. We can go to-day, We can not go to-day, We can go to-morrow. We could not go yesterday. We could have gone yesterday. He may say what he will. He may go, if he likes. He says that he can go to-day. He might go, if he would, (It) may be it will rain. We must go early, that we may get a good place (or so as to get a good As fast as may be, [place). If I may ask. We must go to-day. We would have been obliged to go yesterday. We shall leave to-morrow, Shall you leave to-morrow? Yes. Shall you be able to visit us to¬ morrow ? I hope I shall. Shall I bring the book? Shall he be rewarded ? He should go immediately. Should he go immediately (or if he should go immediately), I should like to know, I should not have done that, I will bring the book, I will try it, I would go with you, if I had time. I would not have given it to him, I would rather not go. Would that I had not done it! SOßtr tonnen ^eute ge^ien. §eute tonnen wir nid^t ge^en. iffiir werben morgen gelten tönnen.^ ©eftern tonnten wir nic^t gef)en. 2Bir ^ätten^ geftem ge^ien tönnen. ©r mag jagen, Wa8 er will.® Sr tann gefjen, wenn er will. Sr jagt, ba§ er ^ente gefien tann. ©r tonnte ge^en, wenn er geben wottte. ©ê tonnte regnen (öielleicbt wirb e8 regnen). SBir müffen früb bamit wir einen guten ißlalj betommen.* @0 gef^winb (or jc^neti) al6 mögli^. SBenn i^ fragen barf. 2ölr müffen beute geben. SSir hätten geftern geben müffen. 2öir werben morgen abreifen. ÏÔerben @ie morgen abreifen? 3«. Söirb es 3bnen moglidb fein, uns mor-» gen ju befudben? 3icb boffe es, ja. 0OÏÏ® icb baS S3u^ belen? @ott er belohnt werben? (Sr foEte gteidb geben. 0otttc er gieidb geben (or wenn er gteidb geben fottte). möchte® gern wiffen. würbe bas nicht getban buEen (or ich hätte bas nicht getban). 3f(b werbe bas Such boten. Och Witt es toerfucben. 3cb würbe mitgeben^or ich ginge® mit, Wenn ich bie ßeit baju hätte (or hätte t¿b bie ¿eit baju). Sä} würbe es ihm nicht gegeben b^ben, (or ich hätte es ihm nicht gegeben), 5ich möchte lieber nicht geben. SBenn ich es nur nicht getban hättet ' { 162, JRem. 2. 3 § 124,3. 3 5165. ♦5124. « 5163. •5124,8. ■'S 125. e512& IDIOMS. 193 5. Idioms with the verb lûffcit; to leave^ to let. SBet i)at bie X^ilre offen gcíaffen? mid;) in 9îu^' I 2So ^at et baS ¿n(^ gelaffen ? (5r ^at bie ©elegen^eit anê ben ^än^- bemgelaffen, (Sr ließ^ feinen ©efü^ten freien 2auf, ®r ^at fie gci)cn laffen, merbe es i^m miffen laffen, Sr mirb fic^ nic^t baüon abfi^redten iaffen, loerbe mir bei bem 0(i^neiber ei« ncn 9îocf machen iaffen, 3'd^ fiabe meinen Ueberrod" auöbeffern Iaffen, (5r mirb ein §an8 banen Iaffen, 2)er §auf3tmann ließ bie ga^ne anf« gießen, (Sr Iie§ bie 2lnfä^rer erft^ie^en,® 3)îêin ißrnber tä^t 2)i(i^ grüßen, (Sr ließ bie alten ©efe^c* toieber in ^raft treten, Qà} laffe micf) ni^t bamit® täufc^en. 2Bir muffen i^n nic^t marten Iaffen, 2)a3 läßt fi(^® leicbt begreifen, ®a8 läßt ßdf) beulen, §ierau8 läßt ft^ folgern, ©r mußte fi^ bie S3eleibigung gefallen Iaffen, [^ören, (Ss läßt ficf) ^icr fJiiemanb fe^en unb (S8 läßt fic^ f)ier angenehm' leben. Who has left the door open ? Leave me alone ! (leave me in peace !) Where did he put the book ? He has let the opportunity slip. He gave free vent to his feelings. He let them go. I shall let him know it. He wiU not let himself he frightened from it. I shall have the tailor make me a coat. I have had my overcoat mended. He will have a house built. The captain ordered the flag to be raised. He ordered the leaders to be shot. My brother wishes to be remembered to you. He had the old laws put in force again. [that. I do not let myself be deceived by We must not keep him waiting. That can be easily imagined. That can be imagined. From this may be deduced. He had to put up with the oflense. Nobody is to be seen or heard here. It is agreeable living here. 6. Idioms with the verb to get. I must get (procure) the book, muß baS 33uc^ anfctaffen. He could get (find) no employment in the city, The cook has gone to the bakery to get some bread, I shall get a new suit of clothes made, I must get my photograph taken, (Er tonnte feine i8ei(f)äftigung® in bet ©labt finben. 2)er ^oct ifl naii^ ber S3äcierei gegan* gen, urn 35rob gn ^olen. 3id^ (verbe mir einen neuen SIngug ma» ^en Iaffen. 3id; muß mif^ b^otograb^iren Iaffen. > {144, 4. 3 § 155, 3. « § 5T, 3,1 ; 5 66, 3. » § 188,10, Rem. 1. 6 §120; §134,2. ' § 1T4,1. 3§5T,2,8j §65.3. 194 IDIOMS. I must get my hair cut, I must get my boots mended, He must get his lesson by heart. The cook is getting dinner (ready), I must get ready for my journey, He has not got back yet, We shall get home before evening. Why don't you get married ? They have not got (moved) into their new house yet, He has got possession of the house, They could not get the ship off, He got aU the money out of him he could, and then he left him, William is getting along well in his studies, Mr. Schmidt is getting along well in business, I could not get free from him, He has got out of debt. We can not get through here. We did not get to the top of the mountain, We did not get quite to the top of the mountain. They got together at seven o'clock. It is high time to get up, I can not get up there. Get down from there immediately, It is getting late. The days are getting longer, mu§ mit bas $aar ft^jnctben laffeit. muß meine ©tieieí rebarircn lafjcn. gr muß feine Slufgabc anêujenbig lernen. 2)er bereitet baS SDÍittogeffen. muß mid; für bie 9îeife borbereiten, • (Sr ift noc^ nid;t gnrüdgetommen, SBir »erben bor ^benb nacf) §anfe lern» SSarnm ^eiratfjen @ie nic^t? fmcu. @ie ßnb nod; nic^t in i^r neues §ans gejogen.^" 6r ift in ben SSeftlj bes §anfeS gelangt. 2)îan íonnte bas ®cí>iff nid^t »ieber flott mad;en. @r erpreßte ifjm fo biel @elb ais er nur íonnte, nnb bann berließ' er tbn. SBilbelm mad;t gute goi^iftbriiie in ber ®d;nle. §err 0(^mibt mat^t gute @efd;äfte. tonnte mic^ bon tfjm ni^t loSma« (gr ()at feine ©¿bnlben bejabít. [¿ben. §ier ift tein Snrdbgang (or bier tonnen mir nidbt bnrdbtommen). 2Bir baben bie ®ergeS nitbt erreid;t. SBir finb nicbt ganj bis an bie beS 33erges binanfgetommen.'' ©ie berfammelten fid; um fieben Ubr. SS ift bie böcbfte^ 3^1 anfjnfteben. 3d) tann ba nid.)t binanftommen. 9Jîacb', baß bn gleid; bernnter® tommfi. @S »irb fcbon fbät. 2)ie Sage »erben länger. 7. Idioms with prepositions. 1. 2íu§ (§ 220), OMfier (§ 221). 3(b berlor^ ibn ans ben Singen, I lost sight of him. 21nS feinem SBriefe erfebe id;— I perceive from his letter— §err 93rann ift anS SSerlin, Mr. Braun is from Berlin. (Sr ftammt anS einer alten f^amilie,® He comes from an old family, ©inb biefc S3üd;er ans ber g»eiten Are these second-hand books ? $anb? 1 5157,2, Ä«wt, 8. '{155,5. »§90. '{114,6. a fi 144,6. «{157: §160,3. «§188, »{37. IDIOMS. 195 3lu9 irelc^iem @runbc betreijen @te baô? lebt aus bcr §anb in ben Sïîunb, ®a9 iann man natütliti^ nid^t au3 bem Äcbfe jagen, jKan bat ibn au9 bloßem S5etba(ibt »er^ bajtet, (5r bat es anS 33orja^ SCtban, !î)a8 »etö icb anS ¿rjabrnng, SBaS wirb ans ibm werben? 3(b bin begierig ju wijjen, Was auS ber @a(be wirb, 2)a Warb ans SKorgen nnb iïbenb ber erjte' Sag (1. ïïîoj. 1, 5), Sie 3fit iji ans (§ 181,1), Srinte bn eS ganj ans, @S ift ans mit ibm, 2?on §anje aus ift er' conferbatiti, Gr ift aujier fid; bor grenbc, SiejeS 2Sort ift je^t außer ©ebrancb, Gr wirb es nicbt tbnn, außer (§ 260) wenn ©ie mit ibm barübcr ffjrecben, 2. a5d Set 5ille bem, ift er ein 2Äann bon Gbre, Seim' erften SCnbíicí batte* i(¡b ni¿bí ge^ gíaubt— Gs ift nicbt mebr @itte bei uns. Sei ben 9iömern würbe es Sitte, §err 9iabn ift beim Gffen (bei Sifcbe), Sie fibt beim offenen genfter,^ Sei biefer ©etegenbeit. Sei SebenS3eit meines SaterS, 8. SDlit Ocb babe es mit eigenen Stngen gefeben,® Gr bat baS §ans mit baarem ©eíbc bejablt, Gr bat es mit ©ewalt genommen, fDiit einem iOîale ging es íoS,' Gin §err, mit 9îamen Sob. Scbmibt, S(b babe mit fKüdtebr ber ^oft einen Srief bon ibm betommen,® How do you prove that ? He lives from hand to mouth. Of course one can not hold all thç particulars of that in one's head. They arrested him upon mere sus¬ picion. He did it intentionally. That I know by experience. What will become of him ? I am curious to know how the matter will turn out. And the evening and the morning were the first day (Gen. I., 5). The time is up. Drink it all up (down). It is all over with him. [servative. He is originally (and naturally) con- He is beside himself from joy. This word is now obsolete. He will not do it unless you speak to him about it. (§222). For all that, he is a man of honor. At first sight, I would not have be¬ lieved— It is not the custom with us. [mans. It was custom with (among) the Ro- Mr. Rahn is at the table. She is sitting at an open window. Upon this occasion. During my father's life-time. (§227). I saw it with my own eyes. He paid for the house in cash. He took it by foi-ce. All of a sudden it exploded. A man by the name of John Smith. I received a letter from him by return mail. » 5 92. 5 5 M, 1, item. 2, 3. »5 63. ''162,3. 3 5 40, 2 ; 5 40, 8, Rem. 5 13& « 5 144, 2. « § 168,1. 196 IDIOMS. ßr :^at es mit SSorîa^ getrau, Sr :^at es mit leifer ètimme gelefen, SDiit ber í^flücít man Siofen, 2)ie iJiota mürbe mit ißroteft gnrücíí gefdjicft,® 2)ie ^njc^rift ijl mit goíbenen ftaben gefd^rieben, SSir ge^en nac^ bem SJiufenm ; moflen @ie mit ? äßoflen^ ©ie baS 33uc^ mit (fic^) ne^« men? 4. 9iac^ get^janer ïïlrbeit i^ gnt rn^en, [id;e^en, es fofl ganj na^ i^jrem S3eíieben ge® es ^at jel^t fed^S Sage nac^ einanber geregnet, 3m 3a^re 1820* nac^ e^rifti ©ebnrt, 2)aS Sieib ijt nic^t nad^ meinem ®e= id^macf, ®as Obji mirb in Seutfd^íanb nad^ bem ©emic^t berlauft, 9ia(^ mdner Ui)r ift eS jeljt brei SSierteí* anf ©ed^S, Sas Samijffc^iff iji nac^ ^ambnrg beftimmt, Ser SDÍaíer ^at biefe® Sanbf^aft nad^ ber iJîatur gejei^net, Ile did it designedly. He read it in a low, soft voice, [about. Time and patience bring every thing The note was returned under protest. The inscription is written in golden letters. We are going to the Museum ; will you go along ? Will you take the book with you? (§ 228). Sleep is soimd when the work ia done. It shall be done exactly as you desire. It has now been raining six days in succession. In the year of our Lord 1820. The dress is not to my taste. In Germany the fruit is sold by weight. By my watch it is now a quarter to six. The steamer is bound for Hamburg. The painter drew this landscape firom nature. §erv ^lein ift ein Seutfc^er' bon ©es burt, aSas berlangen ©ic bon nn§ ? Çerr 9îot^ ift ein Slrgt bon ißrofeffion, Ër ift ein SDÍann bon etma fünfjig 3aí;rcn, SSon §erjcn§ ©rnnbe, 6r mürbe bon e^rltd^en ©itern ge« boren, ©r mnrbe bon Alflen geliebt, ©r lebt bon feinen ©infünften, Sag mar ie^r frennblid^' bon i^m, ©ö mar fe^rllnred^t bon i^m ba^,eic., 2öir mobncn ge^n 2JîeiÎen bon ^ier,® 5. »on (§234). Mr. Klein is a German by birth. What do you ask (wish) of us ? Mr. Roth is a physician by profession He is a man about fifty years old. From the bottom of my heart. He was bom of honest parents. He was beloved by all. He lives upon his income. That was very kind in liim. It was very wong in him that, etc. We reside ten miles from here. »§134; §161. »§118,3; §166. '§99. ♦§104,2. »§111,1. •§89,iÎCTn.lO. '§86,2,6. »§266. IDIOMS. 197 6. Su (§235). Süöfr toerben, jum 93eiíbieí'— ^eute iDtrb in ber Äir^e eine 0amnt=« lung® junt 33e{ien bcr Firmen in ber 0tabt gehalten,^ (Sê »irb ibm nic^t jur S^rc gereii^en, S)er ^eg trirb balb ju (gnbe fein, 3um erfien, jum onbcm,^ jum brit== ten (2)îaÎ) ! @r fab jnm genfter bübe ba3 jlnd) ju brei Xbaíer bie ¿¿e geîauft, 2)aë 9îeidb ift ju Orunbe gegangen, ^ier ift ein iDZufiíftücf ju toier §änben (or für toier §änbe), 25er SBaumeiftcr bat biefeê §auS jum fDîobelI genotnnten, 3ur® feiben ^«it/ I5r ift jum §aubtmann ernannt itoorben,® 3u meldbent 3®£rfe bat er bag getban ? We will, for example— A collection will be taken in the church to-day for the benefit of the poor in the city. It will not redound to his honor. The war wül soon be at an end. Going, going, gone ! (at an auction). He was looking out of the window. I paid three thalers a yard for the cloth. [to ruins). The empire has fallen to pieces (gone Here is a piece of music arranged for four hands. The architect has taken this house for his model. At the same time. He has been appointed captain. Tor what purpose has he done that ? 9. 2in (§ 245). SBenn tcb an 3brfr ©telle märe, 2ín mem tfi eg ju lefen ? 2)ie 9îeibe tfi an mir, ju lefen, @g ift an griebridb, 25er SJÎann gebt an Ärüdfen, 6r filjt am genfter,' (5g ift nicbtg an ber 0acbe, ®ine fRebe an ben Äönig, 3[n nnb für fi(b, [mefenb. 6g maren an fünfbunbert ifJerfonen an« 3(b bai'c midb an ib" gemenbet. If I were in your place. Whose turn is it to read ? It is my turn to read. It is Frederick's turn. The man goes on crutches. He is sitting at the window. There is nothing true in it. An address to the king. In and of itself (per se), [sons present. There were toward five hundred per- I applied to him. 8. aiuf (§ 246). SWcin SBruber ifl auf ber 3agb, 6ine Slntmort ouf einen iBrief, ©ie mar bofe® auf ibn, ßr bat toieí Oeíb auf SBücber gemanbt, SBiíbeím gebt auf ben 3Rar!t, SBig auf meiteren ißefebl, [íen, 2luf bie ©efunbbeit einer ißerfon trin« SBir baben lange auf ibn gemartet. My brother has gone hunting. An answer to a letter. She was angry at him. He has spent much money in books. William is going to market. Until further orders. To drink to a person's health. We have waited for him a long time. »§53. »*61.2.8. »§104. *§102,ÄCTru6. » § 54, Rem. 2. 6 § 131, Rem, 3. ■> § 68, Exc. B§25a III. EXAMPLES OF SYNONYMS. 1. 5t(fcr, 2anb» s a n b bejeic^net einen S^etí ber 6rbe im Slítgemeinen, im* ©egenfa^ gegen foíc^e, bie mit SSaffer bebecft fínb, unb o^ne Síücffi^t anf feinen mirt^fc^aft» íit^en Sfîn^cn (f^eftíanb, ©rengíanb, 0umbííímb, Siefíanb). -g ^ i ^ 'fí 2anb, es mag gebant fein, f^rüc^te^ tragen ober nid;t (^Brac^feíb, SBinterfelb, SSeijem feíb). 21 cE e r Reifst nur mirííid; gebautes (§aferacíer, Meeader, ^of)í= ader, ííartoffeíader;. (Sberíjarb.) 2. ^dcrêmonn, l^anbtoirt^, 33ûucr4 ®in 2íderSmann ift berjenige, beffen §auf3tgef(^äft ber 2Iderbau ift, cr mag übrigens in ber 0tabt ober auf bem Sanbe moquen. 2 a n b to i r t b unb 23 a u e r fcblieÇen^ noí^ baS SOÍerfmaí ein,^ baß ein fotdjer nicbt in ber 0tabt, fonbern auf bem 2anbe toobne.^ Unter ficb finb Sanbmirtbe unb 23auer barin oerfd;ieben, baß, nad; bem je^igen® ©ebraud>, baS leijtere SBort nic^t bloß bas ©efcbäft, fonbern an^ bcn 0tanb (in ber bürgerlichen ©efeíífchaft), baS erftere hingegen bloß baS ©efchäft anjeigt unb ben 0tanb gar nicht anbentet. Sin ©beimann, ber ein freies 9îittergut befi^t, auf bemfelben® lebt unb eS feíhft be^ mirthfchaftet, ift ein Sanbtoirth ; aber er ift fein 23auer, benn er gehört nicht gum iSanernftanbe. (2JiaaS.) 3» Wufftc^cn, cr[tc|cn, aufcrftc^en» 2)iefe SBörter heißen eigentlich : aus ber liegenben ober ßhenben in bie ßehenbe 0teíínng übergehen, gigüríi^ überhaupt : fich erheben (»on einem 0ünben» falte anfftehen, erftehen, anferftehen). S)ie 23emegung in bie §öhe ioirb in a n f ft e h e n buröh bas 2Í u f beßimmt unb unjtoeibeutig bejeichnct. © r in «> r ß e h e n brüdt biefelbe jtoar auch auS, aber nach einer unbeßimmten SBeife, benn © r iann auch 2Í u S bebeuten (e r m ä h I e n heißt a u 6 m ä h Í e n). ^ier« in ticgt ber ©rnnb, marnm man gu e r ft e h e n, meld;eS bie frühere grrm trar, noch auf hiugufeljte, um bie 3ttJeibeutig!eit' gn toermeiben, unb auf biefe SScife anferftehen bitbete. 2)er nachfotgenbc 0brachgebrauch beßimmte bann bie* fen 2lnSbrud, bermuthtich U»eií er bnrd; bie größere gültc mehr geierliches gn haben fd)ien,infonberheit für baS 2íuf erftehen aus bcm ©rabe,unb noch mehr bas ^außtmort 21 uferßehung,bergteidhen in biefer gorm bon er¬ ftehen menig, unb bon 2t u f ß e h u n g gar ni^t gebraucht mirb. (©r iß bon feinem ííraníeníager gar nicht aufgeßanben [or erßanben]. 0eint 2liche ruhet fchon in ber ©rbe unb harret ber 21 n f e r ß c h u n g.") (2)îaaS.) > 5 54, Rem. % 3 § 151, s 5 66, 2. ' 5 57, 2,3. a§74,3,4. M124. 6L.XLIII,3. 8562,2,8. EXAMPLES OF SYNONYMS. 199 4. Ausführen, vollbringen, vollführen, vollziehen, vollstrecken. Vollbringen bezieht sich' bloss auf die Handlung selbst, und heisst eigent¬ lich : Etwas so weit bringen, bis es voll, vollständig, vollendet ist. (Die Erde vollbringt ihren Lauf um die Sonne in 305 Tagen und einigen Stunden.) Vollziehen ist von a»t^Aren bloss dadurch" verschieden, dass es sich mehr auf das Ende der Handlung, ausführen mehr auf die ganze Handlung, nach ihrem Anfange und Ende bezieht. Die Ausführung giebt dem Vorsatze seine Voll¬ endung auch schon durch den Anfang der Handlung, die Vollführung erst durch die völlige" Beendigung derselben. (Man ist schon seit langer Zeit mit der Ausführung des Entwurfs der Austrocknung der pontinischen Sümpfe beschäftigt, aber noch immer von der Vollführung desselben weit entfernt.) Durch eine Handlung, welche einem Beschlüsse, der auf einer Verabredung beruhet, seine Vollendung giebt, wird der Beschluss vollzogen. Dieser Be- schluss mag übrigens* ein Gesetz, oder eine Verordnung, oder ein Befehl, oder ein Urtheilsspruch sein. (Man vollzieht das Urtheil an einem Missethäter. Man klagt, dass die vielen Gesetze, Verordnungen und Befehle, die man in manchen Ländern giebt, nicht gehörig vollzogen werden.) Der Gebrauch von vollstrecken ist so eingeschränkt, dass er eine unmittelbare Vollziehung bedeutet ; so sagt man : einen Befehl, ein UrtheiP vollstrecken ; nicht aber : ein Gesetz, einen Vertrag, eine Eheverbindung vollstrecken. (Entwürfe werden ausgeführt. Gesetze, Beschlüsse und Urtheilssprüche werden voll¬ zogen, und diese letzteren nun, sofern es sogleich und unmittelbar geschieht, vollstreckt. Die vollziehende Gewalt thut also das,® was die gesetzgebende und richterliche beschlossen' hat.) (Eberhard.) 5. ©cc. ®te SBörter 0 e c unb 2JÎ e e r inerben jutörberfi beibe bem ganjett Ocean, Çicrnâc^ft aber and; baíb ba§ (Sine ober ba§ 3ínbere, baíb betbe jugíeii^ ge« toifíen bcfonberen S^^ictíen beweiben beigelegt. Oer ®runb bon bieder SSer» fi^ebenbeit in ber SSenennnng ber Ob^ile beS Ocean« fcbeint offenbar leine an> bere ju fein, als ba^ bie Söllerftämme, ioel^e beibe SBörter, 0 e e unb 3ÏÎ e e r, batten, bie ©ewäffer, bie fie burd) bie lateinif^e® ober barau« entftanbene 0bra* eben lenneu lernten, SDi e e r e, bie anberen SSblferftämme aber, toeldje ba« SSort 0ec bMten, fon)obl ben Ocean al« feine Obeile 0ee nannten. Ungeachtet jene alfo ba« 2öort 0 e e bitten, fo gebrandbten fte bodj ba« äßort 2JÎ e e r bei ben Ob^ilih be« Ocean«, beren 93enennnng fie hon ben 9îômern entlehnten. ®a« toirb babnrdb ganj angenfd;einlid;, baji einige ©etoäffer eine bobfjclte 55e= nennnng boí'fn, eine römifd;e nnb eine nrfbrünglid; bentfdje. Oie iJîorbfee >§153. 3 § 86, 2,4. » § 67, 3, 4. 3 § 144, 6. »§189,4. *§273. •§lll,2,/îem.8. «§47, item. ^00 EXAMPLES OF SYNONYMS. ^ci^t auc^ ba§ 2)cutic^c^ 9Jicer (mare Germanicum), unb btc Dftfec bctS SJÎeer (mare Balticum). Sluc^ Die jt^eile beg Oceang, mit benen mir in bet neueren ßeit bnrd; bie ßnglänber beîannt gemorben finb, merben (Sec nnb nic^t äJieer genannt (mie bie Sit b j e e, bie mir am beften burd^ (Eooíg' unb gorfterg Seereifen iennen). SSennber ganje Ocean beibeg, See nnb SJÎeer genannt'mirb, fo gefi^ie^t bag nac^ Derîd;iebenen Sínfn^ten. See mirb eg nad; jeiner 2)íaíerie, 3Jîeer nac^ feiner gotm genannt. 2)ie See ift ber Ocean, ober ber 2:f>eil ber Oberfläche ber ©rbe, ber® nicht fefteg 2anb ift ; bag SJÎe er, fo fern eg bon biefem feften Sanbe eingefchíoffen ift. (3Tian fagt : f ee^ märtg,entgegengefeht bon lanbmärtg ; Seeminb, entgegengefehtbem Sanbminb ; Seemadjt, Seefolbaten, Seereifen, Seeräuber, m., entgegengefeht ber 2anbmad;í, Sanbfoíbaten, Sanbreifen, fRäuber auf beut feften £anbe, k. Sben fo fagt man Seemaffer, Secbäber, îc. ; hingegen fagt man 3Jieerbufen, iöieerenge). (Sberharb.) 6. Naseweis, neugierig, vorwitzig. Der Naseweise verlangt Etwas zu wissen, und fragt, um zu zeigen, dass er Verstand und Erfahrung genügt besitzt, von einer Sache, die noch über seiner Sphäre ist, mitzusprechen. Man nennt Personen naseweis, und besonders kleine Knaben und Mädchen, wenn sie über ^^ele Dinge urtheüen, die sie nicht verstehen, um ihren Witz und Verstand zu zeigen, insonderheit® wenn sie durch ihre voreiligen XJrtheile Personen, denen sie Achtung schuldig® sind, beleidigen, oder sie durch ihre unbescheidenen Fragen in Verlegenheit setzen. Die Neugierde ist die leidenschaftliche Begierde eines Menschen, das Neue zu wissen, bloss weil es ihm neu ist ; der Vorwitz ist die Begierde, das zu wissen und zu erfahren, was' er nicht wissen kann, und nic"ht zu erfahren suchen soll. Zu dem, was uns zu wissen vorenthalten ist, gehört besonders die entfernte und ungewisse Zukunft. Diese ist es gerade am meisten, welche den Vorwitz unwissender und schwacher Menschen reizt. (Eberhard.) 7. Mögen, wollen. Was wir thun, das müssen wir wollen, selbst alsdann, wenn wir es ungern thun. Sollen wir es so wollen, dass wir es gern thun, so muss es entweder gar nicht missfallen, oder doch in beträchtlichem Grade mehr Wohlgefallen, als missfallen. So fern nun das, was wir wollen gefällt, so fem es uns Lçst und Vergnügen macht, mögen wii' es. So wie wir Manches wollen, was wir nicht möchten, wenn wir müssten,® so mögen wir auch Manches, was wir nicht wollen. (Eberhard.) 1L. XVIII, 3, item. 3 5114, 2. « 5118,12. ^ } 114, 4^ SÍ7T. « §112,5, item. 1. «§96,1 »§124. IV. LETTERS AND BUSINESS FORMS. 1. Ein Neffe meldet seinem Onkel den Todesfall seiner Schwester. Berlin, den 9. April 1869. Lieber Onkel. Eine ausserordentlich schmerzliche Begebenheit zwingt mich heute Dir zu schreiben.' Nach neuntägigem schweren Leiden ist gestern meine liebe Schwester Adelheid am Typhus gestorben.® Wie gross der Schmerz im Hause und die Theilnahme aller Bekannten ist, kannst Du Dir denken, da Du ja wohl weisst,® wie sehr sie der Liebling aller derer war, mit denen sie in Berührung kam. Wenn ich mich auf diese kurze traurige Mittheilung beschi'änke, ohne irgend welche Nebenumstände zu erwähnen, so schreibe* das dem tiefen Schmerze zu, der mich bewegt. Alles Andere, so mittheilenswerth es auch sonst sein mag, erscheint mir diesem Ereignisse gegenüber bedeutungslos tmd unwesentlich. Mit herzlichem Gruss Dein treuer Neffe Gottfried Förster. 2. 3um ©cBurtêtagc eincê SSatcrê. ^atnburg, ben 7. .^uni 1869. Sîîetn lieber Sater. 2öte gerne toäre tc^ ^leute in ber äJlitte unjerer ^atnilie, um 2)ir ^er^önltd^ meinen ©liidtnunicb barbringen ju ïbnnen. erften SOÎale ift es mir ber* jagt, ben Çefttag mit (Su(i^® ju feiern, unb eS toirb mir ganj me^ p 9Jhtíí)e, toenn ïà) baran bente. 3Jîb(bte ber fc^bne Sag no^ rec^t mieberîe^ren unb uns Síííe um Sic^ bereinigt fe^en. Samit id^ aber nic^t ganj in bem ^eimi^c^en Srcife um ben gefdbtuüdten grü^flüdstifc^ mit ber großen ©eburtstagstorte febie,® fo Íí^icíe idb Sir mein 33itb, benn idb »beiß ja bodb, baß Su midb jelbjl —menu es aucb uur mein Siíb iß—lieber nimmß, als Stiles, mas itb Sir fonß fdbicCen tonnte. SSieheicbt jollte i^ baS nid^t jo grabe berausjagen,^ aber ibavnm benn am ©übe nidbt ebriidb auSfbredben, toaS man bentt unb jüblt. Ser Sag iß nod) tanm angebrotben. Stttein icb motlte nidbt fdbou geßern jdbreiben, toeil idb bann gar nidbt fo redbt in geßßimmung gemejen märe.* Sfe^t trage icb ben S9riej glei^ felbß auf bie ^oß, bann gebt er mit bem Çritbgug ab "«TTar! " 5144, T. » § 107, Rem. 4. ' 516T, 1. »5136.2. *5161,1. «5124. «5 282. 202 LETTERS AND BUSINESS FORMS. unb îommt gevabe an,' wenn Sud? an ben grü^iftücíétifd; feljt unb ÇRad^bat Sc^mibt na(^ gen>o^nter SBeife jum ©ratuliren ^erüberfommt. âôenn ic^ tipn ber 'ipoft jurücf bin, bann iuerbe ic^ niiv feíbft in meinem Stübc^en ba§ alte íieb borfingen, mit bem^' wir ©efcbwifter 2)ic^ jebeê 3a^r an Seinem Gf>rentage aufgewedt f)aben. Ser ©ebaníe mag etwas ¡¡u tinbifc^^ für einen fo großen jungen fein; aber es ift gar fo fc^ön fic^ in bie Äinberja^re jurüdjubeníen, namentlicf» an folc^en ^eiteren gamiliengebenîtagen. ©rüße SJÎutter unb bie ©efcfiwifter ret^t fe^r unb fet^ felbft fierjlidj umarmt unb geiüßt bon Seinem 0of)nc Stto. 3. Ceremonielle Form der Einladung. Herr und Madame Eberhard versichern Herrn und Madame Prenzler ihrer gänzlichen Hochachtung und bitten Sie, ihnen die Ehre zu erweisen, Mitt¬ woch um 5 Uhr bei ihnen speisen zu wollen.® 4. Antwort auf dieselbe. Hen- und Madame Pretzier beeilen sich, der ihnen so freundlich geworde¬ nen Einladung Folge zu leisten, und empfehlen sich Herrn® und Madame Eberhard auf das Ergebenste. 5. Vertrauliclie Form der Einladung. Lieher Herr Reichert. Wenn Sie nicht für Morgen Mittag bereits versagt sind, so sind Sie freund¬ lichst eingeladen, mit uns um 4 Uhr zu speisen. Herr Professor Bernhard und Dr. Runge haben uns versprochen zu kommen. Dr. Runge freut sich besonders darauf, Ihre Bekanntschaft zu machen. Sie sollten die Gelegen¬ heit nicht vorübergehen lassen, da er schon in drei Tagen nach Berlin zu¬ rückzukehren gedenkt. Mit fi-eundschaftlichem Gruss Michaels Strasse No. 126. Ihr Mittwoch, den 6. October 1869. Joh. Wilh. Engelmana. 6. Antwort auf dieselbe. Lieber Herr Engelmann. Leider bin ich schon seit mehreren Tagen für morgen Mittag versagt, und kann daher Ihrer freundlichen Einladung'nicht nachkommen, so sehr ich be¬ dauere, Dr. Runge nicht sehen zu können.® Brandenburger Strasse No. 89. Ihr Mittwoch, den 6. October 1869. Fried. Wilh. Reichert. '§150,2. 3 §80,8.5. »{165. ' §179,1. 2 §114,2. *§161. •} 75, iÎOT». 1. »§167. LETTERS AND BUSINESS FORMS. 203 7. Çôfitd^c gorm bcr (gtnlabung, §crr unb SJlabame 2)tctri(i^ bitten §evnt unb SJÎabamc ílieíeinetter, gefäüigft näcbfteu' 2)icnflag um 6 Ubr bei ifjuen fpeifen gu mollen, unb empfehlen fic^ 3^neu bei biefer ©elegeu^cit au^S greunblid^fte.^ 8* ^tntöort auf bicfelbc» §err unb 2}îabame Siefemetter werben baê 3Sergnügen l^aben, bcr ©iníabung^ toon §errn unb äJiabame 2)ietri(i^ goíge gu leiften,® unb em))fe^íen fid^ S^uen* frcunbi(^aftlid;{t. 9. Wechselbrief. Gut für loOO Thir. Pr. Cour. An die Disconto-GeseUschaft zu Berlin. Nach Sicht, beliehen Sie, auf diesen Prima-Wechsel, an Herrn Pr. Wilh. Lindemann die Summe von fünfzehnhundert Thaler, Preusisch Courant, auszuzahlen. Werth empfangen, den Sie in Rechnung stellen wollen laut Bericht. JoH. W. Eitelbekg, Wien, den® 12. August 1869. Banquier in Wien. 10* ^íntocifung» ©ut iür 800 2:^ír. 3n toier iDîonaten (ober auf ÜScrlangen) ber^fíic^te ic^ mi(^, an §errn ^arl Stein ober beffen® Orbre, bie ©umme hon at^tijnnbert 2;^aíer, ipreu^ijcí^ Eourant, auëguga^Ien. SSert^ in SBaaren (ober baar) embfangen. griebrid) ^uguft Sranicí>. ©tuttgart, ben 7. S)egember 1869. 11* Duittung* 500 S^lr. ©mbfangen' toon íperrn S. Srau?, fünií;unbert 2:^aíer, ipreu^if^ Sourant, ais 35egabíung in tooü.® SBil^elm SrauC. ©otba, ben 4. Oítober 1869. I ^ ^ i»92. 35179^2. s §83,4. '§144,4. >§190,2,2. *§179,1. *§111,2. e§ 188,12. Rem. V. READING LESSONS. S)íe bcttíf^c S)tc beutfd^c iR ewe' aíteften,= rcmften unb gcHIbctfíen unteí ben íebenben ■3t?rc 58iíbungsgefá;ic^te umfaßt uugefäftr jmettaufenb ^abre.® @ie ift bte urfbrüngltctie eine§ alten, tu toerf^iebene 0tamme* get^eil^ ten, großen 25oííea, toeícfíeé fc^on fefjr früf) anê® feinen alten SBo^nß^en in Çocb- afien nad) @nroba manberte, nnb befonberg bcffen norblic^en nnb mittleren 2:^eií beoöiferte. 2)er Síame „bentfc^" fíammt nid^t bon bcm angebíicfien ©otíe nnb ©tammbater biefeS SSoííeS, ab,® fonbern bon bem gotfiifd^en Söorte thiudu—aítbentfcb diot, diet—ba§ f>etßt SSoíE, nnb bebentet eigentíid? ; r,gnm25oíte gefíorenb", „bemSSoIíe eigen". Unter bem 9íamcn @ e r m a n e n mnrben' bie 2)eutf(í)en perfí ben 9îômern befannt. ®roßen (Sinßnß auf bie Sentfc^en nnb if)re ©fjrad^e batte bie üSoIfertban* bernng (375—500) nnb bie Sínébreitnng ber (briftíid;en 3íeIigion. 2)er S3ifcbof Uípíaé (360—380) mar ber Srßnber ober bocb ber SSerbottfommner einer bentfdben 53ncbftabenfdbrift, nnb Ueb^erfe^er' ber 33ibeí inS ©otbifcbe. ^arí ber ®roße (768—814) mar ein tbätiger SSeförberer ber bentfcben 0b^a(b« biíbnng. Unter ben §obenftanfen erbob ftcb bie Memanifcbe ober 0(bmäbifdbc 2)înnbart (2Jíitteíbod;bentf(be 0bracbe), beren® fidb bie SJÍinnefanger bebienten. 2)ie bï^ffaifcbe 0bracbe gemann an Slnébebnnng, 9íeicbtbnm nnb 9íegeí« mäßigt'eit bnríb ben oergrößerten SBobíftanb ber 0täbte nnb bie erböbte attge« meine 53iíbnng, auf meídbe borjügíidb folgenbe Umftänbe toortbeiíbaft cinmirííen; bie (grricbtnng ber Unioerfität gn ißrag (1348), SBien, §eibeíbcrg, f oín, íc.; bie (ärßnbnng beë Sumben^abierd nnb ber SSn^brnderfnnß (1446) ; bie ®r« oberung ííonftantmobeí«(l453); bie (gntfíebnng ber 3eitnngen ; bie (SntbecEnng bon 3lmeriîa (1492) ; borjügíidb aber bie ^Reformation (1500). Sntber (1483—1546) begrünbeíe burcb feine iBibeíiiberfc^nng nnb bnrdb feine übrigen 0dmiften, befonberê ijîrebigten nnb Sieber, bie b^utiSí allgemeine 0d;riftíbracbe unter bem iRamen bes § o ¿b b e n t f ¿b e n (genauer iR e n b o cb« b e n t f d^ genannt). ßs fínb in bem langen SebenSlanfe nnferer 0bra(íbe bicr ÇanbtiSb'x^cn gu unterfd;eiben, in benen ber 0trom ibrer fortmSb^enben 23erSnbernng für cine 3eitlang gehemmt nnb fie ais 0d;riftfbradbe gn mebr ober menigcr feßcr ©eftalt gebieben gu fein fcbeint. S)iefe bier ©badben ßnb ; 1§100. 3 §74,3,4,1. 6 §220. "L.XXXVI.,6. »§91. *§74,8,4,1. «§161,«114,9. READING LESSONS. 205 1. bas ® 01 ^ i f et? c, bis jum 4. 3a^rbunbert unferer ßeitrcd^nung ; 2. bas 2llt£)0(í^beutícbc, bom 7. bis jum 11. ^a^jr^unbert; 3. bas SOÍittcí^ocbbeutícbc, bom 12. bis jum 14. ^a^rbunbert ; 4. bas Üíeubocbbcutfíbe, íeit bem Slnfang beS 16. ^abrbunbcrts; be- fonberS bur^ Sutbcr begrünbet, aber crft mit bem Síufbíüben unferer neueren clafiifd^en Siteratur, feit ber SJÎitte bes 18. Sab^b^nbert, attmaíig ju feiner beutigen ©efiaít gebieben. C^. 2Ö. 2. §ebfe, 1797—1855.) 2)cr 0tra^cniungc» (Sin ©tra^enjunge, ber bon einem anbern eine 2JîauIf(beIie erbaíten batte, tburbe gefragt,^ marnm^ er biefeíbe nitbt jurüdgegeben bätte. „2)arum", anb- mortete er, „toeil idb bacbte, mir mären nnfer nur jmei, unb bann mürbe® bii âîeibe bocb gíeicb mieber an mid;* íommen." (3uí. aSiíb. 3inîgref, 1591—1635.) 2)c0 2)cutít^cn Síatcríanb» 2BaS ifi bes Seutfcben® SBateríanb ? 3ft'ê ißreugenianb, ift'S ©dbmabenlanb? 3ft'8 mo am® ^b^in bie 9tebe blübt? Sfî'^ mo am 53eít bie SRöbe giebt V O nein ! nein I nein ! ©ein SSaterianb muß größer fein. 5IBaS ift beS 2)eutf(ben 35ateríanb? 3ft'S SBaierianb, ift'S ©teieríanb ? 3ft'S mo ber SRarfen 9îinb ficb ftredt? 3ft's mo ber 3Jîârïer (Sifen redt ? £) nein l nein I nein ! 0ein SSaterlanb muß größer® fein. 2BaS ift beS 25eutf^en SSaterlanb? Sß's ^ommernlanb, Söeftfaienlanb? 3ft'5 mo ber 0anb ber ®ünen mebt? Sft'S mo bie ®onau braufenb gebt? O nein ! nein 1 nein l 0ein SSaterlanb muß größer fein. '«Í134; 1«1. 3 5125. s 5 89, Rem. 10. ' § 144,6. •4113, Litern. 2,2. *4107. « 4 64, 1, item. 2,1. 8 4 91. 206 READING LESSONS. SBa§ ift bc3 Seutfc^en 23ateríanb? 'Bo nenne mir bag große Sano, Oíft'S îanb ber ©c^meijer,ift'0 Sïtjrol? 2)ag 2anb unb S5oíf gefíeD mir moí)l ; O nein I nein ! nein I ©ein SSateríanb muß größer jein. SSaS ift beg 2)eutfc^en SJateríanb ? @0 nenne'' mir bag große 2anb I ©emiß ift eg bag Oefterreic^, 2ln® ©^ren unb an ©icgen reicfi? £) nein ! nein ! nein 1 ©ein Saterianb muß größer fein. 2ßag ift beg Seutfájen SSateríanb ? ©o nenne enbíid» mir bag Sanb I ©0 meit bie beutit^e Bunge Ringt, Unb ©Ott* im §immeí Sieijej.fingt, 2)ag foll^ eg fein I S)ag, madrer Seutfö^er, nenne beinl 2)ag ift beg 2)eutf(í)en SSateríanb : 2ßo ©ibe f(f)mört ber.S)ru(í ber §anb, 2Ö0 Sreue ¿«5 bom ^[ug^e Hi^t, Unb 2i£be toarm im ^erjen fi^t, Sag foil eg fein 1 Sag, toadrer Seutfcfjer, nenne bein I Sag ganje Seutíá)íanb foil eg fein I D ©Ott ! toom Rimmel fieö° barein 1 Unb gieb ung redeten beutfd)en ÍSRutí}, Saß tüir eg lieben tr^ unb gut 1 Sag fott cg fein I Sag ganje Seutfc^lanb foH eg fein. (©ruß SDioritj Jlrnbt. 1769—18»^.) S)cr junge ^Jiujifcr* ©ine ©efettf(f)aft bon ©böttern moüte fid^ über einen jungen 3}hißfer, ber ibncn' borfbielte, luftig mad;en unb rief ; „©r fpielt fo licblid; mie Orbbeug !" „3a", antmortete ber ^ünftler, „barum® bu^^^ uucb einen Raufen SBären unb ifJuutber um micb ber-" (3. 2B. 3in!gvcf0 lil44,4, a 5144. 7. 3 5 245. ♦ § 74, 2, 4. » § 163. «} 144, a. '§107. e§188,10, Rem.!. READING LESSONS. 207 îScr Settler «nb ^aifer grtebrit^, Ïïiisî eine« i^ageS^ gu iRürnberg ein 33ettíer gu Äaifer gdebrid; îam unb tbn um ein Slímofen anfprad;, mit bem Suî'ife/ >®äre® îaifertid^er SJÎajeftâl^ 33ru« ber, meii alle ïïîenfciien toon einem 35ater — bem Slbam — abftammten, aljo un^ ter einanber 33rüber toaren, íiejg ifjm ber Saifer nic^t me^r at« einen ííreuger geben. S)er 53cttíer mollte^ fid? befd^meren, baß e« für einen taifer gu menig märe. Mehd gricbrid; mie« ibn mit ben SSorten ab „Stßenn bir ein jeber Sßruber fo toieí gibt, mirft bu reid;er fein al« td; felbft," (3. SS. 3inî3ï«î.) „5Beffer Gtma«" ©tjrad; ber SBolf, „benn illicit«," 2li« er nac^ einem @c^afe fct)naf3f5te, Unb bafur eine SJÍücí' ertaf^fjte. 2Jîanc^er iönnt' bie Ííafí^e ffsaren : 2)îan ertennt i(;n fo id;on für einen Sfîarrcn. (Sin 5ibcntcucr. SSir belagerten, id; meiß nic^t me^r, meídje ©tabt. S)em f^elbmarf^^Ä üjat gang erftauníicf) toieí an genauer Äunbfc^aft gelegen, mie bie @ad;í|LÍn ber geftung ftünben. fciiien äußerft fermer, ja faft unmögiitf), bur^ atte SSor® fjoften, 2Sad;en unb f^eftungSiüerfe hinein gu' gelangen. SBor 9îîutf> unb 2)ienftcifer faft ein menig allgu rafct;, ftetie tcfi mid; neben eine ber größten Kanonen, bie foeben nad; ber geftung abgefeuert marb,® unb ffsrang im §ui auf bie Äugei, in ber 5íbfid;t, mic^ in bie Çeftung f)ineintragen gu íaffen.® 211« id; aber fiaibmeg« burd; bie Suft geritten tüar, ftiegen mir aíleríei nid;t unerf)eb=< iidte S3ebenfiid)feiten gu Äofjfc. §m ! bad;te ic^, í;iuein!ommen îannft bu nun ttoo^í, atíein mie í;ernac^ fogíeid; mieber ^erau« ? Unb mié íann bir'« in ber geftung ergef)en? 2)ían mirb bid; fogíeii^ aí« ©f)ion eríennen unb an ben näd;ften ©algen bangen 1 ©n fotd;eö 23ette ber ©bie mottte id; mir benn bod; mot;! tocrbitten. ïïîacb biefen unb abníid;en 23etracbtungen entfcbioß id; m<Él; íurg, nabm bie gíü(ííid;c ©eíegeubeit mabr, aí« eine Âanonenîugei au« ber f^cßuug ciuige ©d;ritt toon mir toorüber nacb unfcrem Sager fiog,'® fprang" toon ber SJfcinigen auf bicje hinüber, unb lam'® gmar untoerrid;tctcr ©ad;e, jebod; moblbcbaítcn bei ben íie* ben Unfrigen mieber an. (23aron toon a3íünd;bauíen, 1720—97.) iL.III.,n3T. 4L. XXXI. i^m,Exc,^ «OL. XXX. »§124, «L.IX.,1. 85138. ii§15T,l. íL.VI..B,R0m. 6 L. IX., 4,4. »§144,4. «»§80.1. 208 READING LESSONS. Die Hunnen. Der Geschichtschreiber Ammianus Marcellinus (A.D. 410) macht von den Hunnen folgende Beschreibung: "Sie sind bartlos und hässlich von An¬ gesicht, scheusslich von Gestalt und krummbeinig.' Sie bedürfen keines Feuers noch schmackhafter Speisen ; ihre Nahrung besteht aus Wurzeln von Kräutern des Feldes und halbrohem Fleische von jedwedem Vieh, Häuser haben sie nicht und meiden sie wie die Gräber, selbst Hütten von Rohr findet man bei ihnen nicht. Unstät durch Gebirg und Wald umherstreifend, lernen sie von Kindheit an, Hunger und Durst und den Wechsel der Wit¬ terung ertragen. Ihre Kleider sind von Leinwand, oder aus Fellen von kleinem Wild zusammengenähet. ® Mit gebogenen Mützen decken sie den Kopf, mit Bocksfellen den Körper, ihre unförnüichen Schuhe hindern sie an freiem Gang, desshalb sind sie zu Fussmärschen untüchtig. Aber auf ihren Pferden, die zwar hässlich, jedoch dauerhaft sind, hangen^ sie wie angewach¬ sen und verrichten auf denselben ihre gewöhnlichen Geschäfte. Bei Tag und Nacht ist jeder zu Pferde, kauft und verkauft, isst und trinkt und schläft auf den Nacken des Thieres gelehnt. Zu Pferde halten^ sie die Versamm¬ lungen und Berathungen. Kein strenges Herrscherthum fesselt sie; sie folgen ihren Häuptlingen ohne festes Band. In den Kampf gehen sie keil¬ förmig geordnet und mit grässlich lautem Geschrei. Gewandt und behende wie sie sind, sprengen sie dann absichtlich mit einem Male auseinander imd zerstreuen sieh zu wüstem Morden. Aus der Ferne kämpfen sie mit Wurfspeeren, deren Spitzen künstlich aus scharfen Knochen gefertigt sind, in der Nähe mit dem Schwert. Pflüge haben sie nicht. Ohne Hof und Herd, ohne festen Sitz und Gesetz schwei¬ fen® sie unstät gleich Flüchtlingen mit ihren Wagen umher ; dies sind ihre Wohnungen, wo sich ihre Weiber und Kinder befinden, bis sie erwachsen sind. Anderswo geboren,® in fernen Landen aufgezogen, weiss keiner anzu¬ geben, woher er stammt. Treulos, wankelmüthig, jeder neuen Hoffnung' hingegeben, folgen sie ganz dem Drang des Triebes. Wie das unvernünftige Vieh kennen sie keinen Unterschied zwischen Tugend und Laster. Von Glauben und Religion haben sie keinen Begriff. Nach Geld sind sie so aus¬ nehmend lüstern und so leicht gereizt, dass sie wohl mehrmals an demselben Tage sich® entzweien uncPwieder versöhnen. (Weber's Weltgeschichte.) SBenn'ê ntd;t ge^t, tnic man mill, 3Jîug man t^un mie man îann. «L. XII. 5 L. XXXIII. ® § 15T, 1. 1L. XXXIV. 2 L. VIL, 5 83. *L. XXXII. « H12, a ®îl6a READING LESSONS. 209 (Eintritt in Mc bcntfi^c greier^ at^met fd^on bie 23ruft, í^ídgt cinfame 2ujî, griebe tjî e8, tt>ad ^ier ©anft ju tnnerm §crjen ge^t, SDaB îem ©c^tnerj ba nimmcr ftilrmt. 2Bie fic^ SBcrg auf S3erg antl;iinnt, ©d^iceigen un8 ergreift,' SBiíbeS ©treben nte^r jí^tüeift. $ier auf [tider 2ííben{;i3l)V SSo ber [ernett ©ibfet ©c^nec, ©0 bie Söolien golben malt, ©rn[t JU uns i;ernieber [tra[ilt. ©eiig,' trer ba §ütten baut, ©in[am ber 9îatur »ertraut, ®er ©rinuerung uur lebt, ©auj [id; [elb[t iu fie »ergräbt, ©injig au[ baS Sieb nur beult, 2)a§ i^m ©Ott ins §erj geíenít; 2)er ben ®i(^ter auSerfor, Sag er bricht an'S Sic^t [terbor® Sitten §eibengei[teS' ©[)ur ! ©tiHer ©(^ön[)eit 23ínmen[tor, gern »on jener t»ü[teu äSelt, 3)ie uns Stil' in ge[[eíu ^ätt. SJÎôc^t® ic^ ein[t [o gtüdtic^ [ein, ©ot^en gricbens tni^ ju [reu'n ; ©tejer [c^öneu S3erge §ö^'n 9îoc^ als Çeintat^ t»ieberíe[)u. (griebrid? »on ©(^teget, 1772—1829.) Johann Wolfgang von Goethe. Joh. Wolf, von Götlie wurde geboren den 28. August 1749 zu Frankfurt am Main, woselbst sein Vater kaiserlicher Rath war. Im Jahre 1765 ging er nach Leipzig, wo er die Rechte studiren sollte, sich aber am meisten mit Dichtkunst beschäftigte, und auch Versuche im Kupferstechen machte. Von 1768 lebte er wieder in Frankfurt und studirte chemische Werke. Im «5184,1. «5 92. » 5 156, 3. ♦567,2,1. 6 L. XVIII, 6157,1. 'Ö8,l. 8134.8. 210 EEADING LESSONS. Jahre 1770 bezog er die Universität Strassburg, dort lernte er Herder ken¬ nen' und ward Doktor der Rechte. In das väterliche Haus ziirückgekeiirt, waren Shakspeare's—des grossen enliglischen Dramatikers—Werke Gegen¬ stand seiner eifrigsten Studien. Im Jahre 1773 schrieb er das Schauspiel "Götz von Berlichingen," und 1774 den Roman: "Leiden des jungen Werther." Beide Werke begründeten des Dichters® Ruf. Im Jahre 177G ernannte ihn der Herzog Karl August von Weimar, mit dem er persönlich bekannt geworden, zum Legations-Rath. Der Aufenthalt in Weimar, dem Mittelpunkt der deutschen Dichtkunst, hatte auf sein Leben und dichterisches Wirken den entschiedensten Einfluss. In Jahre 178G reiste er nach Italien, wo er zwei Jahre verweilte und sich meistens in Rom aufhielt. Während dieser Zeit^ schrieb er seine vollendetsten dramatischen Werke: "Iphigenie in Tauris"—"Egmont"—"Torquato Tasso." Im Jahre 1792 machte er mit dem Herzoge von Weimar im preussischen Heere den Eeldzug gegen die Franzosen mit. Um^ sich ganz der Poesie und Wissenschaft widmen zu können, liess er sich seines Staatsdienstes entheben,® doch wurde er später zum ersten Minister (Minister-Präsident) in Weimar ernannt. Nach dem Tode des Herzogs im Jahre 1826 zog er sich zurück. Göthe gilt als Ilaupt-Representant unserer zweiten classischen Periode. Er ist einer der grössten deutschen Dichter, wenn nicht der grösste. In fast allen Zweigen der Dichtkunst hat er das ausgezeichnetste geleistet. Er ist gross in jeder Gattung, am grössten® aber in Drama und Roman. Seine TTagödien: "Götz von Berlichingen," "Egmont," "Iphigenie in Tauris," "Tasso," etc., werden allgemein bewundert. Seine Tragödie "Faust" aber ist als sein höchstes Werk in der Poesie, als die Krone seiner Dichtungen betrachtet. Seine Lieder, Elegien, Balladen, gelten als Muster. Grosses' leistete er im Epos durch eine Bearbeitung des "Reineke Fuchs" und durch ' ' Hermann und Dorothea, " im Roman durch ' ' Werthers Leiden, " " Wilhelm Meisters Lehrjahre,"und "Wilhelm Meisters Wanderjahre." Bis zu seinem Tode hatte er sich einer® ungewöhnlichen geistigen Frische, der vollkommensten Gesundheit und der heitersten Gemüthsstimmung zu erfreuen. Er starb nach kurzem und schmerzlosem Krankenlager am 22. März 1833, fast vom ganzen Volke als der "deutsehe Dichterfürst" verehrt, von etlichen angefeindet, von mehreren zum Gott gemacht. (Davin.) (Sin 2öoif int ©^íaf gSngt nie ein ^anö ol^ne gleig Söirb nimmer meif. 15144,7. '5 75,1,1. 3 5 74, 1,1,1. * 5 267, Rem. 6. ® 5 144,6. '5 89, Renu 10. «5 93. item. 2. «588.3. READING LESSONS. 21i 2)cê tönigö @raB* í?ie SSefîcjotben wollten burd^ Statten nat^ Sifufa wanbern, unterwegs' ftarS i'iö^iid; 2liari(^, t^r Äöntg, ben fie über bie SOiaße tiebten. 2)a bnben fíe an,' unb leiteten ben S3arent, bev neben ber ©tabt (Sofentia Dom gu^e beS S3ergeS fiiejjt, ans feinem 33ette ab.' DJÎitten in bem 53ctt ließen fie nun bnrd; einen §anfen (gefangener ein (Srab graben, unb in ben 0d;oß ber ©riibe be- fiatteten fie, nebft* Dielen iîoftbarfeiten, ibren Sönig Sltarid). 2öie baS gefcbeben 'War, leiteten fie baS iBaffer wiebcr inS atte 33ette jurüd, unb töbteten, bamit bie ©tätte Don niemanb Derrat^en würbe, aEe bie, wet^e baS @rab gegraben batten. (©age, Don ben 33rübern ©rimm.) Aufruf des Königs von Preussen. An mein Volk. So wenig für mein treues Volk als für Deutsche bedarf es einer Rechen¬ schaft über die Ursachen des Kriegs, welcher jetzt beginnt : klar liegen sie dem unverblendeten Europa vor Augen. Wir erlagen' unter der Uebermacht Frankreichs. Der Friede, der die Hälfte meiner Unterthanen mir entriss, gab uns seine Segnungen nicht, denn er schlug uns tiefere Wunden, als selbst der Krieg. Das Mark des Landes ward ausgesogen. Die Hauptfestungen blieben vom Feinde besetzt, der Ackerbau ward gelähmt, sowie der sonst so hochgebrachte Kunstfleiss unserer Städte. Die Freiheit des Handels ward gehemmt und dadurch die Quelle des Erwerbes und des Wohlstandes ver- sWpft. Das Land ward ein Raub der Verarmung. Durch die strengste Er¬ füllung eingegangener Verbindlichkeiten hoffte ich meinem Volite Erleichte¬ rung zu verschaffen, und den französischen Kaiser endlich zu überzeugen, dass es sein eigener Vortheil sei, Preussen seine Unabhängigkeit zu lassen. Aber meine reinsten Absichten wurden durch Uebermuth und Treulosigkeit vereitelt, und nur zu deutlich sahen wir, dass des Kaisers Verträge mehr noch wie seine Kriege uns langsam verderben mussten. Jetzt' ist der Augen¬ blick gekommen, wo alle Täuschung über unsern Zustand schwindet. Bran¬ denburger, Preussen, Schlesier, Pommern, ' Litthauer ! Ihr wisst, was ihr seit sieben Jahren erduldet habt ; ihr wisst, was euer trauriges Loos ist, wenn wir den beginnenden Kampf nicht ehrenvoll enden. Erinnert euch an die Vorzeit, an den grossen Kurfürsten, an den grossen Friedrich. Bleibet'ein¬ gedenk® der Güter, die unter ihnen unsere Vorfahren blutig erkämpften ; Ge¬ wissensfreiheit, Ehre, Unabhängigkeit, Handel, Kunstfleiss und Wissenschaft. Gedenkt des grossen Beispiels unserer mächtigen Verbündeten, gedenkt der Spanier und Portugiesen ; selbst kleine Völker sind für gleiche Güter gegen STsS.'R ' 5151,1. ' 5 144, 2. '77574. ' anheben. * 5 230. ' 5148. s § 95^ 212 READING LESSONS. mächtigere Feinde in den Kampf gezogen und haben den Sieg errungen;' erinnert euch an die heldenmüthigen Schweizer und Niederländer. Grosse Opfer werden von allen Ständen gefordert werden,® denn unser Beginnen ist gross, und nicht gering die Zahl und die Mittel unserer Feinde. Ihr werdet jene lieber bringen für das Vaterland, für euren angeborenen König, als für einen fremden Herrscher, der, wie so viele Beispiele lehren, eure Söhne und eure letzten Kräfte Zwecken widmen würde, die euch ganz fremd sintL Ver¬ trauen® auf Gott, Ausdauer, Muth und der mächtige Beistand unserer Bun¬ desgenossen werden unserm redlichen Anstrengen siegi'eichen Lohn gewähren. Aber welche Opfer auch von einzelnen gefordert werden mögen, sie wiegen die heiligen Güter nicht auf, für die wir sie hingeben, für die wir streiten und siegen müssen, wenn wir nicht aufhören woUen, Preussen und Deutsche zu sein. Es ist der letzte entscheidende Kampf, den wir bestehen für unsere Existenz, unsere Unabhängigkeit, unsem Wohlstand. Keinen andern Aus¬ weg gibt* es, als einen ehrenvollen Frieden oder einen ruhmvollen Untergang. Auch diesem würdet ihr getrost entgegengehen, weil ehrlos der Deutsche nicht zu leben vermag. Allein wir dürfen mit Zuversicht vertrauen, Gott und un¬ ser fester Wille werden unserer gerechten Sache den Sieg verleihen, mit ihm einen sichern glorreichen Frieden und die Wiederkehr einer glückhchen Zeit. Breslau, den 17. März 1813. Friedrich Wilhelm. ßtit SJÍü^ífíein unb ein 9Jîenjd;en^erj Sötrb ftets ^lentmgetrteBen SSo S3eibeê Síid^ts git reihen hat, Sßirb Seibes felhft gerriehen.® ^urstociligc 1. 2öa8 tfl nic^t ret^t nnb bo^ îeine @ünbe ? 2. SBenn fünf @äfte finb nnb fünf (gier aufgetragen werben, wie lann jebci ein (gi nehmen unb boch gule^t noch eines in ber 0^üffel hieihen? 3. Süöel^e ftnb bie härteften' Siüffe ? 4. 2öie îann man aus einem ©ad boK ^orn gWei foícher ©äde gugleith tioH machen ? 5. aSJarum ift in Ulm ein @rofd?enhrob größer benn in ©¿haffhüuích G. 2BaS fteht gwifdhen Serg unb Slhat ? 7. ÏBann thun bem §afen bie S^hue Weh 8. 2BeI(he SDÍenfchen gehen auf S^öfifen ? 9. (gin Síinber fah einen §afen laufen, ein Sahmer fhrang ihm nath, unb ein ilîadter ftedt ihn in bie Safche ; WaS ift baS ? 10. 2öcid)er ift ber fchwerfte ©tah? 15144, L 3 5 258. »5157,1. 'S91. «5161. *L.XLV,2. 6 5144, & »5149. READING LESSONS. 213 21 n t U) 0 r Í c n. 1. î)ett Itnîeit íxmbfc^u'^ auf bte rechte i>anb jtelen. 2. î>er ße^te nimmt eineé fammt ber ©chüffel. 3. Setrübniffe unb ©efängniffe. 4. SWan mug ètnei ©ádEe' über etnanbersiehítt unb ben innerpen füllen. 5. SBetl man eö gröger bäit. 6. Iiaö SBörtlein „unb." 7. SBenn bie -^unbe ihn beigen. 8. ®ie 9lägeD in ben ©tiefein hnhcn« 9. Sine Süge, 10. £)er ®etteipab. Slicercöftiflc. 2:tefe 0titte hevrfcht im Sßaffer, Ohne Sîegung ruljt ba« 9Jîcer, Unb beíümmert fiefit ber 0(î)iffer ©latte glä(he rings umher. Seine ßuft, toon feiner 0eite I Sobesftille, fürchterlich ! 3in ber ungeheuren SBeite 9îeget feine SBelle ftch.' (®öthe.) Der Cirknitzer See. An den julischen Alpen liegt in Krain der berühmte Cirknitzer* See, von jeher das Wunder und Eäthsel der Gegend, Oestlich von Adelsherg, da wo die Geheimnisse der Unterwelt® in hundert Gewölben und Kalkfelsen ver¬ schlossen sind, breitet sich der wunderschöne See von Cirknitz aus, wie ein Spiegel von drei Quadratmeilen. Aus ihm ragen hervor® fünf Inseln und eine derselben trägt selbst das Dörfchen Ottok. Mehrere Flüsschen' fallen hinein. Er ist sehr reich an Fischen und Wasservögeln, und die ganze Thalgegend umher ist romantisch schön. Nördlich erhebt sich das Silvi- nitza-Gebirge, westlich und südlich der grosse Javomik. Neun Dörfer, zwanzig Kirchen und zwei Schlösser reihen sich um den See. Bei vielem Eegen gewinnt er an Umfang, aber bei sehr trockenem Wetter verschwindet sein Gewässer und zieht in den geheimen Schooss der Unterwelt, begleitet vom Wassergeflügel und allen Fischen. Tiitt diese wunderbare Erscheinung ein, dann läuten die Dorfglocken umher, um noch zu fischen so viel als mög¬ lich. Von Stunde zu Stunde sinkt tiefer der Spiegel, denn eine Menge von Löchern im Grunde des Sees verschluckt sein Gewässer. Unterirdische Höhlen von unermesslichem Umfang, die nie ein menschliches® Auge geschaut, nehmen es auf. Jetzt schaut der Grund des Sees zum heiteren Himmel Ï § 74, 3, Rem. 3 } 158. » 5 68, 1. ' {67,1,1. *§74.1,1,1. «5 86,2,6, Rm. 2. «5167,1. »586,2,6. 214 READING LESSONS. hinauf, er trocknet ab; und der rührige Mensch eratet Gras, wo er sonst fischte, er wagt zu säen und erndtet Hirse und Buchweizen, er nimmt statt des Netzes das Eeuerrohr und erlegt Wildpret. So ist der wunderbare See mit Recht in dem Rufe, dass man in ihm fischen, jagen und emdten kann • bis die Zeit sich wendet, häufige Regengüsse und starke Gewitter sich ein¬ stellen. Dann tritt das Gewässer aus den Grundlöchern gewaltsam herauf. Es speiet die Unterwelt Gewässer und Eische und Seevögel herauf, so dass binnen vierundzwanzig Stunden der See gleichsam wieder neu geschaffen ist. Der Zusammenhang dieses Sees mit unterirdischen Wasserhöhlen, die theils unter ihm, theils höher als er liegen, giebt die Erklärung des Wunders. Man liat selbst Modelle erfunden, welche den Vorgang versinnlichen. (J. C. F. Guts Muths.) S)cr öorit^iigc S^räumcr» 3n bctn @täbtd?eit SöitüSbac^ im Santon 33ern mar einmal ein grember übet 'iflaàft, nnb als er inê 93ett gefeit moïïte, 30g er no^ ein ijJaar ißantoffeln aus bem SSünbel, legte fte an, banb fíe mit ben 0trumbfbänbern an ben gü^en feft, unb legte fid) alfo ins S3ett. Sa fagte ju ifim ein anberer SBanberSmann, ber in ber nämlid)en Sammer übernadjtet mar : „@uter greunb, marum tbut if)r baS ?" Sarauf ermiberte ber Srfte : f,2öegen ber iBorficbt. Senn idb biir ein* mal im Sraum in eine (SlaSfd^erbe getreten. @0 b«be id; im @d)Iaf foliée ©¿^merjen baöon embfunben, baß icf) um feinen ißreis mef^r barfuß fcblafen möcfite." (3. % §ebel, 1760-1826.) Saö ber 9J?onb erjitlít* §öre, maS ber SJionb mir er3ä^lt ! babe ben Sabettenofß3ier merben unb fid; 3um erfteu 2Jiale in feine fjräcbtigc Uniform fleiben feben ; icb b^ibe baS junge SRüb^en in ibrem ißrautftaat gefebeu unb bes gürften junge 53raut glüdlicb in ibrem if5ra(btan3uge ; aber nie b^be icb eine ©eligfeit erblidft, äbn* lieb ber eines fleinen bierjäbrigen 9}îabd)cns, melcbeS id) beute SIbenb beob* achtete, ©ie batte ein neues blaues Sleib erhalten unb einen neuen Üiofa^fput; ber ©taat mar eben angelegt unb 5itle riefen nacb Sid)t, benn beS iDîonbeS ©trablen, bie burd) baS genfter brangen, maren nitbt bell genug, gan3 anbere Siebter mußten angebrannt merben. Sa ftanb baS fleine 2)iäbtben, fteif mie eine ipubbe, bie Slrme ängftlicb loon bem iîleibe ab auSßrecienb, bie ginger meit anSeinanber gefbrei3t. D meid)e ©eligfeit ftrablte aus ibren Singen, ans ibrem gan3en ®erid)t ! „SDiorgen foUft Su in bem .bleibe ausgeben !" fagte bie 3Jîut' ter, unb bie kleine blicfte auf 3U ibrem §ut unb mieber uieber 311 ibrem bleibe unb lächelte feiig, „9Jhttter I" rief fte, „maS merben mobl bie fleinen Çûnb* eben beufen, menu fie mi^ in biefem ©taate erblicien ?" (§anS Sbu Sluberfen.) |)art A COMPBND OF GERMAN GRAMMAR; WITH AN INTRODUCTION UPON THE HISTORY, CHARACTERISTICS, EXTENT OE USE, AND DIALECTS OF THE GERMAN LANGUAGE. INTRODUCTION. 1. History of the German Language. § 1. Indo-European Historians are united in the opin- Languages. ion that the greater portion of the present inhabitants of Europe and Hindostán are descend¬ ed from one common stock, which had its early home in the western part of the Himalaya Mountains. From this mountain region, one portion of this original stock moved down to the rich plains of India, and developed the San¬ scrit lano-uage and literature, and the Buddhist religion, O O / c5 Another part went to Persia, and there developed the Bac- trian language and the Farsee religion. Successive migra¬ tions passed also to the west or northwest, and settled in the different parts of Europe. From these western migrations have sprung the chief groups of European nationalities and languages. The most important of these are the Chre- cian.^ Italic, Keltic,Teutonic., and Slavic. When classed together, the inhabitants of Europe and India are called the Indo-European branch of the human family. Their languages, termed the Indo-European lan¬ guages, are more perfectly developed, and are richer in lit¬ erary treasures, than any other languages in the world. Upon tlie study of them has been based essentially the very important modern science of Philology. § 2. Teutonic The Teutonic was one of the largest of Languages, tliese migrations. Moving through cen- ti-al Europe, it divided into three branches. One portion K 218 INTßODÜCTION. passed over to the Scandinavian peninsulas of Norway and Sweden, and of Denmark. Another part moved westerly and settled in Germany. The third division, composed of the Gothic tribes, passed through Poland and Russia down to the Black Sea, and then moved up the Danube. Urged by their restless spirit of conquest, the Goths pushed for¬ ward into Western and Southern Europe, and established two brilliant, but short-lived kingdoms upon the ruins of the Roman empire. That of the East Goths covered Italy, Switzerland, and parts of Bavaria, Austria, and European Turkey. That of the West Goths covered most of France and Spain. In the eighth century the Goths disappeared completely and finally from history. Of their language and literature, the only monuments extant are parts of the translation of the Bible, made by Bishop Ulfilas in the fourth century, a fragment of an almanac, and two short bills of sale. These meagre remains of the Gothic lan¬ guage furnished the starting-point for the comparative study of the Teutonic languages. The same principles of linguistic science that were ap¬ plied by the brothers Grimm and others to the Teutonic languages, were applied by Bopp and his colaborers to the wider field of the Indo-European languages. And thus has arisen, within the last fifty years, the new and interesting science of Comparative Language. By the ninth century after Christ, the great majority of the Scandinavian and German tribes had settled do-wn within their present dominions, and they have there devel¬ oped their separate nationalities, languages, and literatures. The Germans pressed back to the west of the River Rhine the Kelts, whom they found extending their dominion as far east as the present cities of Berlin and Yienna. The Germans were in turn pushed forward to the west by the Slavic tribes as far as to the River Elbe and the city of Coburg. A reflex movement afterward set in. The Ger¬ man language, which has already spread to the eastward §3.] HISTOKY OF THE GERMAN LANGUAGE. 219 as far as the Baltic provinces of Kussia, to the city of Bres¬ lau in the Prussian province of Silesia, and to Vienna in Austria, is still gaining ground over the Slavic dialects in the Prussian provinces of East and West Prussia, Posen, and Silesia, and in the Austrian provinces of Bohemia, Mo¬ ravia, and Galicia. On the other hand, the French lan¬ guage is gaining on the German in the regions bordering on the Ehine, and especially in the French provinces of Alsace and Flanders, and in Belgium. The Teutonic languages have thus three chief divisions : 1. The GOTHIC, which in the ninth centmy entirely disappeared from history. 2. The SCANDIAAVIAH, covering Sweden^ Norway^ Denmarh, Iceland^ and Ch^eerdand. 3. The GERMAISTIC, covering Germany ^Holland^ parts of Switzerland and Belyium, England^ the United States, British America, and Australia. § 3. Germanic Differences in the dialects of the Ger- Languages. man tribes are noticeable as early as when the Bomans first came in contact with them. As these tribes, still in the rudeness and ignorance of barbar¬ ism, became permanently settled in their present localities, and thus ceased to have much intercommunication, the dia¬ lectic differences in language were rapidly increased. And now almost every province, city, village, valley, and moun¬ tain district has its distinctive dialect. The difference be¬ tween the dialects has become so great, that a peasant from Bavaria or Wirtemberg, in passing through Hamburg or Bremen on his way to America, can only with the greatest difficulty converse with his fellow-emigmnt from Bremen, Hamburg, Holstein, Mecklenburg, or Pomerania. From this multitude of dialects have arisen several of the most cultivated languages of modern times, as the Ger¬ man, Dutch, and English languages. The German dialects 220 INTKODÜCnON. [§4-6. are divided, by a line nmning from Aix-la-Chapelle to Berlin, into Vj>per-German 2xA Lower-German dialects. § 4. Lower-German The Lower - German dialects (and Dialects. the languages that have sprung from them) occupy, or originally occupied, the low sandy plain wliich Kes between the German Ocean, Denmark, and the Baltic Sea on the north, and the line above indicated on the south. They extend also from the French province of Flanders on the west, to the Russian confines on the Baltic on the east. From Lower-German dialects have sprung the Dutch and the English languages. During the early Middle Ages the Friesau language, spo¬ ken on the coasts and in the islands ofi the shoi'es of Hol¬ land and Hanover, rose to a perfection nearly equal to that of any contemporaneous Teutonic language. But it has long since sunk back into mere local dialects. § Ö. Upper-German The Upper-German dialects occupy Dialects. the high mountainous region ex¬ tending from the line above indicated on the north, to the Alps on the south, and from the French province of Al¬ sace on the west, to Hungary and Poland on the east. § 6. The High-German In the fifteenth century com- Langnage. menced a chain of circumstances beginning with the translation of the Bible by Luther, which has resulted in the formation of a national German Lan¬ guage. This High - German language, more commonly called in English simply the Gentian Language, was based primarily on one of the dialects of "Saxony, in Central Germany, which was intermediate both in character and in geographical position between the Upper and the Lower German dialects. Both the Upper and the Lower German dialects have contributed to the grammatical features as well as to the vocabulary of the national language. § 7-9-] HISTORY OF TUE GERMAN LANGUAGE. 221 § 7. History of the German The history of the German Languag^e. language is divided into four chief periods ; the Pre-Historic, the Old-German^ the Mid¬ dle-German^ and the Neruo-German. § 8. Pre-Historic Period, The Pre-Historic period is so till 7th Century. named because no remains of the German literature, and but a few proper names in the language of that time, have been preserved. From tliis period, which ends with the seventh century after Christ, there are extant hterary works in several of the other Teu¬ tonic languages, as, the translation of the Bible into the Gothic language, made by Bishop Ulfilas (A.D. 360-388) ; the Anglo-Saxon poem, Beovulf^ the earliest Teutonic epic, evidently of heathen origin and composed at a very early date, though the earliest manuscript of it extant is from the eighth centnry ; and the Scandinavian Eddas, also of very early and unknown date, and of heathen origin. § 9. Old-German Period, The earliest literary remains in 7th to 11th Centuries. the German language that are extant consist almost entirely of translations of ecclesiasti¬ cal documents from the Latin and the Greek. The oldest of these date from the seventh century. They are of but little literary merit, but they are of great importance in studying the literary development of the German lan¬ guage. The oldest preserved German poem is the Song of Ilildehrandt (^ilbebranbtêi^ieb), dating from about the eighth c^ntur}\ It is written in a Lower-German dialect, but it contains many Upper-German words. The next im¬ portant poem is the ^^elianb, a religious poem of about the ninth century, written in the Old-Saxon dialect. The S3efd)rei6un6, composed in the eleventh century, is the old¬ est preserved German poem that does not treat of a relig¬ ious subject. Like all new languages, the German dialects were orig- 222 mTEODTICTION, inally very poor in words. They were, however, mucli richer than the modern German in grammatical forms. Puring the Old-German period, the dialects were enriched from the Latin and Greek by many words, whose use was made necessary by the introduction of Christianity and of a higher civilization. From this period date many such words, as (Sngel (Gr. ayjíXog), Äitc^e (Gr. KvpiaKï}), @d^rei6en (Lat. scribere), bíc^íen (Low-Lat. dictare)^ £íofíer (Lat. claua- trum), ^riefter (TrpeaßvTtpog). § 10. Middle-German Period, Before the Middle-Ger- 12tli to 16th Centuries. man period, no dialect had acquired any great predominance over the others. In the twelfth century, German commerce, manufactures, chival¬ ry, and poetry flourished most luxuriantly on the Lower Rhine, and especially in and around Flanders. At this time the Lower-German dialect of Flanders became the most cultivated in Germany. Soon, however, the Flemish poetry was eclipsed by the songs of the Minnesingers (SOîtnnefângcr) of Allemania and Suabia, on the Upper Rhine (A.D. 1150-1250). These were sung so widely through the courts of Germany that they almost made a national language from the dialects of Allemania and Suabia. With the last of the Crusades (A.D. 1250) the spirit of chivalry died out of Europe, and with it perished the poetry it had nourished. During this period of the Minnesingers arose the 9îoÎanbê^?ieb : the great German epic—the 91icí)eíungen? Sieb : and many other popular legends and romances. In the latter part of the thirteenth century, clubs of lyr¬ ic poets, called Master-singers (SOíeiflerfanger), were organ¬ ized in many parts of Germany. These had their terms and rules of membership, like the many trades-unions of the Middle Ages. The spirit of their poetry spread to the people. From this period date the great mass of tlie beau¬ tiful popular songs (SSolfb^Sicber) of Germany. Under the influence of these Master-singers, the vocabularies of many §11, 12.] HISTORY OF THE GERMAN LANGUAGE. 223 dialects were greatly enriclied, but still no one dialect gain¬ ed any great supremacy over the others. The universities that were established in Germany, on the model of those in Italy (the first in Prague, A.D. 1348) ; the commercial prosperity of the free cities, and the conse¬ quent flourishing condition of the fine and useful arts ; the conquest of Constantinople by the Turks (A.D. 1453), and the consequent dispersion of Greek scholars over all Eu¬ rope ; the invention of printing (A.D. 1450) ; the estab¬ lishing of newspapers (A.D. 1488) ; and, finally, the Refor¬ mation in the sixteenth century, were all additional influ¬ ences that greatly enriched the more cultivated dialects during the latter part of the Middle-German period, and prepared the way for the last, the New-German period. §11. Changes in the Language During the fifteenth cen- during the 15th Century. tury the poetic side of the language lost much in purity, beauty, pathos, and power. On the other hand, the dialects were greatly enriched by the addition of technical, scientific, metaphysical, and theo- logical terms, as was required by the advance of science, invention, commerce, and pulpit eloquence, of prose in pre¬ dominance over poetic literature, and by the increase in the general intelhgence of the people. § 12. New-German Period, The extensive circulation 16th Century till present time, throughout Germany of the translation of the Bible made by Luther (1522), and of the sermons and hymns published by Luther, Jonas, Speng¬ ler, and others, soon made the new High-German Lan¬ guage (§ 6) in which they were written very widely known in all the German states. Additional impetus was given to the High-German language by the publication in it of humorous and satirical poems and fables, collections of proverbs, works of history and of natural history, transla¬ tions of works of classical writers, and other books that 224 níTEODUCnON. were read largely by the people. Above all, a foundation was laid, by the publication of grammars and dictionaries, for a critical and scientific knowledge of the language. The High-German has added to its vocabulary from the local dialects (§ 6) and from ancient and modem foreign languages, and has become the sole language of literature, of ofiicial intercourse, and of polite society throughout all Germany. It has not, however, displaced any of the local dialects. These retain their vitality with great tenacity, especially among the peasantry. § 13. Foreign The use of Latin in scientific writings, in Influences. lectures at the universities, and as the lan¬ guage of intercourse among literary men of different na¬ tions during the Middle Ages, greatly retarded the develop¬ ment of the German as a cultivated language. The polit¬ ical predominance of France during the reign of Louis XIY., the spread of the French as the language of the court throughout all Europe, and the immigration from France of the banished Huguenots after the revocation of the Edict of Nantes, 1685, caused the introduction of many French words and idioms into the German language. At the beginning of the eighteenth century, some bold German scholars, as Gessner and Leibnitz, ventured upon the great innovation of lecturing in the universities, and publishing their scientific writings in the German language. A general movement soon set in to rescue the language from the corruptions that had crept in during the preceding century. This movement, so ably begun by Gessner, Leib¬ nitz, Opitz, and others, and afterwards so greatly strengtli- ened by the pure style in German prose and poetry of such writers as Klopstock, Wieland, and Lessing, received a great check by the second invasion into Germany of French man¬ ners, morals, literature, and philosophy, which was led on by Frederick the Great during the latter part of the eight¬ eenth century. § 14.] HISTORY OF THE GEEMAJ^ LANGUAGE. 225 The brilliant and numerous constellation of writers in every branch of literature, science, philosophy, and criti- cisin, which arose in Germany during the ñrst half of the present century, including such names as Goethe, Schiller, Schlegel, Humboldt, Fichte, Hegel, Kanke, Heyne, Grimm, etc., have made this the second classic jperiod of the Ger¬ man language and literature. The present purity, richness, and elegance of the language are also owing in no small de¬ gree to the fact that the German has displaced the French as the language of court, and the Latin as the language of scientific and philosophical literature. § Id. Grammatical Changes in the During its develop- Language during its History. ment from the sev¬ enth century after Christ till the present time, the German language has undergone many and very radical changes. In the Old-German there was a much more complete and complex system of grammatical forms in the inflection of the verb, noun, pronoun, and adjective than there is in the Hew-German. The Old-German had twenty-five^ and the Gothic forty endings in the inflection of the noun, while the Kew-Ger- man has but seven (e, ê, en, n, er, ern). There was an in¬ strumental case ; three forms for the three genders of the plural of the pronoun fte, they (m. sie,yi sio, n. sin) ; and three forms for the plural of the adjective (as, for fUnbe, Hind; m. plinte,yi plinto, n. plintu). The very extended conjugation of the verb gave the Old-German more musical beauty and more adaptation to poetry, while on the other hand the Old-German is infe¬ rior to the New-German in its capacity to express thought and scientific truth. While some radical words disap¬ peared during the Old and Middle - German periods, the vocabulary of the New-German has been enriched by many new derivatives and compounds of native words, and by the addition of many foreign words. K2 226 INTRODUCTION. § 15. History of the N"o critical work on the German Critical Study of the language appeared until several German Languag^e. centuries after grammare had been written upon some of the other languages of Europe, as the Italian, Spanish, French, and Anglo-Saxon. The first Ger¬ man grammar was written (1540) by Ickelsamer^ a contem¬ porary of Luther. The first treatise on German prosody was by Opitz (1624) ; the first German dictionary was by Ge- nisch (1616) ; and the first work on German synonyms was by Gottschedd (1758). The wrong principles of grammatical analysis, which had crept into the German grammars during the seven¬ teenth and eigiiteenth centuries, were checked and correct¬ ed hj Adelung, who&e great German grammar and diction¬ ary (1793-1801) marked an epoch in the critical study of the German language. It was reserved to the present cen¬ tury, however, to develop the true principles of compara¬ tive and historic study of language. And within the last fifty years have appeared the great comparative and histor¬ ical grammars of Grimm, Hey se, Becker, Kehr ein, Kelle, and others ; and the dictionaries of Hey se, Welgand, Meyer, Sanders, Schmitthenner, and Grimm. That of the broth¬ ers Grimm, when complete, "\^dll fill about tv^enty octavo volumes, and will be the most complete dictionary ever yet produced of any language. Many noted philologists in Ger¬ many and many learned societies are constantly adding, by their researches, to the knowledge of the German language and its dialects. During the history of the language, letters have been ex¬ changed, added, and dropped ; nouns have passed from one gender to another, and from one declension to another. Within the last fifty years uniformity has been introduced into the spelling, and the complicated construction of sen¬ tences, which formerly prevailed, has to a degree been ro placed by the original simplicity of German syntax. § 16.] HISTOBY OF THE GERMAN LANGUAGE. 227 § 16. Resume. "We thus find the history of the German language to be divided into four chief periods, with subdi¬ visions as follows ; 1. The PEE-HISTOEIC ^endingwiththeSev¬ enth Century ; with no remains of the language extant except a few proper names. 2. The OLD-GEEMANPEEIODj/ro?/?/ the Seventh to the Eleventh Century ; translations from Latin of legal and ecclesiastical documents, ^ilCebranbt^i Çiet, Reliant), 2öelti33ef^reibung. 3. The MIDDLE-GEEMAN PEEIOD,/rom the Tioelßh to the Sixteenth Century : 1. Flemish poetry, in the Twelßth Century. 2. Minnesingers, 9íoíant>^ ^ ?ieb, 91{ebeíungení= ?ieb, legends and romances; First Classical Pe¬ riod of the German language (1150-1250), 3. Master-singers, popular songs; decadence of poetry and prose (1250-1500). 4. The NEW-GEEMAN PEEIOD,/rom Luther's translation oftheBihle (1522) to the present time : 1. Sixteenth Century ; religious hymns, sermons, universities, public schools, printing ; introduc¬ tion of many technical terms in science, art, and pliilosophy. 2. Seventeenth Century ; decadence of the lan¬ guage through French influence. 3. Eighteenth Century; purifying of the lan¬ guage from foreign elements, and foundation of the language as it now exists ; German dis¬ places Latin in the universities. 4. Middle of the Eighteenth Century ; second de¬ cadence of the language under French influ ence. 6. Nineteenth Century: Adelung, Lessing, Goethe, Schiller, Grimm, Bopp,Humboldt, etc. ; Sec.ond Classical Period of the German language. 228 INTKODüCnON. [§17-19. 2. Characteristics of the German Language. § 17. First Impression. To most foreigners who go to Germany without an acquaintance with the language, and especially to those speaking English, French, Italian, or Spanish, the German language has an energetic but harsh sound. This is owing mostly to the great predominance of consonants over vowels, and to the frequent recurrence of the sharp diphthong ei, of the of gutturals^ and of double consonants. The energy of the language is greatly increased by the accent falling so frequently upon the fii'st syllable, as is the case even in very long words. The ca¬ dence and intonation of the sentences in the German are very different from the same in the English language. § 18. Fullness of A nearer acquaintance shows that the the Vocabulary. German language is extremely rich in words ; that, though full of energy and force, the language has also an abundance of words expressive of the most del¬ icate sentiments and emotions ; that it successfully express¬ es the deep feeling, the warm friendship and hospitality, the humor, wit, and pathos, and the brilliant and highly poetic imagination of the German people ; and that its vocabula¬ ry is sufficiently extensive to meet all the requirements of modem civilization. There is in the language an unlimited power of multi- pljdng words, by forming compounds from simple words. Indeed, the very great majority of German words can be traced back to a very small number of f)rimitive roots, na-' tive to the language itself. § 19. Purity from In the German language there are Foreign Elements, about forty thousand words of foreign origin, which are not so fully naturalized but tliat tlieir for- eignness is still felt. Many of these are but rarely used, and most of them may be replaced by words of German origiiL 20,] CHABACTERISTICS OF THE GEEMAJi LANGUAGE. 229 Some thousands of words, however, which ha\i0 been intro¬ duced since the seventh century (as fc^reiben, ^ferb, ßngei, ^ircfc), are so completely incorporated into the language that their foreign origin is now " no longer felt." Still there are but few languages in which foreign words are so little used as in the German. The rigidness with reference to the exclusion of foreign words, winch the so-called "pur¬ ists" introduced into the language in the early part of the present century, has of late very greatly relaxed. § 20. Comparison of The German grammar is far more German and English complicated than the English. The Grammar. definite article, and every adjective, or adjective pronoun, have six forms, while in English each has but one form. In the declension of the noun, seven terminations may be used (besides the umlaut on the radi¬ cal vowel), while in English there are but two terminations, and no modification of the radical vowel. Adjectives and adjective pronomis may be declined in three ways, or may be used without declension, while in English they are al¬ ways without declension. The gender of nouns is arbi¬ trary and not natural, many nouns that are neuter in En¬ glish being masculine, and others being feminine in Ger¬ man. In the conjugation of the verb, the radical vowel oft¬ en takes the umlaut. The past participle generally adds a prefix syllable, and always has a participial termination. In compound verbs, the prefix to the verb, which in En¬ glish can not be removed farther than to immediately after the object of the verb, in German may be placed at the close of even a long sentence. One or more long quali- fjdng clauses may intervene between the article and its noun. The order of sequence of auxiliary verbs is entire¬ ly reversed in conjunctive sentences. Prepositions and verbs govern three cases of the substantive instead of a single one, as in English. The object precedes tlie verb more frequently than in English. 230 INTEODÜCTION. [§21 The German has tlie advantage over the English lan¬ guage in several respects. The iniinitive of verbs is always indicated by a termination (-en). The past participle is marked by a termination (-t or -en), and generally also by a prefix syllable (ge-). The termination of the article, ad¬ jective, or adjective pronoun often indicates the gender, case, or number of the qualified noun. The additional cases (the Genitive and Dative) diminish the use of prepo¬ sitions. Somewhat more inversion in the position of words is allowed, giving rather more freedom of style in express¬ ing emphasis or shades of meaning. The freedom %vith which compound words are formed gives great terseness of expression. Owing to the method of forming compound words and the comparatively rare use of foreign words, there are but few, even of the longest wmrds, that can not be immediately undei'stood by persons of comparatively limited education. 3. Extent of Use of the Germ an Language. § 21. Extent of Use. The German language is the ver¬ nacular of the entire population of the smaller German states ; of all the inhabitants of Prussia, except the small Slavic-speaking population of Prussian Poland ; of about one fourth the inhabitants of Austria (being spoken mostly in the western part of that empire) ; of twm thirds the inhab¬ itants of Switzerland; of the province of Alsace in France; of the German colonists of Courland, and other pro\inces and cities in Russia ; and of the German immigrants in the United States, Brazil, and some other countries of the Old and New World. It is thus spoken by about seventy mil¬ lions of people. This is nearly equal to the English-speak- ing population of the entire world, and is greater than tlie number that speak any other language of European origin. These two, the German-speaking and tlie English-speaking branches of the Teutonic division of the Indo-European § 22,23.] GERMAJî DIALECTS. 231 portion of the human race, represent to-day more of the active, intellectual, political, religious, artistic, commercial, and industrial forces of the world than any other family of the nations of Europe or of the world. § 22. Literary Treasures. The number and value of the works in every branch of human learning in the German exceed by far those in any other language. The German belles-lettres literature rivals that of any other nation, Ger¬ many is the home of modem music and art-criticism. The German language is therefore studied, both as a means of education, of culture, and of enjojrment by the scholars, art¬ ists, educators, and travelers from all civilized lands. A knowledge of the language is also essential to success in many branches of domestic and foreign industry and com¬ merce. 4. German Dialects. § 23. Formation of Dialects. When the tribes of the Ger¬ man branch of the Teutonic family first settled in Ger¬ many, there were probably but few differences in their lan¬ guage. As these ignorant and almost barbarous tribes became permanently settled, intercommunication between them soon almost entirely ceased. In every province, city, secluded valley, or mountainous region, dialectic changes immediately began to be developed. Words rapidly be¬ came modified in pronunciation and in meaning. Kew words grew out of old roots. With some tribes words passed out of use. Different vowel and consonant sounds gained a predominance in certain regions. Grammatical forms were dropped, modified, or added. New words from foreign sources were added to one dialect without being adopted by its neighbors. Thus within a short time were formed á great number of dialects in all parts of Germany. Other influences, on the other hand, soon set in to retard the growth of dialects and to permanently fix their forms- 232 INTEODTTCnON. [§24. Tliere has, indeed, been less change in the character of the local dialects of Germany since the seventh century, than there has been in that of the cultivated High-German lan¬ guage since the sixteenth century. As we have seen above (§ 12), one of the Upper-German dialects in Saxony became the grammatical basis of the present German language (§ 6), which is spoken by the edu¬ cated classes in all parts of Germany. But the great mass of the people, and more especially of the peasantry, still speak their own local and provincial dialects. Even the educated classes are but rarely entirely free from provincial¬ isms, both in pronunciation, in the intonation of sentences, and in the use of words. The dialectic differences between the languages of the tribes of North and those of South Germany (which were indistinctly marked in the proper names handed down to us by Boman writers) have, in the course of time, been suf¬ ficiently developed to give a basis for a classification of the dialects of Germany. They are divided by a line running nearly from Aix-la- Chapelle to Berlin (§ 3) into two chief groups, the LPpper- German and the Lower-German dialects. § 24. Upper-German The dialects of Upper or South Dialects. Germany, extending south as far as the Alps, are, like all languages of mountainous districts, full of terse and short words and expressions. The words are apparently clipped off or contracted, and are strength¬ ened by doubling the consonants. The Upper-German dia¬ lects are fuller of consonants and of harsh guttural sounds than is the cultivated national language, and much more so than are the dialects of North Germany,or than.are any other of the Teutonic languages. They are thus both harsh to the ear and difficult of pronunciation. They are subdivided into four groups: the Bavaro- Austrian, the Suahian, i\\Q AUeinanian, and the Brankish. 25-27.] GEEMAN DIALECTS. 233 § 25. Lower-German The Lower-German or North-Ger- Dialects. man (called also the Platt-Deutsch) dialects, like all languages in low and plain countries, are softer to the ear, freer from consonants and gutturals, and fuller of vowels and liquids, than those of South Germany. The Lower-German dialects are in many respects inter¬ mediate in character, as they are in geographical position, between those of South Germany and those of Scandinavia. They are also subdivided into four chief groups: the Lower-Saxon, the Westjohalian, those of the Lower-Rhine, and the Friesan (§ 4). § 26. Characteristic In a large number of words where Differences. the Upper-German dialects have or g, fdb 0^ ci or c, the same words in the Lower- German dialects have t, Î, f, Ö, and 0» From the fre¬ quent recurrence of the t for the some writers call the Lower-German the ,,bat" dialects, and the Upper-German the dialects. § 27. Tables in For the purpose of presenting to Comparative Language, the eye at a glance a few of the verbal analogies upon which the theory of the relation¬ ship, and of the histoiy of the development of languages is to a large degree based, we give the three following tables, presenting : 1. Comparison of words in the Indo-European languages. 2. " " " Teutonic " 3. Illustrations of the historic development of words in the German language. The intricate and subtle laws of vocal changes, a knowl¬ edge of which is necessary for the complete understand¬ ing of these tables, must bo reserved for explanation in more advanced works. In these tables the vowels are pro¬ nounced as in German. 234 INTEODUCnON. English. Sanscrit. Father^ pitar, Mother^ matár, .Son, sûnis, Daughter, duhitar, Brother, bhratar, Sister, swasar, Sun, syona, Star, stri, Bay, dyu, Yesterday, liyas, Night, nakta, Month, mas, Eye, akslii. Knee, jano. Salt, Name, namaii. Bed, rôhita. To hear, bhri, Arn, ásmi. Art, ási. Is, asti. abam, Me, mâm. Thou, tvam. Thee, tvâm, One, e, Two, dwi, Three, tri. Six, shash, Ten, daçan, Over, upari, § 28. Comparison of Words in Bactrian. (Neic-Persían.) Greek. padar. TTarrip, mata. mâder. yhrvp. datár. doktarah. /}V/ / ovyaTi}p, bratar. brader. iíií)t^ongc.) § 33. 1. There are seven simple Vowel Sounds: Û, e (Ö), i, 0, II, 0, it* 2. And three Diphthongal Sounds : ci, au, cu. Bern. ]. All the seven vowels have both long and short sounds. Rem. 2. The three umlaut vowels 0, Ö, Ü C^lso written aC, OC, UC) represent distinct vowel sounds, not modifications of the vowels Û, 0, U. Rejn. 3. The ä and it first appeared in the eleventh and twelfth centuries : the Ö and äu (also CU) first appeared during the Middle-German period. § 34. The Vowel is long: •l.AVhen doubled in the same syllable: $aav, 0prec. 2. With silent in the same syllable : ©o^n, 9Î0tl^. 3. When it closes a syllable (especially if it is accented) : SSa'der, 3u^dt, ©ru'^ber, íc^^fen, ba, fo, bu, ju. 4. In radical syllables and monosyllables which end with a single consonant : ^ab'í^fuc^t, leê^^bar, írag^íbar ; er, wen, ber, bem, ben, bar, »or, für. Uxc. The vowel is short in ab, an, bt§, in, ntit, um, bon : ob, ^lin, weg ; e8, man, maS ; bag, beg, im, bom, jum ; bin, l^at. § 35. The Vowel is short : 1. When followed by a double consonant : fal'^len, bef^fer, mVAt, 3)lann, ®eit, foU, iRuH. 2. Or by two or more consonants : 33anb, bíí'íbenb, tfl. Exc. 1. The vowel is long: in the contracted words, SJZagb, 2)îonb, 2Jîon' tag, Dbfi, ©[tern, ^apft, 9îojî, Xroft, größt, t)ö(t)ft, nädjfi, troftcn, and müíl i from Mid.-Ger. mâget, mânôt, obez, ôstarûn, bâbest, groezest, hœhest, etc.). Exc. 2. Also in some contractions of verbs, as : i)abt (bnbct), Îebfl (lebet). Exc. 3. And before r in Slrt, îlrgt, S3arg, 33art, Onar^, jart ; (Svbe, §erbe, ^erb, ^ferb, 0d;mert ; S3orb ; ©ebnrt. § 36. Diphthongs are always long : gaufl, leijlen, feu^bt. § 37 Vowels belonging to different syllables must be pro¬ nounced separately: Qcenbct (gcicn^?bct), 5irmccn (^irime'^eu), íínic (SibniiC), Canaan (Äa'imtian), Biologie (Boíodoígíc'). L 242 OKTHOGEAPHY. [§38. § 38. Vowels and Diphthongs are soiuided thus ; 1. %, Ö. 1. The long sound, like a vn father : 33ater^ Îaê. 2. The short sound is shorter and sharper, but not as flat as in hat : baê, íaffcn, 9Jîann. 2. (S, t, has three sounds : 1. Long, like a in mate : 0c^nee, mt^X, fceit; bcm. 2. Short, like e in helt^ het : bellt, 53ett, beffer, beft, iHîens bung, 2;rennung. 3. It is almost suppressed in terminations and pre- flxes : ^aben, meine, ©c^neíber, gelobt, ©ebäube. 3. i» 1. The lo?ig soured, like ee in meet : SOííne, í^m. 2. The short sou7id, like i in bit : bitter, milce, in, ift. Rem. ^ is never doubled ; when followed by silent C, it has a long sound : bie, 2)tener, bier. But ie is short in oierjcbn, bicrjig, biertct. 4. Of 0* 1. The long sound, like o in 9iote : 9Ioti^, Soot. 2. The short sound is intermediate between that of o in zone and that of u in sun : 0onne, Solf, boppelt. 5. U, U. 1. The long sound, like oo in moot : Slîut^, tbun. 2. The short sound is intermediate between that of oo in pool, and that of in pull : ^ult, Sunb, furj. 6. sounds likeii(§ 38,9) : 5iegbpten, 0bntar, Rem. In all words of German origin, where J) was formerly used, as well as in foreign words that are fully naturalized, it is now replaced by i (§ 38,10). T. 'ñCf ä, sounds like C (§ 38, 2). Rem. Strictly speaking, a somewhat more open sound than that of a in mate, one intermediate between that of a in vary and that of e in very, is given to ä, and also to C in some words (as U)Cr, bcr, ©tbC J lebCIt, gcbCH, bCtCB, gegen, ©í^nee, etc.). 8. £)C, Ö {oh-umlaut), has no equivalent in English, Rem. It is like the French eu. Its sound may be approximated by pro¬ ducing a sound intermediate between that of a in bane and that of ur in burn : Sörfc, 33öbtnen, @(^ön, Söffe!, geiöfd;!. 9. Uc, ii {oo-umlaut), has no equivalent in English. Rem. It is like the French u. Thus @ilb may be approximately pro¬ nounced by placing the lips as if about to whistle, and then trying to siij seed; ©Üb, mübe, SDÍütter, ©d^Iüffel. § 38-40.] CONSONANTS. 243 10. oi (or ci), like i in might : mcttt, Sî^cin, Rem. Of the four forms ûi, Ût), Ct, which have contested for supremacy in the German language since the fourteenth century, the form Ci has come off the A-ictor. At present at) is dropped entirely; is used only in some proper names (§e^ne, 2)ie^er, etc.); and ûi is used iu but few words (as SKainj, ÍDÍaiíanb, Äaifer, 2)îat). 11. 5tii, au, like ou in mound : 2)2auer, iaut, 12. (Su, cu (or 5tcu, ÖU), like oi in moist : Scute, 9)îâufc. Rem. Dt, used only in a few proper names, has the same sound: SSroibau. § 39. In the development of all languages, vowels (and also the liquids, t, JO, n, C) are more subject to change than are consonants. 2. CONSONANTS. (tonfononien.) § 40. The Consonants are soimded as follows : 1. S3, fi» 1. Beginning a syllable, like h : 33íít>, S3rcít. 2. Ending a syllable, nearly like g? : 2)iefi, fialfi, afi, ofi. JSxc. It has the sound of b before 5 or b Î (Sbhe, ©elubbe. 2. Ç, C» 1. Before a, 0, or U (or before a consonant) is pronounced like k in king : Cato, actíy. 2. Before other vowels, like ts in mits : Siccro, 3. 2), b» 1. Beginning a syllable, like d : !Dom, brct, ba. 2. Ending a syllable, nearly like t : ^anb, iBab, 9íüb» Exc. The sound of b is given in bb t fibber, SBtbber. 4. 5', f (23,1), or ^fi, ^fi), likefmßne : feilt, grcunbfájaft ; öier, bason ; '^Jfiiiofopfiic. Reîn. 1. In foreign words t) sounds like v in ever: ©tlabe, Çtetoei, brato. Rein. 2. For a long time f and U were used interchangeably. Their usa has finally become settled, but in a purely arbitrary way ; the f largely pre¬ dominates. Rem. 3. The ^1) only occurs in words of Greek origin, as in and in a few German proper names, as : ?lboíp^ (or 'Üíbolf), 9íuboíp^ (f), äöc[t)?()a» ten. 5. (g, g. 1. Before a vowel, like g in gag : gcfien, dîrimb, 2. After a vowel (and not before u), see § 40,17. 244 OETHOGEAPHY. [§ 40. 6. 1^. Like h in hotose : Î)OC^, ergeben, 3o|>ann. Exc. The letter is silent ; (1) in the combination as in ; (2) after a vowel, as in ©oi)n, So^it ; (3) after r in 3î^ebc, Sirrin, 9î^abarbcr ; (4) after í in some proper names, as S3ô(Î^. 7. 3r L I^ike y in yoke : 3o^ûnn, 3ult, 3û1^L 3íinuar. 8. Uf Î. Like k in king : Äöntg, íommen, ^unît, £ôin. Rem, In 'tliose foreign words that have become fully naturalized, I has al¬ most entii-el}-- displaced c t ^unît, ^ongre^, Soin. 9. S, í, 9JÍ, nt, tt, 0, ÎÏ; have the same sound as 1, m, n,p, q in English : Samm^ Scimptnfel, 0ual. Rem. Before f, n takes the sound of ng (§ 40,16) ; 2)anî, bettîett, íiní?. 10. 9Î, r. 1. At the beginning of a syllable, r has a sound somewhat rougher and deeper in the throat than in English : runb, 9ÎÎ)ein. 2. In other positions it is trilled : ^rob, 55art; ber, irer. 11. 0, ê (if or I). 1. Like 5 in less : baê SDÎcffer, ift, baê. 2. But a single f before a vowel sounds like z in zone : (So^n, fte, ©Ufa, gelefen. 3. When before or t and at the beginning of a radi¬ cal syllable,! sounds like sh in shall : 0prce, 0icin, Berftefsen, aubgefprod)en. Rem. I. In former periods of the language, f, ff, and ^ were very largely interchanged. Even yet authorities vaiy in the use of ff and Rem. 2. The short ê is used at the end of syllables : 2)re§bcit, ^otSbatn, ia§, auêeinanber, S)onner§tag. 12. %f t (or 1. Like t in tone : ^on, SDÍutí). 2. Like ts in mils, in final itial, ^tient, not pre¬ ceded by Í ; Sefticn, Quotient. Rem. 1. The sound of t is preserved when the accent is on the tt, as in ®emoiratie, partie, 3JíiIítabeS. Rem. 2. Also when tt is preceded by f: Ouefitcu', SSaflton'. Rem. 8. In the histoiy of the language there have been many interchanges between t, b, and t^. Some modern writers, called " purists,'' reject the t& entirely, and write tcU (Sbeil), tun (Xbun). 13. 825, in. Like V in vine: Söcin, 2öicn, jwct, ttJarum. Rern. SB, after 0, occurring in a few proper names, is silent: ^lanîotn. § 40-43.] CONSONANTS. 245 14. K, ^ Like X in hox : Soror; ©rcmpel, ïerrcê, -^ere, fir. Rem. The letter y is used mostly in words of foreign origin. 1^- 3 ($ and 33). Like ts inßts ; pu^en, ©fÍ33e. Rem. The use of 3, 33 has vai-ied greatly in the different periods of the language. 16. 9îg, ng. Like nç in sing : ftngeit, finger, brangcn. Rem. A slight k sound is given after ng when it follows a vowel : gîmtg (rany*^), Slngft {ang^'st). IT. á)f and g have two guttural sounds : 1. ú) (and g, when ending a syllable), after û, 0, U, or ÛU, have a rough aspirate sound, formed deeper in the throat and much stronger than that of A in hojpe : (liolih) high ; {toohh), cloth; î!ag {tahh), day ; machen {ma^-hhen), to mahe. 2. After other letters (and in the diminutive sylla¬ ble ^cn), they have a softer sound, made higher in the palate, and inclining to that of sh in shall: tc^ (îA®^), I; rec^t {reh^H), right; Äinb''i=d[}en {kind'- h^^en), a child ; SlÍÜlt^í^ett {mün'-h^^eri)., Munich ; Hhíítg (bil'lih^% 3eug {tsoyh^^), 53erg (J^rA®^). Rem. 1. In words of Greek origin, áf sounds like k: S()Or, choir. Rem. 2. Also before § in the same radical syllable, like k: SBac^â, wax. § 41. Many foreign words retain their original pro¬ nunciation, as : SSureau, ^alatê, iDíajor, ©ouöerneur, Obícu, 5iböeri>, from the French ; Síoafíkef, (îlub, from the English ; 0olo, Xtio, from the Italian. Rem. In a few words the foreign pronunciation is retained in only a part of the word : ^enjiori {pori"3-si-dne). § 42. The pronunciation of the educated classes and in polite circles in the city of Berlin is at present the standard of good pronunciation throughout Germany. The above rules are given in accordance with the usages now prevailing in Berlin. 3. DIYISION OF SYLLABLES, (©^ibcntrcnnung.) § 43. In Pronouncing, the following laws prevail ; 246 ORTHOGRAPHY. [§ 43-45. 1. In simple words : (1.) A single consonant, between two vowels, is pronounced with the last vowel, as in : SSa'iter, 53ru'iber, le'^ben, mei'^ner, gu'^ten. (2.) Of two or more consonants, the first is pronounced with the preceding, and the remainder with the following vowel : fc[)im''ipfen, !Deub:ifd)c. 2. In derivative words, prefixes, and suffixes not begin¬ ning with a vowel, are pronounced in separate sylla= bles: ©eíftúííb ättgfb^ltc^, fcalb'ífiint; ©íanb'^^afbígífeít, but gürf'ítín, Älebibung, garbeíieíh ®ü'?íe. 3. The parts of compound words are pronounced sepa¬ rately : auê^etrtiûn'ber, 2)Dn'ner^?tag, fort'^l^eben, ^er^umh Rem. Some writers mark the division of syllables according to the pro¬ nunciation, others according to the roots of words. The latter method is more convenient in paradigms : íteb'»en, mein'=er, gut'^er, gut'^e, breit'^eft. 4. ACCENT. (Siccent) §44. The Primary Accent is on the radical syllable of simple words, whether primitive or derivative ; inflectional endings, and most prefixes and sufiixes (§ 45,3, Hem), are imaccented: lieb'^cn, metn^^en, lieb'dic^eren, 3Sa^iter, ©Ciftalf, gediebt'^cften, geifa^rMic^ften. Exc. The accent is not on the radical syllable in leben'=big. § 45. In Compound Words, the radical syllable of the most emphatic component takes the primary accent : 1. The first or modify ing word of compound nouns and adjectives, and of separable compound verbs, talces the primary accent : Äauf ^mann, 33or'ífc^ríft, gelb-'^rot^, gcí;en, ein^^fül^ren, um^er'?geí;en, mi^'^írauen. Exc. 1. The nouns Siorhuefi', 0ilbcjl', etc. Exc. 2. The adjectives tooIltom'»men,notí;n?en'»btg, trabvbaf4ig,ícibbaf:>tig, barm:^er'<^3tg, gíü(ííe'4tg, leibei'^gcn; aUiuei'^fe, aUmäcb'4ig, gvo{jmädj'»tig, bo(bab'«eítg (and some other titular epithets). § 45-48.] ACCENTS. 247 2. The accent is on the last syllable of admrlys com¬ pounded with prepositions, and of those compounded with l^cr, att, and öici : woöon', womit', baoon'; ein', ^erauê', ooUauf, wohlan', allein', oieíleíd^f, oíelme^r'. 3. Inseparable prefixes are not accented : bewet'ífen, oer^ fte^'íen, mi^fal'den, Unter^al'ítung. Exc. 1. Sliit'iIiÇ, and Sínt'ítrort (and its compounds). Eic. 2. AU words compounded with crj^ and Jltí^ and many of those com¬ pounded with inipî and 1111^: Ur'=ía¿^e, nti^'í^anbeín, un'^gietc^ (but mipfalelen, uneub'^Itd;, etc.). Rem. 1. Some long words, however, have several subordinate accents; ^rcunb'iíhaftíidjíeit'en, ^•cu'cr=berficí^'erun9é=geíeE'í¿^alt, StaatÔ'd^uI'ben^irgungêiÎafîcn^uc^'balter (§ 5l,iîe7K. l). Rem. 2. Such very long words as the last are only tolerated in ofiScial lan¬ guage, and even there they had better be avoided. § 46. Most Foreign Words retain their original accent. This is generally on the last syllable in words from 1. The French: Dffijier', douöert', SlîuP', SOîoiejlât'. 2. The Latin and Greek : S'íaíur', ©tubent', 2!l^eoíogtc'. Rem. 1. The foreign terminations sCt, dCt, dft, drClt (tCrCH), =ttr, '0% etc., take the primary accent, whether in words of German or in those of for¬ eign origin; gävbcrei', Sarbter', SSiitmift', )3oU'ren, ©lafur', 3Jîoraft'. Rem. 2. The accent is changed in the inflection, and in the derivatives of some foreign words : Sof^tor (Softo'^reit), ©^araî'4er (©l)araîte'ire), 3}îufif' tnufiîa'ilifd;), ®ramma'4ií (grammatiîa'^iic^). Ohs. Differences in the position of the accent upon words, and in the position of emphatic words in sentences, are among the chief causes of the great difference existing be¬ tween the intonation and the cadence of the English and of the German languages. 5. CAPITAL LETTEKS. (©rofjc Sinfûnoëiiudiîtûbcn.) § 47. Capital Letters are used as initials to : 1. All Aiouns, other parts of speech used as nouns, and nouns used adverbially: ber 3}îani1, bie ©tabt,bû0 ^auê; ber ©Ute, baê Sefen ; Slîorgen^, Sibenbê, SSormitíag^. 248 OETHOGEAPHY. [§ 48-49. 2. The Indefinite Pronouns : Scntanb, S^iemanb, mann ; also and S'îii^tê, when not before nouiu or adjectives ; and Siniße, SDíanc^cr, S3iele, when used substantively. 3. The Numeral Œin, when used in contrast to 5inbcr. 4. The Absolute Possessives : ber 3)íeíníge, baê 3(>riöf/ bíe SDíeímgen, bie ©einigen, etc. 5. Adjectives^ derived from proper names of persons oi cities : bie Äantif^e ^^ilofop^ie, ber Kölner 2)om. Rem. Other proper adjectives do not begin with capital letters : bie bcutfc^t 0))rad;e, ber beutl'dje 33unb, eine amerifanifc^e 3eithh3- 6. COMPAEISOK OF GERMAIÍÍ ARD ENGLISH WORDS. § 48. Great changes have taken place in the words of the German and English languages during the fourteen centuries especially that have passed since their se23ara- tion. 1. A few words only have the same radical form, or, with different spelling, are pronounced alike, as : 2}îann, man. §anb, hand. ®ra§, grass. ®ía8, glass. 9tmg, ring, i^tnger, finger, junger, hunger. $uf, hoof. §au8, house. 2)îau8, mouse. Braim, brown, fauer, sour, tnarin, warm, bitter, bitter, blinb, blind, tniib, mild. iniib, wild, fein, fine, mein, mine, in, in. bei, by. dfo, also, iper, here, i^ier, sheer. faU^en, to fall, bangten, to hang, binb^en, to bind, finb^en, to find, bring^en, to bring, fing^eu, to sing, finbeit, to sink, jpinnicn, to spin. 2. The following examples illustrate tlie most striking variations in the development of letters and of soimds : ait, old. ^alte, fold. $alt, hold, îalt, cold. ^adfe, hoe. (1.) 0. ®rab, grave. 9îabe, raven. 0tlabe, slave. Änabe (knave). place. Ärabn,crane, toar, was. §aar, hair, ^aar, pair. ad;t, eight. j^rad;t, freight. 2íaí, eel. SOÍaí;!, meal. @taí;í, steel. 0aat, seed. ©cbaaf, sheep. @(bial, sleep, iliabei, needle, liar, clear, ^anf, hemp, ©aft, guest, toaren, were. Äamin, comb. iRafe, nose, ^aîen, hook. ®an8, goosa œMPARISON OF GERMAN AND ENGLISH WORDS. 240 (2.) e, 0. (3.) t, tc. Siechen, rake. Siene, bee. ' breiten, break. mir, we. ^ SSeg, way. gilj, felt. 5 2en3, lance. 0innc, sense. ' 2Jierf, mark. iîirfcbe, cherry. í ^crj, heart. ijSinfeí, pencil. - 0d^mer5 (smart). fieben, seven. fterben (starve). irren, err. ' fcbtnccfen (smack). icb, I. feft, fist. liegen, lie. fett, fat. lieben, love. feben, see. fd^ieben, shove. ftebien, steal. fieben, sift. effen, eat. fließen, to shoot. meffen, mete. fprießen, sprout. f^elb, field. fpielen, play. jeipt, ten. Äircbe, church. Riffen, cushion. geben, give. leben, live. (4.) b, b. benfen, think. fÇlode, flake. fenten, sink. groß, great. ißecb, pitch. rob, raw. fecb3, six. 0trob, straw. mellen, milk. Socbter, daughter. 1 ledfen, lick. Obli'f ' geben, go. Sobne, bean. i (ne), no. 9ioib, need. 0cbnee, snow. rotb, red. 0eeie, soul. 33rob, bread. 0cbmert, sword. bocb, high. f^clten, scold. 9îoggen, rye. Älee, clover. 0ommer,summer. SSertb, worth. 3)onner, thunder. SBer, who. 0onne, sun. 9icgel, rule. 0obn, son. Äräbe, crow. Poll, full. mäben, mow. 0f>orn, spur. fäben, sow. boren, hear. fbäben, spy. fd^mören, swear. märe, were. jmölf, twelve. läßt, lets. Äönig, king. SSäter, fathers. SDÎbrtel, mortar. fügen, saw. Del, oil. Sßäffcr, waters. SJÎbrber, murderer. (5.) Ü. lügen, lie. §üget, hill. 2Jiü^íe, mill. ©Üllbc, sin. gtüt^en, glow, áüftc, coast, gürft (first), brüten, brood, íjübíen, hop. SBücbfe, box. @üb, south. ^üí)e, cows. Srii^e, broth. (6.)ttu. gran, gray, ïaub, leaf, taub, deaf. Çaufe, heap, @aum, seam. 2auc^, leek. §aubt, head, ^uge, eye. Sraut, bride. fc^Iau, sly. gauft, fist. Sau, tow. Saube, dove. 9îauni, room, blau, blue. S()au, dew. (lauen, hew. (7.) ei. SDÎeifter, master, beil ! hail ! |)retfen, praise, bret, three, fret, free. bleid;en, bleach, ipeid;, weak, feilen, heal. SSeijen, wheat, âttjetg, twig, etn, one. aïïetn, alone, betbe, both, eigen, own. @tc^e, oak. spoke. Kleiber, clothes. @cift, ghost. ,r (ghastly), tf (gas), leiten, loan, meift, most. Sîeibe, row. 0eife, soap, reiben, rub. jtnei, two. L 2 250 COMPAEISON OF GERMAN AND ENGLISH WORDS. (8.) cu, ÖU. §eu, hay. geucr, fire, neun, nine, ^reunb, friend, neu, new. [treuen, strew, treu, true, ^reu^eu, Prussia, áíreuj, cross. (Sule, owl. iieulen, howl. 3}îâufe, mice. (9.) i- iiaheu, to have, liehen, to heave. íeBeu, to live, ehen, even. 9îaBe, raven, SauBe, dove. S3iBer, beaver. ííteBeit, cleave. fieBen, seven. @teB, sieve. cBen, over. OraB. grave. 2)ieB, thief. SeBen, life. fieBen, sift. ISetB (wife). BdjiualBe, swallow S3true, pear. ÍÍÍilJBe, cliff. Stippe, rib. ©toppei, stubble, ^aupt, head. (10.) 0. ber, bie, baS, the. biefe, these, bu,thou, bein, thine, bann,then, benn, than. Srnber, brother. Çeber, feather. Seber, leather, fieben, seethe. 2)aumen, thumb, benten, think. Sing, thing. 2)orn, thorn, brejcpen, thresh, bret, three, burcp, through. Beibe, both, ©üb, south. (Svbe, earth. ÍBürbe, worth. (ll.)f,ii,tiS. ^cpaaf, sheep, ©cpiaf, sleep, ©^tff, ship. §anf, hemp, reit, ripe. í)eífen, help, ©aft, sap. fcparf, sharp, auf, up. offen, open, fünf, five. Ofen, oven, bier, four. Bebor, before, bergeffen, forget. (Sppeu, i-vy. (12.) 0. Sag, day. tnag, may. lag, lay. fagen, say. Singe, eye. Stoggen, rye. fliege, fly. §onig, honey, 'ifjfennig (penny). @avn, yarn. gelB, yellow, geftern, yesterday. fplagen (slay). Çagel, hail. Siagel, nail, ©egel, sail, glegel, flail. Stegen, rain, ©iegel, seal. Siegel, rule. §ügel, hill, fügen, to saw. gleicp, like, genug, enough, getbapr, aware, ¿eig, dough, ^fiug, plough. iBogen, bow. Borgen, borrow, morgen, morrow, forgen, sorrow, folgen, follow. Saig, bellows, ©algen, gaUows. ©lode, elock. nagen, gnaw. (13.) S. mann, when, mer, who. meicf)e, which, mie, how. mo, where, metí (while), met^, white. SSeijen, wheat, meber (whether). (14.) i. fa, yes. OaBr, year. 8od;, yoke. 8aîoB, Jacob, fnng, young. Sacie, jacket. Sopann, John. Sube, Jew. Sunt, June. Suno, Juno. Suit, July. Sumel, jewel. SJtajor, major. (15.)i,(f,q. fan en, chew, ^üfe, cheese. Äinn, chin. Äinb, child. Äifte, chest, ííircpe, church. Äirfcpe, cherry, ©türfe, starch, ©t'labe, slave. SDiart, marrow, ©cfe (edge). §ecfe, hedge. Srü(íe, bridge. Sinfer, sugar. OueEe (well). (16.) I. al§, as. fold;, such, melcp, which. Sltörtel, mortar. Seffel, fetter. ©üBel, sabre. SmiEing, twin. ©id;el, acorn. fcpleid;en, sneak. (17.) in. Samm, lamb, flimmen, climb. Äamnt, comb. S)anmen, thumh ©cpirm, screen. (18.) n. Scfen, broom. Sllaun, alum, feiten, seldom. Orben, order. 2)cgcn, dagger. COMPAEISON OF GERMAN AND ENGLISH WORDS. 251 0tern, star, fern, far. ¿pern, spur. S?ivnc, pear. 53iene, bee. ©an?, goose. 3¿ibn, tooth, fünf, five, aiibcr, other. Sinb, child. (19.) r. iuren (choose), frieren, freeze, berlieren, lose. n>ir, we. tver, who. marten, wait, mar, was. fpred)en, speak, beifer, hoarse. auë, out. effen, eat. meffen, mete, baffen, hate, laffen, let. grog, great, SooS, lot. gug, foot. 9iug, nut. füg, sweet. (Sifen, iron. $afe, hare, niefen, sneeze, trafen, scratch. (21.)tib. 2:ag, day. jEraum, dream. i£od;ter, daughter, tobt, dead. dollar. 2[;au, dew. tbun, do. Íbüre, door, tbeuer, dear. Sett, bed. Sint, blood. S3art, beard. SOinti;, mood. ÇÎittl), flood. 0cbuiter, shoulder leiten, lead, reiten, ride, gleiten, glide. SSater, father. SJÎntter, mother, tauen, thaw, taufenb, thousand. Slntmort, answer. (22.) hJ. ©eminn, gain. 'Sd^mefter, sister. (23.) h ft- jabm, tame. 3abn, tooth, jebn, ten. 3inn, tin. Boh, toll. JU, to, too. 3mei, two. gmanjig, twenty. gil3, felt. §erg, heart. 0al:, salt. Sa^e, cat. 5îi^, kid. 2)u^enb, dozen. Sreu^, cross. i|31a^, place. Bucfer, sugar. (24.) ift. Síat^t, night. 9Día(í;t, might. leid)t, light. Sic^t, light. fed;ten, fight. kne(bt (knight), j^rad^t, freight, machen, make. bred;en, brake, fud^en, seek. 33ucb, book, gleid), like, ííud^en, cake. Sercbe, larL fed;ö, six. gud;^, fox. Ocpô, ox. §lad;g, flax. 2Bad;ê, wax. Seid;, ditch, bnrdb, through, lachen, laugh, manch, many. (25.) lift. 0(hmieb, smith, fchmal, small. 0tein, stone. 0d;mert, sword, grof^, frog. ilatfd;en, clap. (26.) ff. Slpfel, apple, hüpfen, hop. Supfer, copper. Opfer, offering, ipfeffer, pepper, pfeife, pipe, 'ipgrfid;, peach, ^flanje, plant. Pflaume, plum. Üßflafter, plaster, pflüden, pluck, ipflug, plow. 3. In a few cases, foreign words retain their original forms, or have developed, in both languages, into the same modification of form : Hob. sâraph, 0e'raph, seraph. Gr. periojpov, fOîetCOV', meMor. Lat. studens, 0tubent', student. Lat. natio, Low L. parcus, Ital. solo, 4. More usually the forms vary : Gr. àyyiWoç, Lat. Johannes, " Colonia, Low L. missa, ©ngel, (tohann, iîëln, ajîeffe. anpel. .John. Cologne, mass. Arab, masjid, " laimun, Pers. mûmijà. Ind. tabaco, Station', ^ar!, 0olo, SRofd^ce', Simo'ne, Slhi'mic, Sa'bat, nation. park. solo. mosque, lemon, mummy, tobacco. ETYMOLOGY AND SYNTAX. (gt^ittologic una S^ntay.) § 49. Etymology treats, (1.) Of the origin, development, changes, decay, and death of words and grammatical forms. (2.) Of tlie classification of words mio ^arts of speech, and of the changes words undergo hy inflection. (3.) As to their origin, words osa primitive or derivative. As to composition, words are simple or compound. 1. Primitive or radical words are either: 1, Original root-words, as : ic^, bu, etlt, tit, gut, gro^, S3ttC^C. 2. Or they have added the verbal ending CU : ^ab'^Ctt, bmb'^etl, Rem. By far the greater number of primitive words are verbs. 2. Derivative words are formed from primitive words: 1. By modifying the original root : (üinÖsetl), Sattb, Suttb. 2. By adding prefixes and suffixes : ( » „ ), SSiltber, Stltbe, SÜItbeí, ©ebtitbe, Sanbe, Säitb^en, bänbig, bäitbtgcn, ^änbiger, S3änbtguttg, büitbeln, bünbig, SSünbigieit, ^Bünbntß. Re?n. Many derivative words, the derivation of which is "no longer felt," are usually called primitive words, as : S3îattlt, from Old-German mënan (or Gothic minan), to think; rotb, from Sanscrit rudhira, blood; Del, from Latin oleum, oil; ^0^1, from Italian cavolo, cabbage. § 50. Compound words are formed by joining two or more simple (or single) words into one word. gebenttelfer, Penknife. S3autlttt»otle, Cotton. Sluêge^eit, To go out. ©tattfinben, To take place. §ttnmelbiatt, Blue as the sky. Oelbrot^, • Orange-colored. SBotttil ? Wherewith ? iBtelíeid;t, Perhaps. Rem. 1, Sometimes very long compound words are formed : ©taatêic^uibcnttigitngêfalfenbuc^^aiter, The keeper of account of the fund devoted to the payment of the national debt (§ 15, 3, Rem. 2). Rem. 2. Two or more compound words of the same kind may be united by a hyphen : gfib<, ©avteiti Itnb 5í(íerbatt, Drainage, horticidture, and agriculture. Rem, 3. Parts of long words are often united by hyphens : ff£ltetí35er[id;crungSí®efetííd;aft, Fire Insurance Comjiauy. Rem. 4. Compound words are much more largely used in German than in English. New combinations may be formed indefinitclv. 51-54,] THE ARTICLE. 253 § 51. There are ten parts of speech in German : 1. Flexible : the Article, Noun, Adjective, Numeral, Pronoun, Verb. 2. Infiexible: the Ab verb. Preposition, Conjunction, Interjection. § 52 Syntax treats of the power certain words or parts of speech have in determining the forms and position of other words, or pai-ts of speech. THE ARTICLE. (Scr SlrtiM.) § 53. In all languages where the Article exists, the Def inite Article is derived from a Demonstrative Pronoun : the Indefinite Article is derived from the Numeral One. In German there is no difference between the forms : 1. Of the Def. Article bci, and the Dem. Pron. bCt. 2. Or of the Indef. Article Ctîî, and the Numeral citî. Rem. The Article is distinguished from the Pronoun or Numeral : (1.) By never receiving a strong emphasis. (2.) By never being used tvithout a noun. § 54. Declension of the Article : 1. Definite, bcr, the. SINGULAR. PLURAL. Masc. Fern. Neut. All Gen. Norn, bcr, tie, bo§. bic. Gen. bcê, bcr, bcS. bcr. Dat. bcm, bcr, bcm. ben. Acc. ben, bie, boé. bic. 2. Indefinite, cilt, a, an. SINGULAR. Masc. ein, cin=cê, e{n=cin, ctHiCn, Fem. ctn=c, einher, ciHíCe, cin^c, Neuf. ein. cin^cê. cin=cm. ein. Rem. 1. The vowel is short in ba6, b£8, and long in ber, bent, ben. Rem. 2. When no obscurity of meaning or harshness of sounds is thereby produced, the following contractions of prepositions with the definite article are allowable {Lesson X., 2) : 1. With Dat. sing.(?n. and «.)bcnt: am, betm,^interm,im, bDm,gnm, unterm (an bent, bet bent, i;inter bent, in bent, toon bcm, ju bem, unter bent). 2. With Dat. sing, (/em.) bCt t jur (ju ber). 3. With Acc. " (neut.) bttö : anS, ant«, burd)«, fürS, in«, um« (an bc^ auf bas, burc^ bas, für bas, in bas, um bas). 254 SXNTAX OF THE ARTICLE. [§ 55. § 55. Syntax of the Article. The following are some of the most important points in which the German varies from the English in the use of the Article. 1. The Deßnite Article is employed : 1. Before nouns used in a general or abstract sense: 2)cr SWenfci? tft ftevBIid;, Man is mortal. S)ie ©efc^ic^te bcr ííunft, The history of art. Saê ©olb i[t îofthar, Gold is costly. 2. Before some individual concrete nouns : 2)aS grüí)[tü(í i[t fertig, Breakfast is ready. Tîad; bcm Sihenbeffeu, After supper. 3. When a proper name, or the name of a division of time, is preceded by an adjective : Sag fefte iOîagbeburg, Strong Magdeburg. S)CC hörige 2Jîai toar íaít, Last May was cold. 4. Before feminine geographical names : Sic 0d)toeij ift fef)r fd;i5n, Switzerland is very beautiful. iBaren 0ie in bcr Süríei? Have you been in Turkey? 5. Before nouns of number, weight, and measure (while in English the Indefinite Article would be used) : 3thei Sfialer bag ipfunb, Two dollars a pound. üSierntal bit äöodje, Four times a week. Rem. \. The Definite Article is often used where in English the Personal Pronoun would be employed : 2)îit bCltl $ut in bcr §anb, With his hat in his hand. Rem. 2. The dative of the definite article, contracted with the preposition is used to express promotion or election to ofllce or rank : Sr tnar pitt ißräfibenten gelüä^lt, He was elected President. 2. The Dßinite Article is omitted : 1. Before many legal terms and some words in ordinary life: Stjjjjellant, 33cîtagter fagt— The plaintiff, the defendant says— Ueberhringer biefeê, The bearer of this. 2. Before names of the points of the compass : 0ie fegelten gegen Tîorben, They sailed towards the north. 3. The Article must be added if the case of the noun cannot be deter mined without it : '®te 9îed;te bcr grauen, The rights of women. 4. With two or more nouns of different genders or numbers, the Article must be repeated : 2)Ct iSruber nnb biC 0d;weftcr, The brother and sister. § 56, 57.] THE NOUN. 255 THE NOUN. i2)aô liauíJtroort) § 56. Nearly all Nouns may be traced back to verbal roots (§ 49,1,Rem.). With the exception of the very small number that are radical words, German nouns ara formed : ]. B)' the modification of a verbal root (§ 48, 2,1). 2. By adding prefixes or suifixes to other words (§ 57,58). 3. By compounding nouns with other words (§ 58). Rem. The formation, inflection, and syntax of the German are far more complicated than those of the English noun. On the other hand, as the German nouns are mostly formed from native roots, they are more easily understood than English noims, which are so largely imported from foreign languages. § 57. In forming Derivative Nouns, the chief suffixes are .• 1. Those that form concrete nouns, tfjcn, CÏ, cr, tit, ling : 1. and 4cin—with umlaut to the radical A owel, where possible —form diminutive nouns : §äu§ci)en, a little house. 93aá;íetn, a small brook. 2)íüttercí^en, dear mother. ©(^tnefterc^en, dear sister. 2. îCÎ usually denotes material instruments : §ehei, a lever (from teBen, to heave, lift). 2)ecíeí, a cover (from bcdett, to cover). 3. îCr denotes (1) male persons: §ef)rer, a teacher, ©äni^cr, a singer, SBitttner, a widower, ©d^tnctjcr, a Swiss. (2) animals : ©l^erber, a sparrow-hawk, ©d;rötcr, a beetle. (3) instruments: Sourer, an auger, SBetícr, an alarm clock. 4. îtlt (or îtnit) forms feminine from masculine nouns : Äbntg, a king. Königin, a queen. Scbrer, a male teacher. Setrerin, a female teacher. ©c^tneijcr, a Swiss. 0ci;tt»etjcvin, a Swiss lady. 5. 4inn modifies the meaning of nouns, often indicating dependence, contempt, or low valtiation : Sitngling, a youngster. 9)îiet()itng, a hireling. Se^irling, an apprentice. ®itl;terUng, a poetaster. 256 THE NOUN. [§ 67. 2. Suffixes forming mostly abstract nouns, C, ci (rcí), l^cit (îcit), fol, t^um, ung : 1. iC (with umlaut to radical vowel) forms nouns from adjectives; Oüte, goodness, §ö()e, height, Säuge, length, iîtefe, depth. 2. :ti (or srci), in nouns formed from verbs, denotes a repeated or con¬ tinued action, often with the idea of contempt : ©c^tueic^elei, flattery, @)>teteret, foohsh sport. 8. î5tit(or ífCtí) forms (1) abstract nouns, from adjectives or participles ; 0c^önf)eit, beauty, ©etuanb^eit, dexterity, Saníbaríeit, thankfulness • (2) concrete nouns, from adjectives : Äleinigfeit, trifle ; (3) nouns, from personal nouns : @ott()ett, Godhead, Äillb^eit, childhood. 4. íllij) denotes (1) condition or completion of a quality or action: gin« fterniß, darkness, ^euutni^, knowledge, iBer()üítnt§, relation ; (2) in concrete nouns, the accomplishing agent or the accomplished object : ©efängnt^, prison, SBerjctd?ni§, catalogue. 5. ífaí denotes (1) a condition : Strübfaí, sadness, @d;i(ífaí,fate; (2) the cause of a condition : @^eufai, a monster (causing hon-or). 6. denotes (1) relationship or condition of persons : friendship, 53erettic^aft, readiness ; (2) a collection of persons of a certain grade or calling: 9îttterfd^aft, knighthood, ^auemfc^aft, peasantry ; (8) a collection of things of the same kind : @erätbi(i)aft, tools ; (4) collective appellations of places : Ortfd^aft, neighborhood. 7. 4^11111, (0 fo adjective or verbal roots, denotes quality or condition, or that to Avhich this quality adheres : 9îetd;t^unt, richness or riches, S?aá;Stí;um, growth, §etítgt^um, sanctuary; (2) to personal nouns, it denotes condition, office, or dominion : ^aifcrt^um, empire. 8. iltng, (1) denotes condition, what produces a condition, or a thing put into a certain condition: Trennung,dmsion, 2Jîtfd)ung, mixt¬ ure; (2) forms collective nouns : SSalbuug,forest, Metbuiig, clothing. 3. The most iimportautpreßxes are gc, lilt, Ur, Ctjt i-9C= denotes collectiveness, union, completion, or repetition : ©cbirgc, mountain range, ©efäbrte, companion, ©ebäube, edifice, ©erüuí¿^, a continued noise (as of rivers, arms, machinery, etc.). 2. mif?= denotes negation, incompletness, or negation of quality: SDhji* toil, discord, SJÎt^begriff, misconception, SJîi^guuft, disfavor. 3. 1111= denotes negation or perversion of quality: Uliglilíí, misfortune, Unnietlfd;, inhuman person, Unfc^UÍb, innocency. 4. ttt« denotes source, origin, or cause, or a thing in its original con¬ dition : Urfjjrung, origin, Urfad^e, cause, llriralb, primeval forest. 5. Crji (arch) denotes the first or greatest : ©rjbiid;)cf, archbishop, ©I'Xbieb, arrant thief, ©r^tnarfc^afl, lord high marshal. § 58, 59.] ATTRIBUTES OP THE NOUN, 257 § 58. Compound Nouns (L. XXXVI.) are formed : 1. By prefixing to nouns modifying words, which may be of any part of speech, except an article or interjec¬ tion; S'aS 0c^ui^auS, scboolhouse. ®er Kaufmann, merchant. ,f grcmbtport, foreign word. 2)ie ^eriunft, origin. Xcx 3rccifatni;f, duel. 2)et ©ingang, entrance. „ 0eIbfhncrb, suicide. 2)er Slberglaube, superstition. 2. By uniting the words of some familiar expressions: SaS SBergißmeinnic^t, the forget-me-not. 2)er 2augenid;t'S, the good for nothing fellow. Sdängcrjeiieber, the honeysuckle. Scr 0pringin?feÍD, the romp. Rem. 1. In a few cases the first word is in the ejen. sing, or the gen. pi. : ®a§ Xageölidit, the daylight. 2)a§ SSörterbuc^, the dictionary. Rem. 2. By a false analogy, some nouns take on the gen. ending, 5 (C8) i 2)er SieligionSirieg, war having its origin in religions feuds. Sie 5iitcrïSBerftd}erungë'=©efenfd;aft, Pire Insm-ance Company. Rem. 3. In a few compound nouns the adjective also is declined: Nom.sing., htx §of;epriefter. Noin.j>l.,V\t §cí;enprie[íer. Gen. " beS Çc^cnjjriefterS. Gen. " ber §of)cnpriefter. Dat. " bem ^pçcnpriejîer. Dat. " ben §D^en)3riefíern. Äcc. " ben §o^enbncfter. Acc. " bte Ço^enbneftev. 1. ACCIDENTS OF THE NOUN. (Slttriíiuíc bcê liau^jhDoríel.) § 59. The Attributes of the Noun, as well as of all other flexible parts of speech (§ 50), except the verb, are: 1. Two JTumbers : Singular and Plural. 2. Thï 'é?e Gei\ders: Masculine, Feminine, and Neuter. 3. Four Cases: Nominative, Genitive, Dative, and Accusative. Rem. Substantives, whether nouns or pronouns, control the gender, number, person, and case of all other flexible parts of speech. Hence a knowledge of the attributes of the noun, while one of the most diflficult, is at the same time one of the most important things in the study of the German language. 258 GENDER OF NOUNS. [§ 60,61. 2. GENDER OF NOUNS. (2)aö @cíc^íc(^í bcr ^ouíJíUJÜríer.) § 60. 1. Only in nouns referring tojpersons^ and in the names of some animals, is the natural gender observed; Scr 3)îann, the man. 2)ie woman. Sölüe, the lion. 2. Of names of animals^ some are masculine, others are feminine, and a few are neuter: Scr Síbíer, the eagle. SiC the fly. ^^ferb, the horse. 3. Of names of inanimate ohjeets and abstract nouns, all of which are neuter in English, some are masculine, some feminine, and some neuter: iScr Siîd;, the table. SiC ÍÍ^Üre, the door. §ait§, the house. ,t SDiut^, courage. „ @üte, goodness. „ (Snbe, the end. Hem. The Gender of German nouns can only he learned hy long practice. During the history of the language, many nouns have passed from one gender to another. Of a few nouns the gender is not yet settled. 4. The following will serve as general rules in fixing the gender of nouns : § 61. Nouns Masculine by meaning are the names of: 1. Male Beings; bCf Slîvinn, Äönig, Seine; the man,king,lion. 2. Deity and Angels: bCt (Sett, Sngel, (Sfjcruh, 0era;^í;, íEeuíeí ; God, angel, cherub, seraph, devil. 3. Seasons: bCf SSinter,grüf)íing (but baö 5rüt)jaí;r), 0emmev, §crhfi; Winter, Spring (Spring), Summer, Fall. 4. Months: bCb (yOTuar, Ç^bruar, SJÎarj, 3í:;irtí, SRat, Sunt, 3uít, etc. January, February, March, April, IMay, June, Ju^v, etc. 5. Days of the Week: bCf SJientag, Sicnftag, SJîittined), Sonn cvjtag, etc. Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday, etc. 6. Points of the Compass: bCt Sîorb, 0Üb, Oft, üSeft ; North, South, etc. 1. Mountains: bCt ^Ctrj, 3?efnb, Steina, the Harz, Vesuvius, Etna. 8. Large Birds: bCï 2lbler, §ahid;t, @ctcv; the eagle, hawk, vidture. 9. Fishes: bCï 5íaí, §ed;t, Sad;§; the eel, pike, salmon. 10. Bugs and Worms: bCi SJÎaiîâfer, SÍUtegeí; the hlay-bug, leech. 11. Fruit-trees, Grains, Shrubs, and wild Plants: bCt Ílfifeíbanm, SSctJCIt, Çoïïnnber, Sand); the apple-tree, wheat, elder, leek. 12. Winds: bCt 0aniHm, 0iroîfo, Orían; simoom, sirocco, hurricane. 13. Mineral Substances (except metals, §C3): bcr S)iamant, 0df;inefcí, 0teinf ÜJÍarniDV; diamond, sulphur, stone, marble. § 02-66.] GENDER OF NOUNS. 259 § 62. Nouns feminine by meaning- are the names of: 1. Female Beings: btC grail, iîcnigut, Söirin, woman, queen, lioness. 2. Smaller Birds and Insects; bic DíactítígClIÍ, ©roffcí, gliege, SSatlJC, the nightingale, thrush, fly, bug. 3. Forest-trees, Fruits and Flowers, especially if ending in C« biC (SidlCj iSiriic, 9ioie, the oak, pear, rose. 4. Most Hivers: biC Soiiau, (Elbe, ©)3rec, the Danube, Elbe, Spree. Exc. bcr Si^ein, 2)îain, etc., the Rhine, Maine, etc. § 63. Nouns neuter by meaning are the names of: 1. Most Countries and Places: bná 3taUcn, hot Italy, bttö jcbÖKi S3crltn, beautiful Berlin, bûê fefte Slîagbeburij, strong Magdeburg. 2. Collective Nouns: boÖ SíOÍf, §ecr, the people, army, bßÖ @ra6, Sîobr, grass, sedge, reeds. 3. Metals: bflÖ ©Uber, @oíb, iBíct, Gifcn, silver, gold, lead, iron. Exc. bcr ©tab!, Äobalt, steel, zinc, cobalt. § 61. Nouns masculine by form are : 1. Most monosyllabic nouns not ending in t (§ Cñ): bCb Srud), S)atlî, gall, §aj3, Oueíí, the breach, thanks, fall, hatred, source. 2. All nouns ending in iá}, il}, tng, Itng, lît : bcr ©titb, §oniß, §ärilig, Sebrítng, Çeiin, the sting, honey, lîerring, apprentice, helmet. Exc. bflè ^îeffïng, brass, bttö S)ing, the thing. § 65. Nouns feminine by form are : J. All dissyllabic nouns ending in C, and not denoting male beings: biC Strebe, ^triebe, ©oniie, ®rbe, the church, cherry, sun, earth. Exc. 1. bûê Síuge, (Siibe, (Srbe, the eye, end, inheritance. Exc. 2. bcr 9îanie, Söitic, the name, wiU. 2. Most nouns ending in Utbh Ulb, UUfti biC Siaibt, gíudbt, ®e» bulb, SBernunft, night, flight, patience, reason. 3. All derivatives ending in bcit, ÎCtt, fdlûft, Ci, ttl (init), UttQ, Ctb, Utb I bic greibeit, ©aníbaríeit, grcunbidiaft, iBäcierei, ^öiitginn, ^oftnmig, ^cimatb, Sírmutb, freedom, thankfulness, friendship, bakery, queen, hope, home, poverty. Exc. bcr (or baé) Btcrratb, the ornament, bûÔ ©cjibrei, the seal, the ciy. § 66. Nouns neuter by form are : 1. Diminutives (in d)Cn, Ictll, see § ">7, 1, 1), whatever may be the natural gender : bflé ^ferbdicit, S3ildUcin, the little horse, little book; bû^ gräulein, 2Räb(ben, Äinblein, the young lady, girl, child. 260 THE NOUNS. [§ 67-69. 2. Derivatives ending in fill, fcí, íljltlít î bûê Sîât^fel, Sflifcr» tí;um, S^riftentíjura, fate, riddle, empire, Christendom. Exc. 1. bCC SBed^fei, ^rrt^um, 9ieic^t^um, the change, error, richea Exc. 2. btc Stc^fei, ámfeí, 2)ei(^fei, the shoulder, blackbird, adze. Exc. 3. bie (or bûê) SJÍü^faí, i^rühfal, the distress, sorrow. 3. Nouns with the prefix get bllÖ Oebäube, @efet3, the building, law. Exc. 1. bcr @e6raud;,@ebaníe,@eí;Dríatn,@euull,@eíang,@eíd;ma(f ©elntnn ; the use, thought, obedience, enjoyment, song, taste, gain. Exc. 2. bic @ebüí;r, ©eburt, ©ebulb, ©efa^r, ©emeinbe, ©eniige, ©efdjic^te, ©eftalt, the duty, birth, patience, danger, community, satisfaction, history, form. § 67. Compound Nouns take the gender of the last noun. btC ©c^uÎletïÊV, the school-teacher (bte ©c^uíe, bCC Setvev). bib Çofftrdje, the court church (ber §of, biC fed;e). bûê ©d;uí[)au§, the school-house (bie ©(^ule, bttê §aitS). Exc. 1. 2)cr Slbfi^eu (bte ©c^eu), bbc SKlttmoc^ (bie 2Bod;e). Exc. 2. 2)te SCnmutt), Settiuti), ©roßmitti), Sangntut^, ©anftmutb ©ctinermutf), SBefjmuti; (bcb SDÍutí;, §od;mut(), etc.); bie Slut» tüort (boô iffiort), Exc. 8. 2)ßö ©egentbeií, bߧ (or ber) 33orbertí;eií, etc. (bet 2^tdO- Exc. 4. Names of cities are neuter, whatever the compound may be : 2)fl§ fefte 3Jiagbeburg (bie S3urg), strong Magdeburg. § 6 8. Foreign Nouns usually retain their original gender; S)ie St^ologie, theology (^from Gr. g SfeoXoyía, theology). Exc. But some foreign words have been drawn out of their original gender : bCb Sorfjer, bit Siumnter, bttö geufter ; fro7n Lat. (kcmí.) corpus, (niasc.) numeras, {fem.) fenestra. § 69. A number of nouns have two genders, with a dif ferent signification for each gender, as : 2)er SSattb, the volume. S)a§ iSaitb, the ribbon. „ S3auer, the peasant. „ S3auer, the cage, r; S3unb, the alliance. „ SSunb, the bundle. „ ©^or, the chorus. „ S^cr, the choir. „ ©rbe, the heir. „ ©rbe, the inheritance. ®ie ©rfenntniji, knowledge. „ ©vienntniji, the sentence, S)er §arj, the Harz Mountains. v ^arj, the resin. „ §eibe, the heathen. 2)ie §eibe, the heath. „ liefer, the jaw. rr tiefer, the pine. „ tunbe, the costumer. » tunbe, the knowledge. „ Seiter, the leader. „ Seitcr, the ladder. I, SDÍangeí, the want. „ SHanget, the mangles. § 70-72.] DECLENSION OP NOUNS. 261 ®ie ÏÏJÎarî, the markgraviate. Ser SDÍefíer, the measurer. „ ©d^tíE», the shield. „ ©c^trulft, the bombast, ©ee, the lake. ©Jjrcffe, the sprout, ©teuer, the tax. Ser ©tift, the handle. „ S^or, the fool. „ 3?erbienft, the reward. Sie 2Be^r, the bulwark. tf Sie SaS SDÍarí, the marrow. „ SJÎeffer, the knife. „ ©(^ilb, the sign. Sie ©c^tüulft, the swelling. „ ©ee, the ocean. „ ©i)roffe, round of a ladder. SaS ©teuer, the rudder. „ ©tift, the endowment. „ S^or, the gate. „ 3)erbieu[t, the merit. Söeijr, the wier. § 70. During the history of the language some nouns have passed from one gender to another: Gothic, der luftus, der sidus, das leik, , , der situ, die lech, das saf, die ribba, der site, die lich, das saf, das rippe, bie ©itte, bie Seid;e, ber ©aft, bie 3îif)f5e, the custom, the corpse, the sap. the rib. Old Ger., dër luft, Mid. Ger., dër luft, New Ger., bie Suft, the air. 3. DECLENSION OF NOUNS. (Seflinatioa i)cr ^ouiJtöörici'.) § 71. The influences which have produced the great variety now existing in the declension of German nouns are still at work. The most important of these are : 1. The increasing use of the umlaut. 2. The tendency of terminations to lengthen root vowels. 3. The passing of nouns from one gender to another. 4. The increasing number of masculine nouns with :tX in the plural. § 72. The many different ways in which common nouns are declined may be most conveniently grouped into three classes or Declensions: 1. The Old Declension, containing masculine, feminine, and neuter nouns, and having three forms in the plural. 2, The New Declension, containing masculine and feminine nouns, and having one form A\ (^Cll) in the plural. 8. The Mixed Declension, containing masculine and neuter nouns, *«id having one form -tx (sCtl) in the plural. Rem. The following table illustrates these three declensions : TABLE OP THE DECLENSIONS OP NOUNS. Il— 1. Old Declension. I. Form (M. and N.). II. Form {M. and N.). III. Form (il/., F., N). Singular. Norn. î)cr SDÍaíer, bcr Saícr. Gen. beg SRaier^ö« beg 35ater®ö. Dat. bem üJZaíer. bem 33ater. Acc. ben 2)îaler. ben 25ater. ber SJîûmt. baö Sud). beg 9Jîanme§. beg Snd;=eÖ. bem 9Jîann=e. bem S3n(í;>c. ben 2)iann. bag Sud). ber Xag. ber Sod), bie ©tobt. bcg Sag^eö. bcg Sad^'^eö. ber ©tabt. bem Jtag^c. bem Sad)ie. ber ©tabt. ben Sag. ben Sad). bie ©tabt. 1 Plural. Nom. í)tc SDÎaler* bic Sßätcr* Gen. ber SJÍaíer. ber 25äter. Dat. ben 9)íaíeríit. ben 23äter^n. Acc. bie SJÎaler. bie SBäter. • bie SJlünU'Cr. bie Süd)=cr. ber ÜJiämuer. ber Süd)ier. ben SJÎânn^cru. ben Süc(iiern. bie aiiann^er. bie Süd)ier. bie Soß^e. bie Söcii^e. bie ©íobíse. ber Sag^e. ber Säd)ie. ber ©täbt^e. ben Sagten, ben Säd)iCn. ben ©täbt^cu. bie Sag^e. bie Säd)»e. bie ©täbt^e. 1 2. New Declension. {M. and F.) 3. Mixed Declension. (-Mi and N.) s Ci Nom. bcc aJîcnfcb. ber Sötte. bie grcu. Gen. beg iDîenic^'Cn. beg l'öttesii. ber gran. Dat. bem 9)íenj(í)'en. bem Some^n. ber grau. Acc. ben ü)Íen|c^'=cn. ben 2ötte'=n. bie gran. ber Soîtor. boö Dí)r. beg Soltorsg. beg ö^r=e§. bem Soîtor. bem D()r»c. ben Sol'tor. bag 0()r. Plural. Nom. bie 9)îeni^-en. bie Söttc^n. bie grouîeu. Gen. ber S)íeníd;;en. ber Söttc=n. ber grausen. Dat. ben SDÍenjcíí'en. ben Söme-n. ben gran=en. Acc. bie 9Jíeníc^»en. bie Siimcíii. bie grausen. bie Softor'^en. bie £)í)ríett. ber Sottor^cn. ber ObriClt. ben ®oîtDr'=cu. ben 0()r»eH. bie Softot%eu. bie Oi)r»CH. § 73,74.] DECLENSION OF NOUNS. 263 Rem. 1. All feminine nouns remain unchanged in the singular. Rem. 2. All notins have sU in the dative plural—as do also all articles^ ad' jectives, and jironouns (except unê, Rem. 3. The umlaut is used only in the Old Declension. § 73. The Old Declension includes by far the greater part of all German nouns, especially of those of the masculine and neuter gender. Rem. 1. It includes the greater part of: (1) masculine and neuter primi¬ tive nouns ; (2) derivatives in Cf, djCIt, ÍCill, id), id)t, 10, Ín0, Íiílg, Itifj, faí, íí)ura. Rem. 2. Where no harshness of sound is thereby produced, the C may be dropped from the ending of the genitive and dative (especially of the dative)-. (l)of nouns not ending in Ö, j), fd) or 110^ (!^) of nouns preceded by prepositions: ton Ovt gu Ort (but gu Çaufe); (3) of the u'ord @ott (in dat., but not in gen.)-, mit ©Ott (but um ©otteâ SBilíen). § 74. Nouns of the Old Declension are divided into three classes, according to the way in which their plurals are formed: First class •' plural like singular (but sometimes takes the umlaut). Second class : plural adds sCt (and always " " " ). Third class; plural adds (and generally " " " ). 1. To the first class belong: 1. Masculine and neuter nouns in cl, Cll, Cft 1. The masc., mostly tvith umlaut in plural; t>er Skater, pi. iBäter. 2. The neut., " without " " " .• baê SBafier," SBaffer. 2. Neuter diminutives in ^cn, ÍCillt bctS SJÍübc^en, Çrâuletn, 33íümd)en, 3. Neuter derivatives with the prefix 0C, and the sufiix ct bciS ©ebaube. 4. The two feminine nouns, bic SDiutter, SEoc^ter (/j/. SDÎiitter, 2;öd)tcr). 2. To the second class belong mostly neuter nouns, as : 1. 2)00 2imt, 93ab, SSIatt, 33ud), ®a(^, Oorf, ©, gad), ga^, gclb, @elb, ©iaS, ©lieb, ©rab, ©ra«, ©ut, §au))t, §au«, §u()u, Äalb, fiinb, ííletb, Äoru, ^raut, Samm, Sod), 9)îaul, ïïîeft, i)L^faub, 9îab, 9îeim, 3îtub, 0d)io|3, 0d)mert, 2?olî, îôcib; ba« ©cmüth, ©cfdilcd t. 2. Ail words in t^uot : Öod (£í)ri[tcntí)um,^aiíertl)um, bcr 9teid;t^um, etc. 3. A few foreign words: bO§ ^ofpital, 9îegtmeut, etc. 4. Also a few masculine nouns, as: bCC ©ei[t, ©Ott, Seth, SDÍauu, SBalb. 3. To the third class, which includes nouns of all gen¬ ders, belong : 1. All derivatives in nij), foí: biC Äeuutuiß, bû8 Silbuig, ©b^idfal: 264 THE NOUN. [§ 75. 2. Mase, and neut. derivatives in anb, at, idjt, ig, tag, ling, rit^ : bet §eiianb, 2Jîonat, Sönig, 3üngltng, gä^nric^; baê ©einic^t, 2)tng. 3. Some foreign nouns: bCf 5tbt, ?íítar, ©eneraí; btt§ Concert, Concii, 4. Many others of all genders, as : (1), bCC Staí, ?írjt, 33autn, SiiÇ, ©ib, gifd;, §aím, §irîd;, §unb, Ííneí^t, 9íaum, @a¿, ï^eii, Siícíí. (2), bic 2íí"t, i8raut, 93ruft, gruí^t, §anb, Äraft 9Jîac^t, 9ía(í^t. (8), baö 53eií, S3ein, 2ooS, 35íooS, ipuít, @cí?tff, %^ox, SSerf, ©elení. Rem. The umlaut is added to the plural of all feminine nouns that are capable of it, to most masculine nouns, but only to three neuter nouns (bag ©l;or, glo^, 9íoí)r). § 75. No neuter nouns belong to the New Declension. This declension includes : 1. Most feminine nouns: (I), monosyllables; biC Sl^t, 33abn, glut, glut!;, gagb, ííofí, 2a[t, ^'fíictt, Cual, 0aat, 0d;aar, 0d;lac^t, 0c^rift, 0^nib, 0l)eer, 2:(;at, 2;£)ür, U^r, SBelt, etc. (2), derivatives in t, Cl, Cb (except 2JÎUtter, Soc^ter, § 74,1, 4), at^. Ci, cnb, bcit, feit, in (n), jibaft, nng: bic 3îebe, 0d;üffeí, 0d;mcfícr, §eimatb, gärherei, gugenb, Söai^r^eit, Saníbaríeit, ilönigin, grcunbs íd;ait, Drbnung. 2. Many masculine nouns: (1), monosyllables : bCC 93är, C^rtp, ginî, gürft, ©ruf, §eíb, §err, §irt, 2}íen(d;, 2}îo^r, Síarr, ¿chê, (2), polysyllables ending in sC: bCb ^ffc, 33ote, 93uhe, ©rte, ©atte, Çajc, (íunge, ^nabe, 9îeffe, 9îabe, Dîtefc, granîe, ©ried^e, 9îuffe. (3), personal nouns, with prefix gc^: bCC ©cfäbrtc, ©ebüífe, ©efettc. 3. Many mase, and fem. foreign nouns : bCC 9Ibbo!at, Sanbibat, 2}ionar(b, ^räfibent; bic gacultät, iïlîelobic, C¡í>er, ^erfon, 9îegei. 4. Names of nationality, as: bCC Saier, Saffer, Ungar, jíatar, Îîofaî. Rem. 1. The tennination ;n is added to nouns ending in C, or in unaccented =CÏ, =Cb, ^av I to other nouns :Cn is added : N. Sing., ber Sötne, Ungar, Sííeníd; (exc. §err); bie 9îebe, grau, ö. beg Söiuen, Ungarn, 2)îenjd;en( " §crrn); ber 9îcbe, grau. N. Plur., bie Sütnen. Ungarn. 23ienjd;en ( " Çerren); bie Sieben, grauen. Rem. 2. Relics of the former declension of feminine nouns in the singular are retained in some familiar expressions, and in some compound woi'ds : auf ©rben, ju ©unften, bou ©otteg ©naben, bag 0onueníic^t. Rem. 3. The monosyllabic masculine nouns of this declension (§ 75,2). are contracted from longer original forms, as : Old German; dër hero, cristfmi, fiiristo, grâvce, (helid), hêrro, hirti. Mid. German ; dër bër, kristen, viirste, gi àve, belt, hëne, hirte. New German: bcc33är. ©^rift. gürfl. ©raí. ."pelb. .^»crr. )pirt. § 70-78.] declension op nouns. 265 § 76. The Mixed Declension contains a few masculine and neuter nouns which follow the old declension in the singular, and the nevj declension in thejglural, as: 1. Masculine: Scr 5l^n, S3auev, 2)orn, gorft, @auí, ©etiatter, §aím, Sortcer, iDîaft, ííad^Dar, ^faím, ©c^merj, @ee, @porn, 0taat. 'Bta* c^ei, 0tra^I, 2;(;ron, 23etter, Untert^an, ßicrat^. 2. Many foreign nouns in or: 2)Cr Softov, 9îeîtor, ^rofeffor, ^aftor. 3. Neuter: 5)00 3iußc, Sett, (gnbc, §emb, §erj, Seib, O^ir, ^nfeft. Rem. 1. S)a6 §cvj is) S. baô §erj, bcö §eqcnÖ, bent §erjen, bag §erg ; irregular. ]" P. bte iperjeu, ber §erjen, ben §erjcn, bie ¿erjen. Rein. 2. 2)er 9íad)í\rv, ber llntcrtban, usually follow the new declension in the singular, as sometimes does ber ©eüatter. § 77. Some Foreign Nouns which have not yet been fully naturalized are irregular. Some of them retain very much of their original modes of declension, as: Norn. Sing., ÜJfiifeum, ©^mnafium, 9îf;^t()mu8, 0^)onbeug, Gen. Sing., SDÎnjeumg, 9î()iiti;inug, 0))onbeug, gojiilg, Nom. Plur., SOíuíeen, ©bmnafien, 9î(;ijt^men, 0|)onbeen, gofftlien, Pat. Plur., âJîufeen. ©b^tnafien. 9î^tjt^men. 0:jjonbeen. gojfitien. Nom. Sing., Sorb, Sab^, ©ente, Sífteur, ^ßafd^a, 0oío, ^afino. Gen. Sing., Sorbd, Sab^, ©ented, Síftenrg, ^ajt^ag, 0oÍDg, Safinod, Nom. Plur., Sorbs, Sabieg, ©enteg, Síftenrg, ^ajd;ag, 0oío8, Safínog, Dat. Plur., Sorba. SabieS. ©ented. Slíteura. ^afd^aa. 0oíoa. Äaftnoa. Nom. Sing., Sibjectiö, SSerhunt, 3Diu[iina, Gen. Sing., 3íb|ectt»a, Sabttalg, SBerhnnta, SOÍnfituS, X^emaa, iVoM. P/«r.,) Slbjectiöa, iiabitäle, SSerha, iïlîufict, Xíientata, " " ) Slbjectitien. Äabitalien. SSerhen. SDinfiter. Seemen. § 78. The Declension of Proper Nouns differs greatly from that of common nouns (§ 72). 1. With names of persons: 1. The genitive is usually formed by adding ;8. 2. But masc. names in ft, and fem. names in take ;CnÖ, 3. The plural of all names is formed according to the old declension except feminine names in C, Avhich follow the new declension : Norn. Sing., §cinrid;, Snbtoig, 0d;iïïcr, ©ët^c, granj. Gen. Sing., Çcttirid;«, SiibUMflg, 0d;tllcra, ©öt()e8, franjen«, Nom. Plur., §cinrtd;c, Snbtvifle, 0d;irícr, ©ët^e, Çranjc, Dat. Plur., .Çetnric^ien. Snbwtßen. ©djiUern. ©ët^cn. granjen. M 266 THE NOUN. [§ 79, 80. Nom. Sin(j., ®mma, 2lbe%tb, §ebtr»tg, SKarie', Gen. Sing., S3ert(;a§, @mma3, Síbeí^eibé, ^ebtrig«, SDiari^en«, Nom. Plur., 5BertI;a§. (SmmaS. 2ibeif)etbê. Çebiuigê. âJîariien. Rem. Proper nouns are not inflected when preceded by the article or an adjective pronoun : bte SSiíbfüuíe bc§ ^orî ; bie SBerfe beê ©ebaftían S3ad; (or (Johann ©ebaftian iSad;3 Sßerie). 2. Names of cities or countriesending in J, or J, take ê in the genitive : S3eriinê Umgebungen ; tie 0tabte ¿euífc^lanb^. Rem. Those in Ö, J, and must be (and others may he) preceded by iJOn, beê, or a qualifying noun : bie (Stniroijner bon 2Jîatnj (or ber Stabt SJiainj). § 79. The chief irregularities in the plural are these : 1. Nouns indicating weight^measure, and number retain their singular form, even when used in the plural. 2)rei ipfunb ßuder ; fec^S gujj ()dc^ ; bierjig SRanu 9îeiterei. Exc. But feminine nouns in C, and nouns indicating divisions of time, take the plural form ; bier SJieiíeu entfernt ; gtbei Sage lang. 2. Some nouns have two forms in the plural, as : Ser Sorn ; pi. Somen, or Sörner. Sa6 2i(i)t ; pi. Sickte, or Sid;ter. Sa§ Sanb ; pi. Sanbe, or Sänber. Sa6 Stjal ; pi. St;aíe, or Sbalcr, Rem. 1. With some nouns one form (as Sanbe, Sfiale) is poetical. Rein. 2. Sometimes the different forms have different meanings, as : Ser S3anb, volume, pi. iBaitbe. Saë @eftd;t, eyesight, pi. (wanting). Sa6 SSanb, ribbon, pi. 53anber. „ face, pi. (Seftc^ter. (no sing.) fetters, pi. S3anbe, „ r> vision, ®cficf)te. 3. Some nouns have no singular number, as : Sic Signen, (Sítern, ©ebrüber, ©efdjioifter, Sente, 9Jîafern, Slífjen. 4. Some nouns have no plural number, as : See ^Beginn, Srncí, jammer, @anb, ©treit, Untcrrid;t. Sit 5ííd;e, gnrd;t, ©nabe, Siebe, ißrad^t, ©anftnuitb- Sû§ Slnfefin, ©inîommen, ©ntjücfen, ©íenb, ©íücí, Sebcn, Sob. 4. SYNTAX OF THE NOUN. (©^ntûï &e§ ^aufjtinorícé.) § 80. The Nominative Case in English corresponds in use to the same case in German. The Possessive is §81,82.] SYNTAX OP THE NOUN. 267 usually translated by the Genitive in German, and the Objective by the Genitive, Dative, or Accusative. Rem. 1. The original idea of the three oblique cases, which exist in all the Teutonic languages (§ 2), including the Anglo-Saxon, appears to have been ; 1. Of the Genitive : whence, from what place—origin ; 2. Of the Dative : where, in or at what place—position ; 3. Of the Accusative *. whither, to what place—direction. Rem. 2. In the development of the different Teutonic languages, the uses 11 the cases have undergone so many modifications that their correct appli¬ cation in passing from one language to another has become very difiScult. § 81. The Genitive Case is used : 1. After the derivative prepositions ttû^rcnb, uicgcn, icnfcii, läng^, tro^, 3«foÏ9C, etc. (§ 202) : Sinftatt i8rubcr '<, Instead of the brother. SSdl^rettb bc3 During the war. 2. Without a preposition : 1. After nouns of limitation, possession, etc. (for the English possessive). S)te ©efc^idjte 2)eutfdjÎanbê, The history of Germany. S)e6 ©c^üleví S3uc^, The scholar's book. 2. After the adjectives íicgicrig, ttlilbC, UOÍÍ, etc. (§ 91) ; 2?ott ber greube, Full of joy. SDÍübe beê Sebenë, Weary of life. 3. After the verbs ûl^ÎClt, eKÍbeíirett, ÍOCÍlCtt, fïCrhClt, etc. (§ 178) : 2lííe íad;en [einer Sííeífeit, All laugh at his vanity. 4. In many adverbial expressions : S)e3 Sliorgend, be6 SÎbenbë, In the morning, in the evening. @lücflíd;crn)eiie, Happily. Rem. 1. By false analogy, the form beá is used. Rem. 2. Tiie genitive case was formerly used much more than it is at pres¬ ent. § 82. The Dative Case is used : 1. After the prepositions an, ÛUf, ^^iníCT, lit, etc. (§ 244), when signifying rest, or motion within certain limits : Äiitb i[t im ©arten, The child is in the garden. [den. 2)a3 Stub läuft im ©arten, The child is running about in the gar- 2. Always after the prepositions au§, au§Cr,ßA\ (§ 220) : ©r îommt au« bcm ©arten. He is coming out of the garden. 3. Without a preposition : 1. After the adjectives ûngCllCbm, lOtbrig, etc. (§ 95) ; ©r i[t [einem Sruber aí>níid;, He is like (or resembles) his brother. 268 THE NOUN. [§ 83-85. 2. After the verbs aíincn, ûitttDortcn, banîen, folgen, etc. (§ Wôy. foígt feínent 33rut>er, He follows his brother. 3. As the indirect object of many verbs (§ 179, 2) ; ßt gab mie bas 33uc^, He gave me the book. § 83. The Accusative Case is used: 1. After the prepositions an, OUf, itö, in, tJOr, eta (§ 82, 1), when signifying motion towards an object: ßr ging in bcn ©arten, He went into the garden. 2. Always after the prepositions bnrtf), ^UX^etc. ( 237) : ßr ging burt^ bcn ©arten, He went through the garden. 3. To express the direct object of transitive verbs: ßr îaufte ben S3ïciftift, He bought the pencil, ßr gab mir boê $U(b, He gave me that book. 4. After verbs and adjectives,expressingprice, weight, measure, definite time, age, etc. (§ 177, 2 ; § 96) : ßS toftet einen 23)ûler, it cost one dollar, ßs miegt ein ißfunb, it weighs a pound, ßr blieb einen gtinjen Sing, He remained an entire day. ßs ift nur einen breit, It is only an inch wide. § 84. Some verbs are followed by two nouns in the same case ; others by two nouns in different cases ; and some by a substantive whose case is deter¬ mined by the signification of the verb, while the practice of good writers varies as to the case that should follow some verbs (see syntax of the verb, § 175). § 85. In addition to the rules of Apposition which pre¬ vail in the English language, the German has the fol¬ lowing: 1. Nouns expressing weight, measure, and number (when not used parti- tively) are in apposition with the nouns they limit: ßill ^funb Suder, A pound o/* sugar. (but) ßht 'ipfunb biCfCÖ A pound of this sugar, ßin ©iaö Sßaffer, A glass of watei-. 2. Proper names of countries, cities, etc., and of months are in apposi« tion with the specifying common noun : ®a§ Îîb'nigreic^ Greußen, The kingdom o/*Prussia. ®ic @tabt Serlilt, The city o/" Berlin. (^m 9)îonat Slugufl, In the montli o/'August. §86.] THE ADJECTIVE. 269 THE ADJECTIVE. CSaá Gigcníi^afíáKJorí.) § 86. Adjectives are primitive, derivative, or compound. 1. primitive adjectives are also reckoned many, of which the verbal origin is "no longer felt" : QUt, (tU. 2. Derivative adjectives are formed by adding the suf¬ fixes =cr (=crn), =^oft, =ig, ñfd) (=cr),4tc^, =or =ithn/ to words of any part of speech, except the article, con¬ junction, or interjection: 1. star {.Old German: beran, to hear), added to the noun or a verbal root, indicates ability or possibility of a quality or action ; frud^tbar, fruit-bearing, bienftbar, serviceable, cjjbar, eatable. 2. ;Cn (iCrn) is added only to nouns denoting material : golben, [tíbcrn, íebern, bcíjern, gläfern. 3. (Old Ger.; haft, holding) denotes possession of the quality of the noun, or inclination towards it : tugcnb^aft, Adrtuous,fd;tnetd^eI^aft, flattering. Rem. is added to but three adjectives'. bo8f;aft, îranîf^aft, íederf^aft. , 4. sil} denotes possession of the quality or relation, expressed by the noun, adjective, numeral, pronoun, verb, preposition, or adA^ei-b, to which it is sutfixed : mäd;ttg, mighty, íebeitbig, lively, bcr tnctmgc, mine, einig, sole, einjig, single, biffig, biting, jc^ig, present, toorig, pre¬ ceding, niebrig, lowly. 5. ;iîd) (:tr) denotes origin, similarity, or inclination: ipreujjifc^,Prus¬ sian, irbifc^, earthly, ncibijd;, envious. Rem. 1. The sifd) takes the place of ic or ical in many English adjectives: braniatijd;, boitifd), logifd;, Ijiftorifd;. Rem. 2. In proper adjectives frequently the termination itX is preferred to the 'tx takes no inflection: ber SJÎagbeburgcr 2)om, bie îeibjigev 301=» tung, bad Sranbcnburger 2;f;or (gen. bed 9Jîagbeburger 3)omö). G. ílld) (compare English like, lg) forms adjectives from nouns, and di¬ minutive adjectives from adjectives : iinblid^, childlike, tügíid;, daily, rlHbiid;, reddish. 7. =fant (related to ¡^ufammen, Tmí. semper, Greek àga, Eng. some), add¬ ed to verbs and verbal nouns, indícale í possession of or inclination to the quality: arbeit jam, laborious, milbfam, wearisome. 270 THE ADJECTIVE. [§ 87,88. 3. Compound adjectives are formed by prefixing to ad¬ jectives a lioim, preposition, or other adjective : 3)unîelblait, dark blue. SiebeitStDÜrbig, amiable, j^aubftumm, deaf and dumb, ajittfc^uibig, accessory to a crime. § 87. Adjectives are called predicative when they are used to complete the predications of the verbs fciti, iDcrkit; Meißen, ((ßeinen (nuêfe^en), büníen, íjei^en : SaS ?eben ijl furj, Life is short. 2)a§ SSîetter intrb The weather is becoming hot. Rem. 1. Adjectives used predicatively are not declined. Rein. 2. Some adjectives are used only predicatively, as: cuiigft, bereit, fetltb, gratn, t;etí, irre, íunb, quer, quit, jct^uíb, abiueubig, au[id;tig, eiugebenî, getroft, geïua^r, í^abbaft, t^ieil^aftig, beríuftig. Rem. 3. The following are rarely or never used predicatively: (1), the simple form of superlatives (§ 93, Eem. 2) ; (2), adjectives in sen, goíben, [ih beru, etc. ; (3), some other adjectives, as : bortig, Ijiefig, jjjauifdj, bergeben. 1. DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES. (Scííinaíton bcr eigenitbüftöUJÄricr.) § 88. Adjectives used attributively, that is, when placed before the noun to express some of its well-known at¬ tributes, are subject to three modes of declension, termed the Old, New, and Mixed Declensions. 1. The Old Declension is employed when no article or adjective pronoun precedes the adjective (§ 89,Eem. 2): ©uLcr 3Jîauu, guLc grau, guLcê Mub, Good man. good woman. good child. 2. The New Declension is employed when the adjec¬ tive is preceded by : 1. The definite article bCt. 2. All adjective pronouns that are declined according to the Old De¬ clension, as bicfer, jebcr, jener, joiner, meidier, thus including all adjective pronouns except the possessives (§ 88,3) : S)er guLc 2)îanu, bie guLe grau, bas gut«=e íítub, The good man. the good woman, the good child. Rem. 1. The compound adjective pronouns berjenige, berfelbe, cause an adjective following them to be in the New Declension, by the force of the ber. Rem. 2. Many writers give the New Declension to adjectives following certain participles that have a determinative signification, as : foIgCttbCr, Cti Uíúbnícr, ncrjilicbcner. §89.] DECLENSION OP ADJECTIYES. 271 3. The Mixed Declension is used when the adjective is preceded by a possessive pronoun, by cilt, or by fciu ** Sin flutter iDîann, eine gut^e dn gut^cê iïinb, A good man, a good woman, a good child. §89. Table of the three Declensions of Adjectives. \\ ■ i ^ SINGULAE. Masculine. Feminine. Neuter, .v. gnt = cr, gut^c, gut^cá. 6". gnt^en(cê), gutter, gnticn(cê). D. g n t = cm, g « t ® cr, g n t > em. .4. gut^en, gut = e, gut^e^. PLUKAL. j All Genders. gut-e. g u t = er. gut=en. g u t Í e. New Declension. -V. bet g u t Í e, bic g u t = e, bad g n t ^ e. bed glitten, bet gut»en, bed gut^en. Z>. bem gnt®en, bergnt^en, bem gut = en. A. ben g lit = en, bie gnt = e, bad gut = e. bte gut^enCc). ber gut^en. ben gulden, bie gut=en(e). Mixed Declension. N. mein gutter, meine gut^e, mein gut^eë, G. metned gut^en, meiner gulden, meined gut^en. D. meinem gut^eit, meiner gnt^en, meinem gnt^en. A. meinen gut=en, meine gut^e, mein gnt^eê. meine gnt^en. meiner gulden, meinen gut^en. meine gut=en. Rem. 1. The former tennination =£§ of the genitive singular in the mascu¬ line and neuter genders of the Old Declension is now generally rejected hy most writers, but it is yet retained in many fixed expressions: 0eien 0ie guteS SJÎut^eê, Be of good courage. Âeineêtûcgê, By no means. Ohs. The termination «e8 is also retained in the masculine and neuter sin¬ gular of all pronouns, wliether used adjectively or substantively, which are declined according to the Old Declension {see § 109-11 ?•) : 2)a6 2)ad; bicjcS §auic§. The roof of this house. Rem. 2. Adjectives take the Old Declension when preceded by the following undeclined words: DtCÍ, ttlCnig; fol^, j car¬ dinal numbers; britííjaíti, ciitcríct, bcrgíeit^eii,etc.: 3)rci etíe ©rafcn folgen (11^.), Three noble counts follow. 0oid; grofic 0d)Sbe, Such great treasures, gjîit ctroaS tnei^em ^af)ter, With some white paper. ?líícríci gutes Sind;, All kinds of good cloth. Rem. 3. After the plurals alie, anbete, einige, etíid;e, leine, tnantífie, foícfit, lücl^e, mehrere, biele, wenige, the adjective usually drops :it in the nom. and acc. Rem. 4. Tiie similarity between the new declension of nouns and the new declension of adjectives is very striking. 272 THE ADJECTIVE. [§ 80,90. Rem. 5. The Mixed Declension is like the Old in the nominative and ac¬ cusative singular ; in the other cases it is like the New Declension. Rem. 6. After the personal pronouns id}, bu, ii}l, the adjective takes the Old Declension in the Nom. Sing. ; in the other cases it takes the New Declension : S)U, gutes ^inb I Thou, good child ! Qift, armen Seule ! You, poor people ! Rem. 7. In poetic language the termination may be dropped from the nom. and acc. sing, neuter of adjectives of the Old and Mixed Declensions : Salt SSaffer ; alt (Stfeu, Cold water ; old iron. (Stu gut SBort, A good word. Rem. 8. When, in poetic composition, two or more adjectives are joined to the same noun, only the last one is declined : 2)er faííc^,herrat^eriíc^e 9îat^, The false, treasonable counsel. Rem. 9. An attributive adjective, following the noun, is not declined : (Siu Sîtefe, gro^ unb tnilb, A giant, large and fierce. Rem. 10. Adjectives used substantively retain their adjective terminations : (Sin S)eutî^er, bie S)eutfc^en, A German, the Germans. Rem. 11. Participles used adjectively are declined like adjectives : 3(m joigeubeu Sage, On the following day. Rem. 12. Adjectives ending in =£1/ 'tVif or ftX, when declined, usually drop an t either before or after I, n, b Î ift etu Cbier ÜJÍeufdt), He is a noble man. 2Biv i;aben trotfncS SBetter, We are harâig dry weather. Rem. 13. The adjective drops C when it is declined: @tn feiir ®erg, A very high mountain. Rem. 14. If two adjectives stand in equal logical relation to the noun, they both follow the Old Declension : if the second adjective stands in more inti¬ mate relation to the noun than the first, it follows the Mixed Declension : Siac^ guter (uub) alter @ttte, According to good old custom. IBon altem [blauen ^a^ter], Prom old [blue paper]. 2. COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. (Steigerung ber Gigenidiafiöujörier.) § 90. In the German, as in all Teutonic languages, the comparative degree is formed by adding =01*, and the superlative by adding =[1 (or scft) to the positive degree. Rem. 1. When the positive degree ends in sb^ =8, -i, of sjt, the superlative usually takes sCft J otherwise it takes sft. §1)1.1 COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. Hein. 2. Tlie few adjectives ending in 'tf take only it in the comparative. Positive. Compar. Superl. Positive. Compar. Superl. fein, fine. feinter, fein=it. l?eiß, hot. i?eiÖ-cr, faul, lazy. fauDcr, fanhft. falfd?, false. falfcpícr, falfd?^tfí. reid?, rich. reid?=er, reid?4t. frob, happy. frob'Cr, froí?=eft. fd?ön, fine. f^önicr, iff)öndt. frei, free. freiícr, frei'ífí. milb, mild, milbîcr, milb^cft. treu, true. treu^cr, treu^cfí. laut, loud, lant==cr, laut^cft miibe, weary, mübe^r, mübc^ft. Rem. 3. Adjectives ending in ;CÍ/ or sCf, reject the t of this syllaLle in ;he comparative degree : ($bei, noble, CÍJÍ-cr, nobler, CbCÏ^f), noblest. § 91. When the positive is a monosyllable, the radical vowel, if Û, 0, or U, usually takes the umlaut in the com. parative and superlative degrees: Positive. Compar. Superl. Positive. Compar. Superl. 1 alt, old, úít^er, üítseft, marm, warm, ttJÄrnt^er, tuâmiieft. laug, long, lÄng^er, Îâng=fî. grob, coarse, QX'ßhiX, QtÖii'^i. iura, short, Íiirjícr, fürjíeft. jung, young, jüng^er, jüng^)- Rem. 1. The umlaut is not used in the comparison of: 1. Adjectives with the diphthong All in the radical syllable : laut, loud, lautier, laut^^cfh 2. Derivative adjectives (ending in 'ÍJdt^ -tlf etc.): banfbar, thankful, bantbar»tt!, baníbar=fí» 3. Adjectives having iha participial prefix gc=î gemanbt, dexterous, geiüanbtíCt, gctwanbtscfh i. Some adjectives of foreign origin : trab, iaíjd;, matt, platt, jart, nobel, floh, etc. 5. The following monosyllabic adjectives of German origin: 1. With a: barfcl), blanf, fapl, falb, flacp, îavg, înapp, lapm, laÇ, nadt, rafd), jadjt, janft, ftatt, ftplaff, fd^lani, ftarr, [tari, mapr. 2. With o: hob, bopl, bolb, lo«, morid?, roí?, toff, boff. 3. With u : bunt, bumpf, plump runb, ftumm, ftumpf, munb. Rem. 2. The use of the umlaut continues to extend more and more, both in the language of the common people and in the works of good writers. Thus, Goethe uses flatter, fläbCb ^ Klopstock uses jattcrj Kinkel uses giiih tcftcn. The use also vanes with hûng, í)ía|, ftonutt^ nû|, gefuiib, etc. M 2 274 THE ADJECTIVE. § 92. A few adjectives are irregular and a few are defective in comparison : Positive. Comparative. Superlative. gut, good, beffer, better. beft. best. biel, much. tnebr, more. nteift. most. ' bo^, bigh. I^öber, bigher. i)öci)ft, highest. j i naí;c, near. näbcv, nearer. näci)[t. nearest. ; (aiijjen [ac/a.], without). äu^er, exterior. änf3cr[t. extreme. (innen [adv.'], within), tuner, interior. innerft. innermost. (toor []>rep.], before). herber, anterior. horbcrft, foremost. (fqnten [aJi'.], behind). ípnter. hinder. ()tntcr[t. hindmost. (oben [adv.], above). ober. upper. obcrft, uppermost. (unten [at/u.], below. unter, lower. untcvft, lowermost. (min [adj., adv.] little). tntnber. less. ininbeft. least. (er [Old German for the (erer [Old Ger. for adverb ef)c], early). the ö!C?y. eí)cr], earlier) erfte. first. (laz [Old Oer.], lazy). ieçte. last. (erft, first). erfíer. former. ^— (iel3t, last). letter, latter. § 93. Adjectives, especially if tliey are polysyllables, are sometimes compared by placing before the positive the adverbs ntcl^lb more, and aiît lïtcificn, most : ©eïoanbt, dexterous, jHCÍjr ßetraubt, ûliî nteifíeit getranbí. Rem. î. In comparing two adjectives with each other, JîtCÎjr must be used: i[t niC^r taj^jcr ah3 bor[id;tig, Ke is more brave than prudent. Rem. 2. To express the superlative predicativelij. the dative, preceded by ant (an bent), may be employed : 3)ieie Shime i[i ntn fdliinficn, This flower is most beautiful. Rem. 3. By way of emphasis, the genitive plural of aííCl is frequently pre fixed to the superlative : Siefe Siuine ift bie aííeríd;i5n[te, This flower is far the most beautiful. Rem. 4. The absolute stiperlaiive is expressed by prefixing to the positive such adverbs as feig, íiMifí, ûttfjerîi, etc. : S)ie 5íad;ri(^ítftIjD(^[tinteX"cfíant, The news is extremely interesting. Rem. 5. Adjectives in the comparative and superlative degrees are subject to the same laws of declension (§ i)0) as though in the positive degree: Ser befte j^veunb, The best friend. SJÍeín befter ^reunb. My best (in Engl, my good) friend. § 94-96.] SYNTAX OP THE ADJECTIVE. 275 3. SYNTAX OF THE ADJECTIVE. (Sijutaf ÎIC3 Gigcníí^afíámorícé.) § 94, Adjectives, adjective pronouns, and participles, when used attributively, take the gender, number, and case of the substantive which they qualify (L. XVIII). § 95. The following adjectives govern the ge^iitive casé without the use of a preposition (§ 81, 2, 2) : 1. 3ínficí)tii5, arm, tar, bebiiritig, begierig, benotíiigt, betrugt, bío§, ein» gebeuî, einig, ein?, erübrigt, erfahren, fäi^ig, frei, frob, gebent, geftän» big, gemabr, gemärtig, gemifj, gemobnt, tjabbaft, inne, iunb, iünbig, iebig, leer, loS, mäd^tig, mübe, müffig, quitt, fatt, fdjulbig, fiebben, tbeilbaft (4g), nberbrüffig, berbädjtig, beríuftig, boíl, mertb, mürbig. 2. Such of these adjectives as take the negative prefix lUl-/ as : Unbegierig, unerfabren, unmad;tig, unfd^uíbig, unfií^er, unmürbig. (Sr ift úíícr ©orgen frei. He is free from all cares. ©r ift bCÖ SBcgeö ínnbig. He is acquainted with the road. G3 ift nid;t bcr fOíübe mertb. It is not worth the trouble. Sr ift bcr üícbtnng untnürbig. He is unworthy of respect. Rem. ]. Some of these adjectives may be followed by certain prepositions (which govern their own cases), as : (1) begierig, by nod) or ouf. (5) fret, íebig, íeer, Îoâ, boíí, etc., (2) bereit, fäbig, by JU. ^ by bOH. (3) arm, gemobnt, leer, by on. (6) einig, erfahren, frob, by in. (4) frob, ge^hiß, einig, by über. (7) jufrieben, by mit. Sr ift frei bon aßen ©orgen, He is free from all cares. (är i|t arm an @elb. He is poor in money. Rem. 2. Some of these adjectives are used, though rarely, as governing the accusative case, as: anficbtig, bemu^t, fäbig, geftänbig, gemabr, gemobnt, b^b» baft, íoS, mübe, fatt, fdmlbig, überbrüffig, mertb, 3ufrieben. ©0 ift nicbt bie 2Jíübe mertb. It is not worth the trouble. § 96. Many adjectives govern the dative case without the use of a preposition (§ 82,3,1), as: 1. Slbtrilnnig, übníid;, angeboren, angelegen, angenehm, onftöfjig, bc» îannt, bange, bequem, bemuf^t, böfe, bautbar, bieulid), bienftbar, eigen, eigeutbümlid;, ergeben, feil, feinb, fern, folgfam, fremb, geborfam, ge» mein, gemeinfam, geneigt, gemifi, getrogen, gleid;, gnäbig, gram, gut, nabe, neu, noting, offen, offenbar, b^tfknb, bdnlid;, redjt, fcbSblid), id)meid)elbaft, fd^merjlid;, fd}ulbig, fd^rer, füf?, tiquer, tren, übel, überlegen, untertban, oerbäd^tig, rerberblid;, Oertoaubt, Oortbeilbaft meb, locrtb, toirbtig, toiberlid;, toiüfommen, trobl, ittieifelbaft. 27t) NUMERALS. [§ 97, 98, 2. The negatives of these, formed by adding the prefix Ult; or üb^í 1. With utt: unä^niid;, unangenehm, unbefannt, unnöthig, unfchuls 2. With all: abgeneigt. [big, un^meifelhaft,eíc. 3ä) bin Shnen febt banibat. I am very grateful to you. Sá ift ihm id;äbii(h. It is injurious to him. ßr ift mir unbeíannt. He is a stranger to me. Rem. 1. It is usually a personal noun that takes the dative after these ad jectives, and which may be treated as the ' ' indirect object" of the adjective : roar i^ttt nid;t ber SJÍÜhe merth, It was not worth to him the trouble. (Sr ift mir jehn Í^,>uíbig, lie is ten dollars in debt to me. Rem. 2. Many of these adjectives may be followed by prepositions : 3(h bin mit ihm toermanbt, I am related to him, 2)er Äönig mar ihm (or gegeu ihn) The king was not merciful to him ni^t gnäbig, (or towards him). § 97. The Accttsa^we is governedby adjectives express¬ ing value, weight, measure, or age (se& § 94, 2) : (Es mar ftinbtt ißfennig merth, It was not worth a penny. Së ift nur CinCtt breit, It is only an inch wide. Sr ift jchtt -Snhic nit. He is ten years old. NUMERALS. (3ahí®íiríec.) . § 98, The primitive Numerals are cilt, brci, öict, fünf, fícíicn, neun, 5eí)n. All other numerals are derivatives or compounds of these primitive words. Rem. 1. The apparently primitive numbers CÏf, JlBÔÎf, hUttbCtt, and tûô* fcnb have been thus developed : Gothic. Old-German. Mid.-Ger. N.-Ger. 11, ainlif, one over (ten). einlif. eilf, elf. elf. 12, tvalif, ttvo over (ten). zwelif. zwelef, zwelf. '»mclf. 100, taihuntaihund) ten times huntarot) hundert, hunbert. or hunt ) ten. or hunt, > 1000, thusnndi, ten hundred. dûsunt, tûsent, taufcnb. Rem. 2. The high numbers iDtiEiou, Sittiou, etc., are from the French. Rem. 3. Numei-als are either adjectives, nouns, or adverbs. It is more con¬ venient, however, to treat them as forming a separate part of speech. Rem. 4. There are three classes of Numeral Adjectives: (1), Cardinal Num bars; (2), Ordinal Numbers; (3), Compound Numeral Adjectives. §90.] CARDINAL NUMBERS. 277 § 99. The Cardinal Numbers are formed as follows: L Sins. 60. 0ed;3ig. 2. 70. 0ieben3Íg or 0ieb3ig. 3. S)rei. 80. Síchtjig. 4. iBier. 90. 9ieun3ig. 5. giinf. 100. §unbert. 6 0cd;6. 101. |)unbert unb einS. 7. 0ieben. 110. §unbert unb 3eí;n. 8. 120. §unbert unb 3tnan3ig. 9. 9íeun. 121. §nnbert einnnb3tnan3ig. 10. 3cf;n. 125. ^unbert fünfunb3it>an3ig. 11. Slf. 136. §unbert jed^Sunbbrei^ig. 12. 3aHiíf. 150. ^unbert unb fündig. 13. Srcijcbn. 151. Imnbert einunbfünf3ig. 14. 23icr3ci)n. 200. 3w'eibnnberí. 15. günhelpt. 225. 3d'*eif)unbertíüníunb3tuan3ig. 16. 0cc^3c(;n. 500. giinfhnnbert. 17. 0iebenjehn or ©iebjehn. 1,000. Sintanienb or ^Eaufenb. 18. S[d;t3e])n. 1,005. Sintaujenb unb fiinh 19. 9îcnn3ef;n. 1,025. Sintanjenb fünfnnb3tt>an3tg. 20. 3»an3ig. 1,500. Sintaufenb fiinf^unbert. 21. Sinunb3tt>an3ig. 2,000. 3hí£Íto6Ífnb. 22. 3lf eiiinb3inan3ig, etc. 10,000. 3eí'"tttuícnb. 30. S)rei§ig. 20,000. 3tüanji3taufenb. 31. Sinnnbbrei^ig, etc. 100,000. §unbert taufenb. 40. iBicr3Íg. 200,000. ¿h'eif'u^hert taufenb. 50. günf3ig. 1,000,000. Sine SJÍiílion. 55. günfunbfünf3ig. 2,000,000. 3^5« SJÍiílionen. 1869. 2íá;t3ef;n^unbert unb neununbfec^jtg, or (Stntaiifenb ac^tbunbcrt tteununbicd^jig. Rem. ]. Single words are usually formed of units and tens, of multiples of a hundred, and of multijdes of a thousand up to a hundred thousand. But writers vary greatly as to the method of dividing compound numbers. Rem. 2. All the other numerals, whether numeral nouns, adjectives, or ad¬ verbs, are formed from cardinal numbers. Rem. 3. From their constant and universal use, cardinal numbers retain a fixedness of form not surpassed by that of any other words in a language. They are therefore of great value in tracing the relationship of allied lan¬ guages (see § 28-30, and § lOG, Rem. 3), Rem. 4. When used as abstract nouns, cardinal numbers take the feminine gender, being in apposition with bit ¿ÚÍ)! understood : 2)ie 0iel3ctt ift bet bcil 3ubcu cine beven is a sacred nnmber with the heilige J®ws. 278 NUMERALS, [§ 100-102, § 100, The numeral ciu usually receives a strong emphasis in pronunciation {see § 53, Rem.). 1, Used wit?i a noun, Cttt is declined like the indefinite article (§ ñ-i), 2. In the expression CtU Ullb bcrfeíOC, ein may be nndeclined. 3. When used without a noun, it begins with a capital letter ((vinCf, etc.). 1, Not preceded by bCf, it follows the old declension of the adjective, 2, Preceded by bCf, it follows the new declension of the adjective, and is used both in the singular and plural numbers (bet: GitlC, bie Ginc, bag Gine; bie Gincn), Rem It is thus used (as the one, the ones) in opposition to bCb ^nbCCC^ bit 2labcrn {the other, the others). 4, The form (5ill§ is used: (1), in counting, etng, jtcci, brei, bier, etc, ; (2), in nmltiphjing, etc., einmal einS i[t einS ; (3), in giving the time q/'c/oy,when the word U()r is omitted: @g f)at ßitiÖ gejc^íagen, It has struck one. § 101. The other Cardinal Numbers are declined like the plural of adjectives of the Old declension. But and brci take no termination in the nominative and accusative: Norn, jmei, brei, bier^c, ieb^g^C, Smëlbc, (den. jmei^er, breiicr, bier. The use of the form of the third person plural. Sic (beginning Avith a capital letter), for the second person of both numbers, aa'us introduced into the German langnage in the eighteenth eentury. The use of tliis, as the form of address, has been constantly increasing since that time. * For the use of the cases, see § 81 -83. § 108, 109.] POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 2S3 Hem. G. The nominative neuter cê is used for the expletives it, there, and for so. Thus used, cê does not control the number or person of the verh . tvav ein ÏÏÎanu, There was a man. 66 finb iñeíc Scute, bie— There are many people who— 23er ift e6 ? 3d; bin'6, Who is it? It is I. 0db auírid;tii5 ! 2öir ftnb c6, Be honest ! We are (so). Rem. 7. To prevent unpleasantness of sound or ambiguity of meaning, Cb, ftCf are often replaced by bcrfclbc, bicfClilC, baffCÍbet @übedí) bie âlîutter ií;re Sodjter As soon as the mother saw her fal;, fragte fie btCfClbC^ daughter, she asked her. § 108. When the personal pronouns are used reflex- imly or reciprocally,, the regular forms are employed in the first and second joersons. But in the third joerson fid) is employed in the dative and accusative of all gen¬ ders and in both numbers : 3d; erinnere mid; baran, I remember it. 2)a6 ber[tei;t fid;, That is a matter of course. ©ie berftet;eu flt^, ""f ^-^tand themselves, or (Ihey understand each other. 6rinnern ©ic fid; ? Do you remember ? Rem. 1. To avoid ambiguity, CimtllbCb may be used in reciprocal expres¬ sions, either with or without the i-eflexive pronoun : 23;r berfte^en einanber, or SBir berfteben un§ einanber, Rem. 2. When my set/, himself, etc., are only emphatic repetitions of the nominative, they are translated by fdtft or fdÍJCt t 6r tf)at eS felbft. He did it himself. 6r felber îann e6 t^un, He can do it himself. Rem. 3. ©Cibft (or fcíbct) is often translated by the adverb even : ©elbft feine g^htbe ad;tcn if)n, Even his enemies respect him. We understand ourselves. 2. POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS, (©efi^cnjcigcnbc iÇûrujiirter.) § 109. The following are the Possessive Pronouns: Ma.sc. Fem. Ncut. Mase. Fem. Neiit. mein. meinte, mein. my. nnfer, imferiC, nnfer, cur. bein. bein^e. bcin, thy. euer, cur=e. euer. your. fein. feinde. fein. his. ibr, ibr^c. ibr. their. ibr. ibr-e. ibr. her. m, Sbr^e, 3br, your) ííírt fot 11 iO foill ita. 284 THE PRONOUN. [§ 110, ill. The Possessive Pronouns are declined in the singular like the indefinite article eilt (§ 54), and in the plural like adjectives of the Old Declension (§ 88. ¿iee also Lesson XIX., 2). Rem. 1. In declining lUlfcr, t is sometimes dropped from the tenninations scg, icm, In declining CUGf/ the C after tU is usually dropped (see Less. XIX. Rem. 2. As they are used onlif adjectively, possessive pronouns agi-ee, like all other adjectives, with the noun to which they belong (i. e., the noun pos¬ sessed), in gender, case, and number. Rem. 3. In the German, as well as in all other Teutonic (and also in the Latin and Greek) languages, the Possessive Pronouns are formed from the genitive case of Personal Pronouns. § 110. There are three ways of rendering into Ger¬ man the Absolute Possessive Pronouns (as mine, thine, ours, yours, etc.) : meiner, meine. meines, ber, bie, baS SJfeinige, ber 2)îeine, mine. betner, beine. beineS, feines. ff ff ff 2)einigc, „ S)eine, thine. feiner. feine. ff ff ff 0einige, „ 0eine, his. ií;rer, i^re. if)reS, ff ff ff 8^rige, if hers. feiner. feine. feines. ff ff ff 0einigc, „ 0eine, „ Unfere,- its. unferer, nnfere, unfere§. ff ff ff Unjrige, ours. eurer eure. eures. ff ff ff (Surige, » Sure, yours. 8f)rer, 8f)ve, 8l?veS, ff ff ff 8(;vige, ff 3t>ref vours. • if^rer. ii)re. ifireS, ff ff ff (ybrige. ff (hire. theirs. Rem. 1. SOÎeitlCr, 2)Ciner, etc. (in the first form), are declined like adjectives of the Old Declension. Rem. 2. 2)cr SDÍCtUtgC, îJGr SlîCÎttG^ etc. (of the second and third forms), are declined like adjectives of the New Declension (see Less. XLI.). Rem. 3. 2)CC SOÎGiîltijG, SctUitJC, etc. (of the second foim), are freqiiently used, not as referring to nouns already spoken of, but having certain conven¬ tional meanings : S)ie SJietntgen iaffen fid; d^nen imb My family send their compliments ben dirigen embfet)íen, to yourself and your firmily. (Sr i;at baê 0etmge geti;an, He has done his part. 3. DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. (|>inöjcifen&c ^yilrtuiiriCG) § 111. There are nine Demonstrative Pronouns. They may all be used either substantively or adjectively. §111.] DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 285 SINGULAR. PLURAL. Masculine, Feminine. Neuter, All Genders, biefer, biefe, biefes. this. biefe, these. jener, jene, jene«. that. jene, those. ber, bie, ba§. that. bie, those. berjenige, biejenige, ba^jenige. that. biejenigen, those. berfelbe, bieielbe, baffelbe. the same. biefelben, the same. iammtíi(í(>er, jämtntlidje, janimtlidje?. entire. fämmtlid)e, all. jeber, jebe, jebeë. every. ■ joldjer, íold;e, fclc^eö. such. iolc()e, such. aller, alle, atteö. all. alle, all. 1. S)ieícr, jener, fômmtïii^er, jeber, foídjer, and aller fol¬ low the old declension of adjectives (see page 149). 2. ^er is usually translated by that^ though it some¬ times is rendered by this : Rem. 1. The relative bCf and the definite article bet are but the demon¬ strative pronoun bCf, with modified meanings : Scr ift'ö bent id/6 beri)50cl;eu i;abe, It is this one to whom I have prom- Unb btr tritt C8 t'lben, ised it, and that one wishes to have it. Rem. 2. Used as a demonstrative pronoun, bCl' receives a /ui/, strong em¬ phasis ; as a relative, a medium emphasis ; as a definite article, no emphasis. Rem. 3. S)cr, used adjectively, is declined like the definite article (§ 54); used substantivel3', it is declined as follows ; SINGULAR. PLURAL. Masculine, Feminine, Neuter, All Genders, Norn, bcr^ bit, bnö. bie. Gen. bcfîcn, bcrcn, beffcn. htm, Dat. bent, bcr, bcm. bcncn. Ace. ben. bie. bnö. bie. 3. Both parts of bcrjcnigc (compounded from bcr and jener) are declined, the latter part following the neto declension of adjectives (see Less. XLIII.), 4. Both parts also of bcrfcltie (bcr and fclbc) are de¬ clined (see Less. XLIII.). Rem. 2)cr 9í0inít(l)C {the same) is more emphatic than bCrfCÍÍC, and ebCnbCCfClbe {just the same) is still more emphatic than either. 28b THE PRONOUN. [§ 112. 5. For the forms IcgiirfKi and jcbttJCbct are sometimes used. All three are employed in the sin¬ gular only. 6. 0ol¿bct usually follows the article. When it pre¬ cedes the article, it drops its termination ; Sin iold^er SDÍcnfc^, ) g ^ • rVïT r Í I OCIL-H tí IXltill» 0OÍd) em iDíeníd;, > 7. Before the definite article or a pronoun, (lü drops its termination, especially if it does not receive an emphasis : 2Öa§ fotí díí bev ©(ttncrj? What means all this soitow? (Sr treiji hou olí bem 9îid;td, He knows noihing of it all. Re7ii. 1. The demonstrative pronouns have been developed thus: Gothic: sa, sô, thata. (frew.) thizuh, , thizuh. ¡jains, jaina. Old-Ger.: dër, diu,daz. Mid.-Ger, : der, die, daz. New-Ger.: bev, bic, bad. aeser, diser, biefer, deisu, ditzi. | jener, genu, disiu, ditze. [jener,jëniu, biefc, biefcd, 1 jener, jene. Gothic; svaleiks. Old-Ger. : der selpo. iowëdar. solihher. Mid.-Ger. : (der jener). der sëlbe. ieder. solicher, New-Ger. : bcrjcntge. berfcíbe. jeber. foldjer. jainata. genaz. jënez. jened. alls, aller, aller, aller. 4. INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. (Unticitinunic priubrtcr.) § 112. Some Indefinite Pronouns can be used both sub¬ stantively and adjeetively J others can be used only as substantives. A:i substantives or adjectives. Slnber=er, other. ©iniq^er, some, any, a few. (Stlid;.er, " SDÍand^^er, many a (pi- many). 3)îetrcre|3^aíí>? On what account? Rem. 2. can not be used after prepositions (eîccept tot&Cr,. and sometimes lUU)» In its stead is used the adverb tiJO, where, compounded with the preposition into one word, as; tiJOlttth toOUOlt, iDOburC^« 1. The original r of ß)0 {Gothic, huar; Old-Ger., huar; Mid.-Ger., war; New-Ger., too) is yet retained when the preposition begins with a vowel, as : ujoritt, uiorauê, ihoran. 2. The original fl also is retained in \ßüXViVX {Mid.-Ger., war umhe). Rem. 3. SÖIIÖ is sometimes used for tttdtUttt Î 2öa§.gittern 0ie bcnn? Why do you tremble? Rem. 4. SBcr and tOdÖ have been developed thus : Co?Âîc, hvas, hvo, hva ; OW-(?er., hwër, hwiu, hwaz ; Mid.-Ger., wer, was; New-Ger., tUCt; tDdê. 2. 'tf =C§, used both adjectively and substan¬ tively, is declined like an adjective of the Old Declen- sion. It may refer to persons or things. Rem. 1. When thCÍC^CC is followed by Cilt, the ending cr is dropped. 2ScId) ein 9íicíe ! What a giant ! Rem. 2. 55¡CÍCl)Cr was originally a compound word : Gothic, hveleiks, "what like;" 0/t/-6V., hwiolihher; Mid.-Ger., Vi'éWiQv-, A^ew-íi'er., UJCldjCl'. 3. für? {whatJci'ïidoff) maybe treated as an un- combined indeclinable pronoun, referring to both per¬ sons and things: öBaÖ für ©inte haben @ic ? What kind of ink have you ? 3Jîit inaö für ®iute? With what kind of ink? * For the use of the cases, see § 81-83. N 290 PRONOUNS. [§114 Rem. 1. When the particular individual is referred to, tilt is added : SBûé für ein Slíann ift er? What kind of a fnan is he? Rem. 2. ßin, if used substantively, follows the Old Declension (ciUCr)! 2BaÔ für einer ? What kind of a one? Rem. 3. The words 0)110—für are sometimes separated; SBttÖ ift baê für eine î^fjor^eit ! What a folly that is! 6. RELATIVE PRONOUNS. (^c^iigiii^e í^ürnjüríer.) § 114. There are no primitive Relative Pronouns; but with the power of Relative Pronouns (i.e. as relat¬ ing to antecedent substantives) are employed: 1. The Interrogative Pronouns, tttr^ and toClifier j 2. The Demonstrative Pronoun, ber* 1. The same laws that govern the use of tiJCt and luaô as Interrogatives, apply to them when they are employ¬ ed as Relative Pronouns. Rem. 1. iffirr and IDÎÏÔ, as relatives, can be used only in general or indefi¬ nite expressions, never when a particular person or thing is referred to : S©£r nic^t töten miff, mug fütlen "Who will not hear, must feel." (or bet mu^ fntien), bu t^ate t^un iannft, bet® What you can do to-day, put not off fctiebe nictt auf Slîorgen (or bflê till to-morrow, berfctiebe nidff auf ïDîorgeu), Rem. 2. The antecedent of Ö)Cf or iDflê, when in the same case as the rel- 'iitive, is thus often omitted. 2. Euphony alone determines whether UJCl^Ct or bcr should be used, except in the three following cases : 1. When the relative is used adjectively, tDCÍÜlCí must be employed: ©ötte, tbCtltcö großen 2)ictterg Göthe, with the works of which 335erfe ii^ ieuuc, great poet I am acquainted. 2. When the genitive of the relative is used substantively, the genitive of bcr (sing, bcffcit, bereit, beffcn,/»/«'*. ieten) must be employed: Set 21îauu,beffen ©otufo frauîift, The man. whose son is so sick. 3. After personal pronouns of the first and second person, bcr must be em¬ ployed (§ 115, 3, Rem. 3) : ■3d;, ber (or fem. bíc) i^U fa^, I who saw him. 3. The antiquated relative fo is now used only in poetry or other dignified styles of composition. § 115.] SYNTAX OP THE PRONOUN, 291 4. Antecedent and relative pronouns are used cor- relatively as follows: ) Antecedent. Relative. oer toeid^er. ber ber. bcriemgc..... , . tt>el(ter. berjenige ber. iebev......... ber. Relative. Antecedent. ttjer (ber). tr>a§ (ba«). Rem. The following neuter indefinite pronouns and demonstratives used indefinitely, CÎlOttê, Utíílt^, UiCÎCê, ©CnigCÖ, îiaêjentgC, ara followed by the relative Ulflá : ÍÍÍIeS ttaë id; Í)íibe, All that I have. ift etlraê, tpûê id; ui^t ber« That is something that I do not an¬ flehe, derstand. he-who, the one-who, that-which. every (one) who (or which). whoever (or who), whatever (or what). 7. SYNTAX OF THE PEONOUN. (Stjntof bcá pmorítá.) § 115. 1. Personal pronouns take the person, the number, and the grammatical gender of the nouns for which they stand. 2. Adjective pronouns follow the laws of syntax that govern adjectives (§ 94). 3. Relative pronouns take the gender and number of the antecedent. Rem. 1. The relative pronoun can never be omitted : Scr 2)îanu, hcit id; ge[tern The man I saw yesterday. Rem. 2. (5Ö used expletively, and Î)(J§ and btC§ used in a collective sense (see Less. XLIII., 4), do not control the number or person of the verb: ÊÔ ftnb Scute, bte— There are people that— [inb ®ingc, bie— Those are things that— Rem. 3. The personal pronoun, if in the first or second person, is usually repeated after the relative: 2)a§ luifien luir, bic tttb bie@em« That know we, who the chamois fen jagen (@d;.), hunt. 3f»r, bit ii)C itvicg filt;rct gegen You, who make war against my meinen 'SoOn C0(t')» «o«* 292 THE VERB. [§ 116-118. THE VERB. § 116. Verbs may be classified in several ways: 1. By derivation mio primitive, derivative, and compound. 2. By use " independent, auxiliary, and potential. 3. By meaning ' ' transitive and intransitive. 4. By inflection " regular, irregular, and defective. § 117. Classification of Verbs by their derivation: 1. Primitive or radical Verbs are such as can be traced for their origin to no other radical words : to have. iStitthen, to drink. to laugh. TLem. The constancy of their use gives many primitive verbs a ñxedness of form that is of great value in tracing the relationship of languages (§ 28-30). 2. Derivative Yerbs are formed from verbs, nouns, or adjectives, the radical vowel usually taking the um- Jautj when capable of it : to smile (from Iût^îeit,to laugh). SßätntiCn, to warm (from ttami, warm). to plow (from plow). 3. Compound Verbs are formed by prefixing to a verb a preposition (separable or inseparable), a noun, an ad¬ jective, or an adverb : 9ínáíge()en, to go out. §aitb=^a6en, to handle. ^oti:geten, to Sr^finben, to invent. to acquit. go forth. § 118. Classification of Verbs as to their use : 1. Independent Yerbs can be used without other verbs : Sr laö baê He read the book. Auxiliary Verbs include the three (fcill, l^ûhcit, UîCr» ben) that are employed in forming the compound tenses of all verbs : ßr l^llt ba8 95itcb gehfcn, He has read the book. SSir iDCrbcn bas Í8lt¿b Icfen, We will read the book. Rem. They may also be used as independent verbs. Sr but baS S8U(¡^, He has the book. § 119-123.] CLASSIFICATION OF VERBS. 293 3. Potential Verbs (foíícn, loolícn, îônncit, mögctt, bürfen, ntüfftn) are employed to limit or qualify the meaning of the infinitive of independent verbs : Sr ntuji baê 23uc^ lefcit, He must read the book. Rem. Sûffcn is also often used as a. potential verb. § 119. Classification of Verbs by their meaning: 1, Verbs which govern an object in the accusative case are called Transitive by German grammarians : (Sr iicft ba§ S3uc^, He is reading the book. 2. Other verbs are called Intransitive : 1. Some intransitive verbs govern no object : (Sr íd;íüft, läuft, gef)t, He sleeps, runs, goes. 2. Others govern an object in the genitive or dative case : @ie ffJOttcn tlteincr, ! You deride me, prince! (Sr folgt fctncnt Srubcr, He follows his brother. § 120. When the subject and object of the verb denote the same person of tiling, the verb is termed reflexive ; befleißige mitß— I apply myself— Rem. When the action is mutual between the individuals that form the subject of the verb, the verb is tenned reciprocal : ©iC fci)meitt)eln cinatlbcf/ They flatter each other. 1. CONJUGATION. (Conjugation.) § 121. The Accidents of the Verb are (as in English) Moods, Tenses, Persons, Numbers, Particijflles, and Voices. 1. Moods (ÜJÍobi). § 122. The German Verb has five Moods: Indica¬ tive, Subjunctive, Conditional, Imperative, and Infinitive. Rem. The Potential Mood in English is translated into German partly by the potential verbs, and partly by the subjunctive and conditional moods. § 123. The Indicative Mood is used in expressing or de- nj^ing that which is conceived by the speaker to be certain : (Sr bat baô §au8 bcrfauft, He has sold the house. Rem. The indicative may be used in some conditional sentences where in English the subjunctive would be employed : 3fft er ret(b, fo tann cr bid geben, If he be rich, he. can give much. 294 CONJUGATION. [§ 124,125. Rem. 2. The present indicative may be used for the imperative in exprès» ing a command which is conceived as already carried into execution: ®u iibernimmft bie fpanift^en ÏHt' Take charge of the Spanish regi- gtmenter (@cí}.), ments. § 124. The Subjunctive Mood is employed: 1. In repeating statements of other jyersons, yfiïhouj, vouching for their accuracy, or about which there may be some doubt in the mind of the speaker : Sr jagte, baß bie Strmee í(í)on m He said that the army is already SSetnegung fci, i» motion, ÜJZan jagt, er fei gefiorben, It is said that he is dead. 2. In indirect questions.^ treated as quotations: fragte i^n inann er nac^ Ser# I asked him when he will go to itn geijeit tiJCbbe^ Berlin. 3. In expressing what is problematical, hypothetical, desired, or what is conceived of as possible, without having really transpired : 5BiirC er bo^ gefunb ! Oh ! that he were well! er geitefen ! Oh! that he might recover,! tüünfdjte, ba§ er faute, I wished that he might come. Rem. The subjunctive mood is thus often used in subordinate sentences, especially after verbs expressing doubt, uncertainty, fear, hope, purpose, sup¬ position, exhortation, advice, etc. : 3d;bejiDeifeíte,ba§er f^OItm33cr= I doubted that he had already ar- lin angeiommcn fci, rived in Berlin. 2)U fotift ©einen 33ater unb ©eine Thou shalt honor thy father and thy 2Jlutter el^ren, auf baÇ bu lange mother, that thou mayest live auf @rben Icbcft, [tocrbeft, long in the land. ,3d) ratf>e ©ir baff ©u fleißiger I advise you to be more diligent. Ohs. The imperf. and pluperf. tenses of the subj. mood are often used in¬ stead of the present and perfect tenses of the conditional mood (see § 125). § 125. The Conditional Mood is used to express a result dependent upon certain conditions. It corresponds in general to the Potential Mood in English, when used with the auxiliary would or should : mm bas SBettcr f(f)öner träre | j tthrbc td) ausgef>en (cond.^,(or) (jiltjic i^i au® isuhj.), ) ©as tuilrbc id) nid)t tbun (conrf.),) j do that. (or) bas tfiatc td) nn^t (suhj.), ) § 12G-128.] IMPERATIVE MOOD. 295 § 120. The Imperative Mood is used as in English. But with an imperative signification may also be used : 1. T\\q ])resent indicative (§ 123, Rem. 2). 2. ThQ j>erfect2)a7Rciple, the action being regarded as already completed : 2)ie iîrommel gerührt I Beat the drums ! 3. The infinitive present, in expressions of childish or of highly excited passion : «Sief; tti§ 58uc^ I;inctit : nur nic^t Keep looking into the book ; only icfcn, immer fingcn (©.}, do not read, keep singing. 9îid;t janícn, fflîutter 1 Do not scold, mother! § 127. The Infinitive Mood is always dependent upon another verb (except in the cases given below) : <£u(i;e JU fein, ira§ bu JU Seek to be what thou wishest to ap- münfcl^cft, pear. Exc. 1. When there is a manifest ellipsis, as : (Sell) meines SrnberS Äin^ (Shoidd) I not recognize my broth- ber nic^t eriennen ! er s children ! Exc. 2. When used for the imperative (126, 3). Exc. 3. When used as a verbal noun : 2)aS 0d;iafen erquiát, Sleep is refreshing. Bern. The infinitive of any verb may be used as a (neuter) verbal noun when there is no corresponding substantive already existing. The infinitive is often used substantively even when it does not take the article : ©einen Çeinben l)crjcií)cn ift cbeí, To forgive one's enemies is noble. Exc. 4. The infinitive is used after certain nouns and adjectives: ©S ift 3cii 5" B is time to go. ©r ijot 5DÍUÍÍ) JU Idmbfcn, He has courage to fight. 2)er 33ricf ift ft^tiJCr JU lefen, The letter is hard to read, ilitl fiegicrig h^iffcn, I am curious to know. § 128. The use of JU as a sign of the Infinitive Mood has been constantly increasing since the sixteenth century. It is now omitted only in the following cases : 1. After the potential verbs folíctt, tDOttclt, fÖnnCH; lltö* 0cn, biirjcn, müfícn (and laffcn): ■3^ ïiinn C8 nid^t icfcn, I can not read it. 296 THE VERB. [§ 129. 2. After the verbs füllen, ptCIl, lernen, motíjen, fc^cn : nta^í nüd;» jittevn, That makes me tremble. 2Btr prtcn fie fingen, We heard them sing. 3. After the verbs löleikn, jalreit, gc^en, liegen, reiten, fielen, and !^akn and fein, in certain expressions: ®r bleibt He keeps his seat. SBir gc^cn fpajieren, We are going to take a walk. Rem. 1. The infinitive with JU is used after the prepositions onfldíí^ ol^nc, iim : Síílftatí JU gc^en, blieb er, Instead of going, he remained. £)i)nc bag P wiffen— Without knowing that— Rem. 2. The infinitive of the active voice is often translated into English by the infinitive of the passive voice : SBoê ift p fljUll ? What is to he done? Rem. 3. In tne German only the infinitive can be used as a verbal noun (and not, as in English, the present participle also) : ©r ift bcê ©^lOQ^Cn^ miibe, He is tired of the chattering. 2. Participles (^aritstpten). § 129. There are two Participles, the Present and the Perfect. Rem. 1. Participles are used attributively in German to a far greater ex¬ tent than in English. When thus used they are subject to all the laws oj declension of attributive adjectives : 2)er am 5. ©c^Jtember ucrftor^citt The mayor of Kronfeld, who died ißürgcrmciftcr bon ^ronfeíb, on the fifth of September. Rem. 2. Participles are frequently preceded by tlie case they govern, by a modifying adverb, or a limiting clause : S)ie §onig fûlltntCln&e Sienc, The honey-gathering bee. Sag ung bCtfoigcnbC ©efi^id, The fate that is pursuing us. Ser foeben bon Sct^Jsig angcfoitt- The express train that has just ar- ÎJlCnC ©djneïïjltg, rived from Leipsic. Ser ©c^netljug bon SeifJJtg if! fo« The express train has just arrived eben ongcïontmcit, from Leipsic. Rem. 3. The adverb and the direct object (if a noun) is often joined to the participle into a compound word : Ste gcfc^gebenbe iBerfammlnng, The legislative assembly. Sie ncugebnnbenen iBiid^er, The newly-bound books. Rem. 4. Participles, like adjectives, may be used as nouns or a« adverbs : (5g giebt btele ©clc^rteit, bie— There are many learned men, who— SDiit ficbcnb f^eigem Staffer, With boiling-hot water. § 130, 131.] PARTICIPLES. 29"/ § 130. The Present Participle is formed by adding =b to the present infinitive : to have; ^ût^enî), having, ^tff'tïïf to go; gcl^iCnb/ going. Bern. I. If preceded by JU, the present participle takes a passive significa¬ tion (compare the Latin passive participle in andus, or endus). ©in 3U ucrmeibcnbct Se()icr, A fault that should be avoided. Rem. 2. The participle thus used was not declined before the last century. Rem. 3. The present participles of many verbs are used mostly, and in some cases only, with adjective significations: Slbjlimmenb, discordant. Slblnefcnb, absent. 2ínít*eíenb, present. SSebcutcnb, important, ©ringenb, urgent. 3îetjeub, charming. § 131. The Perfect Participle is formed (1) by adding =t to the root of all regular verbs, and -tU to the root of all irregular verbs ; and (2) by prefixing -Qt to the root of all verbs, except the inseparable compounds (§ 154), and those with sirctl (íicrtlt) in the infinitive : Perfect Participle. gCíIiebít, loved. gc==9eb=cn, given. toergebsCH/ forgiven. bebe(í4, covered. ihlbtr=t, studied. Infinitive. licíiíen, to love, gcíiícn, to give, ÔCrgcbîCn, to forgive, Jcbctf'CIt, to cover, ftubir^en, to study, Rem. 1. In separable compounds gc= adheres to the root of the verb: ÜtlÍ-\ r e = en, to pronounce, aué;gCíií5roc^=en, pronounced. Rem. 2. When the verbs fOÍÍCn, tliolícn, lüKttClt, OTÖgcn, bÜrfCfl, miifîcn, lafîCB, 5ct|cn, íc^cn, prcn, Itcífcn are preceded by the infinitive of anotheí verb, they take the form of the present infinitive for that of the past participle. The participial form of the potential verbs is only used when they are em¬ ployed as though independent verbs (the independent verb which they modify being understood) : cê nidjt Icien fönncn^ I could not read it. 3tn bnbc i^n fingen I)ÖrCtt/ I have heard him sing. ^abc eS nie gcfonttt, I have never been able (to do) it. Rem. 3. In forming the passive voice, tDCtbCtt drops gCs : ©r ift beftraft toorbctt^ He was fined. (but; ©r ifl reid? gClDOtbCIt/ He bas become rich. Re}». 4. Many perfect participles have almost lost their verbal signification, and are used as adjectives : N 2 298 THE VERB. [§ 132,138. 1. From active verbs : bcíaiint, well-known ; gelebrt, learned. 2. From reflexive verbs: befd^eiben, modest ; betrunfcn, drunken; bCi trübt, sad ; gefc^icEt, skillful ; gebraucht, second-hand. 3. From oiso/ete verbs : augefefien, resident ; tcrfi^ieben, different. 4. Participles from nouns, with no corresponding verbs: geftiefelt, "in boots;" geftirnt, starrv-; bejahrt, full of years. Rern. 5. The perfect participle of some verbs, as íaufcn,f(ll^rCn,rcUcn/etc., fc used after fontîtiejt (the present participle being used in English): (5r îatu gelaufen/ He came running. 3. Tenses (Scitförmen). § 132. The Present Tense is used in German more fre¬ quently than in English instead of other tenses. 1. Instead of the future teme : dich fonttne balb tnieber, I shall come back soon. Rem. Until as late as the fourteenth century future time was always ex¬ pressed by the present tense. 2. Instead of the perfect tense in speaking of the length of a period of time not yet completed : 2Bie lange finí) 0ic in ^Berlin ? How long have you been in Berlin ? •3th tiU fi^on acht 3fih^t hitr, I have been here eight years. 3. For the imperfect tense, in lively narration : 3th gctC gefterntnit tnctnem Äinbe I went yesterday with my child to urnbieiparabe jnfehen, Ucrlicrc see the parade; I lost sight of e§ au8 meinen Singen— it— § 133. The Imperfect and Perfect Tenses are employed as in English, under the following limitations : 1. The perfect is often employed, when in English the imperfect would be used : 3^ hotc ihn geftern gcfCtCH/ I saw him yesterday. 2. The progressive form of the imperfect in English must be rendered by the imperfect in German. 3ci) laß bie ßtitnng alé er ht^tin« I was reading the newspaper when ïam, he came in. Rem. The imperfect is always employed after the adverb ßici. § 134.J PASSIVE VOICE. 299 3. The imperfect is frequently used in general ex¬ pressions, in which the perfect would be employed in English : äöarcil Sie fc^on in SSien? Have you been in Vienna? 4. When the speaker wishes to convey the idea that he was personally cognizant of an evenE the imperfect is usually employed: ïcrgeftcrn ftarb bei mir unjet ge« Day before yesterday our dear friend liebtev gveunb, ^crr — Mr. N. died at my house. Ttem. With the perfect (and also with the pluperfect) the auxiliary may be omitted in subordinate sentences : 2)aS §auii, melc^eâ id; beute gc^ The house which I saw to-day is fcbcn, i[t febr beviuem, aber e8 very convenient, but it is too ift ju tbeuer, dear. 4. The Passive Voice (®tc § 134. The Passive Voice is formed by joining the auxil¬ iary töcrbcil, to hecome, to Vhq perfect participle {seeparor digm, § 161): §ier intrb Seutfd; gcfbtflilCtl, German is spoken here. Ser geinb tDUrbC gcfibingctt, The enemy Avas defeated. Rem, 1. The action is considered as becoming accomplished, that is, as talcing place at the time alluded to. When the action is considered as completed the verb feilt is used, and the participle is usually treated as a predicative ad¬ jective. Sa3 §au§ mar fc^on abgebrannt, The house Avas already burnt doAvn ab3 bie f^euermebr aniam, Avhen the fire-company arrh-ed. Rem. 2. In the Gothic fcitl Avas ahvays employed. In the Old-Ger., lDCr= ten was frequently used for the future tenses. In the Mid.-Ger., töCtbCn was frequently used in the past tenses. In the New-Ger., fciu was some¬ times used as auxiliary ; in the imperative mood it is always employed. Tie ®d)iad)t mar bcrlorcn, The battle is lost. ©Ott fei gelebt ! God be praised! 1. When the active agent is indefinitely alluded to, the active voice, with lUûU as nominative, is employed: „.Çeuf nimmt man nid^t gefangen," "No prisonersavíIIbe taken to-day.' 2. AVhen an intransitive idea is expressed by a transi¬ tive verb, the reflexive form is employed: ®a8 ÜCrftcbt fid). That is a matter of course. 300 THE VERB. [§ 135. 3. When the object of the action is made the subject of the verb, and the agent is not alluded to, the reflex¬ ive form is usually employed : Sine neue Orbnung ber 2)tnge A new order of things is established. füí)fí fid; ein, 2. AUXILIARY VERBS. (|)iilfëbcr6a.) § 135. There are three Auxiliary Verbs, l|aben, fcill, and tocrbcn* They are employed as follows: 1. Transitive, Reflexive, Imjpersonal, and Potential Verhs take Idbctt as the auxiliary: Sä) bate ti)n gegeben, I have seen him. (Sr bat ficb gefreut, He has rejoiced. ©Ö bat beute geregnet, It has rained to-day. (Sr bat eS gemußt. He has been compelled (to do) it. 2. Intransitive Yerhs denoting a change of condition, or a motion from one particular place to another, take fcitl as the auxiliary : (Sr ift augeîommen. He has arrived. (Sr ift nad; ißerlin gereift, He has gone to Berlin. (but) (gr bat btei gereift. He has traveled much. Rem. 1. The verbs cilcn, fabtcti, fticbcn, btnfcH, jagcit, íícttcrnAnctbcit^ íanbcn, laufen, qucílcu, reifen, reiten, rinnen, fegeín, ftbtffen, ftbtoimnten, fbrtngen, ftobtn^ treiben, manbern, when not indicating a motion to or from a particular place, have baten as the auxiliary : @r bat biei gereift. He has traveled much. Rem. 2. ©ein, teerten, and bleiben take fein as the auxiliary: @r ift iu iöeriiu geteefen. He has been in Berlin. ®r ift Äaufmauu geteorben. He has become a merchant. 8. Other Intransitive Verbs take as auxiliary: 1. Those governing an indirect object in the geni¬ tive or dative case : 2Bir batten ibm gcboifeu. We had helped him. 3lIIe batten feiuer Sitelîeit gcíad;t, All had laughed at his vanity. 2. Those expressing absolute rest : Cr bat fcbr lauge gefianbcn, He has been standing very long. § 136.] AUXILIARY VERBS. 301 Rem. 3. Some verbs, with two or more significations, take or fein, according to the signification with which they may be used : toar bon ber ®tabt fortgefahren, He had driven out of the city. (Sr ^attc fortgefahren im Sefen, He had continued to read. 3. SSJcrbcn is used in forming the future tenses of the active voice, and in forming the passive voice. § 136. The verb l^abctl, to have, is conjugated thus; Principal Parts: í)ttT=tC, ge=:^aÖi^ * INDICATIVE MOOD. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD." Present Tense. t(i) bahiC, bn ioft, «r fiat, mir httbí en, I have, thou hast, he has. we have. ihr h b Ä (c)t, you have, fie hb « en, they have. ich bu habí eft, er h a b Í c, mir habí en, ihr habí et, fte habí en. I have, thou hast, he has. we have, you have, they have. i ttcrbît -jjciabt iabcn. bu ttJtfIt gehabt kbcn. er ôîrb gehabt hüben, trir tu erbten gehabt höben, ihr Jüerb==ct gehabt höben, fte toerb^cn gehabt höben. ich tonr5=c bu iuürb»eft haben, er lüürb^c haben, trir it)ürb = en haben, ihr Jnürb'Ct haben, fie tnürbicn haben. tdh toiirbiC bu tü ü r b Í cft g e h a b t höben, er innrbiC gehabt höben, h)ir trürbicn gehabt höben, ihr innrb = et gehabt höben, fic tüürbien gehabt höben. COÎÎDITIONAL MOOD. Present Tense. I would, or I should have, etc. höben, or i¿h höMe {Imper/. Subjunc.^ " bu hätiteft " " " er hät = te " " " irir hät = tcn " " "ihr " " " fte hät^icn " " Perfect Tense. I would, or I should have had, etc. oehöbt höben, or id; húí=íe gehöht {Piup.Suhj.') 'bu hät'^ieft gehabt " " ' er hät^te gehabt " " ' toir h ätzten gehabt " " ' ihr bätitct gehabt " " ' fie h ätzten gehabt " " IMPERATIVE MOOD. höb^e fbn), have thou. Wb-c (er), let him have. höhten trir, let us go. höbiet ihï, have (you), höhten fie, let them have. INFINITIVE ]MOOD. Pres. höb^en, to have. | Pe;/. gehöbt höben, to have had. Participles. Pres. hnb^enb, having. | Per/, gehobt, had. Pern, ^nben, Gothic liaban, is allied to the Latin habere {to have), from tvhich are derived tiie Spanish haber, Port, haver, Ital. acere, French avoir. §137. AUXILIARY VERBS. §137. The verb fcitt, to Jö,is conjugated thus: Principal Parts: fcilt, toar, gc=tDCfcn* INDICATIVE MOOD. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD- Present Tense. id? fCh I ic^ iltn, I am. bu ilift, thou art. çr ift, he is. toir finb, we are. i^r fcib, you are. ftl finb, they are. tc^ iDOr, I was. bu Ö)ar=ft, thou wast, er tDûr, he was. trir tv a r # cn, we were, i^r War* (c)t, you were, fie ÍÜ a V Í cn, they were. I have been, etc. icf) bin gctticfcn. bu bift g e tn e f e n. er ifi g e it> e f e u. trir finb g e » e f e n. ihr fcib g e tue fen. fie finb g eine feu. I had been, etc. icb mar gcmcfcn. bu matift g e » e f e n. er mar g e m e f e n. mir m a r = en g e m e f e u. tbr m a r = t g e m e f e n. fU m a r » en g e m e f e n. I shall be, etc. iá> mcrbíC fein, bu mirft fein, er mirb fein, mir merb»cn fein, tbr m erb» et fein, fte metb'Cn fein. am. bu fei» eft/ thou art. er fei/ he is. mir feigen/ we are. ifir fei »et/ you are. fie fei» en/ they are. Imperfect Tense. ic!b mûr^e/ i was. bu mär» eft/ thou wast, er m ä r » e/ he was. mir mär» en/ we were, ibr mär»et/ JOU were, fie mär»en/ they were. Perfect Tense. I have been, etc. id; fei gemefen* bu fei»eft gemefeu. er fei gemefeu. mir íci»en gemefeu. ibr fei»et gemefeu. fte fei»en gemefeu. Plvperfect Tense. I had been, etc. id; mör»c gemefen. bu mär »eft gemefeu. er m ä r » e gemefeu. mir mär»en gemefeu. ibr mär »et geme jeu. fie mär »en geme 'eu. First Future Tense. I shall be, etc. id; merb»c fein. bu m e r b » eft i e i lu er m e r b » e fei u. mir m erb »en feiu. ibr m erb» et feiu. fic merb.en feiu. 304 THE VERB. [§ 137. Second Future Tense. I shall have been, etc. ic^ töCrÖiC bu toirft er toitb írir m e r b í en i^r U) c r b ^ et fte lücrb^en gcöjcfcn fein. <5 e in e Í e n fein, g e in e j e n fein, g e in e f e n fein, g e in e f e n fein, geinefen fein. I shall have been, etc. toerbîe geioefen fein, bu in e r b ' eft g e in c f e n fein, er inerb'e geinefen fein, inir in e r b í en g e in e f e n fein, t^r inerb^et geinefen fein, fie tnerbien geinefen feiH. id^ tniirb-e bu in il r b Í eft fein, er in ü r b í e fein, inir in ü r b í en fein, if)r inürb^et fein, fie m ü r b = en fein. CONDmONAL MOOD. Present Tense. I would, or I should be, etc. fein, or i^ lOÜr=C (imperfect Subjunctive). eft " bn inär^ " er inär^e " mir mär »en " i^r mär »et " fie mär»en ii i^ bn er iriiirbíe mürb»eft gemefen fein, mürb»e gemefen fein, mir mürb»en gemefen fein, i^r mürb»et gemefen fein, fie mürb»en gemefen fein. Perfect Tense. I would, or I should have been, etc. gemefen fein, or id; mär:e gemefen (Piup.Suh.) " bn mär »eft gemefen " er mär»e gemefen " mir mär»en gemefen " i^ir mär»et gemefen " fie mär»en gemefen ii fei (bu), be thou, ici er, let him he. mPEEATTVE MOOD. feigen mir, let us be. ici=et i^r, be you. fei=en fie, let them be. Pres. fein, to be. Pres. feisenb, being. ESTFmiTTVE MOOD. I Perf. gemefen fein, to have beea PARTICIPLES. I Perf. gemefen, been. Tiem. The different parts of fein are to be traced to three roots; ]. S3in, bift (and Engl, he, been), are probably related to bdUen, to build. 2. ©ein, fei, feib, finb, and ift (with Engl, are, art, is) are from a verb¬ al root that is now only found in Sanscrit as and Latin esse (to he). 3. ©emefen, mne, märe (and Engl, was, were), are from an obsolete verb, in Sanscrit was (to reside), in Gothic vivian (to re7nain, to be), Old-Ger. wësan, Mid.-Ger. wësen. The former present participle wësend is now only used in the adjectives niimefenb, (tbmefenb. § 138.] AUXILIARY VERBS. 305 § 138. Conjugation oftócrbcn, lecome: Principal Parts: ttJCrb'^Clt, lDUrb'=C (toiirb), gc:iBorb'=cn* INDICATIVE MOOD. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present Tense. t(^ iDCrbîC, I become, bu thou becomest. ev toirb^ he becomes, trir to e r b ä en, we become, ibl to e r b » ci, you become, fie to c r b = cn, they become. id) tDCrb^C, I become, bu to e V b Í eft, thou becomest. er to C r b = C, he becomes, toir to e r b Í cn, we become, ibt to erb »et, you become, fie to erb »en, they become. Imperfect Tense. icb tnurbiC,* I became, bu to u r b » eft, thou becamest. er to u r b » c, he became, toir to u r b » en, we became, ibr to U r b » et, you became, fie to U r b » en, they became. Perfect Tense I liave become, etc. td) bin gcKJorbcn or tnorben. bu bift gctoorbeu "toorbeu. cr ift g e to 0 r b e n " to 0 r b e u. loir finît gctoorbeu "toorbeu. ibr fcib gctoorbeu "toorbeu. fie finît gctoorbeu "toorbeu. id) Uincb'C, I became, bu to it r b » eft, thou becamest. er tOÜrb»C, he became, toir to ii r b » cn, we became, ibr to Ü r b » ct, you became, fie tOUrb»cn, they became. I have become, etc. id) fci gciDorbcn ordjorbcn. bu fciiCft gctoorbeu " toorbeu. er fci gctoorbeu " toorbeu. toir feúcn gctoorbeu " toorbeu. ibr fei»ct gctoorbeu " toorbeu. fie fei»cn gctoorbeu" toorbeu. Pluperfect Tense. I had become, etc. id) tear ocbtflrbcnortoorbcn. bu tnarft gctoorbeu " toorbeu. cr tnar gctoorbeu " toorbeu. toir toar»cn gctoorbeu " toorbeu. ibr ioar=t gctoorbeu " toorbeu. fte toar»cn gctoorbeu " toorbeu. I had become, etc. id) to'àï-t gcttorbcnorniorbcn. toorbeu. toorbeu. toorbeu. toorbeu. I shall become, etc. id) lucrbiC tDcrbcn. bu Utirft to erb eu. cr micb to er ben. toir toerb»cn toerbcu. ibr to erb »et tocrben. fte to c r b » cn to e r b e u. bu to ä r » eft gctoorbeu er toär»c gctoorbeu toir to är » cn gctoorbeu ibr to ä r » ct gctoorbeu fie toär»cn gctoorbeu " toorbeu. First Future Tense. I shall become, etc. id) tnerbiC tncrbcn. bu to e r b » eft to e r b e u. er to e r b » c to e r b e n. toir to e r b » cn to e r b e n. iftr toerb»ct to erb en. fte to e r b » cn to e r b e n. ♦ In the singular of the Imperfect Indicative the forms UJatî), bit iDÛtÔft, ct tOdtb are sometimes employed. BOG THE VERB. [§ 138. Second Future Tense. I shall have heeome, etc. tc^ ujerb^c gctoorbcn fcht. hu tiJirft geworben fein, er löirb geworben fein, wir werb^cn geworben fein, i^r w e r b Í et geworben fein, fíe w erb® en ge w er ben fein. I shall have hecorae, etc. tci> üjerb=c (jeinorben fein. bu w e r b ® cft geworben fein, er werb®c geworben fein. geworben fein, geworben fein, geworben fein. wir w e r b ® en iljr w e r b ® et fie w e r b ® en CONDITIONAL MOOD. Present Tense. I would, or I should become, etc. tniirbiC bn wiirb® er würb® Wir w ü r b ® i^r würb® fie würb® werben or id; eft werben " bu c werben " er wnrb®c en w e r b e n " wir w ü r b ® en et werben " if)r würb®et en werben "fie würb®en Perfect Tense. I would, or I should have had, etc Wnrb=e {Imperf. Subjunctive). w Ü r b ® eft id; bu er wiirbîC w ü r b = würb® wir würb® ihr würb® fie würb® (jeworben fein Cft geworben fein c geworben fein en geworben fein et geworben fein en geworben fein or (( Wir wür^ ihr War fie w ä r ^ IMPERATIVE MOOD. toCrb=r (bu), become thou. W e r b ® e (er), let him become. id; wäriC geworben {Pl. Sub.) bu wär®eft geworben " " er Wär®e geworben " " en geworben " " et geworben " " en geworben " " Werb^en wir, let us become, w e r b ® et if;i, become you. W e r b ® en fie, let them become. INEINITIVE MOOD. Pres. Werb^en^ to become. | Per/. geWOrben fein, to have become. PARTICIPLES. Pres. Werb^enb^ becoming. ] Per/. ge=WOrb'en, become. Rem. Sßerben (Middle-German werden, to take a direction) is allied to the Latin vertere {to turn). á 139, 14Ü.J REGULAR VERBS. 307 8. REGULAR VERBS. (Bcitttörtcr bcr tonjugaiion.) §^139. Under Regular Verbs (termed by German gram, marians verbs of theWeaJc Conjugation) are included; 1. All derivative verbs, as: trärmen, jammern, ppgen, le^cn, fc0cn, ftcUen, tränfen. 2. A ÍQVÍ^primitive verbs, as: [agen, retten, [ucí)en. 3. Foreign verbs (except pfeifen, preífen, fd)reiben). Rem. 1. Most regular verbs are transitive. Rem. 2. Regular verbs never take the umlaut, nor do they change the radb cal vowel in inflection. n?ürm=en, to warm ( from tnarm). ^ammer^n, to hammer ( " jammer), babieu, to bathe ( " S3ab). pflügten, to plough ( " ^'fiug). ie.ven, to lay ( " liegen), te^ en, to set ( " fi^en). fleli«en, to place (from ftef;en). tränLen, to water ( " trinfen). i „y-iW, to say (primitive), rett^en. to save ( " ). ftubir -itt, to study (from Latin). iaftei'«en, to chastise ( " " ). § 140. Conjugation of the Regular Verb licklt, to lovei Principal Parts: ííc5'=cn, gcdicöt^ INDICATIVE MOOD. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present Tense. t(^ liebre, I love, bu 11 e b = ft, thou lovest. er Í t e b Í t, he loves, toir Iieb«cn, we love, iiir Í i e b Í t, you love, fie itebscn, they love. tcf> íictlíC, I love, bu Í t e b Î eft, thou lovest. er Heb®c, he loves, trir Í i e b Í en, we love. ii)r lieb» et, you love, fie I i e b Í en, they love. Imperfect Tense. i(^ iiebde, I loved, bu I i e b Í teft, thou lovedst. er lieb« tC, he loved, luir lieb» ten, we loved, i()r H e b = tet, you loved, fie Í i e b. ten, they loved. id) íieíiíte, I loved, bu lieb« teft, thou lovedst. er liebste, he loved, ivir Í i e b Í ten, we loved. if)r Í i e b Í tet, you loved, fie íieb«ten, they loved. 308 THE VERB. L§ 140. I have loved, etc. td; íiaíi=c gclieít. bu ^aft geliebt, er geliebt, tüir biiïj^cn geliebt, ibr ^abit geliebt. fit Í;abícn geliebt. I had loved, etc. ic^ ^atííc oclicíit. bu bitítcft geliebt. íc geliebt, iüir í;atzten geliebt, i^ir ^at^íet geliebt, fie ^ateten geliebt. I shall love, etc. id) tocrbíC íteíicn. bu üJtrft lieben, er toirb lieben, mir merb = cn lieben, ibr m erb »et lieben, fie merbíCn lieben. Perfect Tense. I have loved, etc. id; gcliciit. bn geliebt, er b^íbíC geliebt, mir bíib:=cti geliebt, ibr b geliebt baben. geliebt baben. geliebt baben. en geliebt baben. et geliebt baben. en geliebt baben. I shall have loved, etc. idb merbie geliebt baben* bn m er bieft geliebt baben. er merbic geliebt baben. mir merbien geliebt baben. ibr merbiet geliebt baben. fie merbien geliebt baben. id; toiirbie bn mürbieft lieben, er m ü r b i e lieben, mir miírbien lieben, ií;r ' m n r b i et lieben, fie mil r bien lieben, CONDITIONAL MOOD. Present Tense. I would, or I should love, etc. lieben, or id; íiebíte bn liebiteft er lieb i te mir liebiten ibr lieb»tet fie liebiten {Imperf ¿'«¿/«ne.) § 141.] REGULAR VERBS. 309 Perfect Tense. I would, or I should have loved, etc. tc^ ttürliíC ßcliebt Î)û6cn, or id? pMc gcliefit iPl.Subj.') bu tuürb^cít geliebt ijabcn, " bu bät-tcft geliebt " " er würbet geliebt beben, " er bät-tc geliebt " " luir iinlrb^en geliebt bnbcn, " te>ir bät^tcn geliebt " " ibr tüürb^Ci geliebt bûbcn, " ibr bätztet geliebt " " fie tuürb-cn geliebt bttbcn, " fie bät-icn geliebt " " IMPERATIVE MOOD. ItebîCn tuir, let us love. licbiCt ibe, love you. íicbíCn fie, let them love. iicbsC (bu), love thou. ItcbiC er, let him love. INFENTITVE MOOD. Pres. Hebten, to love. 1 Per/, gcltcbt bttbCH, to have loved. PARTICIPLES. Pres. liCb'Cnb, loving. | Per/. ßCllCbt, loved. § 141. Table of endings of Regular Verbs: j Present Tense. Imperfect Tense. ! 1 Indie. Suhj. Imperat. Indicative. Subjunctive. 1 Pers. Sing. -e, -te, -ete. -te, -ete. 2 Pers. Sing. .Cfl, 4t, -eft. -teft, -etcft. -teft, -cteft, 3 Pers. Sing. -et, -t. -te, -ete. -te, -ete. 1 Pers. Plur. -en, -en. -en, -en, -en. -ten, -eten. -ten, -eten. 2 Pers. Plur. -et, -t, -et. -et, -t. -tct, -etct. -tet, -etet, 3 Pers. Plur. -en. -en. -en. -en.-en. -ten. -eten. -ten. -eten. Infinit, »eu, =n. Pres. Part, -eub, -ub. Perf. Part, ge—et, ge—t. For the sake of euphony, or of the metre in poetry, the first C of terminations is frequently dropped. Rem. 1. It can never be dropped, however, when the stem of the verb ends in îb, :t, or ißlt (contracted from ißCll). Rem. 2. The contraction always takes place in stVl, =Cnb, when the stem ends in îCÏ or stt. (In the 1st Pers. Sing, of the Pres. Ind., and in the 2d Pers. Sing, of the Imperative, the t of the stem is dropped.) Rem. 3. When the stem ends with a vowel, sf from :CU is frequently dropped. Rem. 4. In ;Cft, the C is not dropped when the stem ends b, Í, jj, j, fd)* Rem. 5. The contraction rarely takes place in the subjunctive mood. 310 THE VERB. [§ 142, 143. tiebíCn, to love, íud^íCit, to seek, reiften, to travel, fifd^icn, to fish, hablen, to bathe, ieit=ett, to lead, fegn^eii, to bless, tabei=n, to blame, iDanber«n, to wander. Iteb-c, 'ft, 4, Juà)'e, 4t, 4, reif'^e, »eft, 4, fifd^^e, »eft, 4, bab»e, »eft, »et, íeit»e, »eft, »et, íegn»e, »eft, »et, ta(bl)»e, »ft, 4, tt>an(br)»e, »ft, »t. 4e, geíie6»t. »te, gefuc^»t. 4c, gerei»ft. »te. gefiíd;»t. »ete. gebab»ct. »ete. geíeit»et. »ete, gefegn»et. »te. getabel»t. »te. getnanber»t 4. IRREGULAR VERBS. CäcitiBÖrtcr ter ftorîcn toitjugation.) § 142 The Irregular Verbs (called by German gram¬ marians verös of the Strong or Old Conjugation) are all native German verhs (except the verbs and fc^reibctl, which are derived from the Latin; § 145), Rem. There are one hundred and ninety-one Irregular Verbs. § 143. Irregular Verbs are divided into seven classes. The classification is based upon the changes which the radical vowel undergoes in forming CaQ gprindgml parts : 1. Verbs of the first class have a different radical vowel in each principal part. 2. With verbs of the second, third, and fourth classes, the radical vowel of the imperfect only varies from that of the present. 3. Verbs of the fifth and sixth classes have the same vowel in the imperfect tense as in CIíq perfect participle. 4. Verbs of the seventh class are aiwmalous. They follow in conjugation partly 4;he laws of regular, and partly those of irregular verbs. Revi. The following table represents the changes the radical vowels unden go in forming the principal parts of the seven classes of irregular verbs. § 144.j IRREGULAR VERBS. 311 § 144. Classified list of the Irregular Verbs: Class. Present. Imperf. Partie. ' Examples. No. i 1 St i (or c), a, U (or o). binb^eu, banb, gcibunb^en. 45. i ; 2(1 1 3(1 1 "Ith t, a, c. a, u, Û. a, ic(ori),a. gebiCn, flab, ge^gebsen. id^Iag-en, jc^Iug, ge4d;Iag>en. ^alLcn, geitalt^eit- 14.1 10., 14. j ôth 6 th ci, i (or ic), Í or (iC). iC(C,eic.),0, 0. beißseu, bifj, gcTnfhen. fliet^en, goß, ge-goihen. 40. 52. 7 th ¡ anomalous. bring=en, brac^^tc, gc>bra(í)T. 16. ! Total number of irregular verbs 191.1 1. Irregular ver binbcn. banb. gebnnbcn. ftnbcn, fanb. gefunben. fibroinbcn, f(bwanb. gcfcbmunbcn. trinben, Wanb, getrunben. bringctt, brang. gebrungen. gelingen, gelang. gelungen. fltngen, fíang. geîlungcn. ringen, rang. gerungen. fcblingcn. fcblang. gefíblungcn. ftbttJtngen, fibwang. gefcb ir ungen. fingen. fang. gelungen. fpvingen, fprang. gefprungen. jttJingen, Strang, gestr ungen. finfcn. fanf. gefunfen. (linfen. jlanf. geflunfen. trinfcn. tranf. gehunfen. bentnncn. begann. begonnen. geroinnen. gctrann. gewonnen. rinnen. rami. geronnen. ftniien. fann. gefonnen. fpinnen. fpann. gefponnen. fcbtrimnten. fiiriraram. gefcbtrommen foramen. fara. gefomracn). 2. Irregular verbs neben, nob, nenebcu. Icfcn, kg, flclcfcil. iU'ncfctt, gcnaá, gcnefcn. fffcn- aö, otadfcn* frcffcn, frap, gcfreffcn. mcffen, nia§, gemcffen. bergeffeit, bcrgap, vcrâcffcn. of the first class : bredten. brach. gebrochen. fpredien. fpracb. gcfprodben. fledien. fiad). gefloiben. brefdicn. braf(b, gcbrofcben. fterben. flarb. geflorben. rerbcrben, Perbarb, Perbotben. ir erben. Warb, geworben. »erben, warb. geworben (or ir erben. würbe. geworben). bergen. barg. geborgen. berflen. barjl. geborflen. gebären. gebar, geboren. bclfcn, i^alf. geholfen. »erfen. Warf, geworfen. treffen, traf. getroffen. flecfen. flacf. gejloiiben. fcbreden, fcbratf. gefdirocïcn. fleljlen. ftabl. gejlohlen. bcfet)Ien, befallt. befohlen. empfehlen, empfahl. empfohlen. nebnien, nal)m. genommen. gelten, galt. gegolten. fibelten, febalt gefeholten. the second class : treten. trat. gehctcn. fehcn. fah, gcft'hen. gefchchen. gefdhah, gefdiehcn. (bitten. bat, gebeten.) (liegen. log, gelegen.) (fi^en. fag, gcfeffcn.) (fein. war. gewefcn.) 312 THE VERB. [§ 144 3. Irregular verbs of the third class : bacfcit. buf. gcbacfcn. fd)íagcn, fdtlug. gcfd) lagen. fahren, fu^r. gefahren. tragen. trug. getragen. graben, grub. gegraben. fd)atfen. fituf. gefctaffcn. lübcn, lub. gelabctu tracbfen, ttuitö. gcteactfen. ma^letv (tnu§I), gemalter. ttafcbcn. toufd). gcttjafitcn. 4. Irre guiar verbs oí i\\e fourth class » « fflOen, fiel, gcfaOcn. fangen, fing, gefongcn. galten, geilten. tangen, tins. getangcn. braten, briet. gebraten. (getcn. ging. gegangen.) ratbcn. Tteti gerat^en. laufen. lief, gelaufen. Íítiúfen, i^ltef. gef (piafen. tauen. tieb, getaucn. blafcn, biteö. geblafcn. flogen. flieg. geflogen. lafíctt. Ueö, gelaífctt. rufen. rief. gerufen. 5. Irregular verbs of fifth class : beiden. big. gcbiffcn. leiben, litt, gelitten. befl eigen. licflig. befliffen. f^neiben. fctnitt. gefctnitten, reigen. vig, gcriffen. îneipen. fnipp. gefnippen. fd)leigen. gefctUffen. bleiben. blieb. geblieben. fd)meigen. fcttnig. gefd)miffen. reiben. rieb. gerieben. fbieigen. ibli§, gefpliffen. fitreiben. fd)rieb, gefctrieben Í Teilen, bli(t, gcblid}cn treiben. trieb. getrieben. gleiten. giift, geglichen. leiten. liel), gelieten. fd)Iciiten, fitlilt, gefd)Iid)en. fitreien. id)rie. gefcprieen. flrcid)en. fh-i(t, geflriiten. fpeien. fpie. gefpieen. »cid)cn. »iit, geiuicben. Seiten, Stet' gesieten. greifen. gviff, gegriffen. gebeiten. gebiet' gebieten. feifcn, liff, gcfiffcn. meiben. micb. gemieben. fneifen. ïniff, gefniffen. fd)eiben. fdjicb, gefd}ieben. bfeifcn. bfiff. gepfiffen* preifen. pried. gepriefcn. fdileifcn. fd)Iiff, gefd)íiffen. tocifcn. toied. geloicfen. gleiten. glitt. geglitten. ^ fcttoeigen, id)toieg. gefd^ttiegen reiten, ritt, geritten. fleigen. flieg. gefiicgen. fibreiten. f(tritt. gefítritten. fd)cinen. fd)icn, gefdñenen. flreiten. flritt. geflritten. (teigen. tieg' geteigen.) 6. Irregular verbs of the sixth class : ijkfjcn. gofi. gcgoffctt. lügen, log. gelogen. geniegen. genog. genoffen. trügen. trog. getrogen. fliegen, flog, gefloffen. Pflegen, Pflog, gepflogen. fdiiegcn. fitog, gcfcboffen. teben. tob. getoben. fcbliegen. fctlog. gefitloffen. ttJcben, h)ob. getooben. fpriegcn, fprog, gefproffen. fdmren. fctor. gcfitoren. cevbriegen. oerbreg. oerbroffen. gätrcn. gotr. gegobren. Hieben, Hob, geflobcn. féttjáren. fd)n)or. geWoren. fcbtcben, fctob. gefd)obcn. wdgen, luog, geioogen." § 144.] IRREGULAR VERBS. 313 fdnttcbcn. fénob. gefdinoben. bewegen. bewog. bewogen- jltcbcn. flob. gcPoben. fechten. focht, gefocbten. bieten, bot. geboten. fled)ten. Pocht, geflochten. fieben. fett. gefotten. mellen. molf, gemolfen. bteflen. bog. gebogen. fcbmeljen, fdimolj, gefchmoljetu fltegen. Pog, gepogen. fcbweUctt fihwoH, gcfchwoBen. tttegen. Ibog, gewogen. cjueüen. quoE. gequoUen. frieiben, ÎVOCb, gefroren. fcbatlen. fchöE, gefchoEen. "iteAen, rod*. geroeben. faufen. foff- gefoffen. fitcben. Pob, gepoben. faugen. fog. gefogen. sieben, gesogen. fcbrctuben. fcbrob, gefchroben. frieren. fror. gefroren. fcbworen. f^wor, gefdbworcn. íerlieren. berlor. berloren. erlBfiben, erlofth, crlofcben. triefen, troff. getroffen. (hingen. bung. gebungen.) íliinnien. llomm. genommen. (fd)inten. f^unb. gefchunben.) (jlbîinten. glomm. geglommen. (flehen. flanb. gcftanben.) bcficminen. fceîlomm. benommen. (tbun. tbflt. getban.) 7. Irre guiar verbs of the seventh class « » babcn. hatte, gehabt. bringen, bradite. gebrad)t. folien. foHte, gefoflt. benfen. bnd)te. gcbad}t. tbollen. iboüte. gewollt. brennen. brannte. gebrannt. fönnen. îonnte. gefonnt. íenncn. rannte. gefannt. mögen. mod}te. gemocht. nennen. nannte. genannt. bürfcn. burfte. geburft. rennen. rannte. gerannt. muffen. muptc. gemupt. fenben. fanbte, gefanbt. miff en. mubte. gewupt. wenben. wanbte. gewanbt. Rem. 1. To avoid tlie necessity of multiplying the classes, the verbs îotrt* men, bitten, Uejjen, ftljen, fein, geilen, Reißen, hingen, fd^inben, geben, tbun, are placed under those of the above seven classes, where, by the analogy of vo¬ cal changes in forming the principal parts, they seem most appropriately to belong. Rem. 2. The simple verbs from which the compound verbs given in the above list (bciginnen, be^fieißen, be4íemmen, be^mcgen, emfjífcbíen, ev4öfd)cn, gedingen, gCíininnen, gc4>ärcn, gemefen, ge^fíbebcn, ge^bciben, ge^nicffen, toev* berbén, ber^geffen, ber^briejfen, berdieren) are derived, are now either antiqua¬ ted, or provincial (as ttttnttCH), or are entirely obsolete (as O.-G. nësan). Rem. 3. Some of the irregular verbs are also used as regular in the whole conjugation (as íobClt, hrotCll) or in part of the conjugation (as liraíCH/ Oaí)í rcn). Rem. 4. Many of the German verbs are allied to words in other branches of the Indo-European languti^es, as the Latin, Greek, and Sanscrit. Rem. f). For these and other feat\ires of the individual verbs, see the notea to the following alphabetical list of irregular verbs: () 'as T. 1. 5. 1. 5. 6. 1, î! 6. 6. O, 1. 2. 4. 5. 5, 4, 1, 7, 7, 7, 6, 1, 1, 7, 1, 2 3 4 4, 6. 1, 6, (i, 6, 6, 2. fi, 6, 1. 2. 5, 4, 1, 1, 2. 6. 2, 1, 6, 5, 5, THE VERB. § 145. Alpha Present Infinitive, 2d and 3d Pers. Sing, of Present Indicat. Saffen,' to bake. Seiel)len,^ to command. Sejleipeti, to apply, beginnen,^ to begin. SBetpen, to bite. * ©cflemmen, to press. * Sergen,* to conceal. * Ser jlen, to burst. * Settegen,^ to induce. Siegen,® to bend. Steten, to bid. Stnben, to bind. Sitten, to beg. SIftJen,' to blow. Sleiben,® to remain. SIeid)en,' to fade. Srnten, to roast. Sre^en,'" to break. Srennen, to burn. Svingen, to bring. * Lenten, to think. ®ingen, to hire. X)refd)en,'' to thrash, ©ringen, to press. ©ürfen, to be permitted, ©mpfefjicn, to recommend (ífíen,^^ to eat. jÇûbrctî, to ride. Snllen, to fall. Ufingen,'* to catch. 8ed)ten, to fight. Sinben, to find. Sletbten,'® to hraid. S'liegen, to fly. fließen, to flee. ^liefen,'® to flow, greifen,to devour, frieren,'® to freeze. (Säfircn, to ferment, ©ebaren, to bear. ©eben, to give. ©ebei^en, to thrive. ©eben, to go. ©elingen,'® to succeed, ©elten, to be rvorth. ©enefen, to recover, ©enicßen, to enjoy. ©efAebcn,'® to happen, ©etninnen,^® to win. ©iefien,®' to pour. ©Icidjen,^® to resemble, ©leiten,®® to glide. bäcffl, bdcft, »fieblfî, =fteblt, \iiot given when formed regularly.'\ birgfl, birgt, birjlejl, birjl. blafejl, bláí(e)t, *bratfl, briit, bricbjî, brid}t. brifcbefi, brifibt. (icb barfb barffl, barf, ;fïeb(ft, îftcbit» iffefl, igt, fûbrfî, fährt, faßfl, faüt, fnngfî, fängt, ficbt(e)il, ficbt, flicbt(e)(l,fliibt(et). friffefî, frigt. =biereft, =bievt, giebfl, giebt, gilt)!, gilt. gefdtiebt, ' The asterisk indicates that the wh( 8 145.] IRREGULAR VERBS. 315 of the Irregular Verbs. [mperative Perfect Mood. Participle. Remarks. ficbacfcu. bcfpbleti. bcpilfcn. begonnen. ôebtnen. bcflemmen. aeborijeu. Oeborjlett. bitrc^cn. gcbotjcn. jcboten. ijcbunbcn. ijfbi'ien. ¡jcbliv'cn. geblieben. ijebltdicn. ijcbratcii. ijcbvpcbcn. ijcbrannt. ijcbwdit. 3Cba:í)í. ¿ebuttiicn. ijcbrofd)cn. i^ebuingcii. gebuvft. cmpfofjlcn, acjeiicn.'^ gciabrcn. ijcfuUcn. gefan^en. gefocbti-'n- gcfu2tbcn. gcflidjtcn. geflogen. gefloljen. gefloííen. gefreifen. gefvoeeu. flCflpljrcu. geboren. gegeben. gebielfen. gegangen. gelungen. gegolten. genejen. genoífen. gefdfeben. gewonnen. gcgofíen. gcglidfen. gelitten. Rem. 1. The following verbs in tho sixth class, biegen» bieten, fliegen, flicken, fliegen, gentegen, giegeu, friedfen, litgee., ftbliegen, fpriegen, triefen, «erbriegen, jíeífen, formerly had parallel forms in cu in the 2d and 3d pers. sing, of the pres. ind., and in the imperative (as tu bcutft, cr beut ; beut) ; these forms are now only used in poetry. Rem. 2. Final e of the imperative of some verbs, as bies gcti, bieten, blufeu, is dropped by some writers. Rem. 3. Some verbs (as berfîen, trcfdjeu, etc.) have two or more forms in the imperfect indicative or subjunctive. Remarks on the Individual Verbs. ' i-'tarfen is also regular except in participle; it is allied to (Ir. rpósytiv,to road, and 'Latin focus {a firepÀacc). ^ First appeared in the 15th century; from Gothic filhan, ' Fium O.-G. kinan, to yawn, open. [O.-G. felahan. * From bergen are derived ter ^erg, tic ^urg. ' Regular when meaning " to move from a place." * Allied to Sans, hhug, Gr. (ptùyuv, Lat. f tigere ; from it arc derived Sogen, bow ; SSud)t, bight (and the French bouger, English budge). ' Compare English blad, blaze. ® Related to Gr. Xtíiruv, Lat. Imqwere ; comp. Eng. leave. ' The derivative bleidKU, to bleach, is regular. Allied to Lat. frangcre, Gr. púyvugí. " Sometimes used as regular, except in the participle. M.-G. fe2en,0.-G.í¿rtw, Ang.-Sax.cía«,Eng. ea¿(alliedto Lat. c(íe2*e,Gr. £<îfiv, Sans.ad,Kelt, it/i) ; comp.Eng. etch. In the 16th cent., the participle was formed regularly, gceffen (yet existing in some dialects); this was con¬ tracted geffeu ; in the I7th cent, another gcî was added by false analogy, hence the double prcQ.x in gegeffen. Comp. Eng. fang (and the obsolete verb to fang). Allied to Lat. plectere (pUcare), Gr. ttXÍkíiv', from tho root of flccbtcn comes also '51ad)è,yîa7. From the same ultimate root (beginning withji) as flic« gen, flieficn, etc. ; allied to Lat. flnere ( jAuerc), fluviuin (pluvitim), Gr. rrXtivtiv (to tcash), Sans, qjlii (to flow). From fliegen comes SUifl (compare Englishyios«). " Contracted from oer:effen. Tho original Ô (friefen) is yet preserved in some dia Iccts ; it appears in "Srofl. " Only used in tho third person (c^ gelingt, cic.). The simple form (M.-G. tollmen, O.-G. winnan) is obso- Allied to Gr. to pour. [lote. From gleid), a contraction of gleííí^ (from lih, like). From tho samo root comes glatt (smooth) ; and Em p;iri to which it is attached) is also conjugated regularly. u. 'la 'e. s 5, 7, 4, 4 4 6 5 1 5 7 C 6 1 5 5 1 7 6 3 4 4 5 5, 2, 2, 6< 6 8, 5, 6, 2, 7, 7, 1, 7. 5. 6, 5. 6. 4. 5. 5. 5. 7. 6. 1. 1. 4. 6. ß. O. íi THE VERB. Present Infinitive. 2d and 3d Pera. Hing, of Present Indieat. Imperfect Indicative. * @[tmmen,' to glimmer. ®raben,^ to dig. ©reifen, to grasp. ^abcn,^ to have. ■èdten,^ to hold. •fangen, to hang. * |)ftuen,® to hew. Relien,® to heave, lift, •feigen, to command. •Reifen,' to help. * Äeifcn, to chide. Äennen,® to know. * ÄUeben,® to cleave. Ältmnien, to climb. Älingcn,'® to sound. Äommen, to come, donnen,'^ to be able (can). Äriedtn, to creep. £abcn,'^ to load. :ifa[fen, to let. Saufen,^* to run. Setben, to suffer. !2ett)eTt, to loan, liefen, to read. Siegen,to lie. ^ Söfd)en,^® to extinguish. Si'tgen, to lie. * ®îat)Icn," to grind. Slfeiben, to avoid. * SOielfen,'® to milk. 5)îeffen,'® to measure. Slîbgen,^® to be permitted, äliüffen, to be obliged, ^îcijmcn,^' to take. Sfennen,®' to name. i}>feifcn,^^ to whistle. * 91flegen, to cherish. Streifen,to praise. Äucttcn,®* to spring forth Sîatljcn, to advise. fReibcn, to rub. Dîeigen,^^ to tear. Oîciten,-® to ride. Dîennen, to run. 3îieiben,^' to smell. Sîingen,^® to wrestle. fRinnen,"'"' to run. Dîufen, to call. @oufcti,®° to soak. * (Sangen,to suck. * ©d)àffen,^^ to create. * ©c^allen,'^ to resound. gvábjí, gräbt. f)oft» hot, ■^ältfl, ■^ält, ^ängfi, ^ängt. í)ilffí, í)ilft, (ic^ fann), îannjî, íann, läb^, läöt,^' lägt, lägt, läuffi, läuft. liefejî, lieft. lifd)efi, lifiiit. tntifcfl, miffefi, migt, (id mag), magfi, mag, (id mug), mugt, mug, nimmft, nimmt, nuiOf), (iiiillt, räthfi^ rätf), fänfft, fünft. 145.] IRREGULAR VERBS. 317 Irregular Verbs (continued!. ImjKrative Mood. Perfect Participle. Remarks. glimmc, flrabe, greife, tall c\ ^ang c , tau.c^, tcb c', teip(i'), tilf, fcit\c), feunc, îltcbvc), fUmme, flingc, îueife, íiu'ipe, íommu)í (wanting), frtccb.c», Inb.ci, lap, lau f e), IciD.ev Ici^.c;, Iteó, liege, lifeb, lüge, mnblG meibfe), iiiilf, juip, (wanting), it nimm, nenne, Pfeif, e)» Pflege, pveif c), «iniU, rntlje, reib eV reif? e -, reit e>, renne, riecb eV rtngie), rinn(c), rufic), ffluf^eV fang c), i*aff(c), fdjaUe, geglommen. gegraben. gegriffen. gehabt. gehalten. gebangen. gehauen. gehohen. geheiiien. gehelfen. gctiffen. gcfonnt. geflohen. geflommen. geflungen. gefniffen. gefnippcn. gefommen. gefonnt. gefrodien. gelabcn. gelaffen. gelaufen. gelitten. geliehen. gelefen. gelegen. gelofihen. gelogen. gemahlen. gemieben. gemolfen. gemeffen. gemofbt. gemupt. geiiDinmcn. genannt. gepnffen, gepflogen. gepriefen. gegiioUeii. geratljen. gerieben. geriffelt. geritten. * gerannt. gevorlum. gerungen. gerom'ien. gerufen. gefoffen. gefogen. gcfchaffcn. gefcbollcn. glish glad (smooth, bright) and glade, opening in the woods. ' The provincial glum, glumtg. Eng. gloom, gloomy, glum (and Anglo-Saxon glórn, twilight), svto from the same root as glimmen, to glimmer. ^Allied to Gr. ygâtjuiv, to write; from graben are de¬ rived baè©rob,_7)-at'e; fcer ©raben, (Kíc/t; bie &vube,pit. ' Hence bie.^abe,j>osimi(wi ; betrafen, Acwe«; hanbijabcn * Erom galten is the interjection halt! halt! stop! [is reg. Hence bie ^acfe, hoe; baè ^eit, hay ; ber ^ieb, blow. Hence ber ^ebel, lever ; ber ^obe\0 plane. Hence J&elferôhelfcr ; bieJ^ilfc, hilflaä, beholfen, etc. Allied to Lat. genui ; Gr. ysvvâv. Mostly provincial. From Hieben are derived ber ÍHo» btn,foulley; bie ^hiU, cleft; bie Kluppe,joiwcers. 1® Allied to, if not der. from Lat. clangere (Gr. nXáyyíív). ■' kneifen has come into the High-German from the Up¬ per-German, {iteipen from the Lower-German dialects. Allied to fennen. From the same root are funb, bie áínnfi, bab Âîinb, ber ^önig. Saben, to invite, is regular, is from a different root, and Compare English leap, lope. [is allied to Gr. Kokúv. Hence legen, to Lr?/; bie Sagc,siie; tab üa^ev, the camp. Now used mostly in compounds. fSbahlen is regular except in the participle. The im- perf. is reg. in the N.-G. The irreg. form mnhl (from M.-G. rauol) is now only provincial. Now generally regular. From the same root are tie SDlild), milk, and bie SDÎolfe, whey. Hence baâ SSJlaft, measure. fKeffen is allied to Sans. mâ ; Gr. fií-rpov ; Lat. nietrum (meter), from metire (to measure) ; also to Lat. modus. Compare English mete. =® From mögen are mogliel), possiWe ; bie Wta&p, might. Sîehmen and nennen are from the same ultimate root as ber 9bame, name (allied to Lat. nomen; Gr. ôvopa ; Slav, imja; Sans, náman). Not found before Mid.-Ger. ; derived from Latin pi- pare (to peep [said of birds], in Low Latin to whistle). From Low Latin preciare (from Latin GingneUen is regular. Hence ter ííeij, charm; ber Sîift, rent; tie 3îihc, Sereiten, to ride over, is regular (not to be confounded with bereiten, to prepare—from bereit, ready). From riedjen come ber ©ernd), odor; ber ?iond), smoke. From ber 5ling ; it signifies also to wring (clothes). As of fluids. Hence rennen, to run; bie ifiinne, gutter. Hence tie ®nppc, soup; compare English scp. Allied to Latin sugere (to suck) and suecus (juice). ^ AVith other significations, fd)affen is regular. From it is derived fd)Dpfen, to create ; compare English shape. Hence bie (Sd)eUe, a .small bell, and ber <3d)íUíng, shil ling (sounding metal). Ua 5 5 1 C Ö C e 4 s, 5 5 5 1 5 6 5, 6 6 1 5 5 5 6 5 6 1 1, 1, 6, 2, 2. 7, 6, 1, 1, 1, 2, 7. 5. 1. 5. 1. 6. 1. 1. 1. 6. 1. 5. 1. 6. 1. THE VERB. Present Infinitive. Aiphabctica' 2d and 3d Pers. Hing. Iruper/eU ; of Present Indica t. Indicative. | Sdjetiien/ to separate, ©cecinen, to appear. ©djcUeil; to scold. ©d)eren,^ to shear, ©c^tebcn,^ to shove. 0djte§en, to shoot, vicbinhen,* to flay, ©¿blafeu, to sleep. ©á)íai;cn,® to strike, ©cbleicben, to sneak. * ©tbletfcn,® to whet. * ©i^kigeu,to slit, ©¿blinden, to swallow, ©cbmeipen, to smite. ©d)meljen,' to melt. ©d)nctben, to cut. ©diuteben, to snort. * ©(^rauben, to screw. * ©1^reden, ' ° to frighten ©^reiben," to write, ©cbreten, to cry. ©cbeeiten, to stride, ©ibkdren, to fester, ©djipetgen, to be silent. ©d)ipellen,'^ to swell, ©ibwtmnten," to swim. ©d)rotnben,'* to disappear ©diipin^en,'" to swing, ©cbipbren,^® to swear, ©eben," to see. ©ein," to be. * ©enben, to send. ©teben, to seethe, boil, ©tngen, to sing. ©tnfen, to sink. ©innen, to muse. ©ifeen," to sit. ©eilen, to bo obliged, ©pcien, to spit. ©pinnen,^" to spin, ©pleigen,^' to split, ©precben,'^^ to speak, ©priesen, to sprout, ©pringen,^'' to spring. ©ted)en,'® to stick. * ©teden,^® to stick, ©teben,to stand, ©tebten, to steal. ©teigen, to mount, ©tevben,^® to die. ©tieben,^' to fly (as dust), ©tinten, to stink. ©tepen, to hit. ©treidien, to stroke. fcbiltjl, fcbilt, fcbierjl. friert, ídilatt» fcblägjl, fcbldgt. fcbmitèejl, fcbmi(5(e)t, fcbridjl, fi^vidt, fcbwinjl, fd)n?iEt, fiebt'î' fk'btr (iib bin), bill, ijl. (icb foK), fotliî, foU, fprid)il, ipri^t, flidiiî, fîidbt, fîtebMlf jlieblt, fltrbjî, flivbt. flogcfl, jîo^et, § 145,1 IRREGULAR VERBS. 319 Irregular Verbs (continued). Imperatice Mood. Perfect Participle. Remarks. fcbeibc, fcbdnc, fdnlt, Íd5icr, ft^ieb c). fcbtcp(c)' fdnnb.c), fd^aKC), fd)laJi,e), fdilLÍd^(e), |d*ldûc), jdildp c), fitmotiXc), fitmil.v fd>ncif(c), fdmtebi e) fdjvaub^c), fcbncf, id)rdb(e), ic^rct, |d?rcit,e\ * fctiivave, fdJ»ct¿e, íd)tt>íU, fcbwimme, fd)n>inb(,e) fiadu^e, fd)Wör(e), ftc^, fet, fenbe, rieb(e), nnö(c), fmfic), ftiiiKe), (wanting), ■pde, pinne, plciê(e), pvtd), pnep(c), pvinaujr Rd), icdfe, L'be, Itclii, lcrbc(c), 1tcb(c), îinf(c), íog(e), flrdcb(e), ¿déiebcn. ijefcbicncn. gcfdícUcn. ¿t'fdjorcn. i^efdjobcn. dcfcboi'ícn. lîefdîunbcn. 9cíd)lafen. sjcidda^eit. vjcfcblicben. ¿íícbliffen. ücícbliiícn. acicbíunijcn. iîctd^nùnctt. ¿cídnaoljcn. ¿cídmittcn. ijeítbnobcn. ¿efcbroben. i3eídn-ocíen. ßciibncben. ßclcpviccn. ijefdaittcn. 3e{d)a>íren. ijcfdiadeaen. gelíprooUcn. gt-jcbaommen gefiprounben. gefdwungen. gefcbraoren. gcfcpen. geaefen. gcfanbt. gqotîen. gelungen. gefunfen. gefonnen. geleifen. getollt. gelpteen. geiponnen. geíplilien. geípvodan. getprotíen. ge|pnmgen. gejlodH-n. geftocfen. gejîanben. gelobten. gcftiegen. geworben. gelloben. geflunfen. gejlogen. gejlriipen. ' Regular as an active verb; allied to Latin sci(n)do, Gr. From fipetben is derived Per top of the head (where the hair is parted). ° From Idicrcn are bie (Sd)aar. division, troop; tie 0d>ar, (ploughf share; allied to fcijarf, sharp. ^ Hence tic 0d)itppc (and tic ®cftoufcI), shovel. * Compare English skin. ® Hence tcr 0d)lag, blow; tic 0d)Iad)L batUe; compare English slay. ® Reg. when meaning to (ira^r along, demolish ; comp. Eng. slip ; fiplctfen is allied (in li) to |cpldcpen, gletipen, gleiten. ' Regular when intransitive. ® Hence tie 0ddangr. snake. ' Regular when active. Reg. when trans. ; irreg. when intransitive {to be alanri' ed)-, more usually employed in compounds, as erfcpreden. " FromLat. scribere (to write) ; hence tic ©djrift, writing. Hence ter cUCf {door) sill; tcr ^dnoulft, bombast. Hence tcr @d)H)amni, sponge; tcr swamp. Hence tic ®d)n)intfiid>t, consumption. Hence tic @d)iuingc, winnow. Hence tcr (SdjtDur, oath. " Hence tic 'Zidyt, sight ; tnd ©cftdjL/acc. '® See § 138 Iie7n. Hence fcçcn, to set; tcr Scffcl, chair ; tcr ®iç, seat; ter sentence. Allied to Latin sedere ; Greek ; Russian sidjef; Sanscrit sad. Hence tic ©pinte!, spindle, distaff; tnS ©efpinnfl, yam (whatever is spun) ; tic ©pinuc, spider ; fpannen, tospan. Hence tcr ©pliitcr, splinter ; tic ©paltc, column. Hence tic 0prac!)c, language; tcr ©prud), adage. Hence tcr ©proffc, sprout; tic ©proffc, remnd of a ladder. Hence tic ©pringciucHc, spring ; tcr ©prung, leap; tcr Urfprung, origin. " Hence tcr ©tid), stab ; tcr ©tid)cL burin; tcr ©tad)cL sting (tic ©tacl)clbccrc, gooseberry) ; taà ©tiicf, piece; tcr ©tocf, cane ; tie ©tange, stake ; flcd)cn is allied to Riefen, to embroider. Regular when transitive; regular or irregular when intransitive. Hence tcr ©tant, condition; tic ©tnntc, hour; tic ©tatt, stead; tic ©tatt, city; tcr ©tatcl (©taU), stable; tcr ©toUcn, support; tcr ©tnl)l, chair; ftiiçcn, to supf)ort ; ficUcn, to place; Rät, steady; Rctê, continu¬ ally. ©tcpcn is allied to Latin stare; Greek iarávat; Slavic stati ; Sanscidt sthci. Compare English to starve. Hence tcr ©taut, dmt. 320 THE VERB. [§ 145. Alphabetical List of the iVo. of Class. Present Infinitive. 5. Streiten, to contest. 6. îfjmi/ to do. 3. Tragen,^ to carry. 1. ïreffen, to hit. 5. Treiben, to drive. 2. Treten, to tread. 6. Triefen,^ to drop. 1. Trinfen,* to drink. 6. Trügen, to deceive. 1. * SScrberbcn,^ to spoil. 6. 35erbrießen, to vex. 2. iBergeffen,® to forget. 6. iBerlieren,' to lose. 8. ÜSad)Kn,® to grow. 6. SBagen, to weigh. S. SBafcbcn,® to wash. 6. * ÏBeben, to weave. 5. SBeiiben,'" to yield. 5. SBcifen,-' to show. 7. *5Benben,^^ to turn. 1. SBerben, to sue for. 1. SBerben,'^ to become. 1. SBerfen, to throw. 6. SBiegen, to weigh. 1- SBinben, to wind. 7. SBiffen,'* to know. 7. SBollen, to be willing. 5. 3cil)cn, to accuse. 6. Sieben,'® to draw. 1. Bwingen,'® to force. '¿(1 and 3d Pers. ainrj. of Present Indicat. Imperfect indicative. tl)ufl, tbut, trááll, tracjt, triffft, trittjl, tritt. sbirbft, stirbt. sgtl'fefi, sgiit, n>äc()fcft, n)äd)f}. tbâfi^efî, h5áfd)t, tsirbfl, wirbt, Ibirfl, tbirb, tbirffl, tbirft, (tcb weiß), weißt, weiß (i^ will), wiUfl, will, ftritt, tbat, trug, traf, trieb, trat, troff, tranf, tvog, ocrbarb, eö »erbroß bergaß, bcrlor, tDud)d, wog, wufcl, wob, Wieb, Wied, wanbte. Warb, würbe (or warb), warf, wog, wanb, wußte, wollte, iicf), 503' jwaug, Imperfect Subjunctive. iWtte, tbäti, trüge, träfe. triebe, trate, tröffe, tráufe, tröge, öcrbürbc, cö »erbröffe, öergaße, »eriörc, n)üd)fc. Wöge, wüfdfe, wöbe, wiibc, wicfc, wcubete, würbe. Würbe, Würfe, wöge, wanbe, wüßte, wollte, SictjCf Jöge, swange. § 146. Table of endings of Irregular Verbs. Present Tense. Imperfect Tense, i Indie. Subj. Imperat. Indicative. Subjunctive. 1 Pers. Sing. =e, =e, r r —, -te. =e, 4e, 2 Pers. Sing. =efi, =ft, =eft, f '% 'tefl, =it, =tefl, 3 Pers. Sing. =et, 4, —, =tc, =et, 4e, I Pers. Plur. =en, =en, =cn, =cn, =en, =en, 4cn, =en, =ten, i 2 Pers. Plur. =ct, =t. =ct. =ct, 4, 4, 4et, =ct, =tct, 1 3 Pers. Plur. =en, =en. =en, =en, =en. =en, 4eit, =cn, =tcn. i Tnpnit. =en, =11. Pres. Part. =cnb,=nb. Per/. Part, ge—cii, gc—t. ij Hem. 1. The C is dropped from the terminations sCft, and ;Ct of the second and third person singular of the present indicative, when the radical vowel is changed fC to i or tc; or Û to (i) : tí ÍUtCÍC, ÏIU Cr ÍÍJtiíí. § 146.] IRREGULAR VERBS. 321 Irregular Verbs (continued). Iniperative .^lood. Perfect Participle. RemarlùS. ftrcil(e\ tra^,e.\ triflr treib; e\ tritt, trief c), trinfc), trü¿e, ocrbirb, (obaolete), »crijig, »erliere, n)ad)K, tua^c, tcafibe, trcbe, »cid)(e), tvcifc, wcnbe, Vüirb, ircrbe, tt>irf, triebe, winbe, iviffe, ttJoUe, äcitjc, jromge, iTcfíritícn. OCtl)an. ßctraitcn. ijctrencu. getrieben. getreten. getroffen. getrunfen. getrogen. ocrborbcn. * oerbroffen. ïergeffen. oerloren. gcroad)fcn. gewogen. gemafd)en. * gewoben. gewid)en. gewiefen. gewanbt. geworben, geworben. geworfen. gewogen. gewunben. gewupt. gewollt. gcjtcbcn. gesogen. geswangen. 1 Hence tic îtiat, deed; ter Xbätcr, doer; tifätiq, active; tf)untid),/íasiWe. In many (Zíaiecfotennis used as auxilia¬ ry, as in English : (Sr tljat nidjt tommcn, he did not come. ^ Hence tie Xrad)t, costume., and toé ©etreite, grain. The derivative verbs beantragen, and beauftragen (from ter; Stntrag and ber Sluftrag) are regular. ! ^ Hence tie Üroufe, trough ; ter îropfen, drop, [drunken. * Hence ter îronf, drink ; ertrinfen, to drown ; betrnuícu, â The simple verb terben is yet used in theBavar. dialect. ® Compare the Engliih verb get. ' The original è of Oerlieren {Goth, fraliusan; O.-G.far- liosan; M.-G. vertiesen ; N.-G. verlieren) appears in the adjective loé, loose; and the noun ter iBerlufl, lois. ® Compare the English verb to wax (and wane). ' Hence tic S8äfd)e, wasJiing. Hence locid), weak (whence rocidjen [reg.], to soften). From the adjective toeife, wise. Hence tie WSanifWall ; taè&emanb,raiment; gewontt, dexterous; tie I*einn>ant, linen ; tie SEBinte, windlass; loentcn, to turn ; montern, to wander; tie 3Bunte, wound. Allied to Latin verfere, and to sioorté (English -ward). Allied to Lat. videre; Gr. iètlv; Sans. ivid. From Wiffen are derived geioifl, certain; toé ©etoifTen, conscience; tie aBiffeni*d)oft, science; ter SEBiç, wit. Hence ter ¡3ug, draft, train; ter 3ügel, reins, bridle; tie 3ud)t, rearing ; iucFcn, to jerk; iucfen, to draw {as a sword); cntäücfen, to charm; ter ^erjog (ber wit bent ^cere ambiieftt = ,g)eerfübrct), duke. [mais). Hence ter IBtoong, violence ; ter 3n>inger, cage (for ani- (Endings of Irregular Verbs—continued). Exc. The C is usually retained in sCft, when the radical syllable ends in =3 : íái ícfe, bu ïiefcîi, er lieft. Bern. 2. The full forms ;Cft and ;Ct must he used in the indicative when the stem ends in b or t. With other verbs also the full forms are often used. Bern. 3. The e is dropped from the imperative of all verbs that in thai iiood change the radical vowel e to i or ei : inf. nelliueu j imp. UtUlUl. Bern. 4. Some of the best German grammarians prefer that the final iC should always be dropped from the imperative of many verbs that do not change the radical vowel. But the general usage is in favor of its retention, though it is often dropped in poetry. Bern. 5. The C of sCU and sCUb can only be dropped when these endings follow a vowel or a silent I) : Derfidbttf flCÎcÎRt. 0 2 B22 THE VERB. [§ 147. § 147. Conjugation of the Irregular Verb to strike (having I)abcn for its auxiliary) : Principal Parts : fc^logícn, í^íug, gc^f^Ing^tn. INDICATIVE MOOD. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present Tense. id? ÍÍ^IatJ=C, I strike, bu fd)iäg:fb thou strikest. er í(í|Iüg=b he strikes. tDtr i d? Í a 0 Í fit/ we strike, tl^r i Í a g « you strike, fie f d? I a g « en, they strike. . id> I strike.* bu f I a g « cfh thou strikest. er 1 d? t a g Í c, he strikes, iuir f I a g s en, we strike, i^r f Í a g = ct, you strike, fie f cf) I a g = en, they strike. Imperfect Tense. id? bu er ft^íug, I struck. thou struckest, he struck, tuir i d) t u g Í en, we struck, i^r f Í u g Í you struck, fie f IU g « en, they struck. I have struck, etc. id? fiabiC bu i)aft er í?at iüir h ahí en ihr híthít fie habí en gcfáilagcn. geíd?íagen. geíd?íageu. gefchíageu. geíd?Iagen. gef^íageu. I had strack, etc. id? habíc gcfdjiagen. bu hat^ícfí geichlagen, er h a t í te g e f ^ í a g e n. trir hatíten geid?íagen. ihr hatíiCt gefchíagen. fie hatíten gefchíagen. ich f^íiigíe, I struck, bu f ch í Ü g í eft, thou struckest. er f ch 1 ü g í e, he struck. Irir f d? t ü g Í en, we struck, ihr f d? í it g Í et, you struck, fie f d? Í it g Í en, they struck. Perfect Tense. I have struck, etc. ich Í?atiíe gefchlagcn. bu h a h í eft g e í d? I a g e n. er hahíe gefd?lagen, irtr h a h Í en g e f d? Í a g e n. ihr h ahí et gefd)iagen. fie h a h í en g e f d? í a g e n. Pluperfect Tense. I had struck, etc. ich ffätite gefd?Iagen. bn hatiteft gefd?iagen. te g e f d? I a g e n. ten geid?Iagen. tet geid?Iagen. ten gejd?iagen. ich bu er tnerîJie toirft intrB »nir irerb^ ihr it?erb' fie tï>erb = er hat irir hat ihr hat fie hat First Future Tense. I shall strike, etc. fihiagen. ich inetbíe fchlagcn. f d? Í a g e n. bu n? e r b í eg f d? Í a g e n. f ch I a g e n. er ir» e r b í e f d? I a g c n. en f d? I a g e n. trir in e r b í en f d? Í a g e n. et i chía g en. ihr in er biet fchí agen, en i d? í a g e n. fie in e r b í en f ch Í a g e n. I shall strike, etc. * See Subjunctive Mood, § 124. § 147.] IRREGULAR VERBS. 323 I shall have strack, etc. id? U)ciii=c ocîd)lof|cn íiaficn. bu iDirft gejd^Iageu íjaíicn. et U)irb gejd^Iagen l^abcn. voir IV e r b Í ctt ge|d?iagcn Raiten, tbr iv e r b = CÍ gejd?íagcn ^abcn. [ie IV e r b « etl gefd^iagen l^aíicn. Second Future Tense. I shall have strack, etc. ic^ U)crb=c flcfdiiaocu Mafien. bu W e r b í eft gefd?iagen ^abctl. cr iverb^e gefd?iagen ^abcn. ivir tverbten geid)iagen balicn» tf)r tverbtet gejd^lagen bßöcn. fie iverb^Ctt geftbíageu babea. bu fd^íüg = eít er f d? í ü g í c ivir j d? I ü g = ea tbr fd?tüg=et fíe fcbíüg^Ctt {Imperf. Subj,'). H II CONDITIONAL MOOD. Present Tense. I would or should strike, etc. tcb toiirb^e fcbiaocn, or id? ftbliig^c bu tvürbíeft jZiagen, " er tvürb^e fcblagen, " ívir tvürbíen fd?lagen, " ibr ivürb = et fd?íagen, " fie iviirb^en fcbíagen, " Perfect Tense. I would or should have struck, etc. iib ttilrbie geftbíúflcn babea, or icb bät4e gefibíagea {Pl. Suhj.). (i ti »c (i iC bu ivürbíeft gefd?iagen bobea, er tvürb^e geíd?íagen babea, tvir ivürb = ea geíd?Iagen babea, ibr tvürb:eí gefcbíagen babea, fie tvürb^ea geíd?íagen babea. bu bät=teft gefcbíagen er í? ä t í te gefcbíagen tvir í? ä t = tea ge|d?Iagen ibr bdt«=tet gefcbtagen fíe bät^teagejcbiagen tí IMPEKATIYE MOOD, ftbfag^e (bu), strike thou. Wn-'t er, let him strike. fdlfag^ea tvir, let us strike, ftbiagset (if)l)r strike you. f^Iag^ea fie, let them strike. INFINITIVE MOOD. Pres. ftblajjiea, to strike. I gcfibiagea babea, to have Í struck. PAR'nCIPLES. Pres. ftblagscab, striking. \ Per/. geftbíOgCtt, struck. 324 THE VERB. L§ ni. §*148. Conjugation of the Irregular Verb íoiunicn, ¿3 cO-iHB (having fein for its auxiliary) : Principal Parts: fommcn, înm, gcîommen. INDICATIVE MOOD. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present Tense. ÏOmntîC, I come, bu Í 0 m m » thou comest. er {0 m ni = í, he comes, hiir ï o nimben, we come. i(?r you come, fie Í 0 m m s Cn^ they come. td^ îam, I came, bu Í a ni = thou camest. er ïatn, he came, trir Í a m = eit^ we came, ti^r i'ani«t, you came, fie iain«eit; they came. I have come, etc. id; iîilt gefommeu. bu tift g e Î 0 m m e n. er ift g e Í 0 m ui e u, trtr finb geîoiuuieu. t^r fcib g e 10 in lu e u. fie finb geîouimen. I had come, etc. id; mar gclontmcn. bu tuarîft g e í o m ut e u. er ttar g ei out ut eu. tuir tu a r Í ctt g e î 0 ut ut e tt. i^r lu a r Í t g e î o ut ut e u. fie lu a r Í en g c î 0 ut m e n. I shall come, etc. id; mcrbíC íomntcn, bu luirft î o ut ut e it. er iDtrb ï o ut ut e u. luir lu e r b = en î o tu ut e n. tfir tu erbtet í o mut en. fie tu e r b * en î o ut m e u. id; íontntíe, I come.* bu î o m m « eft, thou comest. er f o m m = et, he comes, luir î o m m í en, we come, t^r î 0 m m Í et, you come, fie î o mm »en, they come. Imperfect Tense. id; îûnt:e, I came, bu !äm» eft, thou camest. er î ä m » e, he came, luir î ä m » en, we came, i^r id m» et, you came, fie î ä m » en, they came. Perfect Tense. I have come, etc. id; fei geíommen. bu í e i » eft g e í o m ut e u. er fei g e í o m m e u. luir f e i » en g c Í 0 m m e tt. ii;r fei »et geîommeti. fie f c i » en g e Í 0 tu ut e u. Pluperfect Tense. I had come, etc. i^ tB'àï't geíommen. bu lu ä r » eft g c î o m ut e u. er lu ä r » e g e î o ut m e tt. luir lu ä r » en g e í o m m e tu ifir iuär»et geíommett. fie lu vï r » en g e î 0 m m e ti. First Future Tense, I shall come, etc. id; merbíe fommen, bu luerb» eftí o tu m c u. er lu e r b » e î o m m e n. luir iucrb»en íommcii. i^r lu e r b » et î o m m e u. fie lu e r b » en t o ut m e n. * See Subjunctive Mood, § 124. § 148.1 IRREOULAF. VERBS. 325 I ^hall have come, etc. tdp mxi't öclöninicn fein, bu wirft ¿sctenirneu fein, er wirb getcmmen feilt, wir werbten v3etcmmen fein, itjr wcrb = ei gcfciunicn fein. % werbten getommcn fein. Second Future Tense. I shall have come, etc. id^ werbiC ßefommen fein, bu werb = eft gcfcmmeu fein, er werb^c gclommeu feilt. Wir werbten getommcn fein, itjr werb^eí gefcninieii feilt, fie werbten getcmmcu fein. i(^ wiirb^c bu würbí cft íommen, er w ü r b í c tommen, wir würb = en ícmmen, i^r würb^eí Íommen, fie würb = en íommen, CONDITIONAL MOOD. Present Tense. I would or should come, etc. ïontnten, or id; íÜnt;C {Imperf. Subj.'). ( b ii u a bu Í ü m Í eft er iäni^c wir íam^eit i^r íüm = et fie íüm»en Perfect Tense. I would or should have come, etc. geiontmen fein, or id; wär-c geîontnten {Pl. Suh.y bu W ä r í eft geîommen er w ä r í e geîommen Wir w ä r = en geîommen i^r wärmet geîommen fie w ä r í en geîommen wiirbíC bu würb = eft geîommen fein, er würb = e geîommen fein, " wir würb^en geîommen fein, " '^r würbset geîommen fein, " fie wnrbíCn geîommen fein, " a a a a Ci Ci IMPERATTYE MOOD. Ïontntïe (bn), come thou. funttn^C er, let him come. ÎOnttnsen wir, let us come, lontntit (ihr), come you. fonttn^en fie, let them come. INFINITIVE MOOD. Pres. lontnt^en, to come. I Per/. gCÎOntnteit fein, to have come. rARTICIPLES. Pres. lontntiCnb, coming. 1 Per/. gefomntClt, come. 326 THE VERB. L§ 149-151. 5. COMPOUND VERBS. (^wfanimcnoefe^ic Bcitttörtcr.) § 149. Compound Verbs are formed by prefixing ositions, adverbs, nouns, ov adjectives to simple verbs. They are either Separable or Inseparable. § 150. With Separable Compound Verbs; 1. The prefix takes th.e primary accent : 2íué'ígeí;en, to go out. Siuf'^gebeit, to give up. 2. The prefix is separated from the verb, and is placed after the verb, and often at the end of the sentence, when the verb occurs in main sentences, and is in the present or imperfect tense of the indicative or subjunc¬ tive mood, or in the imperative mood : @r niniltti bag S3ud; an, He accepts the book. Sv ttnljnt bag S3uct; an, He accepted the book. 9îintnt bag iSud; an! Accept the book ! Síaílttt er bag SSud^ an ? Hid he accept the book? Rem. In the compound tenses, and in the simple tenses when occurring in subordinate sentences, the pi-efix is not separated from the verb : (Sr mirb bag S3uc^ an'nc^ntcn, He will accept the book, er bag i8ud) an'naíjnt, Before he accepted the book. 3. The p of the infinitive, and the prefix gc= of the perfect participle, adhere to the verb : Stnftatt bag SSud) an'junc^ntcn— instead of accepting the book— Êr l^at bag S3ud; aifgcnotttmcn, He has accepted the book. § 151. The Separable Prefixes are: 1. The particle, ab, OH, auf, bct, ba (bar), ein, mpox, fort, gegen (entgegen), beim, ber, bin, mit, na^, mieber, ob, Don, meg, p, jnriitf, pfammen (together with the com¬ pound separable prefixes Ijerein, berauÖ,öic.,§ 157), which are always separable. 2. The particles bnrtf), hinter, über, nm, nnter, and mies ber, when they receive the primary accent (§ 154). 152.] COMPOUND VERBS. 327 3. Some nouns and adjectives used as prefixes are separable (§154,5,3). § 152. Sometimes compound verbs take, in addition to their literal meaning, also a modified or figurative meaning : Siuf'geben, to give up, deliver, surrender, abandon. 3[uê'fû(;ren, to carry out, achieve, accomplish. 1. Examples of compound verbs with prefi.x particles always separable: Preßx. Simple verb. fd)reiben, to write ; tommen, to come; ßcf^en, to go ; iud;ea, to seek ; tragen,to carry ; bleiben, to remain ; ftellen, to place ; ^ebcn,to heave ; reben, to speak ; Voirîen, to work ; fe^en, to set ; ft^icien, to send, lonimen, to come ; ge^en,to go ; net;men, to take ; folgen, to follow ; legen, to lay ; fiegen, to conquer; fd)iagen, to strike ; net)men, to take ; madden, to make ; rnfen, to call ; jiei;cn, to draw ; 2. Compound verbs with prefixes which are separable when accented bnrd;, through ; reifen, to travel ; bnrd/reifen, to travel through, über, over; fe^eil, to place; uni, around ; fifbcn, to go ; unter, under ; baltcil, to hold ; ïuicbcr, again ; í)OÍen, to get ; ab, off, down ; an, on, to, at ; anf,up; an?, out, out of; bei, by, with ; ba, there ; (bar, there) ;. embor,' up ; gegen, against; entgegen, against; fort, forth ; beim, home; ber, hither; bin, thither ; mit, with ; nacb, after; uieber, down ; cb, over ; bor, before ; ïoeg, away ; gn,to; jnriid, back ; jnfammen, together; Compound verb. ab'fcbreiben, to copy, on'tommen, to arrive, anf'geben, to go up, rise. an?'fnd;en, to select, bei'tragen, to contribute, ba'bleiben, to remain. bar'fteEen, to exhibit, cmbor'beben, to elevate, ge'genreben, to rejoin. entge'genmirîen,to counteract fort'fe^en, to continue. beim'fd;i(fen, to send home, ber'lommen, to come hither, bin'gebcn, to go thither, mit'nebmen, to take with (one) nad/folgen, to follow after, uie'berlegen, to deposit, ob'fiegen, to vanquish, bor'fcblagen, to propose. Ineg'nebmen, to take away. ;;n'mad}cn, to close, jnritd'rnfen, to recall, jnfam'mensieben, to contract. il'berfe^en, to place over, um'geben, to go around, un'terbalten, to keep under, trie'berbolen, to get again. 3. Compound verbs with nouns or adjectives as separable prefixes ,• ©tatt, place; fiitben, to find ; ftatt'fluben, to take place, frei, free ; ffired^en, to speak ; frei'fpred;en, to acquit, boll, full; gießen, to pour ; boll'gießen, to pour full. B28 THE VEKB. [§153 153. The Separable Comp. Verb Otl^ttcl^tncn, to (iccejjt Principal Parts: an'ttc^^iticn, ait'naf)m, argcnommen. INDICATIVE MOOD. Present Tense. Imperfect Tense. I accept (it), etc.—accepted (it),etc. id? neijmc (e«) an.—naijm (eö) on. bu nimmft „ er nimmt ,, h)irne(?meu „ tbr nel?mt „ fie neljmen „ SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present Tense. Imperfect Tense I accept, (it), etc.—accepted (it), etc id? nei)mc (eé) an.—nüftmc (e§) an an cn an an ûtt an.—nahmft o on. bu nehmeft tl an.—nähmeft „ an.—nahm u an. er nehme tt an.—nähme „ an.—nahmen tl an. mir nehmen It an.—nähmen on.—nahmt ir an. ihr nehmet It an.—nähmet „ an.—nahmen tl an. fie nehmen It an.—nähmen „ Perfect Tense. I have accepted (it), etc. ict> I?ai)c (t?) anocnontmcn. bu (?aft „ aUiUUDmmen. bu ftabeft „ angenommen, er {?at „ angenommen. er ^abe „ angenommen trir ^aben „ angenommen tnir í?aben „ angenommen, ibr babt „ angenommen. ibr b^i^ct „ angenommen, fie b^ben „ angenommen. fie b^ben » angenommen- Pluperfect Tense. I had accepted (it), etc. id? í?aííc (eg) anocnommen. I have accepted (it), etc. id? búüc (eg) angenommen. bn b'ttteft er b'tiií 'mir batten ibr hattet fie batten angenommen, angenommen, angenommen, angenommen, angenommen. I had accepted (it), etc. id? batte (eg) angenommen* I shall accept (it), etc. id? locrbc (eg) annehmen. bu bätteft „ angenommen, er bättc „ angenommen, mir batten „ angenommen, ibr hättet „ angenommen, fie hätten „ angenommen. First Future Tense. I shall accept (it), etc. id? toerîie (eg) onnebmen. bu mirft „ annehmen. bu merbeft er mirb „ annehmen. er merbe mir merben „ annehmen. mir merben ihr merbet „ annehmen. ihr merbet fie merben „ annehmen. fie merben Second Future Tense. I shall have accepted (it), etc. id? locröc (eg) angenommen haben. bu mirft „ angenommen haben, er mirb „ angenommen haben, mir merben „ angenommen haben, ibr merbet „ angenommen haben, fte merben „ angenommen haben. annehmen, annehmen, annehmen, annehmen, annehmen. I shall have accepted (it), c#c. id? mcrhc (eg) angenommen heben, bu merbeft „ angenommen haben, er merbc „ angenommen haben, mir merben „ angenommen haben, ihr merbet „ angenommen haben, fie merben „ angenommen babeo. § 153, 154.] COMPOUND VERBS. 329 CONDITIONAL MOOD. Present Tense. I would or should accept (it), etc. toiirbc (e?) onnciimcn. or id; HÖijme (eê) Oll (Imperfect Suhj.). bu mürbeft ff annehmen, ii bu uä(;meft ff au " " er mürbe ff amte^meu, er uätme ff ÛU " " mir mürben ff amtei;meu, 44 mir nähmen ff an " " i[;r mürbet ff aniiebmen, 44 i(;r nähmet ff an " fie mürben ff anuel;men, 44 fie nähmen ff an Perfect Tense. I would or should have accepted (it), etc. id; iDiirbc (e^^) angenommen tiotien, or id; I)öitc (eê) angenommen (P/.*?.) i>u müvbeft „ ancjeucmmcii ^aben, " bu ^ätteft „ angenommen " angenommen í;aben, " er i;ättc „ angenommen angenommen I;aben, " mtrl;ätten „ angenommen angenommen ^aben, " tt;rt;ättet „ angenommen angenommen í;aben, " fie í;atten „ angenommen If er mürbe „ /)ir mürben „ ii;r mürbet „ fie mürben „ IMPERATIVE MOOD. nimm (bn) (e§) an, accept (it), ncfimc er „ an, let him accept (it). ncíimcn mir (es) an, letns accept (it), ncíjmet ií;r „ an, accept (it), [(it;. uci;mcn fie „ on, let them accept INFINITIVE MOOD. Pres. (e§) ait5unci;mcn, to accept Per/, (es) angenommen su í;aben, to (it). have accepted (it). PARTICIPLES. Pres. (es) anne^^menb, accepting (it). Per/, (es) angenommen, accepted (it). § 154. With Inseparable Compound Verbs: 1. The primmy accent falls upon the verb : 3)eriftef;'«en, to understand. llebcr=fe^'íen, to translate. Exc. With some verbs the prefix mifj (§ 155, 7) is accented, as are all refix nouns and adjectives except OOÍÍ» 2. The prefix is never sejpamted from the verb. 3. The participial prefix (§131) is not added. Exc. Compounds of nouns and adjectives (except OOÍÍ) take gc=. 4. With the infinitive, 311 precedes the verb, and is written separately. 3H0 THE VERB. [§ 154, 155, 5. The Inseparable Prefixes are : 1. The panicles hC', CUtî (ClUÍJ;), Ct-, Qd, DCtí, (and mil]-), which are always inseparable. 2. The particles îmril, ÜÍICl*, lint, llUÍCr, and UJiCbCr, when the primary accent falls upon the verb (§151, 3). 3. Some nouns and adjectives used as prefixes are inseparable (§151, 3). § 155. The Inseparable Particles be, ent (emp), er, ge, ner, jer, are obsolete j^rejDOsitions. They are used as follows : 1. SCi expresses a more intimate relation to the ob¬ ject than the preposition bei, from which it is derived: SBeiTfipiCn, to sit near. SSedip'^en, to possess. 1. S3c= forms transitive from many intransitive verbs: 33e«fi^Teii, to possess (from fipen, to sit). 2. Prefixed to transitive verbs, it changes the relation of the verb to its object : pfiattjcn : eine ©telle To plant trees; to plant a;>/rce with rnit 33äumeii bcpflaitjctl, trees. 8. It is prefixed to some nouns and adjectives in forming verbs: île^gobTcn, to endow. 5SedrCi'=en, to set free. 2. (originally signifying against) usually denotes negation., contradiction, dejprivation, or separation : (5ni=b cci'en, to discover. (Sutífieí/en, to escape. (Sntilcib'en, to unload. Gtti^veijj'en, to snatch away. Rern. 1. It forms verbs by being attached to some nouns and adjectives: (Snt'baupf'Cn, to behead. (SntsJcburbiiJ^en, to excuse. Rem. 2. (Çtttî sometimes denotes origin : ($ntí[ící/en, to arise from. (f ntdpntlflTen, to spring from. Rem. 3. It sometimes has the meaning of in (ein) : Gnt:()aItTen (inl^altcn, cinbaltcn), to contain. Rem. 4. Before f, Cltí is changed, for euphony, to emp in the three verbs empfangen, empfeplen, empfinben. 3. (St- usually denotes a motion outward or upicard: Gb^giefi'en, to pour out. ®r=f;eb'en, to lift up. 1. It sometimes denotes the passing to, or returning to a condition, in compounds formed from adjectives and verbs : 6rírijtí)'en, to Hush. ©rsfcb'en, to replace. § 155.] COMPOUND VERBS. 331 L'. It frequently denotes acquisition by the subject : GVíÍJCtt'cín, to gain by begging. ©r»ïCi^'cn, to attain to. 4. (^C= gives a modification of the meaning of most verbs to which it is prefixed; it frequently indicates the duration or consequence of an action : ©C'braitd;'en, to apply (Braud^en, to need, use). ©C4tci/cn, to „dmit (ficljcit, to stand). 5. Scr= indicates primarily motion away : SycV'tvcib'en, to drive away, SScr^fite^'en, to flow away. J. It frequently denotes /oss, error^ spoiling, destruction, end: aicrddpvcnb'cn, to waste, SScr^Bíüí/en, to lose blossoms. a3ci'4eit'cn, to mislead. 33cr=jei)v'cn, to consume. 2. It sometimes denotes to, or being jdaced in a condition, espe¬ cially wiien prefixed to verbs from nouns and adjectives : Sßcr^qött'evn, to idolize, deify. SBcriänb'eriit, to change. Sjcr^Wait'cn, to make orphan. to improve. 6. 3er= denotes sejjaration, dissolution, or destruction : ¿Cfíftveil'en, to disperse. to fall into ruins. 3br=vei^'ett, to tear in pieces. ^Cï'fd;Îag'cn, to break in pieces Htm. The Inseparable Particles have been developed as follows : (Hothie ; hi-, and", us-, ga-, fair-, dis-. Old-Ger.; bi-, int-, ur-, gi-, far-, zir-. Mid.-Ger. ; be-, ent-, er-, ge-, ver-, zer-, New-Ger.; bc=^. ciit=. er=. ge^. bev^. jcr=. Obs. 1. For examples of compound verbs with bUtfl), Ülícr^ UtttCí^ lint, and tbiebCC as separable and as inseparable prefixes, see Less. XXXV., 2. The two forms tbtcbcr (again) and tutbcr (against) are employed to dis¬ tinguish the adverb from the preposition. Ohs. 2. Inseparable compound verbs with nouns or adjectives as prefixes have the accent on the prefix and take 00= in the perfect participle: 5)ÎCd)t'=terttgen, to justify ; imp., red;t'fevttgte ; per/.part., gered^t'fertigt. ajîutft'smajicii, to conjecture ; " mutf)'tna^te ; " " gcmutlpnajst. Exc. Some compounds with UOÍÍ= as prefix: bollgtci/cn, to execute; part., boUjogen. Obs. 3. The prefix ttti|j= (related to mt[fen = freuete {imperfect Suhj.y bu freuetefl er freuete ft^ tüir freueten uuê t^r freueten eui^ fte ^eueteu fi(^ Perject Tense. I would or should have rejoiced, etc. toilrbe nttcfi gefreut íjuíen, or tc^ i^ütíc utiífi gefreut {Pl. Sub.^, itiÇ) toiirbc bu irürbefi bi(f) freuen, er trürbe ftib freuen, trir trürbeu uuíf freuen, tfir würbet eucb freuen, fie trürbeu fitb freuen. bu tnürbefl bi^ gefreut í;abcn, er trürbe fitb gefreut Rafeen, tüir tüürbeu uuö gefreut Rafeen, i^r tüürbet eutb gefreut ^beu, fíe tüürbeu fii^ gefreut í^ahen. bu ^üttefl biíb gefreut er ^ätte ft^ gefreut tüir fatten uitá gefreut i^r hättet ciîd) gefreut fie fatten fi^ gefreut ITVIPEKATIVE MOOD. freue (bu) bicb, rejoice thou, freue er fid), let him rejoice. freuen tüir uuê, let us rejoice, freuet (i^r) end), rejoice ye. freuen fie fidi, let them rejoice. INFINITIVE MOOD. Pres. freuen fi^, to rejoice. Per/, fit^ gefreut i^ubeu, to have rejoiced. PARTICIPLES. Pres. fî$ freueub, rejoicing. | Per/, fi^ gefreut, rejoiced. 7. IMPERSONAL VERBS. (Uufjerfbutiibe äcitujörter.) § 160. Verbs which express natural phenomena are impersonal, having the pronoun {it) for their nomi¬ native: ($8 bonnert, it thunders. fc^neiet, it snows. Rem, I. Some intransitive verbs are used impersonally, the logical subject of the verb being put in the accusative or dative case; in such cases is often dropped if another word opens the sentence : Gd friert mid) or mid) friert, I feel cold, (but i(î^ friere, I am freez- (Sd ntuugeit i^m an flZi^tS, or i§m He lacks nothing. [mg). mougeit nid^t«, (but) (Sr ntungelt baaren (Selbes, He is in need of ready money. P 338 THE VERB. [§ 161. Rem. 2. The passive and reflexive form of many active verbs are frequently used impersonally : (S8 mirb btei babon gerebet, Much is said about it. §ier ibirb nic^t geraucht, "Smoking is not allowed here." (Sö fvägt flc^, oh— It is questionable whether—■ Rem. 3. is often used expîetiveîy (like the English expletive there)'. (S8 brennt ein ^anS, there burns a house (for ein §anê brennt, a house is burning). Rem. 4. (gg gitfit, etc., is frequently used for C0 fttlb/ etc. (§ 107, 5). (SS giebt biele Sente, bie— There are many people, who— 8. THE PASSIVE VOICE. (2)ic çpûîfibfornt î»cr Scitttörtcr.) § 161. Conjugation of the Passive Voice of the tran¬ sitive verb licficn, to love (§ 134) : INDICATIVE MOOD. I am loved, etc. toci-ÍJíC gcítcfih bn toirft geliebt, er toirb geliebt, ftiir tberbten geliebt, i^r iberb = ci geliebt, fíe lb erbten geliebt. I was loved, etc. tojirbjC geliebt. bu Vb u r b Í eft geliebt, er iburb = e geliebt, ibir iburb^en geliebt, itr iburb^et geliebt, fie tburb*en geliebt. I have been loved, etc. id; bin geliebt toorben. bu bift geliebt toorben. er ift geliebt ttorben. ibir finb geliebt ttiorben. ibr feib geliebt bjorben. fte finb geliebt morben. SUBJIINCnVE MOOD. Present Tense. I am loved, etc.* idt) metbie geliebt. bu Iberbíeft geliebt, er iberb^e geliebt, ibir iberbten geliebt, ibr iberbtet geliebt, fte iberbten geliebt. Imperfect Tense. I was loved, etc. icb toiirb^e geliebt, bu lb it r b ® eft geliebt, er ibürb^e geliebt. Ibir lb ü r b Í en geliebt, ibr ibürb^et geliebt, fíe lb ü r b = en geliebt. Perfect Tense. I have been loved, etc. idb fei geliebt toorben. bu fei^eft geliebt toorben. er fei geliebt ttorbcn. Ibir feigen geliebt morben. ibr fei-et geliebt toorben. fle fei-cn geliebt toorben. * See Subjunctive Mood. § 124. § 161.] PASSIVE VOICE. 339 Pluperfect Tense. I had been loved, etc. ttar gclictit aorbcn. bu ttarft geliebt tijorbcit. er toar geliebt öorbcn. trir w a r » en geliebt toorbcn. i^r inar^t geliebt ©orbcn. fíe ro a r = en geliebt tDOrbCU. I shall be loved, etc. i(í) tocrbíC geliebt mcrben. bu ttirft geliebt tterben. er iDirb geliebt ßietben. tüir erbten geliebt toerben. ibr iucvb>ei geliebt toerben. fte ioerb^^en geliebt hierben. I had been loved, etc. i¿b hiäriC geliebt morben. bu m ä r = eft geliebt hjorben. er tnär^e geliebt toarbcn. mir m ä r Í en geliebt toorben. ibr mär=et geliebt hiorben. fte m ä r Í en geliebt morben. First Future Tense. I shall be loved, etc. itb hierbee geliebt mcrbeit. bu m er b = eft geliebt ttietben. er merb = c geliebt hierben, mir merb = en geliebt hierben, ibr m erbtet geliebt hierben, fte m erbten geliebt hierben. Second Future Tense. I shall have been loved, etc. id? hierbe geliebt morben fein. bu mirjl geliebt morbeu fein, er mirb geliebt morbeii fein, mir merbeu geliebt morbeu fein, ibr merbet geliebt morbeu fein, fte merbeu geliebt morbeu fein. I shall have been loved, etc. id; hierbe geliebt hiorben fein. bu merbeft geliebt morbeu fein, er merbe geliebt morbeu fein, mir merbeu geliebt morbeu fein, ibr merbet geliebt morbeu fein, fte merbeu geliebt morbeu fein. CONDITIONAL MOOD. Perfect Tense. I would or should be loved, etc. i(b thiirbe geliebt hierben, bu mürbeft geliebt hierben, er mürbe geliebt hierben, mir mürbeu geliebt hierben, ibr mürbet geliebt hierben, fte mürbeu geliebt hierben. Present Tense. I would or should have been loved, etc. icb miirbc geliebt huirben fein. bu mürbeft geliebt morbeu fein, er mürbe geliebt morbeu fein, mir mürben geliebt morbeu fein, ibr mürbet geliebt morbeu fein, fíe mürben geliebt morbeu fein. fei (bu) geliebt, be (thou loved), fei er geliebt, let him be loved IMPERATIVE MOOD. feien mir geliebt, let US be loved, feib (ibr) geliebt, be (you) loved, feien fte geliebt, let them be loved. INFINITTVE MOOD. Pres. geliebt hicrben, to be loved. Perf. geliebt hiörben fein, to have been loved. Pres. PARTICIPLES. 1 P^rf. geliebt, loved. 340 THE VEEB. [§ 162, 163. 9. POTENTIAL VERBS. § 162. The Potential Verbs (called by German gram- marians the Atixiliaries of Mode) are jolicn, iBOlícn, fölli ucn, mögen, bürfcn, muffen. They are used only to limit or qualify the meaning of the infinitive of independent verbs (§ 120, 3) : lltU§ bag 53u^ íefen, He must read the book. Rem. 1. The limited or qualified independent verb is often understood: (Sr fjat e§ genutzt, He was compelled to do it. Rem. 2. The Potential Verbs are inflected in all the moods and tenses like independent verbs, with the exception that moHCtt alone is used in the im¬ perative mood. Rem. 3. In the compound tenses the participial form is employed only when the independent verb is omitted; Avhen it is not omitted, the infinitive form of the potential verb is used instead of the participial form : (Sr ^at ba§ S3U(^ lefen miiffcit, He was compelled to read the book, (but) (Sr i)at eg gemußt, He was compelled (to do) it. Rem. 4. They all belong to the seventh class of irregular verbs (§ 143-145). Rem. 5. AH Potential Verbs but fottClt and Hufilcn take the umlaut in the imperfect subjunctive. Rem. 6. The Potential Verbs have been developed thus : Gothic; skulan, viljan, kunnan, magan, thúarhan, motan, Old-Ger. ; scolan, wëllan, chunnan, mugan, durfan, muozan, Mid.-Ger. ; suln, wëllen, künnen, mügen, dürfen, müezen, New-Ger.; jotlcn, hjollen, iönnen, mögen, bürfen, müficn, {English); (shall), will. can. may. (dare). must. § 163. The verb foficit indicates: 1. Moral ohligation or duty : (Sr fontC eg t^un, He ought to do it. SBtr bättcn eg tíjun foücn, We ought to have done it. 2. Obligation, duty, or necessity (usually dependent upon the will of another) : 2)u folift @Dtt betnen §errn lieben Thou shalt love the Lord thy God toon ganjem with all thy heart. ©ieje gurd)t foíí enbtgen (@d;.) ! This fear shall end ! 3ln meiner Sínfmcrííamí'eit foíí eg There shall be no lack of attention nidjt ie()ien, on my part. § 164.] POTENTIAL VERBS. 341 3. A report, rumor, or general impression : Gr foU febr Íraní jcin, They say he is very sick. Gr foU im hörigen imá) He is supposed to have gone to Simerifa gegangen fein, America last year. Revi. 1. Sotten is used in many hypothetical and conditional sentences : @ie fotten and; nod; fo reid; fein— Should they be ever so rich— SBenn er morgen fterhen fottíe— H" he should die to-morrow— Rem. 2. ©Ottcn is sometimes employed to express in past time an action :hat was beginning when another action took place : ^ferb fotttC eben herfanft The horse was just to be sold when merben, ba ftarb e§, it died. Rem. The independent verb (as tfinn, geben, bebenten) is often understood; SBaâ fott id; (;ier ? What shall I (do) here ? Sott bie Xbür anf ober jn? Shall the door stay open or shut? SBojn fott baê ? What is the use of that ? er gefottf, He ought to have done it. § 164. Conjugation of the verb fofícit^ Rem. The Translation to be given to the Potential Verbs varies greatly according to circumstances, as is seen in the remarks on fottClt. The defini¬ tions given in the paradigms are therefore to be understood simply as being among the more usual ones. Principal Parts : fohctt, foíííc, gcfoHt» INDICATIVE MOOD. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present Tense. íál fottr bu fottîfb er fott, mir folííen, i{;r foíC(c)t, ftc foíCcn, I ought, thou oughtest. he ought, we ought, you ought, they ought. id; fott^C, I ought.* bu foil« eft, thou oughtest. er folí^c, he ought, mir foíí = en, we ought. if;r f 0 n Í ct, you ought, fie f D11Í en, they ought. Imperfect Tense. bu er f 0 Í Í mir foil ibr foil fie foil fott^te, foicteft, te, 4en, tet, ten. I should, thou shouldest. he should, we should, you should, thev should. id; fott=te, I should, bu foil = teft, thou shouldest. er folíate, he should, mir foil:» ten, we should. ii;r ferlistet, you should, fie f 0 n » ten, they should. * See Subjunctive Mood, § 124. 342 THE VEBB. [§ 164 Perfect Tense. I have been obliged, etc. id; í)aí)c 0CÍOÍÍÍ (or foUcn)» tu ^aft gefoEt ( " joEen). cr ^at gefoEt ( " joEen;. loir f;aben gejoEt ( " joEen). i^v ^abt gefoEt ("joEen). fie ^aben gejoEt ( " joEeii). I have been obliged, etc. id; íjaíie gefoíít (or folien), babeft gefoEt ( " foEen). babe gefoEt ( " foEen). baben gefoEt ( " foEen). babet gefoEt ("foEen). baben gefoEt b " foEen). bu er to ir ibr fie I had been obliged, etc. i^ bûtic gefoEt ( or foEen), batteft gefoEt ( " foEen). batte gefoEt (" foEen). tDir batten gefoEt (" foEen). hattet gefoEt ( " foEen). batten gefoEt ( " foEen). bu cr ibr fie Pluperfect Tense. I had been obliged, etc. icb bflttc gefoEt (or foEen). bu er bätteft gefoEt bätte gefoEt toir batten gefoEt ibr hättet gefoEt fie batten gefoEt (" foEen). (" foEen). (" foEen). (" foEen). (" foEen), First Future Tense. I shall be obliged, etc, id; toerbe foEen, bu loirft foEeu. er loirb foEen. toir joerben foEen. ibr werbet foEeu. fie werbeu foEeu. I shall be obliged, etc, id; toerbe foEen. bu werbeft foEen. er Werbe foEen. Wir werben foEen. ibr Werbet foEen. fíe werben foEen. Second Future Tense. I shaU have been obliged, etc. icb werbe gefoEt baben, bu wirft gefoEt babeu. er wirb gefoEt baben. wir Werben gefoEt baben. ibr Werbet gefoEt baben. Ee Werben gefoEt baben. I shall have been obliged, et . i^ werbe gefoEt baben, bu Werbcft gefoEt baben. er werbe gefoEt baben. wir Werben gefoEt baben. ibr Werbet gefoEt baben. fie Werben gefoEt baben. CONDITIONAL MOOD. Present Tense. I would or should be obliged, etc. i(b Würbe foEen^ or icb foEte {imperfect Subjunctive). bu Würbeft foEen, er würbe foEen, " Wir würben foEen, '• ibr würbet foEen, " fie Würben foEeu, " bu foEteft er foEte Wir foEten ibr foEten fe foEten (i U u (4 (( ii ié § 164-166.] POTENTIAL VERBS. 343 Perfect Tense. I would or should have been obliged, etc. ic^ toiitbc ÖCfOiit Ijalieit, or id? tlättc ^t\ïs1iiiiPluperfect Suhj.). bu inürbefl gefoût ^aben, er iuürbe ge)oíIt ^aben, irir mürben gefolit l^aben, tbr würbet gefeilt ^aben, fie mürben gefoUt l^abcn, bu ptteft gefeilt er ^ätte gefeilt mir Ratten gefeilt i^ir hättet gefeilt fie Ratten gefeüt ti g i INFINITIVE MOOD. Pres. ÍOÍÍCn, to be obliged. \ Per/. gcfOÍÍt íttbeil, to have been obliged. PARTICIPLES. Pres. fottcnb^ being obliged. | Per/, gcfoitt/ been obliged. § 165. The Potential Verb UJOÍÍCtl usually signifies wil- Imgness, inclination.^ desire., intention, or determination: (Sr tutíí uidjt mit UU6 ge^en, He is not willing (or does not wish) to go with us. 3d; toiil glefi^ Stbcn, I will go immediately. ©ie fenueil t^un moê ©ie tbOUcn^ You may do what you like. Rem. 1. Sßoiien frequently denotes that an action is about to take place: 2)ie llf)r lootttc eben fd^Iagen, The clock was about to strike. Rem. 2. It may be used to indicate that an assertion has been made by another person : Êr tutíí ben Cometen, Welcher er# He asserts that he has already seen martet mirb, fi^on gefe^en i>aben, the comet that is expected. Rein. 3. The independent verb is often omitted ; SBaS tUOÍÍen ®ie (^aben)? What do you wish? 2Baö f)at er oetuoíít (or (»aben mob What did he wish ? len)? § 166. Conjugation of the verb íDOtícn {see § 164, .Äßm.), Principal Parts: toottcn, tooíítc, OCUJOÏÏt» INDICATIVE MOOD. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present Tense. icf) mtü, bu minfb er tutíí, mir m oilmen, tbr moIU(c)í, fie moll^ctt, I am willing, thou art willing, he is willing, we are willing, you are willing, they are willing. id; tUOÍÍ=C, I am willing.* bu mott=cft, thou art willing, er mollee, he is willing, mir moII=cn, we are willing, tbr moU'Ct you are willing, fie moil'Ctt, they are willing. * See Subjunctive Mood, § 124. 344 THE VERB. [§ 166 Imperfect Tense. tc^ mU'tt, bu trolí-'ícft, ev tüoíí<íc, tnir tüotí^teu, i^r tüoíí=tCt, (íe Vûoïï^tCtt, I was willing, thou wast willing, he was willing, we were willing, you were willing, they were willing. id) lOOÍÍstC, bu ir>oíí=^íc(t, er inonde, inir motteten, if)r iüDÍlíící, fie iüoE4en, I was willing, thou wast willing, he was willing, we were wilhng. you were willing, they were willing. Perfect Tense. I have been willing, etc. i(^ Ijoiic öetimüt (or üjoííen). bu í)aft çjeïûoïït er ^at geinolít tnir ^aben getuoUt if)r ^abt geinoilt fie l^aben getvotit (" tnoílen). (" iüDÍÍen). (" tODÍÍen). (" trotten). (" trotten). I have been willing, etc. id) ^ûiic getuottí (or ttoíícu). bu ftabeft getrollt (" trotten), er ^abe gentottt trir ^aben getrollt it;r bttbet getrollt fie getrollt (" trotten). (" trotten). (" trotten). (" trotten). I had been willing, etc. Pluperfect Tense, I had itb gemottt (or motten). (" trotten). (" trotten). (" trotten). (" trotten). C' motten). bu batteft gemottt er boitte getrollt trir batten getrollt ibr hattet getrollt fie batten getrollt itb bätte bu bätteft er bätte trir hätten ibr hättet fie hätten been willing, etc. gcmottt (or motten). getrollt (" trotten), gemottt (" trotten), getrollt (" trotten), getrollt (" trotten). gemottt (" trotten> First Future Tense. I shall be willing, etc. ich merbe motten. bu trirft trotten, er trirb trotten, trtr trerben trotten, ihr trerbet trotten, fie trerben trotten. I shall be willing, etc. ich merbe motten. bu trerbeft trotten, er trerbe trotten, trir trerben trollen, ihr trerbet trotten, fie trerben trotten. Second Future Tense. ï shall have been willing, etc. ich merbe gemottt hoben. bu trirft getrollt haben, er trirb getrollt haben, trir trerben getrollt haben, ihr trerbet getrollt haben, fie trerben getrollt haben. I shall have been willing, etc, ich merbe gemottt hoben. bu trerbefî getrollt haben, er trerbe getrollt haben, trir trerben gemottt haben, ihr trerbet getrollt haben. Tic merben gemottt haben. § 166, 167.] POTENTIAL VERBS. 345 CONDITIONAL MOOD. Present Tense. I would or should be willing, etc. ÖinrÖC tooíícn, or ic^ moiitc {imperfect Subjunctive). bu iniirbcft molten, er mürbe moEen, mir mürben moEen, ' bu moEteft ' er moEte ' mir moEten i^r mürbet moEen, " i^r moEtet " " fie mürben moEen, " jie moEten " " Perfect Tense. I would or should have been wiUing, etc. td^ loiirbc gcEJoUt iabcn, or ic^ l^öttc gciDOttt {Plup. Suhj.) bu mürbeft gemoEt ^jaben, " bn ^ütteft gemoEt " " er mürbe gemoEt ^aben, " er ^ätte gemoEt " mir mürben gemoEt l^aben, " mir fatten gemoEt " ifjr mürbet gemoEt ^aben, " if^r t;ättet gemoEt " fie mürben gemoEt ^aben, " fie fatten gemoEt " IMPERATIVE MOOD. toOEc (bn), be wiUing. tbOEC er, let him be willing. ttloEcn tuir, let us be wiDing. EiflfíCt (if)r), be willing. ElOttCtt fie, let them be willing. INEINITIYE MOOD. Pres. tOOECtt/ to be willing. Pcrf. gCElOEt to have been willing. PARTICIPLES. Pres. ItlOÏÏbnb^ being willing. | Perf. gcttoMt, been wilEng. § 167. The Potential Verb iönttCtt indicates: 1. Moral or physical jpossihility : @r fditn lefen unb fi^reiben, He can read and write. 2. A concession or contingency : @ie iönncn raid; ermarten. You may expect me. ■3d^ lann raid^ geirrt tabcn, I may have been mistaken. 3. The independent verb (as t^un, fagen, lefen, fpred)en„ /OCr|le^en, etcl) is frequently omitted: 2Ba8 fann id; bafür (tfiun) ? How can I help it ? 3idt> fann niá^t meiter, I can do nothing more, er tat e8 gemoEt, aber er tat es He wished (to do) it, but he was not nidtt gcfonnt, able (to do) it P2 346 THE VERB. [§ 168, § 168. Conjugation of fönitctl {see § 164, Rem.) : Principal Parts: íonncn, îonntc, gcîonnt* INDICATIVE MOOD. fûitn, I can. tu fann=[t^ thou canst, er faiin, he can. tnir fönn^cn, we can. i^r iönn<(e)t, you can. fie ionn^en/ they can. tc^ íonn=íe, i could, bu Î 0 n n » tcft, thou couldst. er Í 0 n n Í te, he could. it»tr íonn = íen, we could, i^r íonuíící, you could, fie íouUííCU, they could. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present Tense. t^ tiiniliC, I can.* bu ionu^^cfi, thou canst, er îônuiC, he can. intr tönu^cn, we can. itr iouu^Ct, you can. fte iouu^cn, they can. Imperfect Tense. id; fönilitC, I could, bu Í0U U = ícfí, thou couldst. er Í Ö n u Í ÍC, he could, tnir iouu^tcn, we could. i§r íonuíící, you could, fie iönU'teH; they could. Perfect Tense. I have been able, etc. ^ tak gtfonni (or ibnncn). bu baft geiouut (" ienuen). er kt getount (" iönuen). tuir bateu geiouut (" iönuen). ibr bferer @oíbat fein, (I concede that) he may be a brave soldier. *2. Desire or liking (especially in the imperf. subj.) : mbttitc »iffen, I should like to know, gjlbite C8 bodb gefcbe^en. Oh, that it might happen! 3^ ba^c eb nicbt tbun mögen, I did not like to do it. 3cb mog cb ibm nkbt fagen, I should not like to say it to him. 348 THE VERB. [§ no. § lYO. Conjugation of mögen {see § 164, Rem.) \ Principal Parts: mögen, moí^íe, gemotzt» INDICATIVE MOOD. mag, i may. bu ntcgft, thou mayst. tx Jttag, he may. tt)tr ntög=cn, we may. ntDg==(C)t, you may. fie tnogíEn^ they may. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOIX Present Tense. tc^ mbg=C, I may.* bu mög^fft, thou mayst. er tuög»C, he may. lütr tnög^Cn, we may. t^r tnögiCt, you may. fie Utog^en, they may. Imperfect Tense. nilK^ííC, I might, bu tUod;4cfi, thou mightest. er uioíb'íc, he might, iuir inDd) ber @tabt, He is going to the city. Pxc. 1. The pronouns eê, i)C§, bieg (btefcé), löttg, when used indef¬ initely as the subject of the verb, do not control the number or person of the verb : bttt e§, ©it finb e§, It is I, it is they. S)aâ finb meine 9íi(bter (©c^.), Those are my judges. SSejentl^e ^e^ier btcfcê (StfîO/ Important mistakes these. Exc. 2. Courtly and official titles, though in the singular (as SDÎajefîSt, §otett, (Sjeelienj), have a plural verb : Suer SJÍajefíüt fjeru()en, Your Majesty is graciously pleased. Pern. 1. When, of two or more subjects in different persons, one of them is in the first person, the verb should be in the first person plural: S)U, betn 58ruber unb motten Thou, thy brother and I, will (i. e., (mir motten) fi^ajieren gelten, we will) take a walk. Bern. 2. When one subject is in the second and the others are in the third person, the verb should be iu the second person plural; S)U, bein Sruber nnb beine ©¿^me= Thou, thy brother and thy sister, fier jeib (i(»r feib) eingelaben, are (i. e., you are) invited. § 176. Some verbs, that are transitive in English, and, as such, govern the objective case, are rendered by in¬ transitive or reflexive verbs in German, and govern the genitive or dative case (§ 178,179). § 177. The following verbs govern the Accusative Case: 1. All transitive verbs (§118,1; § 83,1) : Sr lieft ba§ ^uà}, He reads the book. § HT.j SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 355 2. Verbs used in expressing weighty measure^ cost^ time ivhen, and time how long : bauerte cittcn T(10, It lasted a day. es Wiegt ein it weighs a pound. i})ctsbain liegt Dicr SJiCiíCn hon Potsdam lies four (German) miles S3eriin, from Berlin, es îcftet einen 2:i)ûler, it costs a thaler, er ícmmt bieíen Síbenb, He comes this evening. Rem. 1. When the time of the occurrence of an event is particularly speci¬ fied, it is put in tlie accusative case ; when it is indicated in a general way, it is put in the genitive case: er îommt bieíen Síbenb, He comes tUs evening, er îommt oft beÖ SJÎorgenë, He often comes in the morning. Rem. 2. The accusative case is used (mostly in connection with such ad¬ verbs as entlang, ílinouf, íierab) to express the direction given to the action indicated by the verb : er get)t bcn ®erg Ilinauf, He goes up the mountain. 3. Many impersonal verbs, as: dürften, to make thirsty. aitgc^etl, to concern. t)ungern, to make hungry. jammern, to grieve, frieren, to make cold. herbrießen, to vex. fc^iäfern, to put to sleep. fct)mer3en, to pain, freuen, to make happy. Wunbern, to sm-prise. (ré friert mid;, I am cold. (Sê UJUnbcrt micf*, it surprises me. 4. The reflexive pronouns of most reflexive verbs is put in the accusative case : (id; frene mict, I rejoice. @ie freuen fid;, you rejoice. Rem. 1. Some intransitive and impersonal verbs are sometimes used with a transitive signification, taking an object in the accusative case: ®r ging feinen ífijeg, He went his way. S« regnet Steine, It rains stones. {5r weinte bittere Sbränen, He wept bitter tears. Rem. 2. The verbs íefiren and fragen may govern two accusatives, one of the person, the other of the thing: (Sr íeí;rte mid; bie SDÍnfiÍ, He taught me music, frage id; bid;, I ask you that. Rcîn. 3. The verbs ncniten, Ijci^cn, fi^cítcn, fdiintfjfcn, tanfcn, govern two accusatives, both referring to the same person or thing : ®r nannte mid;.feinen greunb. He called me his friend. 2)a8 nennft bu arbeiten ? Do you call that working ? 356 THE VERB. [§ 178. Rem. 4. For verbs governing the accusative and genitive cases see § 178, 2: for those governing the accusative and dative see § 179, 2. § 178. The following verbs govern the Genitive Case; 1. The following intransitive verbs: ätd^ten, to regard. entratbeii, to do without. í^fíegen, to foster, bebürfen, to need. genießen, to enjoy. jdjonen, to spare. begel)ren, to desire. gefctiueigen, to pass by jpotten, to mock, brausen, to want. in silence. berfeljíen, to fail, gebrautben, to use. geinal^ren, to observe. bergelfen, to forget, gebenîen, to think. tjarren, to wait upon. tna^jren, to guard, benîen, to think. lachen, to laugh. tna^rne^men,toobseiTe. cntbebven, to do without. lointen, to reward. inaíten, to rule, •rmangein, to fail. tnangeln, to fail. tnarten, to attend. S)a6 iSBetb bebarf in ÄriegeSnöt^en In the horrors of war woman needs íicá (@cí;.), a protector. @ie ÍUCtncr, ^tinj ! You deride me, prince! Rem. 1. Of these verbs only erittaitgcílt and gcfi^lllieigcn are used exclu¬ sively with the genitive case. The others were also formerly used only with the genitive case, and arc yet used with it in poetry and other dignified styles of composition. They are at present, however, generally used as follows : 1. Transitively, and followed by the accusati\'e case (the verb generally receiving a different signification when used transitively from that which it has when used intransitivel}') : ©titer 58eíctí)i0ttttg bergeffen, To forget (intentionally) an injury, ©tnc iSaigegjaii bergefîcn, To forget the number of a year. 2. Or they are used intransitively and are followed by certain prepositions, which govern their appropriate cases, as : beniert (gebenîen), by att ] adaten, l^arren, h)aíten,by aitf; ladjen, jjsotten, icalten, by über: 2Ber ber ©effl^r fbottet, gebenît Who scoffs at danger is mindful of ti)rer ] ber tna^re §eíb aber bénît it ; but the true hero does not gar nic^t Ott bte ©efaijr, think at all of danger. Sine ladeen über feine ^boï^bib Rem. 2. The verbs fein, tterben, leben, ftcrben, berbtei^en, are followed by the genitive in some expressions, as : 3d; bin ber Sôîeinitng, baß— I am of the opinion that- (Sr ftarb eineS 'Sobeö, He died a sudden death. 2. The following transitive verbs require, in addition to the accusative of the person, the genitive of the tJitrtg : 2ïnifagen, to accuse. befd;ctben, to inform. crlaffcn, to discharge, belebren, to inform. befd;uíbtgen, to accuse. crlcbtgcn, to release, berauben, to rob. besetzen, to accuse. entlaffcn, to free from berichten, to inform. cntbinben, to free from, entlebigen, to free from. § 178.] SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 357 entHif^en, to strip. toSf^reci^en, to acquit. toerfti^ern, to assure, cntljcben, to exonerate, mahnen, to remind. bertröften, to delude, entlleibcu, to disrobe. überíüí)ven, to convict, bevweifen, to banish, entlabcii, to disburden, übcríjeben, to exempt. tüürbigen, to deem worthy, entiesen, to displace. ilberibeii'en, to convict, geilen, to accuse, cntmb^ncn, to wean. iibevjeugen, to convince. (anrf others.) freifprec^en, to acquit, berjagen, to drive out. gcmapnen, to remind, bevtlagen, to accuse. 9îtcptS tann tpn fcinCÖ Nothing can free him from his oath entbinben, 2Jian f;at ii;n Î)Cê ^0dlUCtt(líí)0 They have charged him with high angcííagt, treason. Rem. 1. Some of these verbs may be followed by the dative of the person and the accusative of the thing (§ 179, 2) : 5)(lá berfid^crc id; 3»í)ncn^ I assure you of that. Rem. 2. The genitive is often replaced by a preposition (as hotl, ßUf^ Ûtl), which is followed by its appropriate case : 9îid;t3 îanm i^jn feines ©cptburë Nothing can release him from his (or bon feinem 0d;irur) entbinben, oath. Rem. .3. If the verb is placed in the passive voice, the genitive construc¬ tion still remains unchanged: Sr tburbe öeö ^odlhcrrflííl^ cmfle^ He was charged with high treason, ííagt, 3. The following reflexive verbs take, in addition to the reflexive pronoun in the accusative, a complement¬ ary object in the genitive: 0i(^ anmaffen, to assume. 0icf) erfreuen, to rejoice (at). „ annehmen, to take interest (in). „ erinnern, to remember. „ bebenfen, to deliberate (upon). „ eríüf;nen, to venture. „ bebienen, to use. „ eribetreu, to ward off. „ befleißen, to apply (to). t, freuen, to rejoice (at). „ befleißigen, to apply (to). „ getroften, to hope (for). „ begeben, to forego. „ rühmen, to boast (of). „ bemäd;tigen, to master. „ fd;amen, to be ashamed (of). „ bemeiftern, to master. „ troften, to console one's self (for> „ befcpeiben, to acquiesce (in). „ iiberbeben, to take pride (in). „ befittnen, to recollect. „ unterfangen, to attempt. „ entäußern, to renounce. „ unterftet;en, " " „ entbred;en, to forbear (from). „ unteribinben, " " „ enthalten, to refrain (from). . bergelbiffern, to ascertain. „ entfc^lagen, to get rid (of). „ bermeffeu, to boast (of). „ entfinnen, to recollect. „ berfef;en, to expect. „ erbarmen, to pity, be merciful. „ berfidjcrn, to assure (of). 358 THE VERB. [§ 179. @tdj toeriDunbeni, to wonder (at). 0ic^ tnunbern, to wonder (at). „ ineigern, to refuse. (anc? others.) S)er (gerechte erbarmt fid; fciltcê The just man is merciful to his beast. Sr fann fid; taunt He can scarcely keep from laughing, entbalten, Rem. After many of these verbs the genitive case may be replaced by a preposition (as ou, ûUf, ÜtJCr): S)u barfft bid; betncr Söofli (or Thou needest not be ashamed of thy über beine 3Baf)í) md;t ft^ämen, choice. § 179. The following verbs govern the Dative Case: 1. Many (simple and compound) intransitive verbs: 5Ief)lteUl, to resemble, bant en, to thank, bienen, to sen^e. brDÍ;en, to threaten. fiitd;eit, to curse, foigen, to follotv. gicid;cil, to resemble, beifen, to help. mangeln, to fail, naljen, to approach nii^cn, to serve, baffen, to fit. fd;aben, to injure. f.(;einen, to seem. fd;me(icn, to taste, ftenern, to tax. (yd; banfe SbltCtt b"sh#, 2Sir folgen ií;nt bnrd; ben Söalb, tränen, to trust, troljen, to defy, toebren, to ward off. meinen, to yield, minien, to hint, jiemen, to become, gürnen, to be angry. (and others.) I thank you with all my heart. We follow him through the forest. Slbbelfen, to remedy, anhangen, to adhere, auffallen, to strike, aushelfen, to supply, begegnen, to meet, betommen, to agree, bcifatlen, to occur, beiftebcn, to assist, einfallen, to occur, entfliehen, to escape. entgegengehen, to go to- mijjtranen, to distrust. ward (to meet). na^ahmen, to imitate, entgegenlommen, to come nad;eifern, to rival. to meet. na^ftehcn,tobe inferior to. entíbred;en,tocoiTespond. nachftellen, to waylay, erliegen, to succumb. unterliegen, to succumb. gefallen, to please gehören, to belong, gehorchen, to obey, gelingen, to succeed, mifjfallcn, to displease. Vorgehen, to outstrip, boriommen, to occur. miberfbred;en, to contra- jnhören, to listen to. [diet. (and others.) It pleased me very much. It has just occurred to me. entgehen, to avoid. Saê hat mir fehr gefaUen, Œë ift mir eben borgeîommen, 2. Many (simple and compound) transitive verbs gov¬ ern, in addition to a direct object in the accusative case, an indirect ohject in the dative case : Söorgen, to borrow. laffen, to leave. melben, to announce, bringen, to bring. leihen, to loan. nehmen, to take, geben, to give. liefern, to deliver. rauben, to rob. îlagen, to complain. lohnen, to reward. fa^en, to saj. §179,180.] SYNTAX OP THE VERB. 359 fd^enten, to present. fte^íen, to steal. to pay. fd^icien, to send. tneigetn, to refuse. jetgen, to show, fc^reihen, to write. tnibmen, to dedicate. {and many others.) (5r brachte mit ben He brought me the letter. fc^icftc t^m baS I sent him the book, ajian raubte i^m baS ®elb, They robbed him of his money. ?lbgeben, to deliver. crííarcn, to explain, unterfagen, to forbid, anbieten, to offer. crjäbten, lo relate. toortnerfen, to reproach, aiijeigen, to announce. gefte^en, to confess. borjeigen, to show, b.n bieten, to proffer. mitt^eilen, to impart, jniagen, to promise, cntveiben, to wrest. nachjagen, to repeat, jnfibretben, to ascribe, embfe^iien, to recommend, nat^fe^en, to indulge. {and many others.) erjä^Ite i^m bte ©efd^ic^te, I related the story to him. (Sr batte unö bte ^lîacbridbten nttt=' He had communicated the news getbeiit, to us. Rem. 1. If the verb is placed in the passive voice, the indirect object still remains in the dative case : 2)te Siacbriibten tnurben un^ mit® The news was communicated to us. getbeiit, Rem. 2. Some reflexive verbs (§ 158, Rem. 2) have the reflexive pronoun (as the indirect object) in the dative case (§ 174, 4) : (Jib biibete eg mir ein, I imagined it (to myself). Rem. 3. Some impersonal verbs are followed by the dative case : abnet mir, I have misgivings. SJÎir fd;n>inbeít, I am dizzy. Rem. 4. The dative of the person is used after many verbs (as fein, UJCrbcn, geben, ergeben, fteben, fi^eii) and after many verbal expressions (as letb tbun, tneb tbnn, äßort halten, gu ^üífe íommen), thus ; (Sg ift mir nicbt tnobl, I am not well. ®g gebt ibm gang gut. It goes very well with him. äßie fitjt mir bag Sleib ? How dobs the dress fit me ? 2)ag tbut mir ícbr íctb, I am very sorry for that. § 180. Some verbs are followed by the dative or the accusative case, according to the signification with which they are used: j 3d; herfiiberte ibn, I insured him. (3cb bevfid;ertc ibm, I assured him. Í ïraue nitbt bcm äußeren 0¿bíihf not trust outward appearances. Iser'iprebiger trautbaSSraUfinilir, The preacher marries the couple. Rem. A few verbs may be used with the dative or accusative without differ¬ ence of signification : Sr Icbrte mi^ bte SDÍufií, He taught me music, lebrte mil bie aJluftî, " " " " 360 THE ADVERB. [§ 181-183. THE ADVERB. Stbucrfiiura.) § 181. There are but primitive adverbs. The chief of these are ; 1. The following particles (all of which, however, except a6 and eiu, are used also as prepositions) : 516, down, downward. 6ct, about, nearly. um,about,past, at an end. an, on, up, forward. 6ur^,througli, thoroughly. Uor, forward, formerly. OUf, up, upward. in CCtn) in. JU, too, also in the direc- onë, out, at an end. na^, after, afterward. tion of. 2öir tnerben at unb jn gcten, We will go to and fro (up and down). SSott nun an. From this time forward. auê, ein, From one year to another. Set) iennc i^n 6urc6 unb I know him most thoroughly, [merly. 5ia^ wie 6or, (Afterward as before) now as for- 2. The adverbs |o, Oft, ttUtt, etc.: 3ia, je tí)tVf je lieber, Yes, the sooner the better. 2)a8 ifi oft gefc^e^en, That has often happened. 3Son nnn Cin, From this time forward. § 182. Most Adverbs are formed (by inflection, deriva¬ tion, and composition) from 7iouns, adjectives^ numerals^ pronoims, verbs,prej)Ositions, and adverbs. Rem. Of some adverbs the derivation is " no longer felt" (§ 49, 2, Rem. 1 ), as : 6aib, soow (from the Goth, and O.-G. adj. bald—bold ; M.-G. bald=rapid). fannt,scarce/y ; kûme ; O.-G., chumo (from the aà.].kum—sick, weak). fc6r, very : M.-G., ser; O.-G., sero (from the adj. sêr=painful, which is from the Old-German noun das ser = the sore, the pain). § 183. Adverbs are formed from Nouns: 1. The genitive case of some nouns is used adverbi¬ ally (§ 81, 2,4), as: ülíorgen^ (bes SJÎorgcnê), in the morning (gen. of bcr 2)îorgcn, morning). StbcnbS (be§ îlbenbê), in the evening (gen. of ber ÏÏlbenb, evening, anfangt, in the beginning, at first (gen. of ber Slnfaitg, beginning), tbcilë, partly, in part (gen. of ber pai't). § 183.] FORMATION OF ADVERBS. 361 Rem. 1. Sometimes the genitive of an adjective or an adjective pronoun and the genitive of a noun are joined together into one word (§ 89, Rem. 1): îcincôuiegê, by no means (nom. îem Sßeg, gen. îeineê SBegeê). gliiífli diet loci fe, fortunately (nom. gíüdíic^e SSetfe, gen. gíüííltci^ier SBetfe). ÖCrgCftüIt^ in such a way (nom. bic ©cftaít, gen. ber Oeftalt), icbcrjcit^ at any time, always (nom. jebe gen. jeber Rem. 2. In some compound adverbs the new declension has replaced the old in the genitive of the adjective or adjective pronoun, as : attcnfoifg, in any case. lOtbCtgCnfiltt^^ in the contrary case, jcbcnfottö, at all events gCÖ^tCllt^CU^/ for the most part. Rem. 3. In forming some compound adverbs, feminine nouns take the genitive termination (=1), as : a^fcitS/ aside, apart; mCÍltCCÍCÍt^, for my part (from btC @ette,side). íltiíCií^, at one side ; fCtHCtfcU^, on his part " " " " Rem. 4. The termination of the genitive singular (s§) is given to some ad¬ verbs that have been formed from the genitive plural, as : lliicrbinoö (from alter binge), by all means ; ItCUCbbiltij^, lately, recently. Reî/i. 5. After the analogy of C^CJttÛÎêf/ormerl^ (in Mid.-Ger., ê mâles— aforetime'), are fonned in the New-Gerrnan the following adverbs : tlOntalS, at that time. ntCntCtl^^ never. jcntalê, ever, at any time. bOriîlÛÎê, formerly, once on a time. nadintûiê, afterward. cÇCHtaÎê, formerly, heretofore. Rem. 6. Very many adverbs take the genitive ending (sg), after the analogy of the adverbs that are formed from the genitive singular of masculine nouns, as will be noticed below (§ 184, 2 ; § 187, 2 ; § 188, 2, 4, and 5). 2. Adverbs are formed from the dative of nouns, either alone or in composition, as : ntorgcn, to-morrow (M.-G., viorgen, morne; O.-G., morgane, which is the dative singular of the noun morgen, morning), ÎliêïOCiÎClt, at times (SKcileu, dat. plur. of bte SBcile, a while). 3. Adverbs are formed from the accusative of nouns, either alone or in composition, as : tocg, away (acc. sing, of bet SSeg, the way), oHCtoCgC, every where (acc. pl., aUe SBegc, all ways), einmal, once (acc. sing., ein SJÎal, one time). jeitlciienS, as long as one lives (acc. sing., îltc ¿leit bc8 SebenS). ÍCihltelátPeiíC, byway of example (acc. sing., bic Seife). Q. 362 THE ADVERB. [§ 184-180. § 184. Adverl)S are formed largely from Adjectives: 1. All adjectives, whose nature permits them to be used adverbially, are so used without change of form: 2)a§ S3u^ ift gut getunben, The book is well bound. 2Btr ta^ren je^r fc^ncíí, We are traveling very fast. ®ie fatten ta^fcr geîâtn^it, Tbey bad fought valiantly. Rem. 1. Some words, that are now used only as adverbs, were originally adjectives (§ 182, Rem.). Rem. 2. Participles, like adjectives, may be used adverbially (§ 129, Rem. 4): fiebcnb ^eiÇem 2Öa[jev, With boiling-bot water. 2. A large number 'of adverbs are formed from ad¬ jectives by taking a genitive ending, =§ (after the anal¬ ogy of the adverbs formed from the genitive of nouns) : (£S iängt tcrcitê an gu regnen, It is beginning to rain already. @et>en ®ie rc^tö, unb bann linî^. Go to the right and then to the left. Êr tat eê ûubctê gemeint, ' He meant it differently. Rem. 1. Adverbs thus formed belong mostly to the New-German period. Re?n. 2. Some adverbs, and especially superlatives (§190,3), take the genitive termination stnêf after the analogy of such nouns as SûïïCU/ gen. iBaÎîenë, as : Unb iibttgCnS mollte er— And moreover be wished to— Rem. 3. By this last analogy are formed the ordinal adverbs, CrfíCUá, JttCis tCU^r briítCUá, eic. (§ 105, 2). Rem. 4. A few adverbs have added an anorganic :t to the genitive foim, and thus they have the appearance of being superlatives, as : @8 mar Ciuft ein ^onig— There was once a king— UníÜngft^ als mir in SSeríin ma* Not long since, when we were in ren— Berlin— § 185. For the formation of adverbs from Numerals, see § 105. § 186. The chief simrple adverbs that are formed from Pronouns are the following: tier, here. bU, there. tuaUU, when, ter, hither. bûun, then. U)U, where, tin, thither. bort, yonder. fo, thus. Rem. 1. These pronominal adverbs have been developed thus : Goth. : thar, thana, hvan, hvar, sua, O.-G. ; hiar, hëra, hina, dâr, danna, doret, huanne, hâur, so, M.-G. : bier, hër, hin, da, danne, dort, wanne, wa, so, N.-G.: tier- i&cr. tin. ba. bann. bort. mann. mo. fo. § 186-188.] FORMATION OF ADVERBS. 363 Rem. 2. / and are formed from a demonstrative pronoun that is now found only in the Gothic (his, hija, hita = bet, tie, ba§ = this, that). Rem. 3. iSfl, bûnn, and bott are formed from the demonstrative pro¬ noun bcr, biC^ boë (Gothic sa, so, thata; accusative ihana, tho, thata). Rem. 4. UBûnil and 0)0 are formed from ttCb, ^vho. Rem. 5. Tlie indefinite pronouns OtCl, lOCIlig, gCHUg, and CtttttÖ are often used adverbially (§ 112) : Sr ift OicI größer al§ id;, He is much taller than I am. 2)ie @eid;ict;te bcr ©tabt ift nur The history of the city is only a little tocntg beîannt, known. !5)a0 ÜucI; ift ni^t breit gcnug, The cloth is not wide enough, ©r tnar cttoaë aufgeregt, He was somewhat excited. § 187. Derivative Adverbs are found by means of the terminations :en, 4ing§, did)* 1. The termination íCll is employed in forming adverbs from a ferv other adverbs : ?lußeu, without, outward (from au§). obeu, above, aloft (from ob). innen, within, inward (from in). f)inten, behind (from f;in^. unten, under, below (from unter). horn, before (from Por). 2. A few adverbs are formed by adding =Itng§ to ad¬ jectives, nouns, or verbs : iBíinbíingé, blindly, rashly, at random (from blinb, blind). puf)tiing§p head foremost, head over heels (bag §auf)t, head), rittlings (reitlingS), astride, astraddle (reiten, to ride). [back). rüctíingS, backward, from behind (ber fRücf, obs. from 9iü(fen, meud;IingS, insidiously, like an assassin (tneuf^eín, to assassinate). 3. Many words with the termination =Ii(^ are used only adverbially (§ 86, 2, 6), as : greilic^, certainly, indeed. fc^foertidf), scarcely, hardly, enblid;, finally, at last. ficfierlid), certainly, surely, filrjlid;, shortly, recently. foa^rlic^, truly, really. § 188. Of the many ways in which Compound Adverbs may be formed, the following are most important : 1. By uniting two nouns (especially with SBcífc, a way or manner, for the last noun) : ©dierjfoeife, jocosely, in fun, in jest (ber (Sc^erj, joke, bie Sffieife, way). ffJOttfoeife, mockingly, derisively (ber derision, bie SBeife, way), trojjfenttjeife, in drops, by drops (ber 2:rof)fcn, drop, bie SSeifc, way). 864 THE ADVERB. [§ 188. 2. By uniting an adjective and a noun: ©íeic^íoííé, likewise, also (§ 183, 1) (gleict, like ; fccr case). gro^tent^eilS, for the most part (größten, greatest ; ber Xl^cií, part;. gerabeêinegS, straightway (gerabe, straight; ber 2Beg, way). 3. A numeral and a noun (especially see § 105) : (Stninal, once, once on a time. breimal, three times. 4. By uniting an adjective pronoun and a noun: Meufailê (§188,1, Rem. 6), at all meinerfeit« (§ 183, l), for mypart. lebenfattS, in any case, [events, jeberjeit (§ 183,1 ,Revi.), at all times. 5. By uniting a preposition and a noun : Sihjeitë (§ 183, 1), apart, to one side. hetgeiten(§ 183, l, 2), betimes, in good time, early, soon. btêlretlen, at times, at intervals, occasionally, now and then. í;mterrÜCÍ0, from behind, behind one's back, underliandedly. iiber^au^t, in general, on all occasions, in the main, at aU. ÜbertTIorgert, day after to-morrow. guineiien, at times, sometimes, occasionally. 6. By uniting a preposition and a pronoun: Snbeffen, in the mean time. itberbieê, besides, moreover. 7. By uniting a noun and an adverb (orpreposition) : S3ergauf, up the mountain. ja^ircin, ) year in, year out. bergab, down the mountain. ja^rauë, ) from one year to another, [tromauf, up stream. ío^jfüber, head foremost, ftromab, down stream. io^jfunter, headlong. 8. By uniting two adverbs: Sííébaíb, immediately. ebenfo, just so. (iter jelbft, exactly here. immediately, bafelbft, exactly there. fobalb, as soon (as), bennoit, hoAvever. bieHeidlt, perhaps. ()ier(ier, hither. bort[;in, thither, herein, in (hither). í;inéin, in (thither). ^erauê, out (hither). flinauê, out (thither). 9. By uniting two prepositions : 2)urc^auê, entirely. borbet, past, over (finished), ingibifcten, in the mean time. borüber, " " " 10. By uniting an adverb and a preposition : ^terburd;, by this means. baburd), thereby. ()iernac(l, according to this. Iboburdj, Avhereby. §188.] FORMATION OF ADVERBS. 365 Rem. 1. Compound adverbs, formed by uniting the adverb bfl and a prepo¬ sition, are usually employed instead ot the dative and accusative of the de¬ monstrative pronoun bcr^ biC^ bllá (§ 11-, 2, Rem. 3), when used absolutelj, and not referring to a person ; if the preposition begins with a vowel, the original t (bur, see § 180, Rem. 1) is retained; 2^abct, thereby, by that, by it, by them (^for bei bcm, bet bfo)- babutc^, therebv, by this or those means ( " buïd) baS, butd; bte). bafür, for that, for this, instead of that ( " fiiï ba6, füv bic). bacjegen, against this, against that (" gegen baS, gegen bte). bemit, therewith, with that, with them ( " mit bcm, miit ben), batan, thereon, thereby, by it, by them (. " an bem, an bie). barauf, thereupon, thence, from that ( " auf bem, auf ben). barauS, therefrom, thence, out of this ( " auá bem, auS ben), bavin, therein, within, in it, in that ( " in bem, in ben), baritber, thereover, thereupon, over that ( " übet baá, übet bic). barum, for that reason, therefore, fur that ( " um ba6, um bie). bavnnter, thereunder, among it, among them ( " unter bem,unter ben^ babcn, therefrom, thence, from it, from them ( " bon bem, bon ben), batbiber, against this, that, or them ( " tbibct baô, ibibcr bie), baju, thereto, from that purpose, to that ( " JU bem, JU ben), bajmifdjen, there between, between them ( " Jlbifd;en ben). Rem. 2. Compound adverbs are formed in the same manner with the ad¬ verb ^icr and prepositions, instead of the dat. and ace. of the demonstrative pronoun McfCt (§ HI), when used absolutely and not referring to persons: §ierbei, hereby, by this, by these (/or bei biefem, bei biefen). bierburdi, " " " " " ( " burcf» biefeg, bur^ biefe). hiermit, herewith, with this, with these ( " mit biefem, mit biefen). etc., etc., etc., etc., etc. Rem. 3. Compound adverbs are formed in the same manner with the ad¬ verb ttlO and prepositions, to take the place of the dative and the accusative of the absolute interrogative and relative pronoun ttaS (§ 113, 1, Rem. 2;'. Sffiarum, why, on what account, for which, for what (/or um tbaá). mobei, whereby, at which, at what, during what ( "bei iv'êm). moburch, whereby, by what means, through what ( " burd> irai). trofiU, wherefore, for which, for what ( " für mai), ircgegeu, against which, against what ( " gegen 'mai), momit, wherewith, with or by which or what ( " mit vcënî). toouadl, whereupon, after or for which or what ( " uai^ w'èm). moran, whereon, by which or what, on what ( " au tnai). morauf, whereupon, upon which, upon what ( " auf irai), moraui, wherefrom, whence, out of which or what ( " aui w'êni), tnoriu, wherein, in which, in what ( " in ioaS). morüber, whereupon, upon or at which or what ( " über mai), mobon, whereof, from or of which or what ( " ppn wèni). mogu, whereto, why, to or for which or what ( " gu voënù 366 THE ADVERB. L§ 188,189. Obs. The dative ofJDttê (0.-(r., hwëmu; M.-G., wëm) is obsolete in the N.-G. (§ 113, 1). For the dative with a preposition, the compound adverbs inomit, tü onac^, h? o jit, etc., must be used. 11.^ Some compound adverbs have been so modified and contracted that their origin is "no longer felt as : §eute, to-day (Af.-G.,hiute; 0.-G.,hiuto; coner, Woiltn, etc). Such words are called by some writers conjunctive adverbs., by others adverbial conjunctions § 194. The following general rules apply to the posi¬ tion of adverbs : 1. The adverb is placed before an adverb or adjective which it modifies : 2)cr 33erg ift (cí)r The mountain is very high. 2ßir faí>rcn fc^nett. We are going very rapidly. Rem. ©Cnug (enough), however, when used as an adverb, and modifying an adjective or other adverb, is placed after the modified adjective or adverb ^ (gr ift rcii^ flenug, (gr lommt oft genug. He is rich enough. He comes often enough. Q2 370 THE ADVERB. [§ 195. 2. The adverb is placed after the verh when the verb occurs in simple tenses and in main sentences; it is placed before the verb when occurring in compound tenses or in subordinate sentences; Sie fingen fcí)c Ící;i3n, They sing very beautifully. ©ie ^ahen fcí)r fcf>bn gefangen, They have sung very beautifully. 2)îan bat nnê gefügt, baß fie fc^í We have been told that they sing fcbbn fingen, very beautifully. Rem. The negative particle nil^t (not) follows this law when it refers to the predicate of the sentence or to the entire expression, taking the last position ^vhen there are several adverbs ; if it refers to a single word of the sentence, it is placed immediately before that word : iotntnt bente níl^t/ He does not come to-day. (Sr ift beute ntcbí getonunen. He has not come to-day. Sitte beníen ni(í)t inic All think not as you (i. e., all think differently from you), ûttc beníen tnie ©ie, Not all think as you do. § 195. Many adverbs have no exactly corresponding word in English, or they are frequently used in signifi¬ cations that vary greatly from those of the correspönd- ing English words. Thus: 1. §ter, here ; b(ï, here., there, now, then^ bott, th^re, yonder : 1. refers only to the place of the speaker. 2. fSlort, refers only to a place at a distance from the speaker. 3. But btt may refer to a time or place, near or distant. Qx tnottte ntn brei llbt bier fetn. He was to be here at three o'clock, nnb tfi nod» nicbt ild, and he is not here yet. Çerr 2Betß ift nacb iprag gegangen; Mr. "VVeiss has gone to Prague ; he er mnß ffbon btt fein, must be there by this time. 35on bd an, From that time forward. ñe?n. 2)d is often used as a conjunctive adverb (or a conjunction) : ®d (conj.) nod) Sittel lag in ioeh While all lay in far distance, then ter decision and courage; ^d (adv.) batteft bu ^ntfcbiuß unb and now, ichen success is insured, ttJîntb ; ííaic you begin to faint and Unb je^t, bd (conj.) ber Erfolg ge« tremble, fiebert ift, S)d (adv.) fängft bu an ju 3agen (©(bO» § 195.] SYNTAX OF ADVERBS. 371 2. Grft, when signifying ov firstly, and indicating the priority of one action to another, receives a full tone of voice ; (5rft Scrtc, unb bann Streiche (®c^.), First words and then blows ("deeds"). Reui. Signifying only, not earlier, not further, not more, Ctft does not re¬ ceive a full tone of voice: (Sr ift c r [t gcftcrn angeiommen, He only arrived yesterday. Sr ift e r ft JCÍin alt, He is only ten years old. 3. The affirmative adverb jd {yes) is often used in the signitication of certainly (/hojpe that), indeed: §at er cá get^an ? i^a Î Has he done it ? Yes ! 0ie tnerben ja îommen, You will certainly (I hope) come. <5r ift ja mein SSater ! Why, he is my father ! 4. {still, yet), used before numerals or indefinite pronouns,is translated by more or another in English: 3d; f;alje nntil eine Sitte, I have anther request. 6r ()at nofb Jtnei Sii(^er geiauft. He has bought two books more. Rem. 9ít)Í! fo is translated by however, ever so : 0ei er aueji nO(^ fa reid^. Be he ever so rich. 5- {already) is frequently omitted in translat¬ ing into English : (5r ifi fi^on ongefomtneit. He has already arrived. ^r ift f^Ott geftern 2lbenb jurild^' He returned (already) yesterday getommen, evening. Rem. @C^On often expresses emphasis (as oí confidence or certainty) : 0ic tnerben mid^ ftfion berfteten. You will (I hope) have understood ©i^Oll ben folgenben fUîorgen— The very next morning— [me. 6. SSoP (well) frequently expresses logicaljoossihility or prohahility : 0d;iafen ©ie tao^U (May you sleep well!)=good-nightI ©'S îann tDO^I fein. It may (indeed) be. ©ie babcn c8 lOOl^I geíefcn. You have read it (I suppose). Rem. 90DÍ)Í sometimes is used to express intensity or emphasis : 3d; modjte tool^l toiffen, I should really like to know. 3a tOO^I ! Yes 1 (Yes, indeed I) 372 THE PREPOSITION. [196. PREPOSITIONS. (2)ic S3orü)örtcr.j § 196. Prepositions are Q\i\iev^rimitive^derivativey or compound: 1. The primitive prepositions are: an, auf, au^, ki, fcurd), für, in, mit, oü, um, m, öon, ju. Mem. 1. The primitive prepositions were originaUy adverbs ; aU except bOll are yet used also as adverbs ; at least they may be considered as such when used as prefixes to compound verbs. Mejn. 2. The primitive prepositions have been developed thus : Goth. ; ana, iup, ut, hi, (bi-az), thairh, faiir, ïn, O.-G. : ana, ûf, uz, bî, biz, duruh, furi, in, M.-G.: ane, uf, ûz, bî, biz, durch, vür, in, N.-G.: an, auf, auê, bet, bib, buret), für, tu. Goth. : (mith-), nêhv, (uf), (af-ana), faúra, du, 0.-G.: miti, nâh, oba, umbi, vona, fora, zuo, M.-G.; mite, nach, obe, umbe, vone, vor, zuo, N.-G.: utit, uacf), oben, um, bou, bor, ju. 2. The derivative prepositions are derived as follows: 1. From nouns, as : fialb (fialber, fialbcu), traft, laut, ftatt, tra^, bermöge, tbcgeu. 2. From adjectives, as : gemäß, täugb, mitteíb (mittelft, bermitteíb, bermit» teíft), näcf)ft, fammt, feit, unfern, unmeit. 3. From participles, as : tbä^reub, uubefcífiabet, uugea^tet. 4. From adverbs, as : außen, binnen, bib, gemäß, f)inter, neben, nebß, c^ne, unter, über, 3. Compound prepositions are mostly formed by pre¬ fixing a preposition or adverb to a noun or to another preposition, as : Stnßatt, binnen, nm—ibiïïen, außerf)aib, entgegen, Pfotge, tnnerf)alb, biebfeit, gnibiber. oberftalb, jenfeit, unterl^atb, gegenüber, Rem. 1. The derivation and the composition of some prepositions is now "no longer felt" (§ 49, Rem. 3 ; § 223 ; § 233). Revi. 2. Most prepositions that are derived from nouns and adjectives, and most compound prepositions, have had their origin or have first been used as prepositions during the New-German period. § 197, 198.] CONSTRUCTION OF PREPOSITIONS. 1. CONSTRUCTION OF THE PREPOSITIONS. (9îeciioit îier aJcrttörtcr.) § 197. Prepositions do not govern a single case only (as the objective in English), but they govern the three oblique cases, the genitive^ dative^ and accusative (§ 80, Rem. 1) of substantives, whether nouns or pronouns: Sln^att feines SSruberS {gen.), Instead of his brother. aJîit feinem 93ruber {dat.). With his brother. O^ne feinen 33ruber (acc.). Without his brother. Rem. The primitive prepositions especially are not always independent gov¬ erning words, in the same sense that verbs and adjectives are. But often the preposition that is to be employed, as well as the case it is to govern (as, if accusative or dative), is determined by the preceding verb, adjective, or noun : Sr fteigt ouf ben i8erg, He is climbing up the mountain. (Sr ieibet flit Sî^eumatiSmuS, He is suffering from rheumatism. (Sr gebt in ¡)cn ©arten, He is going into the garden. ©r ift in bCBt (im) ©arten, He is in the garden. § 198. The following prepositions govern the genitwe case : S^icéfcií, mthciê (mtíícífb hcrmití ucrmögc, îcnfcit, iclê or bcrmiítcífí), toäbrcnb, íalíi (ffaíbtt or IfalbtïOf ftaW (or onftatt), toegcn, oii^crbait, «nbefí^cbcb «m—mitten, innerbolí, ungcaíbící, längg (or entlang), ODtïbaib, nnmeit, íro^, nnteebartl, nnfern, aufoíge» Rem. 1. The last three, iängg, trO^, and Snfoíge, may also govern the da- tive ease. Rem. 2. The following lines, containing most of these prepositions, are com¬ mitted to memory in schools in Germany : Rnwcit, mitteljl, traft unb h) à|renb, laut, »ermöge, un geachtet, oberballiunb unterhalb, innerhalb unb außerhalb, bte(3ieit, jenfett, halben, wegen, flatt unb längd, jufolge, trofe, flehen mit bem 0enitit>, ober auf bie ffrage „tocffen?"— 2)och tfl hier nitht ju »ergeffen, ba§ bei btefctt lectern brei auch ber ®otio richtig fei. Rem, 8. None but derivative or compound prepositions govern the gen. cas^ 374 THE PREPOSITION. [§ 199-201. § 199. The following prepositions govern the dative case : 0Cittäß, fammí, au^cr, mit, feit, 6ei, nat^, Don, Dianen, nü^ft, p, entgegen, neDft, ä«itäergnügenS ^ûibcr He went to the Springs only for the in§ i8ab, sake of pleasure. 2)e8 @elbe8 Tor the sake of money. Rem. I, ^ttíí) is rarely used with the force of a preposition except in com¬ position with a pronoun : SBc^baib? On what account? on this account. Rem. 2. ^aíbcr is preferred to fmlbCR when the noun it governs ends in sttt ' Gr ^at, feiner rielen ©c^níben He had to run away on account of bcr, fliegen ntüffen, his many debts. Rem. 3. pulten is united with the pronoun it governs into a compound word, taking an anorganic t or Ct as letters of union (§ 107, Rem. 2) : 3Dieinetbaiben, on my account. Unfert^alben, on our account. Rem. 4. Feminine nouns in A^tM, AÚt, ;ling, when followed by and not preceded by an article or adjective, often take an unorganic ending sg (after the analogy of some compound nouns, see § 58, 2, Rem. 2) : Gr reifte ©efunb^eitS l^albCC in8 He went to the Springs for the sak« ®ib, of his health. Rem. 4. .^(líbet is sometimes preceded by itnt, placed before the noun: Urn bc8 griebens :^aíber^ For the sake of peace. Rem. 5. ^albeit is formed from the dative plural bit {the half, side) ; b a Í b e r is an irregular form of b ci Í b c n ; 1) ^ t b is a contraction of the accusative singular (M.-G., halbe=hal/). 376 THE PREPOSITION. [§ 204-206. § 204. From the accusative of the same noun (fete ^ûlk) have been formed the four following prepositions ; 2lu^crí)aíb, outside of, without, beyond, inside of, within, on the upper side of, above. UntCfÎ)ûlD^ on the lower side of, below. 3'íürttberg í)at CU^efíldít unb ins Nuremberg has many stately edifices Itcrllttli) ber ïDîauertt bieíe ftatt= outside of and inside of its walls, lid^e ©ebdiibe, SBormâ liegt S3tngen Worms lies above, and Bingen be- UntCfildlti ber SSunbeêfeftung low Mainz, a fortification of the SKainj, (German) Confederation. Rem. 1. may refer also to a specified space of time: i^nitcr^ûïii einer @tunbe, eineê £ageê, Within an hour, a day. § 205. (by the ypower of in virtue of), denotes rather a moral than a physical cause (compare Öermögc, §215): Í feineê 3intteê, By virtue of his office. Rem. 1. has become a preposition by the dropping of the preposition til/ which formerly preceded it : f;2)a er nic^t in ^rtlfi eineë berlie^ As he does not rule by virtue of a ^enen Sltnteê regiert," borrowed office. Rem. 2. (like laut, ber möge, and Bel; ufé) has come from legal language (S'anjíeifíBÍ) into the language of literature. It was first used by good writers in the seventeenth century. § 206. Süngé or cníííing {along, lengthwise of)'. 2(tng^ beé !£í)alcé. Along the valley. (Sníííing beé SBaíbgehirgeé, Along the forest-covered mountain. Rem. 1. Both forms are frequently used with the dative case: S ä u g é bent Ufer, Along the shore. @ U11 a u g bent ©trome. Along the stream. Rem. 2. Sângê is occasionally (entiling more frequently than I â n g SX found with the accusative ease : Î ä u g ê ben ©aal l^inah, Down along the Saal. (S U t Í a u g ben f^eifeufjfab. Along the rocky path. Ret/!. 3. Entiling frequently follows the noun which it governs î (Gew.) ®eé SBegeé entlang, Along the way. (Bat.) S)em S3eet entlang, Along the parterre. (ÄCC.) 35en aauten S3era entlana. Alone the whole mountain. 207-209.] CONSTRUCTION OF PREPOSITIONS. 377 Rem. 4. is sometimes used (with the accusative of nouns) indicat¬ ing time (meaning through) ; iBZand^eu iugenbltc^eit Sag cnt^ Through many a day of my youth. lang i®.), § 207. Saut {according to,hy the wording of) refers to something spoken or written : Saut bes 58ete^íe8, According to the order. Saut bes iBevtrageS, By the wording of the treaty. Rem. 1. Suut is used by some writers also with the dative case : it is es¬ pecially used with the dative plural of nouns when they are not preceded by an article or by an adjective : {Gen.) Saut friiijCrCC iöricfc, According to former letters. {Dat.) Saut ^tiefen aus meiner §eh According to letters from my home, mati), Rem. 2. Saut has passed to be a preposition by dropping the preposition UÛÎ^ (formerly written u a dj 2 au t e=according to the wording). § 208. The four words mittcU, Ulittelft, Ucrmittclê, tJCt= mittclft have the same meaning {through.^ hy means of thro ugh the instrumentality of )—not referring to per¬ sons ; see bur^ (§ 238) : SBir iamen nitííCÍfí(or bermittelft) We reached the shore by means of eines ^a^neS auS Ufer, a skiff. 2)amf5ffc^iffe merben t^nfig Ucr^ Steam-boats are frequently driven by niiíícift einer @c()raube bemegt, means of a screw. Rem. 1. The form UCrUtítíCÍft is most frequently employed; and JUlítClft is more usual than either or UtittClÖ. Rem. 2. The four forms are derived from the Genitive of the adjective mit« tel, which was first used adverbially (§ 107, 2) and then as a preposition. The form ber mittel ft was current in the 17th century ; m i 11 e I ft first appears in the writings of Steinbach (1734). Rem. 3. The st is added unorganically to the genitive ending (§ 107, 2). Rem. 4. The provincial use of these prepositions with the dative case, which has occasionally crept into the works of even such writers as Goethe, is not approved by German grammarians. § 209. 0tctt or anftatt (instead of inflace of) : 2tnfiatt (or ftott) feine« S3ruber«, Instead of his brother. Rem. 1. The placing of ©ttttt after the noun it governs, which was vety general in the Middle-German, is now considered antiquated ; 2in feines SSruberS 0tatt (compare in English, in his brother's stead). Rem. 2. The noun 0tatt (stead) has become a preposition by the dropping of an, which formerly was generally employed before it. 378 the preposition. [§ 210-215. § 210. {in spite of, in defiance of^ nothwithstandr ing) : be§ 9îegen8 gingen intr nad; In spite of the rain we went to the betn STÎujeum, museum. Rem. 1. indicates more active opposition than ungeachtet, and is therefore perhaps more properly to be construed with the dative case ; bem 33crhDte, In spite of the prohibition. Rem. 2. 0^ has become a preposition by dropping the preposition JU (m; in jnnt (in defiance of). § 211. Unficfi^obct {without injury to or detraction f rom) : 0einer ©hre Without detracting from his honor. Revi. I. Unbefchabet may precede or follow the noun it governs. Rem. 2. It is sometimes used with the dative case. § 212. Unt-Ü)tíícn {for —'5 sähe., for the sähe of, on ac¬ count of) : bitte bi(^, unt @otte§ tnitittt, I entreat you, for God's sake, not to eg nicht ju thun, do it. lînt beg Çriebeng tnilitn, For the sake of peace. Rem. Occasionally, though rarely, examples are met with where one par¬ ticle (inn or Iniíícn) is omitted. § 213. UngCrt^tct {notwithstanding, in spite of, without regarding) : Ungcnthtet beg Sîegeng, gingen tnir In spite of the rain we went to the nath bent Slínjenm, museum. Rem. U n g e a d;i t e t may precede or follow the noon. § 214. UntiJCit or nitfCrit (not far from, near) : (Sr njohnt unfern beg ü® i"'®s "ot tii® s^te. UnUieit beg 33ergeg liegt bag 2)orf, The village is not far from the mountain. Rem. I. The parallel forms ohnh^cit, ohnfern, are now rarely used. Rem. 2. U U It) e i t and unfern are occasionally found used with the dative. Rem. 3. Both words have had their origin during the New-German period. § 215. SJcrutögC (hy virtue of, in conformity with, hy the poioer of) : ïïtlte Äörfjer ftrebcn hcrntbge ihrer -AU bodies tend towards the center 0d;»ere nach bem fDiittelfJnnït of the earth, through tlieir at- ber Srbe, traction of gravitation. iBcrmiigc beg SBertrageg, By virtue of the treaty. § 210-219.] CONSTRUCTION OF PREPOSITIONS. 379 Re7n. ]. iJlcrillÖQC may be used in most cases where frQft and laut are employed. Rem. 2. 2? e r m Ö g C was originally a noun preceded by n a § 216. SBii'^rcnb {during the time of) ; SBätrCnb teg Ärtege?, During the war. Rem. I. SBiibrCnb (from m äf^en, to endure') was first used as a parti¬ ciple or adjective (as in mSbreubem Stiege) ; it was next used with the quali¬ fied noun in the genitive (irä^tcnbeö Stiegel, compare beâ 3Jîcrgen, § 81, 3) ; it was first used as a preposition in the last half of the eighteenth centmy. § 217. 3Bcgcn {on account of .¡for the saJ¿e¡ or imrpose of) : Sßcgcn be§ 9îegen§ (or be§ 9îegenà On account of the rain I remained ix^egen) blieb ic^ ju Çaufe, at home. [strife. Dlic^t ©treitenê mcgCtt îani ic^ ^er, I came not here for the purpose ot Rem. 1. 2S e g e n can thus either precede or follow the noun. Rem. 2. 23 e g e n has become a preposition by dropping the preposition toon from bon a form that is now antiquated except in some fixed expressions, as : SSon 9îed^t6 tocgcn^ For the sake of justice. Rem. 3. 23 eg en is suflSxed to the personal pronoun, taking an unorgaiuc =t or îCt as letters of union (§ 107, Rem. 2): SDÎeinettregen, on my account. ©einetinegen, on his account. § 218. 3lîf''Î9f consequence of in jpursudince of in accordance with) : ®r tbat biefeê jnfolgC meine§ 2íuh He did this in accordance with my tragS, commission. [tions. ¿Ufolgt gewagter ©peíuíaticnen, In consequence of rash specula- Rem. 1. WHten the noun follows sufolgc, the noun is put in the dative case : Bufolgc ber neueften i)lac^ri(^ten, ) According to the latest intelli- (or) $en neueften 9îab^ric^ten jufolgc,) gence. Rem. 2. Formerly the two words were separated (jU ^olgc), § 219. Many other words are used as prepositions, governing the genitive case (especially in the language of trade and commerce), as: Singcftditö, in view of {from ba6 2íngeft(í;)t, face). in behalf of ( " ber 23etuf, behalf, behoof). naniCnÖ, in the name of ( " ber Flamen, name), fcitcnö, on the part of ( " bie 0eite, side), binfit^ilic^, with respect to ( " bie ipinft^t, respect). with regai'd to ( " btC 9ÍÜ(ífid^t, regard). 380 THE PREPOSITION. [§ 220, 222. 2ïngcfi^§ ber ©efa^r, 9"iûineitè bes SImtmannS, ©citenö ber Sltern, ber folgen, 9íJláíiá)ííi¿^ beê SSort^etíS, J2en¿. When used with personal pr( is employed (§ 109) : Reiner felts, for my part. In view of the danger. In the name of the officer. On the part of the parents. In view of the consequences. With regard to the interest. 1, the form fciíá (instead of fcíícní^), ©einer f e i t S, on his side. 3. PREPOSITIONS WITH THE DATIVE CASE, (löflcujöricr mit bcm Satib.) § 220. {put of, fro7n) primarily refers to place, indicating origin, source, or the place whence : Sillê ber ©tabt îomnten, To come out of the city. (Sr ftamntt nitê einer ebíen gamiíie, He comes from a noble family. Rem. I. 2Í U s sometimes is used as refemng to a period of time: (Sin 2)i(^ter Cltê bent breijeftnten A poet of the thirteenth century. 3a^ri;nnbert, Rem. 2. It often refers to the material or to the parts of a thing: ®in ®efä§ auê Soften, A vessel of clay. 2)er SJÎenfc^ befielt ûuë Selb nnb Man cosnists of body and souL 0eeíe, Rem. 3. It may refer to the inner motive cause of an action ; (Sr f;anbeit fo aitê ©eij, He does so from avarice. Rem. 4. It may refer to the material or parts of a thing: 3cti erfel;e ûUê feinem Briefe, ba^ I see from his letter, that he is sick, er iraní ift, 3)aê mei^ lib cuö (5rfaf;rnng, That I know from experience. § 221. 9iu|cr {o7it of, outside of, heyond, excejyt) refers only to position—not to motion : Sillier bem §anfe gn fein, To be out of the house. (Sr ift either ©efa^r. He is out of danger, fstu^cr il^m, ftaben Sitte i()re ißfiidit All except him have done their get^an, duty. Rem. Sin fier {Mid.-Ger., ûzer; O/d-Cer., ûzar) is from the Old-Ger., ÛZ (aus), the ar being a derivative syllable. § 222. 25ci fear, at, with) refers only to position—not to motion : S3ci bem §aufe ftef)t ein S3aum, Near the house stands a tree. 3;n ber ©cí;íadit bei Seifigig, In the battle of (near) Leipsic. § 223-225.] prepositions with the dative case. 381 Rem. 1. ^ci mny indicate approximation, connection, possession, etc. : Œr incínit bei mir, He resides with me. babe îeiu ©clb bei mir, I have no money with me. iSci tiefer 9îad)ricbt, At this news. Rem. 2. 5?ci is used in making oaths or protestations : Set meiner Upon (by) my honor. § 223. ißinncn (icithm, hisideof) refers only to definite periods of time : Sinnen einer 51 n n be merbe icb Within an hour I will take my de- abreifen, pariure. Sinnen e i n e m 3 a b r e, Within a year. Rem. 1. Sinnen {M.-G., binnen), has come from theioicer-Cerman (§ 4) into the IIUjh-Gennan (§ 6), and is a compound of he innen (bei innen). Rem. 2. The reference to space originally indicated by bi n n e n is now re¬ tained only in such compounds as : 2^er Sinnenfee, inland sea. 2)a6 Sinnenianb, the interior part of a country. § 224. (Entgegen {towards, against) expresses a direc¬ tion of or tendency to a motion toward an object, either in a friendly or hostile sense : 2ier iDíenfcbenfreunb îcmmt bern The benevolent man meets in a Sittenben fvennblidb entgegen, kindly way one who asks a favor. 2)er Xabfere ge^t bem giinbe mu^ The brave man goes courageously tbig entgegen, to meet the enemy. S)er 2Sinb mar «në entgegen, The wind was against us. Rem. 1. Entgegen always comes after the noun it governs. Rem. 2. When motion is indicated, entgegen may perhaps be considered an adverb (i. e., a prefix of the compound verb, as c n t g e g e It g e 1; e tt). Rem. 3. Entgegen is sometimes used as synonymous with JUttlibcr : Sr bflt bem ißcfeble entgegen (or He has acted contrary to the com- ÎUttiber) gebanbelt, mand. Rem. 4. The word entgegen (M-G., engegen; O.-G., ingegin, inkakan) was formed by the union of ta ^•a¿aa=tn gegen=en4ígcgen. The t is add¬ ed by false analogy, after imitation of ent in inseparable compound verbs. § 225. Qicgcniiticr {over against, ogyposite to) refers to the relative position of two objects (which often have a hostile relation to each other) : S8ei 3oDiborf ganbcn btc Siuffen At Zomdorf the Russians stood ar- Greußen gegenüber, rayed against the Prussians. 382 THE PREPOSITION. [§ 226-228. Rem. 1. This preposition sometimes precedes the noun it governs: ©CQClliiilCr bem SDiufeum ift bie Opposite the Museum is the new Revi. 2, (ScgCHiiilGr is compound of gegen übet" = toward over (or over toward). § 226. ©cm{in conformity with, agreeably to) may precede or follow the noun it governs : (üemäj) tnetueni (or met^ I do as I had intended (or according nem SSorjai^e gtntö§), ^anble to my intention), so do I act. \à) fo, Rem. @ C 111 ä ^ was formerly an adjective (in M.-G., gemaeze ; in O.-G., gimazi, kimazi=nad; bem 2Jia^e). § 227. {with, in connection with) : ®ev SSater gel^t mit ben Ä'inbern The father goes out with his chil. and, dren. Ertrage beine Seiben mit ©ebníb ! Bear thy sorrows with patience ! Rem. 1. SOÎit is often used to denote the identity of time of one event with another ; SSir ftanben mit iîageêanBrudt auf, "We arose at daybreak. Rem. 2. 9Kit is frequently used in denoting the means of conveyance: (Sinen S'tief mit bcr fdqden, To send a letter by mail. 9)îtt bcï (Sifcnbalnt faf^ven, To travel by railroad. § 228. denotes primarily motion or direction to or toward a place {see ju, § 235) : (Sv tfi nfld) SSerítn gegangen, He has gone to Berlin. ®ie fegelten nQ(^ 9îorben, They sailed toward the North. Rem. 1. The particle JU or í){n is frequently added, being jdaced after the noun that is governed by nûdOî ®ev §afe lief niK^ ber @tabt JU, The hare ran toward the city. Sd bonnert Ufldl bem ©ebirge íjin^ It thunders in the direction of the mountains. Rem. 2. 9îfld) is used inexpressing a motio.a toward a person or thing, for the purpose of reaching, touching, or procuring it : Semanb fd;iagen. To strike at a person. 9i0d) bem Slrjt fd^iden. To send for a physician. Semanb fvagen. To ask about a person. Rem. 3. ffißd) frequently signifies ''after," whether referring to time or to place : neue S^ibíiot^ef, Library-building. 97ad) bem fünften 2)îat, (Siner ging bem Sinbern, After the fifth of May. One went after another. 229-233.] CONSTRUCTION OF PREPOSITIONS. 383 Rem. 4. 9íaá) frequently signifies according to, or in accordance with ; used in this signification, ntl^ may be placed after the noun it governs : Gö gc^t nic^t immer nûc^ unfern Everything does not always go ac- SBiinfc^en, cording to our wishes, fc^mecft SBein, That tastes of wine. Gr malt nû^ her -lîatnr, He paints from nature, ïïîeiner iDieinunq na^, In my opinion. § 229. or next to or next after) : Gr faß nöt^ft mir, He sat next to me. 2^er ÎÎTonfjriiij ritt gunäi^ft bem The Crown Prince rode next to Äöni^je(or bem Könige junöi^ft). the king. Rem. 1. 3 n n ä ft may precede or follow the nouns it governs. Rem. 2. i)i ä dift, the superlative of n a ^ e (§ 92), Avas not used as a pre¬ position before the New-German period. § 230. {together with) refers to a connection existing in thought rather than in reality : Sie @tûbt faf> ben §iinger netft The city saw famine, together with feinem ganjeu ©efolge mit fdjrecfí (or and) all its consequences, ap. lidien 0c^ritten fid; nai;ern (0d).), proach with fearful steps. Rem. 1. fJîctft is an irregular derivative from neben. § 231. denoting position over or ahove, is obsolete, except in poetry or in legal language: £)b bem Slltar ^ing eine 9)întter OA-er the altar hung a picture of the ©Otteg C0d).), Virgin Mary. Rem. For o6 (M.-G., ob; O.-G., obe, oba) in New-Ger., über is used. § 232. Samtni {together with) indicates a more intimate or natural connection than is expressed by nebfi and mit: Sa8 0(hifi fommt ber ganjen The ship, together Avith the entire iilîannfchûft nnb Sabnng marb creAv and cargo, became a prey to ein 9îanb ber SBeííen, the waA-es. Rem. Snmnit (M.-G.,samet; 0.-(7., samant) is derived from the Old- German adjective sarn (compare the English ^^same"), Avhich is allied to the Latin semper (always^ and the Greek avv (with'). § 233. Seit {sùice, during) refers to a period of time that is specified with reference to the moment of its commencement, or to its duration : «Seit borgcftern babe idb ib« I have not seen him since day before gefcbcn (§ 256), yesterday. Gr if! fcit einem 3ab'^e hant, He has been sick a year. Rem. ©Cit (M.-G., sit; O.-G., sid) is allied to the Goth. adj. seithu=late. 384 THE PREPOSITION. [§ 234,235. § 234. S5oit (from) indicates source or origin in the most general way: SßOlt 33evíin gingen toir nai^ 93onn, From Berlin we went to Bonn. 5ÎÛII biefcnt Sage an, From this day forward. Rem. I. S3on is also used to express the material of which a thing is made, or the contents or pi'cperty of a thing : 2)er Stfc^ ift Ufllt The table is of wood. 6r ift ein sííann Uöll @^re, He is a man of honor. Revi. 2. It often denotes separation, and is also frequently used for the partitive genitive : 3ef)n hon §unbert ahjiel^en, To take ten from a hundred, ßtnei Don meinen f^rennben, Two of my friends. Rem. 3. SJOH may denote possession : 2)er iiönig Don ißrenjien, The king of Prussia. 3)ie Umgebungen OOU S3erlin, The environs of Berlin. Rem. 4. It is used in limiting the signification of some adjectives and verbs : Sr ift flein Don ©eftalt, He is small in stature, i'enne ibn Don ^nfef>en, I know him by sight. Rem. 5. S3on may be used to express the originator, the instrument, or the cause of an action or a result : ©in ©emäibe Don Síuben?, A painting by Eubens. 2)er §«nb mnrbe Don bem §errn The dog was beaten by the man. gef^Iagen, § 235. 3w indicates, primarily, motion ¿o a jperson : ©r gebt jn feinem trüber, He goes to his brother. ®ie fang jn ibm, fie fbra*^ jn She sang to him, she spoke to him. ibm (©.), Rem. 1. 3n indicates also position or rest in a place (being used in this sense before names of cities and villages especially) : ©r mobnt jn SSerlin, " He resides in Berlin. 2)ie Uniberfität 5n ©öttingen, The university in Gottingen. Rem. 2. ¿n indicates motion to an object or place, in many fixed exproe- sions, that were established during the Middle-German period : ©r gebt bon Ort JU Ort, He goes from place to place. 2)a3 áinb gebt 311 S3ett, The child goes to bed. Rem. 3. 3u is used in indicating time when, especially in many gensnü expressions (compare also a n, § 245 ; and U m , § 242 ) : 3u ©nbe bes labres, At the end of the year. ¿urn erften SDÍaíe, For the first time. § 236-238.] CONSTRUCTION OF PREPOSITIONS. 385 Rem. 4. 3u is employed in expressing many relations that grow out of the primary meaning of motion towards (and that of rest in) a place, as : ©r gei?t JU p ^fcrbc, He goes on foot, on horseback. 'J.^cnimevu gefrört p '!]|ircu|ien, Pomerania belongs to Prussia. (Sr laufte îiid; p einem 9îo(f, He bought cloth for a coat. Rem. 5. 3h was originally an adverb ; it was first used as a preposition in the O.-Ger. period. Being first used with pronouns, and then with reference to persons in the Mid.-Ger. period. Its use was then extended to names of things, indicating motion or position with reference to them. § 236. 3^101001 {against.^ contrary to) indicates a mo¬ tion or tendency in a stronger or more hostile sense than that which is expressed by C U t g e g C n (§ 224) : 2)aÖ @íü(í mar unê pttliiicr (@d).), Pate was against us. 2)er gcfnnben 35ernunft puitbct^ Contrary to sound reason. Rem. 3 U i b C r always follows the noun which it governs. Obs. The following verses contain several of the prepositions that govern the dative case. tS)apbnid an bie iQucIIc. Sîod) btr fcbntacbf tcb, iu bir ctl' id), bu geliebte Quelle, bu! 5luô btr fcböpf tíb, bei btr ruf tcb, fef bem ©fei ber SBeHen ju; SOiit b t r Íd)er5' icb, »on b i r lern' tcb btiht burcb baâ Seben mallen, 5lngelaítt »on grüf tng^blumen unb begrüf »on Siac^tigallen. 4. PKEPOSITIONS WITH THE ACCUSATIVE. (fBorioiirtcr wit bent ítccufatin.) § 237. S5iê (t-¿t¿, until., as far as, to) refers to both time and space : SSon S3eritn iiê ^otsbam flub bier Prom Berlin to Potsdam it is four beutfc^e SDÍeiíen, German miles. SSoit Dftcrn big ipfingften finb bier Prom Easter until Whitsuntide it SSo^en, is seven weeks. Rem. 1. The article can not be used before a noun governed by biö. Rem. 2. Some other preposition frequently follows biê : i¡3t8 nncb SDÎitternac^t, Until after midnight. duf ben legten §et(er, Down to the last fartlfing. § 238. 2)Urfi) {through, hy means of, hy) : SBir fuf)ren burib bte @tabt, We rode through the city. 2)Urfb ba« ganje Oafir, Through the entire year. 2)Ur4 Sidji fiat er e« erreicht, He has acquired it by diligence. R 386 THE PEEPOSITION. [§ 239-240. § 239. {for^ instead of^ in favor of) : (Sr jlarb für baS SSateríanb, He died for his country. ©r ging für feinen Sßruber in ben He went to the war instead of his Ärieg, brother. (Sin ©efd^eni für einen f^rennb, A present for a friend. Rem. 1. g Ü V is used in many expressions where a noun is repeated : 0c^ritt für 0cf)ritt ; Sag für Sag, Step by step ; day by day. Rem. 2. ü r is used before a noun taken as the equivalent of another sub¬ stantive noun, in such expressions as : i)alte if)n für einen e^rlic^en I consider him to be an honest naan. SJZann, Rem. 3. f^ür loses its prepositional power in Ütdé für (see § 118, 8). § 240. ®C0Cn {toioard, against) indicates motion, direc¬ tion, or tendency in either a friendly, hostile, or indif¬ ferent sense {see wiber, § 243) : 2Bir fegeiten gtgcit Siorben, We sailed toward the North, (gr inar fe^r freunblic^ ÜCSftt thtê, He was very kind toward us. S)ie SSerbÜnbeten jbgen grgctt bie The Allied forces moved against the f^ranjofen, French. Rem. 1. @ e g en may also indicate direct contact {against)-. (Sr leíante fic^ OtQCn bie SBanb, He leaned against the wall. Rem. 2. It may indicate approximation of time or number: fieben u^r bes SJÎorgenê, Toward seven o'clock in the morning. ®cgcn oc^t^nnbert ^'erfonen, Toward eight hundred persons. Rem. 8. ® e g e n may be used in expressing a comparison of two objects: (Sr ift gegen ®ic^ ein Síiefe I He is a giant compared to thee! Rem. 4. @ e g e n may be used in expressing exchange : 9îiir gegen baare 3abíung, Only on cash payment. Rem. 5. ©en, an abbreviation of g e g e n, is only used now in some fixed expressions; it is never followed by the article: ©en §immei ; gen Ojien, ToAvard heaven ; toward the East. § 241. Dl^nc {without) is in general the opposite to mit in signification : Oijne ©elb ; O'Öne Without money; without doubt. Rem. 1. The former construction of 0 Í; n e Avith the datiA-e (in the Middle- German) is yet preserved in the adverb o b n e b e in {besides that). Rem. 2. The use of 0 b n e in the sense of besides (a It jj e r) is antiquated : ©§ tnaren filnfjtg ^erfonen oI)nc There Avere fifty persons without ble Äinber, (counting) the children. § 242, 243.] CONSTRUCTION OP PREPOSITIONS. 387 Rem. 3. The use of fonbCF^ instead of is now antiquated, or poetic ; Í 0 n b e r can never be followed by the article : Söelc^ ein 2Bttt^ê^au§ fonber ©íei^ What an unequaled inn ! c^en Î § 242. Unt {around.^ ahout), implying either motion oi rest : 2Bir gingen unt bie @tabt ^evnnt, We went around the city. ®ie @äfte fa^cn UUl ben The guests sat around the table. Rem. 1. Before the hours of the day UIU denotes a specific time : 2)te 0onnc ge^t j,e^t Uttt í)aíb je^ä The sun rises now at half past five U^r anf, o'clock. Rem. 2. Uut is used before some other divisions of time to express approxi¬ mation of time {about) : Qt nñrb unt 9Jîittag îontmen, He will come about noon. Rem. 3. Uut may be used to express price, reward, etc.: 2)a8 toerbe i(t UtU íetneniPretS t^nn, That will I not do for any price. Re?n. 4. Urn is used in comparing number, size, or degree : (Er îam nut Jinei Sage jn fpät, He came too late by two days. Rem. 5. Unt frequently signifiesybr, concerning; Unt §üífe rufen, To call for help. ©tcf> nut etma8 beíümmern, To concern one' self about a thing. Rem. 6. UlU in some figurative expressions signifies loss, overthrow, de¬ struction, etc. : (gr ifl nut fein SSertnögen geíotnmen, He has lost his property. § 243. SBibcr {against) implies hostile opposition: mar luibcc feinen 2öiHen, It was against his will. Sßer nie^t f ü r mtc^ ift, ber ift Who is not for me, is against me. luibcr mid;, Rem. The adverb tb i e b e r {again) was written in the same way as the preposition m i b e r {against) until the beginning of the last century, Obs. The following verses contain most of the prepositions that govern ttie accusatit e case : ^h'lcmon an feinen ^vennb. ®nrci) ®tct) i|l bie SBelt miv fd^ön, oh"« toiirb' idb fie Raffen; 3ür 2) i ¿b leb iít ô^nj allein, nm 2)tcb mill tdb gern evblaffen; ©egen 2) t d) foil îein SJcrldumber ungcfhaft ftíb K »ergel)n, SBiber fein geinb fld) waffnen,; ic^ mill 2)ír ^ur (Seite fte^n. 388 THE PREPOSITION. [§ 244, 245. 5. PREPOSITIONS WITH THE DATIVE AND ACCUSATIVE CASES. (S5flrtoöricr mit î)cm 2)aíiu unb Stccufcítb.) § 244. The nine jpre^ositions an, auf, hinter, in, neben, über, unter, nor, jmifc^en, govern the Accusative Case when motion toward the object they govern is expressed. They govern the Dative Case when rest or motion within specified limits is expressed ; (Sv legte baê 33u(t auf bcn He laid the book on the table. 2)a§ Suc^ liegt auf bcm í^ifct', The book is lying on the table. Hem. 1. In general when these prepositions have reference to place or to space, they govern the dative if they answer to the question where?—and the accusative if they answer to the question whither? (see § 80, Rem. 1). Rem. 2. Usually even when fhese prepositions are employed otherwise thian V ith reference to space, the above general rule will sen e as a key to the cor¬ rect use of the cases, as : @ÍH ©ebicbt an ben älionb, A poem to the moon. (Sr arbeitet an einem SSerîe, He is laboring on a work. Re?n. 3. Where the use of the prepositions rests upon relations that are too abstract to be governed by the above laws, the following general rules wiU be of assistance : 1. 5lnf and iibtJf are generally used with the accusative case. 2. 3in, in, nntCb, bOf and jniifcbcn are generally used with the dative case. § 245. 5tn (on) indicates primarily nearness or contact upon the upper surface of a body, or lengthwise with a body : Sr bängte baê S5iíb an bic SßJanb, He hung the picture on the wall. @tnen Sîing an bem finger tragen, To wear a ring on the finger. Rem. 1. 9(n is employed in expressing definite ti?ne when (especially be¬ fore days of the week or the month ; see nm § 213 ; and § 88, 4) : (Sr ftarb am 5. âlîat 1847, He died on the fifth of May, 1847. 9ïm borigen Slîittmod; um 6 Ubr, Last Wednesday, at six o'clock. Bêiu. 2. 2ln may be employed in expressing a number or measure ap¬ proximately : (Sg roaren an fed;gbunbert ißerfo» There were about six hundred per- ncu toerfammelt, sons assembled. Rem. 3. 5ín may be used in expressing grounds of proof drawn from ex¬ ternal signs : SSir erïannten ibn an ber 0ttmme, We know him by his voice. § 245-247] CONSTRUCTION OP PREPOSITIONS. 389 Rem. 4. 5(u is used in many cases to express the direction of an action of tho mind or feelinjis : glaube an einen ©ott, I believe in one God. §ier ijl ein 33rtef an ®ie, Here is a letter, directed to yon. Rem. 5. 3tn with the article (ant) is used in forming the relative superla¬ tive of adverbs (§ 190, 1). Rem. 6. 3tn is used to express the relation of office : @r ift ißvofeffor an bet Uniberfltät He is a professor in the university jn ©ëttingen, of Güttingen. Rem. 7. 3tn is used, instead of the genitive case, in completing and limit¬ ing many predications : (St Icibet an Sîbeumati^mnô, He is suffering from rheumatism. (St ift fnng an 3at)ven, He is young in years. § 246. 5iuf (o?i, upon) denotes primarily position upon the upper surface on the upper part of a body: (St legte bas i8ud; anf ben ÍÍifá;, He laid the book upon the table. 2)aS i8ud; liegt auf b e m ïifd^e, The book is lying upon the table. Rem. 1. 3tuf often indicates position or direction, in a very general manner : ©r ffiobnt anf ber redeten 0eite ber He resides on the right-hand side of 0tra^e, the street. ©r fteigt anf ben Sburm, He is going up the tower. ©r ift anf ber 3agb, He has gone a hunting. ©r ift böfe anf nnS, He is angry at us. ©r »artet auf feinen SSruber, He is waiting for his brother. Rem. 2. 3lnf is used in indicating exact expressions or limitations of time, measure, or number : ©ei auf b i e 01 n n b e ba I Be there at the hour. ©r bat feine Sîecbnung bis auf ben He has paid his account to the last legten §elíer bejabít, farthing. i?e/n. 3. 3íuf is used to express sequence of time or order : 3lnf 9îegen folgt 0onnenfd;)ein, Sunshine follows rain. 3di babe eS auf feinen Sefebl getban, I did it by his order. Rem. 4. 3ÍUf is used in some adverbial expressions (especially in expressing the absolute superlative § 190, 2). § 247. ^intcr i^ehind, hacJc of) almost always refers to place : 2)er §nnb lief bintCt bad §an6, The dog ran behind the house. 2)cr ©arten ift Ijintcr bcm §auie. The garden is behind the house. 390 THE PREPOSITION. [§ 248-250. Rem. 1. When both of the bodies referred to are in motion, Winter gov¬ erns the dative case, and the adverb ^ e r is added : 9îoÎanb ritt ^iníeriU 2?ater ^er(U,), Roland rode behind (i. e. followingj his father. § 248. into) refers especially to place, time, condition, manner, material, or contents : 20ir gingen tn b i c 0tabt, We went into the city. ®r tüD^nt in b e r 0tabt, He resides in the city. Sr ftarb im hörigen Oîtober, He died last October. (Sr ^at eê im ©d^erj gejagt, He said it in a joke. 2)ajür tat er jioeitunbert He paid for that two hundred tha- in @oib bejatit, lers in gold. § 249. 9îcÎlcn (by, near, close to, by the side of) refers al¬ most always to place; @r ja^ neben feinem Sruber, He sat near (next to) his brother. dx je^te fict neben feinen ißrnber, He seated himself near his brother. Rem. When both objects are in motion, n eben governs the dative and the adverb f) e r is added (see tinter, § 217) : 2)er iSebiente ging neben bem The servant went along at the side 2öagen tev, of the wagon. § 250. Uc5cr {over, above, across) refers primarily to place: 23ir gingen über b i e iBrücfe, We went over the bridge. 2)erÂnabetatfeinen33aEHbeeba8 The boy has thrown his ball over §an8 in ben ©arten getoorfen, the honse into the garden. 2)a8 ©emälbe tängt Uber bet The painting is hanging over the ÍÍtÜre, door. Rem. 1. With the dative case über denotes position above an object, without coming in contact with it; with the accusative, it denotes motion over or across an object, either with or without contact with it. Rem. 2. U e b e r may also signify beyond, or the other side of: Ucbcr bem SJÎeere, Be3'ond the sea. 2)a8 gebt über feine iîrâfte. That is beyond his strength. §ente über adjt Sage, A week (eight days) from to-day. Rem. 3. Uebtr signifies also by way of(^via')\ 2Sir finb bon ipariê über Söln nnb We came from Paris by way of Civ ^annober geîommen, logne and Hanover. babe ben Srief über Bremen I sent the letter by way of Bremen, gefcbidft. § 251,252.] CONSTRUCTION OF PREPOSITIONS. 391 Bern. 4. llcbtt is in many cases used before the object to which a feeling or sentiment is directed : Sllie lachen über feine Sitelfeit, AU laugh at his vanity. @r ifl biife über irgenb ©tiraS, He is angry at something or other. Rem. 5. lieber (M.-G., über ; O.-G., uban; Gothic, ufar) is derived from the same root as ob (in Gothic, uf=up), see § 231. § 251. Unter {under, below, beneath) refers primarily to place : 2Sir fa^eu unter b cm SSaume, We were sitting under the tree. Sir festen unô unter ben ^aum, We seated ourselves under the tree. Rem. 1. 11 n t e r is also used in many figurative expressions, as in those indicating submission or subjection to superior authority : Saab irar bamalô unter The land was at that time under grembberrfd^aft, foreign sway. Unter foíd^en ÍSebtU^ungen, Under (upon) such conditions. Rem. 2. In expressions relating to time, unter usually signifies during: mar unter ber âîegterung It was during the reign of Frederick 5riebrid)8 bed ©ro^en, the Great. Rem. 3. U n t C r fi-equently signifies among, between : l'nÜ unter ben 3uí<í'^liern, I sat among the spectators. 3(i) rechne ibn unter meine f^reunbe, I count him among my friends. Rem. i. Unter ( J/.-G., under ; O.-U., and GoiÄic, undan) is probably allied to the Latin inter, and the Sanscrit antar—among. § 252. fBor (before, in front of, in the presence of, ante¬ cedent to)\ Gr ftanb bor bent §aufe, He was standing in front of the house. Gr erfc^ien bOr bent 9îid;ter, He appeared before the judge. Gr îam bbr ©cnncnanfcjang, He came before sunrise. Rem. 1. SSor is rarely used with the accusative, except with its primary .signification which refers to space (i. e., before, in front of) : Gr trat bor feinen 9íid;ter, He took his place before the judge. Rem. 2. S3or is frequently used (with the dative) in expressing the cause of a feeling or action : ¿ie meinte bor ^I^nbe, She wept from joy. Gr gitterte bor 5lngfî, He trembled from fear. Rem. 3. fßor and für formerly had the same signification. In the Lower- German dialects b 0 r is yet used to a great extent for f ü r. 392 THE PREPOSITION. [§ 253, 254. § 253. (between, betwixt, in the midst of) : 33eigien liegt gtotfd^Ctt J^^anírei^ Belgium lies between France and lUlb 2)eutj^Ianb, Germany. (Sr iam neun uub jeí^u He arrived between nine and ten U^r beg 3Jîorgenê an, o'clock in the morning. „®er geinb jäete Uníraut jUJÍfíí^eU The enemy sowed tares in (the midst ben äöetjen," of) the wheat. Rem. 3toti(icn is a contraction from the Middle-German en-zwischen (O.-G., in zwisken, which is from theO.-G. adj. 2Wi-fse=jnjet^ac^^twofold). Obs. The following verses contain the propositions that govern the dative and accusative cases : 3In heu SfJlong. 2Juf 2) i tUáet, auf 2) i r tneilet oft tnttn Slug' in f ü ^ e r Suft ; 2in 2) t r f)aft' id), an 2» t fenb' id) man(| ®efu^l aug fro'^er 33mjl ! 3n 2tc^ fe^cl, in 2ir finbet meine 3)^aníafte siel ©cenen, Unter b i e fie gern ft(^ trdumet, unter b e n e n bort bie fc^oncn ©eelen, über b i e f e Srb' er^b{)et, über ©rabern manbcln. asor m i cb tritt bann, «or m t r fîe^t bann ber ©ntfcblu§ redbt gut ju lanbeltt. 3toifcï)en b i e f e n ©träud)en fi¿' id), »roifdjen f i e fíie^U fidb Sein ©tral)h Sieben m i cb finît, neben m i r ru|t fie, bie Sreunbin meiner SBa^l 5 tinter micb fîill t)ingefcblííben, fîanb fie ladjenb hinter mir, lînb wir reben son ben ©ternen, unfren Sieben nnb bon Sir. 6. Bemarks upon (S3emeríungen über § 254. The following is an ositions, with their primary they govern : Sin (acc. and dat.), on, at. anftatt (see ftatt). auf (acc. and dat.), on, upon, aug (dat.), out, out of. außer (dat.), outside of. außerhalb (gen.), outside of. bet (dat.), near, by. binnen (dat.), within, big (acc.), until, biegfeit (gen.), on this side of. bnrd) (acc.), through, entgegen (dat.), against, entlang (see iängg). für (acc.), for. gegen (acc.), against. Prepositions. bie Sîorwôrier.) alphabetical list of prep- meanings and the cases gegenüber (dat.), opposite to. taib, talben, or talber (jgen.), in be¬ half of. tinter (acc.), behind, in (acc. and dat.), in, into, innerhalb (gen.), inside of. jenfeit (gen.), on the other side of. îraft (gen.), by the power of. Iängg (gen. and dat.), along, laut (gen.), by the wording of. mit (dat.), with. mitteig, mittelß (gen.), by the means of. nach (dat.), after, neben (acc. and cfa/.), near. 255-257.] REMARKS UPON PREPOSITIONS. 393 netft (dat.), together with. unter (acc. and dat.), under, oh (dat.), over. unteri^alh (ffen.), on the under side o£ oherhalh (jjen.), on the upper side, lintoeit (gen.), not far from. ohne (acc.), without. toermitteiê, ucrniitteíft (see initteí«). fammt (dat.), together with. öevmöge (gen.), by means of. jeit (dat.), since. »DU (dat.), from. jcnber (acc.), without. toor (acc. and dat.), before. ftatt (gen.), instead of. toä^rcnb (gen.), during. tro^ (gen. and dat.), in spite of. UJCgett (gen.), on account of. Über (acc. and dat.), over. IDtbcr (acc.), against. uni (acc.), around. JU (dat.), to. um-tritieu (gen.), for the sake of. gufolge (gen. and dat.), according to. unbefchabct (,17c«.), without injur- pnüíhfí («?«<■)) next to. unfern (gen.), not far from. [ing. juiriber (dat.), against. ungead)tct(5'e«.), notwithstanding, jtrifc^en (acc. and dat.), between. § 255. With the following exceptions all prepositions j>recede the nouns they govern: Exc. l.§aib(hatber, ^aibe n), and j u m i b e r always follow the noun. Exc. 2. (S n t g e g e u, g e g e u Ü b e r, and j u n ä cb ft usually follow the noun. Exc. 3. ©entäfj, nach, uugeadbtet, tnegen, and 3 u f 0 Í g e may pre¬ cede or follow the noun. Rem. When 3 u f 0 Í g e follows the noun, the noun is put in the dative case. Exc. 4. The noun stands between the two parts of U m-tn t Í Í c n. § 256. In German, as in English, many adverbs of time and place maybe used as indeclinable substantives, and may be preceded by prepositions : ift utd;t ireit bon biCbf It is not far from here. 25 0 n btt fin, From that time forward. 6r ift auf ilCUtC berfagt, He is engaged for to-day. [morrow. 25 0 U gcftcrn b i 8 übermorgen, From yesterday till day after to- §257. Some prepositions may govern an entire subor¬ dinate sentence (instead of a single word) ; when thus used, they have rather the character of conjunctions than of prepositions: @r ging iveg, oijlie nitS etwa« ba^ He went away, without saying any- bon 3n fagen, thing about that, gr gcftanb 2llle8, on jjer wer feine He confessed everything, with the ex- 2Jiitfdmtbigen feien,_ ceptionofwho his accomplices were, er lobte mibb, ftott mid; 311 tabeln, He praised me instead ofblamingme. R2 394 THE CONJUNCTION. [§ 258-260. § 258. Many of the idiomatic differences between the English and the German languages are owing to the fact that many verbs, adjectives, and nouns are con¬ ceived in such different ways as to require different prepositions after them in completing predications : g Í a It t e an einen @ott, I believe in one God. (Srift ret an@ütern, aber arm He is rich in landed estates, but an baarem ©elbe, poor in ready money. (Sin ïïlî a n g e Í an @eíb, A lack of money. S)er ©efangene ift ftoi^ anf feine The prisoner is proud of his inno- Uufdjuib, cence. ©r ift febr begierig auf Síbentener, He is very desirous o/adventures. 2öa§ mirb anê ibm m e r b e n ! What will become o/'him ? ^d; bin gattj er ft aunt über fein I am quite astonished at his be- betragen, havior. (Sr ift g r 0 Ü bon ©eftaít, He is large in size. THE CONJUNCTION. ^tnbcmorí.) § 259. Only a few Conjunctions are primitive words, as: Uní), and {M.-G., unt, nnde; O.-G., endi, enti, anti; Anglo-Saxon, and) Sïbcr, but {M.-G., aber, afer ; O.-G., afur, afar; G^oiA.,afar [from af=ab]). Dbcr, or (M.-G., oder; O.-G., odar; Goth., .aíththáu). Rem. Of a few conjunctions the origin is "no longer felt" (§ 49, 2), as; Sfficbcr, neither (from M.-G., en—weder, ne—wëder=not of the two ; the negative particle ne has been dropped). ©nhucbcr, either (^M.- G., eintwëder, from ein—de—wëder=one of the two). § 260. Almost all conjunctions are, (1) either adverbs or prepositions, used as conjunctions: or (2), deriva¬ tives and compounds of adverbs and prepositions with each other or with nouns or pronouns : 2)a er nid;t fertig mar, innate er As he was not ready, we had to go affein geben, alone. fffîâfgCnb @ie iefen, merbe ieb While you are reading, I will wTite. fcbretben, (Sr ging nad; ber ©tabt, na^bcnt He went to the city after he had er ben SSrief gefcbrieben batte, written a letter. S¿b fanb tbn ni^t, I ^^Ot find him, although I look* lange fncbte, ed for him a long time. §261.] THE CONJUNCTION. 395 liem. From the fact that they serve also to connect subordinate with main sentences, relative pronouns may also be considered as conjunctions : 2i?o i[t ba« Sui^, 0te ^cute Where is the book which you bought ílJícrgeit geíauft ^aben, this morning. § 261. The most important Conjunctions are the fol- J " ii»-, • ■Slbcr, but. mithin, consequently. allein, but. ttachbem, after. . al?, as, then, when. nichtëbegomeniger, nevertheless. al? ob, as though. tmr, but, only. alfo, consequently. nun, therefore. and;, also. ob, whether, if. auf bag, in order that. obgleid) (obfchon, oblnohl), al- augerbcni, moreover. ohne, except, [though, though. bebor, before. feit, since. bi?, until. feitbem, since. ba, since. ohngead)tet, notwithstanding. ba^er, therefore. fo, thus, therefore, if. bagegen, on the contrary. fobalb al?, as soon as. bamit, in order that. fonft, otherwise. baruni, therefore. iiberbie?, besides. bag, that, in order that. übrigen?, furthermore. beim, for, because. ungeachtet, notwithstanding. bennoc!^, notwithstanding. urn, in order (to). beS^alb, therefore. bielmehr, rather. beffenmigead^tet, nevertheless. lüähvenb, while. beêmegen, therefore. mann, when. bod), yet, still. meil, because. ef;e, before. menu, when, if. faü?, in case that. menn and?, although. ferner, further. menngleid), although. folglid^, consequently. mennfchon, although. gleic^lbobl, however, yet. mie, as, when. hingegen, on the contrary. miemohl, although. inbem, while, because. mo, Avhere, when. inbeffen, however, yet. mofern, in case that. je nad;bcni, according as. JU bem, besides. jebod), however. jmar, indeed. Rem. The most important corresponding conjunctions are the following; halb—balb. sometimes—sometimes. the—the. enttneber—ober, nitht—fonbern. either—or. not—but. 396 THE CONJUNCTION. [§ 263'. nic^t—bteíme'^r, nid;! nur— j md;t allein— I fonbern auc^, nic^t MoÇ— ) obgleich-jo bo¿^, jotoo^í—ais, tbeiíg—tl^eiíg, tt>eber—nod?, ioie—jo, not—but rather. not only—but also. although—still, as weil—as. partly—partly, neither—nor. as—so. § 263. Conjunctions may be divided, with reference to the grammatical office they perform in connecting sentences, into two classes ; 1. Co-ordinative Conjunctions, which are used to con. nect equally independent sentences : 1. The following seven co-ordinative conjunctions cause no alteration in the position of the verb in the sentence : Unb, ober, jonbern, fonjoj)I-aIg. ober, allein, benn, SSir gingen nacj> §atle, unb bon We went to Halle, and from there ba gingen mir nacj> Seij^jig, we went to Leipzic. SGSir gingen nic^t na(^ ^rag, We did not go to Prague, but we bcrn mir gingen nac^ 9Jíünd^en, went to Munich. Rem. 21 b e r, however, may also be placed after the subject, or after the verb : S)er 25ater aber j^racj)— But the father spoke— 2)er @tran§ 5IÜ32I, er íann The ostrich has Evings, but he can aber nic^t fliegen, not fly. 2. The following co-ordinative conjunctions are usually placed at the be¬ ginning of the sentence or clause ; Avhen so placed they cause the subject to fol¬ low the verb in simple tenses, and to follow the auxiliary in compound tenses (see § 280): 2ÍÍÍ0, begmegen, iebod^. ou^. (je)—befio. initf>in. ougerbem, (befio)-befîo, nid^tgbefiomenigcr. balb—balb, boc^. noc^. bagegeu. cntmcber. nicfit nur, \ bajier, fan«. nic^t aüein, (. barum, ferner. nid^d bloß, j benrna^. foíglid^. nur, bennocf>, gíeidfimo^í, cfingead^tet. beffenungead^tet, hingegen, tbeils—tfieils. beöbalb. inbeffen. überbieö. beSgíeidben, infofern, übrigen«.. § 263.] THE CONJUNCTION. 397 toieínte^r, (trie)—fo, jubem, trä^renb, (treber)—no¿^, jtrar. $ic ©onne jc^eint, ba^er ift Cê The sun shines, therefore it is so hot. Í0 ^ei^, ^ a U m ^attc cr ba§ g C Í a g t— Scarcely had he said that— 2. Suhordinative ConjunctionsjVfhich are used to con¬ nect subordinate to principal sentences ; they cause the verb to be placed at the end of the subordinate sen¬ tence : 5118, jc nacbbem, ungeacbtet. al8 ob. nadbbem. mäbrcnb, auf bag, nun. mann. beb or. ob, obgleidb, toeil. bi8. menu, wenn nitbt, ba. obfcbon. bamit, obmobl, wenn au¿b, feit. wie, wiewobí, cbe. feitbem, fall8. fobalb al8, Wo, Wofern, im gall bag. fo oft al8. inbem. fo lange al8. jwar. 68 trar jetton fe^r fbät, alê ic^ na¿^ It was already very late when I Çaufe Î a m, came home. Rem. 1, In subordinate sentences the auxilaries of compound tenses and the simple tenses of the potential verbs are placed after the main verb : (Ç^C triv na(t Çttufe gel0 tntnen Before we had come home, it had loaren, í»atte e« angefangen already begun to rain, ju regnen, Rem. 2. When the compound tenses of the potential verbs are used in sub¬ ordinate sentences, the auxiliary of these verbs is placed between the nomi¬ native and the infinitive of the main verb (see § 131, Rem. 2, § 282, Rem. 1): er fagt, bo^ er e8 nid^t ^at fin« He said that he had not been able ben iönnen, to find it. Rem. 3. When bû^ is omitted, the natural order of the words is preserved ; glaube er ift nod; nid;t ange^ I think that he has not arrived yet. îommen, Rem. 4. If lOCnit is omitted, the order of words in the subordinate sentence is the same as in interrogative sentences (see § 280, 4): SSenn ic^ bte 3eit bajn i;ätte (or Ifl had the time (or had I the time), i;ätte id; bie ¿eit bajn), fo foilrbe I would like very much to go to id; fe^r gern mit 3í;ncn í;ente Potsdam with you to-day. nacb ^otebam geben. 398 THE CONJUNCTION. [264-266. Remarks upon Conjunctions. (S3 erne V fun gen über bie Sinbewbrter.) Ohs. The number of words that perform the office of conjunctions is very large, and their correct use must be learned mostly by practice. We give below remarks upon the signification and use of some of those which the English-speaking person would be most apt to use erroneously. § 264. Uub {a7id) is employed almost entirely as in English : 2)er SSater unb ber The father and the son. Rem. In a few cases, howcA'er, the German idiom does not permit the direct translation of and by u n b, as : How can you go out and not take Sßte iöntien ©ie auSge^Ctt, o ^ n C him with jmu? i^n tnitjune()men. He became better and better, WUrbe tmttt er beífer. It became hotter and hotter, (Së Inurbe t m tn e r i;eißev. §265. $íkr, allein, fonbern, kelmelir (but): Rem. 1. 3ltiCin indicates a contradiction, in some degree, to the statement in the preceding sentencé, or of the consequences which might follow from it ; dbCt simply indicates something dilFerent from the preceding statement; abet can always be used instead of allein, but allein can not always be used instead of a b e r : 3ci> OttCiU (or ab er) id? I hoped for it, but I found myself fanb ntic^ getäufd^t, mistaken. Rem. 2. ©onbCrn is only used after a negative sentence; it indicates that the second sentence corrects an error in the first ; flbcr is used (after nega¬ tive sentences even) when no contradiction exists between the two sentences : (Sr befiehlt es nid)t, foitbcrn er He does not order it, but he de- münfc^t e§, sires it. (5r befiel)lt eë (jirar) md)t, abcr He does not order it (it is true), but er eë, he desires it. Rem. 3. S5icíntctlf is closely allied in signification and use to j o n b e r it, but is often more emphatic or definite in meaning : (id; fürdjte tf)n nid^t, bicintck I rather I at^te tc^ tf>n, despise him. § 266. tiJÍC, iDCnn, todltn, are used as follows; 1. As an adverbial conjunction, atC' {when) refers only to past time : 2lÎê mir tit iBerlin attîanteit, mar Mr. Kraft had already left for Dres- Çerr Sraft fd;on nad; S)reëbctt den when we arrived in Berlin, abgcretfi. § 266.] THE CONJUNCTION. 399 Rem. 1. 5118 (than) is used after the comparative degree of adjectives or adverbs : §cute ifi fcaS 23ctter miíber To-day the weather is milder than olô £6 geflevn luar, it was yesterday. Rem. 2. 5118 baj] (preceded by gives a negative signification to the subordinate sentence wliich it introduces ; ®r tft 5 u tlu^ bdfj cr an @e= He is too intelligent to believe in íben^er glauben follte, ghosts. Rem. 3. After a negation or an expression equivalent to a negation, ûlê signifies except; 9Î i d; 16 nennt er fein, üIÖ feinen He calls nothing bis own, except his 9íitternianteí (@cí;.), knightly mantle. 2ßer f o n ft ift i$d;nlb bavan, aíá Who else is to blame for it, except 3f;r in 3Bien? (@d;.) you in Vienna? Rem. 4. 2ÍI 8 is often used interchangeably with as (see No. 2, below). Rem. 5. 5ÍÍÓ is often followed by ob or irenn: (5r fief)t au8 oíá o6 er îrant fei, He looks as though ho is sick. (Sr fie^t an8 alö IbCnn er iraní He looks as though he were sick, tnäre, 2. SSiC (««), preceded by fo, is used in comparing to¬ gether two adjectives or adverbs in the positive degree : <^ente ift ba8 SBetter nid^t fo Í;eij3 The weather is not so hot to-day trie c8 geftern n>ar, as it was yesterday. Rem. 1, In German, as in English, fo (as) is often omitted : „0ei ling toic bie 0d}langen, nnb " Be wise as sei-pents and harmless ot)ne falfcb toic bie Sonben," as doves." Rem. 2. 2110 is often used instead of i e : (SS ift eben fo ^ei^ ûl^ (oi* It is just as hot as it was yesterday, geftern mar, Rem. 8. Used as an adverbial conjunction, lUtC signifies " how," as : did; mcifi mirtlid; nid;t, mic idf ba6 I really do not know how to do mad;cn fell, that. 8. SBnnn {when) refers to time past, present, or future ; it is only used as a conjunction in introducing indirect questions : meiß nod^ nidft, toonn tbir ab» I do not know yet when we will reifen Werben, leave. 400 THE CONJUNCTION. [§ 267. 4. SSCtttt {when), when referring to time, applies only to indefinite time : SBir ia^ren ju Serg, "We go to the mountains, we return SBir îommeu tuieber, again, when the cuckoo calls, SBcnn ber ÂUÎUÎ ruft, when the songs awaken. SBcrnt erirad^en bie Sieber (0d;.), Rem. SScnn is more generally used in hj-pothetical sentences, signifying if: SBcnn bie ©lodE' fell auferfte^en, If the bell is to come forth, the bie gorm in ©tücíe ge^en mould must be broken to pieces. § 267. faillit, Unt JU, auf ba^ {in order that, in order to): Rem. 1. 2) a m i t, originally an adverb (signifying therewith), when used as a conjunction, usually refers to the means of accomplishing a purpose : Qál beftrafe i^lt, bamit er fic(> bef^ I punish him, that he may become jere, better (by it). Revi. 2. "When especial emphasis is to be laid upon the causal relation of bant it, bonttn is often placed at the opening of the main sentence, which precedes the subordinate sentence : iSarunt eben íeibt er Peinent, Just for that reason does he lend to 2)amit er ^etâ jn geben {)abe(2efi.) nobody, that he may always have something to give. Revi. 3. Siatnit nic^t frequently signifies lest or that not : fage bir eS noc^ntaíé, bam it I say it to you once more, lest you bn es n i d; t bergiffeft, should forget it. Rem. 4. 3iuf ba^is now rather antiquated : „Si;re Sater nnb Slîutter, auf bafj " Honor thy father and thy mother, e§ bir gebe auf Êrben," that it may be well with thee in the land." Rem. 5. The single conjunction bûfj is frequently used for auf b afj ; Síeibí nic^t in Snglanb, ba^ ber Do not remain in England, that the SSrite nicbt fein ftolje« §erj an Briton may not feast his proud (Surent Unglüd treibe (0d^.), heart upon thy misfortune. Rem. 6. When a shorter expression is desired, unt—JU (with an infinitive) is û'equently used instead of auf b a f] : beftrafe if)n, uut ibn ju beffern. I punish him to make him better. Rem. 7. Hut JU is also used after an adjective or adverb preceded by JU : (Sr ifi JU cbei, urn JU raffen, He is too noble minded to avenge himself. § 268, 269.] THE CONJUNCTION. 401 whole satisfied, still there were many thin^ to be found fault with. I know it, though no one of you in¬ formed me of it. § 268. obfí^on, obujo^í, toenitgícit^, mm fi^on, toCUn OUd) {though, although) : Rem. 1. ^Vhen the subordinate sentence precedes the main sentence, the latter is usually introduced by fo, followed by bOC^ or bCttnO(^ (still): Dbgicic^ her Seijrer im ©anjen 311» Although the teacher was upon the irieten mar, fo mar botb man® d?eS Sinjelnc ju tabcln, meib es, obglctf^ (or obtoobO àeiner bon 3bnen micb babon benadbridjtigt bat, Rem. 2. £)b—g 1 cicb and menn gietd; often take a pronoun or other monosyllabic word betAveen their parts : Ob tcb gictcb fleiagt babe— Although I have said— Rem. 3. 23 e n n—a u ¿b often signifies even if; the two words are often separated, or reversed : 2)er SBerfud? mar iiodb immer reidb= li¿b belobnt, öjcmi ûUCb mir ein îbeii bes 2eríbrecbenS erfüftt murbe (3d;.), 2)aS íonnte gefcbeben, au^ Üienit (Suftab Síbcíf 2C. (©d;.), (but) 2öcnil er ûUtb alt ift, fo ift bocb fein ©eift jugenblidb. The attempt was still richly re¬ warded, even if only a part of the promise was fullfilled. That might have taken place, even if Gustavus Adolphus, etc. Although he is old, still his spirit is youthful § 269. 2)a5cr, boruui; beêtocgcn, alfo, foíglií^, bCmnotf), mithin {consequently, therefore) : Rem. 1. 2)abcr has reference rather to the physical cause : ®er ©^nee ift anf ben ©ebirgen The snow has melted upon the gefcbmoljen; bobcc finb bie mountains; therefore the rivers gíüffe angefcbmoUen, have risen. Rem. 2. 2)arum, beSbalb, beSlbegen, refer more to the moral than to the physical cause ; (Sô gefiel ibm nicbt mebr unter ben iDîenfdbcn, bû^cr (or bcêôjcgcn) jog er fitb in bie Sinfamfeit ju« riicf, Sr ift jn leidbtftnnig, bcôbûlb îann id) gar ni^t mit ibm jufrieben fein. Rem. 3. 2) a r u m is used in a most general way, to indicate a physical, moral, or logical cause : es ift fcbönes Setter ; barum It is fine weather, therefore I wiU gebe tcb Îl'aîicren, go and take a walk. He no longer enjoyed human so¬ ciety, therefore he retired to sol¬ itude. He is too trivial, therefore I can not be at all pleased with him. 402 THE CONJUNCTION. [§ 269-271. Obs. 2) a r u m is sometimes contracted into b r U tit î (Sitte 2)ur(^Iau(^tigîeit läßt er fid^ He has himself called "his Excel- ttemien ; bniltt tttuß er Solba# lency," therefore he must be able ten t;aitctt tonnen to have his soldiers. Rem. 4, Slifo, íicmnat^, mtí^tn, indicate rather a logical conse¬ quence : (Sr i;at eö feíbft get^an, unb tann He did it himself, therefore he can ûifo 9îiemanb tabeín, blame nobody. 2Bir finb iUîenfc^en, finb We are men, therefore we are mor- loir fterblid;, tal. Obs. 1. 2)Cntntt^ (betn nad;) is frequently equivalent to according to that : ©r ijt geftern abgereift, unb tann He started yesterday, and may con- tiente antotntnen, sequently arrive to-day. Obs. 2. 9)íiíí)ill indicates that the consequent is included in or grows nat¬ urally out of the preceding statement : SDieilt 33ruber îotnmt líente Slbenb My brother does not come this even- nid;t, ntit^in finb toir allein, ing, so we mil he alone. § 270. C^C (before) : Rem. 1. iBfbOr refers only to time; ctlC may also express a preference or choice : iBcbOr (or Cl)C)ev bie @tabt berließ, Before he left the city. id) niiv baS gefallen laffe, tnid Before I put up with that, I will id) lieber auf jeben ettcaigen rather renounce every possible ad- tfieil ber5id)ten, vantage. Rem. 2. ißcbOC is now much less used than Rem. 3. The comparative degree tl)Ct {sooner) is sometimes placed in the sentence preceding the one containing C^C or ÍICÜOCÍ 2)ir ïïîiditê CÍJCf Jil fagen, ber>or To say nothing to you, before twelve jtDölf 2age gefd)ii3unben (finb), days are past. Sod) CÎICï fd)íinge Selluê mid) And may Tellus swallow me down, ^inab, ci)C icfl meinen ©ib tier« rather than that I should break le^te (®d).), my oath. Rem. 4. Sometimes n i d) t is added, pleonastically, after cfiC J especially is this done when there is a negative in the preceding main sentence : 2)îan fott nid)t früí)er anff)0ren, One should not cease before the e^C bic §anbe nid)t erlahmen, hands become weary. § 271. im ^alíc (bafl), mofcrn (in case that, if) : Rem. These forms are especially appropriate when their use would prevent an unpleasant repetition of m C n n {if) in the same sentence. (îd) miU'S 3)ir ici()cn, falló Sit I will loan it to you, in case that mir'8 balb miebevgcben îannfî, you can soon return it to me. § 272-274.] THE CONJUNCTION. 403 § 272. 2Bo {where) is also used referring to time {when) : Âcnnfî bu ba« 2aub, ßJO bie Do you know the land where the neu blühen (©.), citrons bloom ? 3n ber ttO— At the time, when— Rem. 2Ö0 was formerly much used instead of in e U n ; this signification is now given mostly in rather short and in fixed expressions, as : 2Ö0 uic^t ; ÍDO id; uic^t ivre, If not ; if I am not mistaken. § 273. lîcbrigcnê, iiûcrbtcê, 311 bcin {moreover, besides) : Sv ift für fein 3líter !íug, iibrigCUÖ He is shrewd for his age ; moreover, ift er alter alô @ie glauben, he is older than you think. Rem. lÍc6crbÍC¿ and JU bCIÎt are more specific than üb r i g cn§. § 274. íScnn, ba, inbcui, locil {because, for, as, since) : Rem. 1. 2)cnit gives rather the explanation of a statement : gelje uic^t au6, bCltn eô regnet I do not go out, for (i. e., as you see; fcrtinäi;renb, it keeps raining continually. Rem. 2. 2BcÍÍ {becatise) answers to the question ItKUUnt ? (why ?) : 2B a r u m geben 0tc nic^t anö ? Why do you not go out ? ' SBcil e§ fcrttnäbrenb regnet. Because it keeps raining continually. Rem. 3. 2) e n n is frequently used to introduce explanatory sentences that are interposed between the words of main sentences : bin —bcnn VDamm foil id; e8 I have been—for why shall I deny Icingnen—íeí;r fleißig gen^efen, it—very industrious. Rem. 4. 2) e n n (meaning than) is not used noAv as much after compara¬ tives as it was formerly ; its pi'esent use in this signification is rather con¬ fined to dignified composition : „2)îeine ©ünbe ift größer,benn fie "My punishment is greater than I mir hergeben werben möge", can bear" (Gen. 4,13). Rem. 5. 25 e n n is, hov/cver, frequently used to prevent the repetition of ûlê t 3d; bcfnd;e it;n feljt mc^r alG 1 visit him now more as a friend grennb, bCnn ala strjt, than as a physician. Rem. 6. 2)enn is often used expletively, especially in questions: 3iSer fann eS it;m bCltJt gcfagt l;aben? Who can have told it to him? Obs. Thus used, b e n n does not receive an emphatic tone of voice. Rem. 7. 2)0, though prim.arily an adverbial conjunction of time (signifying when, [see §2GG, 4, and fllö, §2G3,2]), is sometimes used to express the logical cause, especially when the m.ain sentence contains a question: 2*0 cr nid;t gclommcit ift, miiji cr As he has not come, he must be Irani fein, sick. 2Bie îamet il;r bnrd; baS SBaffer, How did you come through the wa- ba bod; ber 0trcm bic Srüde ter, since the stream has carried forígcfüfjrt [fiat]? the bridge away? 404: THE INTERJECTION. [§ 275. Rem. 8. like bil, is primarily a conjunction of time; it also is nsel to express the logical cause : ^nbcnt cr abet alfo gebac^te, fie^e! But while he was reflecting, behold! ba erfc^ten t^m «it Sngel, an angel appeared to him. íann eS bit nid^t geben, inbcttt I can not give it to you, for I have tc^ e8 t^m fc^on friiber berj)3ro= already promised it before to him. eben babe, THE INTERJECTION. (S)a§ emijfinbungêtoort.) §275. Among the principal interjections, or words used as such, are the following: 1. Of joy, as : ab I—ba !—ei !—jud; (juibbe ! beifa 1 or bocb \)=hurrah! 2. Of sorrow, as : aib !—tneb ! or o ineb \=alas!—letbet \=unfortmateIy ! 3. Of astonishment, as : acb !—ab !—ib I—b'^ía !—ißoljtaufenb ! 4. Of laughter, as: baba! 5. Of aversion, as : :|5fin 1 ^fui' pshaw!—jte \=ße! Rem. 1. The word fo ! is used in a great variety of connections, as, for ex¬ ample, to indicate astonishment, inquiry, assent, or satisfaction. Rem. 2. Many words that belong to other parts of speech are frequently used with the force of interjections, as : @Ut ! good ! SBobian ! be of good courage! ^eii ! hail ! ©ottiob ! God be praised! SBorlüärtS I forwai-d ! @ott beinabre ! God forbid ! §ait ! halt ! stop ! 5ïbteu ! Good-by ! Rem. 8. The interjections bdí I and tDobI 1 and others, are followed by the dative case, as : SDSobi (fii) ibtn I May it be well with him! $eii (fet or werbe) bit 1 Hail to thee ! Rem. 4. Some interjections may be followed by the genitive case, as ; Ob, beS ! Oh, the fool ! ^fut, ber ^ Pshaw! the shame! Rem. 5. Sometimes the genitive is replaced by the preposition ü b e r, as ; ^fui, über bie 0(banbe I Pshaw! for shame ! Rem. 6. As most interjections are elliptical expressions, some of them, may be followed by a noun in either of the cases, as : O, Xbor ! 0, ber Slboï I fooü D, bent Xboren (fann e8 ni^t f^aben) 1 " " " O, ben 2::boren (icnne i(b) I " " " § 276-278.] ARRANGEMENT OF WORDS. 405 He is sick. He can not go out, because he is sick. ARRANGEMENT OF WORDS. (Sic iffiortfolgc.) § 276. In nothing is the genius of a language more strongly manifest than in the arrangement of words in sentences. The two following are among the most prominent characteristics of the German sentence : 1. The order of words in main sentences diifers from that in subordinate sentences : ßr ift f r a n Î, 6r îann ausgeben, tretí er î r a u t ift, 2. There is a marked tendency to present the sentence as a unit—that is, ■with the modifying and limiting words and clauses enclosed between the copula and predicate in main sentences, and between the subject and copula in subor¬ dinate sentences : §evr aSei^ ^at (ictnem äiteficn èo^iî, bie íe^te Slus« gate ber beutfdjcn Skeraturiße^ íd;t^te ron §einrt¿^ ^urj, ^ente, al6 20et^nad;têgeic^enî)gc9C6cit, 2Bir lüolíten geftern naf^ ^otsbanx ge^en, treií bttë SBcítcr (für biefe 3a^re«gett fo ganj au^erorbent^ ít(^ fd^ött) toar, Mr. Weiss has to-day given to his son William the last edition of the History of the Gei'man Literature hy Heinrich Kurz, as a Christmas present. We wished to go to Potsdam yester¬ day, because the weather was so very unusualy beautiful for this season of the year. § 277. The essential parts of a sentence are the subject^ the predícate^ and the copula. 1. The subject is the nominative of the verb. 2. The predicate expresses what is aflSrmed of the subject. 3. The copula is the inflected part of the verb. Rem. The predicate is often included in one word with the copula. § 278. In main indicative sentences the regular order {!), the subject ; {2), the copula ; the predicate. Subject. 2)a8 ^Better The weather SBetter The weather Copula. ifl is tourbe became Predicate. ^Ci§, hot. hot. Subject. 2)a8 SBetter The weather Jperr Äraft Mr. Kraft Copula. bleibt remains in is Predicate, hot. ein 3)eutíd^et^ a German. 406 ARRANGEMENT OF WORDS. [§ 279. Subject. Copula. Predicate. Subject. Copula. Predicate. tabe gelefen. S)aê íBetter ift f>ei|3 getnefen, I have read. The weather has hot been. 2öir tnilffen marten. 2Btr taben marten müffen. We must wait. We have wait (must). (gr îam an. (gr ift angeiommen. He arrived. He has arrived. 3)ie 3)i5gei fingen, 2Bir merben gemefen fein, The birds sing. We shall (been, be). § 279. The object of the verb is placed between the copula and the predicate : Subject. Copula. Object. Predicate, S)er ííanfmann i;at baê §au6 berianft. The merchant has the house sold. (gr fá)retbt ben 93rief ab. He copies the letter. dx fd^reibt ben SBrief, He writes the letter. Sä) l^abe baê S3nd^ gelefen. I have the book read. Rem. ]. Tlie object of a verb, whether direct or indirect, stands between the copula and the predicate (or after the copula when the copula and the predicate are co.nbined into one word) : Subject. Copula. Object. Predicate. (gr ift feinem SSrnber ödofgt. He has his brother followed. (gr eine§ SBerbrecftenö angetlagt morben, He has with a crime charged been. Sä) l^abc meinen gtcunb (nm 9îatb gefragt). I have my fi'iend for advice asked. 0ie ^aben ibr ißorbaben in§ SBerî gefegt. They have their scheme into executioiNearried. ®ie festen ibr SSorbaben in§ SBerf, They carried their scheme into execution. ©te fitelten ben S)ieb feft, They held the thief fast. Gbs. In some phrases (as um 9îatt; fragen, in« 2Berî fe^cn, fcflfiaíten) the w ords preceding the verb follow the same laws of position as the prefixes of separable compound verbs. § 279, 280.] ARRANGEMENT OF WORDS. 407 Rem. 2. When there are two nouns governed by a verb, the personal noun takes the precedence : Subject. Copula. Personal noun. Object. Predicate. S)er 2>atcr ^at jettiem ©o^ne ein gef^enít. The father has to his son a book given. Ser 25ater íd;eníte jeinem ©o^ne ein 53ud;, Tlie father presented to his son a book. ©te fjabcn ben ©eneraí beê Çoc^bcrratt;« angetíagt, They have the general with high treason charged. 0')s. But when particular emphasis is placed upon the personal noun, it is placed after the noun referring to a thing : Sev íBater ein Snc^ feinem ©oljnc gefdienít. Rem. 3. A personal noun in the accusative precedes one in the dative case«. f)abe ibren ©obn meinem greunbe empfobten, I have your son to my friend recommended. Rem. 4. The oblique cases of personal pronouns precede other substantives (nouns or pronouns) in the oblique cases : 3cb babe ibm 3brcn ©obn embfobien, I have to him your son recommended. 3(ib babe eg 33ruber gef(btcit, I have it to your brother sent. babe ibm bas gefagt, I have to him that said. Rem. 5. Of two personal pronouns in different oblique cases, the one accusative precedes the one in the dative or genitive case : 3cb babe eS ibm gefagt, I have it to him said. 3cb fagte eS ibm, I said it to him. 3d; merbe ibn" 3bncn borftellen. I shall him to you introduce. § 280. The subject is placed after the copula in the following cases; 1. In interrogative and exclamatory sentences. 2. With the imperative mood. 3. When an adverb or adverbial conjunction introduces a main sentence. 4. When m c n n is omitted (see § 2G3, 2, Rem. 4). 5. Wlien the predicate introduces a sentence. 408 ARRANGEMENT OP WORDS. § 280.] 6. When the object of the verb (not being a relative pronoun) introducee a sentence. Predicate. fterbii(^ ? mortal? Copula. Subject. Sil ber Is man ^aben ®tc Have you @ci;eint bie @onne? Shines the sun? SBäre er Were he @eib t^r Be (ye) kommen 0ie Come (you) ^ier ifi ba§ SSuc^, Here is the book. §eute ift bag SBetter To-day is the weather S)ai)er iann ic^ Therefore can I Söäre bag SÖSetter Were the weather (^Predicate.) ^alt U»ar ber 2;ag, Cold was the day. (grnft ift bag Seben, Earnest is life. ©terbcn müffeu Me, Die must all. Slbtreiben iuolicn mir Drive off will we ©eftegt ^at ber 2)iutf;, Conquered has bravery. ba8 iBuc^ the book boc^ (only) balb soon t^m him nic^t not gelefcn? read? gefunb 1 well ! aufmerifcrai ! attentive I toiebcr I again! fe^r fc^ön, very fine. nic^t trauen., not trust. fo í)á% so hot. (^Object.} bev^aÇten the hated oppression. {Object^. Copula. Subject. 3)en Slîanit i;abe nie That man have I never fenne nic^t, Him know I not. Predicate. geiannt, known. § 281.] ARRANGEMENT OF WORDS. 409 § 281. There is more definiteness in the position of adverbs and adverbial phrases in the German than there is in the English language : Rem. 1. Adverbs of manner stand immediatelj before the predicate (or at tl;e end of the sentence, if the predicate is included in the copula): Subject. Copula. Object. Adverb. Predicate. Sie hat bag Sieb bortrefflid; gefungen. She has the song admirably sung. Sie fang bag Sieb bortrefflid;, She sang the song admirably. 3th habe ihn ernftlidh gewarnt, I have him earnestly warned. 3(h habe eg auf biefe SSeife gethan, I have it in this way done. Rem. 2. Adverbs of time or place precede adverbs of manner: Sie ()at baô 2ieb geftern Síbenb bortreffíic^ gefungen, She has the song yesterday evening admirably sung. 2Bir haben in Berlin fehr angenehm gelebt, We have in Berlin very agreeably lived. Rem. 3. Adverbs of time usually precede adverbs of place (L. XXIV., 5)* 2öir ftnb bot bier Sagen in SSerlin angeîommen, We have four days ago in Berlin arrived. Rem. 4. Of two or more adverbs of the same kind, as of time or place, the more particular usually follow the more general : Sie Werben morgen SIbenb um acht Uhr aníommen, They will to-morrow evening at eight o'clock arrive. ©ie hatten in SSerlin in iBiitorkiStraße iïîumero 20 gewohnt, They had in Berlin in Victoria-street number twenty resided. SBir îënnen bag Such nirgenbs im ^aufe finben. We can the book nowhere in the house find. Exc. The adverbs of time f dh 0 U {already), u a dh {still), e r ft {Jirst) may precede or follow a more definite adverbial expression of time, as : heute nod;, or nodh heute; morgen fd^on, or fd;on morgen; erft heute morgen,or heute fUíorgcn erft. Rem. 5. When adverbs have more special reference to a substantive, they usually precede it : ©Ojjar feine Oegner erïennen feinen Serth an, Even his opposers i-ecognize his worth. S 410 ARRANGEMENT OF WORDS. § 281, 282.] Rem. 1. This inversion of the subject and copula takes place also when the personal pronoun cê is used expletively for the subject : (®S) tuirbeinOelritter f om« There will a thunder-storm come, men, (Sê) Í t n t> 33 e r b r e e n began= There have been crimes committed. iien. Rem. 2. It also takes place when a relative sentence precedes a main sen¬ tence : 20er eê ift, m e i j3 i d; md;t, I do not know who he is. Rem. 3. Sometimes the subject precedes the copula in interrogative and exclamatory sentences : @ 011 jet bir gnübtg ! God be gracious to thee ! St möge glücííit^ fein ! May he be happy. 282, In subordinate sentences the general order is: (1), the subject ; (2), the predicate ; (3), the Gojpula : Subject. Predicate. Copula,. 3cb meig, bag ber SJÎenfcb fterblicb ift, I know that man mortal is. (l¿b begreife nicbt, marum er fo unjufrieben mar. I understand not why he so discontented was. S)er SDiamt, ber fo Irani mar, The man, who so sick was. Ser 2ímerifaner, ber beute aniam. The American, who to-day arrived. Söenn bie (^¿bbJdiben beimmärt« jieben. When the swallows homeward fly. Rem. 1. When the compound tenses iaffcn, i^eißen, íeí)en, ^ören, be subordinate sentences with the infinitiv is placed before the predicate or before 2Beti er eë md;t bût í b u n iönnen, Obgteidb i(b ibt" WíiC a r b e 1= ten beifen bilrfen, ©ertngere SSürger, meí¿bc SíidbtS befaren, maS tbnen ^ateríanb nnb §erb bíith íicb ma¿ben fönnen (0d;,), 3d; mar ju febr gemobnt, mtcb mit mir feíbft ju beí(bdtti.gen, al« bag id; mit ^ufmerîiamîeit göttC ein Äunftmer! betrachten foUcn (®.), of the potential verbs, or of the verbs 1 i e n (see § 131, Rem. 2), are used in e of other verbs, the copula (auxiliary) the object of the verb : Because he was not able to do it. Although I was not peraiitted to help him work. Citizens from the lower classes, who possessed notliing that could make their country and their homes dear to them. I was too much in the habit of oc¬ cupying myself with my own thoughts, to consider a work of art with attention. § 282-284.] ARRANGEMENT OF WORDS. 411 Rem. For the sake of euphony, the copula is often omitted when the verb in the subordinate sentence is in the perfect or pluperfect tense : terlot ni^t îllieê, ba foíd^er I did not lose all, as such a friend greunb im Ungíüd mir gebíie® has remained to me in my misfor- ben [ift]($c^.), tune. 2öaö mar mein 3)ant bafiir, ba^ What was the reward to me, that I, t^, ein treuer gürften!ned;t, ben a true servant of the prince, who SSöIterftud; auf mi^ gebürbet had drawn upon myself the curse [f)atte], biefeu Îîrieg, ber uur if;u of the people, had made the princes gro^ gemad^t [^at], bie dürften pay for the war which has made [babe] sabieu laffeu? (@d;.) him alone great? § 283. Attributive adjectives usually precede the noun they qualify : 2)er gute SJÎauu, The good man. Rem. 1. Very long attributive adjective clauses are frequently employed in the German language ; these are usually translated into English by subordi¬ nate relative sentences : (Siu (ber beutfdteu A foreigner (who is) well acquainted îommeu ïuubiger) f^r^tuber, with the German language. 2)ie (bem Srauteu febr b^h^lhe) The medicine that is very beneficial 3ir3uei, to the sick man. Rem. 2. Sometimes the attributive adjective is placed, as for the sake ot emphasis, after the noun which it qualifies ; flîiemaub aiê Su, fotí biefeu Ärteg, Nobody but yourself shall end this ben fürcbteríicbeu, eubeu (0d;.), fearful war. Rem. 3. For the sake of euphony, the attributive adjective clause may be placed, as in English, after the noun it qualifies ; in this case the attributive adjective is not inflected (§ 84, Less. XVIII, 1): 2iud; maucbeu SDÎaun, Also many a man and many a hero, Uub mautbeu §eíb, good in peace, and strong in war, 3im f^riebeu gut was born in the Swabian land. Uub ftûtï im gelb, @ebar ba8 0d;mabeuíanb (0d).), § 284. For the prepositions í\íbá, follow the Substantive, instead of preceding it, see § 255. IPart jfourtl); CONTAINING VOCABULARIES. I. PERSONAL PROPER NAMES. Rem. 1. In this list are included only the most usual of such names as have aift'erent forms or different pronunciation in the German and English lan¬ guages. Rem. 2. A few proper names from the Greek, Latin, and Hebrew languages are also added. The final syllable is dropped from many Latin and Greek proper names. srbctticrt, (gen.—g), vi., Ethelbert. Slbe'ie or 2lbeii'ne, —Adeline. 2l'bcl(;eit, —S,y., Adelaide. 2l'boIf or Sl'bollJ^, —VI., Adolphus. —S, »«., Esculapius. Slefol)',—/.—, an Abys- Sib^ffi'nifd;{adj.), Abyssinian. ®a8 ètbvia'tijd^e 3)îeer, —8, Adriatic. 21'frita, —8, Africa. (gin 2lfrita'ner, —8, pi.—, an Afri- 2lfrita'nii^ {adj.), African, [can. 3)te 2irfjen, pl., the Alps. 2)ie [ju'lij^eu 2íípen, Julian Alps. 2lnie'rita, —8, America. [American. Ser 2ímerifa'ner, —8, pl.—, the 2ímerita'niíd; («<[;■.), American. Sie 2ín'ben, p/., the Andes. Sie 2ín'getn,;jí., the Angles. [on. Sie 21ngelíad/íen,pl., the Anglo-Sax- 2ingeliäd;'ii)d> {adj.), Anglo-Saxon. 2lntwer'pen, —8, Antwerp. Sie 2lj)eniu'nen, pl., the Apennines. 2ira'bien, —8, Arabia. Sin 2i'raber, —8, pi. —, an Arab, 2íra'biíd> {adj.), Arabian. 2i'fien, —8, Asia. Sin 2ifiat', —tw.,pl.—en, an Asiatic. 2lfia'tijdj {adj.), Asiatic. 2ífít)'rien, —8, Assyria. 2lt^en', —8, Athens. Sa8 2ítíait'tijd;e SJÎeer, —8, the Atlan- 2ln[tra'Iien, —8, Australia, [tic Ocean. Sie 2íjo'rifd;en Unfein, pl. the Azores. Sa8 2ljo'biíd;e SDÍeer, the sea of Azof. SBa'bcn,—if Baden, iöai'ern, —8, Bavaria. Sin öa'ier, —X\,pl.—n, a Bavarian. Sie 23ebni'nen,p/., the Bedouins. Sel'gien, —8, Belgium. ©erberei', —, Barbary. Sin S3er'ber,—8,/?/., —, a Berber 23eriin', —8, Berlin. [ner. Sin 23erii'ner, —8, pi.—, a Berli- SSerli'nijd) (adj.), of Berlin, [cay. (Ser ©oíf toon) 23i8ta'ba, Bay of Bis- Ser 23o' benfee,—8, Lake of Con stance. 23öb'men, —8, Bohemia. [mian. Sin 230^'me, —n, pi.—n, a Bohe« Sö^'mifcb {adj.), Bohemian. Ser 23ot(/nijcbe SJÎeer'bufen, Gulf of Bothnia. 23raun'id;rocig, —8, Brunswick. 23rüj'íel,—8, Brussels. 23urgunb',—8, Burgundy. 6i)i'na, —i, China. Sin Sbine'fe, —\\,pl. —n, Chinese. Sbine'fif*^ {adj.), Chinese. Si;nr, —8, Coire. Sb'bíi"tí> —Cyprus. Sä'ncntarf, —8, Denmark. Sin Sä'ne, —n,pl, —n, a Dane. Sä'nijd^ (adj.), Danish. Seutfc^'ianb, Germany. Sin Seut'fd;er, a German. Sine Seut'fibe, a German. Seutfc^ (adj.), German, jtîorb'bentjd; {adj.), North-German. 0üb'beutí(^ {adj.), South-German. Sie So'nau, —, the Danube. Sre8'bcn, —8, Dresden. Sie Sii'nen (pl.), the Downs. Siln'tircfien, —8, Dunkirk. Silfictborf, —8, Dusseldorf. (S0t)f)'tcn, —g, Egypt. [tian. Sin Sgbb'ter,—8, pi. —, an Egyp- Sgl?j)'tiid; (adj.), Egyptian. Srfajj, Alsace. Sng'lanb, —8, England, [glishman. Sin Sng'Iänber,—8,p/.—, an En- Sng'iifd^ (adj.), English. 418 GEOGRAPHICAL PROPER NAMES. Sic (Styc^, the Adige. (Suro'pa,—ê, Europa. (Sin (Suro^JÜ'er, —ê, pl. —, a Euro- (Suro))ü'iící; {adj.), European.[pean. 5ÇÎ(in'Î)Ctn,—Flanders, [of Flanders ßin gkm'länber,—^,pl.—,a citizen ^iä'mifc^ (adj.), Flemish. ^lorenj', Florence, grani'reid;, France. [Frenchman. (Sin granjo'fe, —n, plur. —n, a ßine granjc'fin, —, pi. —nen, a granjö'fifd;, French. [French lady, ©alt'sien, —è, Galicia. ©aí'íien, —S, Gaul. ©e'nna, —ê, Genoa. (Seor'gien, —ê, Georgia. Sie @ot[)en,jo/., the Goths. (So't^ijf^ (adj.), Gothic. ®rie'd;enianb, —ê, Greece. (Sin ®ne'd;e, —\\,pl. —n, a Greek, ©rie'c^ifc^ (adj.), Greek, ©rogbritan'nien, —Great Britain, ©ro^grie'c^enlanb,—§, Gi-ecia Magna. Ser ^aag,—8, the Hague, ^abd'bnrg, —ë, Hapsburg. Çam'burg, Hamburg. ^anno'ber, Hanover. [Hanoverian. Sin §annobera'ner, —pi. —, a §annobera'nii^,) . Hanove- Çanno'berifd;, > rjan. Sin ^ebrä'er, —,pl. —, a Hebrew. ^ebrä'ifd; (adj.), Hebrew. Çol'Îanb, —§, Holland. [man. Sin §oí'Iünber, —S,pZ.—, aDutch- ^oriäubifd; (adj.), Dutch. Sic §nn'nen,/i/., the Hunns. Sn'ÎJiCn, —ê, India, [ican) Indian. Sin ^nbia'ner,—%,pl.—, an (Amer- Sin ^n'bier, —ê, pl. —, an (East) Sn'bifd; (adj.), Indian. [Indian. Sv'knb, —d, Ireland. Ser 3r'iänber, —ë, pl. —, the Irish- (j'rifd^ (adj.), Irish. [man. Së'knb,—ë, Iceland. Sta'íien, —ë, Italy. Sin Stciiiä'ner, —ë, pl. —, an Ital- Staiiä'nifc^ (adj.), Italian. pan. 3ía'SJan, —è, Japan. [nese. Sin SfliJane'íe, —n, pl. —n, a Japa- (ynbane'fiic^ (ai/;.), Japanese, (ínbü'a, —ë, Judea. Sin (íu'be, —n,pl. —n, a Jew. Sine (Sü'bin,—,pl.—nen, a Jewess. (^Ü'bijc^ (adj.), Jewish. ^ärn'i^Cn, —I, Carinthia. Saë Âaë'iJifd^e SKeer, —ë, the Caspian Äii'fingen, —ë, Kissingen. [Sea. ^ob'íenj, Coblenz. Soin, —ë, Cologne. Ser ^o'merfee. Lake Como. Son'ftanj, Constance. So^Jenba'gen, —ë, Copenhagen. Äorinti/, —ë, Corinth. Ärain, —ë, Carniola. Ära'fau, —ë, Cracow, íírint,—, Crimea. SctÍJ'jtg,—ê, Leipsic. Si'banon, —ë, Lebanon. Siffabon, —ë, Lisbon. Si'tbanen, —ë, Lithuania. Sie Sombarbei', —, Lombardy. Ser So'renjbufen,—ë. Gulf of St.Law- Sotb'ringen, —ë, Lothaire. [rence. Sitt'ticb, —ë, Liege. ?njern', —, Lucern. SKäij'rcn, —i, Moravia. ÏDiai'Îanb, —ë. Milan. âJîainj, Mayence. SJ/arot'fo,—ë, Morocco. [Moor. Sin aiîarvotîa'ncr, —ë, pl. —, a 9)îaroffa'nif(^ (adj.), Moorish. Sie 9)îarî, —, the Mark (of Branden¬ burg). ÍDÍdr'fiíd; (adj.), of the Mark. Sie SDÎar'fen (pl.), an ancient people of North-Germany, near Ems. 3Jîe'(beÎn, —ë, Malines. Saë ÍDÍit'telídnbifcbe 3)îeer, —ë, the Mediterranean See. Sic âJîol'bau, —, Moldavia. GEOGRAPHICAL PROPER NAMES. 419 ®ie ÍDÍcrtau, —, the'priver) Moldavia. ÏÏÎo'ie!,—, Moselle. Slîeo'tan,—■?, Moscow. 2)íüu'd;en, —ô, Munich. 9ianiin:' —Namur. Dîea'lJel, —ö, Naples. 2)ie 9ítc'beríanbc,p/., theNetherlands. 'Dite'beriänbiid}(art^'.),of the Nether- ^íor'iuejen,—é, Norway. [lands. 9íürn'beri], Nuremberg. Ocft'crrcitö, —ëf Austria. (Sill Oe'ftevreid;cr,—ê, an Austrian. Oe'ftevreidjifd; (adj.), Austrian. Dft'gctficn,/)/., Ostrogoths. Dftill'bicii, —§, East India. Paris. ^clobolineS' —, Peloponnesus, ^er'fien, —d, Persia. ^o'lcn,—d, Poland. (Sin 'i}3ü'Ie, —n,p/., —n, a Pole, ^ol'ltifc^ (adj.), Polish, ipcm'nient, —, Pomerania. (Sin 'ipom'mer, —d,p¿ —n,aPome- ^or'tngal, —d, Portugal. [ranian. (Sin "iportngie'ie,—n,pL —n, a Por¬ tuguese. ^ortngie'fifd; Çadj.), Portuguese, ^otd'bam, —d, Potsdam. ^ren'^en, —d, Prussia. [sian. ©in ^reu'^c, —n, pi. —n, a Prus- ^renßiit^ (adj.), Prussian. Síc'gcttáíiurg, —ë, Ratisbon. j£)er Sî^ein, —Rhine. 3)ad 9íie'íengcbtrge,—d, the Capathian 9îom, —d, Rome. [Mountains. ©in 9iö'nicr, —ë,pl.—, a Roman. Sio'mifd^ (adj.), Roman, Romish. Sîitfj'ianb, —d, Russia. ©in 9inj'ic, —\\,pl. —n, a Russian. Sinffifc^ (adj.), Russian. ©oíb'ícn, —ëf Saxony. ©in ©aci)'[e, —n, pi. —n, a Saxon. 0aci^'í*í^ (adj.), Saxon. 6d;ie'ficn, —d, Silesia. ^cíiott'íanb, —d, Scotland. ©in ©c^ot'te, —n, pi. —n, a Scotch- ©c^ot'tifc^ (adj.), Scotch. [man. Sc^tna'ben, —d, Suabia. [bian. ©in ©c^ma'be, —n, />l. —n, a Sua- ©t^tnä'bifd; (adj.), Suabian. ©^me'ben, —d, Sweden. ©in ©d^ine'be, —\\,pl.—n, a Swede, ©c^tne'bifdi (adj.), Swedish. S)ie ©c^tneij, —, Switzerland, ©in ©d;triei'3er, —^,pl. —, a Swiss, ©ine ©c^inei'^erin, —, pi. —nen, a ©d^tnei'jerifd; (adj.), Swiss. [Swiss, ©ibi'rten, —d, Siberia. ©ici'lien, —d, Sicily. ©l^a'nien, —d, Spain. [iard. ©in ©l^a'nier, —d, pi. —, a Span- ©l>a'ni[c^ (adj.), Spanish. ©l^et'cv, —d, Spires. ©tc^'ermarî, —d, Styria. Sic Sûtorei', —, Tartaiy. ©in Satar', —d, pi. —en, a Tartar. Si;e'ben, —d, Thebes. Sie Sbem'l'e, —, the Thames. S^ü'ringen, —d, Thuringia. Sie Si'ber, —, the Tiber. Sad S^rol', —d, the TyroL Sodia'na, —d, Tuscany. Srient', —d, Trent. Sri'er,—d, Treves. Srieft', —d, Trieste. Sie Sürtei', —, Turkey. ©in Siir'fe, —n,p/. —n, a Turk. Silr'fifc^ (adj.), Turkish. Un'garn, —ë, Hungary. [rian. ©in Un'gar, —§,pl. —en, a Hunga- Un'garifd; (adj.), Hungarian. Sic SÖOtlba'IClLi)/., the Vandals. 3?ene'big, —d, Venice. [netian. ©in ipene^ta'ner, —d, pi. —, a Ve- Sienejiahiifd; (adj.), Venetian. Sie 3?evei'nigten ©taa'ten ton 3lme'« rtïa, the United States of America. SSirgi'Ilten, —d, Virginia. Sic äöaUadlCi', —, Wallachia. Sßeft'gotljen (pl.), Visigoths. 420 ABEEVIATIONS. S)te SBetc^'fei, —, the Vistula. SBte'nenf^ {adj.}, Viennese. SGßeftia'ien,—§, Westphalia. 2)ie SKol'ga, —, the Volga. äiien, —ê, Vienna. SBormê, Wernas, Bormio. Sin Söie'ner, —§, pl. —, a Viennese. SSür'temberg,—ê, Wirtemberg. III. ABREVIATIONS. Rem. Abréviations are employed in German to a far greater extent than they are in English. The list below includes only the most usual abbreviations. a. a. O nni anberu Orte at the other place. a. a. O ant angeführten Orte at the place mentioned. Sibfthn Sibfchnitt section. a. b an ber (Ober, etc.) on the (Oder, etc.). a. 2JÍ., or a/2)i ant SOÎatn on the Maine. Stntn Stnmerinng remark. 2íufí,,or Siuëg SÎnjïage, or ?iuêgabe....... edition. S3b. (iBbe.) S3anb (¿änbe) volume (volumes). heb hebentet signifies. Bei.,orhefonb hefonberg especially. SSr SSreite latitude (lat.). S.,Sour Sonrant currency. baf bafelhft there, at that place. b. @r ber @ro^e the Great. bgi.,or bergl. bergleichen the like, such. b. h» that is to say, that is. b. t bag ift that is. 2)igf Oigfonto discount. h. Q btefeg Sahreg this year. b. W., orbg. SJÎg btefeg SDionatg this month (inst.). b. SS ber 33erfaffer the author. I ñ'f Î3-f ÍS3 foígenb (^er, ^e, -eg) following. gortf. f gottfe^nng folgt to be continued. fr franco post-paid. gr f^ran Mrs. grl f^ränlein Miss. f^rb'or grtebrich^b'or Frederick d'or. [sehen. @.,@r.,or@gr @rDfchen,or ©ilhergrofdjen Groschen or Silvergro- geh gehören born (i. e., the maiden geh geheftet stitched. [name). geft geftorhen dead, late. §bigfbr ^anbelgfbïdchf language of commerce. ¿^jttn ¿auftttnort noun. §ptft. ^anhtftabt capital. §r. (§§.) 'Çttï (§erren) Mr. (Messrs.) ¿ahr year. ABREVIATIONS. 421 3a^t^ ^a^rl^unbert century. Saif., or Äaiferi laiferíid? imperial. Äat^. Ä íat^oíifc^e ^rc^e Catholic Church. Söll., or Röntgt íomgítíí^ royal. Ä. Ä laiferíidjítoniglic^ imperial and royal. Ärg Ärcuger creuzer. 2 Sänge longitude (long). iat lateinifc^ Latin. [(inst.). lauf. 2Jfou iaufenben 2)îonat0 in the current month S^g Sicherung number. Sftrí ^funb Sterling pound sterling. 3JÎ. §. (3JÎ. §. ■§.) ¿tíein §err (SDÍeine §erren) Sir (gentlemen). m. Sr niittäglidje S3reite southern latitude. n. 2Í., or 9Î. Sinb nadt* üínbern according to others. Íígr 9íeugroí^en New Groschen. 9Î. 33 nörblid;e 33reitc northern latitude. 9Î0., îir., 9îro. (Ûîroê.) 9îumero, 9îummer(—n)... number (numbers). 9Î. 0 S^íadjíd^rift Postscript (P.S.). D. 2 öftlid^e Sänge east longitude. ^-l^îg pfennig Pfennig. ^fb ^fnnb pound. ^t;. 3) S)oîtor ber ^^ilofogj^ie.... Doctor of Philosophy. gjroteft gjroteftantifd) Protestant. O. 5 Ouabrat square foot. O. ÍDÍ Ouabrat ÍDÍeiíe square mile. 9Î Sieanmur Keaumur. 9îab 9?abatt abatement, discount. 9î^n 9î^einiic() Ehenish. 9ît^Îr., or rtlj 9îetc^ët()aÎer Eix dollar. 0. (0., or f.) Seite (fie()e) page (see). f. b Sie^e biefeei see this (article). f. g jogenannt so called. Sgjr 0i3rad;e language. ■••• pronounce. ft ftarb (ftatt) died (instead of). f. 3 feinei^ at time. 2:í)ír.,Í()í X^aícr Thaler. II. (n.) Uí?r (unt>) .. o'clock (and). [ers. n. Î1. (n. a.) unter anbern (nnb anbere). among others (and oth- u. a. a. O nnb an anbern Orten and at other places. 'u. a. St nnb anbern Stellen and other places. n. bergl. m nnb bergleic^en inefir [ and more of the same u. m. bgt nnb nte^r bcrgíeid^en j •••" kind. n. f. f nnb fo ferner ) n. f.tn nnb fo ny-iter )■ nml so forth. 422 MONEYS, WEIGHTS, AND MEASURES. to. ^ toortgen last year. to. 2)î. toongen SOionatö last month (ult.). to. 0 toon oben from above, to, n toon nntcn from below. 2Ö SBeften west. 3 3^11, (3fii0 inch (line). J. 33 jnm for example. IV. MONEYS, WEIGHTS, AND MEASURES. Rem. These vary greatly in the different states of Germany. We give only some of the leading coins, weights, and measures of the principal Ger¬ man states. 1. Prussian Money (used in North (xermany). (@olb) ©n bo^)3eiter griebn^«b'cr=iO 2:^Iev= $7.12 „ (Sin ijJreu^if^er griebrii^êb'or=5 Sbír. 20 @gr. =... 4.20 (©Uber) (Sin ¿^aíer=30 ©Ubergrofc!^en=360 ipfennige=: 71 „ (Sin ©Ubergrofc^en=12 ipfennige= 2^ (^u^jfer) (Sin ©ec^íer=6 i|3tennige= „ @in S)reier=3 Í13fennige= | „ (Sin ipfennig = I 2. Bavarian Money (used in Southwestern Germany). C@oib) (Sin S)niat=5 @uíben 40 ^reu3er= $2.26 (©Uber) (Sin iBereinét^aíer=3i @níben=2 ißrenß. 2;^aler= 1.42 „ (Sin 3®chiuiben[tüci=i20 Äreitjcr= 82 „ (Sin (Sníben=60 ^reu¡5er= 41 „ ©n §albgníbenftü(í=30 Ä^reuser= 20| (fn^jfer) (Sin áreujer=4§eEer= | t, ©n§eííer= | 3. Austrian Money. (®oIb) ©ne ÄrDne = l3 ©uíben 75| 9ÎÂrcujer= $6.48 „ (Sine [;aíbe Ärone=6 (Bulben 87| 9'ÎÂreu3er= 3.24 (©Uber) ©n 3h'ri9uítenftü{í=200 51îtou3er= 96 „ ©in ©níben or gíorm=100 9'î,treu3er= 48 „ ©in 3Sierteíftorin[tücf=25 9iÄren3er= 12 (Su^jfer) ©in 93ieríreugerfíü(í= 2 „ ©inSrenjer= ^ „ ©in§albíreu3erftüU= j Rem. aSter ißrcugifd^e Staler=fteben aSatrif^c ®uíben=íed(i8 Ocjlcrreidbifete gíortn=$2.84. MONEYS, WEIGHTS, AND MEASURES. 4. German Weights. ein 3i5lícentnet=lOO 3oII)3funb=50 ^iogrammeâ = English pounds 98.04 (Sin 3otti'tunb=i Äiiogramtne= " " (Sin ^funb=32 2ot^=468 (Sromnteê = ... " " 97 (Sin 2oti) = 14.6 (SrammeS= EngUsh ounces 48 5. German Measures. 1. LINEAR MEASURE. Sine bentíá)e (geograiJ^ifdje) 3Jíeiíe (15 3)íeiíen=l° geo^ grabí)iíd?e S3reite)= English miles 4.06 Sine i|3reu^ii(^e aíZeiíe = 24,000 Sífieinifc^e gnß = 5372 Metres^ " " 4.07 Sine 0tunbe=eine ^albe beutf^e ü)íeiíe= " " 2.03 Sine 9îut()e = 12 9î^einiic^e gu^=3.766 Metres^ English feet 12.36 Sin Sí^einifá^er 3u^ = 12 3ott=313 Millimètres= " " 1.03 Sin 3oh = 12 2inien=26.2 Millimètres= English inches 1.03 2. SURFACE MEASURE. Sine Onabratnteiie (^reußifc())= English square miles 21.09 Sine Ouabratrnt^e=144 Ouabratfnß= English square feet 152.67 Sin SDÎorgen in Greußen=180 Ouabratrut^en ; in S3aiern=400 Cuabrat* rni()en; in 0a(^ien=2 2l(íer=150 Ouabratrnt^en. 3. MEASURE OF CONTENTS. Sin iPrcn§if(i^eg Onart=64 SnbifjDlI = 1.145 Litres= English quarts 1.28 Sin ipreu§ij(i^er Simer=60 Cluart=69.l Litres= English gallons 19.00 Sin ^reu§if(i)er 0¿^effeí=48 €luart=55.38 Litres=.. English bushel 1.92 Sine 3}îe^e=j^ê 0¿^efteí=3 £lnart§=3.435Litres=.. English quarts 3.88 V. CLASSIFIED ] 2)ag Scítaíí. ¡55er ©Ott, —c8,pZ.®ötter, God, gods. „ 0(^i5i3'fer, —the Creator. Se'fus Sl;ri'ftn8, —fti, Jesus Christ. ¡5)er ()ei7ige ©eift, —e«, Holy Ghost. ¡5)ie S5reiei'nigfeit, —, the Trinity. 25er Sn'geí, —9, the angel. tt Í5¡en'feí,—8, devil. „ C>int'mei, —8, heaven. !55ie §ßlTe, —, hell. ¡5)a8 ge'gefeuer, —8, purgatoiy. JST OF WORDS. The Universe. ¡55ie 9iatur', —, Nature. 9iatür'iic(), natural. [ter. 2)ie SJÎate'rie,—,ber 0toff,—e8, mat' SDÎateriett', îër'i^erlid;, material. ¡55a8 3ítom', ——e, atom. „ Sör>er, —8,pZ. —, body. Sin fe'ftcr Äör'^ev, a solid body. ¡55ie ge'ftigieit, —, solidity. SDftS ©û8, —ti, pl. —e, gas. » ©efc^ö^f, —ti, pl. —e, creature. 424 LIST OF WORDS. S)cr SKcnfc^* 2 2)er 9Jiann, —es, pi. 2)îânncr, man, husband. „ SBa'ter,—^tP^- 33ä'ter, father. „ @o^n, —eê, pl. 0D{/ne, son. „ SSru'ber,—S,pZ. 33vü'ber, brother. „ £>'í;etm, —%,pl. —e, uncle, „ 2>et'ter, —?i,pl. —n, cousin. „ ilef'fe, —u,pl. —n, nephew. ft ©ro^'bater, grandfather. „ Ur'gro§bater, great-grandfather. „ Sn'fei, ——, grandson. S5te ©'item, parents {has no sing.). Ser 0c^tt)ie'gerbater, father-in-law. „ 0d}tnie'gerio^n, son-in-law. „ 0d;iDa'ger, —pi. 0(^tr)ä'ger, brother-in-law. 0tief'toater, stepfather. tt 0ttef fo^n, stepson, r; 33räu'ttgatn,—§, bridegroom. ft SBitt'roer, —§, widower. Sa? 3irter, —?, old age. Ser ©ret?, —e?, pi. —e, old man. „ Äna'be, —n,pl. —n, boy. Sie ©eburt', —, birth. tt SSerio'bung, —, betrothal. Ser Süríjer. Sie 3l'ber, —,pl. —n, vein. Ser 3trtn, —t%,pl. —e, arm. Sa? ïtu'gc, —i,pl. —It, eye. Ser 2lug'a))feí, —?, pl. Síug'a^feí, eyeball, profile of the eye. Sie Slu'geubraue, —,pl. —n, ) eye- „ Stu'genbraun,——en, f brow. Sa? Slu'geníib, —?,pí. —er, eyelid. Ser 33a'den, —$,pl. —, cheek. tt 33art,—e?,^?/. 33ärte, beard. Sa? 33ein, —z^,pl. —e, leg. tt 33Iut, —e?, blood. Sie 33ruft, —, pl. 33rüfte, breast. Ser 33n'íen, —?,/>/. —, bosom. tt San'tnen,—^,pl.—, thumb. " ©E'bogen,—i,pl.—, elbow. , Sie Çaujl, —,pl. Çâujie, fist. Man. Sie grau, —, pl. —en, woman, wife. „ 2íiut'ter, —, pl. SÍíüt'ter, mother. „ Soc^'ter,—,i)/.Sö(^'ier,daughter, „ 0d)tt)e'fter, —, pl. —n, sister. tt San'te, —,pl. —n, aunt. „ Sonfi'ne, —,pl. —n, the cousin. tt îîic^'te, —, pl. —n, niece. tt ©roÇ'inutter, grandmother. „ Ur'gro^mutter, great-grand- mother. tt ©n'îelin, —, pl. —nen, grand¬ daughter. tt 0c^tr>ie'germutter, mother-in-law. tt 0c(nüie'gerto(^ter, daughter-im law. [in-law. tt 0ci^tr»ä'gerin,—,pi.—neu, sister. It 0tief'mutter, stepmother. tt 0tieftoc^ter, stepdaughter. tt 33rant,—,p/.33raute, bride. tt SBitt'mc, —, pi. —en, widow. „ gu'genb,—, youth. Ser ßbtil'iing, —?,/>Z. —e, twin. Sa? SRäb'c^en, —?, pl. —, girh Ser Sob, —e?, death. Sie Ê'^e, —, marriage. î. The body. Sic ger'i'e, —,pl. —n, heel. Ser ging'er, —?,pZ. —, finger. If g«Bi —P^- Süße, foot. ,t ©au'men, —?, pi. —, palate. Sa? ©e^irn',—e?,pZ. —e, brain. tt ©eienf,—e?,^Z.—e, joint. tt ©efidjt',—?, sight, face. [ber. tt ©lieb, —t§,pl. —er, limb, mem- Ser §al?, —e?,joZ. §aííe,neck. Sie §anb,—,pl. ^anbe, hand. Sa? §aujit, —e?,_pZ. ^änb'ter, head, Sie §aut, —tpl. §äute, skin. Sa? §ers, —en?,pZ. —en, heart. Sie ^üf'te, —,pl. —n, hip. tt àe^'ie, —, pl. —n, throat. Sa? iînie, —?,íjZ. —e, knee. Ser Äno'b^cn, —?,pZ. —, bone. LIST OF WORDS. 425 ®er Änö*(^ci, —i,pl. —,knuckle, an- 2)ie 2e' bcr, —, pi. —n, liver. [kle. „ SilJ'pc, — joZ. —n,lip. „ So'dc, —,pl. —n, curl. „ Sung'e, —,pl. —n, lung. 2)et aiîa'gen, —pl. —, stomach. 2)îari,—marrow. ®er Slîuub, —SJÍünber, mouth. 2)ie SlíuS'feí, —,pl. —it, muscle. Der 'üía'geí, —^,pl. Sfîâgel, nail. ®ie Sia'fe, —,pl. —n, nose. 2)er 9Zert>, —en,;>/. —en, nerve. 2)ie 9iie're, —, pi. —n, kidney (loins). 2)a8 Di}X, —pi. —en, ear. 2)ie Sitp'pe, —,pl. —n, rib. 2)et 9iii'(ien, —^,pl. —, back. ticiberftiirfc. ®er Síer'meí, —S, pl. —, sleeve, [let. ®a8 iärm'banb, -8,p/.-bänber, brace- ®er iBatift', —tS,pl. —e, cambric. SteSein'ÍIeiber (pl.), pantaloons. 2)er SSefa^',—t^,pl.—ia^e,trimming. Site 53rii'Ie, —, pi. —n, spectacles. „ iBruft'nabei, —,pl.—n, breastpin. „ 23ür'p£r —iPl- —n» brush. Sev Se'gen, —8, pi. —, sword. „ gä'^er, —8, pl. —, fan. [ring. „ ging'erring, —e8, pi. —e, finger- „ ^lor, —e8, pi. ÇÎôve, crape. „ §ra(i, —^,pl. grade, dress-coat. Sie gran'fe, —,pl. —n, fringe. Sa8 gut'ter, —8, pi. —, lining. „ ©efc^tnei'be, —8, jewelry. Ser ©ür'teí, —8, pl. —, belt, sash. „ ©uni'mifc^ul;. India-rubber over¬ shoe. Sie §aar'bürfie,—,pl.—n, hairbrush. „ §aar'nabel, —, pi. —n, hairpin. Ser §aí j'fc^muíí, —e8, necklace. Sa8 §al8'tu(h,—e8,p/. 4ilc^er, cravat. „ §emb, —e8,p/. —en, shirt. Sie Ço'fen (pl.), pantaloons. „ ^o'jenträger (pl.), suspenders. Ser ^amm, —t^,pl. Äcimme, comb. Ser Síüd'grat,—e8,;j/.—c, backbone, „ 0c^ä'bei, —8, pl.—, skull, [spine- „ ©c^en'feí,—8,i>/. —, thigh. Sie ©(í^ía'íe, —,pl. —n, temple. „ ©(^íag'aber, —,pl. —n, artery. Ser 0c()ooß, —ti, pl. —e, lap. Sie 0c^uí'ter,——n,shoulder. „ 0ei'te, —,pl. —n, side. [brow. „ 0íirn, —, pl. —en, forehead, „ SBa'be, —,pl. —n, calf. „ Sßang'e, —,pl. —n, cheek. Ser —ti,pl. tooth. Sa8 3«^n'fi2iiäb —ti, gum. Sie '^t'\)t,—, pl. —n, toe. ff âwhS'ff —tP^- — «; tongue. Articles of Dress. Ser Kattun', —ti, pl. —e, calico. Sa8 ^leib, —ti, pl. —er, dress-coat. Sie ^íei'ber (pl.), clothes. Ser —ti, head-dress. „ Ära'gen, —8, pl. —, collar. Sie SDZü^e,—,pl. —^n, cap. „ Siä^'nabel, —, pl. —n, needle. Ser 0()r'ring, —e8, pl. —e, earring, Sie ißoma'be, —, pl. —n, pomade. Ser 9îe'genjd;irm, —8, umbrella. ,, 9îing,—ti,pl.—e, ring, ff Sîod, —e8, pl. 9îô(îe, coat. Sie 0^ee're,——n, shears. Ser 0¿^íafro(í, —ti, dressing-gown. ff 0d;íei'er, —i, pl. —, veil. Sie 0^nür'bruft, pl. Prüfte, stays. Ser 0(^u^, —e8, pl. —t, shoe. Sie 0c^ür'ge, —,pl. —n, apron. Ser 0on'nenící)irm, —8, parasol. 2)ie 0t)i^en (pl.), lace. ff @ipD'ren(;f/.), spur. Ser 0tie'feí, —i,pl. —, boot. Qack. f, 0tve'feífned^t, —8, pl. —c, boo^ Sic 0tie'îetoic^ie, —, shoe-blacking. Ser 0trunHif, -c8, pl. 0trüm>fe., stocking. Sie Safd^e, —, pl. —en, pocket. 426 LIST OF WORDS, 2)aS Xa'íáientudí), —c8, pi. 4iic^er, handkerchief. [coat. ®er Ue'berrodf, —e8, pi. »rocíe, over¬ lie Un'terí)OÍen 0>/.), drawers. 25te SBc'fte, —, pi.—n, vest. „ 3a^n'¿ürfíe, —, pl. —n, tooth¬ brush. [pick. 2)er 3ai)n'ftoc^er, —8, pi. —, tooth- ^ranî^citcn» 2)er 5ln'fali, —8,;>Z. »fätte, fit. 2)te iBIat'tern (pl.), small-pox. u 53iinb'[;eit, —, blindness. ®er 33rii^, —e8, pi. ^Brilc^c, rupture. 2)ie 5aU'iud;t, —, apoplexy. 2)a8 l^ie'bcr, —8, pi. —, fever. „ bo8'artige Riebet, malignant fever „ brei'tägige lieber, tertiary fever. „ gel'be ^ieber, yellow fever, r; ^i'^ige Çieber, burning fever, rr M'te gieber, fever and ague. „ nerbö'fe gieber, nervous fever. „ @c^ar'ia^fteber, scarlet fever. 3)er —, typhus fever. Sie groft'beuie, —,pl. —it, chilblain. „ ©eí^louíft', —,pl. »Ülfte, swelling Sa8 Oefc^iüür', —e8,^Z.—e, ulcer. Sie ®ic^t, —, gout. „ §ei'Ivtng,—,pl.—en, healing, cure „ ^ei'ferieit, —, hoarseness, l^ei'fer, hoarse. Sa8 §il(/nerauge, —ti,pl. —n, corn. 5» Maladies. Sie ^unbS'tüUt^, —, hydrophobia. Ser |)u'ften, —8, cough. l^ii'ften, to cough. Ser Äreb8, —8, cancer. Sie SJÎa'iern (pl.), measles. „ iliar'be,—,pl.—n, scar. » O^n'mac^t,—, fainting. „ ißocien (pl.), small-pox. „ Óuet'ídjung, —, pl. —en, contu- Ser ©c^nu'^jjen, —8, a cold. [sion. fid; eriäl'ten, to take cold. Sie ©c^tüä'c^e, —, faintness. „ ©d^toinb'fn^t, —, consumption. Sa8 @ei'tenfte(if)en, —8, pleurisy. „ ©tam'meln,—8, stammering. Sie 0tnnim'í;eit, —, dumbness. „ (faí'íenbe) @ud)t, —, epilepsy. f, Saub'^eit, —, deafness. „ Ue'beifeit, —, nausea. „ SBerren'îung, —, pl. —en, disloca- „ Sißaf'ferfud;t, —, dropsy, [tion. „ SSun'be, —, pl. —n, wound. Sû§ ^aitö. 6» 1. KINDS OF nODSES. Sie SBanf, —, pi. —en, bank. „ S3ibíiotf)eí' —,pl. —en, library. „ SBor'fe, —, pi. —n, exchange. „ SBrü'cíe, —, pl. —n, bridge. „ Safieí'íe, —, pl. —n, chapel. r (Safer'ne,—,pl.—n, barrack. Ser ©i'fenbafínfiof, —e8, railroad sta¬ tion. Sa8 ©efäng'niji, —e8, pl. —e, prison. „ @etüä(^8'f)au8,—e8, green-house. Sie §üt'te, —, pl. —n, hut. „ áir'dje, —, pl. —n. church. Ser Äirc^'fiof, church-yard, cemetery. ,, Äirdfi't^urm, —c8, church tower. The House. 2. PARTS OF A HOUSE. Ser 33aí'íen, —i, pl.—, beam. Sa8 iBrett, —e8,pZ. —er, board. Ser S3run'nen, —8,pZ. —, well. Sa8 Sad^, —e8,pZ. SSc^er, roof. Sie Sie'íe,—,pl. —en, ceiling. Sa8 (Srb'gefd;o^, —e8, ground fioor, parterre. [shutter. Ser gen'fterínfeen, —^,pl-—, window- „ f^uji'bobcn,—8, jaZ. »beben, floor. Sa8 ©eiDörbe, —8,/jZ. —, vault. Ser S^amin', —e8,;iZ. —c, chimney. Sie Äam'mer, —,pl. —n, chamber. Ser Äel'Ier, —^,pl. —, cellar. Ste Äü'^e, —, pl. —n, kitchen. LIST OP WORDS. 427 2)ie 0aînjlet', sacristy, vestry. 2)aê Slo'fter, —8, pi. Äiö'jler, cloister, „ Sanb'^auS, country house, villa. Xie Ültün'jc, —, pl. —n, mint (coin). 2)a8 C 'iicvnbauê, —e8, opera-house. Ser —t^,pl. ^ala'ftc, palace. Sie ipofl, —, pi. —en, post-office. Sa8 Sc^au'íbieíííauS, theatre. Sie 0c^eu'ne,—,/>/.—n, barn. Sa8 3bitai', —, pi. 0bitäier, hospi- „ Sreib'()au8, hot-house. [tal. „ arsenal. „ custom-house. SJîôkia. Ser Se'^er, —?>,pl. —, tumbler, cup. SaS i8ett, pl. —en, bed. Sie 33ett'becfe, —, pi. —u, coverlet. Sa8 iSett'gefteli, —8, bedstead. „ Siett'tuc^,—4iid;er, sheet. Ser Stro^'jacE, —e8, straw bed. Sie SDÎatra'^e, —, pl. —en, mattress. Sa8 ^c^jf'îiffen, —, pl. —, willow. „ ge'berbett, feather bed. „ ißü'c^erbrett, book-shelf. Ser S3ü'(^erí¿^raní, bookcase, [goose. Sa8 iBü'geíeifen, flat iron, tailor's bii'gein, to iron. Sie Œcntmobe, —n, bureau. Ser (Si'mer,—8,/»I —, bucket, pail. Sa8 ga^, —e8, pi. gäffer, cask. Sie geu'erjange, —, pi. —n, tongs. Sa8 ©emal'be,—8, pi. —, painting. „ §anb'tuc^, —c8,;j^. 4iid;er, towel. Ser Äcf fei, —8, }Á. —, kettle. Sie Äer'jc, —, pl. —n, wax candle. „ Äi'fie, —, pl. —n, chest. „ Sof>'íe, —, pl. —n, coal. „ 33raun'fo^íc, lignite. „ ^oíj'to^Ie, charcoal. „ 0d^tt>ar5'íot)íe, I . , , • 0± cfy»' I niiiîcrûl co&l» „ (©tetn îopie ) Ser Äorb, —e8, pl. Äörbe, basket. „ Äron'Ieucfiter, —8, chandelier. „ Ätug, —C8, pl. Ärüge, pitcher. Sie ißum'fje, —,pl. —n, pump. Ser SRie'gel,—8,pZ.—, holt, door-bar. „ 0aal,—e8,/)/. 0äie, parlor. Sa8 0c!^iaf'jimmer, —8, pl. —, bed¬ room. [Q6y- Ser 0d)orn'ftein, —8, pl. —e, chim- „ 0tü(i, —e8, l Sa8 0to(Î'»erî,—e8,> Sie 0tu'be, —,pl. —n, room, [steps. „ Sreb'pe, —, pl. —n, stairway, Sa8 Sref)'f)engeíünber, baluster. „ Sref)'f)eni)au8, baluster, [story, ©ine Srefjfse in the second Furniture. kitchen „temU^ „ ÄU c^enfc^trr, ) Ser ÄÜ'd^enroft, kitchen range, grate. Sie Sam'pe, —, pi. —n, lamp. „ Sater'ne,/*/.—n, lantern, [candle. Sa8 íicí^t, —e8, pi. —e or —er, light, ©ejo'gene Sid;ter, mould candles, ©egcf'fene Sifter, dipped candles. Ser 2i¿bt'büCf)t, candle-wick. Sie Sid^t'pu^e, snuffers. Ser 8eucí)'ter, —8, candle-stick, Sie ipfan'ne, —,pl. —n, pan. Ser ipfro'pfen,—8,jt>Z. —,cork. Ser ipfro'pfenjieíjer, the corkserew. Sie 0c^au'feí, pl. —n, shovel, [board. Ser 0¿f)raní, —8, pl. 0d^rüníe, cup- Sie 0c^ub'íabe, —,pl. —en, drawer. Sa8 0c^n?e'felí;0íj'd;en, match. Ser 0f5ie'geí,—8,/.Z. —, mirror. I, 0tuf)í,—e8,/»l 0tü()íe, chair. Sa8 0ieb, —(9,pl. —e, sieve. „ 0o'f5f)a,—Q,pl.—8, sofa. Ser Seb>id;), —e8, pl. —e, carpet. „ Sie'gel, —8,p/. —, skillet. Ser Sifd;, —e8,/»/.—c, table. Sa8 Sifd^'tncf), tablecloth. „ Sof)f, —c9,pl. Scf>fe, pot. Sie ÏBanb'ubr, —,pl. —en, clock. Sa8 Söafd^'becfen, —8, washbowl. Sic SSie'ge, —,pl. —n, cradle. 428 LIST OF WORDS. H supper. 3)íaí)í5ctícn unb ©criíbtc» 1. MEALS. 2)a8 5rüí>'[tü(í, —e§, pl.—^, breakfast grü^ftüden, to breakfast. „ SD'iit'tage[fen, —S, dinner. 3u SDÎittag effen, to dine. „ 21'benbefíen, —S, „ 2l'6enbbrob, 3u Sibenb effen, to take supper,. „ ®aft'nîaf)I,—eê,/jL=mâ^ler,ban¬ aler ©aft,—©äfte, guest, [quet. „ 2lbf5etit', —8, appetite. ©efeg'nete äJiatii'jeit I (a blessing on the meal!) 2. DISHES. 2)a§ ißrob, ——e, bread. SSet^'brob, wheat bread, ©¿^tuarj'brob, brown bread. Slít'hacíeneé SSrob, stale bread. 33ut'terbrDb, bread and butter. ®ie ^ru'tne, —,pl. —n, crumb, ííru'fíe,—,pl- —n, crust. tr Äiei'e, —v bran. Ser Setg, —e§, dough. „ Sie §e'fe, —, yeast. Sie iBut'ter, —, butter. Sa8 (Si, —t^fpl.—er, egg. Ser Si'erîucf)en, —g, omelet. @e^'eier, poached eggs. 9íü^r'eier, scrambled eggs. ©etrcibc unb ©cntitfc* Sie S3o§'ne, —, pi. —n, bean. rr (Srb'fe, —, pi. —n, pea. Ser Sie ©er'fte, —, barley. Sa3 @ra§, —e6, pi. ©rä'fer, grass. Sie ©ur'íe, —pl. —n, cucumber. Ser §a'fer, —§, oats. Sag §eu, —eg, hay. Sie ^tr'fe, —, millet. „ áartof'feí, —, pl. —n, potato. Ser íííec, —g, clover, w ÄO^l, —eg, cabbage. 8» Meals and Dishes. Sag C^i'ineiÇ, the white of eggs. Ser Softer, —g, the yolk. Ser ©ffiß/ —^r vinegar. Sag —eg, meat. §am'melfleifd;, mutton. Äalb'fteifc^, veal. 9îinb'fïeifé^, beef. ©(^toei'ne^eifdj, pork. ©ebra'teneg gíeifc^, roast meat, ^am'meibraten, roast mutton, ^aibg'braten, roast veal. 9îinbg'braten, roast beef. Sie ííaíbg'coteíette, —, pl. —n, vea Ser Sä'fe, —g,/»/.—, cheese. Sie äßilc^, —, milk. Ser 9îaf)m, —eg,f Sie ©a^' cream. ?m,—eg,) )'ne,— Í „ SDÎoIîen (pZ.), whey. „ S3uftermiidj, buttermilk. Sag Dbft, —eg, fruit. Sin'gemac^teg Obft, preserved fruit. Sag St'bfeimu^, apple-sauce. „ iiomfjof, —g, sauce. Ser Pfeffer, —g, pepper. Sag ©aíj, —eg, salt. Sie ©arbel'ícu (pl.), sardines. Ser ©enf, —eg, mustard. Sie ©ub'i^e, —, soup. „ Sor'te, —,pl. —n, tart, rf SSurft, —,pl. SSiirfie, sausage. 9. Grains and Vegetables. Ser i8íu'mení;>bí, cauliflower. ff S3raun'íof)í, brown cabbage. „ Sau'etto^I » Sag ©au eriraut, i Sag ^orn, —eg, grain. ff Äraut, —eg, pi. Äräu'ter, herb. ff Un'frant, weed, Sie treffe, —, pl. —n, cress. ff Sin'fe, —, pl. —n, lentil. Ser 3Jîaig, —eg, Indian corn. Sie iJJa'flinate, —, pl. —n, parsnip. f, ipeterfi'íie, —, parsley. LIST OF WORDS. 429 2)er Çiij, —pi. —e, mushroom. M 9íeiá, —eö, rice, „ 9íet'tÍ3, —eS, pl. —C, radish. „ 3Jîtct'rcttig, horseradish, ,, Sîog'gcn, —6, rye, 2)k 9íü'be, —, pl. —n, rape. Il gelbe 9íü'be, carrot, Dbft unb Dbftbäumc. 1 2>tC 21'nanaS, —,pl. —, pine-apple. 2)er Sl'lJfel, —^,pl. Síe^feí, apple, 2;ie SllJÍelfí'ne, —,pl. —n, orange, „ Si^rito'fe,—,pl.—11, apricot, 2>er 33aum, —es, pi. iBäume, tree, Sl'^felbaum, apple-tree, Sirn'baum, pear-tree, ^fiau'menbaum, plum-tree, gci'genbaum, fig-tree, S)a§ 33iatt, —t9,pl. 33íatter, leaf, SDer 0tamm, -t^,pl. 0tämme, trunk ®te 9îin'be, —,pl. —n, hark, S)er —^^1 P^- —bough. S)ie SBur'jcl, —,pl. —n, root. 2)ie S3ee're, —,pl. —n, berry. S3rom'beere, blackberry, (Srb'beere, strawberry, ^et'belbeerc, bilberry, ^im'becrc, raspberry, 3obfln'nt6beerc, currant, 0taubcn unb Salbbäume» 1 S)er 21'born, —i,pl. —c, maple, S)ie S3ir'fe, ^,pl. —n, birch, I, S3u'd;e, —,pl. —n, beech. n Se'ber,—,pl.—n, cedar, „ f —, P^- —cypress. „ St'c^e, —, pi. —n, oak, (, (Sr'le, —, pi. —n, alder. n ®'id;e,—,pl.—It, ash. rf SS'^e,-—, pi. —It, aspen, S3iumen. J 2)a8 ©eiS'blatt, "> honeysuckle, „ iîeiân'gerieiie'ber,]' woodbine. ®ie ©olb'blumc, marigold. 2)te rotbe 9iü'be, beet, ,f »eiße 9Íübe, turnip, ®er 0erieric, —, celery. 25er 0í3ar'gel, —ê, asparagus. „ 0íiiitat', —6, spinage, „ Seijen, —8, wheat, ®ie 3l®ie'bci, —, pi. —n, onion. ). Fruits and Fruit-trees. SJiaul'beere, mulbeny, 0ta'c^eibeere, gooseberry, ®ie Sßirne, —, pl. —n, pear. „ ©tro'ne, —,pl. —n, lemon. „ ©at'tei, —,pl. —n, date, n Set'ge,—,y,—it,fig, „ Äafta'nie, —,pl. —it, chestnut. „ 3Dían'beí, —,pl. —n, almond. „ 2Jíeío'ite, —, pl. —n, melon. „ ?îu6,—,/>/, iJíüiíe, nut. S3ucb'nu^, beechnut. §a'ielitu^, hazlenut, Salí'nu^, walnut, 2)ie Dít'be,—,pl.—en, olive, „ ipftr'ftcb, —, pl. —C, peach. „ ipfíau'me, —, pl. —n, plum. „ Cuit'tc, —, pl. —n, quince, „ Sein'trattbe, —,pl. —n, grape, 2)er Setn'[to(í, —t^,pl. »ftöde, grape¬ vine, .♦ Shrubs and Forest-trees. Sie §id;'te, —,pl. —n, pine, „ Sar'bbe, —, pi. —tt, larch, „ Sin'be, —, pi. —n, lime-tree, „ SOÎijrtbe, —, pl. —n, myrtle, „ ipaji'jieí, —, pl. —n, poplar, „ ¿an'nc, —, pl. —n, fir, „ Uí'tne, —, pl. —n, elm. „ Sel'bc, —, pl. —n, willow. 2. Flowers. Ser 3a®Utilt', —eS, jasmine, Sie Si'íie, —, pl. —n, lily, „ 3)îai'bÎuine, lily of the valley. 430 LIST OF WORDS. 2)ie 9Jîârj'Itefee, —, pl. —ti, daisy. „ SÍJÍol^n'bíume, poppy. „ 9ieí'{c, —, pl. —u, pink, r, ííef'feí, —, pl. —n, nettle. 2)er 9îit'tcripovn, larkspur. 2)ie Sîo'ie, —, pl. —n, rose. „ 0(^Iün£ÍWuine, primrose. SSögci. Sit Sío'geí, —S, pl. SSogeí, bird. „ 9íaub'üogel, bird of prey. „ ©tng'toogeí, bird of song. „ ©umpf bogel, wader. „ bird of passage. Slb'ier, —â, pl. —, eagle. S)te Sim'fel, —, pi. —n, blackbird. 2)cr SSuc^'fiiiî,—en, ]>l.—en, bullfinch. 2)ie 2)oí)'íe, —, pl. —n, jackdaw. „ 2)roj'feí, —, pl. —n, thrush. „ ©í'fter, —, pl. —n, magpie. „ Su'íe, —, pl. —n, owl. ,, (Sn'te, —, JÜ. —n, duck. 2)er gai'fe, —n, pl. —n, felcon. ®er gafan', —en, pl. —en, pheasant. S)ie @an«,—,/^/. @änfe, goose. 2)er §a'bid;t, —pl. —e, hawk. „ §afin,—eê,§äbne, cock. 2)te §en'ne, —, pl. —n, hen. S)aê §ui}rt, —^,pl. §üí/ner, chicken. ®er ííana'rientoogeí, Canary bird. 2)te Ärä'ije, —, pl. —n, crow. ©äugci^tcre. 1 2)er Síffe, —n,/j/.—n, ape. „ i8ar, —en, pl. —en, bear. ,, SBt'ber, —8, pl. —, beaver. „ 2)ací)«, —eê, pl. S)äd/fc, badger. 2)a3 (Std;'i;örnd;cn, —%,pl.—, squirrel 2)er S'ber, —%,pl. —, wild boar. „ S'fef,—^,pl.—,ass, donkey. „ gud;8, —ê, pl. güd;íe, fox. ®ie ©em'fe, —,pl. —n, chamois. ®er Ça'fe, —n, pl. —n, hare. „ pi stag. „ §unb, ~e«, pl. —e, dog. 2)te ©on'nenbinme, sunflower. 2)er ©torc^'fc^nabel, crane's bill (ger» nium). 2)aê Sau'fenbfd^ön, pansy, heart's ease 2)xc ííuí'pe, —, pl. —n, tulip. S)a8 35ergt§'incinntc^t, forget-me-noL „ 20tnï)'rôêd;en, anemone. Birds. 2)er Ära'nidi, —è,pl. —c, crane. „ Âu'înî, —§, cuckoo, Sie 2er'd)e, —,pl. —n, lark. ,t ÜKö'be, —, pl. —n, gull. [gale. ,, iRad^'tigaïï, —, pl. —en, nightin- 2)er ißapagei', —en, pl. —en, parrot. ,, ipfan, —en, pl. —en, peacock. „ 9îa'be,—en, ;t?Z. —en, raven. S)a8 9îeb'i;n^n, partridge. 2)er 9îei'^er, —8, pl. —, heron. 2)aê 9Íoíb'íe^íd;en, robin redbreast. 2)ie ©d^ne'pfe, —, pl. —n, snipe. „ ©c^tüái'be, —,pl. —n, swallow, ¿er ©cbtran, —8, pl. ©cfitnäne, swan. „ ©per'íing, —8, pl. —c, sparrow. „ ©torc^, —e8, pl. ©tör^e, stork. „ ©tranß, —en,jo?, -en, ostrich. 2)te San'be, —, pl. —en, dove. ®er 2:rnt'f)af)n (bie —i^enne), turkey. 2)te ÜSad^'teí, —, pl. —n, quail. 2)er 3ann'îbntg, wren. i. Mammals. Ser g'geí, —8,p?. —, hedgehog. ®a8 Äanin'c^en, —%,j>l. —rabbit, ®ie ^a'lje, —, pl. —n, cat. ®te ^b,—,pl. Äübc, cow. ®er Sn8b§, —t^,pl. —c, lynx. ®er Sö'ire, —\\,pl. —n, lion. ®ie 9í)'íau8,—,pl. 2)íaufe,«mouse. ®cr Dcb8, —en,/>?. —en, ox. ®a8 ififerb, —t^,pl. —e, horse. ®ic ©tu'te, —, pl. —n, mare. ®a8 güí'íen, —8, />?. —, colt. ¿te 9íatte, —,pl. —n, rat. LIST OP WORDS. 431 2)a« 9îei), —c, roe, deer. „ @(¿ipein,—t&fpl.—e, hog. £)cr 0ttcr, —t9,pl. —c, bull Siííc. 1 Ser 5laí, —t9,pl. —c, eel. Sie "ílu'fter,—,pl.—n, oyster. Ser 3?vrrf^', —c^,pl.—c, perch. „ Sücf'Ung,—8,pZ.—c, redherring Sie gorel'íe, —,pl. —n, trout. „ ©arne'íe, —,pL —n, shrimp. Ser ^ai, —9,pl. —e, shark. „ ¿ü'ring, —e8, pl. —e, herring. „ ¿ec^t, —es, pl. —e, pike. „ §um'mer, —8, pl. —, lobster. „ áabeí jau', —8, pl. —, codfish. Ser Si'ger, —f>,pl. —, tiger. „ äßolf, —c8, pl. SSöIie, wolf. Sie 3Í2'9C/ —,pi- —kid. 5« Pishes. Set Äar'lJfen, —i,pl.—, carp. „ ^reb8, —e8, pi. —e, crawfish. „ 2ac^8, —8, pi. —e, salmon. Sie 3Jíu'í^eí, —,pl. —n, shell. Ser 0^eü'fiíc^,—t^,pl—e, haddock. Sie 0(^iil>'îrôte, —, pl. —n, turtle. „ 0^1ei' ^e, —,pl. —it, tench. Ser 0c^tDeinfií(í^, ) „ o» f porpoise. „ Summ íer, ) ^ „ 0tör, —8, pl. —e, sturgeon. „ SBall'ítící^, —e8,/)/. —e, whale. Œ^emtf($c 0uMtanseti« 16. Chemical Bodies. Ser 0au'erftoff,—e8, oxygen. „ SBaî'ferftoff, hydrogen. „ 0tid'ftoff, nitrogen. Sie 0ti(i'ftoffiäure, nitrous acid. „ 0ail3e'teriäure, nitric acid. Sa8 failJe'terfaure 0iíber, nitrate „ So^'lenftoff, carbon. [of silver. Sie ^o^l'eniäure, carbonic acid. Ser ío^'íeníaure ^aíf, carbonate of lime. „ $I)08'l>t)or, —8, phosporus. „ 0d)me'iei, —8, sulphur, [acid. Sie [d^me'jeíige 0äure,sulphurous „ 0c^we'íeííüure, sulphuric acid Ser ic^me'íeííaiire ^alî, sulphate of lime. [iron. Sa8 0d;me'feleiíen, sulphuret of „ S^Ior, —8, chlorine. Sie 0äu're, —, pl. —n, acid. Sa8 0aij, —e8, pl. —e, sait. 0ai'jig, saline. Sie Suft, —, air. Suf'tig, aerial. Suft'förmig, aeriform. Sa8 SJÎetall', —e8, —e, metal. Sa8 @DÎb, gold. „ 0irber, silver. „ Äu'ljfer, copper. „ S3íei, lead. „ 3inn, tin. „ Si'[en, iron. Ser 0ta^í, steel. " 3ií^^ zinc. „ to'baít, cobalt. Sa8 ajieffing, —8, brass. P^- —£/ ore, bronze. Ser Siamant',—8, ja/.—en, diamond. „ 0maragb', —8, pl. —e, emerald. ,t Slgat', —e8, j)/. —e, agate. ,t aJíar'mor, —8, marble. ft @i^l58, —e8, gypsum. Sie ^reib'e, —, chalk. Ser Äalf, —e8, lime. „ Sf;on, —8, clay. fi SÍIauu', —8, alum. Sie SDÎi'ne, —, pl. —n, mine. 432 lilST OF WOßDS. SBifícnf(|aftCíi» 2)te 9Íatur'tr>iffeníd;aft, —, science, „ S^emte', —, chemistiy. S^e'miid^, chemical, ®er S^e'mtfer, chemist, » ©eologte',—, geology. [ogist, ®er ©eoiog', —tn,pl.—en, geol- „ SJÎineralogte', —, mineralogy, ®er Slîineralog', —en, mineralo- „ iBota'nif, —, botany, [gist, 2)er SSota'niier, botanist, „ SlZat^ema'tif, —, mathematics, S)ie 2Intf>me't^if, —, arithmetic, „ Sirgebra, —, algebra. 17. Sciences. 2)ic ©comctrie', —, geometry. „ ytonomie',» „ ©tern tunbe,> 2)er îlftronom", astronomer. „ ^[)t'íofoí)í)Íe', —, philosophy. 2)er philosopher, ^^tíojo'^^tfd^, philosophical. „ ¿íieologte', —, theology, 2)er Í^eoíog', —en, theologian, X^eoío'gtí^, theological, „ ^^ilologte', —, philology, „ úlíebtgin', —, medicine, [law, „ Síet^tS'tnifíeníd^aft, —, science of fünfte. S)ie fc^önen ÍÍün[te, fine arts. „ 2Ie[t[>e't^tt, —, sesthetics, „ Äiinit, —, pl. fünfte, art. 2)er áünft'íer,—8, artist, " i architecture. „ Slrc^iteítur',-, 3 ®" architect. „ 3lrc^tteît, ) „ iSiÎb'^auerînnft, j „ ^k'ftií, —, j- sculpture, „ ©fnlïJtnr',—, 3 2)er Siib'^auer, —8, sculptor, tt SDÎaÎerei',—, painting, 2)er SJÍa'íer, —?, pl. —, painter, „ 9«urir,-, ■» . „ ïon'înnft, —,; ®er 2Jîn'jtier, —8, musician, „ ©efang', —e8, singing, „ ©äng'er, —8, singer. 18* Arts. ®ie Sie ©än'gerin,;>Z, —nen, singer, „ Sid^t'fünft, —, poetry. Ser Sic^'ter, —8, poet, „ 9îe'beîunft, —, rhetoric. Sie Síe'be,—,pl. —n, oration. Ser 9îeb'ner, —8, pl. —, orator. n 25er8'funft, —, prosody. „ â^i'^'hînfunft,—, art of drawing, „ Ân'fjferftie^funfl, art of engraving, Ser ííu'f^ferfíec^er, engraver, „ ^u'fjferjtid^, engraving, „ ©tein'brucicrfunfi, lithography, „ ©c^reib'funfl, —, chirography, „ i8uc^'bru(íerfnníl, art of printing, „ Ärieg8'funft, military art. „ f^elb'me^fnnft, field survejing, ,, Ingenieur'fünft, engineering. „ Stbotbe'ferfnnft, pharmacy. Ser 5í)>ctí?e'fer, apothecary. ©ramntfltifffic Siuêbriiiic. 19. Gframmatical Terms. Sie ©ramma'tif, —, pi.—en,"[ gram- „ ©fjrad/Iefire,—,/>/,—n,i mar. '-4 orthograph,. Sîec^t fd^retbnng, 3 (Stt?moiogie',-,| etvmolosv 2öort'iei;re,-, 3 P U ff " ' 1" syntax, u ©a^'Ieiire, —,3 Sie J^rofobie' -, ) „ iber8 fnnft,—,3 Ser 5Bnd/ftabe, —n, pi. —n, letter. Ser 3tn'fang8bu^ftahe,initial let¬ ter, [ital letter, „ große ?tnfang8buc^flabc, caj> „ 35ofat',—8,;>/,—c,f „ ©timm'Iaut, —c8,3 LIST OP WORDS. 433 2)ct Äonfonant', —cn,> conso- „ aOíit'íaut, pL —C,j" nant. ®cr 9íc'bctbcií,——e,> part of Sie Süort'íerra,—,pl.—en,) speech. Ser arti'îel, Sa« ©eíd^led^tS'ttort, i Ser befîimmte 2lrí.,definite article „ unbejlimmte árt., indefinite Sa«9ío'men,—pl.—, ) [article „ ^aujJt'lDort, —8, )- noun. M 9íenn'tüort,/jZ. »Wörter,) Ser ©emetn'namen, —«, })l. —, common noun. „ Si'gennamen, proper noun. Sie Seîlination', pZ.—en,)^ declen- „ gaU'biegung,;}Z.—en, ) sion. Sie fiarte Setlin., old declension. „ f^Wat^e Setlin.,new declen. „ gemifölite Setl. ,mixed declen. Sa« Slb'jcttito, —8, \ „ ©i'genfc^aftSWort, j- adjective. „ Sei'wort, ) Sie 0tei'gcrung ber Sïbjettitoa, comparison of adjectives. Set Dîumetal',—S,pl.—en,) numer- Sa« 3û^l'WDrt, I" al. Sa« ©runb'sa^Iin., cai-dinal num. „ Orb'nitng«ga^íworí, ordinal number. Sa«^tono'men, —«,1?/. —, 1 pro- „ gilr'Wort, ) noun. Sa« fjerfön'üc^e gürW., personal pronoun. „ befilj'anjeigenbe gürw., pos¬ sessive pronoun. „ fiin'weifenbe giirW., demon¬ strative pronoun. „ unbeftimmte gürW., indefi¬ nite pronoun. „ fra'genbe gürW., interroga¬ tive pronoun. [pronoun. „ bejüg'lic^e gürwcrt, relative Sa« SBerb, —«,i?Z.—a,) „ ^rifh^ort, ) ■ [tion. Sie Conjugation', —,/)Z.—n,conjuga- Sie fiarte Conj., irregular conj. „ fd^Wac^e Conj., regular conj. Sa« 2ltti'hnm, —«, active voice. „ ifjaffi'bnm, —8, passive voice. „ Sibberb', —6,;?Z.—a, > ad- t, iJieben® orllm'ftoitb«wort,) verb. Sie i|Jräpofition', ■) Sa« Sor'wort, >- preposition. „ 25erf)äit'nißn:ort, ) ®ic Sonjunmon',) Sa« Stn beWort, > Sie 3nterjettion', ) inteijec- Sa« Smfjfin'bnngswort,) tion. Bcitcint^ctiung. Sie S'Wigteit, —, eternity. II 3rit, —, pi. —en, time. Sa« Sa^r^un'bert, —«, century. „ Alfter, or 3rit'alter, age. „ 3af)r,—e«,pZ. ^a^ire, year. Ser SKo'nat, —«, pi. —e, month. Sie SBo'c^e, —, pi. —n, week. Ser Sag, —c«, pi. —e, day. Sie 9îa(^t, —, pl. 9îâc^'te, night. „ 0tun'be, —, pl. —n, hour. „ SDZinu'te, —,pl. —n, minute. „ 0etun*be,—,pl.—n, second. M 3Jîor'genrôtbe,—, dawn. Ser Sa'ge«anbru(^, —e«, daybreak. ö* Divisions of Time. Ser 0onnenauf'gang, —«, sunrise. ,t SJÎor'gen, ■—8, pl. —, moraing. rr SJor'mittag, forenoon. „ SJZit'tag, noon, rf îîad^'mittag, afternoon. tf 31'benb, —«, pi. —e, evening. Sie üMit'ternad^t, midnight. ©e'fiem, yesterday. 33or'geftern, day before yesterday. 3Sor act^t Sagen, a week ago. [day. §eutc über ad)t Sage, a week from to- 3ÏZor'gen, to-morrow. Ue'bermorgen, day after to-morrow. Sie 3a^'re«acit, season of the year. 434 LIST OF WORDS. 2)er SBin'ter, —8, winter. „ grütj'Iing,-«,) . SDaSgrü^'ia^r—êj ^ ^ 2)et ©orn'mer, —8, summer. „ §erbft, —c8, fall. ,, ¿a'nuar,—8, January. „ ge'bruar, —3, February. „ 2Jiar^, —e8, March. „ ïliprir, —8, April. „ 9Jîat, — 8, May. „ Ou'nt, —8, June. „ —8, July. ,, 3lugu[t',—e8, August. aîcïtgioncn. ®a8 Si)ri'ftcnt^um, —8, Christendom 2)ie Äiv'dje, —, pl. —n, church. „ Sirmenta'mfc^e Stride, Armenian Church. 2)er ïlrmenia'ner, Armenian. „ S3a!t)tí'ftiící)e ^irc^e, Baptist Ch. 2)er iBa^tift', Baptist. „ SSi'fc^öfiid^e Îîirc^e, Episcopal Church. [lian. 2)er (Sí)i8ío:^aíia'ner, Episcopa- „ ©rie'd^ijii^ Í Satí)o'íiíc^e ^rc^e, Greek-Catholic Church. „ Snt^e'rij^e Ätrc^e, Lutheran Ch. 2)er Sut^era'ner, Lutheran. 2)cr ®ci)tem'6er, —8, September. Dtio'ber, —8, October. 9îotocm'ber, —8, November. Sejem'ber, —8, December. (Sonn'tag, —8, Sunday. 9iîon'tag, —}, Monday. 2)ien8'tag, —8, Tuesday. \ Wednesday. 2)ie SOittt iDod^e, —, > ' 2)er Son'ncr8tag, —8, Thursday. „ grei'tag,—8, Friday. „ @amrt«g,-8, I 21. @onn'abenb, —8, j Eeligions. S)te SJiet^obi'ftifc^c Ätrc^e, Methodist ®er SJÎet^obift', Methodist. [Ch. „ Sîeformtr'te áiré^e, Reformed Ch. „ gîô'mifd^'Âat^o'iiîc^C Äir^C, Ro¬ man-Catholic Church. ®cr ^at^olif, Roman Catholic. ,, grei'e ©emein'be, Free Religious Association (ofFree-thinkers). ®a8 3u'bent^um, Jewry. [Jewess. 3)er .Su'be ; btc Sü'bin, Jew, 2?er 38'iant, Mohammedanism, [dan. $>er Slîa^omeba'ncr, Mohamme- 2)a8 §et'bent^unt, paganism, [heathen Ser §€t'be, —n, pi. —n, pagan, ^rofcfíioncn unb ^anbujcric. 22. iDcr ïïC^Jot^e'fer, —8, apothecary. 2)er Strjt, —e8, pi. 3ierjte, physician. 2)er Söunb'arjt, surgeon. ,, 3ai>tt'arjt, dentist. S3ä'(fer, —8, pl. —, baker. 93anquíev', —8,p/. —8, banker. 93avbter', —8, pi. —e, barber. 33au'er,—^,pl. —n, peasant. 2)ie 33äu'ertn, —, pl. —ncn, peasant woman. ®er Sau'mctfler,—^,pl.—, architect. „ 33ilb'f;auer, —8, pi. —, sculptor. ,, SSt'fc^DÍ, —8, pl. bishop. „ Sött'c^er, —8,p¿ —, cooper. ft tf 91 tf ft Professions and Trades. S3rau'er, —8, pi. —, brewer. SSud^'btnber, —8, bookbinder. 95uc^'bru(ier, —e8, joZ.—, printer, gabrifant', —en,^Z. —en, mann- gärber, —%,pl.—, dyer, [facturer. gtf¿b'í)0nbíer, —8, fishmonger, glei'fdber, —8, pi. —, butcher, gu^r'mann —t%,pl. deute, coach- ©er'ber,—8,/>Z.—, tanner, [man. ©la'fet, —8, pi. —, glazier. Çirt, —en,p/. —en, shepherd. Çânb'ÎCV, —8, pl. —, tradesman. 3)er ißudb'bünbier,book-merchant „ IDbji'iiänbier, fruit-merchaal LIST OF WORDS. ®ic OBfi'iiänbienn, fruit-woman. 2)er ^fer'be^änbter, horse-dealer. „ ¿ud^'bäiibier,dry-goods mer¬ chant. 2)er 3utneiier', —8, pi. —e, jeweller. ,, Äü'fer, ——, cooper. „ —8, pi.—^ artist. 2)ie ííünfí'íerin, —,pl. —nen, artist. 2)cr Su'^jferftec^cr, —8, engraver. „ Se^'rer, —8, pi. —, teacher. „ 0c^urie^rer, school-teacher. 2)ic Se^'rertn,—,ij/. —nen, teacher. SDet IDÎau'rer, —^,pl. —, mason. ®er grei'maurer, free-mason. „ SDîe^'ger, —^,pl. —, butcher. „ 3Díül'ler,—8,p/.—, miller. ,, SDÍu'fiÍer,—i, pl.—, musician. 2)ie 9Zü ^ertit, pl. —nen, seamstress. Ser 9íatur'foríd;er, —8, naturalist. „ —e8, pl. ^äb'fie, pope. „ ^t'li^'rer, —8, pl. —, vicar. „ —txifpl. —en, philos- ,, ^re'btger, —8, preacher, [opher. ,, ^rie'fter, —8 ,jà. —, priest. ,, 9íebaítenr', —8, pl. —e, editor. ,, 9îeb'ner, —^,pl. —, orator. „ ©att'íer, —8, pl. —, saddler. 435 Set 0¿^au'fí)teíer, —i, pl. —, actor. Sie 0c^au'ít)ielertn,/)/.—nen, actress. Ser 0d^iä^'ter, —8, pl. —, butcher. „ 0(^lofîer, —8, pl. —, locksmith. „ 0c^mieb, —e8, pl. —t, smith, blacksmith. Ser ©olb'îc^mteb goldsmith. „ Çuj'fc^mteb, horseshoer. „ iîu'pferfc^mieb,coppersmith. „ äJief'ieric^mteb, cutler. „ SSaffenítí^mieb, armorer. „ 0d^net'ber, —8, pl. —, tailor. „ 0¿^orn'fteiníeger,chimney-sweep. ,, 0(^rift'fteíIer, —^,pl. —, author. „ Sag'Iö^ner,—8,pZ.—,day-labor¬ er. [maker. „ Sifd^'Ier, —8, pi. —, cabinet- „ Sa)5ejie'rer, —8, pi. —, uphoh sterer. „ Uiir'mad;er, —8, pi. —, watch¬ maker. „ SSerfaHer, ——, author. „ SG3e(i^8'ier, —8, pi. —, money¬ changer. „ SBin'jer,—^,pl.—, vine-dresser. „ 3iih'niemtann, —^,pl. ^itn'mer* iente, carpenter. íírcmíitoiirícr. 23. Foreign Words. Ser 5In'fer, anchor (from Latin, áncora ; Greek, âyicvpa). [China). Sie 21'bfeífíne, orange (from Dutch, appelsina; French, pomme de Sine= » Slu'fler, oyster (from Latin, dstreum ; Greek, oarpiov). „ 53ut'ter, butter (from Latin, butyrum ; Greek, ßovrvpov). Ser Çradf, dress-coat (from i^rewcÄ, frac ; Zoiu-Zutin, fróccus=woolen stuff). Sie (Vn'feí, island (from Latin, insula). Äo'ftcn, to cost (from Italian, costare ; Latin, constare). Ser Sö'ine, lion (from Latin, leo ; Greek, Xsuiv). Sa8 ipfcrb, horse (from Late Latin, paraverêdus=an extra post-horse). Sie iPfir'ficb, peach (from Latin, persicum málum=Persian apple). Ser 9íei8, rice (from French, ris; Latin, oryza; Greek, opv^a ; Arabic, aruz), Sa8 0c^a(i), chess (from Persian, shah=king). Sie 0tra'^e, street (from Latin, via strata=paved road). f, Saj'fe, cup (from French, tasse ; Arabic, tas), rr Sor'te, tart (from Low-Latin, torta ; Latin, tortus=twisted). „ Sui'be, tulip (from French, tulipe ; Turkish, tulban=turban). Ser (from Latin, tegula; from tegere=to cover). VI. GEEMAN-ENGLISH VOCABÜLAET. adj., adjective. adv., adverb. conj. or c., conjunction. indecl., indeclinable. int., interjection. part., participle. pl., plural. prep., preposition. Ser 2í'benb, —^,pl. —c, evening. Sa§ Wbenbeffen, —3, supper. Sa3 Sl'benteuer, —3,p/.—, adventure Sl'ber, conj. (§26.5), but, however. Ser É^'berglaube, —nê, superstition. 2íb'brennen, v. ir. tr., to burn down. Sie 2íb'fa()rt, —, pl. —en, sailing. Síb'feuern, v. tr., to fire oíF. 5íb'geben, v. ir. tr., to deliver. Síb'beífen, v. ir. intr., to remedy. Síb'íeiten, v. tr., to derive. Slb'retfen, v. intr., to leave, depart. Sie Síb'reife, —, pl. —en, departure. Síb'fegeín, v. intr., to sail (away). Ser îlb'fa^,—e8,/>/.2íbía^e,stop,heel. 2íb'jcbrecîcn, v. tr., to frighten away. Síb'fcbreiben, v. tr. ir., to copy, tran¬ scribe. [purpose, aim, view. Sie 2lb'[id;t, —, pi. —en, intention, Slb'fidjtii^, adj. intentional. Slb'ftammen, v. intr., to be descended. Slb'ftatten, v.tr., to perform, discharge. (Sinen Sefncb' ab'ftattcn, to pay a ^b'trodtnen, v. intr., to dry up. [visit. Slb'trünnig, adj., faitliless (to). 2id;)t, eight. Sie 3ícbt, —, care, attention ; fid^ in 2id;t nei/men, to take care, be on one's guard. pron., pronoun. demon., demonstrative. V. aux., auxiliary verb. V. imp., impersonal verb. V. intr., intransitive verb. V. ir., irregular verb. V. refl., reflexive verb. V. tr., transitive verb. Sie 2í(^'tung, —, respect. Slbien', int., good-by, farewell. Sie Slbreffe, —, pi. —n, address. Slbreffx'ren, to address (letters). Síe^n'íid?, adj., similar, like. Sie Síebn'licbteit, —, similarity. Ser Slf'fe, —n, pi. —n, ape. Sa3 2i'gio, —3, premium (on coin). Sie Slí'tie, —,pl. —n, share, [pany. „ Síf'tieníOefett'fcbatt, stock com- Ser 2lftionSr', —3, jo/.—e, sharehold- StIIein', conj., but, only. [er. 211'íer, joron., all, every. Slüeríei', indecl. adj., of all kinds. 2il(gemein', ad/., general, common. Slïïtnâ'Îig, adj., gradual. Sa3 ^I'mojen, —3, pi. —, alms. 2113, co/y'., when, as, than, except, but. 2lí3bann', adv., then. Stl'fo, adv., so, thus; conj., therefore. 2lfl'jU, adv., quite too. Ser 2íítar', —3, pl. SÍIta're, altar. Sa3 2lí'ter, —3, pl. —, age, old age. Sa8 2ít'tert^utn, —8, pl. 4bümcv, an- 9íít, adj., old. [tiquity. Ser 21m'bo8, —e3, pl. —fe, anvil. Sa3 Slmt, —ti, pl. Hem'tcr, office. 2ín, prej}., on, at, by, to about in; adv., on, forwm'd. VOCABÜLABY. 437 5ín'bietcn, r. ír., to oflFer, hold out to. 3ln'ter,/»ro«., other. Sin'bets, adv., othervnse. Sln'bcriwc, adv., elsewhere. Sln'bert^alb (§ 103, 2). Sln'beuten, v. tr., to show. 3)ic Slnetbo'te,—,pl. —n, anecdote. Ser Sln'fang,—»fange,beginning. Sln'fangen, v. ir. tr., to begin, commence. Sln'feinben, v. tr., to treat hostilely. Sln'geben, v. ir. tr., to give. Sln'geblii^, a(^'., pretended. Sln'geboren, adj., hereditary. Sln'gefien, v. ir. intr., to concern. Sie Sln'gclc_gen^eit, —,pl.—en, affair. Sln'genebm, ad;., agreeable, pleasant. Sag Sln'geftc^t, —eS, pi. —ev, face, countenance. 2tn'ge)ic^t§,j3re/>., in view of. Sie Slngft, —, pi. Sleng'ften, anxiety, fear, anguish, terror. Slengft'íid», adj., anxious. [ne. Sln'^aíten, v. ir., to hold fast, contin- Sln'ljeben, v. intr., to begin, commence ; V. tr., to lift up, raise. Ser Sln'fer, —8, pi. —, anchor. Sie Sin'ferner, anchor-watch. Stn'Kagen, v. tr., accuse, charge. Sln'îommen, v. ir. intr., to arrive. Sn'íünben, an'tünbigen, v. tr., to pro¬ claim, announce, publish. Sie Sin'fünft, —, arrival. Sln'lac^cn, v, intr., to smile or laugh at. Sic Sln'lcifyc, —, pi. —n, loan. Sln'ne^men, v. ir. tr., to accept; v. refl. to interest one's self, take interest. Sln'reben, v. tr., to accost, address. Sie Sln'rebe, —,pl. —, address. Sln'riibren, v. tr., to touch. Sln'fc^affcn, v. tr., procure, obtain, get. Sln'fdiauen, v. tr., to view, to look at. Sln'fc^en, v. ir. tr., to viçjv, behold. Sie Sln'fid;t,—, pl.—tw, opinion, point of view. Sln'ff)re(i^en, v. ir. tr., to address. Sinen urn ettuaS an'fprecfien, to ask or claim a thing of a person. Ser Sluö'fpruc^. —eô, pl. »fprüc^e, claim. Sie Sin'[tait,—,pl. —n, preparation. establishment. Slnftatt',/'re/>. (with gen.), instead of; conj., instead of. Sln'ftcffen, v. tr., to hit against, strike. Ser Sln'ftob, —eê, pl. Sln'ftöße, hit, blow, offense. Sln'ftrengen, v. tr., to exert, strain. Sln'ftrengenb, adj., exhausting. Sie Sln'ftrengung, —, exertion. Ser Slntiqnar', —S, pi. —e, dealer in second-hand books ; Slntiqnar'» (Syemplar', second-hand copy. Sln't^iirmen, v. intr., to rise like tow¬ ers (overtower). Sie Slnt'mort, —, ¡d. —en, answer. Slnt'irorten, v. intr., to answer. Sln'iradifen, v. intr., to grow on. Sie Sln'rceifung, ——en, note. Sie Sln'menbung, —, application. Sln'tnefenb, adj., present. Stn'3eigen, v. tr., to notify, advertise. Sie Sln'jeige, —, jjI. —u, adver¬ tisement. Sln'jie^en, v. ir. tr., to draw on, to at¬ tract, interest, to put on. Ser Sln'jug, suit of clothes. Ser Sl'pfel, —§, pl. Sle'pfel, apple. Ser Sl'pfetoein, cider. [shop. Sie Slpotbe'fe,—,pl. —n, apothecai-j Ser Slpot^e'fer, apothecary. Sie Slr'beit, —, pi. —en, labor, work. Slr'beiten, v. intr., to labor, work. Ser Slr'beiter, laborer. Slr'beitfam, adj., laborious. Ser Slprir, —§, April. Sic Slrd^äologie', —, archaiology. 2lrm, adj., poor. Sic îtr'mnt^,—, poverty. Ser 2lrm, —eö, pl. —e, arm. 438 VOOABÜLAEY. £)cr Sler'meí, —?>,pl. —, sleeve. 5Die Strmee', —, pl. Slrme'en, army. „ Slrt, —, pi. —en, species, kind, way, nature. 5ir'tig, adj., of a kind, agi-eeable. (Sin ar'tigea Äinb, a well-behaved child. 2)er Sírti'Íeí, —^,pl. —, article. SDte Sirjnei', —, pi. —en, medicine. „ 2I'id;c, —, ashes. „ Slflronomie', —, astronomy. ®er Siftronom', —en, astronomer. Stftrono'mifc^, astronomical. ®cr 21't^cm, —g, breath, respiration. 3it^'men, v. tr., to breathe. „ 5ít'ía8, —feg, pl. —íe, satin. 2ÍU(^, conj., also, too, even. 2íuf, prep., on, upon, at, to, towards ; auf einmal, all at once, at once ; auf ba^, c., so that, in order that. 2ínf'6íüf)en, v. intr., to expand, to blossom. [in succession. Slufeiuau'ber, adv., one after another, 2)ev Slnf enthalt, —g, stay, sojourn, abode. [the dead. Sluf'erftefieu, v. ir. intr., to rise from 2)ie Sluf'erfie^ung, —, resurrection. Síuf'faííeub, adj., striking, strange. 2)ie Stuf'gabe, —, pi. —n, exercise. S)er 5inf'gang, —t^,pl. =gänge, rising. Slnf'geben, w. ir. tr., to give up, to sur¬ render. [stay. Slnffialten, v. ir. refi., to stop, delay, 2lnf'f)ören, v. intr., to cease, discon¬ tinue. 2)ie Slnflage, —, pi. —n, edition. Sluf'mac^en, to open, ittuf'merien, v. tr., to observe, notice. Síuf'merífam, adj., attentive. Slnf'merîfamîeit, —, attention. Ste Slufobferung, —, sacrifice, ittnf'red^t, upright, erect. Ülnf'regen, v. tr., to excite. 2)er Sluf'ruf, —g, call, appeal, sum¬ mon. 2tuf'ftef>en, v. ir. intr., to rise up, to rise. ijlnffteigen, v. intr., to mount, ascend. 2luf'tragen, v. tr., to carry up, put on. 2)er Sluf'trag, —eg, pi. »träge, commission. [ken. 5iuf'n)adf)en, v.intr., to wake up, awa- iltufmarten, v. intr., to wait upon. ®inem feine Slnf'martung machen, to pay one's respects to a per- Slnf'mecfen, v. tr., to awaken, [son, 2tuf'jiei;en, v. ir. tr., to draw up, raise up, rear, educate. 2)ag singe, —g, pi. ^en, eye. ®er Sln'genbíicí, moment, [ous. Síu'genblicílic^, adj., instantane- 2)ie Slu'genbraue, —, eyebrow. 3)ag Sin'genleiben,—g, disease of the eyes. Stu'genfc^einlid^, adj., apparent. Ser Slngnft', —g, August. Slug, prep., out, out of, from, of; adv. out, over, at an end, finished. Slng'beffern, v. tr., to mend. Slug'bred^en, v. ir. intr., to break ont. Slug'breiten, v. intr., to spread out, ex¬ pand. [agation. Sie2tug'breitnng,extension,prop- Sie Slng'bauer, —, endurance. Slug'be^nen, v. tr,, to stretch, expand. Sie 3íug'bef>nung, —, expansion. 2Iug'brü(Ien, v. tr., to press out, ex press. [expression. Ser ^Ing'brnd, —eg, pi. »brüdc, SíngbrücE'Iic^, adj., explicit. Siugeinan'ber, adv., asunder, apart. Slug'erliefen (antiquated and irregu¬ lar verT), imperfect aug'erlor, participle aug'crforen), to choose, select. 2lng'füí)ren, v. tr., to execute Sie Slng'filbrung, —, executica Sie Slng'gabe, —, jd. —n, edition. 3lng'geben, v. ir. intr., to go out. Set iKng'gang, —eg, exit. VOCABULARY. 439 ÄUS'^oIten, V. ir. intr., to hold out. S)a8 Slu^'lanb, foreign countries. ïtuâ'Iânbtïc^, adj., foreign. Âuô'ne()men, v. ir. tr., to except. 3luá'ne^tnenb, adv., remarkably. 2)ie 2iu8'iia^me, pi. —n, ex¬ ception. [enough. 9iuS'retc^en, v. intr., suflSce, have Slu8'fí5re(^eit, v. ir. tr., to pronounce, speak out. [tion. 2)ie Síuá'íl^rat^e, —, pronuncia- ^US'fe^en, v. ir. intr., to look out. 2)ie 3lu0'fici^t, —, prospect, view. 2lu'^er^alb,/»rep., outside of, beyond. Síu'^erorbentíid^, adj., extraordinary. SBaar (orbar),ac(;., bare, pure; baarcS ®eib, cash; baare i8eja[)íung, cash payment. S3ar'[u0, adj., barefoot, ©cr S3ad;, —cS, pi. iSa'cbc, brook. 2)te SSade, —, pi. —n, cheek. 95a'(ien, v. tr., to bake. 2)er S3a'der, baker. 3)aS Sab, —es, pi. Sä'bcr, bath, wa¬ tering-place. [bathe. Sa'bert, v. tr., intr., and reß., to jDU Sa^lt, —, pi. —en, the road, way. Ser Sa^n'^of, railroad station. Satb, adv., soon, early. Sai'big adj., early, speedy. Set Sal'fen, —8, pi. —, beam. Ser SaU, —e8, pi. SSl'ie, (l) ball, sphere ; (2) ball, festive dance. Sie Salla'bc, —, pi. —n, ballad. Sa8 Sanb, —e§, pi. Sän'ber, ribbon. Set Sanb, —eS, pi. SSn'be, volume. SSn'bigen, v. tr., to tame. [sive. San'ge, adj., anxious, apprehen- Sie Sanf, —, pi. San'íe, bench, bank. Sie Sauî'note, —,pl. —en, bank¬ note. [banker. Set Sangnier', —8, pi. —8, ©an'iten, v. tr., to banish. Sleu'gcrfl, adv., extremely. 2tu8'jiteííeE, v. tr., to exhibit. Sie 2lu8'fteUung, —, exhibition. 2llt8'ftre(icn, v. tr., to stretch out. Sie éíu8'trocínung, —, drying up. 2lu8'öeriaufen, v. tr., to sell out. ^U8'lt>äi)ien, V. tr., to select. Sie 2íu8'ma^í, —, pl. —en, selection. 2lu8'manbern, v. intr., to emigrate. 2lu8'menbig, adj., from memory, bj heart. 'äin8'jat)ien, v. tr., to pay out. 3iu8'seid?ncn, v. tr., to distinguish. 2iu8'gejeid;net, adj., excellent. Sie Sl^t, —, pi. Siebte, axe, hatchet. Sar, adj. (see baar). Sie Sarntí^er'jigíeit, —, mercy, pity. Ser Saron', —8,^/.—e, baron. Sie Saro'nin,—,pl.—nen, baro¬ ness. Ser 93är, —en,/?/. —en, bear. „ iBart, —e8, pl. ißär'te, beard. Sär'tig, adj., bearded. Sart'ÍD8, adj., beardless. ,, 33a^, —ffe8, pi. îlaffe, bass, base. 35ancn, v. tr., to build, cultivate. Ser ißau'er, —8, pl.—n, peasant. Sie 58äu'erin, peasant woman. Sie S8au'fun[t, —, architecture. Ser ißau'meifter, architect. Ser S3aum,—e8, pl. 33äu'tne, tree. Sa8 iSänm'c^en, —§, small tree. 33aum'íeer, adj., treeless. Sie Sanm'rcotte, —, cotton. 33ear'beiten, v. tr., to work over, revise. Sie 93ear'beitnng, —, revision. 53e'ben, v. intr., to tremble. íBeban'íen, v. reß., to give thanks. 33ebau'em, v. ir., to regret, to pity, ilcbecf'en, v. tr., to cover. 53cben'ien, v. reß., to deliberate. iBebenî'Iid), adj., critical. iBebeni'lid^fcit, anxious thought. 440 VOCABÜLABY. 58cbte'nen, v. tr., to sen-e, use ; v.reß., to lielp one's self. Sefccu'ten, v. intr., to signify, mean. 2)ie Sebeu'tung, —, meaning, iöebeu'teub, adj., important. SSebin'gen, n. tr.,to stipulate, condition. Sie Sßebing'ung, —, condition. S3ebür'fen, v. ir. tr., to need. 33ebürf'tig, adj., needy, wanting. Sßeei'ien, v. reß., to hasten. Sic 2l3ccn'l?igung, —, end, ending. Sie 33ee've, —,pl. —n, berry. SSefe^'Ieu, v. tr., to order, command. Ser S3efe^r, —eê, pl. —e, com¬ mand, [to be. íBefiii'ben, v. ir. refl., to find one's self, SSefiei'jjen, n. îV. rç/7., ) to apply one's SBefleif'figen, r. r^., ) self. 33e[ör'bern, v. tr., to promote. Ser^eför'bercr, —ë, promoter, [self). Sege'ben, v. ir. reß., to betake (one's Sie S3ege'ben^eit, —, pi. —eii, SBegeg'nen, v. ir. tr., to meet, [event. Sie ècgier'be, —, desire, wish. 53egie'rig, adj., desirous, eager. S3egin'neit, v. ir. tr., to begin, com¬ mence. SSeglei'ten, v. tr., to accompany. SBegrei'fen, v. ir. tr., comprehend, un¬ derstand. i8egreif'íid),a(^'., comprehensible. Ser iBegriff, —8, pi. —e, idea, conception. S3egrün'bcn, v. tr., to found, establish. Segril'jien, v. tr., to greet, salute, ©ei^al'tett, v. ir. tr., to retain, keep. Se^ait'bcln, v. tr., to handle, treat. Í8ef;aili)'ten, v. tr., to assert, affirm. S3ei;erfen, v. ir. reß., to help one's self. S3e^üíf'li(h, «(//'., serviceable, con¬ ferring help. iBcben'be, adj., agile, nimble, quick. Sie Sebörbe, —, pl. —n, authority. SQt\,prep., near, at, with, by. Seibe, adj. (pl.), both. Sag SBein, —t^,pl. —e, leg, bone. Sie ¿ein'tíeiíDcr (/)/.},pantaloons, trowsers. Sûë iSei'ípieí, —pl. —e, example. iBci'iiJielëmei'ie, adv., by way of example, ißei'ßen, v. ir. tr., to bite. iSei'^ig, adj., biting. [sist. Sei'ftel^en, v. ir. intr., to stand by, as- Ser SSei'ftanb, —eë, assistance. Sei'ftitnttxen, v. intr., to agree with one, to coincide tvith one's views. iSei'tragen, v. ir. tr., contribute. 53ei'irDeinen, v. intr., to be present at, attend. S3efannt'(/'ú!''í-yi"ombeíen'nen),known Ser or bie iBefann'te, —:t, pi. —n, acquaintance (a person). Sie S3e!annt'í(^aft, acquaintance Seíía'gen, v. reß., to complain. Seiom'nten, v. ir. tr., to get, obtain, procure. [self. Seíüm'ntcni, v. reß., to trouble one's 53ela'gern, r. tr., to besiege, [siege. Sie S3eía'gerung, —, pl. —en, 33elan'fen, v. reß., to amount. 33ele'gen, v. tr., to overlay, cover. Selei'bigen, v. tr., to offend. Sie iBelei'bignng, —, pi. —en, offense, WTong, injury. Seiie'ben, v. intr., to wish, have the kindness, please. SBel'ien, v. intr., to bark. SSetnäd/tigen, v. reß.,} to take posses- S3ctnci'ftcrn, v. reß., i" sion of, seize, get the mastery over. SScnter'fcn, v. tr., to observe, notice. Sie iBemer'íung, —, pl. —n, re¬ mark, obsenation. Sie iBenen'nung, —, naming. S3enö't()igt, adj., in need of, needing. iBeob'acbten, r. tr., to observe, [ous. SSequem', adj., convenient, commodi- S3ereit', adj., ready, prepared. SSercitë', adv., already. VOCABULARY. 441 2)ie SBera't^ung, —,;>L —en, consul¬ tation, council. iBeïau'Oen, v. tr., to rob. 2)er 23erg, —c6, pi. —e, mountain, iöer'gtg, adj., mountainous. S)ie 28evg'fette, —,pl.—it, moun¬ tain range. SaS 33erg'irerf, —eg, pi. —e, mine. 2)er iBevtd;!', —eg, pi. —e, report, notice, advice, iöerübnit', adj., famous, celebrated. 2)ic 53erüb'rung, —, contact. Sefc^äftigen, v. tr., to occupy, busy, employ. 53eic^ei'ben, adj., modest. [ment, ©er ¡öefc^iag', —g, seizure, attach- ißefc^Ue'ßen, v. ir. refl., to conclude, ©er SSefc^luß',—t^,pl. >íc^íü[íe, conclusion. SBefc^rün'ten, v. tr., to limit. Sefci^ret'ben, v. ir. tr., to describe, ©ie i8eíd;rei't)ung, —, pl. —en, description. [scription. Seft^retb'íic^, adj., capable of de- S3e[(bul'bigen, v. tr., to accuse, charge, ©er íBefc^ü'^er, —g, pl. —, protector. S3ef¿^tr>e'ren, v. refl., to complain. Seftn'nen, v. refl., to recollect, collect one's thoughts, deliberate. Sefetj'en, v. tr., to occupy. [tion. ©er 53c[i^', —eg, possession, occupa- S3eion'ber, adj., particular. iBejon'berg, adv., particularly. SBefjcr, bejl (see § 92). iöcftä'tigcn, V. tr., to confirm. 23efte'i;en, v. ir. intr., to consist ; tr., to contest. iBeflei'len, v. tr., to order, engage. Seftim'men, v. tr., to appoint, fix. 33e|u'd^en, v. tr., to visit. ©er SSefud/, —eg, pi. —e, visit. 53ctrad/ten, v. tr., to consider. S3etrüd;t'íid), adj., considerable, ©ie i8etrad;'tung, —, pl. —en, reflection. betreffen, v. ir. tr., to concern. iBetrteb'iam, adj., diligent, ©ie Setrüb'niji, —, pl. —e, sorrow, ©ie iBetrnn'tenbeit, —, drunkenness, ©ag Sett, —eg, pi. —en, bed. ©ag Sett'tud},—eg,pZ. 4ii(bcr, sheet. Set'tein, v. intr., to beg, ask alms, ©er Sett'Ier, —g, pi.—, beggar. Set'telarm, adj., beggarly poor, ©er Set'telftab, —eg, extreme Sebor', conj., before, ere. [poverty, ©ie Setbe'gung, —, pi. —en, motion, exercise. SetDei'jen, v. ir. tr., to prove. [ant. ©er Seinob'ner, —g, pi. —, inhabit- Semnn'bern, v. tr., admire. Sercußt', adj., conscious, known. Sejab'ien, v. tr., to pay. ©ie Segab'iung, —, payment. Sejie'ben,!-. ir. tr., to draw over, enter; refl., to refer. ©ie Sejie'bung, —, relation. Sejwei'feín, v. tr., to doubt, ©ie Si'bel, —, pi. —n, Bible. ©ie Si'beliiberie^ung, translation of the Bible. ©ie Sibliotbei', —, pi. —en, library. ©er Sibíiotbetar', pl. —e, libra- Sieg'fam, ac(/., pliable. [rian. ©ag Sier,—eg, pl. —e, beer. „ Silb, —eg, pl. —er, form, image. Sií'ben, V. tr., to form, shape, cultivate. [zation. ©ie Sil'bnng, —, culture, civili- „ Sil'bungggefcbicbte, history of formation. ©ag Sillet', —g, pî. —e, ticket, note. Sií'íig, arf;., just, reasonable, cheap. Sil'Iigen, v.tr., to approve, gi-ant. ©ie Sil'ligleit, —, cheapness. Sin'ben, v. ir. tr., to bind, tie, fasten, ©ie Sin'be, —,pl. —n, bandage, ©ag Sin'benjort,—g, con junction, ©ie Sir'ne, —, pi. —n, pear. Sin'nen,/>re/)., within (of time). T2 442 VOCABULAEY. ^X^fPrep., adv., and conj., till, until, as far, as to. 53i¿í;ci', adv., hitherto, up to this time, as far, up to. ÜDer 33i'fcí;Df,—(.Q,pL bishop. S3it'ten, V. ir. tr., to request, ask, beg. SBtt'ter, adj., bitter. JBIfl'fen, V. ir. tr. and intr., to blow. SSiaß, adj., pale. [sheet. 2)a6 S3iatt, —eâ, pi. SSÍüt'ter, leaf, SBiau, adj., blue. 2)aS iBlet, —eö, lead. S3iri'ern, adj., leaden, of lead. 2?er iBIei'ftift, —c§, lead-pencil. Siei'ben, v. ir. intr., to remain, stay. ®ev 33itd, —ti,pl. —e, glance, look. S3Unb, ac^'., blind. 2)er ¿ítl?, —e8, pi. —e, lightning. V. intr., to lighten, flash. SSÍÍ^'íd;neIl, adj., quick as a flash of lightning. SSIoß, adj., bare, naked ; adv., only. 33ÍÜ^'en, v. intr., to bloom. 25ie iBIu'ine, —, pi. —n, flower. S)aâ iBIüm'd^en, —floweret. S)er iBíu'menfíor,. —8, field cov¬ ered with flowers. SaS SSiut, —e8, blood. S3iu'tig, adj., bloody. [skin. Sag SBodg'teli, —e8, pi. —e, goat's Ser iBo'ben, —8, pi ¿ö'ben, ground, soil, floor. „ S3o'gen, —8, bow, leaf, sheet. Sie i8ot/ne, —,pl. —n, bean. Sa8 33oot, —e8, pi. Sö'te, boat. Sor'gen, v. tr., to borrow. S3ö'ie, adj., bad, ill, wicked, angry. Ser ¿ö'ietnic^t, —e8,p/. —e, villain, knave. [land. Sa8 S3ra¿^'feíb, —e8, pi. —er, fallow SBra'ten, v. ir. tr., to roast. SBrau'djen, v. tr., to use, need. SBraitn, adj., brown. Srau'i'en, v. intr., to rush, roar. ©re'¿í?en, v. ir. tr., to break. Ser S3ret, —e8, broth. iBreit, adj., broad, wide. Srei'ten, v. refl., to spread, üren'nen, v. ir. tr. and intr., to bum. ißremt'bar, adj., that can be burned. Sa8 ¿reiin'^olj, —e8, firewood. Ser ißrief, —t^,pl. —e, letter. Sie iBrief'marfe, —, ) postage- Ser iBriefftembel, —,1" stamp. „ SSrief'träger,—8,/>/.—, let¬ ter-carrier. 33ring'en, v. ir. tr., to bring. Sa8 S3rob, —, pi. —e, bread, loaf. Sie iBrü'de, —, pl. —n, bridge, [er. Ser 33ru'ber, —8,/>/. érü'ber, broth- ißrü'beriic^, adj., fraternal. Sie ©ruft, —,pl. iBrü'fte, breast, Sa8 33ud^, —e8, pl. Sü't^er, book, squire. Ser 23ucí)'6inber, book-binder. „ i8ucí>'^anbíer, book-seller. Sie S3utí()'í)aiiblung, book-store. „ iBuc^bruderei',printing estab¬ lishment. „ iBucb'bruderîunjî, art of printing. [book. Sa8 iBüc^'íein, —8, pl. —, small Sie iBu'c^e, —, pl. —n, beech. Ser iBudb'fíabe, —it, pl.—n, letter. Sie iBu(í>'ftabenf(^ri^, writing in let¬ ters. Ser iBud^'tneijen, —8, buckwheat. I, iBunb, —e8, pi. —e, bundle, league, confederacy. r, Sun'be8genog, —en, pi—n, ally. Sie 93un'be8feftung .fortification of the (German) Confederation. iBunt, adj., gay, bright and varie¬ gated. Sie Surg, —, pi —en, castle. Ser Sür'ger, —8, pl. —, citizen. Sür'geríicb, adj., civil, as a citi- Sie Sut'tcr, —, butter. [zen. Sa8 Sut'terbrob, bread and but ter. VOCABULARY. 44b S)er Saíiñnifí', —en, pi.—en, calvinist rf Santon', —pl. —e, canton. 2)aê Sapttal', —pi. —ien, capital (money) ; pi. Sa^itä'ler, capital (of a pillar). 3)ie Sc'fccr, —, pi.—n, cedar. SercnionicU', adj., ceremonial, [acter. Ser Sbaiat'ter, —S, pl. —te're, char- „ SbiiïÎcitan', —pl.—e, charlatan „ Sbef,—^,pl-—chief,principal. S)ic Êbitnii'f —, chemistry, [singers. S)er Sbor, —e§, ¡A. Sböre, chorus of S)a, adv., there, here, then, now; conj., as, when. 2)abei', aáo.,thereby,by that,by them. 2)a8 Sacb, —eê, pl. ¿ä'tbcr, roof. 35aburcb', orfr.,thereby, by that means 2)afür', adv., for or instead of this or that. S)age'gen, adv., against that, 2)abcr', adv., thence, from thence. 35abct', conj., thence, for that reason, therefore. 3)a'bin, adv., thither, so far; babtn', away, gone. SJa'niaiS, adv., then, at that time. 2)ie ®a'me, —,pl.—n, lady, woman. Sainit', arfp.. therewith, with it, with that; conj., that, in order that. —eS, steam, vapor. S)aS 2)ainl5Î'boot, steam-boat. 2)er ®am'i)fet,—%,pl.—,steamer „ boiler, [gine. 3)ic jDam|5f'maid)inc, steam-en- „ SamlJf'mübíe, steam-mill. 2)a8 25aml)t'idbiff, steam-boat. Í5)et 2)anf,—eS, thanks, gratitude, re- 35an!'bar, adj., thankful, [ward. SDann, adv., then, at that time ; bann unb wann, now and then. SDaran', adv., thereon, on it, in it. 2)aS Sbor, —e§, pi. Sbo'rc, choir (a place in church for singers). S)er Sbrift, —en, pi. —en, Christian. 2)aê Sbri'ftentbum, —ê, Christianity, Slaj'ftf^, adj., classical. 2)aâ Soncert', —e§, pi. —e, concert. Sibil', adj., civil. S)a8 Soupé, —8, pl. —8, coupé, divi¬ sion of a coach or railroad car. ®a8 Sonrant', —e8, currency. 2)ie Sonfi'ne, —, pi. —n, cousin. 2)arauf, adv., thereupon, on that, after that. [from that. ®arau8', adv., thence, therefrom, 2)ar'bieten, v. ir. tr., to offer, [sent. 2)av'ftelien, v. tr., to produce, repre- 2)arnacb', adv., according to that, ©arnie'berliegen, v. intr., to lie sick. 2)arü'ber, adv., thereupon, about that. 2)arum' adv., therefore, for that. 2)a8 (see ber). ®a§, conj., that, in order that. 2)ie ©atl'ev, —, duration of time. 2)an'ern, v. intr., to endure, last. S)au'evbaft, adj., durable. 2)abon', a Jr., thereof, therefrom, of it. ©ajn', adv., thereto, in addition to. jDer ®ieb'ftabl, —8, pi. =ftable, theft. ®ecf en, v. tr., to cover. [let. S)er 2)eci'el, —8, pi. —, cover- SDic 2)eci'e, —, pi.—n, coverlet, blanket. [a ship). ®a8 2)e(f, —e8, pi.—e, deck (of 3)ein, pron,, thy (§ 109). 2)ie 2)e'tnntb, —, humility, meekness. iDcn'îen, v. tr. and intr., to think. 2)enî'bar, adj. (thinkable). ®enn, conj., for, because, then, than. 2)en'nod;, conj., yet, however, still. 3)ic S)e^)c'ícbe, —, jd. —n, dispatch. 444 VOCABULARY. Ser, bte, baS, art., the; dem. pron. (§111, 2), this, that; rel. pron. (§ 114, 2), who, which, what. Serglci'djeu, «0?/. inded., such as that or those. Serjc'ntge, dem. pron. that(§ 111, 3). Serferbe, dem. pron. (§ 111, 4). Seê'^alb or befj'Ijalb, conj. ) there- Seê'iregen or be^'rcegen, > fore. Se'fto, conj. (so much the). Seut'ltd;, adj., plain. Sic^'ten, V. intr., to make poetry. Ser Sid/ter, —8, pl. —, poet. „ Sid/ter^rfl, prince of poets. Sidj'terifd;, adj., poetic. Sie Si(^t'fünft, —, poetry. Sie Sic^'tung, —,pl. —en, poem Stci, adj., thick. Ser Sieb, —e8, pl. —c, thief, [theft. Ser Sieb'ftaí)!, —8, pl. ^tü^íe, Sie'nen, v. tr., to seiwe. Ser Sie'ner, —8, pi.—, servant. „ Sienft, —e8, pi.—e, service. Sie'fer,jaron., this, that. Sie8'ieit, ^rep., on this side of. Sie8'ieit8, adv., on this side. Sie Sin'te, —, pi. —n, Ink. Sireft', adj., direct. [director. Ser Siref'tor, —8, pi. 4o'ren, Ser Si8fon'to, —8, discount. £)o(^, conj., yet, however. Ser Softer, —8, pl. «to'ren, doctor. „ Soícb, — e8,pZ.—e, dagger. n Som,—(Q,pl.—e, cathedral. „ Son'ner, —8, pl. —, thunder. Son'nern, v. intr., to thunder. Soí)'í3eít, arf? , doubled, double. Sie ßb'be, —, pl. —n, ebb, ebb tide. S'ben, ac?/.,even, level; a(fo.,just, ex- @(i)t, adj., genuine, pure, fast, [actly. 6'bel, adj., noble, honorable. Ser ©'beimann, —e9,pl. —lente, nobleman. Sa8 Serf, —e§,pl. Sör'fer, village. Sa8 Sörf'djen, —8, hamlet. Ser Sorti,—eë,pl. —en, thorns. Sort, adv., yonder, there. Sa8 Sra'ma, —ê,pl. Sra'men, drama Ser Srama'titer,—8, dramatist. Srama'tifdj, acO'., dramatic. Ser Srang, —e8, impulse, pressure. Srei, three. Srei'^ig, thirty. ©in Srei'giger,—8, a man be¬ tween thirty and forty years old. [jears. Srei'^ig jährig, ad/., lasting thirty Srei'ge^n, thirteen. Srif te, third. Sa8 Srif tel, —8, third part. Sre'fd^en, v. ir. tr., to thresh. Sie Sro'^nng, —,pl. —en, menace. Ser Srná,—e8,/>£. Srif cíe, pressure. Srn'cfen, v. tr., to print. Sn, pron., thou. Ser Snft —e8, pi. Siif'te, fragrance. Sie Sü'ne, —, pl. —n, down. Sniftel, adj., dark. Snn'íeíblan, adj., deep blue. Snr^,prep., through, by means of. Snrc^anS', fléin., throughout, by all means. [through. Snrti^'führen, v. tr., to carry Ser Snrcb'gang,passage through. Snrcb'reifen, v. tr., to traverse. Snrtb'fc^en, v. ir. tr., to look * through. Ser Snrdj'fdjnitt, —c8, average. Ser Snrft, —e8, thirst. Sa8 Su^'enb, —8, pi. —e, dozen. ©'befmiit^ig, adj., noble hearted. Ser ©'beljtesn, —c8, pi.—e, precious ©'^e, adv., ere, before. [stone. Sie ©b're, —, pi. —n, honor, good ©(I'ren, v. iV., to honor, [name, ©b'rfnboli, (úij.t honorable. VOCABULARY. 445 adj., honorable. 2)te honesty. (S^r'IoS, adj., without honor. 2)er S^r'geij, —cS, ambition. (Si, —eê, pl. —er, egg. Ser (Si'erfud^en, omelet. 2)te Si'c^c, —, pi. —n, oak. 1)er ©b, —e§, pi. —e, oath. f, ©i'ier, —8, zeal, ardor. ©if'rtij, adj., zealous. Si'gen, Of//., own. ©i'gentlid^, adj., proper, real; adv., strictly speaking. !S)ie ©i'fc, —, haste. ©in, art. (§ 54), a, an ; num. (§ 89), one; adv., in. [each other, ©inan'bcr, pron., one another, 3)ie ©in'biibung, —, imagination, ©in'brängen, v. intr., to press in. ©inerlei', indecl. adj., of one kind, in- ©in'fai^, adj., simple, plain, [diiferent. 2)er ©in'flug, —e§, pi. —fíüffe, influ- „ ©in'gang,—eg, entrance, [ence. ©in'gebenî, adj., mindfnll, remember- ©i'niger, pron., some, any. [ing. S)ag ©in'iommen, —g, income. ©in'Iaben, v. ir. tr., to innate, [tion. S)ic ©in'iabung, —, pi. —en, invita- ©in'tnal, adv., once. ©in'jjacien, v. tr., to pack up. ©in'jam, adj., solitarj', secluded. S)ie ©in'jamîeit, —, solitude, se¬ clusion. ©in'jc^Iießen, v. ir. tr., to inclose, ©in'jcjträntcn, v. tr., to limit, restrict, ©in'fbrcibcn, v. ir. ir.,to writedown, ©in'jejien, v.ir. tr., to perceive.[enter, ©in [teilen, v. refl., to appear (at the appointed time). Sin'ftimmig, adj., unanimous. S)er ©in'tritt, —eg, pi. —e, entrance, ©in'mirfen, v. tr., to influence. 2)ie ©in'mirtung, —,pl. —en, in¬ fluence. [ant. SDer ©in'mojiner, —g, pi. —, inhabit- ©in'geln, adj., single, individunL ©in'jig, adj., sole, simple. 2)ag ©ig, —eg, ice. 2)er ©ig'bar, polar bear. 2)ag ©i'fen, —g, iron. ©i'jern, at?;'., of iron. [road. 2)ie ©i'jenba^n,—,pl.—en, rail- Ser ©i'jenbaj)njaj)rj)ían, raüroad ©i'íeí, rtû([., vain, idle. [time-table. Sie ©i'telîeit, —, vanity. ©'íenb, adj., miserable. Sie ©iegie', —, pl. ©legi'en, elegy. ©If, eleven. Sie ©ríe, —, pl. —n, ell. Sie ©l'tern (pl.), parents, ©nijjfang'en, v. ir. tr., to receive. Ser ©mj:fang'fd;ein, receipt, ©mjjjeb'íen, v. ir. tr., to recommend. Sie ©mpje^'íung, —, pl. —en, recommendation, ©mjjftn'ben,-?;. ir. tr., to perceive, feel. ©mj>finb'Ii(^, adj., sensitive. ©mjJOr', adv., on high, above. Sie ©mjjö'rnng, —, pl. —en, conspir¬ acy, revolt. Sag ©n'be,—^,pl. —n, end. ©n'ben, v. intr., to end. ©nb'Iic^, adj., final. ©ng or eng e, adj., narrow, close. Ser ©ng'el, —g, pi. —, angel. „ ©n'iel, —^,pl-—, grandson. Sie ©n'felin, —, pi. —nen, grand¬ daughter. [along without, ©ntbeb'rcn, v.tr., to dispense with, get ©ntbin'ben, v. ir. tr., to unbind, re¬ lease. ©ntbed'en, v. tr., to uncover, discover. Sie ©ntbcd'ung, —, pi. —en, discovery. [tance), ©ntfer'nen, v. tr., to remove (to a dis- ©ntjernt', adj., distant, removed. ®nt[íicí;'en, v. ir. int^., to escape, ©ntge'gcn, prep., and adv., against, contrary to, opposed to, toward, ©ntge'genge^en, to go to meet. 446 VOCABULARY. Gnt^e'genîontmen, to come to meet. (Satge'geiTfe^en, to oppose. (Sntge'£)en, v. ir. intr., to escape, ©nt^al'teu, v. ir. tr., to contain. Sntlje'ben, v. ir. tr., to take away, dis¬ charge from. f cliarge. (Sntíaí'jeit, v. ir. tr., to dismiss, dis- (Sntie^'nen, v. tr., to borrow. (£ntra'ti>en, v. tr., to dispense with. (Sntfc^ei'ben, v. ir. tr., to decide. 6ntfd;ic'ben, adj., decided. (Síttjáíie'^en, v. ir. reß., to decide. 2)er (Sntfd^iu^', —eg, pi. —itffe, decision. ©ntic^urbigen, v. tr., to excuse. (Sntfin'nen, v. reß., to recollect. @nt|et'jen, v. tr., to remove. (Sntfpre'd^en, v. ir. tr., to correspond. Sntfte'i)en, v. ir. intr., to arise, spring, originate, descend from. 2)te ©ntfte^'ung, —, source, formation ßnttüe'ber, conj., either. (Snttner'fen, r.iV.ir., to project, design. Ser ©ntwurf, —eg, pi. 'irilvfe, plan, GntWid'ein, r. reß., to develop, [design. Éntjirei'en, v. reß., to fall out with each other. Sie (äiJo'^e, —, pl.—n, epoch. Sag —IP^- Ë'^Jen, epic poem. Sie @quií)a'ge, —, pl. —n, equipage, iS.X,pron., he. [carriage. (Stbar'men, v. reß., to pity, have mercy tSrhíicí'en, v. tr., to see. Sie (Srb'l'e, —, pi. —en, pea. „ (Sr'be, —, pi.—n, earth. „ (Srb'beere,—,/;/. ^n, strawberry Sag (Srb'beben,—^,pl.—, earthquake (Srbni'ben, v. tr., to suffer. (Sreig'nen, v. reß., to take place. Sag Sreig'niß, —eg,p/.—e, event (Srfai)'ren, v. ir. tr., to experience. Sie èrfa^'rung, —, pl. —en, ex¬ perience. Srfin'ben, v. ir. tr., to invent. [or. Ser Srfinber,—S.f/. —, invent- Sic Srfin'bung, —, pi.—cn, in« vention. Ser Srfolg', —t^,pl. —e, success. (Srfren'en, v. reß., to rejoice over, pes« sess. [ment. Sie ©rfiil'lung, —, pl. —cn, fulfill- (Srge'ben, v. ir. intr., to overtake, hap¬ pen ; reß., to surrender. Êrge'ben, adj., obedient. (ärgrei'fen, v. ir. tr., to lay hold on, (Sr(;a'ben, adj., sublime. [seize. (Sr^al'ten, v. ir. tr., to receive. Gri)e'beu, v. ir. reß., to rise, spread. (Sr^öb'en, v. tr., to raise, exalt. @rin'nem, v. reß., to remember. Sic èrin'nerung, —, pl. —en, remembrance. [memory. Srin'neríici^, adj., present to the Srial'ten, v. reß., to take cold. [ing). (Srfäm'^fen, v. tr., to gain (by fight- (Srîen'nen, v. ir. tr., recognize, ©rilä'ren, v. tr., to explain. (Srfíür'íic^, adj., explicable. Sic (Srllä'rung, —, pl.—ta, ejfr planation. (Sríau'ben, v. tr., to allow, permit, (grie'gen, v. tr., to kill. Sic (Srleid^'terung, —, pl.—ta, relief. Sriie'gen, v. ir. intr., to sink. (Sriö'fen, v. tr., to deliver, redeem. (Srman'gein, v. intr., to be in want. (Srmor'ben, v. tr., to murder, (ärnä^'ren, v. tr., to support, ©rnen'nen, v. ir. tr., to appoint. (Srnjt, adj., earnest. Sic Œrn'te, —, pl. —n, harvest (Srn'tCu, or ernbten, v. tr., to reap. Sic ßro'bernng, —, conquest. Sic Êrricb'lnng, —, erection, founding ©rrin'gen, r. tr., to gain (by force). (Srfc^ei'nen, v. ir. intr., to appear. Sic Srid;ei'nnng, —, pi. —ei^ appearance. (Srfc^ie'^en, r. ir. tr., to shoot. Svje'^en, v. ir. tr., to see, find out. VOCABULARY. 44T (Srft,first(aífy., only) ; erflenÔ, firstly. Srjîau'uen, v. tr., to astonish. ©rftaun'iic^, adj., astonishing. Srfie^'eil, v. ir. intr., to arise. (Srto^'pen, v. tr., to catch, surpi-ise. (Srt^ei'Ien, v tr., to communicate. (Srtta'gen, v. ir. tr., to bear, suffer. 6ri»ac^'fen, v. ir. intr., to grow up. (äriuad^'ieu, adj., adult. (SrtDü^'íen, v. tr., to choose. (SrtDÜ^'nen, v. tr., to mention. (Srinar'ten, v. tr., to await. Set (SrtDerb', —e§, business, gain. (Srinte'bern, v. intr., to reply. Sie ga'beí,—,pl. —n, fable. ^a'beliiaft, adj., fabulous. Sie gabrif, —, pi.—en, manufactory. Çaçoitnirt', part., figured (of cloths). Çâ'^ig, adj., capable, fit, apt. [eut. Sie gä'i>igieit, —, capability, tal- Sic Ça^'ne, —, pl. —n, flag, banner, gal^'ren, v. ir. tr., to travel, ride. Sic ga^rt, —, pi. —en, journey. Sa§ ga^rgelb, fare, toll, tjai'len, v. ir. intr., to fall. [case. Set —eS, pi. Ç^CÎe, fall, Sie gall'fud^t, —, epilepsy. adj., false. Sie gíinti'íie, —,pl. —n, family, gan'gen, v. ir. tr., to catch. Sie gar'be, —, pi. —n, color. Sa« ga§, —e«, pi. gai'jer, cask. adv., almost, nearly. ged;'ten, v. ir. intr., to fight, fence. Sie ge'bet, —, pl. —n, feather, pen. Sa« g^'betmeffer, penknife. Sie gee, —, pi. —n, fairy. Sa« ge'eníanb, fairyland. geí;'íen, v. intr., to fail, miss. Set get/let,—8,pi.—,fault, mistake, geil, adj., for sale, gein, adj., fine. Set geinb,—e8,jo/. —c, enemy. (Stgä^'ien, V. tr., to relate. Set étj'matíd;alí, —e«, pl. sfc^iäQe, ®«,/iron., it. [lord high marshal. Sí'íen, V. ir. tr., to eat. Set Êj'fig, —«, vinegar. (St'Iid;,/jron., some, any. [tiling. ßt'rca«, indecl. pron., something, any Sie ©tgmologie', —, etymology. @u'et, pron., your. (gnange'Iifd;, adj., evangelical. (S'lnig, adj., eternal. Sie è'itigfeit, —, eternity. Sa« (g^eml^Ut',-«,/?/. —c, copy. Sie @;çi[tenj', —, existence. geinb'íic^, adj., hostile. Sa« gelb, —ti, pl. —et, field, ground. Ser gelb'^ett, commander-in-' chief. r; gelb'matfc^alí, field-marshah gei'etíic^, adj., solemn. Sa« geïï, —e«, pl. —e, skin, hide. Ser gel'ien, —e«, pl. —en, rock, cliff. Sa« gen'ftet, —i,pl. —n, window. Set gelb'jug, campaign. Sie ge'tien {pl.), vacation, gern, adj., far, distant. Sie get'ue, —, distance, get'tigen, v.tr., to prepare, make ready get'tig, adj., ready, prepared, done. geHtittf to chain, gejl, adj., fast, fixed, permanent. Set geft'tag, festival day. Siegeft'jlimmnng',festive feeling Sic ge'ftung, —, pi. —cn, castle, fortress, stronghold. Sa« ge'ftung«inerî, fortification. Sa« geu'et, —«, pl. —, fire. Sie gcu'et«btnnft,—, pl. btünfte, conflagration, geu'etfefî, adj., fire-proof. Sa« geu'ettoí)t,gun, rifle. Sie geu'etme^t, —, fire-company Ser gia'íet, —«, —, hackney-coach 448 vocAB 2)a8 5ie'6er, —§, pi. —, fever. Çigilr'Uc^, adj., figurative, gin'ben, v. ir. tr., to find. 2)er ging'er, —i, pi. —, finger. 2)er ging'er(;ut, thimble, gm'[ter, adj., dark, obscure. 2)er —e«, pi. —e, fish. gi'fc^en, V. intr., to fish. 2)er gi'fc^er, —ê, fisherman. gla(^, adj., flat, plain. S)te glä'c^e, —, pl. —n, surface. 2)te glam'me, —, pi. —n, flame. „ gla'fc^e, —t,pl. —n, flask, bottle, gle^'ten, v. ir. int., to twist, braid. 2)aê gíeifd;, —e6, flesh, meat. 2)er glei'fc^er, —§, pi. —, butcher 2)er gictß, —cê, diligence, industry. giei'^ig, adj., industrious, giie'gen, v. ir. intr., to fly. giie'ßen, v. ir. intr., to flow, glott, adj., afloat. 35te giud)t, —, flight. glüc^'ttg, adj., fleeting, rapid. $er gíüd?t'íing, —eêi, j>l.—e, fu- 2)et glü'geí, —6, pl.—, wing, [gitive. „ giu§, —cd, pl. gíüf'fc, river. S)aê gíüjj'cbcn, —Q,pl.—, rivulet. 2)te gíutb,—,pl.—en, tide, high tide, gol'gen, v. intr., to follow, [quence. S)te goi'ge, —, pi. —n, conse- golge leiften, to comply with, goíg'íid;, adv., consequently, gorbern, v. tr., to demand. 2)te gorel'ie, —, pi. —n, trout. 2)te gorm, —, pi. —en, form. 2)aS gormat', —ti,pl. —e, size and shape (of a book), gor'fc^en, v. tr., to investigate. 2)te gor'id;ung, —, pi. —en, in¬ vestigation, gort, adj., forth, away, gone, off. gort'fabren, v. ir. intr., to continue. S)er gort'fd^ritt, —t^,pl.—e, progress gort'lt>ä[;renb, adv., continually. £ite gradjt, pi. —en, freight, cargo. 2)er gract, —eS, pi. —c (and gratíe)^ dress coat, gra'gen, v. ir. tr., to ask. S)ie gra'ge, —,pl. —n, question, granïi'ren, v. tr., to prepay, gran'fo, adv., post-paid, S)te gran, ;—, pi. —en, woman, tvife, lady (Madame, Mrs.). [(Miss), 2)a6 gräu'iein,—^,pl.—, young lady grei, adj., free. 2)ie grei'()ett, —, freedom, grei'[precien, to acquit, gremb, adj., foreign, strange. Sad gremb'njort, foreign word. Sie greu'be,—, pi.—n, joy, pleasure, greu'en, v. refl., to rejoice, be glad. Ser greunb, —c§, pi. —e, friend. Sie greunb'in, —, pi. —nen, friend. greunb'lic^, adj., friendly, kind. Sie grennb'[d)ajt, —, friendship, grennb'fd^aftlic^, adj., friendly. Ser grie'be, orgrie'ben,—end, peace. Ser grieb'rid)db'or, —d, pl.—, Fred¬ eric d'or. grie'ren, v. ir. tr., and intr., to freeze, grifc^, adj., fresh. [ness. Sie gri'î^e, —, freshness, liveli- gro^, adj., happy, joyous, glad, gromm, adj., pious. Sie grud^t, —, pi. griid/te, fruit. gruc^t'har, adj., fruitful, grilf), adj., early, in the morning. Ser grü^'íing,—ed,;^í.—e,spring Sad grü^'ia^r, spring. grit'()er, adv., formerly. Sad grüí/ftüd, —ed, breakfast. grill)'[tilden, v. intr., to breakfast Ser grill/gng, early train. Ser gud;d, —ed,;^/. gild/je, fox. gilf)'Ien, V. tr., to feel, gill/ren, v. tr., to guide, lead, conduct. Sie gill'le, —, fulness, gill'len, V. tr., to fill, gitni, five. VOCABULARY. 449 §ür, prep., for, in favor of, instead of. SaS giir'lnort, pronoun. 2)ie gurc^t, —, feat. gilrdj'teil, V. tr., to fear, gürc^'terlid;, adj., fearful, gurdjt'fam, adj., fearful. 2)te @a'te, —, pi. —n, gift. r; ©a'bel, —, pi. —n, fork. [bet. ®er ©al'geii, —s, pi.—, gallows, gib- r @ang, —e§, pi. ©än'gc, going, walking. ©ang'bar, adj., passable. S)ie ©anS, —,pl. ©an'fe, goose. 2)cr ©änje'fici, goose-quill, ©anj, adj., whole, entire, complete ; adv., quite, entirely, wholly. ©an'jeit, on the whole, ©üllj'ítc^, ac^'., entire. ©ar, adj., finished, ready, done; adv., quite, very, at all. ©arn, —pi. —e, yam. iS)te ©arnt'rung, —, trimming. Ser ©ar'ten, —^,pl. ©arten, garden. Ser ©ärt'ner,—,garden- SaS ©a8, —eê, pl. —e, gas. [er. Sie ©äffe, —, pl.—n, street, lane. Ser ©a[t, —e§, pl. ©ä'fte, guest. Sag ©aft'fjauö,'^ hotel, inn, pub- Ser ©aft'i)o[, j lie house. Sie ©at'tung, —, pi. —en, sort, spe¬ cies, kind. ©ebä'ren, v. ir. intr., to bear, give birth to. [edifice. Sag ©ebäit'bc,—eg, pi. —, building, ©e'ben, v. ir. tr., to give. Ser ©e'ber, —g, pi. —, giver, ©ebil'bet, adj., cultivated, refined. Sag ©ebirg' or ©ebir'ge, —^,pl. —e, mountain range, mountainous country. ©ebo'ren {part, of geBÄ'ren), born. Ser ©ebrand;', —t^,pl. ©ebrdu'd;e, use, custom. Ser gürfl, —en, pl. —en, prince. Sie gürft'in, pl. —nen, princess. Ser gu^, —eg, pl. güße, foot. Sag gnt'ter, —Q,pl. —, lining, giit'tern, to line. Sie ©ebrii'bcr, {pl.), brothers, breth- ©ebil^'ren, v. intr., to be due. [ren. Sie ©ebnrt', —, birth. Ser ©eburtg'tog, birthday, ©ebei'^en, v. ir. intr., to thrive, grow, ©eben'fen, v. ir. intr., to be mindful, remember. Ser ©ebení'tag, memorable day. „ ©eban'ie, —ng, pi. -^n, thought. Sag ©ebäc^t'ni§, —eg, memory. Sag ©ebicbt', —eg, pi. —e, poem. „ ©ebrän'ge, —eg, pi. —e, thi-ong, Sie ©ebníb', —, patience. [crowd. f, ©efa[)r', —, pi. —en, danger. ©efal'Ien, v. ir. intr., to please. ©efäi'iig, adj., pleasing, agreea¬ ble, courteous. ©e[äi'iigft, adv. (if you please). Ser ©efan'gene, —n,pl.—n, prisoner-, captive. Sag ©efang'niÍ3, —eg, pi.—e, prison. „ ©eiol'ge,—g, retinue, consequen- „ ©efror'ne, —n, ice-cream, [ces. „ ©efilí;!', —eg, pl. —e, feeling, sense. ©e'gen,/>rep., against, toward. ©egenü'ber, opposite to. Sie ©e'genb, —, pi. —en, region. Sag ©e'gengift, antidote. Ser ©e'genjalj, contrariety, contrast. Ser ©e'genfd^lag, blow in return. Ser ©e'genftanb, —eg,;, pi. —, vegetables, greens. f, ©emütí/, —eê, pl. —er, mind, soul, heart, nature, mood. Sie @eraüt(;a'[timntung, —, temper, disposition of mind, [mentioned. ®enannt'(if>«ri.of nen'nen), ad;.,above @enaw',a^'., exact, close. Ser ©enerar, —^,pl. —e, general, ©ene'ien, u. ir. intr., to recover, ©enic'ßen, v. ir. ir., to enjoy, ©enng',;>ron. iWeci and ada., enough, ©era'bc, adj., straight, direct ; adv., exactly, just. ©erec^t', adj., just, righteous, [tence. Sa8 ©eridjt', —e8,p/. —e, court, sen- ©ern, adv., willingly, gladly, cheer¬ fully ; gern baben, to like. Ser ©ejang', —i^,pl. @eîdng'e,song. Sa6 ©ejcbäft', —cS, pi. —e ."business, occupation, trade. ©ejd^e'ben, v. ir. tr. (impers.), to bap- pen, take place, occur. Sie ©efcbicb'te, —, pi. —n, history, story. [historian. Ser@eid;icbtê'icbreiber,—^,pl.—, Sa§ ©ejibenf, —t^,pl. —e, nreseut. „ ©ejcblecbt', —ed, pi. —er sex, gender, race. Ser ©ejc^matf', —d, taste. Sad ©ejdbrei', —ed, clamor, cry. [leiy. „ ©ejcbii^', —ed, pi. —e, gun, artil- Sie ©ejd^ini'fter (pl.), brothers and sisters. „ ©efeíl'iíbí'ít, —, pl- —in, society. Sad ©efe^', —ed, pi. —c, law. ©efe^'gebenb, adj., legislative. Ser ©eje^'geber, —d, lawgiver. „ ©efic^t, —eS, pi- —tx, sight, face. „ ©efljenft', —tê,pl.—tx, spectre. Sie ©eftaít', —, pl. —en, form, shape, figure, stature. [formation. Sie ©eflal'tung, —, moulding, ©eftat'ten, v. tr., to allow. ©e'ftitn, adv., yesterday. ©e'ftrig, adj., of yesterday, ©ejnnb', adj., healthy. Sic ©efnnb'beit, —, health, ©etoabr', adj., aware of, preceiving. ©etnäb'ren, v. tr., to procure, give. Sie ©etualt', —, power^ violence. ©etDait'jam, adj. j-sdolent, forcible, ©etnanbt' (part, from TOenben), adj., quick, active, dexterous, ©etbär'tig, adj., waiting, expecting. Sad ©einäi'jer, —d, />/. —, waters, flood. Sad @enjid)t', —ed, pi. —e, weight, ©ewin'nen, v. ir. tr., to win, gain, ©einiß', adj., sure, certain. Sad ©eiüij'jen, —d, conscience. ©elDiffenliiatt, adj., conscientious. Sad ©elnit'ter, —d, pi. —, tempest, storm, thunder-storm. YOCAbULARY. 451 eit, —, custom. ©eWÖbn'iid;, adj., customary, ©elüölbe, —%,pl.—u,arch, vault Sie @td;t, —, gout. ©tc'^en, u. ir. tr., to pour. 2)ie ©ift, —, pi. —en, gift, dowry. j£)a8 @tft, —, pi. —e, poison. 2)er —%,pl.—, summit, peak, ©íün'jen, u. ir. intr., to glitter, shine. £)a« ©lag, —eg, pi. ©lä'jer, glass. 2)ie ©lag'jc^eibe,—,pane of glass. „ ©lag'jc^etbe,—e,brokenglass ®et ©tau'k, -uy 2)er ©lau'ben, —g,) ©lau'ben, v. tr., to believe, ©let^, adj., like, equal, level, even; adv., immediately. 3)ev ©leic^'mutl;, equanimity. 2)ag ©leid^'nig, —eg, pi. —e, like¬ ness, comparison, allegory. ©letc^'iam, conj., as it were, as if. ®ie ©loct'e, —, pi. —n, bell, ©ior'retc^, adj., glorious. 2)ag ©ÍÜ¿, —eg, fortune, good luck, ©lüd'íid;, adj., fortunate, happy. 2)er ©tüCÍ'iDUníc^, congratulation 2)ie ©na'be, —, pi. —U, grace, favor. ©nä'btg, adj., gracious, merciful. ®ag ©oib, —eg, gold. ©ol'ben, adj., golden, of gold. @o'tí)tíc^, adj., Gothic. ®ev ©Ott, —eg, pi. ©iitter, God. Ser ©ot'tegbienft, divine worship, ©ra'ben, v. ir. tr., to dig. [grave. Sag ©rab, —eg, pi. ©rä'ber, Ser ©ra'ben,—g, pl. ©rä'ben, Sie ©ru'be,—,p/.—n,hole.[ditch Ser ©rab, —eg, pl. —e, degree. Ser ©rau'el,—ê,pl.—, abomination, horror, horrible crime. Ser ©raf, —en, pi. —en, count. Sic ©ramma'tii,—, grammar, [ical. ©ramntatiia'Iifd;, adj., grammat< Sag ©rag, —eg,p/. ©ra'fer, grass, ©rä^'lid;, adj., hideous, terrible. ©ratuU'ren, v. tr., to congratulate, ©ran, adj., gray. ©rei'fen, v. ir. tr., to grasp, seize. Sie ©ren'ge, —, pi. —n, boundary, limit. Sag ©renj'ianb, boundary-land, ©rob, adj., coarse, rough. Ser ©ro'fd^en, —g, pi. —n, groshen. ©roß, adj., great, large, tall. Sie ©rö'ße, —, size, height. Ser ©roß'toater, grandfather. Sie ©roß'mntter, grandmother. „ ©roß'mnti;, magnanimity, ©roß'mütfjig, adj., magnanimous ©roß'tent^eiig, adv., chiefly, ©riin, adj., green. Ser ©rnnb,—eg,^/.©rün'be,ground, land, foundation, reason, [lish. ©riin'ben, v. tr., to found, estab- Sag ©runb'loc^, hole in the ground. Ser ©runb'ftein, corner-stone. Scr ©rnß,—eg, pi. ©rü'ße, salutation ©rü'ßen, v. tr., to greet, salute. ©Üí'tig, adj., valid, binding. ©ün'ftig, ac^'., favorable. Sic ©um'mijc^ul^e {pl.), India-rub- ©at, adj., good. [ber over-shoe. Sie ©ü'te, —, goodness. Sag ©at, —t^,pl. ©il'ter, posses¬ sions, property, landed estate. Sag ©bmna'fiant, —g, pi. ©brnaa'' [iea, gymnasium. Sag §aar, —eg, pi. —e, hair. Çia'bea, v. ir. tr., to have. $ab'^a[t, adj., in possession. Sic ^ab'fac^t, —, avarice. ^ab'[ild^tig, adj., avaricious. Scr Ça'fea,-g,p/. ^S'fca, harbor. 452 VOCABULARY. 3^er §a'fer, —8, oats. „ §a'i5et, —8, hail. §a'gein, v. intr. {impers.), to hail. „ Çad'eu, —8, pl. —, hook, ípaíb, adj., half. §aIb'ro^, adj., half raw. §aib'tx)eg8, adv., halfway. 2)te §aifte, —, half. [stop, ^ll'ten, V. ir. tr. and intr., to hold, 2)er §alt, —e8, pi. —e, holding, stop. [mer. ■2)cr ^am'mer,—8, pi. §äm'mer, ham¬ ate §anb, —, pi. §än'be, hand. 2)er §an'bel, —8, trade, com¬ merce. ^an'bcin, v. tr. and intr., to han¬ dle, trade, treat, act. ®er ^änb'ier, —8, pi.—, trader. ®ie §vinb'iung, —, pi. —en, ac¬ tion, deed, trade, trading- house. 3)ie ipanb'fc^rift, manuscript. 2)cr §anb'id)u^, glove. 2)a8 §anb'tt»evf, trade. 2)er §anb'n)erfer, tradesman. ®er §ant, —e8, hemp. ^ang'cn, v. ir. intr., to hang, ^ang'eu, v. tr., to hang. §ar'ren, v. intr., to await. §art, adj., hard. S)er §a'ie, —n, pi. —n, hare. [nut. Sie ^a'feínu^, —, pi. »nüffe, hazle- ^affen, v. tr., to hate. ^ä§'Iid^, adj., hateful, ugly, ^au'en, v. ir. tr., to hew, cut. Ser §au'te, —n8,pi.—n,) heap, „ ¿au'íen, —8, pl.—, í mass. Çâu'fig, adj., abundant, frequent. Sa8 ipau^Jt, —e8, pi. ^äu^i'ter, head. Sie §au))t'teber, mainspring. „ §aupt'teftung, chief fortica- tion. Ser ^äu^t'iing, —e8, pi. —e, chieftain, leader, [foremost. Í)auí)t'íing8,aíií;., headlong, head Ser §auj3t'mann,—e8,pi.^am>t < leute, captain. Sie ^aupt'ftabt, capital city. Sa8 §au^t'tnort, noun. Sa8 §au8, —e8, pi. ^äu'fer, house. Ser §au8'fnecí;t, house servant. Sie §aut, —, pi. §äu'te, skin. §e'ben, v. ir. tr., to raise, lift. Ser §e'beí, —8, pi. —, lever. Ser §et^t, —e8, pi. —e, pike. Sa8 §eer, —e8, pi. —e, army. §ei'tig, adj., A'ehement, violent. Ser §ei'be,—n, pi. —n ; bie ^ei'bin —, pi. «nen, heathen, pagan. Sa8 §ei'Deutl)Uin, —8, paganism. Sie §ei'be, —,pi. —n, heath. §ei'iig, adj., holy. ^et'iigen, v. ir., to sanctify, hallow §eittl, adv., home, at home. Sa8 §eim,—e8, home, residence. Sie §ei'niat^, —,pi. —en, native place. ^ei'mijc^, adj., at home. §ei'rat[>en, v. tr. and intr., to marry, ^ei'fer, ac?;'., hoarse. §ei0, adj., hot. ^ei'jien, v. ir. intr., to be called, be named, mean. §ei'ter, adj., cheerful, glad, joyous. Ser ^eíb, —en, pi. —en, hero. Ser §eí'bengei[t, heroic spirit. §eí'bentnütí;ig, adj., heroic. §ei'fen, v. ir. intr., to help. §eíí, adj., clear, bright. Ser §el'íer, —8, pi. —, a copper coin, worth about a quarter of a cent. Ser §eím, —e8, pi. —e, helmet. Sa8 §entb, —e8, pi. —en, shirt. §etn'nten, v. tr., to check, arrest. §er, adv., hither (§ 187, 10). §erab', adv., down (hither). §eran', adv., on, near, upward. $erant'fommcn,tocome up, rise. Çerann^cicn, v. ir. tr., to throw up. VOCABULARY, 45;^ Çetauftretcn, v. ir. într., to step §crauö', out hither, [up. ^erauS'fagen, to speak out. §erbct', adv., on, hither, near, geteilt', ac?u., in hither. [ter. herein'fommen, to come in, en- ^ernie'ber, adv., down hither. Çevii'bertommen, to come over, ^erun'ter, adv., down hither. §erun'terîommen, to descend. §erum', adv., around. ®er §erbft, —e§, pi. —t, autumn. „ ^erb, —eö, pl. —e, hearth. Sie ^eer'bc, —, pi. —n, herd. Ser §err, —n, pi. —en, master, lord, gentleman ; Mr. ; ©ott ber §err, the Lord God. §crr'it^, aci;'., glorious, splendid. Sie §evr'íd;aft, —, pl. —en, do¬ minion, authority, ^err'íd^aftíiá), adj., belonging to a lord or to a manor, noble. §err'ic^en, v. intr., to reign, rule. Sa§ §err'ííí)ertf)Uht,—6, govern¬ ment, authority. Sa6 §evj, —euê,p?.—en, heart, [dial. Çerg'iic^, adj., affectionate, cor- Ser ^er'jog, —t^,pl. .Çer'jëge, duke. §ernac^', acfy., afterward. §ertoor'brec^en, to break out. Sa8 §eu, —e8, hay. §eu'Ien, v. intr., to howl. §en'te, adv., to-day. §eu'tig, adj., of to-day, to-day's. §ier, adv., here. ^ierin', adv., herein. [close by. ^iernäd)ft', adv., next this time, §ier[eibft', adv., here. Çie'fig, adj., of this place. Ser Çim'mel,—Q,pl. —, heaven. Çimm'tifd;, adj., heavenly. ^\n,adv., thither, there, fpinah', adv., down thither. ¿inanf, adv., up thither. ^inaufí^íJuen, to look up. §tnein', adv., in thither. §tnein'geëen, n. intr., to enter. §inein'gelangen, to penetrate. §iuein'fommen,to come in. §inein'tragen, v. tr., to carry in. §in'geben, v. tr., to give up, sacrifice. §inge'gen, adv., on the contrary. §inü'berí))ringcn, to leap over, ^innn'terftiirjen, v. intr., to fall down. §inju'ie§en, v. ir., to add. §in'bern, v. tr., to hinder, [bersome. §in'beriic^, adj., hindering, cum- §in'ten, prep., behind, after. Ser §iríc^, —e§, pl. —, stag, deer. Sie ^ir'fe, —, millet. Ser §irt, —en, pi. —en, shepherd. Sie §i^'e, —, heat. §od;, adj., high. §öd^ft, adv., very, extremely. Sie §od)'ad)tung, —, esteem, re¬ spect. [oped. §od;'gebrad;t, adj., higly devel- §od)'trat)enb,adj., high-sounding Ser §oc[)'herrat^, high treason. Sie §o¿^';ieit, pl. —en, wedding. „ §B'^e, •—, pl. —en, height. Ser §of, —ed, pl. §ö'fe, court, per¬ manent residence, home. §ôfli(î^, adj., courteous, polite. v.intr., to hope. §Df f entließ, adv. (it is to be hoped). Sie §off'nitng, —, pi. —en, hope, §o[)i, adj., hollow. Sie §ö^'ie, —, pl. —n, cave, pit. §o'íen, V. tr., to get, procure. Sa8 Çolj, —eS, pi. §öi'jer, wood. ^öl'jern, adj., woody, of wood. Ser §o'nig, —§, honey. ^or'd^en, v. intr., to listen, obey. §ö'ren, v. tr., to hear. Sie ^o'fen (pl.), pantaloons, trowsers ñübfcb, adj., pretty, fair. Ser §ü'geí, —6, pl. —, hill. §ui'1 ínfery., ho! quick! in einem Çui', in the twinkling of an eye 454 VOCABÜLABY. 35ic ^üí'fe, —, aid. 2)er §unb, —e8, pl. —t, dog. 2)aâ §ünD'c^en, —^,pl. —, smalldog, little puppy. ^mi'bevt, hundred. 3(^ pron., I. her; their; your. 2)er, bie, ba§ S^rige, hers ; theirs ; Stl'nge, yours. ^ím'lttev, adv., ahvays, ever, ^mpofartt', adj., imposing. ^Xlfprep., in, into, at, within. Snbem', c., while, since, because. 2)et 3n'í)aít, —pl. —e, contents. 2)a§ ^n'iaitb, —S, interior of a coun¬ try. 3iCl, adv., yes. 2)ie —, ¡>1. —n, jacket, vest. 3a'gen, v. tr., to hunt. S)te Scigb, —, hunt, hunting. S)er Sä'ger, —ê, pl. —, hunter. —¿8, —c, year, [century. ®aê 3aí)r^nu'berí, —§, jd. —e, 3)ie —, number of the year. „ [ja^'re§5ett, —, pi.—cn, sea¬ son of the year. ®er [ya'nuar, —ë, January. SCf adv., ever ; conj., the (see bejio). 3ie'ber, pron., eveiy, each. i 3)aS Äa'bei, —8, pl. —, cable. „ Kabinett', —es, pl. —c, cabinet, small room. "Sîer Äabett', —en, pl. —en, cadet. ®er ^abet'tenoffijier, —8, pl. —e, cadet-officer, r« Kaffee, —8, coffee. Seabí, adj., bald. S)ev ííabn,—e8,^f. ^Sb'ne,boat, skiff. n áíai'fer, —8, pl. —, emperor. 2)er §ung'er, —8, hunger. 2)te §ung'er8notb, —, famine. 2)er §ut, —e8, pl. —^ü'te, hat. S)ie §üf te, —, pl. —n, hut. » —t P^- —hyacinthe Í. [yn'iänbtfdb; native, interior, (ín'ne, adv., within. Sn'neit, adv., within. [yn'ner, adj., interior. 3n'nerbaib, prep., within, inside of. 2)a8 (înfeît', —e8, pi. —en, insect. ®ie (ín'l'eí, —, pl. —n, island, (^nfon'berbeit, adv., especially. 2)a8 [ynterej'je, —e8, interest. (yntereffanf, adj., interesting. 3r'ren, v. refl., to err, wander. Í. ^e'bermami, pron., every body, (iebwe'ber, pron. (for jeber). (je'inaiS, adv., ever. (ye'manb, —8, pron., somebody, any body. (^e'ner, pron., that, that one. (íen'feit,^re/}.,the other side of, beyond (^en'feitS, adv., beyond. (^eljt, adv., now, at present. 3ie^'ig, adj., present, existing. Sie (su'genb, youth. 3ung, adj., young, youthful. 2)er 3ung'e, —n, pi. —n, youth, young man. Äat'feritdb, adj., imperial. [ship). 5)te ^ajü'te, —e, pi. —h, cabin (of a 35a8ÄaIb,—ii,pl. Ääi'ber, calf. S)er ÄalbS'bratcn,—8, roast veal ®a8 Äalbs'cotelett, —e8, veal cut „ ^alb'fleijcb, —c8, veal, [let S)cr Äaif, —e8, lime. 2)er Sairfels, limestone cliSk calcareous rock. Salt/ adj., cold. VOCABULARY. 455 2)ic Äät'te, —, cold, coldness. S)ct —câ, pl. Säm^jfe, battle, Ääm'ljfen, v. într., to fight, [fight n Äana'rienöogcl,—8, Canary bird. 2)ie ^ono'ne, —, pi. —n, cannon. 2)ic Äano'nctthtgel, cannon-balh 2)er So^itän', —8, pl. —e, captain, 'î'ie —, pi. —en, cap, hood. 2;er Sar'^fen, —8,pZ.—, carp. Sar'te, —, pi. —n, chart, map. „ Kartoffel, —, pl. —n, potato. !ícv Äartof'^clitcier,—, potato field. „ Ää'fe, —e8, pZ. —, cheese. „ Satalog', —C8, pi.—e, catalogue. „ Äat^oüf,—va.,pl.—en, Catholic. Sat^o'íi^i^, adj., catholic. „ Kattun', —e8, pl. —e, calico. Sau'fen, v. tr., to buy. 2)er Kaufmann, —e8, pi. Äauf; lente, merchant. Sautmän'niic^, adj., mercantile. Äaum, acZw., scarcely. Se^'ren, y. tr., to sweep; to turn. 2)et Äeii, —e8, pJ. —e, wedge. Äeirförmig, adj., wedge-shaped; adv., like a wedge. Sein.prow., no, not any, no one. $er áelí'ner,—8,pZ. —, waiter. Äen'tien, v. ir. tr., to know, to be ac¬ quainted with. 2)cr âef'fel, —8, pl. —, kettle. 2)ie Set'te, —,pZ. —n, chain. 3)« Äiel, —8, pl. —e, quill. ®a8 Äinb, —e8, pl. —er, child. S)a8 ^nb'djen, —8, pl. —, little child, baby, infant. 3)ic ^tnb'l^eit, —, childhood, .^in'bifd^, adj., childish. ®tc Äir'^e, —,pZ.—n, church, [tory. !î)ie Äir'd^engefc^idbte, church his¬ ser Äirö^'t^nrm, church tower. 2)ie Sir'f^C, —,pl. —n, cherry. ®a8 Äiffen, —8,pZ. —n, cushion. Sla'gen, v. intr., to complain. 2)ic Slofi'fier, —, pi. —n, rattle. 2)« Siofj'fjetfdfilange, rattlesnake. Äiar, adj., clear. 2)ic Älaffe, —, pi- —n, class. Äiaf fijc^, adj., classical. 2)a8 ^iabier', —8, —e, piano-forte. 2)er SHec, —e8, clover. ®er ^lee'ader, field of clover. 2)a8 Älcib, —e8, pi. —er, garment, clothes, dress. Äiet'ben, v. tr., to clothe, dress. Äicin, adj., small, little. 2)a8 M'ma, —8,pZ. iîlima'ta, ^te or iten, climate. Sling'en, v. intr., to sound, be heard. Sling'ein, v. intr., to ring a bell. Slo'fjfen, V. intr., to knock (at a door). 2)a8 Slo'fter, —8, pi. Slö'fter, cloister, convent, monastery. Slug, adj., wise, sensible, learned. 2)er Sna'be, —n, pi. —n, boy. „ Snec^t, —e8, pi. —e, servant. „ Sno'd;en, —8, pi. —, bone. „ Sno'ten, —8, pi. —, knot. „ Soc(>, —e8, pi. Sö'c^e, cook. S)ie Sö'c^in, —, pl. men, cook. So'd^cn, V. tr. and intr., to cook, boil. Ser Soffer, —8, pi. —, trunk, chest r, Soi)l, —e8, pi. —c, cabbage. Ser So^l'ader, field of cabbages Sie So^'le, —, pi. —n, coal. Som'men, v. ir. intr., to come. So'mifi^, «íZ;., comical. Ser Sbmmi8', —, pl. —, clerk. Sie Sonfejfion', —, pl. —en, confes¬ sion of faith. Ser Songreg', —e8, pl.—t, Congress. „ Sö'nig, —8, pl. —e, Üng. Sö'niglic^, adj., royal. Sa8 Sö'nigreicb, —8, pl. —e, kingdom. Son'neu, v. ir., to be able. Ser Sobf, —t^,pl. Sö'pfe, head. Sa8 Sobf'meg, —8, headache. . „ Sorb, —e8, pi. Sör'be, buhket. Ser Sorb'maí^cr, basket-maker. 456 VOCABULARY. S)a3 5îorn, —eS, pl. Äör'ner, grain,' ®cv iiör'pcr, —ë, pl. —, body. [com. Äo'ften, V. intr., to cost. Äoft'bar, adj., costly. 2)ie Äoft'bar feit, —, costliness. 2)te áíraít, —, pl. Äräi'te, might, strength. [force. Äraft'boli, adj., energetic, full of Set Ä'ra'gen, —§, pl. —, or áíra'gen, ftranî, adj., sick. [collar. 2)ie ííraní'ííeit, —, pl. —en, sick¬ ness. [sickness. Äran'fenlager, —ë, sick-bed, 2)er Äranj, —eê, pl. Ärän'je, wreath. 2)aë Äraut, —eë, pl. Äräu'ter, plant, „ ^reuj, —eë, pl. —e, cross, [herb. 2)ie Äreuj'fai>rt, —, pl. —en,> cru¬ der Äreuj'pg, —ë, pl. íjüge,) sade. t, Äreu'jer, —ë, pl. —, creuzer. „ Ärieg, —eë, pl. —e, war. 2)te iîriegë'noti), calamity of war. ífrt'tijd;, adj., critical. ®ie Äro'nc, —, pl. —n, crown. 2)er .Sron'^irinj, —en, pi. —en, prince royal. [mug. ®er Ärug, —eë, pl. íírüge, pitcher, Ärumni, adj., crooked. Sa'c^en, v. intr., to laugh. Sä'c^eln, V. intr., to smile, [cal. Sä'cberlic^, adj., ludicrous, comi- ®er Sac^ë, —eë, pl. salmon, ïa'ben, v. ir. tr., to load, fing, cargo. 2)ie Sa'bnng, —, /;f. —en, lad- Sa'ben, v.tr^, to summon, invite.[shop¬ per Sa'ben, —ë, pl. Saben, shutter, ®te Sa'ge, —, pl. —n, position, place. ®aë Sa'ger, —^,pl. Sä'ger, bed, camp Sabm, adj., lamo. Säb'ntcn, v. tr., to make lame. ®aë Samm, —eë, pl. Säm mer, lamb. 2)ie Sam'l^e, —e, pi.—n, lamp. [land. ®aë Sanb, —eë, pl. Sän'ber, country, 2)tC Sanb'niad;t,landforces,array Ämmm'betntg, adj., bow-legged. ®er íín'd;en, —ë, pl. —, cake. 2)ic Än'gel, —, pl. —n, ball. 2)er Än'tnf, —ë, pl. —e, cuckoo. 2)ie Ännbfb^aft, —, pl. —en, knowl¬ edge, information, künftig, adj., future. 2)te Äunft, — ,pZ. Äün'fte, a» t. 2)erÄunft'fieiß, —eë, artistic in¬ dustry. „ Äünft'Ier, —ë, pl. —, artist. ÄÜnft'iic^, adj., artificial. 2)er ^nnft'fc^a^,-eë,/>^ /jd^afjc, artistic treasure. 2)aë Ännft'werf, work of art. Ser Äur'fürft, —en, pl. —en, elector, ^urj, adj., short. knrj'treilig, adj., amusing. Saë Än'l^fer, —ë, copper. Saë .^n'l>ferftecben,—ë, engrav¬ ing on copper. Set Än'bierfted^er, —ë, pl. —, engraver on copper. Ser ^n§, —eë, pl. Âûfje, kiss. Hüffen, V. tr., to kiss. Sie Äü'fte, —, pl. —n, coast. Ser ^ut'fd;er, —ë, pl. —, coachman. Ser Sanb'mann, countryman. „ Sanbë'mann, (fellow)-coun- trj'man. Sie Sanb'reijc, journey by land. „ Sanb'i(^att,—,pi.—en, land¬ scape. [painter. Ser Sanb'id;aitëmaler, landscajx t; Sanb'jolbat, land soldier (mi litia). Saë Sanb'uoíf, country people, Sanb'hiârtë, adv., landward. Ser Sanb'njtnb, land breeze. Ser Sanb'tDtrt(>, farmer, landlord Sang, adj., long. Sang'e, adj., a long while. Sie SSng'c, —, length. VOCABULARY. 457 \!ang t*ïîn, adj., slow. Sang'weilig. adj., slov/. 2)er Sävm, —eê, noise, bustle, uproar. Saf fen, r. ir. tr., to let, leave, permit, order, to have (done). S)ie Saft, —, pl. —en, burden. 3)a§ Saft'tíjier, beast of burden. Satei'nifd;, adj., Latin. Sau'fen, v. ir. intr., to run. 2)er Sanf,—eö, pl. Säu'fe, course. Sant, ac?;'., loud; prep., according to, by virtue of. San'ten, v. intr., to sound, be rung. Se'ben, v. intr., to live. ®a§ Se'ben, —ê, life. . Seben'big, adj., lively, active. Scb'i;aft, adj., lively, active. ®ie Se'benSart,—, style of living. Ser Se'benSlauf, course of life. Ste Se'ben^mittel, means of ex¬ istence, necessaries cf life, ©a® Se'ber, —3, pi. —, leather. Seer, adj., empty, vacant. Sie Segation', —, pi. —en, legation. Se'gen, v. tr., to lay, put, place, (^n'legen, to put on. (ißei'iegcn, to give to. Sef>'ren, v. tr., to teach. Sie Se^'re, —, pi. —n, doctrine. Ser Se^'rer, —3, pi. —, teacher. Sic Sel;rerin,—, />/. —en, teacher Sa3 Sc^r'jal;r, year of study Se^r'reicb adj., instructive. Seictlt, adj., light, easy. [ry). Seib, adv. (e3 ti;nt mir leib, I am sor- Sei'ben, v. ir. tr., to suffer. . [grief. Sa3 Sei'ben, —s,_p/.—, suffering, Sei'benfáiaftíid;, adj., passionate. Sie Sei'cr, —, pi. —n, lyre. Sei()'en, v. ir. tr., to loan, lend. Sie Sein'wanb, —, linen. Sei'fe, adj., low, soft, gentle, [plish- Sei'[ten, v. tr., to do, perform, accom- Sei'ten) v. tr., to lead, conduct. Sie Seftion', —n, ph —en, lesson. Sie Ser't^e, —, pi. —n, lark. Ser'nen, v. tr., to learn. Se'fen, v. ir. tr., to read. [er. Sa3Se'íebnd;, reading-book, read- Se^t, adj., last. Seij'ter, adj., latter. Ser Sentit'tl)urm, light-house. Sie Seu'te {pl.), people. Sa3 Si([)t,—t^,pl. —er, light, candle. Sie'ben, v. tr., to love. Sieb, adj., dear, agreeable. Sie Sie'be, —, love. Sie'ber, adv., rather, sooner. Sieb'Iid^, adj., lovely, charming. Ser Sieb'Iing, pi. —e, favorite. Sie'benStt:iirbig, ac^'., amiable. Sa3Sieb,—c3, pi. —er, song. Sie'fern, v. tr., to deliver. Sie Ste'ferung, —,¡^1. —en, num¬ ber (of a serial publication). Sie'gen, v. ir. intr., to lie, recline. Sie Simona'be, —, lemonade, Sinî, left, left hand. Siní3, adv., to the left hand. Sie Siteratnr', —, pi. —en, literature. Sitera'rifci), adj., literary. Sa3 Sob, —e3, praise. So'ben, v. tr., to praise. Sa3 Sod;,—e3, joZ.Sö'djer, hoie, cavity So^'nen, v. tr., to reward. Sa3 Soo3, —e3, pi. —e, lot. So3, adj., free from, without. So'fen, V. tr., to loosen, solve. Ser Sö'we, —n, pl. —n, lion. Sie Suft, —, pl. Süf'te, air. SÜ'gcn, V. intr., to lie, tell falsehoods. Sie Sü'ge,7j/. —n, lie, falsehood. Ser Süg'ner, —3, pl. —, liar. Ser Snm'f^en, —, pl. —en, rag, tatter SaS Snm'f5enf5af)ier, paper (made of rags). Sie Sufi, —, pl. Sü'flc, pleasure, joy, desire, inclination. Sii'ftern,ad;., longing, repacious. Su'ftig, adj., jolly, merry. 458 VOCABULART. Día'c^eit, V. tr., to make, do. ¿)ie Diadjt,—might, power. Diäd/tig, ac(;., mighty, powerful, having control. Diabame', Mrs. Sie Dîagb, —, pl. SJÎag'be, maid. S)aS Dîab'djcn, —S, pl. —, girl, maid. Día^I, —e8, pl. —e, repast. 2)er 9Jîat, —§, May. S)ie Diajeftät', —, pl. —en, majesty. 2)a8 Dial, —e8, pl. —e, time. Slía'íen, v. tr., to paint. S)er Dîa'ler, —8, jjI.—, painter. ®te SDÍaíerei', —, art of painting. Dia'Ierifd;, adj., picturesque. SDian, pron., one, a person, we, they. SDiait'd^ev, pro«., many (a one). 3)iand;'inai, adv., many a time. SOÍaitg'eín, v. Intr., to lack, fail. ®er ^amt, —c8,p/. Díün'ncr, man. 2)te Diann'fd^aft, —,pl.—n, body of men, crew. 2)er Dían'teí,—e8, pi. äJfän'tel, man¬ tle, cloak. S)er Diarît, —e8,p/. Diävl'te, market. „ SJÎarfb^,—e8,pZ.9Jîâr'f(^e,march, marching ; g^uß'mavfc^, going on foot. Diärj, —c6, March. [engine. ®ie Diafc^t'ne, —, pi. —n, machine, Ser Díafí, —e3, —en, mast. [stutF. S)ie Slfate'rie, —, pi. —en, matter, „ SOiat^ema'tif, —, mathematics. S)er Dîatro'fe, —n, pi. —n, sailor. Sie SJÎiiu'er, —, pl. —n, wall. Sai Díaití,—e8,p/. Dían'íer, mouth. Sic Díauridjetíe, —, pl. —n, slap on the mouth or face. Ser Dían'rev, —8, pl. —, mason. Sie Dîebijin', —, medicine. Sa8 Dîeer, —c8, —e, sea. [hay. Ser Dîcer'hnfen,—8,p/.-~,gulf. Sie SDÍcer'enge, —,pl.—n,straita. 2)iee're8flä(^e, —, surface of the sea. Ser Díeer'rettig, —8, horseradish Sa8 Díe^í, —e8, flour. Díe^r (comp, of hieí), more. 2)íe^'rere,pron., several. 2)íe^r'tnal8, adv., several times. Díei'ben, v. ir. tr., to avoid. Sic DJei'íe, —, pl. —n, mile. Díei'íenineit, adv., miles distant. Díein, pro?n, my. [mine. Ser Díeine, or ber Dîeinige, pron., Díei'nen, v. intr., to mean, think. Sie Díei'nnng,—, pi.—en, opin¬ ion, idea. Díeift (superl. of biei), most. Diei'ften8, adv., mostly. Ser Díei'fter, —8, pl. —, master. SDÍei'[terí;aft, adj., masterly. Ser Diei'fterfänger, master-singer Sa8 Díei'fterfiücí, masterpiece. Díel'ben, v. tr., to announce, make known. Sie Díeng'e, —, pl.—n, crowd, quan¬ tity. [man being. Ser DZenf^, —en, pi. —en, man, hu- 9JZeníd>'ÍÍ(í>, adj., human. Sa8 Díen'fc^eníinb, son of man, human being. Dier'fen, v. tr., to mark. Sa8 Dîerî'ntaÎ, —8, pi.—e, char- acteristic sign. Díerí'mürbig, adj., remarkable. Sie 9Jíeí'[e, —, pl. —n, mass, fair. DieHen, v. ir. tr., to measure. Sa8 DieHer, —8,pi. —, knife. Sa8 Dietatt', —8, pi. —e, metal. Diie'tben, v. tr., to hire, rent. Sie Dîilcb, —, milk. Sie 3Jiiid>'flraße, klilky "Way. Díiíb, adj., mild. SDÍin'ber, adj., less ; niinbejl, least Diin'bejlenS, adv., at least VOCABULARY. 459 25er DJÍim'jlcr,—§, pl.—, minister, member of the executive cabinet, ambassador. [ministei". 2)et SOÍini'fterí^'rüfibcnt', prime- Ser äJiin'nefänger, —ê, minnesinger. Sie 2}îinu'te, —, pl. —n, minute. 2Jîij3'braud;en, v. tr., to misuse, abuse. Ser Slíií'íetbütev,—i,pi-—, evil-doer ïlii^'fallett, r. ir. intr., to displease. 25íit,^re/>., with, by, at, in. Ser äJiit'bürger, —d, fellow-citizen. 2)iit'get;en, v. Îr. intr., to accompany. Slîit'nebmen, v. ir. tr., to take with. Slîit'fc^ulbtg,««^'., accessory toacrime. SDZit'iprec^en, v. ir. intr., to speak with. Ser SJÍit'tag,—midday, noon, south Sie SJÍit'te, —, midst, middle. Sa8 âJîit'teÎ —8, pl.—, middle, means iDîit'ten, adv., middle, central. SJiit'telS ('tel[t), prep., by means of. Sa6 SDiit'telalter, —8, middle ages. SPÍit'teímü^ig, adj., moderate. Ser 3)îit'teIi3Unît, central point, focus. Sie Siïiit'ternadjt, midnight. 2)ítt'tí)eiíen, v. tr., to communicate. S0iit'ti)eiien8tt>ert(), adj., worth re¬ peating. [eommunication. Sie ajíit'tbeiíung, —, pl. —en, Ste 2Jîttt it)od)e, —, ) Sie Sliit'retrîung,—, co-operation, aid Sa8 SDÎô'bet,—,pl. —, andbie Sïiô'bel, —,pl. —n, piece of furniture (in pl. furniture). SDÎobli'ren, v. tr., to furnish. Sie ÏÏJZo'be, —, pl. —n, fashion. SJÎobern', adj., modern. 9 g^ad;, prep., after, behind, toward, according to. [copy. 9îad/a()men, v.tr. and ínír., to imitate. Ser g^ad/bar, —8 or —n, pi. —n, neighbor. giac^'bem, adv., afterward; c., after. SaS gjîobett', —8, pl. —e, model, gjîë'gen, v. ir., tobe permitted (may). SDÎôg'lid}, adj., possible. Sie gjîoitarc^ie',-—n, monarchy Ser SJÎo'itat, —8, pl. —e, month. gjîo'natUcb, adj., monthly. Ser 2)îonb, —e8, pl. —e, moon. Ser gpfiou'tag, —8, Monday, gjîor'ben, v. tr., to murder. Ser gjîorb, —e8, pl. —e, murder. Ser gjîër'ber, —8, murderer. Sie gjîorb't^at,——en, hom¬ icide, murderous act. Ser giïior'gen, —8,p/. —, morning, gjîor'gen, acfe., to-morrow. 3)îor'gen8, adv., in the morning. Sie 2Jîë'toeor2Jîërce,—,pl. —n,mew, sea-gull. „ giiii'de, —, pi. —n, gnat, midge, gjíü'be, adj., weaiy, tired. Sie gJÍÜ'be, —,pl. —n, pains, care. „ gjíü^'íe, —, pl. —n, mill. Ser SOiül;i'ftetn, —e8, mill-stone. Ser 3)îunb, —t^,pl. SJäin'ber, mouth, Sie SJÎunb'art,—,^/.—en,dialect SKÜn'big, adj., of age. Sa8 giînie'um, —8, pl. güínfe'en, mu¬ seum. Sie Slínfíí', —, music. [cian. Ser gjín'fiíer, —8, pl. —, musi- Ser gOínffeím', — 8, muslin, gjíüffen, V. ir., to be obliged (must.) Sa8 gOín'fter, —8,^/. —, pattern. Ser gjíntí),—e8, mood, courage, spirit gjîn'tlpg, adj., courageous. Sie gOînt'ter, —, pl. 3)íüt'ter, mother. „ gOíü^'e, —, pl.—n, cap. iJZad/íommen, v. intr., to come after, act in accordance with, accept. giîad/Iâifig, adj., negligent, careless. Sie 9îad/id[figîeit,—, negligence Ser gfîad^'mittag, —8, aftenioon. g'îad/niittag8 adv., in the afternooa VOCABULARY. Sic 9îad/nd;t, —, pl. —en, tidings, intelligence, report. Dîv-id)'fc^Clt, V. ir. tr., to examine ; intr., to look. 9iad/ipringen, v. intr., to spring after. Sie 9iac^t, —, pl. 9iäd;'te, night. Sie 9îad/tigaU, —, pl. —en, nightin¬ gale. 9îâc^[t, adj.,next; prep.,next to, next. Ser ííad'en, —d, pl. —, neek. ^îadt, adj., naked. Sie Sla'Del, —, pi. —n, needle. Ser 9îa'gel, —^,pl. îîa'gel, nail. or na'^e, adj., near, nigh. Sie 9îâ'^e, —, nearness. Üiä'^en, V. intr. andrefl.,}^ to ap- 9îâ'^ern, " " " ) proach. 3iä'^eu,i'. tr., to sew. Sie ^îdi/mafc^iite, sewing-ma- chine. „ îîâ^'nabcÎ, sewing needle. Sic ïïiai/rung,—,pl.—en, food, nour¬ ishment. Sad ilía^'ruhgdmiítcí, food, provision. Ser gîa'me,—nd,;^/.—n,\ „ 9îa'men,-d,;,i.-, i 9ía'mentíid;, adv., namely. iJîâm'Iid},^™«., the same. Ser 9íarr, —en, pl. —en, fool, buf¬ foon. Sie 9îa'ie, —, pl. —n, nose. îia'fetneid, adj., pert, forward, impertinent, saucy. Siaß, adj., wet. Sic ^liation', —, pi. —en, nation. iJíationaí', adj., national. Sic iJîatnr', —, nature. 9Íatür'íic^, adj., natural. 9'îe'ben, prep., near, by the side of. Ser 9íe'knnmfíanb, incidental circumstance, particulars. iJîebfi, near, together with. Ser Sief fe, —n, pl. —n, nephew. 9îcf)'mcn, v. ir. tr., to take. flîein, adv., no. Sie Síeí'íe,—,pl. —en, pink, fíien'nen, v. ir. tr., to name. Sad ^ti}, —ed, pi. —e, net. flien, adj., new. Sie 9îeu'gierbe, —, curiosity. fJîeu'gierig, adj., curious, inquisi¬ tive. 9îeu'li(i), adv., lately, recently. fJîeun, nine. 9îeun'tâgig, adj., lasting nine days, flîiti^t, adv., not. pron., nothing. Sie fJîidj'te, —, ¡ü. —n, niece. 9íie, adv., never. fJîie'mald, adv., never, flîie'manb,/3ro«., nohody. fJîim'mer, adv., never, flîie'ber, adj., low; adv., low, down. 9îie'berbrennen, v. ir. tr. , to bum down. flîie'berreijjen, v. ir. tr., to tear down. iJío'beí, adj., noble. adv., still, yet; conj., nor. Ser 51îorb, -d, > ^ ^ „ gior'bcn, -d,i * fRorb'Iid), adj., northern; adv., northerly. fRorbmeft'iid;), adj., northwestern, Sie fJîo'te, —, pl.—u, bank-note. „ fRotí), —, pl. 9ii3't^e, calamity, need, trouble. Ser fRot^'faíí, case of need. fRö'tbig, adj., necessary, needed. fRö't^ig f>aben, to need. Ser fRohem'ber, —d, November. Sie fRu'beí, —, pl. —n, vermicelli. " I number. „ yîum'tner,—, pl.—,) iRltn, adv., now; well, well then. iRur, adv., only. 91it^'cn, V. tr., to use. Ser '9htt^en, —d, profit, use. fRüfe'íic^, adj., useful. VOCABULARY. 461 D I or ! inlerj., oh ! Db, conj., w hether, if. O'bert, adv., above, up stairs. D'bcr^aib, prep., above, on the upper side of. Sie O'bevflädje, upper surface. Sa§ O'berieber, upper leather. Ser O'berfî, —en,;>/.—en,colonel Obgietd)', conj., although. SaS Obft, —e§, fruit. Ser O'cean, —pi. —e, ocean. Sad Cftab',—i,pl.—eand »ö, octavo D'ber, co/y., or. Ser O'feii, —^,pL De'fen, stove,oven open. Dfieilbar, adj., open, plain. s Sa§ ißäar, —e?, pl. —e, pair ; ein ^aar, a few. Ser ißaiaft',—z^,pL ißaiä'fte, palace. Sie ijjarme, —, pl. —n, palm. Ser ijlan't^er, —ê, pl. —, panther. „ i^antcf fei, —§, pl. —n, slipper, ipan'jern, v. ir., to furnish with a coat of mail ; gepait'jert, iron-clad. Sa§ papier',—?•, pi. —e, paper. „ ißarabig'ma,—ißarabig'mcn, paradigm. Sie ißartie', —, pl. ipartie'en, party. Ser ißaff, —es, pl. i|3äf'fe, passport. „ ijjaffagier',—pl. —e,passenger. Raffen, v. intr., to fit, become. iflaf'feilb, adj., proper, suitable, becoming. Sie ipcrio'be, —, pi. —n, period. „ ifjerfon', —,pl. —en, person. ^erfön'lid>, adj., personal. SaS '^effcpaft, —eS, pl.—i, seal. Ser ''Pfeffer, —S, pepper. „ iflfen'nig, —S, pl. —e, pfennig. SaS 'ipferb, —cS, pl. —c, horse. Sie ipfing'fteu, —ô, Whitsuntide, „ iPflan'je, —, pl. —n, plant. Dffenba'ren, v. tr. ,io make publie. Def fentiid;, adj., public. Deff'nen, v. tr., to open. Oft, adv., often. Db'ne, ;/rep., without. SaS Dei, —t%,pl. —e, oil. SaS Dp'fer, —, pi. —, sacrifice, Dra'nien, —§ {geog.), Orange. Drb'nen, v. tr., to order, arrange. Sie Dr'bre, —, or Dr'ber, —, order. Ser Drganift',—cn,;j;. —en, organist „ Drt, —eS, pi. Der'tcr, place. Deft'iid), ac/;'., eastern. Sie D'fteru {pi), Easter. ipfiiicfen, V. tr., to pluck, pick. Ser 'ifJfiitg,—eS, pi. i)3jïû'ge, plough. SaS ''^fitnb, —eS, pi. —e, pound. Sie ifJbiiofoppie', —, philosophy. i|3t)iÍofo'f3Í)ifd;),adj., philosophical. Sie ißi^ra'fe, —, pl., —n, phrase. Ser '"fiíatt, —e^, pl. —e or ißiä'ne plan. „ —e§, pl. ^ië^'c, place, ^ialj nehmen, to take a seat, ipië^'iich, adj., sudden, ipiün'bern, v. tr., to plunder. Sie ißoefie' —, poetry. „ i^oiijei', —, pi. —en, police. Ser ^oiijei'biener, policeman, ißonti'nifch, adj.. Pontine. Sa§ Portemonnaie',—g,p/.—§,purse pocket-book. Sie Portion', —, pi —en, portion. „ Poft, —, pi. —en, post, post-oifice Sad poft'amt, —ed, post-office. Sie Prad)t,—, splendor, magnificence Ser prad;t'anjng, splendid suit of clothes. Präch'tig,ac?;., ^ splendid, Prad^t'bolt, adj.,\ magnificent. 462 VOCABULARY. 2)er ^räfibent', —eu, pl. —en, presi- \ dent. ^re'bigeit, v. tr., to preach. 2)er 'ijiJre'biger, —ê, preacher. 2iie ijj're'bigt,—,pl.—en, sermon 2)er ^ret§, —pl. —e, price. „ ij)rt'ma=SSec^feí, —ê, first bill of exchange. „ ipde'ftev, —eS, pi —, priest. „ ipting,—en, pi.—en, prince, ^rohi'rcn, v. tr., to try. ®er ißro^effor, —§, pi ^rofeffo'rcn, Sie ^ro'fa, —, prose. [professor. iprofa'tfc!^, adj., prosaic. 2)a§ iprobtanffci^iff, ship conveying provisions for the army, transport ®te ißrotoinj', —, pl. —en, province. ®er ^falm, —e§, pi. —en, psalm. „ ipuië, —e0,pî. —e, pulse. „ ^untt, —eê, pl. ißunl'te, point, ißunfti'ren, v. tr., to point, dot. 5)ic iiiu^':|3e, —, pi —n, doll. £1. Cuabrat', —e§, pi. —c, square. ®te Ouabrat'metle, square mile. „ Ouart, —es, pi. —e, quart. S)ie Ouel'le, —, pi —n, source. Ouitt, adj., free (from). ¿)te Ouit'tung, —, receipt. 2)erQuotient', —en, pi. —en, quo¬ tient. 8h Ser 9îa'6e, —n, pl. —n, raven. Sie 8ia'd)e, —, revenge. [self. Síü'd^en, V. refl., to avenge him- 3îa'gen, v. intr., to reach, project. §erbor'ragen, to project. Ser 9îang, —e6, pl. 9íüng'e, rank, or¬ der, degree, class. Sîafd;, adj., quick, swift, rash. Ser 9îath, —eö, counsel, advice. Ser éíatl), —eê,pi. 9íü't[)e, coun¬ selor. Saê council-house, city hall. [guess. 9îa't()en, v. ir. intr., to advise, SaS Síütí/feí, —§, pl. —, riddle. Ser Sîauh, —eê, pl. —, robber}'. Ser 9iäu'hcr, —ö,pi.—, robber. 9îau'c^en, v. inlr., to smoke. Ser 9îaud;, —e§, smoke. Sa§ 9îeB'()n(;n, —c§,pi. 9îeh'^û[;ner, partridge. Sic 9îe'be, —, pl. —n, grape vine. Dîec^'nen, v. tr., to ree\ün. [count. Sic 8îcd/nnng, —, pi—en, ac- t, 9îe'd)euîc^aft, —, account. 8íed;t, adj., right. Sie 9îed/te, —, right hand. 9îec^tê, adv., to the right. Sa§ 9îecbt, —e§, or bie 9îeci^ts'» in iff enf c^af t,—, j urisprudence SîecE'en, v. tr. and refl., to extend. 9îe'ben, v. intr., to speak, talk. 9îeb'Iidi, adj., honest, fair, brave. Sic 9îeforination', —, reformation. u 9îe'gei, —, pl. —n, rule. 9íe'geímü^ig, adj., regular, [ty. Sie 9íe'geímübigíeit, —, regulari- üíe'gcn, v. tr., to stir, excite. Ser 9îe'gen, —8, rain, raining. 9îeg'nc.t, v. intr. impers., to rain. Ser 9Î/genbogen, —8, rainbow. „ Sie'gengnß, —c8, pL »üffe, sudden and violent rain. „ aîe'genft^irm, —c8, ]>l. —c, umbrella. Ser 9îcgcnt', —en, pi —en, regent. Sie Sîegen'tin, —, pi —nen, re¬ gent. Sîegie'ren, v. tr., to rule, govern. Sie 9îegie'rnng, —,pl.—en, gov¬ ernment. [regiment. Sa8 9icgiinent', —c8, ;>/. —er, Sie 9îe'gitug, —,pl—en, movement, motion. VOCABULARY. 463 9ÎCÎ), —C6, pL —C, roe, deer. 9iei'bcn, v. ir. tr., to rub, grind. 3îcid;, adj., rich. S)cr9îeid/tÎHtm,—e-3,^Z.=tí)ümer, riches, wealth, opulence. !2)a3 9icid;, —ië,pl.—e, reign, govern¬ ment, kingdom, empire. Sie Sîcidjê'beriammlung, Assem¬ bly of the States of the (Ger¬ man) Empire. Sîeif, adj., ripe. Sie 9îei'^e,—,pl.—n,row, rank, turn Ser Sîeini, —e8,;>z. —e, rhyme. 9îein, adj., pure, clean. Sie Sieiii'^eit, —, purity. 3îei'necîe'5udj§, Reynard the fox. Ser Üíeiá, —cô, rice, [rice pudding. Ser Síeió'pubbiiig, —8, pl. —8, Sie 9íei8'íubb'^> "ce soup. Síei'íen, v. intr., to travel. Sie üíeife, —, pl. —n, journey. Ser 9îei'icîcffer, —i,pl. —, trav¬ eling trunk. Siei'ßen, v. ir. tr., to tear. Sîei'ten, v. ir. intr., to ride (on horse¬ back). Sîei'jen, v. tr., to irritate, provoke. Sie üieíigiou', —, religion, üíe^ari'ren, v. tr., to repair. Sie 9Íei)etir'uí)r, repeating Avatch. Ser SÍcisrajentant', —en, pl.—en, rep¬ resentative. Sie 9íebnbíií', —, pl. —eu, republic. SerDîeft, —e8,;>/.—e, rest, remainder tieften, v. tr., to save. Sa8 9îet'tung8boot, life-boat. Ser 9îct'tig, —c8, pl. —e, radish. „ 9î(;cumati8'mu8, —, rheumatism. 8îid)'teu, V. tr., to adjust, direct. Ser 9îid;'ter, —8, pZ. —,judge. Sie 9îid/tiing,—,}d. —en, direc¬ tion. 9iid/tig, rtiZ;'.,right, accurate, true Sa8 9îie8, —c8,pZ. —e, ream. Ser 9iie'fe, —n, pi. —n, giant. 9Íie'íengro^, adj., large as a giant Sa8 9îinb,—e8,pZ.—er, horned cattle Ser éiiu'berbrateu, roast beef. Sa8 síinb'fleifd), beef. Ser 9îing, —t^,pl. —e, ring. Siing'ein, v. tr., to provide Avith rings; geriug'elt, arranged in rings. [city. Sie Diing'mauer, wall around a 9îing8, adv., around. Ser 9îit'tcr,—8,pZ. —, rider, knight. Sa8 9iit'tergut, manor. Siit'tcrlid;, adj., chivahy. Ser 9îc(f, —es, pl. Siöd'e, coat. „ 9îog'gcn,—8, rye. [reed. Sa8 9îo()r, —e8, pi. —e and 9îôf)'rcn, Ser Siomaii', —c8, pi. —e, romance. Sîoman'tifd;, adj., romantic. Sie Sîo'fe, —, pl. —n, rose. Sîo'fa, adj., rose-colored. 9îot(;, adj., red. Sie 9íü'bc, —, pl. —n, rape. Sie gelbe 9îu'bc, carrot. „ rotbe 9íü'be, beet. „ ireijje 9íü'be, turnip. Ser ÜíücE'en,—8,pl.—, back. Sil ben Slüden fallen, to attack the rear. Ser Diüd'bíicí, —c8, pZ. —e, glance backAvard, retrospect. Sie Siüd'fidjt, —, pl. —en, re¬ spect, regard, consideration. SKÜd'irärtS, adv., backward. Sa8 Sîu'ber, —8, ¡d. —, rudder. 9íüí;'mcn, v. rejl., to be proud, boast. 9îut;m'bcll, oíZ/.,glorious, famous 9îu'fen, V. ir. tr., to call, cry out. Sie 9ín'í)e, —, rest, tranquillity. 9{u'l)en, V. intr., to rest, repose. 9íü^'ren,u. tr., to touch, beat. 9íü^'rig, adj., stirring, active, nimble. Sic 9iui'ne, —, pi. —n, ruin. 9îunb, adj., round. [root. Sie 9îu'tijc, —, pl. —n, root, perclu 464 VOCABULARY. ®er @aaí,—0ä'ic, parlor,-hall 2)te 0a'd;e, —, pi. —n, thing, affair, cause; pi. goods, furniture, bag¬ gage. 3)er 0ad, —e§, pi. B'dd't, sack, bag. 0ä'en, V. tr., to sow. $ev 0aifian', —§, morocco leather. ®te 0a'ge, —,pl. —u, tradition, 0a'gen, v. tr., to say. 2)ie 0a(}'ne, —, cream. 2)a§ 0aiä,—î§,pl. —e, salt. 2)er 0a'men,—S, ]>l. —, seed. 0am'meitt, v. tr., to collect. Sie 0amm'lung, —, pi. —en, col¬ lection. Ser 0am'met, —8, pi. —e, velvet. 0ammt,/jj-cp., with, together with. Ser 0anb, —es, sand. 0an'big, adj., sandy. 0anit, adj., soft, gentle, mild. Sie 0arberíe, —e, ¡>1. —n, sardine. 0att, adj.-, satisfied, satiated. Ser 0at'teí, —8, pl. —, saddle. Ser 0att'íer,—9,})l.—, saddler- Ser 0a^,—t^,pl. 0ä'^e, leap, jump, 0an'er, sour. [sentence. Sie 0au'ce, —, Jtl. —n, sauce, gravy. 0au'gen, v. ir. intr., to suck, drink. 5lu8'iangen, to drain, impoverish. Sie 0c^aar, —, pi. —en, troop, host. Ser 0d;a'ben, —8, pi. —, and 0c^ä'> ben, loss, damage, injury, harm. 0d;üb'íid;, adj., injurious. Sa8 0^at, —e8, pi. —e, sheep. Ser 0c^aft, —e8, pi. 0d;af te, shaft. 0c^ä'nten, v. refl., to be ashamed. Sie 0d;an'be, —, disgrace. Sie 0d)anb't()at, deed of infamy, ©djarf, «0^"., sharp. Ser ©d;ar'íad;,—e8, pl. —e, scarlet, r; 0d;at'ten, —8, pi. —, shadow. Sie ©d^atti'rnng, —, pi. —en, shade. [behold. ©d;au'en,r. tr. and intr., to look, see, Sa8 0d;au'f^iel, —e8, pi. —c, play, drama. ©c^ei'nen, v. ir. intr., to appear. 0d;en'fen, v. tr., to present. Sie ©t^er'be, —, pi. —n, potsherd, fragment of broken glass. Sa8 ©c^er'bengeric^t, ostracism, ©^en^'lid?, adj., hideous, horrible, ©t^id'en, V. tr., to send. Sie ©¿^ie'ne,—,pl. —n, tire, rail. 0d)ie'^en, v. ir. tr., to shoot. Sa8 ©c^iff, —e8, pi. —e, ship. Ser ©d?if'fer, —8, mariner. Sie ©djiffs'íeute Ipl.^, crew. Ser ©d)irm, —e8, pi. —e, screen. Sie ©(^íat^t,—,pl.—en, battle, fight Ser ©diíaf, '—e8, sleep. ©c^ia'fen, v. ir. intr., to sleep. Sa8 ©c^Iafjimmer, bedroom, ©c^ia'gen, v. ir. intr., to strike, beat; fc^Iagen gu, to unite with. Ser @^íag, —e8, pl. ©ti)ía'ge, blow, stroke, stroke of apo¬ plexy. [snake. Sie ©d^íang'e, —, pl. —it, serpent, ©d}íed)t, , bad. Ser ©d^íei'er, —?>,pl. —, veil. ©C^Iie'jjen, v. ir. tr., to close. Sa8 ©(^io§, —, pi. ©c^tof'fer, lock, castle. Ser ©¿í)Iu^, —c8, pl. ©^lüHf; close, conclusion. Ser ©c^íüí'íeí, —8, pl. —, key. ©c^nted'en, v.tr., to taste. [able. ©c^niad'^a[t, adj., savory, palat- ©d;mei'jen, v. ir. intr., to melt. Ser ©djmerg,—t^,pl. —en, pain, ©^nterj'iid^, adj., painful. ©d;merg'lD8, adj., painless. Ser ©d^ntieb, —e8, pi. —e, smith, ©d^mild'en, v. tr., to adorn. ©(i^na))'l|)en, v. tr., to snap at, catch at. Ser ©d^nee, —8, snow. ©¿^nei'cn, n. intr.vnpers., to snow VOCABULAEY 4C5 Sc^iiei'ben, v. ir. intr., to cut. 3)er ed^nei'ber,—&,pl.—, tailor, ©djuelí, adj., fast, rapid. 2)er ©d;neü'jucj, express train. Sd^ön, adj., beautiful, fine. 2)te 0cbön'[)eit,^/. —en, beauty. 0d)cn, adv., already. 0d;o'neu, v. tr., to spare. 2)0* 0(^ccÎ3 or0(^o§,—t^,pl. 0d;ö'ße, lap, skirt ; bed of a stream. 2ie 0d;vau'be, —, pi. —n, screw. 0d;re(i'en, tr., to frighten. [ble. 0c^re(í'lid), adj., frightful, terri- 0d^rei'bcn, v. ir. tr., to ivrite. 2aá0d;reib'l)a^jier,writing-paper 2ie 0d}rift,—, pi. —en, writing. „ ^eilige 0d;rtít, holy writ. „ 0d;rift'ibvad;e, language of literature. 0^rei'en, i*. ir. intr., to cry, call. 2er 0d)ritt,—e§, pi. —e, step. 2er 0¿^ii(b —cá, pl. —e, shoe. 2er 0(^u()'mad;er, —ö, pl. —, shoemaker. „ 0d;iih'mad?er3eíelí, —en, pl. —en, journeyman shoemaker. 2te 0cbiiíb, —, pl. —en, debt, guilt ; 0te ftnb 0d;nib baran, it is your fault. 0(^ní'big, adj., guilty, in debt. 2ie 0d)u'ie,—, pi. —en, school. 2er 0d;il'ier,—§,pl.—, scholar. 2a§ 0cÍ^ní'í)nn§, school-house. 2te 0c^nrter, —,pl. —n, shoulder. „ ©d)iin'ct, —,ld- —n, dish, howl, ©t^iuacb, adj., weak. [in-law. 2er 0d;ina'ger, —d, pi. —, hrother- 2iî 0cbtüä'gertn, —, pl. —nen, sister-in-law. 0d;njan'îen, r. într., tovacillate, tot- .¿dpuar^, arf;'., black. [ter. »¿dpua'yen, v. intr., to chatter, prattle. 0ri;n)ei'fen, v. intr., to rove (extrav¬ agantly). 0(^roei'gcn, v. ir. intr., to he silent. u 2aS 0(i)irein, —e§, pi. —c, hog. 2a8 ©dpret'nefleiidb pork, ©c^tnel'len, v. ir. intr., to swell. Sln'íebWelíen, to rise (in afreshet). 0d;tüer, adj., heavy, difficult, severe. 2ie 0d)tue're, —, weight, heaviness, ©c^trer'ltd;, adv., with difficulty, hardly. 2a§ 0d;ffiert, —e§, pi. —er, .sword. 2ie 0c^we'fter, —, pi. —n, sister. 2er ©(^tüie'flerhater, smntter, =[o[)n, stockier, father-in-law, etc. 0^tt>ie'rig, adj., difficult. 0d^ffiim men, v. ir. intr., to swim. 0d;lt)in'ben, v. ir. intr., to disappear. 0(^mtn'bein, v. intr., to he dizzy. 2er 0c^min'bei, —d, dizziness. 0d;minb'lic^, adj., dizzy. 2ie 0cbmmb'ind)t, —, consumption. 0dbtt)ö'ren, v. ir. intr., to swear. 0d}it)ÜÍ, adj., sultry. 0ec^6, six. 2er 0ee, —6, pi. —n, lake. 2ie 0ee, —, pi. —n, sea, ocean. 2ag 0ee'hab, —e'?, pi. »häber, sea-hath. ©ee'irant, adj., sea-sick. 2ie ©ee'frant^eit,—, sea-sickness „ 0ee'mad)t, naval power. „ ©ee'reife, sea-voyage. 2er 0ee'räuher, pirate. If ©ee'folbat, marine. 0ee'tÜd)tig, adj., seaworthy. 2er 0ee'hogel, sea-fowl. 2a§ 0ee'maffer, sea-water. 2er ©ee'mtnb, sea-breeze. 2ie 0ee'ic, —, pi. —n, soul. 2aô 0e'fleí, —8, pl. —, sail. 0e'geln, v. intr., to sail. 2er 0e'gen, —pi. —, blessing, 0eg'nen, tr., to hiess. 2te 0eg'nnng, —, pi.—en. bless- 0e'()en, v. ir. tr., to see. [ing. 0c(;r,«(/u., very, greatiy, sorely. 2ie 0ei'be, —, pi. —n, silk. 2 á66 VOCABULARY. S)a8 @ei'benjeug, —eS, pl. —e, ©ein, Iiis. [silk cloth, ©ein, w. ir. intr., to be. ©eit, pre/)., since. 2)ie ©ci'te, —, j>l. —n, side. ©el'ber, /¡ron., self (§ 108, Rem. 2). ©elbft, /¡roil., self (§ 108, Rem. 2); adv., even. 2)er ©dbft'niovb, suicide. ©e'lig, adj., blessed, happy. 2)ie ©e'íigíeit,—, happiness, bliss ©el'teil, aciy., seldom, rarely. ©eit'fam, adj., strange, queer. ®ie ©eni'mei, —, pi. —n, roll (of bread). ©en'fen, v. tr., to let dmvn, sink. S)er ©e^Jtem'ber, —September. 2)te ©erbiet'te, —, pl. —n, napkin, ©e^'en, v. tr., to set, put, place ; v. refl., to take a seat, be seated. ®er ©^atnl, —ê, pl. —S or —e, shawl, ©id), refl. /¡ron., one's self, himself, herself, itself; /¡I., themselves, yourself. @i'd)ern, v. tr., to secure, insure. S)ie ©ic^t, —, sight ; nat^ ©id;t, at sight. ©ie, pron., she, her ; they, them ; you. 2)aê ©ieb, —eê, /¡I. —e, sieve. ©ie'beit, V. tr.. to sift. ©ie'ben, seven. 2)er ©ieg, —cê, /¡I. —e, victory, ©ie'gen, v. tr., to conquer, ©ieg'reid), adj., victorious. S)a§ ©ic'get, —ê, /¡l. —, seal. ©ie'geln, v. tr., to seal. 2)aö ©ií'ber, —ö, silver. ©ing'en, v. ir. intr., to sing. 2)er ©ing'nogei, bird of song. S)iî ©it'te, —, /¡I. —n, custom. $>er ©i^, —e§, pi. —e, abode, seat, ©i^'en, V. ir. intr., to sit. 2)ie ©iiyung, —,pl.—cn, session ©la'bii«^, adj., Slavic. ©0, adv. and cory., so, thus, as. ©oe',l6en or fo e'beit, adj., just now, just then, just at the time. ©o'fern, adv. and conj., so far, if, in case. ©ogieid/,ac?y., immediately. 2)ie ©ob'le, —, pi. —n, sole. $er ©Dipt, —e§, /¡l. ©c^ne, son, ©ol'cber, pron., such. 2)er ©olbat', —zn, pi.—en, soldier, ©ol'len, I', ir., to be obliged. 2)er ©ont'nier, —pl. —, summer, ©on'bern, conJ., but. 2)ie ©on'ne, —, /¡I. —n, sun. 2)er ©onnenanf'gang, sunrise. „ ©onnennn'tergang, sunset. „ ©on'nenjdprm, parasol. ©on'nig, adj., sunny. 3)er ©onn'tag, —ê, Sunday. ©on[t, adv. and conJ., formerly, other¬ wise. S)ie ©or'ge, —, /¡I. —n, care. ©org'fant, adj., careful. Siie ©bal'te, —, pi. —n, column, ©ba'ren, v. tr., to spare, save, ©pat, adj. and adv., late. ©iJOgie'ren, v. intr. (to go for pleasure). @. geben, to talk a walk, [riage. ©. fahren, to take a lide in a car- ©. reiten, to take a ride on horse¬ back. [ment. 2)ie ©f>ei'je,—t,/)l.—n, food, nourish- ©bei'fen, v. tr., to eat, dine. 2)er ©bei'fefaai, dining-room. 3)ie ©befulation', —,/)l.—en, specu¬ lation. „ ©bbä'rt, —, /¡I. —n, sphere. 2)er ©bie'gel, —ê, pl. —, mirror. 2)aë ©biel, —eg, pi. —e, play, ©bie'len, v. intr., to play. 3)er ©bion', —g, pi. —e, spy. 2)ag ©bital', —eg,/)/, staler, hospital. 2)ie ©bi^'e,—, pi.—n,point; /)/.,lace ®er ©bife'enfcbieier, lace veil, ©bot'ten, V. tr., to deride, ridicule, banter, make sport. VOCABULARY. 467 ©er —»,pl.—,derider, foolish jester. [guage. 2)ie 3pra'd;c, —, speech, laii- 2)ie Äjjvad/biitiung, —, forma¬ tion of a language. 2)cr ©^jrad^'gebraud;, laws of usage in a language. ®)jre'c^en, v. ir. intr., to speak, talk. 2)ii vHprcd^'ftunbe,hourappointed to receive calls on business. @b^id;'mort, proverb, [out. ''"•5 stretch out, spread 0preng'en, Î'. tr., to cause to burst; auêeitian'bcï fpvcng'eu, to scatter suddenly. ®a§ @prtd/mort, proverb. to spring, leap, ^cr 0puf, —e?, spectre. [bouse). 0pu'îen, V. intr., to be haunted (as a 0put'(;aft, ghostlike, imaginary. Sie 0plli:, —,pl.—ctt, trace, footstep. Ser 0taat, —ei, }>L —en, state, na¬ tion ; pomp, magnificent array, fine dress. Ser 0tab, —eS, pi. 0tiä'be, staff. Ser 0ta'd)eí,—§,/j/.-n,prickle, thorn Sie ©ta'd^elbeerc, gooseberry. 0ta'd;>eiid)t, adj., thorny. Sie 0tabt, —,pl. ©täb'te, city. [city. Sag 0täbtc^en, —g, pl.—, small ©täb'tijd;, adj., civic, municipal. Ser 0ta^í, —eg, steel. [pen. Sie ©taí^l'teber, —, pl.—n, steel Ser 0taí;t'ftid;, —eg, pl.—e, steel engraving. Ser 0tamm, —;g, pi. ©täm'me, trunk, body, stem, tribe, family, ©tant'men, v.ínír., to be descend¬ ed (from). [race. Ser 0tamm'toater, father of a Ser 0tanb, —eg, pi. 0tän'be, condi¬ tion, rank. 0tarî, arf;'., strong. Sie 0tatt, —, pi. 0tät'te, place. 0tatt, pre/)., instead of. 0tatt'finben, v. intr., to take place 0tatt'iid;, adj., stately, grand. 0teá'en, v. tr., to stick, fasten. Ser 0tecí'brief, advertisement for the apprehension of a delin¬ quent or criminal. 0te(fbrief(id; bericrgen, to de¬ scribe a criminal in a 0tecf'* brief. Sie 0ted'nabeí, —, pl. —n, pin. 0te'ben, v. ir. intr., to stand. 0te^'ien, v. ir. tr., to steal. 0teif, adj., Stift". 0tei'gen, v. ir. intr., to mount, ascend. 0teii, adj., steep. Ser 0tein, —eg, pL —e, stone. 0tein'[)art, adj., bard as stone, ©terien, v. tr., to place, put, set up. Sie 0tel'íe, —,pl. —n, position. „ ©teriung, —, pi. —en, posi- 0tcr'ben, v. ir. intr., to die. [tion. 0terb'iic^, adj., mortal. Ser 0tern, —eg, pi. —e, star. Sag ©tern'bilb, —eg, pi. —er, constellation. 0tet or ftvit, adj., steady, firm. 0tetg or [iätg, adv., continually. Sie 0teu'er, —, pi. —n, tax, duties. 0teu'erpfticbtig, adj., subject to tax or duty. 0ti(i'en, V. tr., to embroider. Ser 0tie'feí, —g, pl. —, boot. Ser ©tie'felîned;t, boot-jack. Ser 0tiefbater, »mutter, 'fobit, »tod)» ter, step-father, step-mother, etc. 0tif'ten, V. tr., to found, establish. 0tili, adj., still. Sie ©tille,—, quietness, stillness ©tiE'fd^meigen, to keep silent. Sie ©tim'me, —, pi. —en, voice. „ ©tir'lie, —, pi. —n, brow. Ser ©toci, —eg, pi. ©tö'de, stick, cane ; story (of a bouse). Ser ©toff, —eg, ¡¡I. —e, stuff, sub- ©toii,a(/;"., proud. [stance. 468 VOCABULARY. 0to'ßen, V. ir. tr., to hit, strike. 2)er ©tra^í, —eê, pl. .—en, beam ray. ©tra^'íen, v. intr., to shine, ra¬ diate, beam. 2)ie ©tra'^e, —, pi. —n, street. 2)er ©tra'^enjunge, —n, ]>l. —n, street-boy, vagabond boy. 2)er ©trauß, —e§ or —en, pi. —e or —en, ostrich. ©tre'ben, v. intr., to strive. ©tred'en, v. refl., to extend (itself.) 2)er ©treic^,—e§,/>/.—e, stroke, blow 25er ©treit, —t^,pl. —e, contest. ©tret'ten, v. ir. intr., to contend, ©treng, adj., strict, severe. ©trid'en, v. tr., to knit. ®ie ©trid'nabel, knitting-needle. ®er ©trom, —t^,pl. ©tröme, stream. „ ©trumbf, —e§, pi. ©trüm':|3Íe, stocking. ©trumbfbanb, garter. S)te ©tu'he, —, pi. —n, room. [room. 3!)a§ ©tiib'^en,—S,pl.—, small S)a8 ©tiid, —e8, pi. —C, piece. 25er Sia'baf, —§, pi. —e tobacco. 2!a'bein, v. tr., to blame. 2)er Sag, —e8, pi. —e, day. [break. ®er Sa'ge8anbrud^, —e8, day- Säg'Iii^, adj., daily. Sie Satl'íe, —, pl. —n, waist. Sa§ Salent', —e8, pl. —e, talent. Salent'bott, adj., talented. Sie San'te, —, pl. —n, aunt. Sab'fer, adj., valiant, brave. Sie Sab'ferïeit, —, valor, bravery Sie Sa'ft^e, —, pl. —en, pocket. Ser Sa'jcbenbieb, pick-pocket. Sa8 Sa'íc^eittucb, pocket-hand¬ kerchief. Sie Sa'í(^enu()r, watch. Sie SaHßf —cup. Saub, adj., deaf. Sanb'ftuntnt, adj., deaf and dumb Sa8©tu'biutn,—8,;)/.©tu'bien,study ©tubi'ren, v. tr., to study. Sie ©tu'fe, —, pi. —en, step. ©tu'fentDeije, adv., gradually, ©tunnn, adj., dumb. Sie ©tun'be,—,pl.—en, hour, lesson Sa8 ©tuu'bengeben, —8, giving instruction or lessons. Ser ©turm,—e8,pf ©tür'me,storm, ©tür'jen, v. intr., to fall, plunge. ©tür'miíá), adj., stormy, ©u'c^en, r. tr., to seek; au8'flic^en, to select. Ser ©üb, —e8, or ©ü'ben, —8, south. ©Üb'licb, adj., southerly, to the south. Sie ©unt'tnc, —, pi. —n, sum. Ser ©untj)í, —e8,pf ©üm'í^je, swamp Sa8 ©umbfianb, swampy land. Sie ©ün'be, —, pl. —n, sin. Ser ©ûn'benjaïï, fall of our first parents. Sie ©ub'í>e, —, pl. —n, soup. ©Üj3, adj., sweet. Säu'fclten, v.tr., to deceive, disappoint Sie Säu'fcjiung, —, deception, delusion. Ser Seí'íer, —8, pl. —, plate. Sa8 S^aï, —e8, pl. —e or S^ä'Icr, Sie Sbal'gegenb, region of the val- Ser Sí>a'íer, —8, pl. —, thaler. [ley. S^ä'tig, adj., active, diligent. Ser Sbec, —8, pl. — and —8, tea. Ser Sbeií, —18, pl. —e, part. Sbei'Ien, v. tr., to divide, S^eil'baft or t^eii'^aftig, adj., participant (in), partaking (of). Sie S^eil'na^me, —, participa- S^eilS, adr., partly. [tien. S^iu'er, adj., dear. Sa8 Sbier, —e8, pi. —e, animal. Ser Sbor, —en, pi. —en, fool. Sie ¿bor'íieit, —, pl. —en, folly. VOCABULARY. 469 î£Î>S'ri(^t, adj., foolish. 2)a8 2:^or, —eS, pi. —e, gate, door. 2^un, V. ir. tr., to do, 2)te ¿í)ü're, —, pl. —n, door. ®er ï^urm, —i^,pl. SPr'me, tower Sief, adj., deep. 2)ie ¿ie'fe, —, depth. 2)a8 ïicf ianb, low land. ■J^er Sifd), —e6, pi. —e, table. Ser ¿ifc^'ícr,—Q,pl.—, cabinet¬ maker. Sa8 Sifc^'tu^, table-cloth. Sie Sod;'ter,—,jo/.Söd/ter, daughter Sie Söc^'terft^ule, young ladies' school. Ser Sob, —es, death. Ser So'beôfatÎ, death, decease. Sie So'beSftiíte, stillness of death Söb'ten, v. tr., to kill. Ser Son, —t9,pl. Sone, sound, tone. Sra'gen, v. ir. tr., to carry. Srau'en, v. intr., to trust. Srau'rig, adj., sad, sorrowful. Ser Sraum, —i^,pl. Sräu'me, dream lle'hel, adj., evil, bad. Sa§ Ue'bel, —8, pi. —, evil, ill. Ser Ue'beíftanb, evil, misfortune. Ue'heit, V. tr., to exercise. Sie Ue'bung,—, p/.—en, exercise Ue'ber, prep., over, above, upon. Sie Ue'beria^rt, journey over. Ser Ue'bergang, transition. Ueberban^Jt', adv., in general. Ueberle'gen, to consider, reflect upon. Sie Ue'bermacbt, superior force. Ue'bermäßig, adj., excessive, ex¬ orbitant. Ser lle'bermutb, arrogance, inso¬ lence. [lodge. Uebernad)'ten, to pass the night, Uebernel/men, to take charge of. Ueberre'ben, to overpersuade. Ser Sräu'mer,—3, pi-—, dream- Sref'jen, v. ir. tr., to meet, hit. [er. Srei'ben, v. ir. tr., to drive, urge. Sie Srel^'i^e, —, pi. —n, stair, stair¬ way. Sre'ten, v. ir. intr., to tread; ein'trc^ ten, to enter, set in. Sreu, adj., true, faithful. Sie Sren'e, —, faithfulness. Sreu'berjig, adj., true-hearted. Sren'ioS, adj., faithless. Sie Sren'ío[ígÍeit, —, faithless¬ ness, treachery. Ser Srieb,—eS,;?/.—e, driving, force, instinct, impulse. Srin'ien, v. ir. tr., to drink. Srint'bar, adj., fit to drink. Srod'en, adj., dry. Sie Srom'meí, —, pl. —n, drum. Srö'ften, v. tr., to console. Sa8 Snd;, —e8, pi. Sü'cber, cloth. Sie Su'genb, —,pl. —en, virtue. Su'genbbaft, adj., virtuous. Ser Sb'jîbfl^f typhus fever. Ser Ue'berrocf, overcoat. Ueberje^'en, to translate, [lator. Ser Ueberfelj'er,—§,pl.—, trans- Sie lleberie^'nng, —, pi. —en, translation. Uebertref'fen, to surpass, excel. Ueberjie'ben, to cover. Ueberjen'gen, v. tr., to convince, lie'brig, adj., remaining (over). Ue'brigenö, conj., moreover. Sa8 U'[er, —8, pi. —, shore, bank. Sie Ubr, —, pi. —en, clock, Avatch. 2öa8 ift biellbr? What time is it? S3Í8 bier Ubr, till four o'clock. Urn,;??-?;;., around, about, at. llm'arbeiten, v. tr,, to work over, remodel, revise, llm'bringen, to kill, murder. Ser Uin'íang,—8, circumference. 470 VOCABULARY. Umfaf'jol, V. tr., to embrace. 2)ieUm¿je'í)un¡3, —, pl.—en, sur¬ rounding, environs. Umi}e'í;cn, to avoid, evade. 2)ev Um'gaiiß, way around, inter¬ course. Uintjer', adv., round about. Um^er'ftreifen, v. intr., to rove about. S)er llm'ftiinb,—eö, p/. Um'ftänbe, condition, circumstance. 2)ie Un'abfjängißfcit, —, independence. Un'angenehm, adj., unpleasant. Un'ä^nlidj, adj., unlike. Un'anfmerffam, adj., inattentive, llnan^fiibr'bar, adj., unfeasible, that can not be e.xecuted. Un' begierig, adj., undesirous, unsolicit- ous. [inconceivable. Unbegreiflich, adj., incomprehensible, Unbefcha'Det, prep., without detriment or injury to. Unbefd^reib'lirh, adj., indescribable. Un'befcheiben, adj., immodest. Unb,conj., and. Un'banibar, adj., unthankful. Unenb'iid;, adj., endless, infinite. Un'erfahren, adj., inexperienced. Un'erheblid;, adj., inconsiderable, un¬ important, trifling. [piiy- Un'entgeitlid;, adj. gratuitous, without Unermejj'Iidl, arf/., immeasurable. 2)er Un'faíí, —z^,pl. Un'fäüe, misfor¬ tune, disaster. Un'förmiid;, adj., ill shaped, ugly. Un'frennblich, adj., unfriendly, unkind Un'gebilbet, adj., uncultivated, rude. Ungefähr', adv., about, nearly. Un'gemein, adj., uncommon. Un'geiPt^, adj., uncertain. Un'getPÖhnlid), adj., unusual. Un'gtüd, —3, misfortune. Un'gíücííid;, adj., unhappy, [ly. Un'gUtd'íid)crwei)e,rtc/i;.,unhappi- 2)ie Un'gnabe, —, disgrace, disfavor. Un'heilbar, adj., incurable. ®ie U'ntfornt, —, pi —en, uniform, S)ie Uniberfität',—, />/. —en, university Un'mittelbar, adj., immediate. Un'möglich, adj., impossible. 2)a3 Un'redjt, —e3, wrong, injury; Un'red)t Ipben, to be wrong. Un'ruhtg, adj., restless. Un3,/»ron., us. Un'fer,7»ron., our. 3)er Unf'rigc,/»ron., ours. S)er Un'jinn, —e3, pi. —e, nonsense. Un'fid;tbar, adj., invisible. Un'ftät, adj., unsteady, unfixed, rov¬ ing, nomadic. Un'ten, adv., under, below, down. Un'ter, prep., under, among. Un'tergehen, to go down, set. $er Un'tergang,—e3,going down, setting, destruction, [side of. Un'terhciib,/»re/»., below, on the lower Unterhal'ten, to entertain. [nean. Un'terirbifd;, under ground, subterra- Unterneh'tnen, to undertake. 2)ie Unterneh'mnng, —,pl. —en, un¬ dertaking. Unterfchei'ben, to distinguish. ¿ev Un'terfdhieb,—t^,pl.—e, dif- Unterfn'djen, to investigate, [ference. 2)te Un'tertaffe, —, pi.—en, saucer. Ser Un'terthan, —3 or —en, pi.—en, subject. Untfrtüeg3', adv., on the way. Sie Un'terineít, lower regions. Un'tiid^tig, adj., unfit, unqualified. Unberblen'bet, adj., seeing plainly, not dazzled. Un'bernünftig, adj., unreasonable. Un'bernd;tet,a£(/'., unperformed ; nn'» berrid^tcter 0a'd;e, with purpose unaccomplished. Un'lbilUoinmen, adj., unwelcome, Un'lbiffenb, adj., ignorant. Un'tbiivbig, adj., unworthy. Un'jnfricben, adj., discontented. VOCABULARY. 471 Un'jtïelbeutig, adj., unequivocal. 2)er Ur'gvcßijatcr ; ^mutter, great- grandñither ; great-grandmother. 2)tc llr'fadje, —, jd. —n, cause. 2)ev Ut'ipvung, —origin, source. Ur'iïJïûnglid;, adj., original. 2)ie 5Ba'ie, —, pi. —n, vase. 2)er 35a'ter, —ë, pl. 35a'tcv, father. 2)a§ 35a'terlaub, fatherland, na¬ tive country. 35ä'terlid;, adj., paternal. ®ie 33a'ter[tabt, native city. 2)te 35evab'rebung, ——en, agree¬ ment, stipulation, contract. 35era'breidjcn, v. tr., to deliver, give, hand over. ®ie 35eväu'berung, —, pl.—en, change „ 35erar'mung, —, impoverishing. 35eri>an'nen, v. tr., to banish. 2)te35erban'nung,—, banishment. 35er!6tn'ben, unite ; bind wrongly. SSerbinb'iid;, adj., obligatory. 2)te 35erbinb'n^ieit, —, jd. —en, liability, obligation. 2)ie 35eri)tn'bung,—,/>/.—en, act of uniting; bie @'[;etoerbin= bung, marriage. 35erbtt'ten, v. ir. tr., to decline. 35erbiei'c^en, v. intr., to turn pale; be§ îobeë Pcrbleidjen, to expire, die. 3)ec 35erbre'd;er, —S, pi. —, criminal. 35erbitn'ben, v. tr., to unite, ally, con¬ federate. S)er 35erbad;t', —8, suspicion. 35erbäd;'ttg, adj., suspicious. jDaS 35erbe(i', —§, pi. —e, quarter¬ deck. 35erber'ben, v. ir. tr., to spoil, destroy. 35erberb'Iidb adj., destructible. 35ete(/ren, v. tr., to honor. 35erei'ntgen, v. tr., to unite. 2)ie 35erei'nigung,—, pi. —en, union. 3>erei'tein, v. tr., to frustrate, baffle. 2)aS Ur't^eii, —8, pi. —e, judgment, decree, verdict. Ur't^eilen, v. tr. and intr., to judge, express an opinion about. 2)er Ur'tbeiibibntd;, —eS, pi. 0í)rüd)e, decision, decree. 5. 2)er 35erfali', —8, decline, decay, ruin. „ 33eríaf'íer, —8, jd. —, author, composer. [persecute. 35erjorgen, v.tr., to pursue, prosecute, 35ergang'en, past, gone. [tory. 35ergäng'lid;, at/;'.,fleeting, transi- 35erge'ben8, adv., in vain. 35ergeb'Udb adj., useless, futile. 35crgeí'íen, v. ir. tr., to forget. 35ergiei'c^en, v. ir. tr., to compare. ®a8 35ergnü'gen, —8, pl. —, pleasure 35ergra'bcn, v. ir. tr., to bury. 33ergrö'§ern, v. tr., to enlarge, [tion. 2)a8 35er^ali'nifl,— e8,;>/.—e, propor- 35eri)ee'ren, v. tr., to devastate. 35cv[;eVlen, v. tr., to hide, conceal. ®ev 35erfanf', —8, sale. 35evíau'íen, v. tr., to sell. S)er 35erîe[)r, —8, traffic, commerce. Ser 35eríag', —8, funds, publishing house. Sa8 35eriag8'n3ert, publication. 35criang'en, v. tr., to desire, require. 35eríaí'jeu, v. tr., to leave, abandon ; fic^ berlaffen, to rely (upon). 35erie'gen, v. tr., to misplace. Sic 35erie'gen[)ett, —, embarrassment. 35eriei'[)en, v. ir. tr., to lend, bestow, 35evUe'ren, v. ir. tr., to lose, [confer. Ser ®erínft', —e8, pl. —e, loss, damage. 35eríu'ftig, adj., deprived of, forfeited. 35ermel/ren, v. tr., to increase. 35crniei'ben, v. ir. tr., to avoid. 35ermietf)en, v. tr., to rent. 35crmit'telft,/)r<'p., by means of. 35erniö'gen,to be able, have the power. 472 VOCABULARY. 25a§ SSerniiJ'gen, —ê, property. Sjermu't^en, v. tr., to conjecture. 33eïmut^'Îtd), ac^'., probable, that may be conjectured. 2)tC SJernunft, —, reason. „ ^erorb'uung, —, pL—en, decree. SBer^jflid/ten, v. tr., to bind, pledge. 2)er SBerratl;', —es, treason, perfidy. 25ervat^en, v. ir. tr., to betray. 3Serrei'fen, v. intr., to go on a journey. 25errtd/ten, v. tr.,to perform, conduct, dispatch. SSerja'gen, to refuse, deny ; tc^ bin jc^on perfagt, I am already engaged. SSevfftl'jen, v. tr., to oversalt, spoil. iBerfam'mein, v. tr., to collect. S)ie ^erfamm'iung, —, pi. —en, assembly. 35erfd?ie'ben, v. ir. tr., to put off, delay SSerjdjie'ben, adj., different, various. Sie iBerfc^ie'bení)eit, —, 2^1- —en, difference. [up. SSerfd^iie'ßen, u. ir. tr., to inclose, lock iBerfd^tnci'en, v. tr., to swallow up, ab¬ sorb. SSevfc^rei'ben, to write out, prescribe. 35er[c^inin'ben, v. ir. intr., to disappear SSerje^'en, to pi-ovide. 3Serii'c^ern, v. tr., to assure. Sie S5erfi'd;ening, —, pi. —en, assurance, insurance. 23erfinn'iid;en, v. tr., to render percep¬ tible to the senses, illustrate. SSeriö[)'nen, v. tr., to reconcile. 5Ber[bre'^en, to promise. [promise. SaS 25er[pre'd;en, —8, pi. —, SSerfte'ben, v. ir. tr., to understand. Set SSerftanb',—es, understanding 2$erfto'p[en, v. tr., to close up, stop. iBer[u'(^en, v. tr., to attempt, tempt. Set ¿erfud)', —eS, pi.—e, at¬ tempt. [temptation. Sie S5ev[u'd;nng, —, pi. —en, iSertpei'bigen, v. tr., to defend. Sl5ertí;ei'íen, v. tr., to distribute. SerSSertrag',—eS,j5/. SScrträ'ge, trea¬ ty, stipulation, contract. SSertra'gen, v. tr., to carry away, en¬ dure, put up with. SSevtrau'en, v. tr. and intr., to intrust, put trust in ; to o[jen one's heart, unbosom one's self. [tial. 2)etttau'Iid;, adj., familiar, confiden- 33erii'ben, v. tr.,to commit, perpetrate. Ü3erur'tf)eilen, v. tr., to condemn. Ser SSerboU'fommener, —8, pi. —, purifier, perfector. iBermanbt' (mit), adj., related (to). iBermei'fen, v. tr., to pass away. Sa8 SBerjeicp'ni^, —e8, pi. —e, cata¬ logue. Sa8 ÜSieí;, —e8, pi. —e, cattle. ]>ron., much ; adv., much, veiy. 3SieIieid}t', adv., perhaps. iBier, four. Sa8 33ier'tet, —8, pi.—, quarter. Ser 33o'geí, —8, pl. l^ö'gel, bird. Sa8 SSülf, —e8, pl. SJöl'ier, people. Ser ^öi'ferftamm, race. Sie lUiffermanberung, migration 35oíl, ac?;'., full. [of nations. 35oEbring'en,to accomplish, com¬ plete, perform, execute (see page 199). ÛSoïïen'ben, to complete, finish. Sie iBoUen'bnng, —, completion. SSoilfÜl/ren, to execute, perform. Sie iBolifüb'rung, —, execution. SBüI'íig, adj., full, complete. SSoHfom'men, adj., complete. Ser î5olÎ'monb, —e8, full moon. SSoU'ftdnbig, adj., complete, per- SSoUftreci'en, to execute. [feet. iBoIigie'fjen, to execute, carry into effect. 33on, pre})., of, from, bjq a'oout. ÜSor, i)rep., before, from ; bor acbt Sa» gen, a week ago. SSor'eilig, adj., hasty, rash, precipitate SSor'ent(>aiten, to withhold. VOCABULARY. 473 2)et 35ot'faf)r, —tn,pl.—ett, ancestor. S)er 3>cr'íaÚ,—cô,/>L3Sor'falle, event, incident, occurrence. ®cr ÍHH''gang, —e8,precedence,event 2)er 2>cr'ganijev, —S,pl. —, pre- SBcr'ijeben, to feign,pretend.[decessor. 3?or\3efierii,nc?i'., day before yesterday S?orf)er', adi\, previously. SBo'vivJ, adj., pre\'ious. 33or'îcmmcn, to occur. 2)te iBcv'íefuuc;, —, pl. —en, reading before an audience ; 33ot'lefung tjalten, to give an address. 2?or'(e^t, adj., next to the last. 2)er iBor'mittag, —6, forenoon. 2)er 23or'po[tcn, —§, pi. —, outpost, advanced guards. 2)er ißor'fa^, —e?, purpose, design. S)Í£ iBor'fíd;t, —, foresight, prudence. 3)te SSaa'rc, —, pi. —n, wares. SBad^'fatn, adj., watchful. SBad^'fen, v. ir. intr., to grow. SBaci'er, adj., brave, valiant. 2)ie SSaf'fe, —, pi. —n, weapon, arm. „ 2Sa'ge,—, pi. —n, scales, balance SSa'gen, v. tr., to venture, dare. ©elnagt', adj., rash. 2)er Söa'gen, —^,pl. —, wagon, cart, carriage. 2)ie SQSabt, —, pi.—en, choice, election 3Sät)'ien, v. tr., to choose, elect. 2öaf)r, adj., true, real. Sßal^v'Ijaft, adj., true, genuine. 2Bal;r{)af'tig, adj., true, positive. 2)te 2öai)r'i;eit, —, truth. S03af)r'nef)men, to perceive, [true. Sßaljt'fc^einitd^, what seems to be 2Bal)rfd;ein'itd;, adj., probable. SBä^'ren, v. intr., to last, endure. SBä^'renb, pre/)., during, [forest. 25er SBalb, —cd, pl. SBdl'ber, woods, 2)ic SBaub, —, pi. Söän'be, wall. 2)ic Söanb'ubv. clock. 35or'fi(f)tig, adj., prudent, cautious, ®ie iBor'fidjtigfeit, —, prudence. Sor'fingen, to sing to (one). iBcr'fpieien, to play before (one). ®ie ^or'ftabt, suburb. 2)er i8or'tí}CÍÍ, —8,p/.—e, advantage 35or'tbeilI;aft, ac^'., advantageous. iBortreff'lid;, adj., excellent. iBorii'ber, adv., near, past, by. SSorit'berfliegen, to fly past. 2>orü'6ergeben, to pass by. ®er 3Sor'tt>anb, —ed, pi. 33or'tt>änbe, 3Scv'tnärtd, adv., forward, [pretext. 3)er Sjor'miij, —ed, inconsiderate, cu¬ riosity, pertness, forwardness. 35or'n)t^tg, adj., inquisitive, over- curious, forward. SSorjüg'íid;, arft'., especially. 2)er 33ulfan', —d, pi. —e, volcano. SBan'bern, v. intr., to wander, travel. 2)ie SBan'berjabve {pl.), years of travel (of journeymen). S)te SBang'e, —, pi. —n, cheek. SBann, adv., when. SBan'fcímütbtg, fickle, inconstant 2Barm, adj., warm. 2)te ^är'me, —, warmth. 2öar'ten, v. intr., to wait. SBarum', adv., why. 2öad, pron., what. 3iöa'fd)en, v. ir. tr., to wash. 2)ad ¿Saf'fev, —d, pi. —, water. 2)ad SSaf'fevgcflügeí, —d, water¬ fowls. íDie Söaf'ferböble, cavern filled with water. 2)te SBaf'ferleitnng, —, pi. —en, aqueduct, water-works. ®cr ÜBaf'fcrbogcí, water-fowl. SBed; fcln, v. tr., to change. 2)cr SBccb'fcl, —d, pi.—, change, bill of exchange. ®er 2Bcd/felbricf, bill of exchange 474 VOCABULARY. ®er SíBeg, —e8, pl. —t, way, road. SBe'gen, prep., on account of. 2Seg, adv., away, gone, oif. SBeg'ge^eu, to go away. SBeg'ne^men, to take away. 2CBe^ ! interj., woe ! 2Be^ and ine'^e, adj. and adv., causing pain ; iret; tbun, to hurt ; mir tfmt her 3a[;rt me^, my tooth aches. S[Be'(;en, v. intr., to wave, blow. 2)a§ SSeih, —eë, pl. —er, woman, fe- SBeib'Itcl), adj., feminine, [male. 2Betd;, adj., soft, tender. 2)te Söet'be, —, ;>/.—it, pasture-land. SBei'ben, v. tr., to pasture. 2Bei'i;en, v. tr., to consecrate. Sie 2ßeii/uad}t, Christmas, [eve. Ser 2[Beit}'na(^tda'6enb,Christmas- 2Beii, conj., because, since. Sie SBei'Ie, —e, pi. —en, a while. Ser SBein, -^c6, pi. —e, wine. Söei'ie, adj., wise. Sie SSei'l'e, —e, pi.—n, way, manner. 2Bei|3, adj., white. SBeit, adj., far, distant. Ser SBci'jen, —§, wheat. Ser SSei'jenader, wheat-field. 2Sei'd)er, pron., which, what. Sie SBel'Ie, —,pl. —n, wave, billow. Sie SBeít, —, pl. —en, world. Saê SSeít'aíI, —§, universe. Sie 3Beít'geíd;id)te, universal his¬ tory, history of the world. SSeit'Iid), adj., mundane, worldly Sßen'bcn, v. ir. tr. and intr., to turn. SBe'nig, pron. and adv., little. SSe'nigftenS, adv., at least. SBenn, adv., when ; conj., if. äßer? pron., who ? SSer'ben, to become. SBer'fen, v. ir. tr., to throw, hurl. Sad SSerf, —ed, pi. —e, work. SBertf), adj., worth. Ser 2Bertf), —ed, worth. SBertb'boll, adj., valuable. Ser SBefl, ed, i -^gg^ Ser SBe'ften,—d,| ' [west. SBeft'Iid;, adj., western, to the Sie SBe'fte, —, pi. —n, vest. SBett'eifern, v. intr., to vie (with). Sad SBet'ter, —d, weather. SBic^'tig, adj., weighty, important. SBi'ber,^?-^/.»., against, in opposition to, contrary to. SSiberrn'fen, to recall, revoke. Sie SSiberfe^'nng, —, resistance, opposition, insubordination, SSiberfbre'd^en, to contradict. 2Bib'men, v. tr., to devote, dedicate. Sßib'rig, adj., against, opposed to, of¬ fensive. 3Bie, adv., how ; conj., as, like, than. Söie'ber, adv., again. Sßie'berbringen, to restore. SBieberber'[teilen, to restore. Söieberbo'len, to repeat. SSie'beriommen, to return. SSie'ber[eben,to see or meet again; anf SBie'berfeben (/•>., au re¬ voir), good-by, till we meet again. SBie'gcn, v. ir. tr. and intr., to weigh. Slnf'miegen, to outweigh. Sic Söie'fc, —, ]>l. —n, meadow. 23iib, adj., wild. Sad SBilb, —ed, Avild beasts, game, deer, venison. Sad 2öilb'f?ret,—d, venison, deer Ser Sßii'le,—nd,;>/.—n,will, design; SBil'lcnd fein, to have a mind, to purpose, design. SBittfoni'incn, adj., welcome. Ser S3îinb, —cd, pl. —c, wind. SBin'ter, —d, pl. —, winter. SBir, pron., we. SBir'fcn, v. tr., to have an influence, pi-oduco an effect. SBirî'lid;, adj., actual, real, true. Sie SBir'fnng, —, pl. —en, the ojieration, force, effect. VOCABULARY. 475 S)er Söirtf), —cö, pl. —c, landlord, host, inn-keeper. 2)ie äöirti^id^aft,——en,econ¬ omy, husbandry. 25>irti/fd)aftUct;, adj., economical, agricultural, [knowledge of. SSif'fen, V. ir. tr., to know, have a Sie SBií'íenfd^aft, —, pl. —en, science, knowledge, learning SGUiríeníd^aftíid), adj., scientific. Sie SBit'ternng, —, weather, tempera¬ ture. Ser 3BiÇ,—ed, wit, wittiness, sense. 2So,ac?c.,where (see § 188,10,i2e7H.2). iJSobei', ac?t'., wherebj'(see § 188). Sie 2öo'^e, —, pl. —n, week. Söö'd^entiidl, adj., weekly. SBobnrd/, adv., whereby (§ 188). SBoi;er' or tro...her', adv., whence. 3Boi)in' or iro...()in', whither. SBof)i, adv., well, indeed, certainly. SÍBof^rbebaíten, adj., safe, in good condition or preservation. SBobí'geíatíen, v. »¡tr., to please. Ser SBobí'ftanb, prosperity. Sßo^'nen, v. intr., to reside. Ser SSof^n'filj, —zè.pl.—e, dom¬ icile, abode, residenee. 3û'gcn, v. intr., to tremble, faint. Sic ' /"'• —-'h number. 3vïi)'Îcn, V. ir., to number, count. 3abrreid;, Ui/;'., numerous. Sad numeral. 3aí/íen, r. tr., to pay. 3abrbar, adj., payable. 3niini, adj., tame. 3ä(/nten, v. tr., to tame. Ser Safin, —ed,^;¡/. 3«fi'»c, tooth. Sic Safin'biirfte, tooth-brush. 3art, adj., tender, delicate. Ser 3anm, —cd, pl. 3än'me, bridle. „ 3ann, —cd, pl. 3iih'"e, hedge, Sie 3t'fic, —, pi- —toe. [fence. SBofin'fiaft, adj., resident. Sic iS?ofi'nnng, —,pl.—en, resi¬ dence. Ser SBoIf, —ed, pi. SSol'fe, wolf. Sic SBorîe, —, j)l.—en, cloud. „ SBcI'le, —e, pi.—n, wool. SBoI'len, adj., woolen. ÜBoí'íen, V. ir., to be willing, desire. Sad ÏBort, —ed, pi. iffiör'ter and SBor'te, word, talk, promise. Sad SBër'terbud;, dictionary. Sic 2Bort'fcige, order of words. Sad SBört'iein, —d, pi. —, par¬ ticle, small word. SBofetbft', öc/i;., where, at which place. 2Bobon', adv., whereof, from which. Sad SBun'ber, —d, pi. —, wonder. SBun'bcrbar, adj., wonderful. SBun'berfd^ön, adj., extremely beautiful. Ser SBunfd), —ed,;¡/. Sffdln'fd^e, wish. SBiin'l'djen, v. tr., to wish. Ser 2Bnrf, —ed, pi. SBitr'fe, throw. Ser SSurî'ffieer, pl. —ed, —e, javelin. Ser 2ßurm, —ed,/)/. SBür'mer, worm. Sie SBur'gei, —, pl. —n, root. 2ßü[t, adj., desert. 3efin, ten. Sad Sci'dien, —d, pl. —, sign, mark. 3cid)'ncu, V. tr., to mark, draw, design Sad 3fid?'ncn, —d, art of drawing Ser 3cidl'itct',—d, draughtsman. Sie 3tidl'intiig¡ —, pi- —et, drawing. 3ci'gen, v. tr., to show, point out. 3ci'fien, v.tr., to accuse of, charge with Sic 3tt'ic, —, pl- —lb „ 3ttif —, pl- —fib time, [century. Sad 3fit'(iitftr —pl- —f nge, 3ci'tig, adj., timely, early. Sic 3fit'iang, period of time ; fût eine 3fitíang, for a time. 476 VOCABULARY. Sie 3ctt'ved)nung, —, reckoning of time, chronology. Sie 3"t'íd;rift, —, pl. —en, pe¬ riodical publication, journal. Sie 3ei'tung, —, p/. —en, news- Saâ 3^it'Jnort, verb. [paper. Saô 3^íif —z^,pl. —e, tent. 3erbre'c^en, to break in pieces. 3erbred/íic^, ac?;'., fragile, [ruin. 3er(at'íen, to fall to pieces, decay, go to Ser 3erfalí', —e§, ruin, decay. 3errei'ben, v. ir. tr., to grind, rub, pul¬ verize, grind to pieces. 3er[treu'en, v. tr., to disperse, scatter. Ser —i,pl —, ticket, check, placard, playbill. Sa6 3^h3/ —1'^- —cloth, stuff. Ser 3^h'S^> —xi, pi. —n, witness. 3eu'gen, v. intr., to testify, ßie'iieit, V. ir. tr., to draw, pull ; v. in- trans., to move, migrate, march. Saê 3'^^» —P^- —limit, bound¬ ary, goal, aim. 3ie'ieu, V. intr., to aim. 3ie'nien, v. intr., to seem, become. 3ieiu'ii^,ac^'., becoming, suitable ; adv., tolerably, rather, quite. Sie 3iev'be, —, pi. —en, ornament. Saê 3^^''^^^'^^ —P^- —t room. Ser 3int'mennann,—i,pl. 3inti merleute, carpenter. 3it'tern, v. intr., to tremble. Ser 3®íí? —P^- —inch. Saê 3"^, —e§, pl. 3öi'iff toll, duty. Sie 3o£>íogie', —, zoology. 3oDÍo'gifc^, adj., zoological. '^Vifprep., to, toward, in, at, by, for; Ser 3ntf'£r/ —sugar, [adv., too. 3lter[t', adv., at first. Ser 3it'íítííí —eöf chance. 3u'fällig, adj., accidental. 3ufDÍ'ge, prep., according to. Sufrie'ben, adj., contented, satisfied. Rem. For a few additional words, se Ser 3tt3/ —P^- drawing draught, pulling, train. Saë 3ug'tth^r, draught animal 3u'geben, to add, admit. 3uge'gen, adj., present. 3uglei^', adv., at the same time. Sie 3u'tuitft, —, future, futurity. 3uie^t', adv., at last. 3u'ma(^en, to close, shut. Sie 3^ï^3'£r —P^- —tongue. 3urücí', adv., back, backward. 3urü(í'bringen, to bring back, 3urü(ft)eníen, v. refl., to think one's self back again. 3nriicfgeben, to give back. 3uritcf fef)ren, v. intr., to return. 3urücf iommen, to return, [over. 3urü(f'íegen, to lay back, pass 3utüd'äie{;en, v, refl., to retire. 3uíam'men,aí/u.,together.[coherence. Ser 3uîttnt'men^ang, connexion, 3ufam'mennäf)en, to sew together 3ufam'menjiet;en, to contract. Ser 3u'ía^, —e«, pl. 3"'fäÖC, addi¬ tion, additional remark. Ser 3u'ftanb, —e?, condition, [anee. Sie 3ii'berficbt, —, confidence, assur- 3utnei'len, adv., sometimes,at times. 3ulni'ber, prep., contrary to, against, 3töan^jig, twenty. [repugnant to. 3ttJar, adv.,indeed, it is true, [purpose. Ser 3^^^í —P^- —aim, design, 3we(J'mä^ig, ac^'., practical. 3h?ei, two. 3lt)ei'beutig, adj., ambiguous. Sie 3h?ei'be"ti3íeitf ambiguity. Ser 3h3ei'feí, —§, pl. —, doubt. 3iï>ei'fel^aft, adj., doubtful. Ser 3if"'íÍ3f —^5, pl. —e, branch, twig 3tt3Ín'gen, v. ir. tr., to force, oblige. 3h?ifd)en,i?reju., between. Sa§ steerage. 3hí0íf, twelve. 3 the addenda at the end. VII. ENGLISH-GERMAN VOCABULARY. À, an, ein, ei'ner, ein. Able, fä'btv5(see § 168; L. XXXI). Aborigines,;?/., bic Uv'cintKcbner. About, prep, (around), um (concern¬ ing), über; about it, bavu'ber; adv., bevum', uu^^efäbr'. Above, ac/r'., o'beu ; prep., Ü'bev. Absent, ab'iüei'eub. [nung, —. Accent, bev ílícccnt', —§ ; bie ißeto'» Accept, an'ncbnten. Accompany, beglei'tcn, mit'get;en. Accomplice, ber îDîit'jcbuÎbige. According to, prep., gemäß', juíol'ge. Account, bic 9ied/nung; on account of, ¡>rep., me'gen (§ 107, Rem. 2). Accusative (Cirse), ber i/lffufatib',—S. Accuse, an'Hagen, beidml'bigen. Accustom (one's self to), fid^ getübb'= nen (an). Acid, adj., fauev; noun, bie @äu're. Acknowledge, an'erfennen. Acquaintance, bie Seíannt'íd^aft. Acquit, frei'fbreci;en. Act, ban'beln, fid; benel^'men. Action, bie §anb'inng. Active, tí;ü'tig, íeb'baft. Actual, mirí'lid;. Adapt, fid; fd;icí'en. Admit, ju'gcben, ein'vaumen. Advertisement, bie Sin'jeige. Affair, bie 2a'd;e, bie 2ln'geíegenf)eit. After,itad; ; adv., uac^^er, fbä» ter ; conj., nad;'bem. Afternoon, ber ilîac^'mittag. Afterward, nad;'(;er, f^d'ter. Agitin, mie'bcr, nod;'mat«. [ge'gen. Against, ge'gen, ini'ber ; against it, ba^ Age, bad Sli'ter. Agreeable, an'gencfim. Aim, bie Diid^'tung, bad Î Air, bie 2uft. Qie'íen. Album, bad 211'bum, —, pi. —d. Algebra, bie Strgebra. All. al'Icr. Allow, eriau'ben. Ally, ber ißun'bedgenofj. Almost, faft, bei'na{;e. Along,prep., längd, entíang'. Alphabet, bad Sllbbabet',—d. Already, bereitd', id;on. Also, and;, e'benfalld, noc^. Altar, ber 2íítar', —ed, pi. 2Iíta're, America, Slme'rifa (see page 117). Among, nn'ter, 5tüt'fd;en; to be among, Ancient, alt. [ge^ö'ren ju. And, unb. Answer, bie üíutmort, t'., ant'mortcn. Antiquity, bie SSor'jeit, bad ÏH'teri tí;uin ; antiquities,p/.,bic Sll'tera tl^ümer, SIntiquitä'ten. Anxiety, bie 2íngft. [mad. Any body, ^e'manb ; any thing, et'j Appear, erid;et'nen, fd;ci'nen. Apartments, bie 2BDÍ;'itung. Apple, ber ^b'feí. April, ber Archbishop, bcr (Srj'biid;Df. Architect, ber 23au'meifter, 2trc^iteíf, Architecture, bie 23au'tunft, bie 3írd;ií Arm, bcr 2irm. [teîtnr'. Arms, p/., bie SSaffcn. Army, bic Strmee', bad §eer. Around, um. Arrest, berbaf'teu. Arrive, au'tommeu. [men, —d. Arrival, bie 2ín'tunft, —, bad Sln'îctn? Art, bie Äunft. Artist, bcr Äünft'Ier. 478 VOCABULARY. As, ai«, irie, ba«, ir»ctí. Ask, fra'ßcn, »erlau'gen. Assembly, tic iBcrfamm'íung. Assert, bet)aup'teit. Astonisliing, erftauu'íid;, erftau'nenb. Astronomy, tie ÏÏtftronomie'. At, an, ju, in ; at all, adv., gar. Attentive, anfmerifam. August, ber Siuguft'. Bad, jc^Iedjt. Bake, bad'en. Baker, bev 93äd'er. Ball, ber 33aïï. Band, baö ißanb. Banish, ncvban'nen. Bank, ba« U'fer ; tie 93ani. Baron, ber iöaron, ber grei'^err. Barrel, ba« ^aß. Basket, ber Serb. Basket-maker, ber Äorb'mad;er. Bath, ba« Î5ab, —e«, pl. iBä'ber. Battle, bie @dï«dd. Bavaria, ißai'crn (see page417). Bavarian, bai'rifc^. Be, fein. Bear, ber Sär. Beat, fc^ia'gen. Beauty, tie @d;ön''f;eit. Beautiful, id)ön. Because, ircií. Become, lucr'ben. Bed, ba§ iöctt, ba« Sag'er. Before,/)rc/7., tor ; conj., ci;e. Begin, an'fangcn, bcgin'nen. Beginning, ber Sln'fang. Behind, (>in'ter ; adv., ^in'tcn. Believe, gíaii'bcn. [nn'ten. Below, />rp/u, nn'ter,nn'ter(>aib ; adv., Berry, bic 33ec're. Beside, ne'ben. Besides, an'jier. Best (see § 92). Betake one's self, ftd^ bcge'bcn, gc'^Clt. Aunt, tic liante. Austria, Oe'fterrcid). Author, Der ÍJerfaffer. Auihorit}', tie Se^iDr'be, —,pl. —en. Autumn, ber §erbft. Avoid, untge'^en. Aware, gewa^r'. Away, adv., ireg, fort. Better (see § 92). Between, jioi'fdten. Qen'feit«. Beyond, prep., jen'feit, ü'ber ; adv., Bill of exchange, ber SSed^'fel. Bind, bin'ben. Binding, ber (Sin'banb, —eg. Bird, ber 25o'geI. Bishop, ber 5ßi'fd;of. Bite, bei'jsen. Black, fc^marj. Blame, ta'teln. Blessed, fe'iig. Blue, bku. Boat, bag Soot. Bonnet, ber §ut, ber 2)a'nten'^iit, Book, bag Bookbinder, ber S5ud^'binber. Bookseller, ber S3uct>'^änbler. Bookstore, bie Sud^'^anbíung. Boot, ber ©tie'fet. Born, gebo'ren. Borrow, bor'gett. Boy, ber íína'bc. Braide, flcd/ttn (v.ir.). Brave, tiilp'fer. Bread, bag 53rob. Breadth, bie iBrci'te. [jerbre'c^tn. Break, bre'd^en ; to break in pieces, Breakfast, bag f^'^üfi'ftüd ; v. intr., früt;'ftüden. Bridge, tie Srild'e. Brilliant, gläu'gcnb. [mit'bfingcn. Bring, bring'cu; to bring with one, Broad, breit. VOCABULARY. 479 Brother, bet 53ru'ber ; brother-in-law, bet Sd^ma'ger ; brothers or breth¬ ren, bte ©ebrii'ber. Brown, braun. Biiikl, bau'cn. Building, baê ©ebäu'be. Bureuu, bic Sommo'bc. [neu. Burn, bvcii'uen ; bui-n down, ab'bven= Cabinet-maker, bct Xiíc^'íet. Cake, bev Äu'd)en. Call, vu'ten ; (to name), ucii'itcn. Can, flMi'nen. Candle, ba3 2id;t. Cane, bet @tocf. Cannon, bte Sîauo'lte. Cap, bte Díü^'c. Capital (city), bie ^aupt'ftabt. Captain, bet ^apitau'. Carpenter, bet ¿ini'iiievntann. Carriage, bet iisa'geit, bie gquipa'ge. Castle, ba§ 5d)toß. Catch, tan'geit, î.tî'ieii, evgtei'fen. Cathedral, bet Sont, bie Som'fivd;e. Cattle, ba3 sßiel;. Cause, bie Ut'iad;e, bet ©ntnb. Celebrated, beriiipnt'. Central Germany, 2Jíit'teíbentíd;íanb. Certain (ly), geinijs. Chair, bet 0tn(;í. Charm, tei'jen ; charming, tei'.^enb. Cheap, biríig,n)o(?ríeií. Child, bad Sinb. Chemistry, bie (S()Cmie'. Church, bie Äiv'd;e. Circumstance, bet llmTiant* ? to adapt one's self to circumstances, fid} in bie Um'ftänbe fd}icf'en. City, bie 0tabt. City Hall, bad 9iat(}'(}and. [ben. City authorities, bie iíptabt'beljüVí Clean, rein. Clerk, ber Äoinmid'. Clock, bie lli)r, 2Banb'ui)r. Business, bad ©efc^äft' ; it is none of his business, ed gebt ibn gar nicbt an. But, ado., nnr ; conj., a'ber, allein', after a negative, fon'bem. Butter, bie Sut'ter. Buy, ian'fen. By, bon, bnrcb, bei. Close by, ne'ben. Cloth, bad Snd}, Cloud, bie SBoU'e. Coarse, grob. Coat, ber 9Í0CÍ. Coffee, Kaffee. Cold, fait. Collar, ber iîra'gen. Collection, bie 0amm'iung. Colonel, bcv O'bevft. Colony, bie Colonie'. Color, bie fyar'be. Column, bie 0baí'te. Come, font'men ; come down, bernn'« teriomnieii ; come here, bicrber's Commence, an'fangen. [íom'men. Commencement, ber îln'faitg. Command, ber ¿efel;!' ; v., befeb'ten. Common, gemeiit' ; common schools, bie éolfd'fcbnícu. [boUen'ben. Complete, bcl'lig, boHlom'men ; v.tr.. Comprehend, begrei'feit. Concern, au'geben. Concert, bad Äonjert'. Conclude, beid}Ue')jcn,fid; entfd^lie'ßen, fid; entfd;ei'ben. Conduct, V. tr., fiib'reit, lei'tcn. Confederation, ber iBnnb. Congress, ber .^oitgref]', —ed. [—en. Conspiracy, bie ©mbö'mng, —, pl. Consum])tion, bie 0cbmiub'fn(bt, —. Contain, entbal'teii. [ten. Contemptible, berad;t'iid;, jn berad;'« Contents, ber Oin'balt. Convenient, bequem'. 480 VOCABULARY. Cook, bet Äoc^, bie ^ö'c^in. Copy, bie Êobie'; v. ¿r., ab'ícbreiben. Corner, bie ©cf'e ; corner-stone, bet Orunb'ftein. [ten. Correspond, entfi^re'd^en, forteíí30ubt'= Correspondence, bie ^orrefbonbenj'. Cost, bet iprei«, bie Äo'fteit (^pl.) ; v. intr., fo'fteu ; costly, foft'bar. Country, ba§ Sanb. Courage, bet SDÎut^, bie Sra':|3ferîeit. Cousin, bet 33et'tcr, bie Soufi'ne. Cover, bebecE'en. Danger, bie ©efa'^t'. Dare, ina'gen, bilr'fen. Dark, bun'fel, fin'ftet. Daughter, bie Sod/tet ; daughter-in- law, bie 0d;œie'gertoc^ter. Day, bet ; to day, ^eu'te ; of to¬ day, to-day's, adj., i;eit'tig ; day- before-yesterday, toor'geftern. Dead, tobt. Deaf, taub. Dear, t(;eu'er, íieb. Death, bet Sob, —e§. Debt, bie @c^ulb. Decay, bet SBerfatt'. Deceive, trii'gen, betril'gen. Deep, tief. Defendant, bet SBcttag'te. Describe, befdjrei'bcn. Description, btc SBefd;tci'bung. Design, bet Pan, Quttoutf; v. tr., eutTOer'fcn. Desire, Voün'fd^en. Develop, enttbicí'eín. Dictionary, baS SBör'terbud;, Se'^ricDU. Die, fter'ben. Difficult, fdjffier, fd;tt>ie'rig. Dig, gra'ben. Diligent, fiei'ßig, em'fig. Dine, ju SWit'tag ef'fen, fbei'fen. Dinner, ba8 ilJîit'tageffcn, ba§ Sfícit. Direct, bireît', gera'be. Cow, bie Äu^i. Criminal, bet iBetbtc'dftcr. Crooked, ftumm. Crown, bie iîto'ue ; bet Ätang. Cry, ffiei'uen, fc^tei'en, tu'fen. Crusade, bet Steuj'jug. Cultivate, bebau'cn. Cultivated, adj., gebil'bet. Culture, bie 33ii'bung. Cup, bie Saf fe. Custom, bie @it'te, —, pi. — Cut, fd;nei'ben. Directly, geta'be ; gteidfi. Direction, bie 9îid/tung. Director, bet Siteftot, Disagreeable, uu'angeuefint. Discontented, un'guftiebett. Discount, bet Siabatt', —ed. Discover, entbecí'eii. Discovery, bie Êutbetf'uug. Discretion, bie iBotfl(í)tigteit ; at dis¬ cretion, auf ©na'be unb llu'. Dish, bie ©dhif'fel. [gnabe. Dishonesty, bie Uu'e^tíid^íeit. Disorder, bie Uu'otbnuug. Dispatch, bie Sebe'fd^e. Disproportion, baS 2JZiß'toet^äitniß. Disquietude, bie Uu'tube, Síeugft'íic^teit Dissimilar, uu'ä^ulicb, uu'gíeic^. Distance, bie Sntfet'uuug. Ditch, bet ©ta'beu. Do, t^uii, ma'd^eit. Doctor, bet Sof'tot, bet Üítjt. Dog, bet §uub. Dollar, bet Soi'ïat, bet Sba'íet. Door, bie St)il'te, bad Sf)ot. Doubt, bet ; V. tr., begffiet'feiu Dozen, ba§ Sut'jeub. Down, uie'bet, t)etab'. Draw, jie'ben ; jeid^'iteu. [funii. Drawing, bie ^etd/ituug, bie 3ci'dv: ! Dress, bag 5î(eib, bie^íei'buug, bet 2la' m- VOCABULARY. 481 Dress coat, ter gtacf, Setb'rocí. Drink, irin'ten. Drive, trei'bcn. Each, je'ber ; each other, einanter. Earn, terfcte'nen, erirer'ben. Earth, tie Sr'tc. [ijegeit O'fîen. East, rcr Cft, O'ften ; toward the east. Eastern, ten Cften, eft'Iiclj. Easy, ieicbt. [fvefien). Eat, cfjen (to devour like animals. Edition, iÜUö'gabe, Slufíage. Editor, ter 9ietaîteur', —ê, pl. —e. leading editorial, ter Seit'artiîei, Egg, tai Si. [—e, pl. Egypt (see page -117). Either, conj., entire'ter. Elect, irüb'íen, erirä'blen. Electric, eíeí'trifc^. Ell, tie SÍ'Ie. Embrace, umar'men ; to embrace an opportunity, eine Oeíe'genbeit be^ Emperor, ter Äai'fer. [nü'^en. Empire, taê Sai'fert^ium. Empty, leer. End, Wê Sn'te. End, r. tr., en'tigen, been'tigen. Endow, grün'ten, fUf'ten, toti'ren. Endure, tau'ern. Enemy, ter geint. Face, taê ©eftcbf. Faith, ter (Síau'be. Faithful, treu, getreu'. Fall, fal'íen ; to fall to pieces, in ©tücíe fallen, in SBerfall' gera't^ien, ju ©run'te ge'ben. False, falftb ; falsehood, tie galfc^'^eit. Family, tie gauii'Iie. Famous, berübiut'. Fare, taê gabr'gelt. Farewell, leben Sie trobl I Fashion, tie 2Ko'te. Dry, trcci'eu ; ». tr., trocfneu. Dutch (see page 417). During, irä^'rent. ü. Energetic, îraft'hoîl. Engage (order), befierieu. English (see page 417). f—e. Engraving, ter Äufj'ferfticb, —eê, pl. Enough, genug'. Entire, ganj, roU'ftäntig. Entirely, ganj (unt gar), bcí lig. Entrance, ter Sin'gang. [men. Escape, toermei'ten, entge'ben, entioin'- Especial, borsilg'lidi, buuf3t'fä(bli(b' Especially, bcicn'terê, horjüg'lidb. Even, adj., e ben, gleid^ ; adv., audfi, fclbft, gleidb'fallê. Evening, ter ïïl'bent. Ever, je, je'tnalê. Every, je'ter, al'Ier. Exchange (bill of), tcr SBei^'fel. Execute, auê'fiibren. [toeg'ung. Exercise, tie üíuf'gabe, Ue'bung, Se* Exhibit, auê'ftelïen. Exhibition, tie Sluê'fîellung. Exit, ter 9Îuê'gang, —eê. Expense, tie Sluê'gaben, tie ^o'jleu, (pl-X tie Un'foften. Express train, ter ©tbnell'jug. Extraordinary, an^eror'tentlicb. Fast, fd^nell. [©^irie'gerbater. Father, ter SSa'ter ; father-in-law, Fault, ter geb'ler. Favor, tie (Sunfl ; in favor of it, tafür'. Fear, tie gnrcbt ; v. tr., fitrdb'ten. February, ter ge'bruar. Feel, füb'len. Fever, taê gie'ber. Few, ttje'ntge (pi.)' Field, taê gelt. Fight, fe^'tcu, îam'fjfen. Find, fin'ten. 482 VOCABULARY. Fine, fein, fc^ön. Finger, ber Çitig'et. Finish, tooïïen'ben. Fire, ba§ geu'er. First, er'fte. Fish, Fisherman, ber Çi'fc^cr. Fit, i^affen, [te'^en. Five, fünf. Flag, bie ga^'ne, glag'ge. Flatter, jd^mei'c^eln. Flee, flte'^en. Fleeting, ftüd/tig, ídjneíí. Floor, ber SSo'ben, guß'hoben. Flour, ba6 9Jiel}i. Flow, ftie'gen. Flower, bie SSlu'me. Fly, file'gen. Follow, foi'gen, na^'folgen. Foot, ber [meií, benn, ba. For, })rep., für, an'ftatt, auf; conj.. Force, bie Äraft, 3Jîad;t, ©eiraít'; v. lt ., jtring'en, nö'tfiigen. Gain, getüin'nen. Gallery, bie ©aílerie', —, pî. —n. Garden, ber ©ar'teu. Gardener, ber ©ärt'ner. Garland, ber ^ranj. 'Sas, ba§ @a0. Gather, fam'meíu. General, ber ©eneraí'. Germany (see page 417). Get, V. tr., tp'len, ftcf) toerfdjaffen ; v. intr., iner'ben, îom'men. Gift, bie ©a'he, bag ©efc^enf. Girl, bag SDiäb'd;en. Give, ge'ben, fc^en'ien. Glad, froi), freu'big, erfreut'^ gladly, gern, mit SSergnü'gen. Glass, bag ©lag. Glove, ber ^anb'fc^nl^. Go, ge'i^en ; to go out, aug'ge^en ; to go away, meg'ge^en. Foreign, frenib, ang'íanbifc^. Forest, ber SBalb, Forget, toergef'fen. Forgive, herge'ben. Form, bie gorm. Former, bo'rig, horan'ge^cnb. Formerly, frü't;er, e'fiemaíg, fonfl. Fortification, bie ge'ftnng. Found, grün'ben, ftif'ten. Four, hier. Free, frei. Freight, bie Sa'bung, bie ©ü'ter ( pl.), freight-train, ber ©ü'tcrjng. French (see page 417). Frequently, oft, of'terg. Friend, ber greunb ; friendly, freunbV íi¿^. Friday, ber grei'tag. From, hon, ang. Fruit, bag Dhft, bie fjrndjt. Full, h olí. Furnish, möbli'reu. God, ber ©Ott. Gold, bag ©olb. Good, gut; good-hy, le'beu ©ic ttofil Goodness, bie ©ü'te. Gout, bie ©id)t, bag ^o'bagra. Govern, regie'ren. Government, bie 9îegie'rung. Grain, bag Sorn. Grammar, bie ©ramma'tiî. Grammatical, grammatiía'íifá). Grand, groß, er^a'ben. Granddaughter, bie ©u'feliu. Grandfather, ber ©ro^'hater. Grandmother, bie ©ro^'muttev. Grandson, ber ©u'îel. Grasp, grci'fen, faf'fen. Grass, bag ©rag. Gray, gran. Great, gro§. Great-grandfather, bcr Ur'gro0hater VOCABULARY. 483 Sreat-grandmother, bte Ut'großmut« üireece (see page 418). [ter. Green, grün. ] Habit, bie (Scircbn'bett. [Sfln. Hail, bet §a gel ; v. intr., to hail, (la'« Hair, ba§ §aar. Half, bie §aíí te ; adj., (»aíb. Hall, ber 5aat, ber iBor'faaí. Hammer, ber §am mer. Hand, bie §aub. Hang, 1-. intr., bang'eu ; v. tr., (»äng'en Happy, gliid lid), fvol^. Happiness, bad ©lûcï. Happen, gefd^e'ÍKn, fib^ ereignen. Hard, [;avt ; hardly, fd^mer lic^. Hat, ber §nt. Have, ba'ben. Hay, bad Çen. He, er. Head, bad ^anpt, ber Health, bie ©ejnnb'beit ; healthy, ge:= funb'. Hear, f;ö'ren ; such a thing has never been heard of, fo etlnad ift bid je^t nn'erbört geme'i'en. Heart, bad ■§)er3. Heat, bie §i^'e. Heaven, ber Rim mel. I I, ic^. If, menn, im gall, fattd. Image, bad Silb. Immediate, unmittelbar. Immediately, gleich, jogleich'. Imperial, lai'ferlich. Important, beben'tenb. Imposing, impofant'. In, in. Incapacity, Un'fâhtgîeit, lln'tüd)tigfeit. Inch, ber 3^11. [fünfte (pl.). Income, bad (Sin'fommen, bie ®in'» Increase, madh fen, ju'nehnten. Groschen, ber ©ro'fdhcit. Grow, mach fen. leiten. Guide, ber gü^'rer ; v. tf., füh'reu. Heavy, fchtber. Hedge, bie ^edf'e, ber ßaun. Height, bie §ö'he. Here, bier. High, bodb. Hill, ber §ü'gel. Hire, mie'tben. His, fein ; ber ©ei'nige. History, bie ©efdbidb'te. Hit, tref fen ; (to bump), fto'jfen. Hold, bal'teu. Holy, bei'lig. Home, bad §aud ; at home, ju Çau'fe ; homeward, nad; Çan'fe. Honest or honorable, ebr'lid^. Honor, bie (Sb rc; v. tr., el/ren. Horse, bad ifjferb. Hot, beifi. House, bad ^aud. How? mie? auf meldbe SBei'fe. However, bodb, jebod/, nid^tdbeftome''» Hunger, ber Çung'er. [niger. Hunt, fa'gen ; hunting, bie Sagb; hunter, ber 3ä'ger. Husband, ber 3)îann, ©'bemann. Indeed, tDobl, frei'lt^, jtbar. India-rubber over-shoes, bie ©um'mi* fd;ube (pl.). Indian, ber (Inbia'ner. Indolent, fanl, laf'fig, trä'ge. Industrial, inbuflriell'. Industrious, flei'^ig, betrieb'fam. Injure, fdja'ben ; to injure one's selQ fidb felbft fcba'ben. Injurious, fdbüb'lidb. Inside of, in nerhalb. Instead of, an'flatt. Instructive, Icbr'reidb. 484 VOCABULARY. Intention, bte Interest, ba§ ^ntereffe. bic â^'ien Interesting, ttlteveffanf. Into, in. January, ber Sû'nuar (ace page 434). John, Sobnnn' (see page 416). Journal, bie 3eit'íd?riít. Journey, bie ÜÍei'fe. Joy, bie gveu'be. Keep, hebal'ten, l^aí'ten. Key, bev 0(^íüneí> Kill, tob'ten. Kind, bie Strt, bie ©at'tung. Kind, adj.^ ireunb'Uc^, QÜ'íig. King, ber Äo'nig. Kiss, ber Äuß, —Mffe. Labor, bie iÄr'beit; V. intr.^ ar'beiten. Lady, bie Sa'b^, bie S)a'nie. Lame, íat;m. Lamp, bie Sam'^e. Land, ba6 Sanb. Language, bie Large, grog. Last, ber le^'te, ber bo'rige; adv., ju® ie^t', 5um lelj'ten SJÍa'íe. Last, v.intr., bau'ern. Late, öcrfpä'tet; adv., lately, neu'Iic^, un'längft, toor Latest, ber ieij'te. [tur'jem. Latin, íatei'niícg. Law, baê ©efelj'. Lay, le'gen ; lay hold of, ergrei'fen. Lazy, fan!, trä'ge, íaffig. Lead, baê SSÍei. Lead-pencil, ber SSÍei'ftift. Lead, v. tr., füf)'ren, íei'ten. Leader, ber ^ii^'rer. Leap, ipring'eu. Learn, ler'nen. Invent, erfin'bcn ; invention, bie (5p Invite, ein'laben. [fin'bung. Iron, ba§ (Si'fen. July, ber (iu'li (see page 434). June, ber 3u'ni (see page 434). Just, adj., gerecht', bil lig. Just (exactly), adv., gera'bc; (just now), e'ben, foe'ben. Kiss, v. tr., íüf'fen. Kitchen, bie Äü'c^e, —, pl. —n. Knife, ba6 SJief'fer. Knock, îlob'fen, fto'gen, fí^ía'gen. Know, tnif'fen ; (to be acquainted with), îen nen. Known (to become), beiannt' n?er'ben. I. Least, ber Älein'fte; adv., am üBe'nigí [ten ; at least, me'nigftenë ; not in the least, ni^it im ©ering'ften. Leather, baê Se'ber; leathern, adj., le'bern. Leave, laf'fen, herlaffen; whendoyou leave? mannrei'fen©ie ab? when does the train leave? mann ge^t berBugû'b? [linîs. Left (hand), bie Sin'îe ; to the left, Lend, lei'gen, herlei'ben. Length, bie Säng'e. Less, me'niger, gering'er, îlein. Lesson, bie Seftion', bie Sluf'gabc. Let, laj'fen, erlau'ben. [ber 33ncb'flabe. Letter, ber S3rief; (of the alphabet). Liberty, bie g^i'^cit- Library, bie Sibliot^eî'. Librarian, bcr Sibliotbeîar'. Lie, lie'gen ; (to tell a falsehood), íü'gcn Life, bas Se'ben. Light, bai ?id?t ; adj., lic^t, ^letí, íeicbt. lightly, leidet. VOCABULARY. 485 Lighten, hlit'jen. Lightning, ber SSItlj, —CS. Like, adj., gteid;, äijn'Iic^. Like, V. tr., gem ^a'ben; how do you like the book? tüte gefällt' 3^'nen Line, fut'tcrn. [ba8 i8ud;? Lining, baô Literature, bte Literatur'. Literary, litera'rifd^. Little, tiein, gering'; alittle, ein tne'nig. Live, le'ben ; (to reside), tno^'nen. Live, lively, adj., Icben'big, leb'ijaft. Livelihood, ber Un'terfiaít. Machine, bte Slîafc^i'ne. Majesty, bic ÜJÍajeftüt'. Make, nia'cfien. [ber 3Jîenfd). Alan, ber 3Jîann ; (the human being), Manner, bie 2írt, bie SBei'fe. Manuscript, bic Çanb'fdjrift. Many, öie'le, ntan'd^e (pl.); many a, tnandjer; a good many, fetjr biele. March, ber 2Rärj (see p. 434). March, ber SJiarfd;, ber B^g^ ntarfdji'ren, jie'fien. Mark, ba§ SOÎerî'mal ; (aim), baS 3teí » V. tr., begeic^'nen. Market, ber älZartt. Marriage, bie ®'i;e, ber SVfîanb ; (wedding), bie §ei'ratf), §o(^'jeit. Marry, v. tr., f)ei'rati)en ; to get mar¬ ried, fid^ berfiei'ratbc. Matter, bie SDiate'rie, ber Ur'floff ; what is the matter? traS fe^lt? May, ber 2Jîai (see p. 434). [giebt'8 ? Me, niidy [ntei'nen, ben'fen. Mean, adj., gemein', nieb'rig; v. tr.. Meaning (of a word), bie S3eben'tnng. Means, bad SDÍit'teí. Measure, bad 2)ia§ ; v. tr., mef'fen. Meat, bad f^leifd;. Meet, begcg'nen, treffen. Meeting, bie Bufdtn'nicnînnft, bie SScrfamm'lung. Load, bie Saft, bic Sa'bung. Loan, bie Sln'ieibe —, pi. —it. Loan, V. tr., Ici'^en. Lock, bad ©cblog. Lock, V. tr., fd^lie'jjen. Long, lang ; a long time, lang'e. Look, fdjan'en, bli den ; it looks well, cd fiebt gut and ; look out ! nel/^ men 0ie fid; in Sld)t ! look fo? (seek), fn'd;en; (expect), ermar'' Lose, üeríie'ren, berle'gen. [ten. Love, bie Sie'be; v. tr., lie'ben. Low, nie'brig. Melt, fd;merîen. Mend, refjari'ren, aud'beffent. Merchant, ber Kaufmann. Metal, bad SJietatt', —ed, pi. —c. Middle, bie 2)îit'te; adj., mit'tel. Middle Ages, bad ïïlîit'telalter. Mild, milb, fanft. xMile, bie aííeiíe. Alilk, bie fKii(^. Mill, bie ajiiib'le. [ge. Mine, mei'ner, ber SJÎei'ne, ber 9Jiei'ni< Mirror, ber 0bi£'g2h Misfortune, bad Un'gliicf. Misplace, tterle'gen, toerfe'^en. Miss, bad grän'lein. Mistake, ber f5eí;'íer, ber Brr'tbum; u.jfeb'len; to be mistaken or to make a mistake, fid; ir'ren. Model, bad fUiobett'. Modern, mobern', neu. Moment, ber Slu'genblicE ; momentary, an'genbiitfli^. Money, bad Oelb. Month, ber iDto'nat. Moon, ber 93îonb. More, mc(;r. Morning, ber 9)îor'gen. Most, incift ; mostly, mei'flend. Mother, bie SDint ter ; mother-in-law, bie 0d;mie'germutter, 486 VOCABULAET. Motion, bie SSewe'gung. Mountain, ber SBerg, Mouth, ber 2)îunb. Much, bid. 1 Nail, ber ii'îa'gd. Name, ber îîa'meCn), bie SSenett'nung ; V. tr., nen'nen, benen'nen. Narrow, eng or eug'e. [benbei'. Near, adj., na'^e ; prep., ne'ben, tie« Nearly, faft, iingefäi;r', betna'^e. Necessary, notb'lüenbig; necessaries of life, bie Se'benêbebiirfniffe (pl.)', it is often necessary for us to—, man mujst oft— Needle, bie 9îâ£)'nabel. Waft. Neighborhood, bie iliä'be, bie fJiac^'bar« Nephew, ber flief'fe. Never, nie, nie'mals, nim'mer. New, neu, mobern'. News, bie flîac^'rit^t ; (particular news), bie fJîat^'rid^ten (pl-)> ( Obedience, ber ©e^or'fam, —§. Obedient, ge^or'fam. Obey, ge^or'i^en. Oblige, berbin'ben ; I am much obliged to you, id; bin 3f)'nen fet^r berbun'= ben; to be obliged to, miif'fen, fol'^ Observe, bemer'fen, beob'adden. [íen. Occasion, ber bie ©ele'gen^eit. O'clock (at two), um jtoei Ubr. October, ber Dîto'ber (see page 434). Of, bon, aus, an, in. Often, oft, öfters. Oil, baS Del. Old, alt. On, an, auf, bei, ju. [maí. Once, ein'maí ; once more, not^ ein'® One, ein. Only, nur, bloß. Onward, bor'märtS. Open, offen; u.tr.,öffnen,aufmachen. Opinion, bie Slîei'nung. Museum, baS SDZufe'unt. Music, bie iDïufif. Must, müf fen. My, mein, r Newspaper, bie ßd'tung, ßdi'ft^rift. Next, näc^ft ; next to the last, bor's íeíjte. Niece, bie flîicb'te. Night, bie flZac^t. Nine, nenn. No, pron., iein ; adv., ueiii. None, îein. Nonsense, ber Un'fitm. North, ber fJîorb, Dîor'ben. North Germany, Üíorb'íSeutftí^íaub. Not, nid;t. Nothing, flíiáttS. Notice, bemer'ien. November, ber îîobem'ber. Now, je^t, nun. Number, bie bie flîum'mer. >. Opposite (to), gegenü'ber. Or, o'ber. Order, bie Orb'nung; v. tr., orotmi (to command), befel/íeix; (to en¬ gage), beftel'Ien. Organ, baS Organ', baS iSeri'geug ; (musical instrument), bie Or'geí. Organist, ber Organift'^ ber Or'geífpie> Origin, ber Ur'ffjrung. [ler. Original (ly), ttr'fbrüngíié. Other, ber anbere ; each other, einan'= ber ; another, nod^ einer ; the other day, ílírg'íid;, bor ei'nigcn STa'gen. [selves, unS. Our, un'fer ; ours, ber un'frige ; our- Out (of), ana, an'Derbaih, burcf>. Outside of. an'gert;aih. [Bet'. Over, ii'Ber; adv., o'ben; (past), bor- Overcoat, ber Uc'berroá. Overflowing, bie UeBerfc^tbem'mung. Owe, fc^ul'big fein. VOCABULARY. 487 Page, tie ©ci'te ; (sei*vant), bcr ^a'ge. Paint, ma len ; to pa'nt a house, ein §au3 an [treid^en. Painter, ber 2)ía'íev. Painting, baS ©einal'be ; art of paint« ing, bie SJialcrci'. Pair, bad 'ijiaar ; a pair of gloves, ein ^laar §anb')d;u()e; a pair of shears, cine Sd;ee're. Palm, bie "^al'me. Paper, ba§ ^a^icr'; newspaper, bie 3ci'tunij ; a daily paper, ein ßcbiatt ; a weekly paper, ein SBo'« Parasol, ber @ou'nenid;irm. [djenblatt. Parents, bie (Sl'tevn (/;/). Part, bev jE^ieiL Party, bie ^artci' ; an evening compa¬ ny, bie ©efell'i'd^aft, bie ^^artie'. Passenger, ber ^affagier'; passenger car, bcr '¡Perfo'nenmagen. Pattern, ba§ ïïîn'fter. Pay, beja^'ien, 3af)'ícn. Peace, ber grie'be(n). Pear, bie SSir'ne. [bie 5Bän'erin. Peasant, ber SSau'er ; peasant woman, Pen, bie ge'ber. Pencil (lead), ber Síei'fíiít.. Penknife, bad ge'bemteffer. Penny (pfennig), ber ^fen'nig. Perhaps, niellcid;!'. Permit, erlan'bcn. Permission, bie (Srlaub'niß. Person, bie ißerjon'. Personal, bcriön'Iid^. Philologist, ber ^(;iioIog', Philology, bie ^^ilologie'. Philosopher, ber ^tjiloiobf/. Philosophy, bie ^l)líofobbÍc'. Photograph, bie ^iptograb^ie', —, pi. Photogra[)her, ber ^^(jotograbi/. [—n. Photography, bie í^í;otograbí)ie'. Phrase, bie ''bU;ra'fe. Physician, ber 5írjt. Piano, bad ^iabier'. Pick, bflücf en. Pickpocket, ber Sa'fc^enbieb. Picture, bad i8iíb, ©emüí'be. Piece, bad ©tüd ; to go to pieces, In ©tiicf e ge'f;en, ju ©run'be ge'^en. Pin, bie ©tecfnabel. Pink, bie 9íeríe. Pit, bie ©rn'be. Pitcher, ber ^rug. Place, ber Pa^, ber Drt, bie ©tel'Ie ; to take place, [tatt'finbcn ; of that place, bor'tig ; of this place, Plan, ber 'ípían, ber (Sntmurf. [fig. Platinum, bad ißlatin'. Play, bad ©b'ft ; íbií'IílL Pleasure, bad SSergnit'gen. Plough, ber ^fiug ; y., bfíü'gen. Pluck, bfíü'den, ab'bfíücíen, ab'ürecben Pocket, bie Sia'ftbe. Pocket-book, bad ^^^ottc'monnaie, bad Sîotij'bud;. Pocket-handkerchief, bad S^a'fcbentuti^ Poem, bad ©ebttbt', bie Sid/tung. Poet, ber S)id/ter. Poetry, bie S)idjt'funft, bie ^oefie'. Point, bie ©bi'^e. Polar bear, ber Sid'bär. Police, bie ^olijei'. Policeman, ber ^^olijei'biener. Poor, arm. Possible, mcg'Iid;. Post-office, bie ^oft, bad ^oft'amt. Pound, bad ^^fnnb. Pour, gie'ßen. Poverty, bie Sír'mntf). Power, bie Äraft, bie 2)îad;t ; full of power, fraft'boU. Praise, lo'ben. Preceding, bo'rig, bor()er'ge()enb. Present, bad ©efe^'cnt'; v. tr., fd;en'» ien ; adj., gegenffiär'tig, an'me« fcnb ; to be present at, bei'mo(men. 488 VOCABULARY. President, ber ^räfibent,—íx\,pJ.—en. Price, ber ^reig. Primeval, ur'fbl^Üngíic^ ; primeval for¬ est, ber Ur'traib ; primeval man, ber Ur'menfd^. Prince, ber 5"ür[t. [brucE'en. Print, ber SrucE, Síb'brucí, v. tr., Printer, ber S)rn(í'er. Printing (art of),bieSud/brucferîunft; printing-house, bie Suc^'brucferftt; printing-paper, ba§ SrucE'^abier. Probable (probably), Wa^rfdjeht'Iic^. Procure, í;o'íe!i, berfc^af fen, an'fd^affen Professor, ber ^rofeffor. Project, ber ^lan, ber (Snttnurf, ba§ ^rojeît' ;.v. tr., entiber'fen. Promise, ba§ SSerjbre'c^en, bte SSer« fbre'd^ung; v. tr., berfbre'c^en. Quart, ba§ Ouart. Quarter, ba§ SSter'tel. Queen, bie Äö'nigtn. Question, bie ^ra'ge. I Eailroad, bie (Si'fenba^it. Rain, ber Sîe'gen; v. impers., reg'nen. Rapid, fc^neïï, raf(^, gejc^tüinb'. Rare, jel'ten, rar. Rather, lie'ber, e'ljer, biel'me^r; (some¬ what), jiem'lid;, et'inag. Rattlesnake, bie SÍÍab'bítí^ííinge. Read, le'fen ; to read over, burc^'iefen ; to read over lightly, fíüt^'tig le'fcn. Reader, ber Se'fer, bie Se'ferin ; read¬ ing-book, bag Se'febuc^. Reading-room, bag Se'feiabinct, bag Se'fegimmcr. Ready, ^er'tig, bereit'. Real(ly), Irirí'íid;. Ream (of paper), bag 9îieg (ipa^jier'). Red, rotf). Reed, bag 9îo^r, bag ©¿^ilf'ro^r. Rejoice, fic^ freu'en. Pronoun, bag gür'tbort, bag ^roiio « Pronounce, aug'jprec^en. [men. Pronunciation, bie Slug'ibrac^te. Property, bag @i'genti)nm, bag 35er« mö'gen." Proportion, bag üSer^ält'niß. Prospect, bie 2iug'fi([)t. Pi'oud, [tolj. Proverb, bag Prudence, bie ÜSor'fícbtigfeií, bie Äiug'« Prudent, bor'[id;tig, ííug. Public, öf'fentiid;. Purpose, bie 2lb'ficbt, ber ; for the purpose of—, iim gu— ; for what purpose ? tnoju ? Purse, bag Portemonnaie', ber ©elb'» beutel, bie ißör'fe. Put, fe'^en, ftel'Ien, íe'ggn. Quick, ieben'big, ieb'^iaft, jc^neÏÏ. Quire, S3n(i^. Quite, jiem'iic^, ganj. Quotient, ber Ónotient'. Relation, bie ißejie't^nng ; relation to, in Sejng anf ; (a person related), ber SSerioanb'te. Religion, bie Sîeligion'. Rely (upon), fic^ berlaf fen (auf). Remain, blei'ben. Renowned, beriif)mt'. Rent, bie aJîie'tfie, bie ^ang'miet^c; v., mie't^en, bermie'tfien. Repair, refjari'ren, aug'beffern. Report, ber 33eri(i>t'. Republic, bie 9îebubii!'. Reside, ioof)'nen, ft(^ aufhalten, [ort. Residence, bie Sßo^'nung, ber Söobn'« Respect, bie ^in'fidftt, bie 9íü(í'fid;t', (regard), bie Síc^'tnng, Çoc^'a^^ tnng; to respect, eb'ren, acb'tcn. Rest, bie 9în'f)e, 9îaft; to rest, ftc^i aug'rn^en; the rest, bagUeb'rigc. VOCABÜLAEY. 489 Kestore, iDíeber^cr'fielIctt. Keturn, lüie'bertefireii, fóie'beríommen, gurüd'fommen, ^ge^en ; v. tr., ju> rüá'geben, jurücE'icbicíen. Ribbon, bas iöanb, baâ 0ei'bcnbonb. Rice, ber 9îeiê. Rieb (be), reicb (fein). Ride (on horseback), rei'tcn ; to take a ride, i^5a3te'ren rei'ten; in a carriage, fa^'ren ; take a ride, fpajie'ren fa^'ren. Sack, ber ©ad. Sad, trau'rig, trii'be, Betrübt'. Saddle, ber 0at'teí. Saddler, ber 0att'ler. [seín. Sail, ba§ 0e'gel ; v. intr, fe'geln, aB'fe» Salary, ber ©eíjaít', bie ¿eíol'bung. Sale, ber iBerfauf. Sait, ba6 0al3. Same, berfet'be, ber ttâm'ii^e. Sand, ber 0aub. Satin, ber ïïtt'Iaê. Saturday, ber 0Dnn'abenb, 0am8'tag. Sauce, bie 0auce. Saucer, bie Un'tertaffe, bie Uix'terfc^aie. Say, fa'gen. Scandinavian, 0failbina'bif^. School, bie 0c()u'le. Scholar, ber 0ct)ü'íer. School-house, baë 0d}ur^au6. School-master, ber 0c^urtneifîer, ber Sea, bas 3}îeer, bie 0ec. [0d;uÎ'Ie^rer. Sea-bath, baS 0ee'bab. Second, ber âifei'tc. [gebrauci^t'. Second-hand, auS ber jtüei'ten §anb, See, ie'ben. Seek, íu'cbeit, auf futren. Seize, grei'fcu, ergrei'fen, faf fen. Seldom, fel'teu. Self, felbft (see § 108). Sell, berfau'fcn. Send, fd;ici"en, feit'beu. September, ber 0ebtem'ber. River, ber ffiuß. Road, ber äßeg, bie 33a^n, bie ©tra'Çe. Roof, baS 2)ad;, bie Se'cfe. Room, baS ¿im'mer, bie 0tu'be, bie iîam'mer ; (space), ber Siaum. Rose, bie 9îo'fe. Ruin, bie 9iui'ne, bie Srüm'mer ; to go to ruin, berfarieu, in iBerfaít' gera'tben. Run, lan'feu. Rye, ber 9îog'gen. I, Servant, ber Sie'ner, bie Sie'nerin. Serve, bie'neit. Session, bie ©ilj'nng. [terge^en. Set, fe^'en, ftel'Ien ; (of the sun), nn'® Seven, fie bert ; seven years', adj., fie'» benjäbrig. Several, ntefi'rere, herfcbie'bene (pl.). Sew, nä'ben ; sewing-machine, bie iJiäb'rttafcbine. Shall, foi'Ien; (/mí.) mer'ben. Shatter, jerbrec^'en, jerfcbmet'tern. She, fie. [iBo'gen. Sheet, ba§ S3ett'tnd; ; (of paper), ber Shine, fcbei'nen, íendb'ten, glän'jen. Ship, baê 0(^iff. Shoe, ber ©djní;. Shoot, fd;ie'jien. Shore, baê U'fer, ber ©tranb. Short, tnrj. Should, fcl'Icrt. (inf.). Shoulder, tie ©cbrtl'ter. Show, jei'gen. Shut, fd;iie'ßen, jn'mac^ett. Sick, tranf. Side, bie ©ei'te. Sight, ba8 ®efid;t'; at sight, naá»0i¿bí Signify (mean), beben'ten. Silk, bie ©ei'be ; silken, fei'ben. Silver, bag ©il'ber. Similar, äbrt'lid/. Sin, bie ©ürt'be. Since, pre/)., feit; conj., feit'tem. 2 490 VOCABULARY. Sing, ftng'en. [bte ©¿^toä'gerin. Sister, bie 0c^ine'fter ; sister-in-law, Sit, fi^'en. Sky, ber §int'mei. Sleep, ber ©cblaf ; v., Sleeve, ber 2íer'mel. Slipper, ber ^antoffei. Slow(ly), lang'fam. Small, Hein. Smoke, ber 9îaud} ; v., rau'c^en ; smoking (noun), baS Sîau'c^en. Snake, bte 0d;íang'e. Snow, ber 0c^nee; v., fc^nei'en. So, so, auf bte'fe Söei'fe. Society, bie ©eielffc^aft. Sofa, ber (or baê) 0o'íJÍ)a (or 0o'fa). Soft, ir>ei(^. Soldier, ber 0oíbat'. Solve, lö'fen, auflöfen. Some, einige, et'lid)e, tncí'd^e; some bread, et'traS SSrob ; somebody, Se'maitb ; something, etttjaö. Sometimes, juinei'Ien, biShJei'Ien, bann unb tnann. Somewhat, adv., et'ttiaê, jietn'Iic^. Son, ber 0obn ; son-in-law, ber 0d)n)ie'geriof;n. Song, baë Sieb. Soon, balb. Soup, bie 0u^':|5e, bte Srit'^e. Sour, fan'er. South, ber 0üb, ber 0ii'ben. Sow, jä'en. Speak, ibre'c^en. Spear, ber 0^eer, bie San'je. Spin, ipin'nen. Spire, ber 2:i>urni, ber tird/t^urnt. Spring, ber 0^rung ; (of the year), ber grüíj'íing, ba§ grili)'ja^r. Spy, ber 0:bÍDit'. Stand, V. intr., fte'i)en v. ír.,fteríeit ; to stand by one, ei'nent bei'fte^en, et'nent I;eí'fen, ei'nen nnterftil'^en ; the standing by, bie §Ül'fe, Set'* ftanb. State (condition), bcr ßu'flanb ; (na¬ tion), ber 0taat. [Sa^n'^of. Station (railroad), bic 0tation', ber Steal, ftef/Ien. Steam, ber 2)am^f ; steamer, baS S)ant:bÍ'Wifí ; steam-boat, bag ®ambf'6oDt ; steam-engine, bic ©am^jfrnafc^ine. Steep, fteil. Steerage, ba§ Step, ber 0(^ritt, ber Sritt; v. intr., tre'ten, id^rei'ten. Step-father, ber 0tief'bater. Step-mother, bie 0tief'ntut'ter. Step-son, ber 0tief fo^n. Step-daughter, bie 0tief'toc^ter. Stick, ber 0to(î. Still, adj., [till, rn'iiig; adv., noc^, tm'nter, conj., bod?, jebo^)', ben'« Stone, ber ©tein. [noeb- Storm, ber 0tnrm, baS ©etoit'ter, baS Un'gehiitter ; stormy, ftür'mii'd^. Story (tale), bie ©efc^ic^'te; (of a house), ber ©tod, bag ©tod'merî, bas ©efc^oß'. Stove, ber O'fen. Street, bie ©tra'^c. Strike, fdjía'gen. Strong, ftarí, fräf tig. Student, ber ©tnbent'. Study, bas ©tn'binm, v. tr., jhtbi'ren. Suburb, bie SSor'ftabt. Sucb, jot'd?er. Sugar, ber 3itd'er. Sultry, fc^nJÜl. Summer, ber ©om'tner. Sun, bie ©on'ne. Sunday, ber ©onn'tag. Supper, baS Sl'benbeffen. Surgeon, ber SSunb'arjt. Surpass, übertreffen. Surrender, fid; erge'bcn. [îanb'meffer. Surveyor (of land), ber 3)îef fer, bCÏ Sweet, fü0. Swiss, ber ©c^irei'jer (see page 419). VOCABULARY. 491 Table, ter Xijct?, tie Xa'teí ; to set the table, ten bedt'eu. Tailor, ber Sdniei'ter. Take, ne^'men ; to take away, ireg^ nehmen ; to take with one, niit'== nebmen ; to take place, [tatt'fin« Talk, fpre'^en, re'ben. [ben. Tall, ¿¡roß, Tame, jabm. Taste, baêfo'ften, ©cbmecfcn; v.tr., io'ften, fcbmecf'en. Tea, bcr ïbee. Teach, leb'ven. Teacher, ber Seb'rer, bie Seb'retin. Tear, bie Tear, rei'ßen, jerrei'ßen. Tedious, laittj'ireilivj. Telegraph, bev Seleijrabb'. Telegraphic, teíegra'^Jbifáb Tell, fa'ßcn, erjäb'ien. [Un'getritter. Tempest, ber >2turm, baS Oeirit'ter, Tempestuous, jlür'mild;. Thaler, ber Sb^'í^'^* Than, aíá, benn. Thank, ber SanI; v., ban'fen. That, pron., ie'lter, bie'fer ; conj., ba^. The, ber, bie, baê. Then, adv., bann, alêbann', ba'malS; now and then, bann nnb inann ; conj., benn, baber', barum', al'fo. Theology, bie [tf^ fliebt. There, ba, bort, bafcíbft'; there is, e8 Thereby, baburd;', bamit'. [barnm'. Therefore, beâ'balb, beê'ïnegen, baber', Thin, bilnn. Thing, bie ®a'd)e, baS 3)ing. Think, bni'fen. Third, ber S)rit'tc. Thirst, ber 2)ur[t. This, bie'fer. Thou, bn. Thread, ber ^a'bctt. Threat, bie ©ro'bung. Threaten, bro'bcn. Three, brei. Thresh, bre'fdben. Thrice, orei'mai. Through, burcb« Throw, trer'fen. Thunder, ber S)on'ner; r., bon'nern. Thunder-storm, baô ©einií'ter. Thursday, ber Son'nerëtag. Thy, bein. Tie, bin'ben. Till, prep, and conj., bi§, bi6 gu, anf ; till now, bis je^t; till then, bia Till, V. tr., beban'en, g)fíü'gen. [babin. Time, bie 3iit- To, prep., JU ; {with inf.), um JU. Tobacco, ber Sa'baî. To-day, beute ; to-day's, adj., beu'tig. To-morrow, mor'gen. Too, gu, all'gu ; (also), aucb. Tooth, ber Toward, nad;, ge'gen. Towel, baS §aub'tu(^. Tower, ber Trade, ber §an'beí, 3Serfebr'(ber $an'í bei unb SBerîebr'). Train, ber 3w{5 baS Oefol'ge. Traitor, ber 35erra'tber. Translate, uberfe^'en. Travel, rci'i'eu, eine 9iei'fe ma'cben. Traveler, ber Sîei'jenbe. Traverse, bur^rei'fen. Tread, tre'ten, ge'ben, fd;rei'ten ; tread to pieces, gertre'ten. Treason, ber 5Berratb', bie iSerratberei'. Treaty, ber 3>ertrag', bie Uuterbanb'« Tree, ber SBauni. [íung. Trout, bie ^oreí'íe. Trip, bie &iei'ie, gabrt. True, mabr, trabr'baft, mabrbaf'tig; (faithful), treu ; yours truly, auf* rid^tig ber Truth, bie SSabr'beit, ïreu'c. 492 VOCABULARY. Try, toerfu'cf^en, ;t)rot)t'ren. Tulip, bie Twelve, jtDöIf. Twenty, jroan gig. Twice, gtnet'mai. Two, gwei. U. Ugly, bäß'ii^. Umbrella, ber 9îe'genfc^irm. Unanimous, cin'ftimmig. Unbound, un'gebunben. Uncle, ber D'^eim, On'feí. Under, un'tcr. Hen. Understand, berfte'^en, begrei'fen, faf'« Undertake, untcrneb'tnen. Unequal, un'glettb- "Unite, V. tr., berei'îtigeti. Universal, att'getnein. University, bie Uniberfität'- Unlike, un'übnitcb. Up, ^rey?., auf ; arfy., btuouf, berouf, embor', in ber §ö'bc, o'beu. Upon, auf, über. Usage, ber ©ebraucb', —ê, pL brau'(be, bie ©etbobn'beit. Use, ber ©ebraucb', ber Siu'^eu ; v. trans., brau'c^eu, gebrau'dbeu. Usual, getböbn'iicb, üb'íiíb, gebräucb'» lieb. V. Valiant, ta'bfer. Various, berfdjie'beu. Vase, bie 3>a'fe. Veil, ber 0(biei'er. Verb, bag ^^it'tbort, 35er'bunt. Very, febr, gar. Vest, bie ÏBe'fte, ^ací'e. Via, ü'ber. Village, bag 3)Drf. Vinegar, ber ©f'fig. Virtue, bie iîu'geub. Visit, ber Sefucb'; v. tr., befu'^ett. Voice, bie 0tim'me. [Um'faug. Volume, ber S3aub ; (compass), ber Vote, bie 0tint'nie ; v. tr., 0tim'men Voyage, bie 0ee'reife. [geben. W. "Wagon, ber SBa'gen. Waist, bie Sail'ie, ber Seib. Wait, ibar'teu. Walk, bag ©e'ben, ber @ang ; ber 0bagier'gaug ; v., ge'beu, fb^üie'- reu ; to take a walk, ffjagie'reu ge'beu. Wall (of a room), bie SBaub ; (of a city), bie SDiau'er, bie SGSal'Ie. War, ber Srieg. Warm, tbarm. Wash, Iba'f^eu; the washing (linen to be washed), bie SBä'f^e. Watch (guard), bie 20a'¿be; (time¬ piece), bie Ubr, Sia'fcbeuubr. Water, bag SBaf'fcr. Waterworks, bie SBaf'ferleituug. Wave, bie SSel'le. Way, ber 2Beg, bie SSabn ; by way We, tcir. [of, ü'ber. Weak, fcbtuad;. Wear, tra'geu, au'babeu. Weather, bag äßet'ter, bie Sßit'tcrung. Week, bie Sßo'cbe. [gen. Weigh, V. intr., tnie'gen ; v. tr., ira'* Weight, bag ©einicbt', bie 0¿btue're. Welcome, adj., VüiE'Íout'uieu ; noun, bag 2BiEtom'meu. Well, ber 23ruu'uen, bie Ouel'Ie. [gut. Well, adj., wobi, gcfunb'; adv., tnobl, VOCABULARY. 493 Wet, nafj, feucht. What? wa§? »eí'cí^er? Wheat, ber Söei'gen. When? mann? conj., al§, wenn. Where, tno. Whether, oO. Wliich ? trel'c^cr? rel.pron., »el'c^er, While, »äb'renb, tnbem'. [ber. Whistle, bfct'fcn. WLite, tneiß. Who? trev? Whole, ganj, hoïïîom'ntcit. Why? inarum'?tt>c^^aíb'? tceßwe'gen? Wide, breit. Wife, bie grau, S'íiefrau, ©at'tiu. Will, ber SBU'ie ; v., »ol'Ien, tniin's Willingly, gern. Win, geirin'nen. Wind, ber SSinb. Win-low, ba§ gen'fter. Wine, ber 23ein. Winter, ber 2Bin ter. Wise, inei'fe, Mug, »erjîân'big. Wish, ber SSunfc^ ; v. tr., tciin'^ciieu, trol'len. Yard, bte ^arb (eng'Ufi^e (Sl'Ie). Yarn, bag @aru. Ye, i^r. Year, bag 3abr. Yearly, jäbr'Iidb. Yellow, gelb. Yes, ja, jaUíobr With, mit. [neu, brin'nen. Within, 7>rej9., in'uerbalb ; adv., in'* Without, au'^erbalb, au'§en,brau'^en. Woman, bie grau, bag 23eib, bag grau'enjimmer. Wood, bag ; woods, ber SBalb^ bie SBarbuttg, ber gorft. Wool, bie SBol'lc ; woolen, mol'len. Word, bag SSort. Work, bie Slr'beit, bag SBerf; work done by hand, bie §anb'arbeit. Work (verb), ar'beiteu, mir'ten ; to work over, bear'beiteu, um'ar» beiten. World, bie SBelt, Sr'be. Worth (value), bie SBür'be, ber ißreig ; (merit), bag SBerbieuft'. Worth, adj., trertb. Worthy, tniir'big. [ben. Wound, bie SBun'be ; v. tr., berlrun'- Wreath, ber Äran3. Write, jdjrei'ben. Writing, bie 0cbrift. Wrong, un'red^t, falfd;, itn'mabr ; tc be wrong, Uu'recbt bii'beit. Yesterday, aify., ge'fteru. Yet, nicbt ; not yet, UD(b nicbt. Yonder, arfr., bcrt ; adj., je'uer. You, ibr (Sie). Young, jung. Your, ibr ; yours, ber Sb'Ûflf* Youth, bie èu'âenb. Addenda. adv., away, off, down. 21^'nen, v. tr. and intr., to forebode; eS a^'net mir, I have a foreboding. îin'Iac^eit, v. tr., to laugh at. Sln'maßen, v. refl., to assume. Siuf nehmen, v. tr., to take up. SSar'iu^, ad^., barefoot. SSegrü'ßen, to greet. [a name. S3et'Iegen, v. tr., to join to, to give as 2)ev ÜSetrug, —e§, imposture, decep¬ tion, deceit, fraud. áScbDÍ'íern, v. tr., to people, populate. Öetrirt^'fc^aften, v. tr., to manage or to carry on (an estate). £)er SBorb, —eê, board; an 53orb, on board. S)te SSraut, —,pl. ^räu'te, bride; bet Srautftaat, bridal array or dress. Ê^rift'Îtc^, adj.. Christian. (Sntrci'jjeit, to tear away. SrbÎaî'fen, v. intr., to die. [formance. 2)ie (Sriiil'Iung, —, fulfilment, per¬ ucho'gen {part, of bte'gen, to tend), adj., curved, arched. Oering', adj., small, trifling, inecnsid" erable. ©etroft', ac/;'., confident, courageous. §aften, v. intr., to cling. §in'ic^Ieic^en, v. intr., to glide or slip thither. 2ei/nen, v. intr., to lean. 2)er SJÍarít, —t^,pl. 2)íarí'íe. market. 2)ie i|3i)antafie', —, fancy. 9îi^'terlic^, arf;'., judicial. S)er 9îui;m, —eê, fame. 3)er ©trand;, —e§, pi ©träu'd^cr, bush, shrub. ©d;er'jen, v. intr., to sport, ©c^mad/ten, v. intr., to pine, ©c^o'^jfen, V. intr., to draw (water). Un'geftraft, adj., unpunished. Serge'^en, v. r., to offend, ©ft SSerlänm'ber, —§, slanderer. 2?on ie()er', from time immemorinl. SBaff'nen, v. tr., to arm. üBaí'Ien, v. intr., to move. Söan'beln, v. intr., to ramble. Sßci'ien, V. intr., to rest. INDEX 515, adf., § 181, 1. Separable Prefix, §151,1; Lesson XXXIV., 2. Abbreviations, page 420. SlÍJcr, distinguished from allein, fonbcrn, and »telmel)r, § 265. Accent, § 44-47 ; Less. II., 7. Accusative, use of, § 83. Verbs govern¬ ing, § 177. Prepositions with, § 237- 243; Less. VII., 1. Prepositions with Acc.andDat., §244-253; Less. X., 1. Adjectives, formation of, § 86; Lesson XXXVIII. Predicative, § 87; Less. XVIII.,1. Attributive,Less.XVIII., 3 ; § 89, Hem. 9 ; § 94. Old Declension of, § 88,1 ; § 89 ; Less. XVIII. New Declension, §88,2; Less. XX. Mixed Declension, §88, 3; Less. XXI. Com¬ parison of, § 90-92; Lesson XXII. Governing Gen., §95; Less. XXXIX., 2. Gov. Dat., § 96 ; Less. XXXIX., 4. Gov. Acc., § 97; Less. XXXIX., 6. Used as Noun, § 89, Mem. 10. Adverbs, formation of, § 181-188 ; Com¬ pound, § 188. Comparison of, § 190. Syntax, § 192-195; Less. L. Adjec¬ tives used as, § 184,1 ; Less. XIV., 5. Position of, §194,2; § 281. Adverbial Conjunctions, §193; §260; §280, 3. Numeral Adverbs § 105. mein, § 265. mer, §111. m, §111, 7. meä,§114, ^,Rem.; Less.XLIII. To strengthen superlatives, § 93, Mem. 3. 3U3, distinguished from inte, iDcnn, tóann, § 266. 5llâ bag, § 266, 1, Mem. 2. Sllïerbtngà, § 183,1, Mem. 4. Silfo, § 269, Mem. 4. Sim, contraction of an bcm, § 54, Mem. 2 ; Less. XI., 4. With Superlative, Less. XXII., 7. Sin, § 93 ; L. X., 1. Idioms with, p. 197. Slnber, § 112,1. For ber 3weite, §102, Mem. 5. Slnbertfalb, § 103, 2. Slnjlatt, composition, §196,3. Use of, § 209. With the Infinitive, § 129, 3, Mem. 1. Apposition, § 85; Less. XVI., 2; Less. XLII., 1, Mem 4. Arrangement of Words, § 276-284. Articles, derivation of, § 53. Declen¬ sion of, §54; Less. XV., and XVI. Syntax of, § 55 ; Le^s. XL. Slucb, §263,1,2. SBenn aucb, § 268,Äewi. 3. Sluf, § 246; Less. X., 1. Slufd, § 54, Mem. 2 ; with Superlative, § 190,2, 2. Idioms with, page 197. Sluâ, § 220. Idioms with, page 194. mper, § 221. Idioms with, page 194. m^erbem, § 263, i, 2. Auxiliary Verbs, § 185. Auxiliaries of Mode (see Potential Verbs). ®ar, Bufiax, § 86,2,1 ; Less.XXXVIII.,1. Sc=, Prefix, § 155,1 ; Less. XXXV., 1. Set, § 222. Sesor, § 263, 2. ®t6, §237; Less. VII., 1. Capital Letters, § 48; Less. XVIII., 6. Cardinal Numbers, § 99; Less. XVII. Cases, §59,3; § 80-85; Less. VII.-X. =(5en,§ 57,1,1; Less. XXXV. Collective Nouns, § 57,3,1 ; § 63,2. Comparison of Adjectives, § 90; Less. XXII. Comparison of Adverbs, § 190. Compound Words, formation of, § 50. Division of Syllables, § 43,8. Accent of, § 45. Compound Adjectives, § 86, 3; Less. XXXVIII., 8. Compound Adverbs, § 188. Compound Nouns, § 67 ; Less. XXXVI. 496 INDEX. Compound Verbs, § 149 j Less.XXXIV. and XXXV. Conditional Mood, § 125; Less. LI. Conjunction, § 259-274; Less. L. Correlative Pronouns, § 114,4. Corresponding Conjunctions, § 263,1, 2. S)fl, § 186 ; § 195. Compounded with Prepositions, § 188,10, Mem. 2. î)a§er, and barum, § 269 (see ba). £)amit (see bci). As a Conjunction, § 267. i:)amt, §186; 189,1. 2)at'um (see ba'^er). S)ai3 (see bcr). Used collectively, §115; § 114,4, Rem. £)a§, § 263, 2. me bap, § 266, 1, .Bern. 1. Siuf bap, § 267. Dative Case, § 82; Less. IX. Governed by Prepositions, § 82,1 ; § 220. By Verbs, § 82,3,2 ; §179; Less. XLVII. By Adjectives, § 82,3,1; § 96; Less. XXXXI., 4. Declension of the Article, § 54. Of Nouns, 71-79; Less. XV. Of Adjec¬ tives, § 88-89; Less. XVIII., XX., and XXI. Of Pronouns, § 107-114. Demonstrative Pronouns, § 111; Less. XLIII. 2)etm, § 274. ©cr, as Definite Article, § 54, 1. De¬ monstrative Pronoun, § 111, .Bern. 2. Relative Pronoun, § 114, 2. SJerjemge, § ill, 3 ; Less. XLIII., 2. Derivative Words, § 49, 2. Derivative Adjectives, § 86, 2; Lesson XXXVIII. Derivative Adverbs, § 187. Derivative Nouns, §57 ; Less. XXXVII. Derivative Prepositions, § 196, 2. Derivative Verbs, § 117, 2. ©crfelk,- § 111, 4; Less. XLIII., 3. 2)eM)ai&, beêwegen, § 269. £)tefer, § 111 ; Less. XV. StcfcÖ, Less. XLIII., 4. ®teôyett, bieöfeit^, § 202. Dimidiative Numerals, §103, 2. Diminutive Nouns, §57, 1,1; Lesson XXXVII., 3. Diphthongs, § 33, 2; § 36; §38,10-12. Distributive Numerals, §103,1. Î)U, § 107, M^m. 4; Less. XI., 2, 2. § 238 ; Less. X. 2)iirfen,§ 118,3 ; § 171 ; Less.XXXIII.,3. =e, =et (=retj, Suffixes, § 57, 2,1-2. Sin, as Indefinite Article, § 54, 2 ; Less. XVI. As Numeral, § 100. As Prefix to Verbs, § 151,1. (Etnanber, § 112,1; § 108, Mem. 1. (Einiger, § 112,2. (Emp= and ent=, prefixes to Verbs, § 155, 2; Less. XXXV., 1. sen, Adjective Suffix, § 86, 2, 2; Lesson XXXVIII., 1, 2. =enb, Participial Ending, § 130; § 141, Mem. 2. Sntgegen, § 224, § 255, Exc. 2. Sr, Pronoun, § 107. Verbal Prefix, § 155,3. Nominal Suffix, § 57, 1,3; Less. XXXVIII., 2,1. § 107, Mem. 5. et»a(3, § 112, 8 ; § 114, 4, Mem. Etymology, §48; §18-19; §27-30. gaU^, § 271. Feminine Nouns, § 62; § 65. Foreign AVords, § 19. Accent of, §46. Gender of Foreign Nouns, § 68. De¬ clension of, § 77. Foreign Verbs, § Sur, § 293. 139, 3. ®anj, § 102, 2, Mem. 3. (ye=, prefix of compound Verbs, §155,4. Prefix of Participles, § 131, Rem. 1. Prefix to Nouns, § 57, 3,1 ; § 66, 2. ®egen, § 240. ©egeniikr, § 225; Exc.2. Gender of Nouns, § 60-70. Genitive, § 80-81. Prepositions govern¬ ing, § 202-219. Verbs governing, § 178; Less. XLVI. Adjectives gov¬ erning, § 95 ; Less. XXXIX., 2. Ad¬ verbs from Genitive, § 183,2; §184,,2. ®enug, §113,5. .giabcn, § 135-136. = kit, Suffix, § 86,2,3 ; Less.XXXVIII., 1,3. $alb, adj., § 104, 2, 2. .^alb (kl» ben, ki^cr)' Prep-, § 203. 4eit, Suffix, § 57,2,3 ; Less. XXXVIII., 4,2. INDEX. 497 ^ers, § 186. Prefix to Verbs § 151,1. •^evetn, ^erauá, etc., § 188, 8. •&tcr, § 186. .i)ierbei, hiermit, etc., § 188,10, Bern. 1. í)kriá, § 86, 2; Less. XXXVIII., 1, 4. |)in, § 186. Prefix to Verbs, § 151,1. Rillten, § 189,2. .g>tnter, § 247. pod), § 89, .Sem. 13; § 92; § 93, Bern. 4. .Id*, § 107 ; Less. XI., 1. 3;nmer, § 188,11. imperative, § 126 ; Less. LI. Imperfect, § 133. impersonal Verbs, § 160. Governing the Dative, § 179, 2, Bern. 3. 3n, Preposition, § 248; Less. X. =irt (,:tnn\ Suffix, § 57, 1, 4; Lesson XXXVII., 2, 2. 3nbem, § 274, Bern. 8. Indefinite Pronouns, § 112; Less.XLII. Indicative Mood, § 123. InfinitiveMood,§ 127-128 ; Less.XXIX. Snncrbdb, § 204. Stt^bcfonbere, ináfünftige, etc., § 188,12. Interjections, § 275. Interrogative Pronouns, § 113; Less. XLII, Srgenb, s 188,11. Irregular Verbs, § 116, 4; § 142-148; Less. XXIV.-XXVII. 4fc^, Suffix, § 86,8,5 ; Less. XXXVIII., 3a, § 181, 2. 1,5. 3e/ § 261, Bern. Sebcr, 111; Less. XX. Sebcvmann, § 112,7. 3cmanb, § 112,7. 3cncr, § 111, Less. XX. Äctti, §112. 4ctt, Suffix, § 58, 2,3 ; § 65,3 ; § 75,1,2 ; Less. XXXVII., 4, 2. üönncn (see Potential Verbs), § 167-168 ; Less. XXXI. !i?aflcn, § 118, 3,i2em.; § 128,1; § 131, Bern. 2. Idioms with, page 193. -lei (einerlei, etc.), § 103,3. 4ein,Suffi.x,§57,l,l; §66,1; §74,1,2; Less. XXXVII., 3. Letters of Union (1), 4, =et, § 107, Bern. 2; (2), «0, § 203, .Sem. 4. siente, Plural Ending; Less. XLVII., 2, Bern. 2. 4id), Suffix, § 86,2,6; Less. XXXVIII., 1,6; §187,3. =mal (einmal, etc.), 105,1. ïlîan, § 112, 6; § 134,1; Less. XLII.,1, Bern. 3. ülíancber, § 112, 2, .Sem. 3; Less. XX. ; § 89, Bern. 2. îWe^r, § 98. SWe^rere, § 102, 2. 51îein, § 107, Bern. 1; § 109; Less. XIX. Îîlîit, § 227 ; Less. IX. Idioms with, page 195. SKittel, mittel|1, § 208. Mixed Declension of Nouns, § 72, 3; § 76; Less. XV. Of Adjectives, §88,3; Less. XXI. iWogen (see Potential Verbs), § 169-170; Less. XXXII. Moods, § 122-128. 2)íü[fen (see Potential Verbs), 173-174; Less. XXXI. Sîacb, §228; Less. IX. Siämlii^, 111, 4, Bern. Îîeben, § 249, 5îebfl, § 230. Sîein, §188,11. Sîiibté, § 112, 9 ; § 89, Bern. 2. Sîie, §188,11. Síiemanb, §112,7. =ni§. Suffix, § 57, 2, 4; § 74, 3,1. Nouns, § 56. Numbers, §59,1; §74; §79; Less.XV,, 2; §115, 3,Äem. 2. Numerals, §98-105; Less.XVII.; Less. XXIII. 5iur, § 263, 1, 2. Obgleitb, obid)on, obmo'^I, § 268. Oiinc, § 241; Less. VII. With Infini» tive, § 128, 3, Bern. 1. Ordinal Numbers, § 102; Less. XXIII. Participles, § 129-131; Less. XXX. Passive Voice, § 134; § 161; 178, 2, Bern. 3; § 179, 2, Bern. 1; Lesson XLVIII. Perfect Tense, § 133; Less. VI. Personal Pronouns, § 107-108; Less. XI. ; § 115, 3, Bern. 2. Replaced by Article, § 55,1, Bern. 1. Pluperfect Tense, Less. VI. 498 INDEX. Plural, § 59,15 §74} §79. Possessive Pronouns, §109-110; Less. XIX. Predicate of a Sentence, § 277. Predicate Adjectives, § 87; Lo.sson XVIII.; Superlative used predica- tively, § 93, Item. 2. Prefixes of Nouns, §57 ; Less.XXXVII., 6; §58,1; Lesson XXXVI. Prefixes of Verbs, § 149-157; Lesson XXXIV., Lesson XXXV. Prepositions, § 196-258 ; Less. VIII.- X.; Less. XLIX. ; Prepositions con¬ tracted -with the Article, § 54; Less. XI. Idioms with Prepositions, page 194. Primitive Words, § 49. Pronouns, § 106-115. Personal Pro¬ nouns, Less. XI. Personal and Pos¬ sessive Pronouns, Lesson XLI. De¬ monstrative and Relative Pronouns, Less. XLIII. Indefinite and Inter¬ rogative Pronouns, Lesson XLII. Proper Nouns (declension of), §78. Reciprocal Pronouns, § 108. Pi-eflexive Pronouns, § 108. Reflexive Verbs, § 158; Lesson XLIII. Relative Pronouns, § 114 ; Less. XLIII. rfal, (Suffixes), § 57, 2; Lesson XXXVII. sfain (Suffix), §26, 2; Less. XXXVIII. ©etil, ase of, as Auxiliary, § 135 ; Less. XXVIII. Conjugation of, §137. ©etil, Possessive Pronoun, § 109. ©elbjl, felber, § 108, Rem. 2. Sentence, order of words in, § 276-284. Singular, Nouns without, § 79, 3. ©olcber, § 111. ©oHen, §118; §163-164; Less.XXXIII. Subject, position of, § 278; § 282. Subjunctive Mood, §124; Lesson LI. Suffixes of Nouns, §57; of Adjectives, §86. Syntax of Article, §55; of Noun, §80; of Adjective, §94-95; of Pronoun, § 115; of Verb, § 175-180; ofAdverb, § 192-195. Tenses, § 132-133; Lesson XII. 4^um, Suffix, §57, 2. Ueber, § 250. Urn, § 242 ; urn JU, § 264. Umlaut, § 33, § 38 ; Lesson II. =ung, Suffix, § 57,2. Unter, § 251. Variativo Numerals, § 103,3. Verbs, classification of, § 116-126, Con¬ jugation of, § 121-134. Auxiliary Verbs, § 135-138; Lesson XXVII/ Regular Verbs, § 139-141 ; Less. IV., Vl.andXII. Irregular Verbs, § 142- 148; Lesson XXIV.-XXVII. Com¬ pound Verbs, § 149-157; Lesson XXXIV-XXXV. Reflexive Verbs, § 158-159; Lesson XLI. and XLIV. Impersonal Verbs, § 160. Potential Verbs, § 116, 3 ; § 131, Rem. 2 ; § 162- 174; Less.XXXI.-XXXIII. Syntax of the Verb, § 175-lSO. aSiel, §112; §92. a3on, § 234. Idioms with bon, page 194. »or, § 252. Vowels, § 33-39; Lesson I. and II. SBann, § 189,1 ; § 266, 3. aBarum, § 113, 1, Rem. 2, 2 ; § 188,10, Rem. 3. aBaô, § 113-114; traö für, § 113,3. aBegen, § 217 ; § 107, Rem. 2. SBelc^er, § 113-114. aBenig, § 112. aBenn, § 266,2. aScr, § 113-114. aBerben, § 135 ; §138; Lesson XII. aBie, § 266, 2. aBo, § 272; in Compounds, § 188,11, Rem. 3. aBoIlen, § 166-167 ; Lesson XXXII. 3u, § 235; with Infinitive, §128; Less XXIX. COMFORT'S GERMAN SERIES By GEORGE F. COMFORT, A.M., PROFESSOR OF MODERN LANGUAGES AND ^ESTHETICS, SYRACUSE UNIVERSITY, NEW YORK ; LATE PROFESSOR OF MODERN LANGUAGES, ALLEGHANY COLLEGE, PA. A GERMAN PRIMER : Introductory to " The Ger¬ man Series." lamo, Half Leather, 44 cents. A FIRST BOOK IN GERMAN: to Precede the "German Course." lamo. Half Leather, 60 cents. A FIRST GERMAN READER: to Succeed the " First Book in German." i2mo. Cloth, 50 cents. A GERMAN COURSE, Adapted for Use in Colleges, Academies, and High-Schools. 12mo. Half Leather. $I GO. A TEACHER'S COMPANION to the German Course. i2mo. Cloth, 50 cents. A GERMAN READER, with Notes and a Vocabulary. 12mo. Half Leather, $i 00. A MANUAL OF GERMAN CONVERSATION. i2mo. Half Leather, 84 cents. HARPER BR02HERS, Publishers, New York. COMFORT'S GERMAN SERIES. In preparing this German Series, it has been the aim of the author to incorporate the most advanced views and principles of linguistic instruction, as held by the best writers upon philology, and the best practical educators in Europe and America. Especial preference has been given to those features of approved works for the study of modern languages which, in Europe more especially, have stood the test of practical use. A few other features, also, have been intro¬ duced which have been adopted with eminent success by the most able professors of modern language in their personal instruction, but which have not heretofore found their way into text-books. Care has been taken to give due relative prominence to each of these tried and approved principles, and to mould them into a ho¬ mogeneous system, adapted to the wants of those schools in Amer¬ ica in which the German language is taught. On the one hand, the aim has been to incorporate as m'lch in¬ formation concerning the grammatical structure, the historical de¬ velopment, the linguistic relations, and the literary character of the German language as is possible within the period that is usually de¬ voted to this study ; and, on the other, to initiate the student into the most practical method of learning to read, to WTite, and to speak the German language. The Series includes the following works : FIRST BOOK IN GERMAN: for younger pupils in Grammar Schools, Academies, and Seminaries. The treatment is eminently practical ; the words and sentences are such as occur in familiar conversation ; the grammatical rules are stated in simple and terse language, and are illustrated by a large number of examples ; and the Lessons are followed by a collection of Familiar Conversations, which will aid the pupil to express himself on subjects that come naturally within the range of the juvenile mind. Although intended primarily for young classes, it may be used with advantage as an in¬ troductory book to the " German Course " by those of a more ad¬ vanced age. FIRST GERMAN READER: for the use of pupils who have studied the " First Book in German." The selections, which are from the best and most popular writings in the charming juvenile literature of Germany, consist mostly of anecdotes, fables, tales, and pieces of didactic poetry. The style is clear, simple, and elevated. The sentences are short, and the words employed are those which are most familiarly used in the conversation of daily life. Abundant notes are given for the explanation of the text. GERMA jV course : for beginners in the study of the German language of a more advanced age than those for whom the " First Book in German " is adapted ; or for those who are already familiar with that book. It consists of four parts : Part I. Practical Lessons for learning to read, write, and speak the German language. Part II. Familiar Conversations in German and English, idioms and Comfort^s German Serie^. 3 synonyms, models of letters, forms of business, and selections from German literature. Part III. A compend of German Grammar, with an introduction on the history, characteristics, and dialects of the language. Part IV. Tables of German moneys, weights, and measures, abbreviations, personal and geographical proper names, and German-English and English-German vocabularies. The book is eminently philosophic in scope and practical in style, and is well adapted to the wants of classes in our colleges, academies, and high- schools. TEACHER'S COMPANION to the German Course: for the use of comparatively inexperienced teachers, containing suggestions with reference to methods of instruction in living language, and espe¬ cially with reference to the use of the "German Course." It con¬ tains a key to the exercises in the lessons of Part I., with philological, historical, geographical, and explanatory notes ; a key and notes to Part II. ; and notes to Parts III. and IV. The teacher will find it invaluable. GERMAN READER: to follow the "German Course." The selections are made from the best German writers, mostly of the present century ; and, that the student may feel as definitely as pos¬ sible the spirit of the language, they have reference to Germany and illustrate German history, biography, geography, mythology, and so¬ cial life and customs. Abundant notes are added, which contain elucidations of the more difficult constructions and explanations of many of the historical events and social customs which are alluded to in the text. Copious references to the " German Course " are in¬ terspersed. A vocabulary of all the words that occur in the text of the Reader, and full indexes of authors and subjects are given also. MANUAL OF GERMAN CONVERSATION: to be used alternately with the Reader. The conversations are on the most familiar subjects of daily life : selections from the " Illustrated Cat¬ echisms of the Arts and Sciences an extensive collection of idi¬ oms ; items from newspapers ; advertisements ; an extensive col¬ lection of classified words, phrases, and expressions, referring to va¬ rious departments of science, art, politics, religion, trade, manufac¬ tures, and daily life (with lists of adjectives, regular verbs, homonyms, and compound words) ; and a number of pages of German current hand. The volume contains also frequent grammatical references to the " German Course." Oommendatory Testimonials, Notices, &c. The following are a few of the commendations of the German Series received from prominent educational sources : From E. R. VmqG'L'E.?,, Professor of Modern Languages in Dartmouth College^ Hancraer, N. H. We have adopted the Grammar (German Course), and it is now in the hands of about a hundred of our students. It is in my judg¬ ment, on the whole, the best German Grammar published in this country. From J. 11. Brenneman, Principal of High-School^ Chillicothe, O. It is the èesi German Grammar in print 4 Comfort^s German Series. Front C. P. Wilcox, Professor of Modern Languages in the Georgia State University, Athens. It is a somewhat invidious task to substitute new class-books for those already in use. The fact that I have done so in this instance is a proof of the value I set upon Prof. Comfort's " Course." I was so struck with its peculiar adaptedness to the wants of our Ameri¬ can students that I determined to introduce it into my classes. From B. W. Dwight, Ph.D., Vice-President Americatt Philological Association. Having taught German for twenty-five years, I have used every one of the manuals of instruction in that noble language, and have found ¿hem each marked with decided faults—some in being too minute, complicated, and voluminous, and others in being quite too general and vague. Prof. Comfort's "Course" is happily free from these faults, and is scholarly, practical, and well adapted to the real wants of those who wish to learn the German language rapidly and well. From Prof. F. L. O. fortnerly Director of the Polyglot Bu¬ reau, N'ew York, and now Professor in Cornell University. After a careful examination of Prof. Comfort's work, I hasten to express to you my high appreciation of its merits. This being the first German Grammar in the English language that stands on the solid foundation of true and scientific philology, its appearance ought to be hailed with delight by every fair critic. The Germans can now be proud of having our beloved mother tongue presented to the American public in a worthy form. The introductory lessons are remarkable for the lucid and prac¬ tical manner in which the elements of the language are there un¬ folded. The idiomatic accuracy of the German exercises Is one of the most striking features of this excellent work. From G. F. Behringer, Assistant Professor of German, Cornell Uni¬ versity. We propose introducing Comfort's " German Course " into all our classes next trimester, numbering one hundred and fifty students. From Rev. William Nast, D.D., Editor ofDer Christliche Apolo' get,''' and Presidettt of German Wallace College, Berea, Ohio. The study of the German language is finding its proper place in the regular course oi schools of every grade. Among the text-books which have lately been published to facilitate the study of this im¬ portant and somewhat difficult language, Prof. Comfort's " German Course " takes a high rank. The chief requisite for a practical Grammar of a living language is fully met by Prof. Comfort. The scholar is not needlessly bur¬ dened with theory, but is taught, by well-chosen exercises and ex¬ amples, at the very start, to make practical efforts himself. ^rom Prof. Oscar Howes, A.M., of Shurtleff College, Upper Alton, III. I am much pleased with Comfort's " German Course," and think I shall like it better than any other. From Mrs. A. C. Knight, Wilbraham, A/ass. I have used the " German Course " two terms, and am well pleased tvith iL I prefer it to any Grammar I have yet used. Comfort^s German Series. 5 From Prot friedrich Stengel, School of Mines, Columbia College, New York. Prof. Comfort's " German Course " rises above the common mech¬ anism of modern text-books. This method is well calculated to introduce the pupil gradually to the difficulties of the language ; and the clear and logical mode of arrangement contributes to facilitate study to such a degree that, if the instructor follows the practical hints given in the " Teacher's Companion to the German Course," the pupil, with a little perse¬ verance, will soon be able to read our German authors, and write and speak with propriety. ^07n Miss Rachel Redford, Principal àf Semittary, Barking Ridge, N J. I have no hesitancy in saying that Comfort's " First Book in Gei- man " is the best on its subject that I have ever examined. From Prof. T. B. Threlkeld, Salem College, Ky. I regard Comfort's " German Course " a very superior work. It renders easy the study of the German language. From Prof. L. G. Marshall, Harrison Academy, Cynthia7ta, Ky. It seems to me certainly the most scholarly production on the subject in our country, and last, if not least, it is the most beautifully printed. From Prof. J. C. Van Benschoten, Wesleywt U7iiversity, Middle- tOW7l, C07t7t. I have found Prof. Comfort's " German Course " the best text¬ book in the German language I have ever used. From Gen. Franz Sigel. I have with some care perused the new English-German Gram¬ mar of Prof. Comfort, and I think it my duty to write these few lines as an appreciation of the method applied in the book. Such a Gram¬ mar and compendium is an excellent addition to what we possess in this line of literature, and undoubtedly will find its way into our En¬ glish and German-American schools where the German language iias been made a branch of study. It is " short, sharp, and decisive," and gives high proof of the thorough and comprehensive mind of its author. From Dr. H. VoN HoLST, New York. It gives me satisfaction to state, after a pretty careful examination of Prof. G. F. Comfort's " German Course," that I think the book may conscientiously be recommended to every teacher. It will be found practical as well as reliable. From Dr. J. B. Fehling, Professor of Compai-ative Philology, Utti- versity of lVisco7tsÍ7t, Madison. I consider Prof. Comfort's *' German Course " a very good bookj 5,nd I will introduce it here at the next change of our text-books. From F. Christianer, County Supermte7tde7tt, AbUtgdon, Knox Co., III. After a due examination, I conclude the " Course " is easy, progress¬ ive, and comp7-ehe7tsible, and just the thing for our American siudents. Being a German by birth and education, I fully appreciate the work, snd Bhall with pleasure recommend it to our public institutic^îa, 6 Comfort's German Series. From Eugene Von Nordhausen, A.M., LL.B., late Professor of Modern Languages, New York. It was with great pleasure that I perused carefully a " German Course" published by Harper & Brothers. Without criticising the former works on the subject, I must acknowledge the great superior¬ ity of this in the mode of introducing this difficult language to stu¬ dents. I have no doubt that an ordinary good scholar may, alone, with the help of this book, learn enough of the German language to en¬ able him to enjoy its beauties. From Prof. Joseph E. King, Principal of Fort Edward Institute,N. Y. Comfort's " German*Course " has more than realized our expect¬ ations. Front J. I I. Ford, Principal of School, feannerette, Parish Iberia, La. It is a " Course " prepared with remarkable care ; the rules are con¬ cise and lucid. I have decided to use it in my future classes. Frotn Dr. George W. Erdmann, Teacher of German in New York. My first judgment has not only been fully justified, but I have found it answerable and useful far beyond my expectations. I shall use Comfort's "German Course" exclusively hereafter. From J. C. Brodfuehrer, Professor of Languages, College Hill, O. Of the many text-books with which I am acquainted, I consider Comfort's the best for clearness of statement and arrangement The best recommendation of the work is that it has bravely stood the test of the school-room and class examination. I wish every instructor of German could see this book to compare it with others and judge for himself. From Prof. A. F. Berhdolt, Mercersburg College, Franklin Co., Pa. The work commends itself to all students of German. Teachers of German have long felt the want of a Grammar embodying, as this does, at the same time, the grammatical forms and the history and development of such forms. The tables of the Comparison of Words in the Indo-European Languages are of incalculable benefit to the student. From Rev. N. E. Co'bi.'EIG'H., Presidetit of Eastern Tennessee Wesleyan University, Athens. I like the " German Course " better for a text-book than any other s>i the many it has been my privilege to examine. For method, com¬ pleteness, and critical accuracy I consider it superior to any other in this country. From Prof. J. B. Garritt, Hanover College, Ind. I have already carefully gone over the first part of the " German Course," and am so much pleased with it that I have decided to use it the next year with my class. Frotn Prof. Louis Kistler, Northwesterti University, Evanston, III. I can conscientiously recommend it as a most suitable introduc¬ tion into the livitig, spoketi speech of the German people, while it furnishes, at the same time, the essential principles necessary to lead to an understanding of the rich literature of Germany. The " Course " will supply, in this regard, a long-felt want Comfort German Series. 7 From Prof. T. W. Tobev, Paducak, Ky. The complete "German Course," by G. F. Comfort, A.M., is a valuable work. It only needs the trial of the school-room to be highly appreciated by teachers of the German language. From Dr. Wm. C. Grossman, Coyner''s Springs Female Institute, Va. It is indeed an excellent work, and one we have been long in want of. With such a book in hand, it is truly a delight to study and to teach the German language. From Albert Jennings, Principal of Union School, Lawton, Mich. The more I use Comfort's " Course," the more I like it. From Prof. John Rosenberg, Soule University, ChappellHill, Texas. After a thorough and candid study of Comfort's " Course," the lucid treatment of his subject, the harmonious combination of theory and practice, with the short though comprehensive history of the language, have induced me to recommend the " Course " for adop¬ tion as a text-book of the University. From James T. Smith, IVadesboro, N. C. Knowing, as we do, that you depend entirely on the merits of this book to secure popularity, we must congratulate you as the publish¬ ers of this truly excellent work. * * * There is one subject on which we all agree, viz., that the third part of Comfort's " Course " is the most systematic, scientific, and truly philosophical treatise on the language in the English language. From Rev. J. C. Pershing, D.D., President of Pittsburg Female College. It affords me pleasure to say that, at the suggestion of our excel¬ lent teacher of German, your " German Course " was adopted as one of our text-books at the commencement of the present collegiate year. From Rev. James Gilmour, Principal of Falley Seminary, Fulton, New York. Your " German Course," by G. F. Comfort, has been examined by our German Professor. He pronounces it " admirable," and will in¬ troduce it to the next class. From Prof. Henry Oldenhage, Galena, III. We find Comfort's books satisfactory. They stand the test in the recitation-room. From John P. Lacroix, Ohio IVesleyan University, Delaware, O. I have taken a class of thirty-eight through Comfort's " German Course," and I have no hesitation in placing it far above any similar work which I have examined, both in respect to clearness of state¬ ment and scientific arrangement, and to adaptation to a rapid acquir¬ ing of a practical mastery of this richest of all languages. From Rev. Alexander Burns, Simpson Centenary College, Indianola, Iowa. I introduced your " German Course " at the beginning of the pres¬ ent collegiate year, and have been using it ever since. I am highly delighted with it. 8 Cotnfori's German Series. From Prof. O. Howes, A.M., Shurtleff'College, Upper Alton, III. I regard Comfort's "German Reader" as an excellent book, thor¬ oughly edited and beautifully published. The selections are good, well arranged, and unusually varied in their character, and, as should be the case in an elementary reader, they are mostly in prose. From John P. Lacroix, Ohio Wesleyan University, Delaware, O. The " Reader " consists of excellent selections from the best mod¬ ern authors, and is a worthy and essential sequel to the " Grammar." From Prof. La Theo. Jobe, St. Johns College, Little Rock, Ark. Comfort's " German Reader " I have examined with great pleas¬ ure. The judicious selection in its compilation, and its typograph¬ ical elegance and correctness, highly recommend its introduction into schools and colleges. From Prof. Ernst Moench, Bethlehem, Pa. Comfort's " German Reader " is, in my opinion, a most excellent work. From Prof. A. B. Hyde, Alleghany College, Meadville, Pa. I find Prof. Comfort's " German Reader " fully worthy of his rep¬ utation, and his industry, taste, and learning combine to make it a most excellent book. From C. H. isham, New York City. Comfort's "German Reader" is first-rate—just what I wanted. From the " College Courant," New Haven, Conn. The " German Course " is adapted to all tastes. We have here the old style of theoretical grammar, and also the new practical methods that have been devised for teaching language. * * * The treatment is, in general, full enough for all practical purposes. The rules are clear, concise, well expressed, and at the same time com¬ prehensive of the whole principle. There is no useless verbiage. From the "N V. TribuneP The great merit of Prof. Comfort as a teacher of languages, in the present as well as in his former works, consists in his remarkable power of adaptation. He evinces a rare sympathy with the intel¬ lectual wants of the pupil, and usually furnishes him with a key to the actual difficulties of the case, instead of increasing his perplexities by abstruse theories which belong to an advanced stage of progress. From the " Pittsburg (Pa.) Gazette." We find the work clearly indicates an. advanced position in the study of German, and is excellently arranged for acquiring a thor¬ ough knowledge of the language. Prof. Comfort has incorporated the methods and principles of the best and most thorough educators in Europe and America, and the principles and features of the best minds are here moulded into a system admirably adapted to the wants of the different grades of institutions of learning. * * * The work is well suited for colleges and other schools, and is worthy to be introduced every where. For Terms, àpc., address HARPER & BROTHERS, Franklin Square, New York.